From f62eaeb1a5add34ee7353d0d95db3c84a5c71c22 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jelmer Vernooij Date: Wed, 13 Aug 2003 06:07:10 +0000 Subject: regenerate (This used to be commit 75a8a906e8031b50e6583f2e0354073a8aa7f5f3) --- docs/htmldocs/AccessControls.html | 641 +++++ docs/htmldocs/AdvancedNetworkManagement.html | 224 ++ docs/htmldocs/Appendixes.html | 3 + docs/htmldocs/Backup.html | 11 + docs/htmldocs/CUPS-printing.html | 3225 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ docs/htmldocs/ClientConfig.html | 4 + docs/htmldocs/DNSDHCP.html | 4 + docs/htmldocs/Further-Resources.html | 100 + docs/htmldocs/InterdomainTrusts.html | 223 ++ docs/htmldocs/NT4Migration.html | 178 ++ docs/htmldocs/NetworkBrowsing.html | 907 ++++++++ docs/htmldocs/Other-Clients.html | 172 ++ docs/htmldocs/PolicyMgmt.html | 267 +++ docs/htmldocs/Portability.html | 128 + docs/htmldocs/ProfileMgmt.html | 652 ++++++ docs/htmldocs/SWAT.html | 199 ++ docs/htmldocs/SambaHA.html | 5 - docs/htmldocs/ServerType.html | 184 +- docs/htmldocs/StandAloneServer.html | 144 -- docs/htmldocs/VFS.html | 106 - docs/htmldocs/bugreport.html | 120 - docs/htmldocs/compiling.html | 202 -- docs/htmldocs/diagnosis.html | 303 --- docs/htmldocs/domain-member.html | 532 ----- docs/htmldocs/groupmapping.html | 179 -- docs/htmldocs/index.html | 77 - docs/htmldocs/install.html | 129 +- docs/htmldocs/integrate-ms-networks.html | 428 ---- docs/htmldocs/introduction.html | 8 +- docs/htmldocs/ix01.html | 2 - docs/htmldocs/locking.html | 657 ------ docs/htmldocs/migration.html | 2 - docs/htmldocs/msdfs.html | 63 - docs/htmldocs/net.8.html | 949 +++++++- docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html | 381 ++- docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html | 321 ++- docs/htmldocs/ntlm_auth.1.html | 8 +- docs/htmldocs/optional.html | 27 - docs/htmldocs/pam.html | 523 ----- docs/htmldocs/passdb.html | 813 ------- docs/htmldocs/pdbedit.8.html | 20 +- docs/htmldocs/pr01.html | 5 + docs/htmldocs/pr02.html | 1 + docs/htmldocs/printing.html | 2241 ------------------ docs/htmldocs/problems.html | 130 -- docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html | 611 ++++- docs/htmldocs/samba-bdc.html | 260 --- docs/htmldocs/samba-doc.html | 72 + docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc.html | 551 ----- docs/htmldocs/samba.7.html | 374 ++- docs/htmldocs/securing-samba.html | 207 -- docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html | 359 +-- docs/htmldocs/smbcacls.1.html | 8 +- docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html | 16 +- docs/htmldocs/smbcontrol.1.html | 314 ++- docs/htmldocs/smbcquotas.1.html | 8 +- docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html | 424 +++- docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html | 141 +- docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html | 326 ++- docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html | 181 +- docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html | 7 +- docs/htmldocs/smbsh.1.html | 22 +- docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html | 204 +- docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html | 255 +- docs/htmldocs/smbtree.1.html | 8 +- docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html | 81 +- docs/htmldocs/speed.html | 141 -- docs/htmldocs/swat.8.html | 308 ++- docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html | 214 +- docs/htmldocs/troubleshooting.html | 2 - docs/htmldocs/type.html | 10 - docs/htmldocs/unicode.html | 75 - docs/htmldocs/upgrading-to-3.0.html | 20 - docs/htmldocs/vfstest.1.html | 8 +- docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html | 89 +- docs/htmldocs/winbind.html | 733 ------ docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html | 50 +- docs/manpages/net.8 | 6 +- docs/manpages/nmbd.8 | 14 +- docs/manpages/nmblookup.1 | 8 +- docs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1 | 4 +- docs/manpages/pdbedit.8 | 8 +- docs/manpages/rpcclient.1 | 8 +- docs/manpages/smb.conf.5 | 463 ++-- docs/manpages/smbcacls.1 | 4 +- docs/manpages/smbclient.1 | 8 +- docs/manpages/smbcontrol.1 | 2 +- docs/manpages/smbcquotas.1 | 4 +- docs/manpages/smbd.8 | 12 +- docs/manpages/smbpasswd.8 | 2 +- docs/manpages/smbsh.1 | 8 +- docs/manpages/smbstatus.1 | 4 +- docs/manpages/smbtree.1 | 4 +- docs/manpages/swat.8 | 4 +- docs/manpages/vfstest.1 | 4 +- docs/manpages/wbinfo.1 | 96 +- docs/manpages/winbindd.8 | 12 +- 97 files changed, 12154 insertions(+), 10098 deletions(-) create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/AccessControls.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/AdvancedNetworkManagement.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/Appendixes.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/Backup.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/CUPS-printing.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/ClientConfig.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/DNSDHCP.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/Further-Resources.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/InterdomainTrusts.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/NT4Migration.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/NetworkBrowsing.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/Other-Clients.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/PolicyMgmt.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/Portability.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/ProfileMgmt.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/SWAT.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/SambaHA.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/StandAloneServer.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/VFS.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/bugreport.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/compiling.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/diagnosis.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/domain-member.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/groupmapping.html delete mode 100755 docs/htmldocs/index.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/integrate-ms-networks.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/ix01.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/locking.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/migration.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/msdfs.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/optional.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/pam.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/passdb.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/pr01.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/pr02.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/printing.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/problems.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/samba-bdc.html create mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/samba-doc.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/securing-samba.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/speed.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/troubleshooting.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/type.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/unicode.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/upgrading-to-3.0.html delete mode 100644 docs/htmldocs/winbind.html diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/AccessControls.html b/docs/htmldocs/AccessControls.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7330836f36 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/AccessControls.html @@ -0,0 +1,641 @@ +Chapter 13. File, Directory and Share Access Controls
Chapter 13. File, Directory and Share Access Controls
Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

Chapter 13. File, Directory and Share Access Controls

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

Jeremy Allison

Samba Team

Jelmer R. Vernooij

drawing
The Samba Team

May 10, 2003

Table of Contents

Features and Benefits
File System Access Controls
MS Windows NTFS Comparison with UNIX File Systems
Managing Directories
File and Directory Access Control
Share Definition Access Controls
User and Group Based Controls
File and Directory Permissions Based Controls
Miscellaneous Controls
Access Controls on Shares
Share Permissions Management
MS Windows Access Control Lists and UNIX Interoperability
Managing UNIX permissions Using NT Security Dialogs
Viewing File Security on a Samba Share
Viewing file ownership
Viewing File or Directory Permissions
Modifying file or directory permissions
Interaction with the standard Samba create mask + parameters
Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute mapping
Common Errors
Users can not write to a public share
I have set force user but Samba still makes root the owner of all the files I touch!
MS Word with Samba changes owner of file

+Advanced MS Windows users are frequently perplexed when file, directory and share manipulation of +resources shared via Samba do not behave in the manner they might expect. MS Windows network +administrators are often confused regarding network access controls and how to +provide users with the access they need while protecting resources from unauthorised access. +

+Many UNIX administrators are unfamiliar with the MS Windows environment and in particular +have difficulty in visualizing what the MS Windows user wishes to achieve in attempts to set file +and directory access permissions. +

+The problem lies in the differences in how file and directory permissions and controls work +between the two environments. This difference is one that Samba can not completely hide, even +though it does try to bridge the chasm to a degree. +

+POSIX Access Control List technology has been available (along with Extended Attributes) +for UNIX for many years, yet there is little evidence today of any significant use. This +explains to some extent the slow adoption of ACLs into commercial Linux products. MS Windows +administrators are astounded at this given that ACLs were a foundational capability of the now +decade old MS Windows NT operating system. +

+The purpose of this chapter is to present each of the points of control that are possible with +Samba-3 in the hope that this will help the network administrator to find the optimum method +for delivering the best environment for MS Windows desktop users. +

+This is an opportune point to mention that Samba was created to provide a means of interoperability +and interchange of data between differing operating environments. Samba has no intent change +UNIX/Linux into a platform like MS Windows. Instead the purpose was and is to provide a sufficient +level of exchange of data between the two environments. What is available today extends well +beyond early plans and expectations, yet the gap continues to shrink. +

Features and Benefits

+ Samba offers a lot of flexibility in file system access management. These are the key access control + facilities present in Samba today: +

Samba Access Control Facilities

  • + UNIX File and Directory Permissions +

    + Samba honours and implements UNIX file system access controls. Users + who access a Samba server will do so as a particular MS Windows user. + This information is passed to the Samba server as part of the logon or + connection setup process. Samba uses this user identity to validate + whether or not the user should be given access to file system resources + (files and directories). This chapter provides an overview for those + to whom the UNIX permissions and controls are a little strange or unknown. +

  • + Samba Share Definitions +

    + In configuring share settings and controls in the smb.conf file + the network administrator can exercise over-rides to native file + system permissions and behaviours. This can be handy and convenient + to affect behaviour that is more like what MS Windows NT users expect + but it is seldom the best way to achieve this. + The basic options and techniques are described herein. +

  • + Samba Share ACLs +

    + Just like it is possible in MS Windows NT to set ACLs on shares + themselves, so it is possible to do this in Samba. + Very few people make use of this facility, yet it remains on of the + easiest ways to affect access controls (restrictions) and can often + do so with minimum invasiveness compared with other methods. +

  • + MS Windows ACLs through UNIX POSIX ACLs +

    + The use of POSIX ACLs on UNIX/Linux is possible ONLY if the underlying + operating system supports them. If not, then this option will not be + available to you. Current UNIX technology platforms have native support + for POSIX ACLs. There are patches for the Linux kernel that provide + this also. Sadly, few Linux platforms ship today with native ACLs and + Extended Attributes enabled. This chapter has pertinent information + for users of platforms that support them. +

File System Access Controls

+Perhaps the most important recognition to be made is the simple fact that MS Windows NT4 / 200x / XP +implement a totally divergent file system technology from what is provided in the UNIX operating system +environment. Firstly we should consider what the most significant differences are, then we shall look +at how Samba helps to bridge the differences. +

MS Windows NTFS Comparison with UNIX File Systems

+ Samba operates on top of the UNIX file system. This means it is subject to UNIX file system conventions + and permissions. It also means that if the MS Windows networking environment requires file system + behaviour that differs from unix file system behaviour then somehow Samba is responsible for emulating + that in a transparent and consistent manner. +

+ It is good news that Samba does this to a very large extent and on top of that provides a high degree + of optional configuration to over-ride the default behaviour. We will look at some of these over-rides, + but for the greater part we will stay within the bounds of default behaviour. Those wishing to explore + to depths of control ability should review the smb.conf man page. +

File System Feature Comparison

Name Space

+ MS Windows NT4 / 200x/ XP files names may be up to 254 characters long, UNIX file names + may be 1023 characters long. In MS Windows file extensions indicate particular file types, + in UNIX this is not so rigorously observed as all names are considered arbitrary. +

+ What MS Windows calls a Folder, UNIX calls a directory. +

Case Sensitivity

+ + MS Windows file names are generally upper case if made up of 8.3 (ie: 8 character file name + and 3 character extension. If longer than 8.3 file names are Case Preserving, and Case + Insensitive. +

+ UNIX file and directory names are case sensitive and case preserving. Samba implements the + MS Windows file name behaviour, but it does so as a user application. The UNIX file system + provides no mechanism to perform case insensitive file name lookups. MS Windows does this + by default. This means that Samba has to carry the processing overhead to provide features + that are NOT native to the UNIX operating system environment. +

+ Consider the following, all are unique UNIX names but one single MS Windows file name: + + MYFILE.TXT + MyFile.txt + myfile.txt + + So clearly, In an MS Windows file name space these three files CAN NOT co-exist! But in UNIX + they can. So what should Samba do if all three are present? Answer, the one that is lexically + first will be accessible to MS Windows users, the others are invisible and unaccessible - any + other solution would be suicidal. +

Directory Separators

+ MS Windows and DOS uses the back-slash '\' as a directory delimiter, UNIX uses the forward-slash '/' + as it's directory delimiter. This is transparently handled by Samba. +

Drive Identification

+ MS Windows products support a notion of drive letters, like C: to represent + disk partitions. UNIX has NO concept if separate identifiers for file partitions since each + such file system is mounted to become part of the over-all directory tree. + The UNIX directory tree begins at '/', just like the root of a DOS drive is specified like + C:\. +

File Naming Conventions

+ MS Windows generally never experiences file names that begin with a '.', while in UNIX these + are commonly found in a user's home directory. Files that begin with a '.' are typically + either start up files for various UNIX applications, or they may be files that contain + start-up configuration data. +

Links and Short-Cuts

+ + + + + MS Windows make use of "links and Short-Cuts" that are actually special types of files that will + redirect an attempt to execute the file to the real location of the file. UNIX knows of file and directory + links, but they are entirely different from what MS Windows users are used to. +

+ Symbolic links are files in UNIX that contain the actual location of the data (file OR directory). An + operation (like read or write) will operate directly on the file referenced. Symbolic links are also + referred to as 'soft links'. A hard link is something that MS Windows is NOT familiar with. It allows + one physical file to be known simultaneously by more than one file name. +

+ There are many other subtle differences that may cause the MS Windows administrator some temporary discomfort + in the process of becoming familiar with UNIX/Linux. These are best left for a text that is dedicated to the + purpose of UNIX/Linux training/education. +

Managing Directories

+ There are three basic operations for managing directories, create, delete, rename. +

Table 13.1. Managing directories with unix and windows

ActionMS Windows CommandUNIX Command
createmd foldermkdir folder
deleterd folderrmdir folder
renamerename oldname newnamemv oldname newname

+

File and Directory Access Control

+ The network administrator is strongly advised to read foundational training manuals and reference materials + regarding file and directory permissions maintenance. Much can be achieved with the basic UNIX permissions + without having to resort to more complex facilities like POSIX Access Control Lists (ACLs) or Extended + Attributes (EAs). +

+ UNIX/Linux file and directory access permissions involves setting three (3) primary sets of data and one (1) control set. + A UNIX file listing looks as follows:- + +

+$ ls -la
+total 632
+drwxr-xr-x   13 maryo   gnomes      816 2003-05-12 22:56 .
+drwxrwxr-x   37 maryo   gnomes     3800 2003-05-12 22:29 ..
+dr-xr-xr-x    2 maryo   gnomes       48 2003-05-12 22:29 muchado02
+drwxrwxrwx    2 maryo   gnomes       48 2003-05-12 22:29 muchado03
+drw-rw-rw-    2 maryo   gnomes       48 2003-05-12 22:29 muchado04
+d-w--w--w-    2 maryo   gnomes       48 2003-05-12 22:29 muchado05
+dr--r--r--    2 maryo   gnomes       48 2003-05-12 22:29 muchado06
+drwsrwsrwx    2 maryo   gnomes       48 2003-05-12 22:29 muchado08
+----------    1 maryo   gnomes     1242 2003-05-12 22:31 mydata00.lst
+--w--w--w-    1 maryo   gnomes     7754 2003-05-12 22:33 mydata02.lst
+-r--r--r--    1 maryo   gnomes    21017 2003-05-12 22:32 mydata04.lst
+-rw-rw-rw-    1 maryo   gnomes    41105 2003-05-12 22:32 mydata06.lst
+$ 
+

+

+ The columns above represent (from left to right): permissions, number of hard links to file, owner, group, size (bytes), access date, access time, file name. +

+ An overview of the permissions field can be found in the image below. +

Figure 13.1. Overview of unix permissions field

Overview of unix permissions field

+ Any bit flag may be unset. An unset bit flag is the equivalent of 'Can NOT' and is represented as a '-' character. + +

Example 13.1. Example File

+		-rwxr-x---   Means: The owner (user) can read, write, execute
+		                    the group can read and execute
+		                    everyone else can NOT do anything with it
+

+ +

+ Additional possibilities in the [type] field are: c = character device, b = block device, p = pipe device, s = UNIX Domain Socket. +

+ The letters `rwxXst' set permissions for the user, group and others as: read (r), write (w), execute (or access for directories) (x), + execute only if the file is a directory or already has execute permission for some user (X), set user or group ID on execution (s), + sticky (t). +

+ When the sticky bit is set on a directory, files in that directory may be unlinked (deleted) or renamed only by root or their owner. + Without the sticky bit, anyone able to write to the directory can delete or rename files. The sticky bit is commonly found on + directories, such as /tmp, that are world-writable. +

+ When the set user or group ID bit (s) is set on a directory, then all files created within it will be owned by the user and/or + group whose 'set user or group' bit is set. This can be very helpful in setting up directories that for which it is desired that + all users who are in a group should be able to write to and read from a file, particularly when it is undesirable for that file + to be exclusively owned by a user who's primary group is not the group that all such users belong to. +

+ When a directory is set drw-r----- this means that the owner can read and create (write) files in it, but because + the (x) execute flags are not set files can not be listed (seen) in the directory by anyone. The group can read files in the + directory but can NOT create new files. NOTE: If files in the directory are set to be readable and writable for the group, then + group members will be able to write to (or delete) them. +

Share Definition Access Controls

+The following parameters in the smb.conf file sections that define a share control or affect access controls. +Before using any of the following options please refer to the man page for smb.conf. +

User and Group Based Controls

+ User and group based controls can prove very useful. In some situations it is distinctly desirable to affect all + file system operations as if a single user is doing this, the use of the force user and + force group behaviour will achieve this. In other situations it may be necessary to affect a + paranoia level of control to ensure that only particular authorised persons will be able to access a share or + it's contents, here the use of the valid users or the invalid users may + be most useful. +

+ As always, it is highly advisable to use the least difficult to maintain and the least ambiguous method for + controlling access. Remember, that when you leave the scene someone else will need to provide assistance and + if that person finds too great a mess, or if they do not understand what you have done then there is risk of + Samba being removed and an alternative solution being adopted. +

Table 13.2. User and Group Based Controls

Control ParameterDescription - Action - Notes
admin users

+ List of users who will be granted administrative privileges on the share. + They will do all file operations as the super-user (root). + Any user in this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, + irrespective of file permissions. +

force group

+ Specifies a UNIX group name that will be assigned as the default primary group + for all users connecting to this service. +

force user

+ Specifies a UNIX user name that will be assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service. + This is useful for sharing files. Incorrect use can cause security problems. +

guest ok

+ If this parameter is set for a service, then no password is required to connect to the service. Privileges will be + those of the guest account. +

invalid users

+ List of users that should not be allowed to login to this service. +

only user

+ Controls whether connections with usernames not in the user list will be allowed. +

read list

+ List of users that are given read-only access to a service. Users in this list + will not be given write access, no matter what the read only option is set to. +

username

+ Refer to the smb.conf man page for more information - this is a complex and potentially misused parameter. +

valid users

+ List of users that should be allowed to login to this service. +

write list

+ List of users that are given read-write access to a service. +

File and Directory Permissions Based Controls

+ The following file and directory permission based controls, if misused, can result in considerable difficulty to + diagnose the cause of mis-configuration. Use them sparingly and carefully. By gradually introducing each one by one + undesirable side-effects may be detected. In the event of a problem, always comment all of them out and then gradually + re-introduce them in a controlled fashion. +

Table 13.3. File and Directory Permission Based Controls

Control ParameterDescription - Action - Notes
create mask

+ Refer to the smb.conf man page. +

directory mask

+ The octal modes used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories. + See also: directory security mask. +

dos filemode

+ Enabling this parameter allows a user who has write access to the file to modify the permissions on it. +

force create mode

+ This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will always be set on a file created by Samba. +

force directory mode

+ This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will always be set on a directory created by Samba. +

force directory security mode

+ Controls UNIX permission bits modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating UNIX permissions on a directory +

force security mode

+ Controls UNIX permission bits modified when a Windows NT client manipulates UNIX permissions. +

hide unreadable

+ Prevents clients from seeing the existence of files that cannot be read. +

hide unwriteable files

+ Prevents clients from seeing the existence of files that cannot be written to. Unwriteable directories are shown as usual. +

nt acl support

+ This parameter controls whether smbd will attempt to map UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists. +

security mask

+ Controls UNIX permission bits modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permissions on a file. +

Miscellaneous Controls

+ The following are documented because of the prevalence of administrators creating inadvertent barriers to file + access by not understanding the full implications of smb.conf file settings. +

Table 13.4. Other Controls

Control ParameterDescription - Action - Notes
case sensitive, default case, short preserve case

+ This means that all file name lookup will be done in a case sensitive manner. + Files will be created with the precise filename Samba received from the MS Windows client. +

csc policy

+ Client Side Caching Policy - parallels MS Windows client side file caching capabilities. +

dont descend

+ Allows to specify a comma-delimited list of directories that the server should always show as empty. +

dos filetime resolution

+ This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++ when used against Samba shares. +

dos filetimes

+ DOS and Windows allows users to change file time stamps if they can write to the file. POSIX semantics prevent this. + This options allows DOS and Windows behaviour. +

fake oplocks

+ Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants an + oplock then the client is free to assume that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively cache file data. +

hide dot files, hide files, veto files

+ Note: MS Windows Explorer allows over-ride of files marked as hidden so they will still be visible. +

read only

+ If this parameter is yes, then users of a service may not create or modify files in the service's directory. +

veto files

+ List of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible. +

Access Controls on Shares

+ This section deals with how to configure Samba per share access control restrictions. + By default, Samba sets no restrictions on the share itself. Restrictions on the share itself + can be set on MS Windows NT4/200x/XP shares. This can be a very effective way to limit who can + connect to a share. In the absence of specific restrictions the default setting is to allow + the global user Everyone Full Control (ie: Full control, Change and Read). +

+ At this time Samba does NOT provide a tool for configuring access control setting on the Share + itself. Samba does have the capacity to store and act on access control settings, but the only + way to create those settings is to use either the NT4 Server Manager or the Windows 200x MMC for + Computer Management. +

+ Samba stores the per share access control settings in a file called share_info.tdb. + The location of this file on your system will depend on how samba was compiled. The default location + for Samba's tdb files is under /usr/local/samba/var. If the tdbdump + utility has been compiled and installed on your system, then you can examine the contents of this file + by: tdbdump share_info.tdb. +

Share Permissions Management

+ The best tool for the task is platform dependant. Choose the best tool for your environment. +

Windows NT4 Workstation/Server

+ The tool you need to use to manage share permissions on a Samba server is the NT Server Manager. + Server Manager is shipped with Windows NT4 Server products but not with Windows NT4 Workstation. + You can obtain the NT Server Manager for MS Windows NT4 Workstation from Microsoft - see details below. +

Procedure 13.1. Instructions

  1. + Launch the NT4 Server Manager, click on the Samba server you want to administer, then from the menu + select Computer, then click on the Shared Directories entry. +

  2. + Now click on the share that you wish to manage, then click on the Properties tab, next click on + the Permissions tab. Now you can add or change access control settings as you wish. +

Windows 200x/XP

+ On MS Windows NT4/200x/XP system access control lists on the share itself are set using native + tools, usually from file manager. For example, in Windows 200x: right click on the shared folder, + then select Sharing, then click on Permissions. The default + Windows NT4/200x permission allows Everyone Full Control on the Share. +

+ MS Windows 200x and later all comes with a tool called the Computer Management snap-in for the + Microsoft Management Console (MMC). This tool is located by clicking on Control Panel -> + Administrative Tools -> Computer Management. +

Procedure 13.2. Instructions

  1. + After launching the MMC with the Computer Management snap-in, click on the menu item Action, + select Connect to another computer. If you are not logged onto a domain you will be prompted + to enter a domain login user identifier and a password. This will authenticate you to the domain. + If you where already logged in with administrative privilege this step is not offered. +

  2. + If the Samba server is not shown in the Select Computer box, then type in the name of the target + Samba server in the field Name:. Now click on the [+] next to + System Tools, then on the [+] next to Shared Folders in the + left panel. +

  3. + Now in the right panel, double-click on the share you wish to set access control permissions on. + Then click on the tab Share Permissions. It is now possible to add access control entities + to the shared folder. Do NOT forget to set what type of access (full control, change, read) you + wish to assign for each entry. +

Warning

+ Be careful. If you take away all permissions from the Everyone user without removing this user + then effectively no user will be able to access the share. This is a result of what is known as + ACL precedence. ie: Everyone with no access means that MaryK who is part of the group + Everyone will have no access even if this user is given explicit full control access. +

MS Windows Access Control Lists and UNIX Interoperability

Managing UNIX permissions Using NT Security Dialogs

+ Windows NT clients can use their native security settings dialog box to view and modify the + underlying UNIX permissions. +

+ Note that this ability is careful not to compromise the security of the UNIX host Samba is running on, and + still obeys all the file permission rules that a Samba administrator can set. +

+ Samba does not attempt to go beyond POSIX ACLs, so that the various finer-grained access control + options provided in Windows are actually ignore. +

Note

+ All access to UNIX/Linux system files via Samba is controlled by the operating system file access controls. + When trying to figure out file access problems it is vitally important to find the identity of the Windows + user as it is presented by Samba at the point of file access. This can best be determined from the + Samba log files. +

Viewing File Security on a Samba Share

+ From an NT4/2000/XP client, single-click with the right mouse button on any file or directory in a Samba + mounted drive letter or UNC path. When the menu pops-up, click on the Properties + entry at the bottom of the menu. This brings up the file properties dialog box. Click on the tab + Security and you will see three buttons, Permissions, + Auditing, and Ownership. The Auditing + button will cause either an error message A requested privilege is not held by the client + to appear if the user is not the NT Administrator, or a dialog which is intended to allow an Administrator + to add auditing requirements to a file if the user is logged on as the NT Administrator. This dialog is + non-functional with a Samba share at this time, as the only useful button, the Add + button will not currently allow a list of users to be seen. +

Viewing file ownership

+ Clicking on the Ownership button brings up a dialog box telling you who owns + the given file. The owner name will be of the form: +

+ "SERVER\user (Long name)" +

+ Where SERVER is the NetBIOS name of the Samba server, user + is the user name of the UNIX user who owns the file, and (Long name) is the + descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the GECOS field of the UNIX password database). + Click on the Close button to remove this dialog. +

+ If the parameter nt acl support is set to false + then the file owner will be shown as the NT user "Everyone". +

+ The Take Ownership button will not allow you to change the ownership of this file to + yourself (clicking on it will display a dialog box complaining that the user you are currently logged onto + the NT client cannot be found). The reason for this is that changing the ownership of a file is a privileged + operation in UNIX, available only to the root user. As clicking on this button causes + NT to attempt to change the ownership of a file to the current user logged into the NT client this will + not work with Samba at this time.

+ There is an NT chown command that will work with Samba and allow a user with Administrator privilege connected + to a Samba server as root to change the ownership of files on both a local NTFS filesystem or remote mounted NTFS + or Samba drive. This is available as part of the Seclib NT security library written + by Jeremy Allison of the Samba-Team, available from the main Samba FTP site.

Viewing File or Directory Permissions

+ The third button is the Permissions button. Clicking on this brings up a dialog box + that shows both the permissions and the UNIX owner of the file or directory. The owner is displayed in the form: +

"SERVER\ + user + (Long name)"

Where SERVER is the NetBIOS name of the Samba server, + user is the user name of the UNIX user who owns the file, and + (Long name) is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the + GECOS field of the UNIX password database).

+ If the parameter nt acl support is set to false + then the file owner will be shown as the NT user "Everyone" and the permissions will be + shown as NT "Full Control". +

+ The permissions field is displayed differently for files and directories, so I'll describe the way file permissions + are displayed first. +

File Permissions

The standard UNIX user/group/world triplet and + the corresponding "read", "write", "execute" permissions + triplets are mapped by Samba into a three element NT ACL + with the 'r', 'w', and 'x' bits mapped into the corresponding + NT permissions. The UNIX world permissions are mapped into + the global NT group Everyone, followed + by the list of permissions allowed for UNIX world. The UNIX + owner and group permissions are displayed as an NT + user icon and an NT local + group icon respectively followed by the list + of permissions allowed for the UNIX user and group.

As many UNIX permission sets don't map into common + NT names such as read, + "change" or full control then + usually the permissions will be prefixed by the words + "Special Access" in the NT display list.

But what happens if the file has no permissions allowed + for a particular UNIX user group or world component? In order + to allow "no permissions" to be seen and modified then Samba + overloads the NT "Take Ownership" ACL attribute + (which has no meaning in UNIX) and reports a component with + no permissions as having the NT "O" bit set. + This was chosen of course to make it look like a zero, meaning + zero permissions. More details on the decision behind this will + be given below.

Directory Permissions

Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two + different sets of permissions. The first set of permissions + is the ACL set on the directory itself, this is usually displayed + in the first set of parentheses in the normal "RW" + NT style. This first set of permissions is created by Samba in + exactly the same way as normal file permissions are, described + above, and is displayed in the same way.

The second set of directory permissions has no real meaning + in the UNIX permissions world and represents the + inherited permissions that any file created within + this directory would inherit.

Samba synthesises these inherited permissions for NT by + returning as an NT ACL the UNIX permission mode that a new file + created by Samba on this share would receive.

Modifying file or directory permissions

Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple + as changing the displayed permissions in the dialog box, and + clicking the OK button. However, there are + limitations that a user needs to be aware of, and also interactions + with the standard Samba permission masks and mapping of DOS + attributes that need to also be taken into account.

If the parameter nt acl support + is set to false then any attempt to set + security permissions will fail with an "Access Denied" + message.

The first thing to note is that the "Add" + button will not return a list of users in Samba (it will give + an error message of The remote procedure call failed + and did not execute). This means that you can only + manipulate the current user/group/world permissions listed in + the dialog box. This actually works quite well as these are the + only permissions that UNIX actually has.

If a permission triplet (either user, group, or world) + is removed from the list of permissions in the NT dialog box, + then when the OK button is pressed it will + be applied as "no permissions" on the UNIX side. If you then + view the permissions again the "no permissions" entry will appear + as the NT "O" flag, as described above. This + allows you to add permissions back to a file or directory once + you have removed them from a triplet component.

As UNIX supports only the "r", "w" and "x" bits of + an NT ACL then if other NT security attributes such as "Delete + access" are selected then they will be ignored when applied on + the Samba server.

When setting permissions on a directory the second + set of permissions (in the second set of parentheses) is + by default applied to all files within that directory. If this + is not what you want you must uncheck the Replace + permissions on existing files checkbox in the NT + dialog before clicking OK.

If you wish to remove all permissions from a + user/group/world component then you may either highlight the + component and click the Remove button, + or set the component to only have the special Take + Ownership permission (displayed as "O" + ) highlighted.

Interaction with the standard Samba create mask + parameters

There are four parameters + to control interaction with the standard Samba create mask parameters. + These are : + +

  • security mask

  • force security mode

  • directory security mask

  • force directory security mode

+ +

Once a user clicks OK to apply the + permissions Samba maps the given permissions into a user/group/world + r/w/x triplet set, and then will check the changed permissions for a + file against the bits set in the + security mask parameter. Any bits that + were changed that are not set to '1' in this parameter are left alone + in the file permissions.

Essentially, zero bits in the security mask + mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not + allowed to change, and one bits are those the user is allowed to change. +

If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value as + the create mask parameter. To allow a user to modify all the + user/group/world permissions on a file, set this parameter + to 0777.

Next Samba checks the changed permissions for a file against + the bits set in the + force security mode parameter. Any bits + that were changed that correspond to bits set to '1' in this parameter + are forced to be set.

Essentially, bits set in the force security mode + parameter may be treated as a set of bits that, when + modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.

If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value + as the force create mode parameter. + To allow a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file + with no restrictions set this parameter to 000.

The security mask and force + security mode parameters are applied to the change + request in that order.

For a directory Samba will perform the same operations as + described above for a file except using the parameter + directory security mask instead of security + mask, and force directory security mode + parameter instead of force security mode + .

The directory security mask parameter + by default is set to the same value as the directory mask + parameter and the force directory security + mode parameter by default is set to the same value as + the force directory mode parameter.

In this way Samba enforces the permission restrictions that + an administrator can set on a Samba share, whilst still allowing users + to modify the permission bits within that restriction.

If you want to set up a share that allows users full control + in modifying the permission bits on their files and directories and + doesn't force any particular bits to be set 'on', then set the following + parameters in the smb.conf file in that share specific section : +

security mask = 0777
force security mode = 0
directory security mask = 0777
force directory security mode = 0

Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute mapping

Note

Samba maps some of the DOS attribute bits (such as "read + only") into the UNIX permissions of a file. This means there can + be a conflict between the permission bits set via the security + dialog and the permission bits set by the file attribute mapping. +

One way this can show up is if a file has no UNIX read access + for the owner it will show up as "read only" in the standard + file attributes tabbed dialog. Unfortunately this dialog is + the same one that contains the security info in another tab.

What this can mean is that if the owner changes the permissions + to allow themselves read access using the security dialog, clicks + OK to get back to the standard attributes tab + dialog, and then clicks OK on that dialog, then + NT will set the file permissions back to read-only (as that is what + the attributes still say in the dialog). This means that after setting + permissions and clicking OK to get back to the + attributes dialog you should always hit Cancel + rather than OK to ensure that your changes + are not overridden.

Common Errors

+File, Directory and Share access problems are very common on the mailing list. The following +are examples taken from the mailing list in recent times. +

Users can not write to a public share

+ “ + We are facing some troubles with file / directory permissions. I can log on the domain as admin user(root), + and there's a public share, on which everyone needs to have permission to create / modify files, but only + root can change the file, no one else can. We need to constantly go to server to + chgrp -R users * and chown -R nobody * to allow others users to change the file. + ” +

+ There are many ways to solve this problem, here are a few hints: +

  1. + Go to the top of the directory that is shared +

  2. + Set the ownership to what ever public owner and group you want +

    +$ find 'directory_name' -type d -exec chown user.group {}\;
+$ find 'directory_name' -type d -exec chmod 6775 'directory_name'
+$ find 'directory_name' -type f -exec chmod 0775 {} \;
+$ find 'directory_name' -type f -exec chown user.group {}\;
+

    +

    Note

    + The above will set the 'sticky bit' on all directories. Read your + UNIX/Linux man page on what that does. It causes the OS to assign + to all files created in the directories the ownership of the + directory. +

  3. + + Directory is: /foodbar +

    +$ chown jack.engr /foodbar
+

    +

    Note

    This is the same as doing:

    +$ chown jack /foodbar
+$ chgrp engr /foodbar
+

  4. Now do: + +

    +$ chmod 6775 /foodbar
+$ ls -al /foodbar/..
+

    + +

    You should see: +

    +drwsrwsr-x  2 jack  engr    48 2003-02-04 09:55 foodbar
+

    +

  5. Now do: +

    +$ su - jill
+$ cd /foodbar
+$ touch Afile
+$ ls -al
+

    +

    + You should see that the file Afile created by Jill will have ownership + and permissions of Jack, as follows: +

    +-rw-r--r--  1 jack  engr     0 2003-02-04 09:57 Afile
+

    +

  6. + Now in your smb.conf for the share add: +

    force create mode = 0775
    force direcrtory mode = 6775

    +

    Note

    + The above are only needed if your users are not members of the group + you have used. ie: Within the OS do not have write permission on the directory. +

    + An alternative is to set in the smb.conf entry for the share: +

    force user = jack
    force group = engr

    +

I have set force user but Samba still makes root the owner of all the files I touch!

+ When you have a user in admin users, samba will always do file operations for + this user as root, even if force user has been set. +

MS Word with Samba changes owner of file

+ Question: “When userB saves a word document that is owned by userA the updated file is now owned by userB. + Why is Samba doing this? How do I fix this?” +

+ Answer: Word does the following when you modify/change a Word document: Word Creates a NEW document with + a temporary name, Word then closes the old document and deletes it, Word then renames the new document to the original document name. + There is NO mechanism by which Samba CAN IN ANY WAY know that the new document really should be owned by the owners + of the original file. Samba has no way of knowing that the file will be renamed by MS Word. As far as Samba is able + to tell, the file that gets created is a NEW file, not one that the application (Word) is updating. +

+ There is a work-around to solve the permissions problem. That work-around involves understanding how you can manage file + system behaviour from within the smb.conf file, as well as understanding how Unix file systems work. Set on the directory + in which you are changing word documents: chmod g+s 'directory_name' This ensures that all files will + be created with the group that owns the directory. In smb.conf share declaration section set: +

+

force create mode = 0660
force directory mode = 0770

+

+ These two settings will ensure that all directories and files that get created in the share will be read/writable by the + owner and group set on the directory itself. +

Prev Up Next
Chapter 12. Mapping MS Windows and UNIX Groups Home Chapter 14. File and Record Locking
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/AdvancedNetworkManagement.html b/docs/htmldocs/AdvancedNetworkManagement.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1052f45e92 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/AdvancedNetworkManagement.html @@ -0,0 +1,224 @@ +Chapter 22. Advanced Network Management
Chapter 22. Advanced Network Management
Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

Chapter 22. Advanced Network Management

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

April 3 2003

Table of Contents

Features and Benefits
Remote Server Administration
Remote Desktop Management
Remote Management from NoMachines.Com
Network Logon Script Magic
Adding printers without user intervention
Common Errors

+This section documents peripheral issues that are of great importance to network +administrators who want to improve network resource access control, to automate the user +environment, and to make their lives a little easier. +

Features and Benefits

+Often the difference between a working network environment and a well appreciated one can +best be measured by the little things that makes everything work more +harmoniously. A key part of every network environment solution is the ability to remotely +manage MS Windows workstations, to remotely access the Samba server, to provide customised +logon scripts, as well as other house keeping activities that help to sustain more reliable +network operations. +

+This chapter presents information on each of these area. They are placed here, and not in +other chapters, for ease of reference. +

Remote Server Administration

+How do I get 'User Manager' and 'Server Manager'? +

+ Since I don't need to buy an NT4 Server, how do I get the 'User Manager for Domains', +the 'Server Manager'? +

+Microsoft distributes a version of these tools called nexus for installation +on Windows 9x / Me systems. The tools set includes: +

Server Manager
User Manager for Domains
Event Viewer

+Click here to download the archived file ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/NEXUS.EXE +

+The Windows NT 4.0 version of the 'User Manager for +Domains' and 'Server Manager' are available from Microsoft via ftp +from ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/Softlib/MSLFILES/SRVTOOLS.EXE +

Remote Desktop Management

+There are a number of possible remote desktop management solutions that range from free +through costly. Do not let that put you off. Sometimes the most costly solutions is the +most cost effective. In any case, you will need to draw your own conclusions as to which +is the best tool in your network environment. +

Remote Management from NoMachines.Com

+ The following information was posted to the Samba mailing list at Apr 3 23:33:50 GMT 2003. + It is presented in slightly edited form (with author details omitted for privacy reasons). + The entire answer is reproduced below with some comments removed. +

+

+> I have a wonderful linux/samba server running as PDC for a network.
+> Now I would like to add remote desktop capabilities so that
+> users outside could login to the system and get their desktop up from
+> home or another country..
+>
+> Is there a way to accomplish this? Do I need a windows terminal server?
+> Do I need to configure it so that it is a member of the domain or a
+> BDC,PDC? Are there any hacks for MS Windows XP to enable remote login
+> even if the computer is in a domain?
+>
+> Any ideas/experience would be appreciated :)
+

+

+ Answer provided: Check out the new offer from NoMachine, "NX" software: + http://www.nomachine.com/. +

+ It implements a very easy-to-use interface to the remote X protocol as + well as incorporating VNC/RFB and rdesktop/RDP into it, but at a speed + performance much better than anything you may have ever seen... +

+ Remote X is not new at all -- but what they did achieve successfully is + a new way of compression and caching technologies which makes the thing + fast enough to run even over slow modem/ISDN connections. +

+ I could test drive their (public) RedHat machine in Italy, over a loaded + internet connection, with enabled thumbnail previews in KDE konqueror + which popped up immediately on "mouse-over". From inside that (remote X) + session I started a rdesktop session on another, a Windows XP machine. + To test the performance, I played Pinball. I am proud to announce here + that my score was 631750 points at first try... +

+ NX performs better on my local LAN than any of the other "pure" + connection methods I am using from time to time: TightVNC, rdesktop or + remote X. It is even faster than a direct crosslink connection between + two nodes. +

+ I even got sound playing from the remote X app to my local boxes, and + had a working "copy'n'paste" from an NX window (running a KDE session + in Italy) to my Mozilla mailing agent... These guys are certainly doing + something right! +

+ I recommend to test drive NX to anybody with a only a remote interest + in remote computing + http://www.nomachine.com/testdrive.php. +

+ Just download the free of charge client software (available for RedHat, + SuSE, Debian and Windows) and be up and running within 5 minutes (they + need to send you your account data, though, because you are assigned + a real Unix account on their testdrive.nomachine.com box... +

+ They plan to get to the point were you can have NX application servers + running as a cluster of nodes, and users simply start an NX session locally, + and can select applications to run transparently (apps may even run on + another NX node, but pretend to be on the same as used for initial login, + because it displays in the same window.... well, you also can run it + fullscreen, and after a short time you forget that it is a remote session + at all). +

+ Now the best thing at the end: all the core compression and caching + technologies are released under the GPL and available as source code + to anybody who wants to build on it! These technologies are working, + albeit started from the command line only (and very inconvenient to + use in order to get a fully running remote X session up and running....) +

+ To answer your questions: +

  • + You don't need to install a terminal server; XP has RDP support built in. +

  • + NX is much cheaper than Citrix -- and comparable in performance, probably faster +

  • + You don't need to hack XP -- it just works +

  • + You log into the XP box from remote transparently (and I think there is no + need to change anything to get a connection, even if authentication is against a domain) +

  • + The NX core technologies are all Open Source and released under the GPL -- + you can today use a (very inconvenient) commandline to use it at no cost, + but you can buy a comfortable (proprietary) NX GUI frontend for money +

  • + NoMachine are encouraging and offering help to OSS/Free Software implementations + for such a frontend too, even if it means competition to them (they have written + to this effect even to the LTSP, KDE and GNOME developer mailing lists) +

Network Logon Script Magic

+This section needs work. Volunteer contributions most welcome. Please send your patches or updates +to John Terpstra. +

+There are several opportunities for creating a custom network startup configuration environment. +

No Logon Script
Simple universal Logon Script that applies to all users
Use of a conditional Logon Script that applies per user or per group attributes
Use of Samba's Preexec and Postexec functions on access to the NETLOGON share to create + a custom Logon Script and then execute it.
User of a tool such as KixStart

+The Samba source code tree includes two logon script generation/execution tools. +See examples directory genlogon and +ntlogon subdirectories. +

+The following listings are from the genlogon directory. +

+This is the genlogon.pl file: + +

+	#!/usr/bin/perl
+	#
+	# genlogon.pl
+	#
+	# Perl script to generate user logon scripts on the fly, when users
+	# connect from a Windows client.  This script should be called from smb.conf
+	# with the %U, %G and %L parameters. I.e:
+	#
+	#       root preexec = genlogon.pl %U %G %L
+	#
+	# The script generated will perform
+	# the following:
+	#
+	# 1. Log the user connection to /var/log/samba/netlogon.log
+	# 2. Set the PC's time to the Linux server time (which is maintained
+	#    daily to the National Institute of Standard's Atomic clock on the
+	#    internet.
+	# 3. Connect the user's home drive to H: (H for Home).
+	# 4. Connect common drives that everyone uses.
+	# 5. Connect group-specific drives for certain user groups.
+	# 6. Connect user-specific drives for certain users.
+	# 7. Connect network printers.
+
+	# Log client connection
+	#($sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year,$wday,$yday,$isdst) = localtime(time);
+	($sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year,$wday,$yday,$isdst) = localtime(time);
+	open LOG, ">>/var/log/samba/netlogon.log";
+	print LOG "$mon/$mday/$year $hour:$min:$sec - User $ARGV[0] logged into $ARGV[1]\n";
+	close LOG;
+
+	# Start generating logon script
+	open LOGON, ">/shared/netlogon/$ARGV[0].bat";
+	print LOGON "\@ECHO OFF\r\n";
+
+	# Connect shares just use by Software Development group
+	if ($ARGV[1] eq "SOFTDEV" || $ARGV[0] eq "softdev")
+	{
+		print LOGON "NET USE M: \\\\$ARGV[2]\\SOURCE\r\n";
+	}
+
+	# Connect shares just use by Technical Support staff
+	if ($ARGV[1] eq "SUPPORT" || $ARGV[0] eq "support")
+	{
+		print LOGON "NET USE S: \\\\$ARGV[2]\\SUPPORT\r\n";
+	}
+
+	# Connect shares just used by Administration staff
+	If ($ARGV[1] eq "ADMIN" || $ARGV[0] eq "admin")
+	{
+		print LOGON "NET USE L: \\\\$ARGV[2]\\ADMIN\r\n";
+		print LOGON "NET USE K: \\\\$ARGV[2]\\MKTING\r\n";
+	}
+
+	# Now connect Printers.  We handle just two or three users a little
+	# differently, because they are the exceptions that have desktop
+	# printers on LPT1: - all other user's go to the LaserJet on the
+	# server.
+	if ($ARGV[0] eq 'jim'
+	    || $ARGV[0] eq 'yvonne')
+	{
+		print LOGON "NET USE LPT2: \\\\$ARGV[2]\\LJET3\r\n";
+		print LOGON "NET USE LPT3: \\\\$ARGV[2]\\FAXQ\r\n";
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		print LOGON "NET USE LPT1: \\\\$ARGV[2]\\LJET3\r\n";
+		print LOGON "NET USE LPT3: \\\\$ARGV[2]\\FAXQ\r\n";
+	}
+
+	# All done! Close the output file.
+	close LOGON;
+

+

+Those wishing to use more elaborate or capable logon processing system should check out the following sites: +

http://www.craigelachie.org/rhacer/ntlogon
http://www.kixtart.org
http://support.microsoft.com/default.asp?scid=kb;en-us;189105

Adding printers without user intervention

+Printers may be added automatically during logon script processing through the use of: + +

+	rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /?
+

+ +See the documentation in the Microsoft knowledgebase article no: 189105. +

Common Errors

+The information provided in this chapter has been reproduced from postings on the samba@samba.org +mailing list. No implied endorsement or recommendation is offered. Administrators should conduct +their own evaluation of alternatives and are encouraged to draw their own conclusions. +

Prev Up Next
Chapter 21. Winbind: Use of Domain Accounts Home Chapter 23. System and Account Policies
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Appendixes.html b/docs/htmldocs/Appendixes.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6d77a0ba65 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Appendixes.html @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +Part VI. Appendixes
Part VI. Appendixes
Prev   Next

Appendixes

Table of Contents

36. How to compile Samba
Access Samba source code via CVS
Introduction
CVS Access to samba.org
Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp
Verifying Samba's PGP signature
Building the Binaries
Compiling samba with Active Directory support
Starting the smbd and nmbd
Starting from inetd.conf
Alternative: starting it as a daemon
37. Portability
HPUX
SCO UNIX
DNIX
RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II
AIX
Sequential Read Ahead
Solaris
Locking improvements
Winbind on Solaris 9
38. Samba and other CIFS clients
Macintosh clients?
OS2 Client
Configuring OS/2 Warp Connect or + OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba
Configuring OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), + OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba
Printer driver download for for OS/2 clients?
Windows for Workgroups
Latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft
Delete .pwl files after password change
Configuring WfW password handling
Case handling of passwords
Use TCP/IP as default protocol
Speed improvement
Windows '95/'98
Speed improvement
Windows 2000 Service Pack 2
Windows NT 3.1
39. Samba Performance Tuning
Comparisons
Socket options
Read size
Max xmit
Log level
Read raw
Write raw
Slow Logins
Client tuning
Samba performance problem due changing kernel
Corrupt tdb Files
40. DNS and DHCP Configuration Guide
Note
41. Further Resources
Websites
Related updates from Microsoft
Prev Up Next
Chapter 35. Reporting Bugs Home Chapter 36. How to compile Samba
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Backup.html b/docs/htmldocs/Backup.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f19bd6d2b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Backup.html @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +Chapter 28. Samba Backup Techniques
Chapter 28. Samba Backup Techniques
Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

Chapter 28. Samba Backup Techniques

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

Table of Contents

Note
Features and Benefits

Note

+This chapter did not make it into this release. +It is planned for the published release of this document. +

Features and Benefits

+We need feedback from people who are backing up samba servers. +We would like to know what software tools you are using to backup +your samba server/s. +

+In particular, if you have any success and / or failure stories you could +share with other users this would be appreciated. +

Prev Up Next
Chapter 27. Unicode/Charsets Home Chapter 29. High Availability Options
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/CUPS-printing.html b/docs/htmldocs/CUPS-printing.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8bfe11405f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/CUPS-printing.html @@ -0,0 +1,3225 @@ +Chapter 19. CUPS Printing Support in Samba 3.0
Chapter 19. CUPS Printing Support in Samba 3.0
Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

Chapter 19. CUPS Printing Support in Samba 3.0

Kurt Pfeifle

Danka Deutschland GmbH

Ciprian Vizitiu

drawings

Jelmer R. Vernooij

drawings
The Samba Team

(3 June 2003)

Table of Contents

Introduction
Features and Benefits
Overview
Basic Configuration of CUPS support
Linking of smbd with libcups.so
Simple smb.conf Settings for CUPS
More complex smb.conf Settings for +CUPS
Advanced Configuration
Central spooling vs. "Peer-to-Peer" printing
CUPS/Samba as a "spooling-only" Print Server; "raw" printing +with Vendor Drivers on Windows Clients
Driver Installation Methods on Windows Clients
Explicitly enable "raw" printing for +application/octet-stream!
Three familiar Methods for driver upload plus a new one
Using CUPS/Samba in an advanced Way -- intelligent printing +with PostScript Driver Download
GDI on Windows -- PostScript on UNIX
Windows Drivers, GDI and EMF
UNIX Printfile Conversion and GUI Basics
PostScript and Ghostscript
Ghostscript -- the Software RIP for non-PostScript Printers
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) Specification
CUPS can use all Windows-formatted Vendor PPDs
CUPS also uses PPDs for non-PostScript Printers
The CUPS Filtering Architecture
MIME types and CUPS Filters
MIME type Conversion Rules
Filter Requirements
Prefilters
pstops
pstoraster
imagetops and imagetoraster
rasterto [printers specific]
CUPS Backends
cupsomatic/Foomatic -- how do they fit into the Picture?
The Complete Picture
mime.convs
"Raw" printing
"application/octet-stream" printing
PostScript Printer Descriptions (PPDs) for non-PS Printers
Difference between cupsomatic/foomatic-rip and +native CUPS printing
Examples for filtering Chains
Sources of CUPS drivers / PPDs
Printing with Interface Scripts
Network printing (purely Windows)
From Windows Clients to an NT Print Server
Driver Execution on the Client
Driver Execution on the Server
Network Printing (Windows clients -- UNIX/Samba Print +Servers)
From Windows Clients to a CUPS/Samba Print Server
Samba receiving Jobfiles and passing them to CUPS
Network PostScript RIP: CUPS Filters on Server -- clients use +PostScript Driver with CUPS-PPDs
PPDs for non-PS Printers on UNIX
PPDs for non-PS Printers on Windows
Windows Terminal Servers (WTS) as CUPS Clients
Printer Drivers running in "Kernel Mode" cause many +Problems
Workarounds impose Heavy Limitations
CUPS: a "Magical Stone"?
PostScript Drivers with no major problems -- even in Kernel +Mode
Setting up CUPS for driver Download
cupsaddsmb: the unknown Utility
Prepare your smb.conf for cupsaddsmb
CUPS Package of "PostScript Driver for WinNT/2k/XP"
Recognize the different Driver Files
Acquiring the Adobe Driver Files
ESP Print Pro Package of "PostScript Driver for +WinNT/2k/XP"
Caveats to be considered
Benefits of using "CUPS PostScript Driver for +Windows NT/2k/XP" instead of Adobe Driver
Run "cupsaddsmb" (quiet Mode)
Run "cupsaddsmb" with verbose Output
Understanding cupsaddsmb
How to recognize if cupsaddsmb completed successfully
cupsaddsmb with a Samba PDC
cupsaddsmb Flowchart
Installing the PostScript Driver on a Client
Avoiding critical PostScript Driver Settings on the +Client
Installing PostScript Driver Files manually (using +rpcclient)
A Check of the rpcclient man Page
Understanding the rpcclient man page
Producing an Example by querying a Windows Box
What is required for adddriver and setdriver to succeed
Manual Driver Installation in 15 Steps
Troubleshooting revisited
The printing *.tdb Files
Trivial DataBase Files
Binary Format
Losing *.tdb Files
Using tdbbackup
CUPS Print Drivers from Linuxprinting.org
foomatic-rip and Foomatic explained
foomatic-rip and Foomatic-PPD Download and Installation
Page Accounting with CUPS
Setting up Quotas
Correct and incorrect Accounting
Adobe and CUPS PostScript Drivers for Windows Clients
The page_log File Syntax
Possible Shortcomings
Future Developments
Other Accounting Tools
Additional Material
Auto-Deletion or Preservation of CUPS Spool Files
CUPS Configuration Settings explained
Pre-conditions
Manual Configuration
In Case of Trouble.....
Printing from CUPS to Windows attached +Printers
More CUPS filtering Chains
Common Errors
Win9x client can't install driver
"cupsaddsmb" keeps asking for root password in + neverending loop
"cupsaddsmb" gives "No PPD file for printer..." + message while PPD file is present
Client can't connect to Samba printer
Can't reconnect to Samba under new account + from Win2K/XP
Avoid being connected to the Samba server as the + "wrong" user
Upgrading to CUPS drivers from Adobe drivers on + NT/2K/XP clients gives problems
Can't use "cupsaddsmb" on Samba server which is + a PDC
Deleted Win2K printer driver is still shown
Win2K/XP "Local Security + Policies"
WinXP clients: "Administrator can not install + printers for all local users"
"Print Change Notify" functions on + NT-clients
WinXP-SP1
Print options for all users can't be set on Win2K/XP
Most common blunders in driver + settings on Windows clients
cupsaddsmb does not work + with newly installed printer
Permissions on +/var/spool/samba/ get reset after each +reboot
Printer named "lp" +intermittently swallows jobs and spits out completely different +ones
Location of Adobe PostScript driver files necessary for "cupsaddsmb"
An Overview of the CUPS Printing Processes

Introduction

Features and Benefits

+ The Common UNIX Print System (CUPS) has become very popular. All + major Linux distributions now ship it as their default printing + system. To many it is still a very mystical tool. Mostly, it + "just works" (TM). People tend to regard it as a "black box" + which they don't want to look into, as long as it works. But once + there is a little problem, they are in trouble to find out where to + start debugging it. Refer to the "Classical Printing" chapter also, it + contains a lot of information that is relevant for CUPS. +

+ CUPS sports quite a few unique and powerful features. While their + basic functions may be grasped quite easily, they are also + new. Because they are different from other, more traditional printing + systems, it is best to try and not apply any prior knowledge about + printing upon this new system. Rather, try to understand CUPS + from the beginning. This documentation will lead you to a + complete understanding of CUPS. Let's start with the most basic + things first. +

Overview

+ CUPS is more than just a print spooling system. It is a complete + printer management system that complies with the new IPP + (Internet Printing Protocol). IPP is an industry + and IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) + standard for network printing. Many of its functions can be managed + remotely (or locally) via a web browser (giving you a + platform-independent access to the CUPS print server). Additionally, it + has the traditional command line and several more modern GUI interfaces + (GUI interfaces developed by 3rd parties, like KDE's + overwhelming KDEPrint). +

+ CUPS allows creation of "raw" printers (ie: NO print file + format translation) as well as "smart" printers (i.e. CUPS does + file format conversion as required for the printer). In many ways + this gives CUPS similar capabilities to the MS Windows print + monitoring system. Of course, if you are a CUPS advocate, you would + argue that CUPS is better! In any case, let us now move on to + explore how one may configure CUPS for interfacing with MS Windows + print clients via Samba. +

Basic Configuration of CUPS support

+ Printing with CUPS in the most basic smb.conf setup in Samba 3.0 (as was true for 2.2.x) only needs two + settings: printing = cups and + printcap = cups. CUPS does not need a printcap file. + However, the cupsd.conf configuration file knows of two related directives that control + how such a file will be automatically created and maintained by CUPS for the convenience of third party + applications (example: Printcap /etc/printcap and PrintcapFormat BSD). + Legacy programs often require the existence of a printcap file containing printer names or they will refuse to + print. Make sure CUPS is set to generate and maintain a printcap file! For details see + man cupsd.conf and other CUPS-related documentation, like the wealth of documents on your CUPS server + itself: http://localhost:631/documentation.html. +

Linking of smbd with libcups.so

+ Samba has a very special relationship to CUPS. Samba can be compiled with CUPS library support. + Most recent installations have this support enabled. Per default CUPS linking is compiled + into smbd and other Samba binaries. Of course, you can use CUPS even + if Samba is not linked against libcups.so -- but + there are some differences in required or supported configuration + then. +

+ When Samba is compiled against libcups, printcap = cups + uses the CUPS API to list printers, submit jobs, query queues, etc. Otherwise it maps to the System V + commands with an additional -oraw option for printing. On a Linux + system, you can use the ldd utility to find out details (ldd may not be present on + other OS platforms, or its function may be embodied by a different command): + 

+root# ldd `which smbd`
+libssl.so.0.9.6 => /usr/lib/libssl.so.0.9.6 (0x4002d000)
+libcrypto.so.0.9.6 => /usr/lib/libcrypto.so.0.9.6 (0x4005a000)
+libcups.so.2 => /usr/lib/libcups.so.2 (0x40123000)
+[....]
+

+ The line libcups.so.2 => /usr/lib/libcups.so.2 (0x40123000) shows + there is CUPS support compiled into this version of Samba. If this is the case, and printing = cups + is set, then any otherwise manually set print command in smb.conf is ignored. + This is an important point to remember! +

Tip

Should it be necessary, for any reason, to set your own print commands, you can do this by setting + printing = sysv. However, you will loose all the benefits + of tight CUPS/Samba integration. When you do this you must manually configure the printing system commands + (most important: print command; other commands are + lppause command, + lpresume command, + lpq command, + lprm command, + queuepause command and + queue resume command).

Simple smb.conf Settings for CUPS

+ To summarize, here is the simplest printing-related setup for smb.conf to enable basic CUPS support: +

Example 19.1. Simplest printing-related smb.conf

[global]
load printers = yes
printing = cups
printcap name = cups
[printers]
comment = All Printers
path = /var/spool/samba
browseable = no
public = yes
guest ok = yes
writable = no
printable = yes
printer admin = root, @ntadmins

+ This is all you need for basic printing setup for CUPS. It will print + all Graphic, Text, PDF and PostScript file submitted from Windows + clients. However, most of your Windows users would not know how to + send these kind of files to print without opening a GUI + application. Windows clients tend to have local printer drivers + installed. And the GUI application's print buttons start a printer + driver. Your users also very rarely send files from the command + line. Unlike UNIX clients, they hardly submit graphic, text or PDF + formatted files directly to the spooler. They nearly exclusively print + from GUI applications, with a "printer driver" hooked in between the + applications native format and the print data stream. If the backend + printer is not a PostScript device, the print data stream is "binary", + sensible only for the target printer. Read on to learn which problem + this may cause and how to avoid it. +

More complex smb.conf Settings for +CUPS

+Here is a slightly more complex printing-related setup +for smb.conf. It enables general CUPS printing +support for all printers, but defines one printer share which is set +up differently. +

Example 19.2. Overriding global CUPS settings for one printer

[global]
printing = cups
printcap name = cups
load printers = yes
[printers]
comment = All Printers
path = /var/spool/samba
public = yes
guest ok = yes
writable = no
printable = yes
printer admin = root, @ntadmins
[special_printer]
comment = A special printer with his own settings
path = /var/spool/samba-special
printing = sysv
printcap = lpstat
print command = echo "NEW: `date`: printfile %f" >> /tmp/smbprn.log ; \
echo " `date`: p-%p s-%s f-%f" >> /tmp/smbprn.log ; \
echo " `date`: j-%j J-%J z-%z c-%c" >> /tmp/smbprn.log : rm %f
public = no
guest ok = no
writeable = no
printable = yes
printer admin = kurt
hosts deny = 0.0.0.0
hosts allow = turbo_xp, 10.160.50.23, 10.160.51.60

+This special share is only there for testing purposes. It does not write the print job to a file. It just logs the job parameters +known to Samba into the /tmp/smbprn.log file and deletes the jobfile. Moreover, the +printer admin of this share is "kurt" (not the "@ntadmins" group); +guest access is not allowed; the share isn not published to the Network Neighbourhood (so you need to know it is there), and it only +allows access from only three hosts. To prevent CUPS kicking in and taking over the print jobs for that share, we need to set +printing = sysv and +printcap = lpstat. +

Advanced Configuration

+Before we delve into all the configuration options, let us clarify a few +points. Network printing needs to be organized and setup +correctly. Often this is not done correctly. Legacy systems +or small business LAN environments often lack design and good housekeeping. +

Central spooling vs. "Peer-to-Peer" printing

+Many small office or home networks, as well as badly organized larger +environments, allow each client a direct access to available network +printers. This is generally a bad idea. It often blocks one client's +access to the printer when another client's job is printing. It also +might freeze the first client's application while it is waiting to get +rid of the job. Also, there are frequent complaints about various jobs +being printed with their pages mixed with each other. A better concept +is the usage of a "print server": it routes all jobs through one +central system, which responds immediately, takes jobs from multiple +concurrent clients at the same time and in turn transfers them to the +printer(s) in the correct order. +

CUPS/Samba as a "spooling-only" Print Server; "raw" printing +with Vendor Drivers on Windows Clients

+Most traditionally configured UNIX print servers acting on behalf of +Samba's Windows clients represented a really simple setup. Their only +task was to manage the "raw" spooling of all jobs handed to them by +Samba. This approach meant that the Windows clients were expected to +prepare the print job file that it s ready to be sent to the printing +device. Here a native (vendor-supplied) Windows printer +driver for the target device needed to be installed on each and every +client. +

+It is possible to configure CUPS, Samba and your Windows clients in the +same, traditional and simple way. When CUPS printers are configured +for RAW print-through mode operation it is the responsibility of the +Samba client to fully render the print job (file). The file must be +sent in a format that is suitable for direct delivery to the +printer. Clients need to run the vendor-provided drivers to do +this. In this case CUPS will NOT do any print file format conversion +work. +

Driver Installation Methods on Windows Clients

+The printer drivers on the Windows clients may be installed +in two functionally different ways: +

  • manually install the drivers locally on each client, +one by one; this yields the old LanMan style +printing; it uses a \\sambaserver\printershare +type of connection.

  • + + deposit and prepare the drivers (for later download) on +the print server (Samba); this enables the clients to use +"Point and Print" to get drivers semi-automatically installed the +first time they access the printer; with this method NT/2K/XP +clients use the SPOOLSS/MS-RPC +type printing calls.

+The second method is recommended for use over the first. +

Explicitly enable "raw" printing for +application/octet-stream!

+If you use the first option (drivers are installed on the client +side), there is one setting to take care of: CUPS needs to be told +that it should allow "raw" printing of deliberate (binary) file +formats. The CUPS files that need to be correctly set for RAW mode +printers to work are: +

  • /etc/cups/mime.types +

  • /etc/cups/mime.convs

+Both contain entries (at the end of the respective files) which must +be uncommented to allow RAW mode operation. +In/etc/cups/mime.types make sure this line is +present: +

+ application/octet-stream
+

+In /etc/cups/mime.convs, +have this line: +

+ application/octet-stream   application/vnd.cups-raw   0   - 
+

+If these two files are not set up correctly for raw Windows client +printing, you may encounter the dreaded Unable to +convert file 0 in your CUPS error_log file. +

Note

editing the mime.convs and the +mime.types file does not +enforce "raw" printing, it only +allows it. +

Background.  +CUPS being a more security-aware printing system than traditional ones +does not by default allow a user to send deliberate (possibly binary) +data to printing devices. This could be easily abused to launch a +"Denial of Service" attack on your printer(s), causing at the least +the loss of a lot of paper and ink. "Unknown" data are tagged by CUPS +as MIME type: application/octet-stream and not +allowed to go to the printer. By default, you can only send other +(known) MIME types "raw". Sending data "raw" means that CUPS does not +try to convert them and passes them to the printer untouched (see next +chapter for even more background explanations). +

+This is all you need to know to get the CUPS/Samba combo printing +"raw" files prepared by Windows clients, which have vendor drivers +locally installed. If you are not interested in background information about +more advanced CUPS/Samba printing, simply skip the remaining sections +of this chapter. +

Three familiar Methods for driver upload plus a new one

+If you want to use the MS-RPC type printing, you must upload the +drivers onto the Samba server first ([print$] +share). For a discussion on how to deposit printer drivers on the +Samba host (so that the Windows clients can download and use them via +"Point'n'Print") please also refer to the previous chapter of this +HOWTO Collection. There you will find a description or reference to +three methods of preparing the client drivers on the Samba server: +

  • the GUI, "Add Printer Wizard" +upload-from-a-Windows-client +method;

  • the commandline, "smbclient/rpcclient" +upload-from-a-UNIX-workstation +method;

  • + + the Imprints Toolset +method.

+These 3 methods apply to CUPS all the same. A new and more +convenient way to load the Windows drivers into Samba is provided +if you use CUPS: +

  • the cupsaddsmb +utility.

+cupsaddsmb is discussed in much detail further below. But we will +first explore the CUPS filtering system and compare the Windows and +UNIX printing architectures. +

Using CUPS/Samba in an advanced Way -- intelligent printing +with PostScript Driver Download

+Are you still following this? Good. Let's go into more detail then. We now know +how to set up a "dump" printserver, that is, a server which is spooling +printjobs "raw", leaving the print data untouched. +

+Possibly you need to setup CUPS in a more smart way. The reasons could +be manifold: +

  • Maybe your boss wants to get monthly statistics: Which +printer did how many pages? What was the average data size of a job? +What was the average print run per day? What are the typical hourly +peaks in printing? Which departments prints how +much?

  • Maybe you are asked to setup a print quota system: +users should not be able to print more jobs, once they have surpassed +a given limit per period?

  • Maybe your previous network printing setup is a mess +and shall be re-organized from a clean beginning?

  • Maybe you have experiencing too many "Blue Screens", +originating from poorly debugged printer drivers running in NT "kernel +mode"?

+These goals cannot be achieved by a raw print server. To build a +server meeting these requirements, you'll first need to learn about +how CUPS works and how you can enable its features. +

+What follows is the comparison of some fundamental concepts for +Windows and UNIX printing; then is the time for a description of the +CUPS filtering system, how it works and how you can tweak it. +

GDI on Windows -- PostScript on UNIX

+Network printing is one of the most complicated and error-prone +day-to-day tasks any user or an administrator may encounter. This is +true for all OS platforms. And there are reasons for this. +

+You can't expect for most file formats to just throw them towards +printers and they get printed. There needs to be a file format +conversion in between. The problem is: there is no common standard for +print file formats across all manufacturers and printer types. While +PostScript (trademark held by Adobe), and, to an +extent, PCL (trademark held by HP), have developed +into semi-official "standards", by being the most widely used PDLs +(Page Description Languages), there are still +many manufacturers who "roll their own" (their reasons may be +unacceptable license fees for using printer-embedded PostScript +interpreters, etc.). +

Windows Drivers, GDI and EMF

+In Windows OS, the format conversion job is done by the printer +drivers. On MS Windows OS platforms all application programmers have +at their disposal a built-in API, the GDI (Graphical Device +Interface), as part and parcel of the OS itself, to base +themselves on. This GDI core is used as one common unified ground, for +all Windows programs, to draw pictures, fonts and documents +on screen as well as on +paper (=print). Therefore printer driver developers can +standardize on a well-defined GDI output for their own driver +input. Achieving WYSIWYG ("What You See Is What You Get") is +relatively easy, because the on-screen graphic primitives, as well as +the on-paper drawn objects, come from one common source. This source, +the GDI, produces often a file format called EMF (Enhanced +MetaFile). The EMF is processed by the printer driver and +converted to the printer-specific file format. +

Note

+ +To the GDI foundation in MS Windows, Apple has chosen to +put paper and screen output on a common foundation for their +(BSD-UNIX-based, did you know??) Mac OS X and Darwin Operating +Systems. Their Core Graphic Engine uses a +PDF derivative for all display work. +

+ +

Figure 19.1. Windows Printing to a local Printer

Windows Printing to a local Printer

+

UNIX Printfile Conversion and GUI Basics

+In UNIX and Linux, there is no comparable layer built into the OS +kernel(s) or the X (screen display) server. Every application is +responsible for itself to create its print output. Fortunately, most +use PostScript. That gives at least some common ground. Unfortunately, +there are many different levels of quality for this PostScript. And +worse: there is a huge difference (and no common root) in the way how +the same document is displayed on screen and how it is presented on +paper. WYSIWYG is more difficult to achieve. This goes back to the +time decades ago, when the predecessors of X.org, +designing the UNIX foundations and protocols for Graphical User +Interfaces refused to take over responsibility for "paper output" +also, as some had demanded at the time, and restricted itself to +"on-screen only". (For some years now, the "Xprint" project has been +under development, attempting to build printing support into the X +framework, including a PostScript and a PCL driver, but it is not yet +ready for prime time.) You can see this unfavorable inheritance up to +the present day by looking into the various "font" directories on your +system; there are separate ones for fonts used for X display and fonts +to be used on paper. +

Background.  +The PostScript programming language is an "invention" by Adobe Inc., +but its specifications have been published to the full. Its strength +lies in its powerful abilities to describe graphical objects (fonts, +shapes, patterns, lines, curves, dots...), their attributes (color, +linewidth...) and the way to manipulate (scale, distort, rotate, +shift...) them. Because of its open specification, anybody with the +skill can start writing his own implementation of a PostScript +interpreter and use it to display PostScript files on screen or on +paper. Most graphical output devices are based on the concept of +"raster images" or "pixels" (one notable exception are pen +plotters). Of course, you can look at a PostScript file in its textual +form and you will be reading its PostScript code, the language +instructions which need to be interpreted by a rasterizer. Rasterizers +produce pixel images, which may be displayed on screen by a viewer +program or on paper by a printer. +

PostScript and Ghostscript

+So, UNIX is lacking a common ground for printing on paper and +displaying on screen. Despite this unfavorable legacy for UNIX, basic +printing is fairly easy: if you have PostScript printers at your +disposal! The reason is: these devices have a built-in PostScript +language "interpreter", also called a Raster Image +Processor (RIP), (which makes them more expensive than +other types of printers); throw PostScript towards them, and they will +spit out your printed pages. Their RIP is doing all the hard work of +converting the PostScript drawing commands into a bitmap picture as +you see it on paper, in a resolution as done by your printer. This is +no different to PostScript printing of a file from a Windows origin. +

Note

+ +Traditional UNIX programs and printing systems -- while +using PostScript -- are largely not PPD-aware. PPDs are "PostScript +Printer Description" files. They enable you to specify and control all +options a printer supports: duplexing, stapling, punching... Therefore +UNIX users for a long time couldn't choose many of the supported +device and job options, unlike Windows or Apple users. But now there +is CUPS.... +

+

Figure 19.2. Printing to a Postscript Printer

Printing to a Postscript Printer

+

+However, there are other types of printers out there. These don't know +how to print PostScript. They use their own Page Description +Language (PDL, often proprietary). To print to them is much +more demanding. Since your UNIX applications mostly produce +PostScript, and since these devices don't understand PostScript, you +need to convert the printfiles to a format suitable for your printer +on the host, before you can send it away. +

Ghostscript -- the Software RIP for non-PostScript Printers

+Here is where Ghostscript kicks in. Ghostscript is +the traditional (and quite powerful) PostScript interpreter used on +UNIX platforms. It is a RIP in software, capable to do a +lot of file format conversions, for a very broad +spectrum of hardware devices as well as software file formats. +Ghostscript technology and drivers is what enables PostScript printing +to non-PostScript hardware. +

+

Figure 19.3. Ghostscript as a RIP for non-postscript printers

Ghostscript as a RIP for non-postscript printers

+

Tip

+Use the "gs -h" command to check for all built-in "devices" of your +Ghostscript version. If you specify e.g. a parameter of +-sDEVICE=png256 on your Ghostscript command +line, you are asking Ghostscript to convert the input into a PNG +file. Naming a "device" on the commandline is the most important +single parameter to tell Ghostscript how exactly it should render the +input. New Ghostscript versions are released at fairly regular +intervals, now by artofcode LLC. They are initially put under the +"AFPL" license, but re-released under the GNU GPL as soon as the next +AFPL version appears. GNU Ghostscript is probably the version +installed on most Samba systems. But it has got some +deficiencies. Therefore ESP Ghostscript was developed as an +enhancement over GNU Ghostscript, with lots of bug-fixes, additional +devices and improvements. It is jointly maintained by developers from +CUPS, Gimp-Print, MandrakeSoft, SuSE, RedHat and Debian. It includes +the "cups" device (essential to print to non-PS printers from CUPS). +

PostScript Printer Description (PPD) Specification

+While PostScript in essence is a Page Description +Language (PDL) to represent the page layout in a +device independent way, real world print jobs are +always ending up to be output on a hardware with device-specific +features. To take care of all the differences in hardware, and to +allow for innovations, Adobe has specified a syntax and file format +for PostScript Printer Description (PPD) +files. Every PostScript printer ships with one of these files. +

+PPDs contain all information about general and special features of the +given printer model: Which different resolutions can it handle? Does +it have a Duplexing Unit? How many paper trays are there? What media +types and sizes does it take? For each item it also names the special +command string to be sent to the printer (mostly inside the PostScript +file) in order to enable it. +

+Information from these PPDs is meant to be taken into account by the +printer drivers. Therefore, installed as part of the Windows +PostScript driver for a given printer is the printer's PPD. Where it +makes sense, the PPD features are presented in the drivers' UI dialogs +to display to the user as choice of print options. In the end, the +user selections are somehow written (in the form of special +PostScript, PJL, JCL or vendor-dependent commands) into the PostScript +file created by the driver. +

Warning

+ +A PostScript file that was created to contain device-specific commands +for achieving a certain print job output (e.g. duplexed, stapled and +punched) on a specific target machine, may not print as expected, or +may not be printable at all on other models; it also may not be fit +for further processing by software (e.g. by a PDF distilling program). +

CUPS can use all Windows-formatted Vendor PPDs

+CUPS can handle all spec-compliant PPDs as supplied by the +manufacturers for their PostScript models. Even if a +UNIX/Linux-illiterate vendor might not have mentioned our favorite +OS in his manuals and brochures -- you can safely trust this: +if you get hold of the Windows NT version of the PPD, you +can use it unchanged in CUPS and thus access the full +power of your printer just like a Windows NT user could! +

Tip

+To check the spec compliance of any PPD online, go to http://www.cups.org/testppd.php +and upload your PPD. You will see the results displayed +immediately. CUPS in all versions after 1.1.19 has a much more strict +internal PPD parsing and checking code enabled; in case of printing +trouble this online resource should be one of your first pitstops. +

Warning

+ + +For real PostScript printers don't use the +Foomatic or cupsomatic +PPDs from Linuxprinting.org. With these devices the original +vendor-provided PPDs are always the first choice! +

Tip

+If you are looking for an original vendor-provided PPD of a specific +device, and you know that an NT4 box (or any other Windows box) on +your LAN has the PostScript driver installed, just use +smbclient //NT4-box/print\$ -U username to +access the Windows directory where all printer driver files are +stored. First look in the W32X86/2 subdir for +the PPD you are seeking. +

CUPS also uses PPDs for non-PostScript Printers

+CUPS also uses specially crafted PPDs to handle non-PostScript +printers. These PPDs are usually not available from the vendors (and +no, you can't just take the PPD of a Postscript printer with the same +model name and hope it works for the non-PostScript version too). To +understand how these PPDs work for non-PS printers we first need to +dive deeply into the CUPS filtering and file format conversion +architecture. Stay tuned. +

The CUPS Filtering Architecture

+The core of the CUPS filtering system is based on +Ghostscript. In addition to Ghostscript, CUPS +uses some other filters of its own. You (or your OS vendor) may have +plugged in even more filters. CUPS handles all data file formats under +the label of various MIME types. Every incoming +printfile is subjected to an initial +auto-typing. The auto-typing determines its given +MIME type. A given MIME type implies zero or more possible filtering +chains relevant to the selected target printer. This section discusses +how MIME types recognition and conversion rules interact. They are +used by CUPS to automatically setup a working filtering chain for any +given input data format. +

+If CUPS rasterizes a PostScript file natively to +a bitmap, this is done in 2 stages: +

  • the first stage uses a Ghostscript device named "cups" +(this is since version 1.1.15) and produces a generic raster format +called "CUPS raster". +

  • the second stage uses a "raster driver" which converts +the generic CUPS raster to a device specific raster.

+Make sure your Ghostscript version has the "cups" device compiled in +(check with gs -h | grep cups). Otherwise you +may encounter the dreaded Unable to convert file +0 in your CUPS error_log file. To have "cups" as a +device in your Ghostscript, you either need to patch GNU +Ghostscript and re-compile or use ESP Ghostscript. The +superior alternative is ESP Ghostscript: it supports not just CUPS, +but 300 other devices too (while GNU Ghostscript supports only about +180). Because of this broad output device support, ESP Ghostscript is +the first choice for non-CUPS spoolers too. It is now recommended by +Linuxprinting.org for all spoolers. +

+ + +CUPS printers may be setup to use external +rendering paths. One of the most common ones is provided by the +Foomatic/cupsomatic concept, from Linuxprinting.org. This +uses the classical Ghostscript approach, doing everything in one +step. It doesn't use the "cups" device, but one of the many +others. However, even for Foomatic/cupsomatic usage, best results and + +broadest printer model support is provided by ESP Ghostscript (more +about cupsomatic/Foomatic, particularly the new version called now +foomatic-rip, follows below). +

MIME types and CUPS Filters

+ +CUPS reads the file /etc/cups/mime.types +(and all other files carrying a *.types suffix +in the same directory) upon startup. These files contain the MIME +type recognition rules which are applied when CUPS runs its +auto-typing routines. The rule syntax is explained in the man page +for mime.types and in the comments section of the +mime.types file itself. A simple rule reads +like this: +

+ +

+ application/pdf         pdf string(0,%PDF)
+

+This means: if a filename has either a +.pdf suffix, or if the magic +string %PDF is right at the +beginning of the file itself (offset 0 from the start), then it is +a PDF file (application/pdf). +Another rule is this: +

+ application/postscript  ai eps ps string(0,%!) string(0,<04>%!)
+

+Its meaning: if the filename has one of the suffixes +.ai, .eps, +.ps or if the file itself starts with one of the +strings %! or <04>%!, it +is a generic PostScript file +(application/postscript). +

Note

+There is a very important difference between two similar MIME type in +CUPS: one is application/postscript, the other is +application/vnd.cups-postscript. While +application/postscript is meant to be device +independent (job options for the file are still outside the PS file +content, embedded in commandline or environment variables by CUPS), +application/vnd.cups-postscript may have the job +options inserted into the PostScript data itself (were +applicable). The transformation of the generic PostScript +(application/postscript) to the device-specific version +(application/vnd.cups-postscript) is the responsibility of the +CUPS pstops filter. pstops uses information +contained in the PPD to do the transformation. +

Warning

+Don't confuse the other mime.types file your system might be using +with the one in the /etc/cups/ directory. +

+CUPS can handle ASCII text, HP-GL, PDF, PostScript, DVI and a +lot of image formats (GIF. PNG, TIFF, JPEG, Photo-CD, SUN-Raster, +PNM, PBM, SGI-RGB and some more) and their associated MIME types +with its filters. +

MIME type Conversion Rules

+CUPS reads the file /etc/cups/mime.convs +(and all other files named with a *.convs +suffix in the same directory) upon startup. These files contain +lines naming an input MIME type, an output MIME type, a format +conversion filter which can produce the output from the input type +and virtual costs associated with this conversion. One example line +reads like this: +

+ application/pdf         application/postscript   33   pdftops
+

+This means that the pdftops filter will take +application/pdf as input and produce +application/postscript as output, the virtual +cost of this operation is 33 CUPS-$. The next filter is more +expensive, costing 66 CUPS-$: +

+ application/vnd.hp-HPGL application/postscript   66   hpgltops
+

+This is the hpgltops, which processes HP-GL +plotter files to PostScript. +

+ application/octet-stream
+

+Here are two more examples: +

+ application/x-shell     application/postscript   33    texttops
+ text/plain              application/postscript   33    texttops
+

+The last two examples name the texttops filter +to work on "text/plain" as well as on "application/x-shell". (Hint: +this differentiation is needed for the syntax highlighting feature of +"texttops"). +

Filter Requirements

+There are many more combinations named in mime.convs. However, you +are not limited to use the ones pre-defined there. You can plug in any +filter you like into the CUPS framework. It must meet, or must be made +to meet some minimal requirements. If you find (or write) a cool +conversion filter of some kind, make sure it complies to what CUPS +needs, and put in the right lines in mime.types +and mime.convs, then it will work seamlessly +inside CUPS! +

Tip

+The mentioned "CUPS requirements" for filters are simple. Take +filenames or stdin as input and write to +stdout. They should take these 5 or 6 arguments: +printer job user title copies options [filename] +

Printer

The name of the printer queue (normally this is the +name of the filter being run)

job

The numeric job ID for the job being +printed

user

The string from the originating-user-name +attribute

title

The string from the job-name attribute

copies

The numeric value from the number-copies +attribute

options

The job options

filename

(Optionally) The print request file (if missing, +filters expected data fed through stdin). In most +cases it is very easy to write a simple wrapper script around existing +filters to make them work with CUPS.

Prefilters

+As was said, PostScript is the central file format to any UNIX based +printing system. From PostScript, CUPS generates raster data to feed +non-PostScript printers. +

+But what is happening if you send one of the supported non-PS formats +to print? Then CUPS runs "pre-filters" on these input formats to +generate PostScript first. There are pre-filters to create PS from +ASCII text, PDF, DVI or HP-GL. The outcome of these filters is always +of MIME type application/postscript (meaning that +any device-specific print options are not yet embedded into the +PostScript by CUPS, and that the next filter to be called is +pstops). Another pre-filter is running on all supported image formats, +the imagetops filter. Its outcome is always of +MIME type application/vnd.cups-postscript +(not application/postscript), meaning it has the +print options already embedded into the file. +

+

Figure 19.4. Prefiltering in CUPS to form Postscript

Prefiltering in CUPS to form Postscript

+

pstops

+pstopsis the filter to convert +application/postscript to +application/vnd.cups-postscript. It was said +above that this filter inserts all device-specific print options +(commands to the printer to ask for the duplexing of output, or +stapling an punching it, etc.) into the PostScript file. +

+

Figure 19.5. Adding Device-specific Print Options

Adding Device-specific Print Options

+

+This is not all: other tasks performed by it are: +

  • +selecting the range of pages to be printed (if you choose to +print only pages "3, 6, 8-11, 16, 19-21", or only the odd numbered +ones) +

  • +putting 2 or more logical pages on one sheet of paper (the +so-called "number-up" function) +

  • counting the pages of the job to insert the accounting +information into the /var/log/cups/page_log +

pstoraster

+pstoraster is at the core of the CUPS filtering +system. It is responsible for the first stage of the rasterization +process. Its input is of MIME type application/vnd.cups-postscript; +its output is application/vnd.cups-raster. This output format is not +yet meant to be printable. Its aim is to serve as a general purpose +input format for more specialized raster drivers, +that are able to generate device-specific printer data. +

+

Figure 19.6. Postscript to intermediate Raster format

Postscript to intermediate Raster format

+

+CUPS raster is a generic raster format with powerful features. It is +able to include per-page information, color profiles and more to be +used by the following downstream raster drivers. Its MIME type is +registered with IANA and its specification is of course completely +open. It is designed to make it very easy and inexpensive for +manufacturers to develop Linux and UNIX raster drivers for their +printer models, should they choose to do so. CUPS always takes care +for the first stage of rasterization so these vendors don't need to care +about Ghostscript complications (in fact, there is currently more +than one vendor financing the development of CUPS raster drivers). +

+

Figure 19.7. CUPS-raster production using Ghostscript

CUPS-raster production using Ghostscript

+

+CUPS versions before version 1.1.15 were shipping a binary (or source +code) standalone filter, named "pstoraster". pstoraster was derived +from GNU Ghostscript 5.50, and could be installed besides and in +addition to any GNU or AFPL Ghostscript package without conflicting. +

+From version 1.1.15, this has changed. The functions for this has been +integrated back into Ghostscript (now based on GNU Ghostscript version +7.05). The "pstoraster" filter is now a simple shell script calling +gs with the -sDEVICE=cups +parameter. If your Ghostscript doesn't show a success on asking for +gs -h |grep cups, you might not be able to +print. Update your Ghostscript then! +

imagetops and imagetoraster

+Above in the section about prefilters, we mentioned the prefilter +that generates PostScript from image formats. The imagetoraster +filter is used to convert directly from image to raster, without the +intermediate PostScript stage. It is used more often than the above +mentioned prefilters. Here is a summarizing flowchart of image file +filtering: +

+

Figure 19.8. Image format to CUPS-raster format conversion

Image format to CUPS-raster format conversion

+

rasterto [printers specific]

+CUPS ships with quite some different raster drivers processing CUPS +raster. On my system I find in /usr/lib/cups/filter/ these: +rastertoalps, rastertobj, rastertoepson, rastertoescp, +rastertopcl, rastertoturboprint, rastertoapdk, rastertodymo, +rastertoescp, rastertohp and +rastertoprinter. Don't worry if you have less +than this; some of these are installed by commercial add-ons to CUPS +(like rastertoturboprint), others (like +rastertoprinter) by 3rd party driver +development projects (such as Gimp-Print) wanting to cooperate as +closely as possible with CUPS. +

+

Figure 19.9. Raster to Printer Specific formats

Raster to Printer Specific formats

+

CUPS Backends

+The last part of any CUPS filtering chain is a "backend". Backends +are special programs that send the print-ready file to the final +device. There is a separate backend program for any transfer +"protocol" of sending printjobs over the network, or for every local +interface. Every CUPS printqueue needs to have a CUPS "device-URI" +associated with it. The device URI is the way to encode the backend +used to send the job to its destination. Network device-URIs are using +two slashes in their syntax, local device URIs only one, as you can +see from the following list. Keep in mind that local interface names +may vary much from my examples, if your OS is not Linux: +

usb

+This backend sends printfiles to USB-connected printers. An +example for the CUPS device-URI to use is: +usb:/dev/usb/lp0 +

serial

+This backend sends printfiles to serially connected printers. +An example for the CUPS device-URI to use is: +serial:/dev/ttyS0?baud=11500 +

parallel

+This backend sends printfiles to printers connected to the +parallel port. An example for the CUPS device-URI to use is: +parallel:/dev/lp0 +

scsi

+This backend sends printfiles to printers attached to the +SCSI interface. An example for the CUPS device-URI to use is: +scsi:/dev/sr1 +

lpd

+This backend sends printfiles to LPR/LPD connected network +printers. An example for the CUPS device-URI to use is: +lpd://remote_host_name/remote_queue_name +

AppSocket/HP JetDirect

+This backend sends printfiles to AppSocket (a.k.a. "HP +JetDirect") connected network printers. An example for the CUPS +device-URI to use is: +socket://10.11.12.13:9100 +

ipp

+This backend sends printfiles to IPP connected network +printers (or to other CUPS servers). Examples for CUPS device-URIs +to use are: +ipp:://192.193.194.195/ipp +(for many HP printers) or +ipp://remote_cups_server/printers/remote_printer_name +

http

+This backend sends printfiles to HTTP connected printers. +(The http:// CUPS backend is only a symlink to the ipp:// backend.) +Examples for the CUPS device-URIs to use are: +http:://192.193.194.195:631/ipp +(for many HP printers) or +http://remote_cups_server:631/printers/remote_printer_name +

smb

+This backend sends printfiles to printers shared by a Windows +host. An example for CUPS device-URIs to use are: +smb://workgroup/server/printersharename +Or +smb://server/printersharename +or +smb://username:password@workgroup/server/printersharename +or +smb://username:password@server/printersharename. +The smb:// backend is a symlink to the Samba utility +smbspool (doesn't ship with CUPS). If the +symlink is not present in your CUPS backend directory, have your +root user create it: ln -s `which smbspool` +/usr/lib/cups/backend/smb. +

+It is easy to write your own backends as Shell or Perl scripts, if you +need any modification or extension to the CUPS print system. One +reason could be that you want to create "special" printers which send +the printjobs as email (through a "mailto:/" backend), convert them to +PDF (through a "pdfgen:/" backend) or dump them to "/dev/null" (In +fact I have the system-wide default printer set up to be connected to +a "devnull:/" backend: there are just too many people sending jobs +without specifying a printer, or scripts and programs which don't name +a printer. The system-wide default deletes the job and sends a polite +mail back to the $USER asking him to always specify a correct +printername). +

+Not all of the mentioned backends may be present on your system or +usable (depending on your hardware configuration). One test for all +available CUPS backends is provided by the lpinfo +utility. Used with the -v parameter, it lists +all available backends: +

+$ lpinfo -v
+

cupsomatic/Foomatic -- how do they fit into the Picture?

+"cupsomatic" filters may be the most widely used on CUPS +installations. You must be clear about the fact that these were not +developed by the CUPS people. They are a "Third Party" add-on to +CUPS. They utilize the traditional Ghostscript devices to render jobs +for CUPS. When troubleshooting, you should know about the +difference. Here the whole rendering process is done in one stage, +inside Ghostscript, using an appropriate "device" for the target +printer. cupsomatic uses PPDs which are generated from the "Foomatic" +Printer & Driver Database at Linuxprinting.org. +

+You can recognize these PPDs from the line calling the +cupsomatic filter: +

+ *cupsFilter: "application/vnd.cups-postscript  0  cupsomatic"
+

+This line you may find amongst the first 40 or so lines of the PPD +file. If you have such a PPD installed, the printer shows up in the +CUPS web interface with a foomatic namepart for +the driver description. cupsomatic is a Perl script that runs +Ghostscript, with all the complicated commandline options +auto-constructed from the selected PPD and commandline options give to +the printjob. +

+However, cupsomatic is now deprecated. Its PPDs (especially the first +generation of them, still in heavy use out there) are not meeting the +Adobe specifications. You might also suffer difficulties when you try +to download them with "Point'n'Print" to Windows clients. A better, +and more powerful successor is now in a very stable Beta-version +available: it is called foomatic-rip. To use +foomatic-rip as a filter with CUPS, you need the new-type PPDs. These +have a similar, but different line: +

+
+ *cupsFilter: "application/vnd.cups-postscript  0  foomatic-rip"
+
+

+The PPD generating engine at Linuxprinting.org has been revamped. +The new PPDs comply to the Adobe spec. On top, they also provide a +new way to specify different quality levels (hi-res photo, normal +color, grayscale, draft...) with a single click (whereas before you +could have required 5 or more different selections (media type, +resolution, inktype, dithering algorithm...). There is support for +custom-size media built in. There is support to switch +print-options from page to page, in the middle of a job. And the +best thing is: the new foomatic-rip now works seamlessly with all +legacy spoolers too (like LPRng, BSD-LPD, PDQ, PPR etc.), providing +for them access to use PPDs for their printing! +

The Complete Picture

+If you want to see an overview over all the filters and how they +relate to each other, the complete picture of the puzzle is at the end +of this document. +

mime.convs

+CUPS auto-constructs all possible filtering chain paths for any given +MIME type, and every printer installed. But how does it decide in +favor or against a specific alternative? (There may often be cases, +where there is a choice of two or more possible filtering chains for +the same target printer). Simple: you may have noticed the figures in +the 3rd column of the mime.convs file. They represent virtual costs +assigned to this filter. Every possible filtering chain will sum up to +a total "filter cost". CUPS decides for the most "inexpensive" route. +

Tip

+The setting of FilterLimit 1000 in +cupsd.conf will not allow more filters to +run concurrently than will consume a total of 1000 virtual filter +cost. This is a very efficient way to limit the load of any CUPS +server by setting an appropriate "FilterLimit" value. A FilterLimit of +200 allows roughly 1 job at a time, while a FilterLimit of 1000 allows +approximately 5 jobs maximum at a time. +

"Raw" printing

+You can tell CUPS to print (nearly) any file "raw". "Raw" means it +will not be filtered. CUPS will send the file to the printer "as is" +without bothering if the printer is able to digest it. Users need to +take care themselves that they send sensible data formats only. Raw +printing can happen on any queue if the "-o raw" option is specified +on the command line. You can also set up raw-only queues by simply not +associating any PPD with it. This command: +

+$ lpadmin -P rawprinter -v socket://11.12.13.14:9100 -E
+

+sets up a queue named "rawprinter", connected via the "socket" +protocol (a.k.a. "HP JetDirect") to the device at IP address +11.12.1.3.14, using port 9100. (If you had added a PPD with +-P /path/to/PPD to this command line, you would +have installed a "normal" printqueue. +

+CUPS will automatically treat each job sent to a queue as a "raw" one, +if it can't find a PPD associated with the queue. However, CUPS will +only send known MIME types (as defined in its own mime.types file) and +refuse others. +

"application/octet-stream" printing

+Any MIME type with no rule in the +/etc/cups/mime.types file is regarded as unknown +or application/octet-stream and will not be +sent. Because CUPS refuses to print unknown MIME types per default, +you will probably have experienced the fact that printjobs originating +from Windows clients were not printed. You may have found an error +message in your CUPS logs like: +

+ Unable to convert file 0 to printable format for job
+

+To enable the printing of "application/octet-stream" files, edit +these two files: +

  • /etc/cups/mime.convs

  • /etc/cups/mime.types

+Both contain entries (at the end of the respective files) which must +be uncommented to allow RAW mode operation for +application/octet-stream. In /etc/cups/mime.types +make sure this line is present: +

+ application/octet-stream
+

+This line (with no specific auto-typing rule set) makes all files +not otherwise auto-typed a member of application/octet-stream. In +/etc/cups/mime.convs, have this +line: +

+ application/octet-stream   application/vnd.cups-raw   0   -
+

+This line tells CUPS to use the Null Filter +(denoted as "-", doing... nothing at all) on +application/octet-stream, and tag the result as +application/vnd.cups-raw. This last one is +always a green light to the CUPS scheduler to now hand the file over +to the "backend" connecting to the printer and sending it over. +

Note

Editing the mime.convs and the +mime.types file does not +enforce "raw" printing, it only +allows it. +

Background.  +CUPS being a more security-aware printing system than traditional ones +does not by default allow one to send deliberate (possibly binary) +data to printing devices. (This could be easily abused to launch a +Denial of Service attack on your printer(s), causing at least the loss +of a lot of paper and ink...) "Unknown" data are regarded by CUPS +as MIME type +application/octet-stream. While you +can send data "raw", the MIME type for these must +be one that is known to CUPS and an allowed one. The file +/etc/cups/mime.types defines the "rules" how CUPS +recognizes MIME types. The file +/etc/cups/mime.convs decides which file +conversion filter(s) may be applied to which MIME types. +

PostScript Printer Descriptions (PPDs) for non-PS Printers

+Originally PPDs were meant to be used for PostScript printers +only. Here, they help to send device-specific commands and settings +to the RIP which processes the jobfile. CUPS has extended this +scope for PPDs to cover non-PostScript printers too. This was not +very difficult, because it is a standardized file format. In a way +it was logical too: CUPS handles PostScript and uses a PostScript +RIP (=Ghostscript) to process the jobfiles. The only difference is: +a PostScript printer has the RIP built-in, for other types of +printers the Ghostscript RIP runs on the host computer. +

+PPDs for a non-PS printer have a few lines that are unique to +CUPS. The most important one looks similar to this: +

+ *cupsFilter: application/vnd.cups-raster  66   rastertoprinter
+

+It is the last piece in the CUPS filtering puzzle. This line tells the +CUPS daemon to use as a last filter "rastertoprinter". This filter +should be served as input an "application/vnd.cups-raster" MIME type +file. Therefore CUPS should auto-construct a filtering chain, which +delivers as its last output the specified MIME type. This is then +taken as input to the specified "rastertoprinter" filter. After this +the last filter has done its work ("rastertoprinter" is a Gimp-Print +filter), the file should go to the backend, which sends it to the +output device. +

+CUPS by default ships only a few generic PPDs, but they are good for +several hundred printer models. You may not be able to control +different paper trays, or you may get larger margins than your +specific model supports): +

Table 19.1. PPD's shipped with CUPS

PPD filePrinter type
deskjet.ppdolder HP inkjet printers and compatible
deskjet2.ppdnewer HP inkjet printers and compatible
dymo.ppdlabel printers
epson9.ppdEpson 24pin impact printers and compatible
epson24.ppdEpson 24pin impact printers and compatible
okidata9.ppdOkidata 9pin impact printers and compatible
okidat24.ppdOkidata 24pin impact printers and compatible
stcolor.ppdolder Epson Stylus Color printers
stcolor2.ppdnewer Epson Stylus Color printers
stphoto.ppdolder Epson Stylus Photo printers
stphoto2.ppdnewer Epson Stylus Photo printers
laserjet.ppdall PCL printers. Further below is a discussion of several other driver/PPD-packages suitable for use with CUPS.

Difference between cupsomatic/foomatic-rip and +native CUPS printing

+Native CUPS rasterization works in two steps. +

  • +First is the "pstoraster" step. It uses the special "cups" + +device from ESP Ghostscript 7.05.x as its tool +

  • +Second comes the "rasterdriver" step. It uses various +device-specific filters; there are several vendors who provide good +quality filters for this step, some are Free Software, some are +Shareware/Non-Free, some are proprietary.

+Often this produces better quality (and has several more +advantages) than other methods. +

+

Figure 19.10. cupsomatic/foomatic processing versus Native CUPS

cupsomatic/foomatic processing versus Native CUPS

+

+One other method is the cupsomatic/foomatic-rip +way. Note that cupsomatic is not made by the CUPS +developers. It is an independent contribution to printing development, +made by people from Linuxprinting.org (see also http://www.cups.org/cups-help.html). +cupsomatic is no longer developed and maintained and is no longer +supported. It has now been replaced by +foomatic-rip. foomatic-rip is a complete re-write +of the old cupsomatic idea, but very much improved and generalized to +other (non-CUPS) spoolers. An upgrade to foomatic-rip is strongly +advised, especially if you are upgrading to a recent version of CUPS +too. +

+ + +Both the cupsomatic (old) and the foomatic-rip (new) methods from +Linuxprinting.org use the traditional Ghostscript print file +processing, doing everything in a single step. It therefore relies on +all the other devices built-in into Ghostscript. The quality is as +good (or bad) as Ghostscript rendering is in other spoolers. The +advantage is that this method supports many printer models not +supported (yet) by the more modern CUPS method. +

+Of course, you can use both methods side by side on one system (and +even for one printer, if you set up different queues), and find out +which works best for you. +

+cupsomatic "kidnaps" the printfile after the +application/vnd.cups-postscript stage and +deviates it through the CUPS-external, system wide Ghostscript +installation: Therefore the printfile bypasses the "pstoraster" filter +(and thus also bypasses the CUPS-raster-drivers +"rastertosomething"). After Ghostscript finished its rasterization, +cupsomatic hands the rendered file directly to the CUPS backend. The +flowchart above illustrates the difference between native CUPS +rendering and the Foomatic/cupsomatic method. +

Examples for filtering Chains

+Here are a few examples of commonly occurring filtering chains to +illustrate the workings of CUPS. +

+Assume you want to print a PDF file to a HP JetDirect-connected +PostScript printer, but you want to print the pages 3-5, 7, 11-13 +only, and you want to print them "2-up" and "duplex": +

  • your print options (page selection as required, 2-up, +duplex) are passed to CUPS on the commandline;

  • the (complete) PDF file is sent to CUPS and autotyped as +application/pdf;

  • the file therefore first must pass the +pdftops pre-filter, which produces PostScript +MIME type application/postscript (a preview here +would still show all pages of the original PDF);

  • the file then passes the pstops +filter which applies the commandline options: it selects the pages +2-5, 7 and 11-13, creates and imposed layout "2 pages on 1 sheet" and +inserts the correct "duplex" command (as is defined in the printer's +PPD) into the new PostScript file; the file now is of PostScript MIME +type +application/vnd.cups-postscript;

  • the file goes to the socket +backend, which transfers the job to the printers.

+ The resulting filter chain therefore is as drawn in the image below. +

Figure 19.11. PDF to socket chain

PDF to socket chain

+Assume your want to print the same filter to an USB-connected +Epson Stylus Photo printer, installed with the CUPS +stphoto2.ppd. The first few filtering stages +are nearly the same: +

  • your print options (page selection as required, 2-up, +duplex) are passed to CUPS on the commandline;

  • the (complete) PDF file is sent to CUPS and autotyped as +application/pdf;

  • the file therefore first must pass the +pdftops pre-filter, which produces PostScript +MIME type application/postscript (a preview here +would still show all pages of the original PDF);

  • the file then passes the "pstops" filter which applies +the commandline options: it selects the pages 2-5, 7 and 11-13, +creates and imposed layout "2 pages on 1 sheet" and inserts the +correct "duplex" command... (OOoops -- this printer and his PPD +don't support duplex printing at all -- this option will be ignored +then) into the new PostScript file; the file now is of PostScript +MIME type +application/vnd.cups-postscript;

  • the file then passes the +pstoraster stage and becomes MIME type +application/cups-raster;

  • finally, the rastertoepson filter +does its work (as is indicated in the printer's PPD), creating the +printer-specific raster data and embedding any user-selected +print-options into the print data stream;

  • the file goes to the usb backend, +which transfers the job to the printers.

+ The resulting filter chain therefore is as drawn in the image below. +

Figure 19.12. PDF to USB chain

PDF to USB chain

Sources of CUPS drivers / PPDs

+On the internet you can find now many thousand CUPS-PPD files +(with their companion filters), in many national languages, +supporting more than 1000 non-PostScript models. +

  • ESP +PrintPro (commercial, +non-Free) is packaged with more than 3000 PPDs, ready for +successful use "out of the box" on Linux, Mac OS X, IBM-AIX, +HP-UX, Sun-Solaris, SGI-IRIX, Compaq Tru64, Digital UNIX and some +more commercial Unices (it is written by the CUPS developers +themselves and its sales help finance the further development of +CUPS, as they feed their creators).

  • the Gimp-Print-Project + (GPL, Free Software) +provides around 140 PPDs (supporting nearly 400 printers, many driven +to photo quality output), to be used alongside the Gimp-Print CUPS +filters;

  • TurboPrint + (Shareware, non-Free) supports +roughly the same amount of printers in excellent +quality;

  • OMNI + +(LPGL, Free) is a package made by IBM, now containing support for more +than 400 printers, stemming from the inheritance of IBM OS/2 Know-How +ported over to Linux (CUPS support is in a Beta-stage at +present);

  • HPIJS + (BSD-style licenses, Free) +supports around 150 of HP's own printers and is also providing +excellent print quality now (currently available only via the Foomatic +path);

  • Foomatic/cupsomatic + (LPGL, Free) from +Linuxprinting.org are providing PPDs for practically every Ghostscript +filter known to the world (including Omni, Gimp-Print and +HPIJS).

Note

+The cupsomatic/Foomatic trick from Linuxprinting.org works +differently from the other drivers. This is explained elsewhere in this +document. +

Printing with Interface Scripts

+CUPS also supports the usage of "interface scripts" as known from +System V AT&T printing systems. These are often used for PCL +printers, from applications that generate PCL print jobs. Interface +scripts are specific to printer models. They have a similar role as +PPDs for PostScript printers. Interface scripts may inject the Escape +sequences as required into the print data stream, if the user has +chosen to select a certain paper tray, or print landscape, or use A3 +paper, etc. Interfaces scripts are practically unknown in the Linux +realm. On HP-UX platforms they are more often used. You can use any +working interface script on CUPS too. Just install the printer with +the -i option: +

+root# lpadmin -p pclprinter -v socket://11.12.13.14:9100 \
+  -i /path/to/interface-script
+

+Interface scripts might be the "unknown animal" to many. However, +with CUPS they provide the most easy way to plug in your own +custom-written filtering script or program into one specific print +queue (some information about the traditional usage of interface scripts is +to be found at http://playground.sun.com/printing/documentation/interface.html). +

Network printing (purely Windows)

+Network printing covers a lot of ground. To understand what exactly +goes on with Samba when it is printing on behalf of its Windows +clients, let's first look at a "purely Windows" setup: Windows clients +with a Windows NT print server. +

From Windows Clients to an NT Print Server

+Windows clients printing to an NT-based print server have two +options. They may +

  • execute the driver locally and render the GDI output +(EMF) into the printer specific format on their own, +or

  • send the GDI output (EMF) to the server, where the +driver is executed to render the printer specific +output.

+Both print paths are shown in the flowcharts below. +

Driver Execution on the Client

+In the first case the print server must spool the file as "raw", +meaning it shouldn't touch the jobfile and try to convert it in any +way. This is what traditional UNIX-based print server can do too; and +at a better performance and more reliably than NT print server. This +is what most Samba administrators probably are familiar with. One +advantage of this setup is that this "spooling-only" print server may +be used even if no driver(s) for UNIX are available it is sufficient +to have the Windows client drivers available and installed on the +clients. +

+

Figure 19.13. Print Driver execution on the Client

Print Driver execution on the Client

+

Driver Execution on the Server

+The other path executes the printer driver on the server. The clients +transfers print files in EMF format to the server. The server uses the +PostScript, PCL, ESC/P or other driver to convert the EMF file into +the printer-specific language. It is not possible for UNIX to do the +same. Currently there is no program or method to convert a Windows +client's GDI output on a UNIX server into something a printer could +understand. +

+

Figure 19.14. Print Driver execution on the Server

Print Driver execution on the Server

+

+However, there is something similar possible with CUPS. Read on... +

Network Printing (Windows clients -- UNIX/Samba Print +Servers)

+Since UNIX print servers cannot execute the Win32 +program code on their platform, the picture is somewhat +different. However, this doesn't limit your options all that +much. In the contrary, you may have a way here to implement printing +features which are not possible otherwise. +

From Windows Clients to a CUPS/Samba Print Server

+Here is a simple recipe showing how you can take advantage of CUPS +powerful features for the benefit of your Windows network printing +clients: +

  • Let the Windows clients send PostScript to the CUPS +server.

  • Let the CUPS server render the PostScript into device +specific raster format.

+This requires the clients to use a PostScript driver (even if the +printer is a non-PostScript model. It also requires that you have a +"driver" on the CUPS server. +

+Firstly, to enable CUPS based printing through Samba the +following options should be set in your smb.conf file [global] +section: +

  • printing = cups

  • printcap = cups

+When these parameters are specified, all manually set print directives +(like print command, or lppause command) in smb.conf (as well as +in samba itself) will be ignored. Instead, Samba will directly +interface with CUPS through it's application program interface (API) - +as long as Samba has been compiled with CUPS library (libcups) +support. If Samba has NOT been compiled with CUPS support, and if no +other print commands are set up, then printing will use the +System V AT&T command set, with the -oraw +option automatically passing through (if you want your own defined +print commands to work with a Samba that has CUPS support compiled in, +simply use printing = sysv). +

+

Figure 19.15. Printing via CUPS/samba server

Printing via CUPS/samba server

+

Samba receiving Jobfiles and passing them to CUPS

+Samba must use its own spool directory (it is set +by a line similar to path = /var/spool/samba, +in the [printers] or +[printername] section of +smb.conf). Samba receives the job in its own +spool space and passes it into the spool directory of CUPS (the CUPS +spooling directory is set by the RequestRoot +directive, in a line that defaults to RequestRoot +/var/spool/cups). CUPS checks the access rights of its +spool dir and resets it to healthy values with every re-start. We have +seen quite some people who had used a common spooling space for Samba +and CUPS, and were struggling for weeks with this "problem". +

+A Windows user authenticates only to Samba (by whatever means is +configured). If Samba runs on the same host as CUPS, you only need to +allow "localhost" to print. If they run on different machines, you +need to make sure the Samba host gets access to printing on CUPS. +

Network PostScript RIP: CUPS Filters on Server -- clients use +PostScript Driver with CUPS-PPDs

+PPDs can control all print device options. They are usually provided +by the manufacturer; if you own a PostScript printer, that is. PPD +files (PostScript Printer Descriptions) are always a component of +PostScript printer drivers on MS Windows or Apple Mac OS systems. They +are ASCII files containing user-selectable print options, mapped to +appropriate PostScript, PCL or PJL commands for the target +printer. Printer driver GUI dialogs translate these options +"on-the-fly" into buttons and drop-down lists for the user to select. +

+CUPS can load, without any conversions, the PPD file from any Windows +(NT is recommended) PostScript driver and handle the options. There is +a web browser interface to the print options (select http://localhost:631/printers/ +and click on one Configure Printer button to see +it), or a commandline interface (see man lpoptions +or see if you have lphelp on your system). There are also some +different GUI frontends on Linux/UNIX, which can present PPD options +to users. PPD options are normally meant to be evaluated by the +PostScript RIP on the real PostScript printer. +

PPDs for non-PS Printers on UNIX

+CUPS doesn't limit itself to "real" PostScript printers in its usage +of PPDs. The CUPS developers have extended the scope of the PPD +concept, to also describe available device and driver options for +non-PostScript printers through CUPS-PPDs. +

+This is logical, as CUPS includes a fully featured PostScript +interpreter (RIP). This RIP is based on Ghostscript. It can process +all received PostScript (and additionally many other file formats) +from clients. All CUPS-PPDs geared to non-PostScript printers contain +an additional line, starting with the keyword +*cupsFilter . This line tells the CUPS print +system which printer-specific filter to use for the interpretation of +the supplied PostScript. Thus CUPS lets all its printers appear as +PostScript devices to its clients, because it can act as a PostScript +RIP for those printers, processing the received PostScript code into a +proper raster print format. +

PPDs for non-PS Printers on Windows

+CUPS-PPDs can also be used on Windows-Clients, on top of a +"core" PostScript driver (now recommended is the "CUPS PostScript +Driver for WindowsNT/2K/XP"; you can also use the Adobe one, with +limitations). This feature enables CUPS to do a few tricks no other +spooler can do: +

  • act as a networked PostScript RIP (Raster Image +Processor), handling printfiles from all client platforms in a uniform +way;

  • act as a central accounting and billing server, since +all files are passed through the pstops filter and are therefore +logged in the CUPS page_log file. +NOTE: this can not happen with "raw" print jobs, +which always remain unfiltered per definition;

  • enable clients to consolidate on a single PostScript +driver, even for many different target printers.

+Using CUPS PPDs on Windows clients enables these to control +all print job settings just as a UNIX client can do too. +

Windows Terminal Servers (WTS) as CUPS Clients

+This setup may be of special interest to people experiencing major +problems in WTS environments. WTS need often a multitude of +non-PostScript drivers installed to run their clients' variety of +different printer models. This often imposes the price of much +increased instability. +

Printer Drivers running in "Kernel Mode" cause many +Problems

+The reason is that in Win NT printer drivers run in "Kernel +Mode", this introduces a high risk for the stability of the system +if the driver is not really stable and well-tested. And there are a +lot of bad drivers out there! Especially notorious is the example +of the PCL printer driver that had an additional sound module +running, to notify users via soundcard of their finished jobs. Do I +need to say that this one was also reliably causing "Blue Screens +of Death" on a regular basis? +

+PostScript drivers generally are very well tested. They are not known +to cause any problems, even though they run in Kernel Mode too. This +might be because there have so far only been 2 different PostScript +drivers: the ones from Adobe and the one from Microsoft. Both are +very well tested and are as stable as you ever can imagine on +Windows. The CUPS driver is derived from the Microsoft one. +

Workarounds impose Heavy Limitations

+In many cases, in an attempt to work around this problem, site +administrators have resorted to restrict the allowed drivers installed +on their WTS to one generic PCL- and one PostScript driver. This +however restricts the clients in the amount of printer options +available for them; often they can't get out more than simplex +prints from one standard paper tray, while their devices could do much +better, if driven by a different driver! ) +

CUPS: a "Magical Stone"?

+Using a PostScript driver, enabled with a CUPS-PPD, seems to be a very +elegant way to overcome all these shortcomings. There are, depending +on the version of Windows OS you use, up to 3 different PostScript +drivers available: Adobe, Microsoft and CUPS PostScript drivers. None +of them is known to cause major stability problems on WTS (even if +used with many different PPDs). The clients will be able to (again) +chose paper trays, duplex printing and other settings. However, there +is a certain price for this too: a CUPS server acting as a PostScript +RIP for its clients requires more CPU and RAM than when just acting as +a "raw spooling" device. Plus, this setup is not yet widely tested, +although the first feedbacks look very promising. +

PostScript Drivers with no major problems -- even in Kernel +Mode

+More recent printer drivers on W2K and XP don't run in Kernel mode +(unlike Win NT) any more. However, both operating systems can still +use the NT drivers, running in Kernel mode (you can roughly tell which +is which as the drivers in subdirectory "2" of "W32X86" are "old" +ones). As was said before, the Adobe as well as the Microsoft +PostScript drivers are not known to cause any stability problems. The +CUPS driver is derived from the Microsoft one. There is a simple +reason for this: The MS DDK (Device Development Kit) for Win NT (which +used to be available at no cost to licensees of Visual Studio) +includes the source code of the Microsoft driver, and licensees of +Visual Studio are allowed to use and modify it for their own driver +development efforts. This is what the CUPS people have done. The +license doesn't allow them to publish the whole of the source code. +However, they have released the "diff" under the GPL, and if you are +owner of an "MS DDK for Win NT", you can check the driver yourself. +

Setting up CUPS for driver Download

+As we have said before: all previously known methods to prepare client +printer drivers on the Samba server for download and "Point'n'Print" +convenience of Windows workstations are working with CUPS too. These +methods were described in the previous chapter. In reality, this is a +pure Samba business, and only relates to the Samba/Win client +relationship. +

cupsaddsmb: the unknown Utility

+The cupsaddsmb utility (shipped with all current CUPS versions) is an +alternative method to transfer printer drivers into the Samba +[print$] share. Remember, this share is where +clients expect drivers deposited and setup for download and +installation. It makes the sharing of any (or all) installed CUPS +printers very easy. cupsaddsmb can use the Adobe PostScript driver as +well as the newly developed CUPS PostScript Driver for +WinNT/2K/XP. Note, that cupsaddsmb does +not work with arbitrary vendor printer drivers, +but only with the exact driver files that are +named in its man page. +

+The CUPS printer driver is available from the CUPS download site. Its +package name is cups-samba-[version].tar.gz . It +is preferred over the Adobe drivers since it has a number of +advantages: +

  • it supports a much more accurate page +accounting;

  • it supports banner pages, and page labels on all +printers;

  • it supports the setting of a number of job IPP +attributes (such as job-priority, page-label and +job-billing)

+However, currently only Windows NT, 2000, and XP are supported by the +CUPS drivers. You will need to get the respective part of Adobe driver +too if you need to support Windows 95, 98, and ME clients. +

Prepare your smb.conf for cupsaddsmb

+Prior to running cupsaddsmb, you need the following settings in +smb.conf: +

Example 19.3. smb.conf for cupsaddsmb usage

[global]
load printers = yes
printing = cups
printcap name = cups
[printers]
comment = All Printers
path = /var/spool/samba
browseable = no
public = yes
# setting depends on your requirements
guest ok = yes
writable = no
printable = yes
printer admin = root
[print$]
comment = Printer Drivers
path = /etc/samba/drivers
browseable = yes
guest ok = no
read only = yes
write list = root

CUPS Package of "PostScript Driver for WinNT/2k/XP"

+CUPS users may get the exactly same packages from http://www.cups.org/software.html. +It is a separate package from the CUPS base software files, tagged as +CUPS 1.1.x Windows NT/2k/XP Printer Driver for Samba +(tar.gz, 192k). The filename to download is +cups-samba-1.1.x.tar.gz. Upon untar-/unzip-ing, +it will reveal these files: +

+root# tar xvzf cups-samba-1.1.19.tar.gz
+cups-samba.install
+cups-samba.license
+cups-samba.readme
+cups-samba.remove
+cups-samba.ss
+

+ + +These have been packaged with the ESP meta packager software +"EPM". The *.install and +*.remove files are simple shell scripts, which +untars the *.ss (the *.ss is +nothing else but a tar-archive, which can be untar-ed by "tar" +too). Then it puts the content into +/usr/share/cups/drivers/. This content includes 3 +files: +

+root# tar tv cups-samba.ss
+cupsdrvr.dll
+cupsui.dll
+cups.hlp  
+

+The cups-samba.install shell scripts is easy to +handle: +

+root# ./cups-samba.install
+[....]
+Installing software...
+Updating file permissions...
+Running post-install commands...
+Installation is complete.        
+

+The script should automatically put the driver files into the +/usr/share/cups/drivers/ directory. +

Warning

+Due to a bug, one recent CUPS release puts the +cups.hlp driver file +into/usr/share/drivers/ instead of +/usr/share/cups/drivers/. To work around this, +copy/move the file (after running the +./cups-samba.install script) manually to the +right place. +

+root# cp /usr/share/drivers/cups.hlp /usr/share/cups/drivers/
+

+This new CUPS PostScript driver is currently binary-only, but free of +charge. No complete source code is provided (yet). The reason is this: +it has been developed with the help of the Microsoft Driver +Developer Kit (DDK) and compiled with Microsoft Visual +Studio 6. Driver developers are not allowed to distribute the whole of +the source code as Free Software. However, CUPS developers released +the "diff" in source code under the GPL, so anybody with a license of +Visual Studio and a DDK will be able to compile for him/herself. +

Recognize the different Driver Files

+The CUPS drivers don't support the "older" Windows 95/98/ME, but only +the Windows NT/2000/XP client: +

Windows NT, 2000, and XP are supported by:

+

  • cups.hlp

  • cupsdrvr.dll

  • cupsui.dll

+

+Adobe drivers are available for the older Windows 95/98/ME as well as +the Windows NT/2000/XP clients. The set of files is different for the +different platforms. +

Windows 95, 98, and Me are supported by:

+

  • ADFONTS.MFM

  • ADOBEPS4.DRV

  • ADOBEPS4.HLP

  • DEFPRTR2.PPD

  • ICONLIB.DLL

  • PSMON.DLL

+

Windows NT, 2000, and XP are supported by:

+

  • ADOBEPS5.DLL

  • ADOBEPSU.DLL

  • ADOBEPSU.HLP

+ +

Note

+If both, the Adobe driver files and the CUPS driver files for the +support of WinNT/2k/XP are present in , the Adobe ones will be ignored +and the CUPS ones will be used. If you prefer -- for whatever reason +-- to use Adobe-only drivers, move away the 3 CUPS driver files. The +Win95/98/ME clients use the Adobe drivers in any case. +

Acquiring the Adobe Driver Files

+Acquiring the Adobe driver files seems to be unexpectedly difficult +for many users. They are not available on the Adobe website as single +files and the self-extracting and/or self-installing Windows-exe is +not easy to locate either. Probably you need to use the included +native installer and run the installation process on one client +once. This will install the drivers (and one Generic PostScript +printer) locally on the client. When they are installed, share the +Generic PostScript printer. After this, the client's +[print$] share holds the Adobe files, from +where you can get them with smbclient from the CUPS host. A more +detailed description about this is in the next (the CUPS printing) +chapter. +

ESP Print Pro Package of "PostScript Driver for +WinNT/2k/XP"

+Users of the ESP Print Pro software are able to install their "Samba +Drivers" package for this purpose with no problem. Retrieve the driver +files from the normal download area of the ESP Print Pro software +at http://www.easysw.com/software.html. +You need to locate the link labelled "SAMBA" amongst the +Download Printer Drivers for ESP Print Pro 4.x +area and download the package. Once installed, you can prepare any +driver by simply highlighting the printer in the Printer Manager GUI +and select Export Driver... from the menu. Of +course you need to have prepared Samba beforehand too to handle the +driver files; i.e. mainly setup the [print$] +share, etc. The ESP Print Pro package includes the CUPS driver files +as well as a (licensed) set of Adobe drivers for the Windows 95/98/ME +client family. +

Caveats to be considered

+Once you have run the install script (and possibly manually +moved the cups.hlp file to +/usr/share/cups/drivers/), the driver is +ready to be put into Samba's [print$] share (which often maps to +/etc/samba/drivers/ and contains a subdir +tree with WIN40 and +W32X86 branches): You do this by running +"cupsaddsmb" (see also man cupsaddsmb for +CUPS since release 1.1.16). +

Tip

+ +You may need to put root into the smbpasswd file by running +smbpasswd; this is especially important if you +should run this whole procedure for the first time, and are not +working in an environment where everything is configured for +Single Sign On to a Windows Domain Controller. +

+Once the driver files are in the [print$] share +and are initialized, they are ready to be downloaded and installed by +the Win NT/2k/XP clients. +

Note

+

  1. +Win 9x/ME clients won't work with the CUPS PostScript driver. For +these you'd still need to use the ADOBE*.* +drivers as previously. +

  2. +It is not harmful if you still have the +ADOBE*.* driver files from previous +installations in the /usr/share/cups/drivers/ +directory. The new cupsaddsmb (from 1.1.16) will +automatically prefer "its own" drivers if it finds both. +

  3. + +Should your Win clients have had the old ADOBE*.* +files for the Adobe PostScript driver installed, the download and +installation of the new CUPS PostScript driver for Windows NT/2k/XP +will fail at first. You need to wipe the old driver from the clients +first. It is not enough to "delete" the printer, as the driver files +will still be kept by the clients and re-used if you try to re-install +the printer. To really get rid of the Adobe driver files on the +clients, open the "Printers" folder (possibly via Start, Settings, Control Panel, Printers), +right-click onto the folder background and select Server +Properties. When the new dialog opens, select the +Drivers tab. On the list select the driver you +want to delete and click on the Delete +button. This will only work if there is not one single printer left +which uses that particular driver. You need to "delete" all printers +using this driver in the "Printers" folder first. You will need +Administrator privileges to do this. +

  4. + +Once you have successfully downloaded the CUPS PostScript driver to a +client, you can easily switch all printers to this one by proceeding +as described in the printing chapter: either change +a driver for an existing printer by running the "Printer Properties" +dialog, or use rpcclient with the +setdriver sub-command. +

+

Benefits of using "CUPS PostScript Driver for +Windows NT/2k/XP" instead of Adobe Driver

+You are interested in a comparison between the CUPS and the Adobe +PostScript drivers? For our purposes these are the most important +items which weigh in favor of the CUPS ones: +

  • no hassle with the Adobe EULA

  • no hassle with the question “Where do I +get the ADOBE*.* driver files from?”

  • + + the Adobe drivers (on request of the printer PPD +associated with them) often put a PJL header in front of the main +PostScript part of the print file. Thus the printfile starts with +<1B >%-12345X or +<escape>%-12345X instead +of %!PS). This leads to the +CUPS daemon auto-typing the incoming file as a print-ready file, +not initiating a pass through the "pstops" filter (to speak more +technically, it is not regarded as the generic MIME type + +application/postscript, but as +the more special MIME type + +application/cups.vnd-postscript), +which therefore also leads to the page accounting in +/var/log/cups/page_log not +receiving the exact number of pages; instead the dummy page number +of "1" is logged in a standard setup)

  • the Adobe driver has more options to "mis-configure" the +PostScript generated by it (like setting it inadvertently to +Optimize for Speed, instead of +Optimize for Portability, which +could lead to CUPS being unable to process it)

  • the CUPS PostScript driver output sent by Windows +clients to the CUPS server will be guaranteed to be auto-typed always +as generic MIME type application/postscript, +thusly passing through the CUPS "pstops" filter and logging the +correct number of pages in the page_log for +accounting and quota purposes

  • the CUPS PostScript driver supports the sending of +additional standard (IPP) print options by Win NT/2k/XP clients. Such +additional print options are: naming the CUPS standard +banner pages (or the custom ones, should they be +installed at the time of driver download), using the CUPS +page-label option, setting a +job-priority and setting the scheduled +time of printing (with the option to support additional +useful IPP job attributes in the future).

  • the CUPS PostScript driver supports the inclusion of +the new *cupsJobTicket comments at the +beginning of the PostScript file (which could be used in the future +for all sort of beneficial extensions on the CUPS side, but which will +not disturb any other applications as they will regard it as a comment +and simply ignore it).

  • the CUPS PostScript driver will be the heart of the +fully fledged CUPS IPP client for Windows NT/2K/XP to be released soon +(probably alongside the first Beta release for CUPS +1.2).

Run "cupsaddsmb" (quiet Mode)

+The cupsaddsmb command copies the needed files into your +[print$] share. Additionally, the PPD +associated with this printer is copied from +/etc/cups/ppd/ to +[print$]. There the files wait for convenient +Windows client installations via Point'n'Print. Before we can run the +command successfully, we need to be sure that we can authenticate +towards Samba. If you have a small network you are probably using user +level security (security = user). +

+Here is an example of a successfully run cupsaddsmb command. +

+root# cupsaddsmb -U root infotec_IS2027
+Password for root required to access localhost via Samba: ['secret']
+

+To share all printers and drivers, use the +-a parameter instead of a printer name. Since +cupsaddsmb "exports" the printer drivers to Samba, it should be +obvious that it only works for queues with a CUPS driver associated. +

Run "cupsaddsmb" with verbose Output

+Probably you want to see what's going on. Use the +-v parameter to get a more verbose output. The +output below was edited for better readability: all "\" at the end of +a line indicate that I inserted an artificial line break plus some +indentation here: +

Warning

+You will see the root password for the Samba account printed on +screen. +

+root# cupsaddsmb -U root -v infotec_2105
+Password for root required to access localhost via GANDALF:
+Running command: smbclient //localhost/print\$ -N -U'root%secret' \
+    -c 'mkdir W32X86; \
+    put /var/spool/cups/tmp/3e98bf2d333b5 W32X86/infotec_2105.ppd; \
+	put /usr/share/cups/drivers/cupsdrvr.dll W32X86/cupsdrvr.dll; \
+    put /usr/share/cups/drivers/cupsui.dll W32X86/cupsui.dll; \
+    put /usr/share/cups/drivers/cups.hlp W32X86/cups.hlp'
+added interface ip=10.160.51.60 bcast=10.160.51.255 nmask=255.255.252.0
+Domain=[CUPS-PRINT] OS=[UNIX] Server=[Samba 2.2.7a]
+NT_STATUS_OBJECT_NAME_COLLISION making remote directory \W32X86
+putting file /var/spool/cups/tmp/3e98bf2d333b5 as \W32X86/infotec_2105.ppd
+putting file /usr/share/cups/drivers/cupsdrvr.dll as \W32X86/cupsdrvr.dll
+putting file /usr/share/cups/drivers/cupsui.dll as \W32X86/cupsui.dll
+putting file /usr/share/cups/drivers/cups.hlp as \W32X86/cups.hlp
+  
+Running command: rpcclient localhost -N -U'root%secret' 
+   -c 'adddriver "Windows NT x86"   \
+   "infotec_2105:cupsdrvr.dll:infotec_2105.ppd:cupsui.dll:cups.hlp:NULL:   \
+    RAW:NULL"'
+cmd = adddriver "Windows NT x86" \
+    "infotec_2105:cupsdrvr.dll:infotec_2105.ppd:cupsui.dll:cups.hlp:NULL:RAW:NULL"
+Printer Driver infotec_2105 successfully installed.
+  
+Running command: smbclient //localhost/print\$ -N -U'root%secret' \
+-c 'mkdir WIN40; \
+    put /var/spool/cups/tmp/3e98bf2d333b5 WIN40/infotec_2105.PPD; \
+	put /usr/share/cups/drivers/ADFONTS.MFM WIN40/ADFONTS.MFM;   \
+    put /usr/share/cups/drivers/ADOBEPS4.DRV WIN40/ADOBEPS4.DRV; \
+    put /usr/share/cups/drivers/ADOBEPS4.HLP WIN40/ADOBEPS4.HLP; \
+    put /usr/share/cups/drivers/DEFPRTR2.PPD WIN40/DEFPRTR2.PPD; \
+	put /usr/share/cups/drivers/ICONLIB.DLL WIN40/ICONLIB.DLL; \
+	put /usr/share/cups/drivers/PSMON.DLL WIN40/PSMON.DLL;'
+  added interface ip=10.160.51.60 bcast=10.160.51.255 nmask=255.255.252.0
+  Domain=[CUPS-PRINT] OS=[UNIX] Server=[Samba 2.2.7a]
+  NT_STATUS_OBJECT_NAME_COLLISION making remote directory \WIN40
+  putting file /var/spool/cups/tmp/3e98bf2d333b5 as \WIN40/infotec_2105.PPD
+  putting file /usr/share/cups/drivers/ADFONTS.MFM as \WIN40/ADFONTS.MFM
+  putting file /usr/share/cups/drivers/ADOBEPS4.DRV as \WIN40/ADOBEPS4.DRV
+  putting file /usr/share/cups/drivers/ADOBEPS4.HLP as \WIN40/ADOBEPS4.HLP
+  putting file /usr/share/cups/drivers/DEFPRTR2.PPD as \WIN40/DEFPRTR2.PPD
+  putting file /usr/share/cups/drivers/ICONLIB.DLL as \WIN40/ICONLIB.DLL
+  putting file /usr/share/cups/drivers/PSMON.DLL as \WIN40/PSMON.DLL
+  
+  Running command: rpcclient localhost -N -U'root%secret' \
+   -c 'adddriver "Windows 4.0"      \
+   "infotec_2105:ADOBEPS4.DRV:infotec_2105.PPD:NULL:ADOBEPS4.HLP: \
+   PSMON.DLL:RAW:ADOBEPS4.DRV,infotec_2105.PPD,ADOBEPS4.HLP,PSMON.DLL, \
+    ADFONTS.MFM,DEFPRTR2.PPD,ICONLIB.DLL"'
+  cmd = adddriver "Windows 4.0" "infotec_2105:ADOBEPS4.DRV:infotec_2105.PPD:NULL:          \
+    ADOBEPS4.HLP:PSMON.DLL:RAW:ADOBEPS4.DRV,infotec_2105.PPD,ADOBEPS4.HLP,  \
+                   PSMON.DLL,ADFONTS.MFM,DEFPRTR2.PPD,ICONLIB.DLL"
+  Printer Driver infotec_2105 successfully installed.
+  
+  Running command: rpcclient localhost -N -U'root%secret'  \
+   -c 'setdriver infotec_2105 infotec_2105'
+  cmd = setdriver infotec_2105 infotec_2105
+  Successfully set infotec_2105 to driver infotec_2105.
+
+

+If you look closely, you'll discover your root password was transferred +unencrypted over the wire, so beware! Also, if you look further her, +you'll discover error messages like NT_STATUS_OBJECT_NAME_COLLISION in +between. They occur, because the directories WIN40 and W32X86 already +existed in the [print$] driver download share +(from a previous driver installation). They are harmless here. +

Understanding cupsaddsmb

+What has happened? What did cupsaddsmb do? There are five stages of +the procedure +

  1. + + call the CUPS server via IPP and request the +driver files and the PPD file for the named printer;

  2. store the files temporarily in the local +TEMPDIR (as defined in +cupsd.conf);

  3. connect via smbclient to the Samba server's + [print$] share and put the files into the + share's WIN40 (for Win95/98/ME) and W32X86/ (for WinNT/2k/XP) sub + directories;

  4. + + connect via rpcclient to the Samba server and +execute the "adddriver" command with the correct +parameters;

  5. + + connect via rpcclient to the Samba server a second +time and execute the "setdriver" command.

+Note, that you can run the cupsaddsmb utility with parameters to +specify one remote host as Samba host and a second remote host as CUPS +host. Especially if you want to get a deeper understanding, it is a +good idea try it and see more clearly what is going on (though in real +life most people will have their CUPS and Samba servers run on the +same host): +

+root# cupsaddsmb -H sambaserver -h cupsserver -v printername
+

How to recognize if cupsaddsmb completed successfully

+You must always check if the utility completed +successfully in all fields. You need as a minimum these 3 messages +amongst the output: +

  1. Printer Driver infotec_2105 successfully +installed. # (for the W32X86 == WinNT/2K/XP +architecture...)

  2. Printer Driver infotec_2105 successfully +installed. # (for the WIN40 == Win9x/ME +architecture...)

  3. Successfully set [printerXPZ] to driver +[printerXYZ].

+These messages probably not easily recognized in the general +output. If you run cupsaddsmb with the -a +parameter (which tries to prepare all active CUPS +printer drivers for download), you might miss if individual printers +drivers had problems to install properly. Here a redirection of the +output will help you analyze the results in retrospective. +

Note

+It is impossible to see any diagnostic output if you don't run +cupsaddsmb in verbose mode. Therefore we strongly recommend to not +use the default quiet mode. It will hide any problems from you which +might occur. +

cupsaddsmb with a Samba PDC

+You can't get the standard cupsaddsmb command to run on a Samba PDC? +You are asked for the password credential all over again and again and +the command just will not take off at all? Try one of these +variations: +

+root# cupsaddsmb -U MIDEARTH\\root -v printername
+root# cupsaddsmb -H SAURON -U MIDEARTH\\root -v printername
+root# cupsaddsmb -H SAURON -U MIDEARTH\\root -h cups-server -v printername
+

+(Note the two backslashes: the first one is required to +"escape" the second one). +

cupsaddsmb Flowchart

+Here is a chart about the procedures, commandflows and +dataflows of the "cupaddsmb" command. Note again: cupsaddsmb is +not intended to, and does not work with, "raw" queues! +

+

Figure 19.16. cupsaddsmb flowchart

cupsaddsmb flowchart

+

Installing the PostScript Driver on a Client

+After cupsaddsmb completed, your driver is prepared for the clients to +use. Here are the steps you must perform to download and install it +via "Point'n'Print". From a Windows client, browse to the CUPS/Samba +server; +

  • open the Printers +share of Samba in Network Neighbourhood;

  • right-click on the printer in +question;

  • from the opening context-menu select +Install... or +Connect... (depending on the Windows version you +use).

+After a few seconds, there should be a new printer in your +client's local "Printers" folder: On Windows +XP it will follow a naming convention of PrinterName on +SambaServer. (In my current case it is "infotec_2105 on +kde-bitshop"). If you want to test it and send your first job from +an application like Winword, the new printer will appears in a +\\SambaServer\PrinterName entry in the +dropdown list of available printers. +

Note

+ +cupsaddsmb will only reliably work with CUPS version 1.1.15 or higher +and Samba from 2.2.4. If it doesn't work, or if the automatic printer +driver download to the clients doesn't succeed, you can still manually +install the CUPS printer PPD on top of the Adobe PostScript driver on +clients. Then point the client's printer queue to the Samba printer +share for a UNC type of connection: +

+C:\> net use lpt1: \\sambaserver\printershare /user:ntadmin
+

+should you desire to use the CUPS networked PostScript RIP +functions. (Note that user "ntadmin" needs to be a valid Samba user +with the required privileges to access the printershare) This would +set up the printer connection in the traditional +LanMan way (not using MS-RPC). +

Avoiding critical PostScript Driver Settings on the +Client

+Soooo: printing works, but there are still problems. Most jobs print +well, some don't print at all. Some jobs have problems with fonts, +which don't look very good. Some jobs print fast, and some are +dead-slow. Many of these problems can be greatly reduced or even +completely eliminated if you follow a few guidelines. Remember, if +your print device is not PostScript-enabled, you are treating your +Ghostscript installation on your CUPS host with the output your client +driver settings produce. Treat it well: +

  • Avoid the PostScript Output Option: Optimize +for Speed setting. Rather use the Optimize for +Portability instead (Adobe PostScript +driver).

  • Don't use the Page Independence: +NO setting. Instead use Page Independence +YES (CUPS PostScript Driver)

  • Recommended is the True Type Font +Downloading Option: Native True Type over +Automatic and Outline; you +should by all means avoid Bitmap (Adobe +PostScript Driver)

  • Choose True Type Font: Download as Softfont +into Printer over the default Replace by Device +Font (for exotic fonts you may need to change it back to +get a printout at all) (Adobe)

  • Sometimes you can choose PostScript Language +Level: in case of problems try 2 +instead of 3 (the latest ESP Ghostscript package +handles Level 3 PostScript very well) (Adobe).

  • Say Yes to PostScript +Error Handler (Adobe)

Installing PostScript Driver Files manually (using +rpcclient)

+Of course you can run all the commands which are embedded into the +cupsaddsmb convenience utility yourself, one by one, and hereby upload +and prepare the driver files for future client downloads. +

  1. prepare Samba (a CUPS printqueue with the name of the +printer should be there. We are providing the driver +now);

  2. copy all files to + [print$]

  3. + + run rpcclient adddriver +(for each client architecture you want to support):

  4. + + run rpcclient +setdriver.

+ + + + + +We are going to do this now. First, read the man page on "rpcclient" +to get a first idea. Look at all the printing related +sub-commands. enumprinters, +enumdrivers, enumports, +adddriver, setdriver are amongst +the most interesting ones. rpcclient implements an important part of +the MS-RPC protocol. You can use it to query (and command) a Win NT +(or 2K/XP) PC too. MS-RPC is used by Windows clients, amongst other +things, to benefit from the "Point'n'Print" features. Samba can now +mimic this too. +

A Check of the rpcclient man Page

+First let's have a little check of the rpcclient man page. Here are +two relevant passages: +

+adddriver <arch> <config> Execute an +AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver information on +the server. Note that the driver files should already exist in the +directory returned by getdriverdir. Possible +values for arch are the same as those for the +getdriverdir command. The +config parameter is defined as follows: +

+Long Printer Name:\
+Driver File Name:\
+Data File Name:\
+Config File Name:\
+Help File Name:\
+Language Monitor Name:\
+Default Data Type:\
+Comma Separated list of Files
+

Any empty fields should be enter as the string "NULL".

Samba does not need to support the concept of Print Monitors +since these only apply to local printers whose driver can make use of +a bi-directional link for communication. This field should be "NULL". +On a remote NT print server, the Print Monitor for a driver must +already be installed prior to adding the driver or else the RPC will +fail +

+setdriver <printername> <drivername> +Execute a SetPrinter() command to update the +printer driver associated with an installed printer. The printer +driver must already be correctly installed on the print server. +

See also the enumprinters and enumdrivers commands for +obtaining a list of installed printers and drivers. +

Understanding the rpcclient man page

+The exact format isn't made too clear by the man +page, since you have to deal with some parameters containing +spaces. Here is a better description for it. We have line-broken the +command and indicated the breaks with "\". Usually you would type the +command in one line without the linebreaks: +

+ adddriver "Architecture" \
+           "LongPrinterName:DriverFile:DataFile:ConfigFile:HelpFile:\
+           LanguageMonitorFile:DataType:ListOfFiles,Comma-separated"
+

+What the man pages denotes as a simple <config> +keyword, does in reality consist of 8 colon-separated fields. The +last field may take multiple (in some, very insane, cases, even +20 different additional files. This might sound confusing at first. +Note, that what the man pages names the "LongPrinterName" in +reality should rather be called the "Driver Name". You can name it +anything you want, as long as you use this name later in the +rpcclient ... setdriver command. For +practical reasons, many name the driver the same as the +printer. +

+True: it isn't simple at all. I hear you asking: +How do I know which files are "Driver +File", "Data File", "Config File", "Help File" and "Language +Monitor File" in each case? -- For an answer you may +want to have a look at how a Windows NT box with a shared printer +presents the files to us. Remember, that this whole procedure has +to be developed by the Samba Team by overhearing the traffic caused +by Windows computers on the wire. We may as well turn to a Windows +box now, and access it from a UNIX workstation. We will query it +with rpcclient to see what it tells us and +try to understand the man page more clearly which we've read just +now. +

Producing an Example by querying a Windows Box

+ + +We could run rpcclient with a +getdriver or a getprinter +subcommand (in level 3 verbosity) against it. Just sit down at UNIX or +Linux workstation with the Samba utilities installed. Then type the +following command: +

+root# rpcclient -U'USERNAME%PASSWORD' NT-SERVER-NAME -c 'getdriver printername 3'
+

+From the result it should become clear which is which. Here is an +example from my installation: +

+root# rpcclient -U'Danka%xxxx' W2KSERVER \
+	-c'getdriver "DANKA InfoStream Virtual Printer" 3'
+ cmd = getdriver "DANKA InfoStream Virtual Printer" 3
+
+ [Windows NT x86]
+ Printer Driver Info 3:
+         Version: [2]
+         Driver Name: [DANKA InfoStream]
+         Architecture: [Windows NT x86]
+         Driver Path: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\PSCRIPT.DLL]
+         Datafile: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\INFOSTRM.PPD]
+         Configfile: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\PSCRPTUI.DLL]
+         Helpfile: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\PSCRIPT.HLP]
+ 
+         Dependentfiles: []
+         Dependentfiles: []
+         Dependentfiles: []
+         Dependentfiles: []
+         Dependentfiles: []
+         Dependentfiles: []
+         Dependentfiles: []
+ 
+         Monitorname: []
+         Defaultdatatype: []
+
+

+Some printer drivers list additional files under the label +"Dependentfiles": these would go into the last field +ListOfFiles,Comma-separated. For the CUPS +PostScript drivers we don't need any (nor would we for the Adobe +PostScript driver): therefore the field will get a "NULL" entry. +

What is required for adddriver and setdriver to succeed

+From the manpage (and from the quoted output +of cupsaddsmb, above) it becomes clear that you +need to have certain conditions in order to make the manual uploading +and initializing of the driver files succeed. The two rpcclient + +subcommands (adddriver and +setdriver) need to encounter the following +pre-conditions to complete successfully: +

  • you are connected as printer admin, or root (note, +that this is not the "Printer Operators" group in +NT, but the printer admin group, as defined in +the [global] section of +smb.conf);

  • copy all required driver files to +\\sambaserver\print$\w32x86 and +\\sambaserver\print$\win40 as appropriate. They +will end up in the "0" respective "2" subdirectories later -- for now +don't put them there, they'll be automatically +used by the adddriver subcommand.! (if you use +"smbclient" to put the driver files into the share, note that you need +to escape the "$": smbclient //sambaserver/print\$ -U +root);

  • the user you're connecting as must be able to write to +the [print$] share and create +subdirectories;

  • the printer you are going to setup for the Windows +clients, needs to be installed in CUPS already;

  • + + + the CUPS printer must be known to Samba, otherwise the +setdriver subcommand fails with an +NT_STATUS_UNSUCCESSFUL error. To check if the printer is known by +Samba you may use the enumprinters subcommand to +rpcclient. A long-standing bug prevented a proper update of the +printer list until every smbd process had received a SIGHUP or was +restarted. Remember this in case you've created the CUPS printer just +shortly ago and encounter problems: try restarting +Samba.

Manual Driver Installation in 15 Steps

+We are going to install a printer driver now by manually executing all +required commands. As this may seem a rather complicated process at +first, we go through the procedure step by step, explaining every +single action item as it comes up. +

Procedure 19.1. Manual Driver Installation installation

  1. Install the Printer on CUPS

    +root# lpadmin -p mysmbtstprn -v socket://10.160.51.131:9100 -E -P canonIR85.ppd
+

    +This installs printer with the name mysmbtstprn +to the CUPS system. The printer is accessed via a socket +(a.k.a. JetDirect or Direct TCP/IP) connection. You need to be root +for this step +

  2. (optional) Check if the Printer is recognized by +Samba

    +root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx -c 'enumprinters' localhost | grep -C2 mysmbtstprn
+flags:[0x800000]
+name:[\\kde-bitshop\mysmbtstprn]
+description:[\\kde-bitshop\mysmbtstprn,,mysmbtstprn]
+comment:[mysmbtstprn]
+

    +This should show the printer in the list. If not, stop and re-start +the Samba daemon (smbd), or send a HUP signal: kill -HUP +`pidof smbd`. Check again. Troubleshoot and repeat until +success. Note the "empty" field between the two commas in the +"description" line. Here would the driver name appear if there was one +already. You need to know root's Samba password (as set by the +smbpasswd command) for this step and most of the +following steps. Alternatively you can authenticate as one of the +users from the "write list" as defined in smb.conf for +[print$]. +

  3. (optional) Check if Samba knows a Driver for the +Printer

    +root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx -c 'getprinter mysmbtstprn 2' localhost \
+			| grep driver 
+drivername:[]
+
+root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx -c 'getprinter mysmbtstprn 2' localhost \
+	| grep -C4 driv
+servername:[\\kde-bitshop]
+printername:[\\kde-bitshop\mysmbtstprn]
+sharename:[mysmbtstprn]
+portname:[Samba Printer Port]
+drivername:[]
+comment:[mysmbtstprn]
+location:[]
+sepfile:[]
+printprocessor:[winprint]
+ 
+root# rpcclient -U root%xxxx -c 'getdriver mysmbtstprn' localhost
+ result was WERR_UNKNOWN_PRINTER_DRIVER
+
+

    +Neither method of the three commands shown above should show a driver. +This step was done for the purpose of demonstrating this condition. An +attempt to connect to the printer at this stage will prompt the +message along the lines: "The server has not the required printer +driver installed". +

  4. Put all required Driver Files into Samba's +[print$]

    +root# smbclient //localhost/print\$ -U 'root%xxxx' \
+	-c 'cd W32X86; \
+	put /etc/cups/ppd/mysmbtstprn.ppd mysmbtstprn.PPD; \ 
+	put /usr/share/cups/drivers/cupsui.dll cupsui.dll; \
+	put /usr/share/cups/drivers/cupsdrvr.dll cupsdrvr.dll; \
+	put /usr/share/cups/drivers/cups.hlp cups.hlp'
+

    +(Note that this command should be entered in one long single +line. Line-breaks and the line-end indicating "\" has been inserted +for readability reasons.) This step is required +for the next one to succeed. It makes the driver files physically +present in the [print$] share. However, clients +would still not be able to install them, because Samba does not yet +treat them as driver files. A client asking for the driver would still +be presented with a "not installed here" message. +

  5. Verify where the Driver Files are now

    +root# ls -l /etc/samba/drivers/W32X86/
+total 669
+drwxr-sr-x    2 root     ntadmin       532 May 25 23:08 2
+drwxr-sr-x    2 root     ntadmin       670 May 16 03:15 3
+-rwxr--r--    1 root     ntadmin     14234 May 25 23:21 cups.hlp
+-rwxr--r--    1 root     ntadmin    278380 May 25 23:21 cupsdrvr.dll
+-rwxr--r--    1 root     ntadmin    215848 May 25 23:21 cupsui.dll
+-rwxr--r--    1 root     ntadmin    169458 May 25 23:21 mysmbtstprn.PPD
+

    +The driver files now are in the W32X86 architecture "root" of +[print$]. +

  6. Tell Samba that these are +Driver Files +(adddriver)

    +root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx -c `adddriver "Windows NT x86" "mydrivername: \
+  cupsdrvr.dll:mysmbtstprn.PPD: \
+  cupsui.dll:cups.hlp:NULL:RAW:NULL" \
+  localhost
+Printer Driver mydrivername successfully installed.
+

    +Note that your cannot repeat this step if it fails. It could fail even +as a result of a simple typo. It will most likely have moved a part of +the driver files into the "2" subdirectory. If this step fails, you +need to go back to the fourth step and repeat it, before you can try +this one again. In this step you need to choose a name for your +driver. It is normally a good idea to use the same name as is used for +the printername; however, in big installations you may use this driver +for a number of printers which have obviously different names. So the +name of the driver is not fixed. +

  7. Verify where the Driver Files are now

    +root# ls -l /etc/samba/drivers/W32X86/
+total 1
+drwxr-sr-x    2 root     ntadmin       532 May 25 23:22 2
+drwxr-sr-x    2 root     ntadmin       670 May 16 03:15 3
+
+root# ls -l /etc/samba/drivers/W32X86/2
+total 5039
+[....]
+-rwxr--r--    1 root     ntadmin     14234 May 25 23:21 cups.hlp
+-rwxr--r--    1 root     ntadmin    278380 May 13 13:53 cupsdrvr.dll
+-rwxr--r--    1 root     ntadmin    215848 May 13 13:53 cupsui.dll
+-rwxr--r--    1 root     ntadmin    169458 May 25 23:21 mysmbtstprn.PPD
+

    +Notice how step 6 did also move the driver files to the appropriate +subdirectory. Compare with the situation after step 5. +

  8. (optional) Verify if Samba now recognizes the +Driver

    +root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx -c 'enumdrivers 3' localhost \
+	| grep -B2 -A5 mydrivername
+Printer Driver Info 3:
+Version: [2]
+Driver Name: [mydrivername]
+Architecture: [Windows NT x86]
+Driver Path: [\\kde-bitshop\print$\W32X86\2\cupsdrvr.dll]
+Datafile: [\\kde-bitshop\print$\W32X86\2\mysmbtstprn.PPD]
+Configfile: [\\kde-bitshop\print$\W32X86\2\cupsui.dll]
+Helpfile: [\\kde-bitshop\print$\W32X86\2\cups.hlp]
+

    +Remember, this command greps for the name you did choose for the +driver in step Six. This command must succeed before you can proceed. +

  9. Tell Samba which Printer should use these Driver +Files (setdriver)

    +root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx -c 'setdriver mysmbtstprn mydrivername' localhost
+Successfully set mysmbtstprn to driver mydrivername
+

    +Since you can bind any printername (=printqueue) to any driver, this +is a very convenient way to setup many queues which use the same +driver. You don't need to repeat all the previous steps for the +setdriver command to succeed. The only pre-conditions are: +enumdrivers must find the driver and +enumprinters must find the printer. +

  10. (optional) Verify if Samba has this Association +recognized

    +root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx -c 'getprinter mysmbtstprn 2' localhost \
+  | grep driver
+drivername:[mydrivername]
+ 
+root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx -c 'getprinter mysmbtstprn 2' localhost \
+  | grep -C4 driv
+servername:[\\kde-bitshop]
+printername:[\\kde-bitshop\mysmbtstprn]
+sharename:[mysmbtstprn]
+portname:[Done]
+drivername:[mydrivername]
+comment:[mysmbtstprn]
+location:[]
+sepfile:[]
+printprocessor:[winprint]
+ 
+root# rpcclient -U root%xxxx -c 'getdriver mysmbtstprn' localhost
+[Windows NT x86]
+Printer Driver Info 3:
+     Version: [2]
+     Driver Name: [mydrivername]
+     Architecture: [Windows NT x86]
+     Driver Path: [\\kde-bitshop\print$\W32X86\2\cupsdrvr.dll]
+     Datafile: [\\kde-bitshop\print$\W32X86\2\mysmbtstprn.PPD]
+     Configfile: [\\kde-bitshop\print$\W32X86\2\cupsui.dll]
+     Helpfile: [\\kde-bitshop\print$\W32X86\2\cups.hlp]
+     Monitorname: []
+     Defaultdatatype: [RAW]
+     Monitorname: []
+     Defaultdatatype: [RAW]
+ 
+root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx -c 'enumprinters' localhost | grep mysmbtstprn
+     name:[\\kde-bitshop\mysmbtstprn]
+     description:[\\kde-bitshop\mysmbtstprn,mydrivername,mysmbtstprn]
+     comment:[mysmbtstprn]
+
+

    + +Compare these results with the ones from steps 2 and 3. Note that +every single of these commands show the driver is installed. Even +the enumprinters command now lists the driver +on the "description" line. +

  11. (optional) Tickle the Driver into a correct +Device Mode

    + +You certainly know how to install the driver on the client. In case +you are not particularly familiar with Windows, here is a short +recipe: browse the Network Neighbourhood, go to the Samba server, look +for the shares. You should see all shared Samba printers. +Double-click on the one in question. The driver should get +installed, and the network connection set up. An alternative way is to +open the "Printers (and Faxes)" folder, right-click on the printer in +question and select "Connect" or "Install". As a result, a new printer +should have appeared in your client's local "Printers (and Faxes)" +folder, named something like "printersharename on Sambahostname". +

    +It is important that you execute this step as a Samba printer admin +(as defined in smb.conf). Here is another method +to do this on Windows XP. It uses a commandline, which you may type +into the "DOS box" (type root's smbpassword when prompted): +

    +C:\> runas /netonly /user:root "rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /in /n\
+			\\sambacupsserver\mysmbtstprn"
+

    +Change any printer setting once (like changing "portrait" to + "landscape"), click Apply; change the setting +back. +

  12. Install the Printer on a Client +("Point'n'Print")

    +C:\> rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /in /n "\\sambacupsserver\mysmbtstprn"
+

    +If it doesn't work it could be a permission problem with the +[print$] share. +

  13. Thirteenth Step (optional): Print a Test Page

    +C:\> rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /p /n "\\sambacupsserver\mysmbtstprn"
+

    +Then hit [TAB] 5 times, [ENTER] twice, [TAB] once and [ENTER] again +and march to the printer. +

  14. Fourteenth Step (recommended): Study the Test Page

    +Hmmm.... just kidding! By now you know everything about printer +installations and you don't need to read a word. Just put it in a +frame and bolt it to the wall with the heading "MY FIRST +RPCCLIENT-INSTALLED PRINTER" - why not just throw it away! +

  15. Fifteenth Step (obligatory): Enjoy. Jump. Celebrate your +Success

    +root# echo "Cheeeeerioooooo! Success..." >> /var/log/samba/log.smbd
+

Troubleshooting revisited

+The setdriver command will fail, if in Samba's mind the queue is not +already there. You had promising messages about the: +

+
+ Printer Driver ABC successfully installed.
+
+

+after the "adddriver" parts of the procedure? But you are also seeing +a disappointing message like this one beneath? +

+
+ result was NT_STATUS_UNSUCCESSFUL
+
+

+ +It is not good enough that you +can see the queue in CUPS, using +the lpstat -p ir85wm command. A +bug in most recent versions of Samba prevents the proper update of +the queuelist. The recognition of newly installed CUPS printers +fails unless you re-start Samba or send a HUP to all smbd +processes. To verify if this is the reason why Samba doesn't +execute the setdriver command successfully, check if Samba "sees" +the printer: +

+root# rpcclient transmeta -N -U'root%secret' -c 'enumprinters 0'| grep  ir85wm
+        printername:[ir85wm]
+

+An alternative command could be this: +

+root# rpcclient transmeta -N -U'root%secret' -c 'getprinter ir85wm' 
+        cmd = getprinter ir85wm
+        flags:[0x800000]
+        name:[\\transmeta\ir85wm]
+        description:[\\transmeta\ir85wm,ir85wm,DPD]
+        comment:[CUPS PostScript-Treiber for WinNT/2K/XP]
+

+BTW, you can use these commands, plus a few more, of course, +to install drivers on remote Windows NT print servers too! +

The printing *.tdb Files

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +Some mystery is associated with the series of files with a +tdb-suffix appearing in every Samba installation. They are +connections.tdb, +printing.tdb, +share_info.tdb , +ntdrivers.tdb, +unexpected.tdb, +brlock.tdb , +locking.tdb, +ntforms.tdb, +messages.tdb , +ntprinters.tdb, +sessionid.tdb and +secrets.tdb. What is their purpose? +

Trivial DataBase Files

+A Windows NT (Print) Server keeps track of all information needed to serve +its duty toward its clients by storing entries in the Windows +"Registry". Client queries are answered by reading from the registry, +Administrator or user configuration settings are saved by writing into +the Registry. Samba and UNIX obviously don't have such a kind of +Registry. Samba instead keeps track of all client related information in a +series of *.tdb files. (TDB = Trivial Data +Base). These are often located in /var/lib/samba/ +or /var/lock/samba/ . The printing related files +are ntprinters.tdb, +printing.tdb,ntforms.tdb and +ntdrivers.tdb. +

Binary Format

+*.tdb files are not human readable. They are +written in a binary format. "Why not ASCII?", you may ask. "After all, +ASCII configuration files are a good and proofed tradition on UNIX." +-- The reason for this design decision by the Samba Team is mainly +performance. Samba needs to be fast; it runs a separate +smbd process for each client connection, in some +environments many thousand of them. Some of these smbds might need to +write-access the same *.tdb file at the +same time. The file format of Samba's +*.tdb files allows for this provision. Many smbd +processes may write to the same *.tdb file at the +same time. This wouldn't be possible with pure ASCII files. +

Losing *.tdb Files

+It is very important that all *.tdb files remain +consistent over all write and read accesses. However, it may happen +that these files do get corrupted. (A +kill -9 `pidof smbd` while a write access is in +progress could do the damage as well as a power interruption, +etc.). In cases of trouble, a deletion of the old printing-related +*.tdb files may be the only option. You need to +re-create all print related setup after that. Or you have made a +backup of the *.tdb files in time. +

Using tdbbackup

+Samba ships with a little utility which helps the root user of your +system to back up your *.tdb files. If you run it +with no argument, it prints a little usage message: +

+root# tdbbackup
+ Usage: tdbbackup [options] <fname...>
+ 
+ Version:3.0a
+   -h            this help message
+   -s suffix     set the backup suffix
+   -v            verify mode (restore if corrupt)
+
+

+Here is how I backed up my printing.tdb file: +

+root# ls
+.              browse.dat       locking.tdb     ntdrivers.tdb   printing.tdb
+..             share_info.tdb   connections.tdb messages.tdb    ntforms.tdb
+printing.tdbkp unexpected.tdb   brlock.tdb      gmon.out        namelist.debug  
+ntprinters.tdb sessionid.tdb
+ 
+root# tdbbackup -s .bak printing.tdb
+ printing.tdb : 135 records
+ 
+root# ls -l printing.tdb*
+ -rw-------    1 root     root        40960 May  2 03:44 printing.tdb
+ -rw-------    1 root     root        40960 May  2 03:44 printing.tdb.bak
+
+

CUPS Print Drivers from Linuxprinting.org

+CUPS ships with good support for HP LaserJet type printers. You can +install the generic driver as follows: +

+root# lpadmin -p laserjet4plus -v parallel:/dev/lp0 -E -m laserjet.ppd
+

+The -m switch will retrieve the +laserjet.ppd from the standard repository for +not-yet-installed-PPDs, which CUPS typically stores in +/usr/share/cups/model. Alternatively, you may use +-P /path/to/your.ppd. +

+The generic laserjet.ppd however does not support every special option +for every LaserJet-compatible model. It constitutes a sort of "least +denominator" of all the models. If for some reason it is ruled out to +you to pay for the commercially available ESP Print Pro drivers, your +first move should be to consult the database on http://www.linuxprinting.org/printer_list.cgi. +Linuxprinting.org has excellent recommendations about which driver is +best used for each printer. Its database is kept current by the +tireless work of Till Kamppeter from MandrakeSoft, who is also the +principal author of the foomatic-rip utility. +

Note

+ +The former "cupsomatic" concept is now be replaced by the new, much +more powerful "foomatic-rip". foomatic-rip is the successor of +cupsomatic. cupsomatic is no longer maintained. Here is the new URL +to the Foomatic-3.0 database:http://www.linuxprinting.org/driver_list.cgi. +If you upgrade to foomatic-rip, don't forget to also upgrade to the +new-style PPDs for your foomatic-driven printers. foomatic-rip will +not work with PPDs generated for the old cupsomatic. The new-style +PPDs are 100% compliant to the Adobe PPD specification. They are +intended to be used by Samba and the cupsaddsmb utility also, to +provide the driver files for the Windows clients also! +

foomatic-rip and Foomatic explained

+Nowadays most Linux distros rely on the utilities of Linuxprinting.org +to create their printing related software (which, BTW, works on all +UNIXes and on Mac OS X or Darwin too). It is not known as well as it +should be, that it also has a very end-user friendly interface which +allows for an easy update of drivers and PPDs, for all supported +models, all spoolers, all operating systems and all package formats +(because there is none). Its history goes back a few years. +

+Recently Foomatic has achieved the astonishing milestone of 1000 +listed printer models. Linuxprinting.org keeps all the +important facts about printer drivers, supported models and which +options are available for the various driver/printer combinations in +its Foomatic +database. Currently there are 245 drivers +in the database: many drivers support various models, and many models +may be driven by different drivers; it's your choice! +

690 "perfect" Printers

+At present there are 690 devices dubbed as working "perfectly", 181 +"mostly", 96 "partially" and 46 are "Paperweights". Keeping in mind +that most of these are non-PostScript models (PostScript printers are +automatically supported supported by CUPS to perfection, by using +their own manufacturer-provided Windows-PPD...), and that a +multifunctional device never qualifies as working "perfectly" if it +doesn't also scan and copy and fax under GNU/Linux: then this is a +truly astonishing achievement. Three years ago the number was not +more than 500, and Linux or UNIX "printing" at the time wasn't +anywhere near the quality it is today! +

How the "Printing HOWTO" started it all

+A few years ago Grant Taylor +started it all. The roots of today's Linuxprinting.org are in the +first Linux Printing +HOWTO which he authored. As a side-project to this document, +which served many Linux users and admins to guide their first steps in +this complicated and delicate setup (to a scientist, printing is +"applying a structured deposition of distinct patterns of ink or toner +particles on paper substrates" ;-), he started to +build in a little Postgres database with information about the +hardware and driver zoo that made up Linux printing of the time. This +database became the core component of today's Foomatic collection of +tools and data. In the meantime it has moved to an XML representation +of the data. +

Foomatic's strange Name

+"Why the funny name?", you ask. When it really took off, around spring +2000, CUPS was far less popular than today, and most systems used LPD, +LPRng or even PDQ to print. CUPS shipped with a few generic "drivers" +(good for a few hundred different printer models). These didn't +support many device-specific options. CUPS also shipped with its own +built-in rasterization filter ("pstoraster", derived from +Ghostscript). On the other hand, CUPS provided brilliant support for +controlling all printer options through +standardized and well-defined "PPD files" (PostScript Printers +Description files). Plus, CUPS was designed to be easily extensible. +

+Grant already had in his database a respectable compilation +of facts about a many more printers, and the Ghostscript "drivers" +they run with. His idea, to generate PPDs from the database info +and use them to make standard Ghostscript filters work within CUPS, +proved to work very well. It also "killed several birds with one +stone": +

  • It made all current and future Ghostscript filter +developments available for CUPS;

  • It made available a lot of additional printer models +to CUPS users (because often the "traditional" Ghostscript way of +printing was the only one available);

  • It gave all the advanced CUPS options (web interface, +GUI driver configurations) to users wanting (or needing) to use +Ghostscript filters.

cupsomatic, pdqomatic, lpdomatic, directomatic

+CUPS worked through a quickly-hacked up filter script named cupsomatic. +cupsomatic ran the printfile through Ghostscript, constructing +automatically the rather complicated command line needed. It just +required to be copied into the CUPS system to make it work. To +"configure" the way cupsomatic controls the Ghostscript rendering +process, it needs a CUPS-PPD. This PPD is generated directly from the +contents of the database. For CUPS and the respective printer/filter +combo another Perl script named "CUPS-O-Matic" did the PPD +generation. After that was working, Grant implemented within a few +days a similar thing for two other spoolers. Names chosen for the +config-generator scripts were PDQ-O-Matic +(for PDQ) and LPD-O-Matic +(for - you guessed it - LPD); the configuration here didn't use PPDs +but other spooler-specific files. +

+From late summer of that year, Till Kamppeter +started to put work into the database. Till had been newly employed by +MandrakeSoft to +convert their printing system over to CUPS, after they had seen his +FLTK-based XPP (a GUI frontend to +the CUPS lp-command). He added a huge amount of new information and new +printers. He also developed the support for other spoolers, like +PPR (via ppromatic), +GNUlpr and +LPRng (both via an extended +lpdomatic) and "spoolerless" printing (directomatic).... +

+So, to answer your question: "Foomatic" is the general name for all +the overlapping code and data behind the "*omatic" scripts.... -- +Foomatic up to versions 2.0.x required (ugly) Perl data structures +attached the Linuxprinting.org PPDs for CUPS. It had a different +"*omatic" script for every spooler, as well as different printer +configuration files.. +

The Grand Unification +achieved...

+This all has changed in Foomatic versions 2.9 (Beta) and released as +"stable" 3.0. This has now achieved the convergence of all *omatic +scripts: it is called the foomatic-rip. +This single script is the unification of the previously different +spooler-specific *omatic scripts. foomatic-rip is used by all the +different spoolers alike. Because foomatic-rip can read PPDs (both the +original PostScript printer PPDs and the Linuxprinting.org-generated +ones), all of a sudden all supported spoolers can have the power of +PPDs at their disposal; users only need to plug "foomatic-rip" into +their system.... For users there is improved media type and source +support; paper sizes and trays are easier to configure. +

+Also, the New Generation of Linuxprinting.org PPDs doesn't contain +Perl data structures any more. If you are a distro maintainer and have +used the previous version of Foomatic, you may want to give the new +one a spin: but don't forget to generate a new-version set of PPDs, +via the new foomatic-db-engine! +Individual users just need to generate a single new PPD specific to +their model by following +the steps outlined in the Foomatic tutorial or further +below. This new development is truly amazing. +

+foomatic-rip is a very clever wrapper around the need to run +Ghostscript with a different syntax, different options, different +device selections and/or different filters for each different printer +or different spooler. At the same time it can read the PPD associated +with a print queue and modify the print job according to the user +selections. Together with this comes the 100% compliance of the new +Foomatic PPDs with the Adobe spec. Some really innovative features of +the Foomatic concept will surprise users: it will support custom paper +sizes for many printers; and it will support printing on media drawn +from different paper trays within the same job (in both cases: even +where there is no support for this from Windows-based vendor printer +drivers). +

Driver Development outside

+Most driver development itself does not happen within +Linuxprinting.org. Drivers are written by independent maintainers. +Linuxprinting.org just pools all the information, and stores it in its +database. In addition, it also provides the Foomatic glue to integrate +the many drivers into any modern (or legacy) printing system known to +the world. +

+Speaking of the different driver development groups: most of +the work is currently done in three projects. These are: +

  • Omni +-- a Free Software project by IBM which tries to convert their printer +driver knowledge from good-ol' OS/2 times into a modern, modular, +universal driver architecture for Linux/UNIX (still Beta). This +currently supports 437 models.

  • HPIJS -- +a Free Software project by HP to provide the support for their own +range of models (very mature, printing in most cases is perfect and +provides true photo quality). This currently supports 369 +models.

  • Gimp-Print -- a Free software +effort, started by Michael Sweet (also lead developer for CUPS), now +directed by Robert Krawitz, which has achieved an amazing level of +photo print quality (many Epson users swear that its quality is +better than the vendor drivers provided by Epson for the Microsoft +platforms). This currently supports 522 models.

Forums, Downloads, Tutorials, Howtos -- also for Mac OS X and +commercial UNIX

+Linuxprinting.org today is the one-stop "shop" to download printer +drivers. Look for printer information and tutorials +or solve printing problems in its popular forums. But +it's not just for GNU/Linux: users and admins of commercial UNIX +systems are also going there, and the relatively new Mac +OS X forum has turned out to be one of the most frequented +fora after only a few weeks. +

+Linuxprinting.org and the Foomatic driver wrappers around Ghostscript +are now a standard toolchain for printing on all the important +distros. Most of them also have CUPS underneath. While in recent years +most printer data had been added by Till (who works at Mandrake), many +additional contributions came from engineers with SuSE, RedHat, +Connectiva, Debian and others. Vendor-neutrality is an important goal +of the Foomatic project. +

Note

+Till Kamppeter from MandrakeSoft is doing an excellent job in his +spare time to maintain Linuxprinting.org and Foomatic. So if you use +it often, please send him a note showing your appreciation. +

Foomatic Database generated PPDs

+The Foomatic database is an amazing piece of ingenuity in itself. Not +only does it keep the printer and driver information, but it is +organized in a way that it can generate "PPD" files "on the fly" from +its internal XML-based datasets. While these PPDs are modelled to the +Adobe specification of "PostScript Printer Descriptions" (PPDs), the +Linuxprinting.org/Foomatic-PPDs don't normally drive PostScript +printers: they are used to describe all the bells and whistles you +could ring or blow on an Epson Stylus inkjet, or a HP Photosmart or +what-have-you. The main "trick" is one little additional line, not +envisaged by the PPD specification, starting with the "*cupsFilter" +keyword: it tells the CUPS daemon how to proceed with the PostScript +print file (old-style Foomatic-PPDs named the +cupsomatic filter script, while the new-style +PPDs now call foomatic-rip). This filter +script calls Ghostscript on the host system (the recommended variant +is ESP Ghostscript) to do the rendering work. foomatic-rip knows which +filter or internal device setting it should ask from Ghostscript to +convert the PostScript printjob into a raster format ready for the +target device. This usage of PPDs to describe the options of non-PS +printers was the invention of the CUPS developers. The rest is easy: +GUI tools (like KDE's marvellous "kprinter", +or the GNOME "gtklp", "xpp" and the CUPS +web interface) read the PPD too and use this information to present +the available settings to the user as an intuitive menu selection. +

foomatic-rip and Foomatic-PPD Download and Installation

+Here are the steps to install a foomatic-rip driven "LaserJet 4 Plus" +compatible printer in CUPS (note that recent distributions of SuSE, +UnitedLinux and Mandrake may ship with a complete package of +Foomatic-PPDs plus the foomatic-rip utility. going directly to +Linuxprinting.org ensures you to get the latest driver/PPD files): +

  • Surf to http://www.linuxprinting.org/printer_list.cgi +

  • Check the complete list of printers in the database: +http://www.linuxprinting.org/printer_list.cgi?make=Anyone +

  • There select your model and click on the +link.

  • You'll arrive at a page listing all drivers working +with this model (for all printers, there will always be +one recommended driver. Try this one +first).

  • In our case ("HP LaserJet 4 Plus"), we'll arrive here: + http://www.linuxprinting.org/show_printer.cgi?recnum=HP-LaserJet_4_Plus +

  • The recommended driver is "ljet4".

  • There are several links provided here. You should +visit them all, if you are not familiar with the Linuxprinting.org +database.

  • There is a link to the database page for the "ljet4": + http://www.linuxprinting.org/show_driver.cgi?driver=ljet4 +On the driver's page, you'll find important and detailed information +about how to use that driver within the various available +spoolers.

  • Another link may lead you to the homepage of the +driver author or the driver.

  • Important links are the ones which provide hints with +setup instructions for CUPS (http://www.linuxprinting.org/cups-doc.html), +PDQ (http://www.linuxprinting.org/pdq-doc.html), +LPD, LPRng and GNUlpr (http://www.linuxprinting.org/lpd-doc.html) +as well as PPR (http://www.linuxprinting.org/ppr-doc.html) +or "spooler-less" printing (http://www.linuxprinting.org/direct-doc.html +).

  • You can view the PPD in your browser through this +link: http://www.linuxprinting.org/ppd-o-matic.cgi?driver=ljet4&printer=HP-LaserJet_4_Plus&show=1 +

  • You can also (most importantly) +generate and download the PPD: http://www.linuxprinting.org/ppd-o-matic.cgi?driver=ljet4&printer=HP-LaserJet_4_Plus&show=0 +

  • The PPD contains all the information needed to use our +model and the driver; this is, once installed, working transparently +for the user. Later you'll only need to choose resolution, paper size +etc. from the web-based menu, or from the print dialog GUI, or from +the commandline.

  • Should you have ended up on the driver's page (http://www.linuxprinting.org/show_driver.cgi?driver=ljet4), +you can choose to use the "PPD-O-Matic" online PPD generator +program.

  • Select the exact model and check either "download" or +"display PPD file" and click on "Generate PPD file".

  • If you save the PPD file from the browser view, please +don't use "cut'n'past" (since it could possibly damage line endings +and tabs, which makes the PPD likely to fail its duty), but use "Save +as..." in your browser's menu. (Best is to use the "download" option +from the web page directly).

  • Another very interesting part on each driver page is +the Show execution details button. If you +select your printer model and click that button, you will get +displayed a complete Ghostscript command line, enumerating all options +available for that driver/printermodel combo. This is a great way to +"Learn Ghostscript By Doing". It is also an excellent "cheat sheet" +for all experienced users who need to re-construct a good command line +for that damn printing script, but can't remember the exact +syntax. ;-)

  • Some time during your visit to Linuxprinting.org, save +the PPD to a suitable place on your harddisk, say +/path/to/my-printer.ppd (if you prefer to install +your printers with the help of the CUPS web interface, save the PPD to +the /usr/share/cups/model/ path and re-start +cupsd).

  • Then install the printer with a suitable commandline, +e.g.: +

    +root# lpadmin -p laserjet4plus -v parallel:/dev/lp0 -E -P path/to/my-printer.ppd
+

  • Note again this: for all the new-style "Foomatic-PPDs" +from Linuxprinting.org, you also need a special "CUPS filter" named +"foomatic-rip".Get the latest version of "foomatic-rip" from: http://www.linuxprinting.org/foomatic2.9/download.cgi?filename=foomatic-rip&show=0 +

  • The foomatic-rip Perlscript itself also makes some +interesting reading (http://www.linuxprinting.org/foomatic2.9/download.cgi?filename=foomatic-rip&show=1), +because it is very well documented by Till's inline comments (even +non-Perl hackers will learn quite a bit about printing by reading +it... ;-)

  • Save foomatic-rip either directly in +/usr/lib/cups/filter/foomatic-rip or somewhere in +your $PATH (and don't forget to make it world-executable). Again, +don't save by "copy'n'paste" but use the appropriate link, or the +"Save as..." menu item in your browser.

  • If you save foomatic-rip in your $PATH, create a symlink: +cd /usr/lib/cups/filter/ ; ln -s `which +foomatic-rip`. For CUPS to discover this new +available filter at startup, you need to re-start +cupsd.

+Once you print to a printqueue set up with the Foomatic-PPD, CUPS will +insert the appropriate commands and comments into the resulting +PostScript jobfile. foomatic-rip is able to read and act upon +these. foomatic-rip uses some specially encoded Foomatic comments, +embedded in the jobfile. These in turn are used to construct +(transparently for you, the user) the complicated ghostscript command +line telling for the printer driver how exactly the resulting raster +data should look like and which printer commands to embed into the +data stream. +

+You need: +

  • A "foomatic+something" PPD -- but it this not enough +to print with CUPS (it is only one important +component)

  • The "foomatic-rip" filter script (Perl) in +/usr/lib/cups/filters/

  • Perl to make foomatic-rip run

  • Ghostscript (because it is doing the main work, +controlled by the PPD/foomatic-rip combo) to produce the raster data +fit for your printermodel's consumption

  • Ghostscript must (depending on +the driver/model) contain support for a certain "device", representing +the selected "driver" for your model (as shown by "gs +-h")

  • foomatic-rip needs a new version of PPDs (PPD versions +produced for cupsomatic don't work with +foomatic-rip).

Page Accounting with CUPS

+Often there are questions regarding "print quotas" wherein Samba users +(that is, Windows clients) should not be able to print beyond a +certain amount of pages or data volume per day, week or month. This +feature is dependent on the real print subsystem you're using. +Samba's part is always to receive the job files from the clients +(filtered or unfiltered) and hand it over to this +printing subsystem. +

+Of course one could "hack" things with one's own scripts. But then +there is CUPS. CUPS supports "quotas" which can be based on sizes of +jobs or on the number of pages or both, and are spanning any time +period you want. +

Setting up Quotas

+This is an example command how root would set a print quota in CUPS, +assuming an existing printer named "quotaprinter": +

+root# lpadmin -p quotaprinter -o job-quota-period=604800 \
+	-o job-k-limit=1024 -o job-page-limit=100
+

+This would limit every single user to print 100 pages or 1024 KB of +data (whichever comes first) within the last 604,800 seconds ( = 1 +week). +

Correct and incorrect Accounting

+For CUPS to count correctly, the printfile needs to pass the CUPS +"pstops" filter, otherwise it uses a "dummy" count of "1". Some +printfiles don't pass it (eg: image files) but then those are mostly 1 +page jobs anyway. This also means that proprietary drivers for the +target printer running on the client computers and CUPS/Samba, which +then spool these files as "raw" (i.e. leaving them untouched, not +filtering them), will be counted as "1-pagers" too! +

+You need to send PostScript from the clients (i.e. run a PostScript +driver there) to have the chance to get accounting done. If the +printer is a non-PostScript model, you need to let CUPS do the job to +convert the file to a print-ready format for the target printer. This +will be working for currently about 1,000 different printer models, +see the driver list at linuxprinting.org/. +

Adobe and CUPS PostScript Drivers for Windows Clients

+Before CUPS-1.1.16 your only option was to use the Adobe PostScript +Driver on the Windows clients. The output of this driver was not +always passed through the "pstops" filter on the CUPS/Samba side, and +therefore was not counted correctly (the reason is that it often, +depending on the "PPD" being used, wrote a "PJL"-header in front of +the real PostScript which caused CUPS to skip pstops and go directly +to the "pstoraster" stage). +

+From CUPS-1.1.16 onward you can use the "CUPS PostScript Driver for +Windows NT/2K/XP clients" (which is tagged in the download area of +http://www.cups.org/ as the "cups-samba-1.1.16.tar.gz" package). It does +not work for Win9x/ME clients. But it guarantees: +

  • to not write an PJL-header

  • to still read and support all PJL-options named in the +driver PPD with its own means

  • that the file will pass through the "pstops" filter +on the CUPS/Samba server

  • to page-count correctly the +printfile

+You can read more about the setup of this combination in the manpage +for "cupsaddsmb" (which is only present with CUPS installed, and only +current from CUPS 1.1.16). +

The page_log File Syntax

+These are the items CUPS logs in the "page_log" for every +single page of a job: +

  • Printer name

  • User name

  • Job ID

  • Time of printing

  • the page number

  • the number of copies

  • a billing information string +(optional)

  • the host which sent the job (included since version +1.1.19)

+Here is an extract of my CUPS server's page_log file to illustrate the +format and included items: +

+infotec_IS2027 kurt 401 [22/Apr/2003:10:28:43 +0100] 1 3 #marketing 10.160.50.13
+infotec_IS2027 kurt 401 [22/Apr/2003:10:28:43 +0100] 2 3 #marketing 10.160.50.13
+infotec_IS2027 kurt 401 [22/Apr/2003:10:28:43 +0100] 3 3 #marketing 10.160.50.13
+infotec_IS2027 kurt 401 [22/Apr/2003:10:28:43 +0100] 4 3 #marketing 10.160.50.13
+DigiMaster9110 boss 402 [22/Apr/2003:10:33:22 +0100] 1 440 finance-dep 10.160.51.33
+

+This was job ID "401", printed on "infotec_IS2027" by user "kurt", a +64-page job printed in 3 copies and billed to "#marketing", sent +from IP address 10.160.50.13. The next job had ID "402", was sent by +user "boss" from IP address 10.160.51.33,printed from one page 440 +copies and is set to be billed to "finance-dep". +

Possible Shortcomings

+What flaws or shortcomings are there with this quota system? +

  • the ones named above (wrongly logged job in case of +printer hardware failure, etc.)

  • in reality, CUPS counts the job pages that are being +processed in software (that is, going through the +"RIP") rather than the physical sheets successfully leaving the +printing device. Thus if there is a jam while printing the 5th sheet out +of 1000 and the job is aborted by the printer, the "page count" will +still show the figure of 1000 for that job

  • all quotas are the same for all users (no flexibility +to give the boss a higher quota than the clerk), no support for +groups

  • no means to read out the current balance or the +"used-up" number of current quota

  • a user having used up 99 sheets of 100 quota will +still be able to send and print a 1,000 sheet job

  • a user being denied a job because of a filled-up quota +doesn't get a meaningful error message from CUPS other than +"client-error-not-possible".

Future Developments

+This is the best system currently available, and there are huge +improvements under development for CUPS 1.2: +

  • page counting will go into the "backends" (these talk +directly to the printer and will increase the count in sync with the +actual printing process: thus a jam at the 5th sheet will lead to a +stop in the counting)

  • quotas will be handled more flexibly

  • probably there will be support for users to inquire +their "accounts" in advance

  • probably there will be support for some other tools +around this topic

Other Accounting Tools

+PrintAnalyzer, pyKota, printbill, LogReport. +

Additional Material

+A printer queue with no PPD associated to it is a +"raw" printer and all files will go directly there as received by the +spooler. The exceptions are file types "application/octet-stream" +which need "passthrough feature" enabled. "Raw" queues don't do any +filtering at all, they hand the file directly to the CUPS backend. +This backend is responsible for the sending of the data to the device +(as in the "device URI" notation: lpd://, socket://, +smb://, ipp://, http://, parallel:/, serial:/, usb:/ etc.) +

+"cupsomatic"/Foomatic are not native CUPS drivers +and they don't ship with CUPS. They are a Third Party add-on, +developed at Linuxprinting.org. As such, they are a brilliant hack to +make all models (driven by Ghostscript drivers/filters in traditional +spoolers) also work via CUPS, with the same (good or bad!) quality as +in these other spoolers. "cupsomatic" is only a vehicle to execute a +ghostscript commandline at that stage in the CUPS filtering chain, +where "normally" the native CUPS "pstoraster" filter would kick +in. cupsomatic by-passes pstoraster, "kidnaps" the printfile from CUPS +away and re-directs it to go through Ghostscript. CUPS accepts this, +because the associated CUPS-O-Matic-/Foomatic-PPD specifies: +

+  *cupsFilter:  "application/vnd.cups-postscript 0 cupsomatic"
+

+This line persuades CUPS to hand the file to cupsomatic, once it has +successfully converted it to the MIME type +"application/vnd.cups-postscript". This conversion will not happen for +Jobs arriving from Windows which are auto-typed +"application/octet-stream", with the according changes in +/etc/cups/mime.types in place. +

+CUPS is widely configurable and flexible, even regarding its filtering +mechanism. Another workaround in some situations would be to have in +/etc/cups/mime.types entries as follows: +

+ application/postscript           application/vnd.cups-raw  0  -
+ application/vnd.cups-postscript  application/vnd.cups-raw  0  -
+

+This would prevent all Postscript files from being filtered (rather, +they will through the virtual nullfilter +denoted with "-"). This could only be useful for PS printers. If you +want to print PS code on non-PS printers (provided they support ASCII +text printing) an entry as follows could be useful: +

+ */*           application/vnd.cups-raw  0  -
+

+and would effectively send all files to the +backend without further processing. +

+Lastly, you could have the following entry: +

+application/vnd.cups-postscript application/vnd.cups-raw 0 my_PJL_stripping_filter
+

+You will need to write a my_PJL_stripping_filter +(could be a shellscript) that parses the PostScript and removes the +unwanted PJL. This would need to conform to CUPS filter design +(mainly, receive and pass the parameters printername, job-id, +username, jobtitle, copies, print options and possibly the +filename). It would be installed as world executable into +/usr/lib/cups/filters/ and will be called by CUPS +if it encounters a MIME type "application/vnd.cups-postscript". +

+CUPS can handle -o job-hold-until=indefinite. +This keeps the job in the queue "on hold". It will only be printed +upon manual release by the printer operator. This is a requirement in +many "central reproduction departments", where a few operators manage +the jobs of hundreds of users on some big machine, where no user is +allowed to have direct access (such as when the operators often need +to load the proper paper type before running the 10,000 page job +requested by marketing for the mailing, etc.). +

Auto-Deletion or Preservation of CUPS Spool Files

+Samba print files pass through two "spool" directories. One is the +incoming directory managed by Samba, (set in the path = /var/spool/samba directive in the +[printers] section of +smb.conf). The other is the spool directory of +your UNIX print subsystem. For CUPS it is normally +/var/spool/cups/, as set by the cupsd.conf +directive RequestRoot /var/spool/cups. +

CUPS Configuration Settings explained

+Some important parameter settings in the CUPS configuration file +cupsd.conf are: +

PreserveJobHistory Yes

+This keeps some details of jobs in cupsd's mind (well it keeps the +"c12345", "c12346" etc. files in the CUPS spool directory, which do a +similar job as the old-fashioned BSD-LPD control files). This is set +to "Yes" as a default. +

PreserveJobFiles Yes

+This keeps the job files themselves in cupsd's mind +(well it keeps the "d12345", "d12346" etc. files in the CUPS spool +directory...). This is set to "No" as the CUPS +default. +

"MaxJobs 500"

+This directive controls the maximum number of jobs +that are kept in memory. Once the number of jobs reaches the limit, +the oldest completed job is automatically purged from the system to +make room for the new one. If all of the known jobs are still +pending or active then the new job will be rejected. Setting the +maximum to 0 disables this functionality. The default setting is +0. +

+(There are also additional settings for "MaxJobsPerUser" and +"MaxJobsPerPrinter"...) +

Pre-conditions

+For everything to work as announced, you need to have three +things: +

  • a Samba-smbd which is compiled against "libcups" (Check +on Linux by running "ldd `which smbd`")

  • a Samba-smb.conf setting of + printing = cups

  • another Samba-smb.conf setting of + printcap = cups

Note

+In this case all other manually set printing-related commands (like +print command, +lpq command, +lprm command, +lppause command or +lpresume command) are ignored and they should normally have no +influence what-so-ever on your printing. +

Manual Configuration

+If you want to do things manually, replace the printing = cups +by printing = bsd. Then your manually set commands may work +(haven't tested this), and a print command = lp -d %P %s; rm %s" +may do what you need. +

In Case of Trouble.....

+If you have more problems, post the output of these commands +to the CUPS or Samba mailing lists (choose the one which seems more +relevant to your problem): +

+$ grep -v ^# /etc/cups/cupsd.conf | grep -v ^$
+$ grep -v ^# /etc/samba/smb.conf | grep -v ^$ | grep -v "^;"
+

+(adapt paths as needed). These commands leave out the empty +lines and lines with comments, providing the "naked settings" in a +compact way. Don't forget to name the CUPS and Samba versions you +are using! This saves bandwidth and makes for easier readability +for experts (and you are expecting experts to read them, right? +;-) +

Printing from CUPS to Windows attached +Printers

+From time to time the question arises, how you can print +to a Windows attached printer +from Samba. Normally the local connection +from Windows host to printer would be done by USB or parallel +cable, but this doesn't matter to Samba. From here only an SMB +connection needs to be opened to the Windows host. Of course, this +printer must be "shared" first. As you have learned by now, CUPS uses +backends to talk to printers and other +servers. To talk to Windows shared printers you need to use the +smb (surprise, surprise!) backend. Check if this +is in the CUPS backend directory. This resides usually in +/usr/lib/cups/backend/. You need to find a "smb" +file there. It should be a symlink to smbspool +which file must exist and be executable: +

+root# ls -l /usr/lib/cups/backend/
+total 253
+drwxr-xr-x    3 root     root          720 Apr 30 19:04 .
+drwxr-xr-x    6 root     root          125 Dec 19 17:13 ..
+-rwxr-xr-x    1 root     root        10692 Feb 16 21:29 canon
+-rwxr-xr-x    1 root     root        10692 Feb 16 21:29 epson
+lrwxrwxrwx    1 root     root            3 Apr 17 22:50 http -> ipp
+-rwxr-xr-x    1 root     root        17316 Apr 17 22:50 ipp
+-rwxr-xr-x    1 root     root        15420 Apr 20 17:01 lpd
+-rwxr-xr-x    1 root     root         8656 Apr 20 17:01 parallel
+-rwxr-xr-x    1 root     root         2162 Mar 31 23:15 pdfdistiller
+lrwxrwxrwx    1 root     root           25 Apr 30 19:04 ptal -> /usr/sbin/ptal-cups
+-rwxr-xr-x    1 root     root         6284 Apr 20 17:01 scsi
+lrwxrwxrwx    1 root     root           17 Apr  2 03:11 smb -> /usr/bin/smbspool
+-rwxr-xr-x    1 root     root         7912 Apr 20 17:01 socket
+-rwxr-xr-x    1 root     root         9012 Apr 20 17:01 usb
+
+root# ls -l `which smbspool`
+-rwxr-xr-x    1 root     root       563245 Dec 28 14:49 /usr/bin/smbspool
+

+If this symlink doesn't exist, create it: +

+root# ln -s `which smbspool` /usr/lib/cups/backend/smb
+

+smbspool has been written by Mike Sweet from the CUPS folks. It is +included and ships with Samba. It may also be used with print +subsystems other than CUPS, to spool jobs to Windows printer shares. To +set up printer "winprinter" on CUPS, you need to have a "driver" for +it. Essentially this means to convert the print data on the CUPS/Samba +host to a format that the printer can digest (the Windows host is +unable to convert any files you may send). This also means you should +be able to print to the printer if it were hooked directly at your +Samba/CUPS host. For troubleshooting purposes, this is what you +should do, to determine if that part of the process chain is in +order. Then proceed to fix the network connection/authentication to +the Windows host, etc. +

+To install a printer with the smb backend on CUPS, use this command: +

+root# lpadmin -p winprinter -v smb://WINDOWSNETBIOSNAME/printersharename \
+  -P /path/to/PPD
+

+The PPD must be able to direct CUPS to generate +the print data for the target model. For PostScript printers just use +the PPD that would be used with the Windows NT PostScript driver. But +what can you do if the printer is only accessible with a password? Or +if the printer's host is part of another workgroup? This is provided +for: you can include the required parameters as part of the +smb:// device-URI. Like this: +

  • smb://WORKGROUP/WINDOWSNETBIOSNAME/printersharename

  • smb://username:password@WORKGROUP/WINDOWSNETBIOSNAME/printersharename

  • smb://username:password@WINDOWSNETBIOSNAME/printersharename

+Note that the device-URI will be visible in the process list of the +Samba server (e.g. when someone uses the ps -aux +command on Linux), even if the username and passwords are sanitized +before they get written into the log files. So this is an inherently +insecure option. However it is the only one. Don't use it if you want +to protect your passwords. Better share the printer in a way that +doesn't require a password! Printing will only work if you have a +working netbios name resolution up and running. Note that this is a +feature of CUPS and you don't necessarily need to have smbd running +(but who wants that? :-). +

More CUPS filtering Chains

+The following diagrams reveal how CUPS handles print jobs. +

Figure 19.17. Filtering chain 1

Filtering chain 1

Figure 19.18. Filtering chain with cupsomatic

Filtering chain with cupsomatic

Note

+Gimp-Print and some other 3rd-Party-Filters (like TurboPrint) to +CUPS and ESP PrintPro plug-in where rastertosomething is noted. +

Common Errors

Win9x client can't install driver

For Win9x clients require the printer names to be 8 +chars (or "8 plus 3 chars suffix") max; otherwise the driver files +won't get transferred when you want to download them from +Samba.

"cupsaddsmb" keeps asking for root password in + neverending loop

Have you security = user? Have +you used smbpasswd to give root a Samba account? +You can do 2 things: open another terminal and execute +smbpasswd -a root to create the account, and +continue with entering the password into the first terminal. Or break +out of the loop by hitting ENTER twice (without trying to type a +password).

"cupsaddsmb" gives "No PPD file for printer..." + message while PPD file is present

Have you enabled printer sharing on CUPS? This means: +do you have a <Location +/printers>....</Location> section in CUPS +server's cupsd.conf which doesn't deny access to +the host you run "cupsaddsmb" from? It could be +an issue if you use cupsaddsmb remotely, or if you use it with a +-h parameter: cupsaddsmb -H + sambaserver -h cupsserver -v printername. +

Is your +"TempDir" directive in +cupsd.conf +set to a valid value and is it writeable? +

Client can't connect to Samba printer

Use smbstatus to check which user +you are from Samba's point of view. Do you have the privileges to +write into the [print$] +share?

Can't reconnect to Samba under new account + from Win2K/XP

Once you are connected as the "wrong" user (for +example as "nobody", which often occurs if you have +map to guest = bad user), Windows Explorer will not accept an +attempt to connect again as a different user. There won't be any byte +transfered on the wire to Samba, but still you'll see a stupid error +message which makes you think that Samba has denied access. Use +smbstatus to check for active connections. Kill the +PIDs. You still can't re-connect and get the dreaded +You can't connect with a second account from the same +machine message, as soon as you are trying? And you +don't see any single byte arriving at Samba (see logs; use "ethereal") +indicating a renewed connection attempt? Shut all Explorer Windows. +This makes Windows forget what it has cached in its memory as +established connections. Then re-connect as the right user. Best +method is to use a DOS terminal window and first +do net use z: \\GANDALF\print$ /user:root. Check +with smbstatus that you are connected under a +different account. Now open the "Printers" folder (on the Samba server +in the Network Neighbourhood), right-click the +printer in question and select +Connect...

Avoid being connected to the Samba server as the + "wrong" user

You see per smbstatus that you are +connected as user "nobody"; while you wanted to be "root" or +"printeradmin"? This is probably due to +map to guest = bad user, which silently connects you under the guest account, +when you gave (maybe by accident) an incorrect username. Remove +map to guest, if you want to prevent +this.

Upgrading to CUPS drivers from Adobe drivers on + NT/2K/XP clients gives problems

First delete all "old" Adobe-using printers. Then +delete all "old" Adobe drivers. (On Win2K/XP, right-click in +background of "Printers" folder, select "Server Properties...", select +tab "Drivers" and delete here).

Can't use "cupsaddsmb" on Samba server which is + a PDC

Do you use the "naked" root user name? Try to do it +this way: cupsaddsmb -U DOMAINNAME\\root -v +printername> (note the two backslashes: the first one is +required to "escape" the second one).

Deleted Win2K printer driver is still shown

Deleting a printer on the client won't delete the +driver too (to verify, right-click on the white background of the +"Printers" folder, select "Server Properties" and click on the +"Drivers" tab). These same old drivers will be re-used when you try to +install a printer with the same name. If you want to update to a new +driver, delete the old ones first. Deletion is only possible if no +other printer uses the same driver.

Win2K/XP "Local Security + Policies"

Local Security Policies may not +allow the installation of unsigned drivers. "Local Security Policies" +may not allow the installation of printer drivers at +all.

WinXP clients: "Administrator can not install + printers for all local users"

Windows XP handles SMB printers on a "per-user" basis. +This means every user needs to install the printer himself. To have a +printer available for everybody, you might want to use the built-in +IPP client capabilities of WinXP. Add a printer with the print path of +http://cupsserver:631/printers/printername. +Still looking into this one: maybe a "logon script" could +automatically install printers for all +users.

"Print Change Notify" functions on + NT-clients

For "print change notify" functions on NT++ clients, +these need to run the "Server" service first (re-named to +File & Print Sharing for MS Networks in +XP).

WinXP-SP1

WinXP-SP1 introduced a Point and Print +Restriction Policy (this restriction doesn't apply to +"Administrator" or "Power User" groups of users). In Group Policy +Object Editor: go to User Configuration, + Administrative Templates, Control Panel, +Printers. The policy is automatically set to +Enabled and the Users can only Point +and Print to machines in their Forest . You probably need +to change it to Disabled or Users can +only Point and Print to these servers in order to make +driver downloads from Samba possible.

Print options for all users can't be set on Win2K/XP

How are you doing it? I bet the wrong way (it is not +very easy to find out, though). There are 3 different ways to bring +you to a dialog that seems to set everything. All +three dialogs look the same. Only one of them +does what you intend. You need to be +Administrator or Print Administrator to do this for all users. Here +is how I do in on XP: +

  1. The first "wrong" way: + +

    1. Open the Printers +folder.

    2. Right-click on the printer +(remoteprinter on cupshost) and +select in context menu Printing +Preferences...

    3. Look at this dialog closely and remember what it looks +like.

    +

  2. The second "wrong" way: + +

    1. Open the Printers +folder.

    2. Right-click on the printer (remoteprinter on +cupshost) and select in the context menu +Properties

    3. Click on the General +tab

    4. Click on the button Printing +Preferences...

    5. A new dialog opens. Keep this dialog open and go back +to the parent dialog.

    +

  3. The third, the "correct" way: (should you do +this from the beginning, just carry out steps 1. and 2. from second +"way" above) + +

    1. Click on the Advanced +tab. (Hmmm... if everything is "Grayed Out", then you are not logged +in as a user with enough privileges).

    2. Click on the Printing +Defaults... button.

    3. On any of the two new tabs, click on the +Advanced... +button.

    4. A new dialog opens. Compare this one to the other, +identical looking one from "B.5" or A.3".

    +

+Do you see any difference? I don't either... However, only the last +one, which you arrived at with steps "C.1.-6." will save any settings +permanently and be the defaults for new users. If you want all clients +to get the same defaults, you need to conduct these steps as +Administrator (printer admin in +smb.conf) before a client +downloads the driver (the clients can later set their own +per-user defaults by following the +procedures A. or B. +above).

Most common blunders in driver + settings on Windows clients

Don't use Optimize for +Speed: use Optimize for +Portability instead (Adobe PS Driver) Don't use +Page Independence: No: always +settle with Page Independence: +Yes (Microsoft PS Driver and CUPS PS Driver for +WinNT/2K/XP) If there are problems with fonts: use +Download as Softfont into +printer (Adobe PS Driver). For +TrueType Download Options +choose Outline. Use PostScript +Level 2, if you are having trouble with a non-PS printer, and if +there is a choice.

cupsaddsmb does not work + with newly installed printer

Symptom: the last command of +cupsaddsmb doesn't complete successfully: +cmd = setdriver printername printername result was +NT_STATUS_UNSUCCESSFUL then possibly the printer was not yet +"recognized" by Samba. Did it show up in Network +Neighbourhood? Did it show up in rpcclient +hostname -c 'enumprinters'? Restart smbd (or send a +kill -HUP to all processes listed by +smbstatus and try +again.

Permissions on +/var/spool/samba/ get reset after each +reboot

Have you by accident set the CUPS spool directory to +the same location? (RequestRoot +/var/spool/samba/ in cupsd.conf or +the other way round: /var/spool/cups/ is set as +path> in the [printers] +section). These must be different. Set +RequestRoot /var/spool/cups/ in +cupsd.conf and path = +/var/spool/samba in the [printers] +section of smb.conf. Otherwise cupsd will +sanitize permissions to its spool directory with each restart, and +printing will not work reliably.

Printer named "lp" +intermittently swallows jobs and spits out completely different +ones

It is a very bad idea to name any printer "lp". This +is the traditional UNIX name for the default printer. CUPS may be set +up to do an automatic creation of "Implicit Classes". This means, to +group all printers with the same name to a pool of devices, and +loadbalancing the jobs across them in a round-robin fashion. Chances +are high that someone else has an "lp" named printer too. You may +receive his jobs and send your own to his device unwittingly. To have +tight control over the printer names, set BrowseShortNames +No. It will present any printer as "printername@cupshost" +then, giving you a better control over what may happen in a large +networked environment.

Location of Adobe PostScript driver files necessary for "cupsaddsmb"

Use smbclient to connect to any +Windows box with a shared PostScript printer: smbclient +//windowsbox/print\$ -U guest. You can navigate to the +W32X86/2 subdir to mget ADOBE* +and other files or to WIN40/0 to do the same. -- +Another option is to download the *.exe packaged +files from the Adobe website.

An Overview of the CUPS Printing Processes

Figure 19.19. CUPS Printing Overview

CUPS Printing Overview
Prev Up Next
Chapter 18. Classical Printing Support Home Chapter 20. Stackable VFS modules
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/ClientConfig.html b/docs/htmldocs/ClientConfig.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ab34354e2d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/ClientConfig.html @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +Chapter 9. MS Windows Network Configuration Guide
Chapter 9. MS Windows Network Configuration Guide
Prev Part II. Server Configuration Basics Next

Chapter 9. MS Windows Network Configuration Guide

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

Table of Contents

Note

Note

+This chapter did not make it into this release. +It is planned for the published release of this document. +

Prev Up Next
Chapter 8. Stand-Alone Servers Home Part III. Advanced Configuration
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/DNSDHCP.html b/docs/htmldocs/DNSDHCP.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1472c1925b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/DNSDHCP.html @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +Chapter 40. DNS and DHCP Configuration Guide
Chapter 40. DNS and DHCP Configuration Guide
Prev Part VI. Appendixes Next

Chapter 40. DNS and DHCP Configuration Guide

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

Table of Contents

Note

Note

+This chapter did not make it into this release. +It is planned for the published release of this document. +

Prev Up Next
Chapter 39. Samba Performance Tuning Home Chapter 41. Further Resources
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Further-Resources.html b/docs/htmldocs/Further-Resources.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8464c480c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Further-Resources.html @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +Chapter 41. Further Resources
Chapter 41. Further Resources
Prev Part VI. Appendixes Next

Chapter 41. Further Resources

Jelmer R. Vernooij

The Samba Team

May 1, 2003

Table of Contents

Websites
Related updates from Microsoft

Websites

Related updates from Microsoft

Prev Up Next
Chapter 40. DNS and DHCP Configuration Guide Home Index
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/InterdomainTrusts.html b/docs/htmldocs/InterdomainTrusts.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8422c52073 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/InterdomainTrusts.html @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +Chapter 16. Interdomain Trust Relationships
Chapter 16. Interdomain Trust Relationships
Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

Chapter 16. Interdomain Trust Relationships

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

Rafal Szczesniak

Samba Team

Jelmer R. Vernooij

drawing
The Samba Team

Stephen Langasek

April 3, 2003

Table of Contents

Features and Benefits
Trust Relationship Background
Native MS Windows NT4 Trusts Configuration
Creating an NT4 Domain Trust
Completing an NT4 Domain Trust
Inter-Domain Trust Facilities
Configuring Samba NT-style Domain Trusts
Samba as the Trusted Domain
Samba as the Trusting Domain
NT4-style Domain Trusts with Windows 2000
Common Errors

+Samba-3 supports NT4 style domain trust relationships. This is feature that many sites +will want to use if they migrate to Samba-3 from and NT4 style domain and do NOT want to +adopt Active Directory or an LDAP based authentication back end. This section explains +some background information regarding trust relationships and how to create them. It is now +possible for Samba-3 to trust NT4 (and vice versa), as well as to create Samba3-to-Samba3 +trusts. +

Features and Benefits

+Samba-3 can participate in Samba-to-Samba as well as in Samba-to-MS Windows NT4 style +trust relationships. This imparts to Samba similar scalability as is possible with +MS Windows NT4. +

+Given that Samba-3 has the capability to function with a scalable backend authentication +database such as LDAP, and given it's ability to run in Primary as well as Backup Domain control +modes, the administrator would be well advised to consider alternatives to the use of +Interdomain trusts simply because by the very nature of how this works it is fragile. +That was, after all, a key reason for the development and adoption of Microsoft Active Directory. +

Trust Relationship Background

+MS Windows NT3.x/4.0 type security domains employ a non-hierarchical security structure. +The limitations of this architecture as it affects the scalability of MS Windows networking +in large organisations is well known. Additionally, the flat namespace that results from +this design significantly impacts the delegation of administrative responsibilities in +large and diverse organisations. +

+Microsoft developed Active Directory Service (ADS), based on Kerberos and LDAP, as a means +of circumventing the limitations of the older technologies. Not every organisation is ready +or willing to embrace ADS. For small companies the older NT4 style domain security paradigm +is quite adequate, there thus remains an entrenched user base for whom there is no direct +desire to go through a disruptive change to adopt ADS. +

+Microsoft introduced with MS Windows NT the ability to allow differing security domains +to affect a mechanism so that users from one domain may be given access rights and privileges +in another domain. The language that describes this capability is couched in terms of +Trusts. Specifically, one domain will trust the users +from another domain. The domain from which users are available to another security domain is +said to be a trusted domain. The domain in which those users have assigned rights and privileges +is the trusting domain. With NT3.x/4.0 all trust relationships are always in one direction only, +thus if users in both domains are to have privileges and rights in each others' domain, then it is +necessary to establish two (2) relationships, one in each direction. +

+In an NT4 style MS security domain, all trusts are non-transitive. This means that if there +are three (3) domains (let's call them RED, WHITE, and BLUE) where RED and WHITE have a trust +relationship, and WHITE and BLUE have a trust relationship, then it holds that there is no +implied trust between the RED and BLUE domains. ie: Relationships are explicit and not +transitive. +

+ +New to MS Windows 2000 ADS security contexts is the fact that trust relationships are two-way +by default. Also, all inter-ADS domain trusts are transitive. In the case of the RED, WHITE and BLUE +domains above, with Windows 2000 and ADS the RED and BLUE domains CAN trust each other. This is +an inherent feature of ADS domains. Samba-3 implements MS Windows NT4 +style Interdomain trusts and interoperates with MS Windows 200x ADS +security domains in similar manner to MS Windows NT4 style domains. +

Native MS Windows NT4 Trusts Configuration

+There are two steps to creating an interdomain trust relationship. To effect a two-way trust +relationship it is necessary for each domain administrator to create a trust account for the +other domain to use in verifying security credentials. + + +

Creating an NT4 Domain Trust

+For MS Windows NT4, all domain trust relationships are configured using the +Domain User Manager. This is done from the Domain User Manager Policies +entry on the menu bar. From the Policy menu, select +Trust Relationships. Next to the lower box labelled +Permitted to Trust this Domain are two buttons, Add +and Remove. The Add button will open a panel in which +to enter the name of the remote domain that will be able to assign access rights to users in +your domain. You will also need to enter a password for this trust relationship, which the +trusting domain will use when authenticating users from the trusted domain. +The password needs to be typed twice (for standard confirmation). +

Completing an NT4 Domain Trust

+ +A trust relationship will work only when the other (trusting) domain makes the appropriate connections +with the trusted domain. To consummate the trust relationship the administrator will launch the +Domain User Manager, from the menu select Policies, then select Trust Relationships, then click on the +Add button that is next to the box that is labelled +Trusted Domains. A panel will open in which must be entered the name of the remote +domain as well as the password assigned to that trust. +

Inter-Domain Trust Facilities

+A two-way trust relationship is created when two one-way trusts are created, one in each direction. +Where a one-way trust has been established between two MS Windows NT4 domains (let's call them +DomA and DomB) the following facilities are created: +

Figure 16.1. Trusts overview

Trusts overview

  • + DomA (completes the trust connection) Trusts DomB +

  • + DomA is the Trusting domain +

  • + DomB is the Trusted domain (originates the trust account) +

  • + Users in DomB can access resources in DomA +

  • + Users in DomA can NOT access resources in DomB +

  • + Global groups from DomB CAN be used in DomA +

  • + Global groups from DomA can NOT be used in DomB +

  • + DomB DOES appear in the logon dialog box on client workstations in DomA +

  • + DomA does NOT appear in the logon dialog box on client workstations in DomB +

  • + Users / Groups in a trusting domain can NOT be granted rights, permissions or access + to a trusted domain. +

  • + The trusting domain CAN access and use accounts (Users / Global Groups) in the + trusted domain. +

  • + Administrators of the trusted domain CAN be granted admininstrative rights in the + trusting domain. +

  • + Users in a trusted domain CAN be given rights and privileges in the trusting + domain. +

  • + Trusted domain Global Groups CAN be given rights and permissions in the trusting + domain. +

  • + Global Groups from the trusted domain CAN be made members in Local Groups on + MS Windows domain member machines. +

Configuring Samba NT-style Domain Trusts

+This description is meant to be a fairly short introduction about how to set up a Samba server so +that it could participate in interdomain trust relationships. Trust relationship support in Samba +is in its early stage, so lot of things don't work yet. +

+Each of the procedures described below assumes the peer domain in the trust relationship is +controlled by a Windows NT4 server. However, the remote end could just as well be another +Samba-3 domain. It can be clearly seen, after reading this document, that combining +Samba-specific parts of what's written below leads to trust between domains in a purely Samba +environment. +

Samba as the Trusted Domain

+In order to set the Samba PDC to be the trusted party of the relationship you first need +to create a special account for the domain that will be the trusting party. To do that, +you can use the 'smbpasswd' utility. Creating the trusted domain account is very +similar to creating a trusted machine account. Suppose, your domain is +called SAMBA, and the remote domain is called RUMBA. The first step +will be to issue this command from your favourite shell: +

+

+root#  smbpasswd -a -i rumba
+New SMB password: XXXXXXXX
+Retype SMB password: XXXXXXXX
+Added user rumba$
+

+ +where -a means to add a new account into the +passdb database and -i means: ''create this +account with the InterDomain trust flag'' +

+The account name will be 'rumba$' (the name of the remote domain) +

+After issuing this command you'll be asked to enter the password for +the account. You can use any password you want, but be aware that Windows NT will +not change this password until 7 days following account creation. +After the command returns successfully, you can look at the entry for the new account +(in the standard way as appropriate for your configuration) and see that account's name is +really RUMBA$ and it has the 'I' flag set in the flags field. Now you're ready to confirm +the trust by establishing it from Windows NT Server. +

+Open User Manager for Domains and from the +Policies menu, select Trust Relationships.... +Right beside the Trusted domains list box press the +Add... button. You will be prompted for +the trusted domain name and the relationship password. Type in SAMBA, as this is +the name of the remote domain, and the password used at the time of account creation. +Press OK and, if everything went without incident, you will see +Trusted domain relationship successfully +established message. +

Samba as the Trusting Domain

+This time activities are somewhat reversed. Again, we'll assume that your domain +controlled by the Samba PDC is called SAMBA and NT-controlled domain is called RUMBA. +

+The very first step is to add an account for the SAMBA domain on RUMBA's PDC. +

+Launch the Domain User Manager, then from the menu select +Policies, Trust Relationships. +Now, next to the Trusted Domains box press the Add +button, and type in the name of the trusted domain (SAMBA) and the password to use in securing +the relationship. +

+The password can be arbitrarily chosen. It is easy to change the password +from the Samba server whenever you want. After confirming the password your account is +ready for use. Now it's Samba's turn. +

+Using your favourite shell while being logged in as root, issue this command: +

+root# net rpc trustdom establish rumba +

+You will be prompted for the password you just typed on your Windows NT4 Server box. +Do not worry if you see an error message that mentions a return code of +NT_STATUS_NOLOGON_INTERDOMAIN_TRUST_ACCOUNT. It means the +password you gave is correct and the NT4 Server says the account is +ready for interdomain connection and not for ordinary +connection. After that, be patient; it can take a while (especially +in large networks), but eventually you should see the Success message. +Congratulations! Your trust relationship has just been established. +

Note

+Note that you have to run this command as root because you must have write access to +the secrets.tdb file. +

NT4-style Domain Trusts with Windows 2000

+Although Domain User Manager is not present in Windows 2000, it is +also possible to establish an NT4-style trust relationship with a Windows 2000 domain +controller running in mixed mode as the trusting server. It should also be possible for +Samba to trust a Windows 2000 server, however, more testing is still needed in this area. +

+After creating the interdomain trust account on the +Samba server as described above, open Active Directory Domains and +Trusts on the AD controller of the domain whose resources you wish Samba users +to have access to. Remember that since NT4-style trusts are not transitive, if you want +your users to have access to multiple mixed-mode domains in your AD forest, you will need to +repeat this process for each of those domains. With Active Directory Domains +and Trusts open, right-click on the name of the Active Directory domain that +will trust our Samba domain and choose Properties, then click on +the Trusts tab. In the upper part of the panel, you will see a list box +labelled Domains trusted by this domain:, and an +Add... button next to it. Press this button, and just as with NT4, you +will be prompted for the trusted domain name and the relationship password. Press OK, and +after a moment, Active Directory will respond with The trusted domain has +been added and the trust has been verified. Your Samba users can now be +granted acess to resources in the AD domain. +

Common Errors

+Interdomain trust relationships should NOT be attempted on networks that are unstable +or that suffer regular outages. Network stability and integrity are key concerns with +distributed trusted domains. +

Prev Up Next
Chapter 15. Securing Samba Home Chapter 17. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/NT4Migration.html b/docs/htmldocs/NT4Migration.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b561492644 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/NT4Migration.html @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ +Chapter 31. Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC
Chapter 31. Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC
Prev Part IV. Migration and Updating Next

Chapter 31. Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

April 3, 2003

Table of Contents

Planning and Getting Started
Objectives
Steps In Migration Process
Migration Options
Planning for Success
Samba-3 Implementation Choices

+This is a rough guide to assist those wishing to migrate from NT4 domain control to +Samba-3 based domain control. +

Planning and Getting Started

+In the IT world there is often a saying that all problems are encountered because of +poor planning. The corollary to this saying is that not all problems can be anticipated +and planned for. Then again, good planning will anticipate most show stopper type situations. +

+Those wishing to migrate from MS Windows NT4 domain control to a Samba-3 domain control +environment would do well to develop a detailed migration plan. So here are a few pointers to +help migration get under way. +

Objectives

+The key objective for most organisations will be to make the migration from MS Windows NT4 +to Samba-3 domain control as painless as possible. One of the challenges you may experience +in your migration process may well be one of convincing management that the new environment +should remain in place. Many who have introduced open source technologies have experienced +pressure to return to a Microsoft based platform solution at the first sign of trouble. +

+Before attempting a migration to a Samba-3 controlled network make every possible effort to +gain all-round commitment to the change. Know precisely why the change +is important for the organisation. Possible motivations to make a change include: +

  • Improve network manageability

  • Obtain better user level functionality

  • Reduce network operating costs

  • Reduce exposure caused by Microsoft withdrawal of NT4 support

  • Avoid MS License 6 implications

  • Reduce organisation's dependency on Microsoft

+Make sure that everyone knows that Samba-3 is NOT MS Windows NT4. Samba-3 offers +an alternative solution that is both different from MS Windows NT4 and that offers +advantages compared with it. Gain recognition that Samba-3 lacks many of the +features that Microsoft has promoted as core values in migration from MS Windows NT4 to +MS Windows 2000 and beyond (with or without Active Directory services). +

+What are the features that Samba-3 can NOT provide? +

  • Active Directory Server

  • Group Policy Objects (in Active Directory)

  • Machine Policy objects

  • Logon Scripts in Active Directory

  • Software Application and Access Controls in Active Directory

+The features that Samba-3 DOES provide and that may be of compelling interest to your site +includes: +

  • Lower Cost of Ownership

  • Global availability of support with no strings attached

  • Dynamic SMB Servers (ie:Can run more than one server per Unix/Linux system)

  • Creation of on-the-fly logon scripts

  • Creation of on-the-fly Policy Files

  • Greater Stability, Reliability, Performance and Availability

  • Manageability via an ssh connection

  • Flexible choices of back-end authentication technologies (tdbsam, ldapsam, mysqlsam)

  • Ability to implement a full single-sign-on architecture

  • Ability to distribute authentication systems for absolute minimum wide area network bandwidth demand

+Before migrating a network from MS Windows NT4 to Samba-3 consider all necessary factors. Users +should be educated about changes they may experience so that the change will be a welcome one +and not become an obstacle to the work they need to do. The following are factors that will +help ensure a successful migration: +

Domain Layout

+Samba-3 can be configured as a domain controller, a back-up domain controller (probably best called +a secondary controller), a domain member, or as a stand-alone server. The Windows network security +domain context should be sized and scoped before implementation. Particular attention needs to be +paid to the location of the primary domain controller (PDC) as well as backup controllers (BDCs). +One way in which Samba-3 differs from Microsoft technology is that if one chooses to use an LDAP +authentication backend then the same database can be used by several different domains. In a +complex organisation there can be a single LDAP database, which itself can be distributed (ie: Have +a master server and multiple slave servers) that can simultaneously serve multiple domains. +

+From a design perspective, the number of users per server, as well as the number of servers, per +domain should be scaled taking into consideration server capacity and network bandwidth. +

+A physical network segment may house several domains. Each may span multiple network segments. +Where domains span routed network segments, consider and test the performance implications of +the design and layout of a network. A Centrally located domain controller that is designed to +serve multiple routed network segments may result in severe performance problems. Check the +response time (eg: ping timing) between the remote segment and the PDC. If long (more than 100 ms) +locate a backup controller (BDC) on the remote segmanet to serve as the local authentication and +access control server. +

Server Share and Directory Layout

+There are cardinal rules to effective network design. These can not be broken with impunity. +The most important rule: Simplicity is king in every well controlled network. Every part of +the infrastructure must be managed, the more complex it is, the greater will be the demand +of keeping systems secure and functional. +

+Keep in mind the nature of how data must be share. Physical disk space layout should be considered +carefully. Some data must be backed up. The simpler the disk layout the easier it will be to +keep track of backed needs. Identify what back media will be meet needs, consider backup to tape +, CD-ROM or (DVD-ROM), or other off-line storage medium. Plan and implement for minimum +maintenance. Leave nothing to chance in your design, above all, do not leave backups to chance: +Backup and test, validate every backup, create a disaster recovery plan and prove that it works. +

+Users should be grouped according to data access control needs. File and directory access +is best controlled via group permissions and the use of the "sticky bit" on group controlled +directories may substantially avoid file access complaints from samba share users. +

+Inexperienced network administrators often attempt elaborate techniques to set access +controls on files, directories, shares, as well as in share definitions. +Keep your design and implementation simple and document your design extensively. Have others +audit your documentation. Do not create a complex mess that your successor will not understand. +Remember, job security through complex design and implementation may cause loss of operations +and downtime to users as the new administrator learns to untangle your knots. Keep access +controls simple and effective and make sure that users will never be interrupted by stupid +complexity. +

Logon Scripts

+Logon scripts can help to ensure that all users gain share and printer connections they need. +

+Logon scripts can be created 'on-the-fly' so that all commands executed are specific to the +rights and priviliges granted to the user. The preferred controls should be affected through +group membership so that group information can be used to custom create a logon script using +the root preexec parameters to the NETLOGON share. +

+Some sites prefer to use a tool such as kixstart to establish a controlled +user environment. In any case you may wish to do a google search for logon script process controls. +In particular, you may wish to explore the use of the Microsoft knowledgebase article KB189105 that +deals with how to add printers without user intervention via the logon script process. +

Profile Migration/Creation

+User and Group Profiles may be migrated using the tools described in the section titled Desktop Profile +Management. +

+Profiles may also be managed using the Samba-3 tool profiles. This tool allows +the MS Windows NT style security identifiers (SIDs) that are stored inside the profile NTuser.DAT file +to be changed to the SID of the Samba-3 domain. +

User and Group Accounts

+It is possible to migrate all account settings from an MS Windows NT4 domain to Samba-3. Before +attempting to migrate user and group accounts it is STRONGLY advised to create in Samba-3 the +groups that are present on the MS Windows NT4 domain AND to map these to +suitable Unix/Linux groups. By following this simple advice all user and group attributes +should migrate painlessly. +

Steps In Migration Process

+The approximate migration process is described below. +

  • +You will have an NT4 PDC that has the users, groups, policies and profiles to be migrated +

  • +Samba-3 set up as a DC with netlogon share, profile share, etc. Configure the smb.conf file +to fucntion as a BDC. ie: domain master = No. +

Procedure 31.1. The Account Migration Process

  1. Create a BDC account for the samba server using NT Server Manager

    1. Samba must NOT be running

  2. net rpc join -S NT4PDC -w DOMNAME -U Administrator%passwd

  3. net rpc vampire -S NT4PDC -U administrator%passwd

  4. pdbedit -L

    1. Note - did the users migrate?

  5. + Now assign each of the UNIX groups to NT groups: + (Note: It may be useful to copy this text to a script called + initGroups.sh) + 

    +#!/bin/bash
+#### Keep this as a shell script for future re-use
+			
+# First assign well known domain global groups
+net groupmap modify ntgroup="Domain Admins" unixgroup=ntadmins
+net groupmap modify ntgroup="Domain Guests" unixgroup=nobody
+net groupmap modify ntgroup="Domain Users" unixgroup=users
+
+# Now for our added domain global groups
+net groupmap add ntgroup="Designers" unixgroup=designers type=d rid=3200
+net groupmap add ntgroup="Engineers" unixgroup=engineers type=d rid=3210
+net groupmap add ntgroup="QA Team"   unixgroup=qateam    type=d rid=3220
+

    +

  6. net groupmap list

    1. Now check that all groups are recognised

+Now migrate all the profiles, then migrate all policy files. +

Migration Options

+Sites that wish to migrate from MS Windows NT4 Domain Control to a Samba based solution +generally fit into three basic categories. +

Table 31.1. The 3 Major Site Types

Number of UsersDescription
< 50

Want simple conversion with NO pain

50 - 250

Want new features, can manage some in-house complexity

> 250

Solution/Implementation MUST scale well, complex needs. Cross departmental decision process. Local expertise in most areas

Planning for Success

+There are three basic choices for sites that intend to migrate from MS Windows NT4 +to Samba-3. +

  • + Simple Conversion (total replacement) +

  • + Upgraded Conversion (could be one of integration) +

  • + Complete Redesign (completely new solution) +

+Minimise down-stream problems by: +

  • + Take sufficient time +

  • + Avoid Panic +

  • + Test ALL assumptions +

  • + Test full roll-out program, including workstation deployment +

Table 31.2. Nature of the Conversion Choices

SimpleUpgradedRedesign

Make use of minimal OS specific features

Translate NT4 features to new host OS features

Decide:

Suck all accounts from NT4 into Samba-3

Copy and improve:

Authentication Regime (database location and access)

Make least number of operational changes

Make progressive improvements

Desktop Management Methods

Take least amount of time to migrate

Minimise user impact

Better Control of Desktops / Users

Live versus Isolated Conversion

Maximise functionality

Identify Needs for: Manageability, Scalability, Security, Availability

Integrate Samba-3 then migrate while users are active, then Change of control (ie: swap out)

Take advantage of lower maintenance opportunity

Samba-3 Implementation Choices

Authentication database/back end:

+ Samba-3 can use an external authentication backend: +

+

  • Winbind (external Samba or NT4/200x server)

  • External server could use Active Directory or NT4 Domain

  • Can use pam_mkhomedir.so to auto-create home dirs

+

+ Samba-3 can use a local authentication backend: +

  • smbpasswd, tdbsam, ldapsam, mysqlsam

+

Access Control Points:

  • On the Share itself - using Share ACLs

  • On the file system - using UNIX permissions on files and directories

    Note: Can Enable Posix ACLs in file system also

  • Through Samba share parameters - Not recommended - except as last resort

Policies (migrate or create new ones):

  • Using Group Policy Editor (NT4)

  • - Watch out for Tattoo effect

User and Group Profiles:

+ Platform specific so use platform tool to change from a Local to a Roaming profile + Can use new profiles tool to change SIDs (NTUser.DAT) +

Logon Scripts:

+ Know how they work +

User and Group mapping to Unix/Linux:

  • username map facility may be needed

  • Use 'net groupmap' to connect NT4 groups to Unix groups

  • Use pdbedit to set/change user configuration

    + NOTE: When migrating to LDAP back, end it may be easier to dump initial + LDAP database to LDIF, then edit, then reload into LDAP +

OS specific scripts/programs may be needed:

  • Add/Delete Users: Note OS limits on size of name + (Linux 8 chars) NT4 up to 254 chars

  • Add/Delete Machines: Applied only to domain members + (Note: Machine names may be limited to 16 characters)

  • Use 'net groupmap' to connect NT4 groups to Unix groups

  • Add/Delete Groups: Note OS limits on size and nature. + Linux limit is 16 char, no spaces and no upper case chars (groupadd)

Migration Tools:

+ Domain Control (NT4 Style) Profiles, Policies, Access Controls, Security +

  • Samba: net, rpcclient, smbpasswd, pdbedit, profiles

  • Windows: NT4 Domain User Manager, Server Manager (NEXUS)

+

Prev Up Next
Chapter 30. Upgrading from Samba-2.x to Samba-3.0.0 Home Chapter 32. SWAT - The Samba Web Administration Tool
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/NetworkBrowsing.html b/docs/htmldocs/NetworkBrowsing.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4507c0067f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/NetworkBrowsing.html @@ -0,0 +1,907 @@ +Chapter 10. Samba / MS Windows Network Browsing Guide
Chapter 10. Samba / MS Windows Network Browsing Guide
Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

Chapter 10. Samba / MS Windows Network Browsing Guide

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

Jelmer R. Vernooij

The Samba Team

July 5, 1998

Updated: April 21, 2003

Table of Contents

Features and Benefits
What is Browsing?
Discussion
NetBIOS over TCP/IP
TCP/IP - without NetBIOS
DNS and Active Directory
How Browsing Functions
Setting up WORKGROUP Browsing
Setting up DOMAIN Browsing
Forcing Samba to be the master
Making Samba the domain master
Note about broadcast addresses
Multiple interfaces
Use of the Remote Announce parameter
Use of the Remote Browse Sync parameter
WINS - The Windows Internetworking Name Server
Setting up a WINS server
WINS Replication
Static WINS Entries
Helpful Hints
Windows Networking Protocols
Name Resolution Order
Technical Overview of browsing
Browsing support in Samba
Problem resolution
Browsing across subnets
Common Errors
How can one flush the Samba NetBIOS name cache without restarting Samba?
My client reports "This server is not configured to list shared resources"
I get an Unable to browse the network error

+This document contains detailed information as well as a fast track guide to +implementing browsing across subnets and / or across workgroups (or domains). +WINS is the best tool for resolution of NetBIOS names to IP addresses. WINS is +NOT involved in browse list handling except by way of name to address resolution. +

Note

+MS Windows 2000 and later can be configured to operate with NO NetBIOS +over TCP/IP. Samba-3 and later also supports this mode of operation. +When the use of NetBIOS over TCP/IP has been disabled then the primary +means for resolution of MS Windows machine names is via DNS and Active Directory. +The following information assumes that your site is running NetBIOS over TCP/IP. +

Features and Benefits

+Someone once referred to the past in terms of: They were the worst of times, +they were the best of times. The more we look back, them more we long for what was and +hope it never returns!. +

+For many MS Windows network administrators, that statement sums up their feelings about +NetBIOS networking precisely. For those who mastered NetBIOS networking, its fickle +nature was just par for the course. For those who never quite managed to tame its +lusty features, NetBIOS is like Paterson's Curse. +

+For those not familiar with botanical problems in Australia: Paterson's curse, +Echium plantagineum, was introduced to Australia from Europe during the mid-nineteenth +century. Since then it has spread rapidly. The high seed production, with densities of +thousands of seeds per square metre, a seed longevity of more than seven years, and an +ability to germinate at any time of year, given the right conditions, are some of the +features which make it such a persistent weed. +

+In this chapter we explore vital aspects of SMB (Server Message Block) networking with +a particular focus on SMB as implemented through running NetBIOS (Network Basic +Input / Output System) over TCP/IP. Since Samba does NOT implement SMB or NetBIOS over +any other protocols we need to know how to configure our network environment and simply +remember to use nothing but TCP/IP on all our MS Windows network clients. +

+Samba provides the ability to implement a WINS (Windows Internetworking Name Server) +and implements extensions to Microsoft's implementation of WINS. These extensions +help Samba to affect stable WINS operations beyond the normal scope of MS WINS. +

+Please note that WINS is exclusively a service that applies only to those systems +that run NetBIOS over TCP/IP. MS Windows 200x / XP have the capacity to turn off +support for NetBIOS, in which case WINS is of no relevance. Samba supports this also. +

+For those networks on which NetBIOS has been disabled (ie: WINS is NOT required) +the use of DNS is necessary for host name resolution. +

What is Browsing?

+To most people browsing means that they can see the MS Windows and Samba servers +in the Network Neighborhood, and when the computer icon for a particular server is +clicked, it opens up and shows the shares and printers available on the target server. +

+What seems so simple is in fact a very complex interaction of different technologies. +The technologies (or methods) employed in making all of this work includes: +

  • MS Windows machines register their presence to the network

  • Machines announce themselves to other machines on the network

  • One or more machine on the network collates the local announcements

  • The client machine finds the machine that has the collated list of machines

  • The client machine is able to resolve the machine names to IP addresses

  • The client machine is able to connect to a target machine

+The Samba application that controls browse list management and name resolution is +called nmbd. The configuration parameters involved in nmbd's operation are: +

Browsing options: os level(*), + lm announce, + lm interval, + preferred master(*), + local master(*), + domain master(*), + browse list, + enhanced browsing. +

Name Resolution Method: + name resolve order(*). +

WINS options: + dns proxy, + wins proxy, + wins server(*), + wins support(*), + wins hook. +

+For Samba, the WINS Server and WINS Support are mutually exclusive options. Those marked with +an '*' are the only options that commonly MAY need to be modified. Even if not one of these +parameters is set nmbd will still do it's job. +

Discussion

+Firstly, all MS Windows networking uses SMB (Server Message Block) based messaging. +SMB messaging may be implemented with or without NetBIOS. MS Windows 200x supports +NetBIOS over TCP/IP for backwards compatibility. Microsoft is intent on phasing out NetBIOS +support. +

NetBIOS over TCP/IP

+Samba implements NetBIOS, as does MS Windows NT / 200x / XP, by encapsulating it over TCP/IP. +MS Windows products can do likewise. NetBIOS based networking uses broadcast messaging to +affect browse list management. When running NetBIOS over TCP/IP, this uses UDP based messaging. +UDP messages can be broadcast or unicast. +

+Normally, only unicast UDP messaging can be forwarded by routers. The +remote announce parameter to smb.conf helps to project browse announcements +to remote network segments via unicast UDP. Similarly, the +remote browse sync parameter of smb.conf +implements browse list collation using unicast UDP. +

+Secondly, in those networks where Samba is the only SMB server technology, +wherever possible nmbd should be configured on one (1) machine as the WINS +server. This makes it easy to manage the browsing environment. If each network +segment is configured with it's own Samba WINS server, then the only way to +get cross segment browsing to work is by using the +remote announce and the remote browse sync +parameters to your smb.conf file. +

+ +If only one WINS server is used for an entire multi-segment network then +the use of the remote announce and the +remote browse sync parameters should NOT be necessary. +

+As of Samba 3 WINS replication is being worked on. The bulk of the code has +been committed, but it still needs maturation. This is NOT a supported feature +of the Samba-3.0.0 release. Hopefully, this will become a supported feature +of one of the Samba-3 release series. +

+Right now Samba WINS does not support MS-WINS replication. This means that +when setting up Samba as a WINS server there must only be one nmbd +configured as a WINS server on the network. Some sites have used multiple Samba WINS +servers for redundancy (one server per subnet) and then used +remote browse sync and remote announce +to affect browse list collation across all segments. Note that this means clients +will only resolve local names, and must be configured to use DNS to resolve names +on other subnets in order to resolve the IP addresses of the servers they can see +on other subnets. This setup is not recommended, but is mentioned as a practical +consideration (ie: an 'if all else fails' scenario). +

+Lastly, take note that browse lists are a collection of unreliable broadcast +messages that are repeated at intervals of not more than 15 minutes. This means +that it will take time to establish a browse list and it can take up to 45 +minutes to stabilise, particularly across network segments. +

TCP/IP - without NetBIOS

+ + + +All TCP/IP using systems use various forms of host name resolution. The primary +methods for TCP/IP hostname resolutions involves either a static file (/etc/hosts +) or DNS (the Domain Name System). DNS is the technology that makes +the Internet usable. DNS based host name resolution is supported by nearly all TCP/IP +enabled systems. Only a few embedded TCP/IP systems do not support DNS. +

+When an MS Windows 200x / XP system attempts to resolve a host name to an IP address +it follows a defined path: +

  1. + Checks the hosts file. It is located in + C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\etc. +

  2. + Does a DNS lookup +

  3. + Checks the NetBIOS name cache +

  4. + Queries the WINS server +

  5. + Does a broadcast name lookup over UDP +

  6. + Looks up entries in LMHOSTS. It is located in + C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\etc. +

+Windows 200x / XP can register it's host name with a Dynamic DNS server. You can +force register with a Dynamic DNS server in Windows 200x / XP using: +ipconfig /registerdns +

+With Active Directory (ADS), a correctly functioning DNS server is absolutely +essential. In the absence of a working DNS server that has been correctly configured, +MS Windows clients and servers will be totally unable to locate each other, +consequently network services will be severely impaired. +

+The use of Dynamic DNS is highly recommended with Active Directory, in which case +the use of BIND9 is preferred for it's ability to adequately support the SRV (service) +records that are needed for Active Directory. +

DNS and Active Directory

+Occasionally we hear from UNIX network administrators who want to use a UNIX based Dynamic +DNS server in place of the Microsoft DNS server. While this might be desirable to some, the +MS Windows 200x DNS server is auto-configured to work with Active Directory. It is possible +to use BIND version 8 or 9, but it will almost certainly be necessary to create service records +so that MS Active Directory clients can resolve host names to locate essential network services. +The following are some of the default service records that Active Directory requires: +

  • _ldap._tcp.pdc.ms-dcs.Domain

    + This provides the address of the Windows NT PDC for the Domain. +

  • _ldap._tcp.pdc.ms-dcs.DomainTree

    + Resolves the addresses of Global Catalog servers in the domain. +

  • _ldap._tcp.site.sites.writable.ms-dcs.Domain

    + Provides list of domain controllers based on sites. +

  • _ldap._tcp.writable.ms-dcs.Domain

    + Enumerates list of domain controllers that have the writable + copies of the Active Directory data store. +

  • _ldap._tcp.GUID.domains.ms-dcs.DomainTree

    + Entry used by MS Windows clients to locate machines using the + Global Unique Identifier. +

  • _ldap._tcp.Site.gc.ms-dcs.DomainTree

    + Used by MS Windows clients to locate site configuration dependent + Global Catalog server. +

How Browsing Functions

+MS Windows machines register their NetBIOS names +(ie: the machine name for each service type in operation) on start +up. The exact method by which this name registration +takes place is determined by whether or not the MS Windows client/server +has been given a WINS server address, whether or not LMHOSTS lookup +is enabled, or if DNS for NetBIOS name resolution is enabled, etc. +

+In the case where there is no WINS server, all name registrations as +well as name lookups are done by UDP broadcast. This isolates name +resolution to the local subnet, unless LMHOSTS is used to list all +names and IP addresses. In such situations Samba provides a means by +which the Samba server name may be forcibly injected into the browse +list of a remote MS Windows network (using the +remote announce parameter). +

+Where a WINS server is used, the MS Windows client will use UDP +unicast to register with the WINS server. Such packets can be routed +and thus WINS allows name resolution to function across routed networks. +

+During the startup process an election will take place to create a +local master browser if one does not already exist. On each NetBIOS network +one machine will be elected to function as the domain master browser. This +domain browsing has nothing to do with MS security domain control. +Instead, the domain master browser serves the role of contacting each local +master browser (found by asking WINS or from LMHOSTS) and exchanging browse +list contents. This way every master browser will eventually obtain a complete +list of all machines that are on the network. Every 11-15 minutes an election +is held to determine which machine will be the master browser. By the nature of +the election criteria used, the machine with the highest uptime, or the +most senior protocol version, or other criteria, will win the election +as domain master browser. +

+Clients wishing to browse the network make use of this list, but also depend +on the availability of correct name resolution to the respective IP +address/addresses. +

+Any configuration that breaks name resolution and/or browsing intrinsics +will annoy users because they will have to put up with protracted +inability to use the network services. +

+Samba supports a feature that allows forced synchronisation +of browse lists across routed networks using the remote browse sync parameter in the smb.conf file. +This causes Samba to contact the local master browser on a remote network and +to request browse list synchronisation. This effectively bridges +two networks that are separated by routers. The two remote +networks may use either broadcast based name resolution or WINS +based name resolution, but it should be noted that the remote browse sync parameter provides browse list synchronisation - and +that is distinct from name to address resolution, in other +words, for cross subnet browsing to function correctly it is +essential that a name to address resolution mechanism be provided. +This mechanism could be via DNS, /etc/hosts, +and so on. +

Setting up WORKGROUP Browsing

+To set up cross subnet browsing on a network containing machines +in up to be in a WORKGROUP, not an NT Domain you need to set up one +Samba server to be the Domain Master Browser (note that this is *NOT* +the same as a Primary Domain Controller, although in an NT Domain the +same machine plays both roles). The role of a Domain master browser is +to collate the browse lists from local master browsers on all the +subnets that have a machine participating in the workgroup. Without +one machine configured as a domain master browser each subnet would +be an isolated workgroup, unable to see any machines on any other +subnet. It is the presence of a domain master browser that makes +cross subnet browsing possible for a workgroup. +

+In an WORKGROUP environment the domain master browser must be a +Samba server, and there must only be one domain master browser per +workgroup name. To set up a Samba server as a domain master browser, +set the following option in the [global] section +of the smb.conf file : +

+

domain master = yes

+

+The domain master browser should also preferably be the local master +browser for its own subnet. In order to achieve this set the following +options in the [global] section of the smb.conf file : +

+

Example 10.1. Domain master browser smb.conf

[global]
domain master = yes
local master = yes
preferred master = yes
os level = 65

+

+The domain master browser may be the same machine as the WINS +server, if you require. +

+Next, you should ensure that each of the subnets contains a +machine that can act as a local master browser for the +workgroup. Any MS Windows NT/2K/XP/2003 machine should be +able to do this, as will Windows 9x machines (although these +tend to get rebooted more often, so it's not such a good idea +to use these). To make a Samba server a local master browser +set the following options in the [global] section of the +smb.conf file : +

+

Example 10.2. Local master browser smb.conf

[global]
domain master = no
local master = yes
preferred master = yes
os level = 65

+

+Do not do this for more than one Samba server on each subnet, +or they will war with each other over which is to be the local +master browser. +

+The local master parameter allows Samba to act as a +local master browser. The preferred master causes nmbd +to force a browser election on startup and the os level +parameter sets Samba high enough so that it should win any browser elections. +

+If you have an NT machine on the subnet that you wish to +be the local master browser then you can disable Samba from +becoming a local master browser by setting the following +options in the [global] section of the +smb.conf file : +

+

Example 10.3. smb.conf for not being a master browser

[global]
domain master = no
local master = no
preferred master = no
os level = 0

+

Setting up DOMAIN Browsing

+If you are adding Samba servers to a Windows NT Domain then +you must not set up a Samba server as a domain master browser. +By default, a Windows NT Primary Domain Controller for a domain +is also the Domain master browser for that domain, and many +things will break if a Samba server registers the Domain master +browser NetBIOS name (DOMAIN<1B>) +with WINS instead of the PDC. +

+For subnets other than the one containing the Windows NT PDC +you may set up Samba servers as local master browsers as +described. To make a Samba server a local master browser set +the following options in the [global] section +of the smb.conf file : +

+

Example 10.4. Local master browser smb.conf

[global]
domain master = no
local master = yes
preferred master = yes
os level = 65

+

+If you wish to have a Samba server fight the election with machines +on the same subnet you may set the os level parameter +to lower levels. By doing this you can tune the order of machines that +will become local master browsers if they are running. For +more details on this see the section +Forcing Samba to be the master browser +below. +

+If you have Windows NT machines that are members of the domain +on all subnets, and you are sure they will always be running then +you can disable Samba from taking part in browser elections and +ever becoming a local master browser by setting following options +in the [global] section of the smb.conf +file : +

+

Example 10.5. smb.conf for not being a master browser

[global]
domain master = no
local master = no
preferred master = no
os level = 0

+

Forcing Samba to be the master

+Who becomes the master browser is determined by an election +process using broadcasts. Each election packet contains a number of parameters +which determine what precedence (bias) a host should have in the +election. By default Samba uses a very low precedence and thus loses +elections to just about anyone else. +

+If you want Samba to win elections then just set the os level global +option in smb.conf to a higher number. It defaults to 0. Using 34 +would make it win all elections over every other system (except other +samba systems!) +

+A os level of 2 would make it beat WfWg and Win95, but not MS Windows +NT/2K Server. A MS Windows NT/2K Server domain controller uses level 32. +

The maximum os level is 255

+If you want Samba to force an election on startup, then set the +preferred master global option in smb.conf to yes. Samba will +then have a slight advantage over other potential master browsers +that are not preferred master browsers. Use this parameter with +care, as if you have two hosts (whether they are Windows 95 or NT or +Samba) on the same local subnet both set with preferred master to +yes, then periodically and continually they will force an election +in order to become the local master browser. +

+ If you want Samba to be a domain master browser, then it is +recommended that you also set preferred master to yes, because +Samba will not become a domain master browser for the whole of your +LAN or WAN if it is not also a local master browser on its own +broadcast isolated subnet. +

+It is possible to configure two Samba servers to attempt to become +the domain master browser for a domain. The first server that comes +up will be the domain master browser. All other Samba servers will +attempt to become the domain master browser every 5 minutes. They +will find that another Samba server is already the domain master +browser and will fail. This provides automatic redundancy, should +the current domain master browser fail. +

Making Samba the domain master

+The domain master is responsible for collating the browse lists of +multiple subnets so that browsing can occur between subnets. You can +make Samba act as the domain master by setting domain master = yes +in smb.conf. By default it will not be a domain master. +

+Note that you should not set Samba to be the domain master for a +workgroup that has the same name as an NT Domain. +

+When Samba is the domain master and the master browser, it will listen +for master announcements (made roughly every twelve minutes) from local +master browsers on other subnets and then contact them to synchronise +browse lists. +

+If you want Samba to be the domain master then I suggest you also set +the os level high enough to make sure it wins elections, and set +preferred master to yes, to get Samba to force an election on +startup. +

+Note that all your servers (including Samba) and clients should be +using a WINS server to resolve NetBIOS names. If your clients are only +using broadcasting to resolve NetBIOS names, then two things will occur: +

  1. + your local master browsers will be unable to find a domain master + browser, as it will only be looking on the local subnet. +

  2. + if a client happens to get hold of a domain-wide browse list, and + a user attempts to access a host in that list, it will be unable to + resolve the NetBIOS name of that host. +

+If, however, both Samba and your clients are using a WINS server, then: +

  1. + your local master browsers will contact the WINS server and, as long as + Samba has registered that it is a domain master browser with the WINS + server, your local master browser will receive Samba's IP address + as its domain master browser. +

  2. + when a client receives a domain-wide browse list, and a user attempts + to access a host in that list, it will contact the WINS server to + resolve the NetBIOS name of that host. as long as that host has + registered its NetBIOS name with the same WINS server, the user will + be able to see that host. +

Note about broadcast addresses

+If your network uses a "0" based broadcast address (for example if it +ends in a 0) then you will strike problems. Windows for Workgroups +does not seem to support a 0's broadcast and you will probably find +that browsing and name lookups won't work. +

Multiple interfaces

+Samba now supports machines with multiple network interfaces. If you +have multiple interfaces then you will need to use the interfaces +option in smb.conf to configure them. +

Use of the Remote Announce parameter

+The remote announce parameter of +smb.conf can be used to forcibly ensure +that all the NetBIOS names on a network get announced to a remote network. +The syntax of the remote announce parameter is: +

remote announce = a.b.c.d [e.f.g.h] ...

+or +

remote announce = a.b.c.d/WORKGROUP [e.f.g.h/WORKGROUP] ...

+ +where: +

a.b.c.d and +e.f.g.h

+ + + + is either the LMB (Local Master Browser) IP address +or the broadcast address of the remote network. +ie: the LMB is at 192.168.1.10, or the address +could be given as 192.168.1.255 where the netmask +is assumed to be 24 bits (255.255.255.0). +When the remote announcement is made to the broadcast +address of the remote network, every host will receive +our announcements. This is noisy and therefore +undesirable but may be necessary if we do NOT know +the IP address of the remote LMB.

WORKGROUP

is optional and can be either our own workgroup +or that of the remote network. If you use the +workgroup name of the remote network then our +NetBIOS machine names will end up looking like +they belong to that workgroup, this may cause +name resolution problems and should be avoided. +

+

Use of the Remote Browse Sync parameter

+The remote browse sync parameter of +smb.conf is used to announce to +another LMB that it must synchronise its NetBIOS name list with our +Samba LMB. It works ONLY if the Samba server that has this option is +simultaneously the LMB on its network segment. +

+The syntax of the remote browse sync parameter is: + +

remote browse sync = a.b.c.d

+ +where a.b.c.d is either the IP address of the +remote LMB or else is the network broadcast address of the remote segment. +

WINS - The Windows Internetworking Name Server

+Use of WINS (either Samba WINS or MS Windows NT Server WINS) is highly +recommended. Every NetBIOS machine registers its name together with a +name_type value for each of several types of service it has available. +eg: It registers its name directly as a unique (the type 0x03) name. +It also registers its name if it is running the LanManager compatible +server service (used to make shares and printers available to other users) +by registering the server (the type 0x20) name. +

+All NetBIOS names are up to 15 characters in length. The name_type variable +is added to the end of the name - thus creating a 16 character name. Any +name that is shorter than 15 characters is padded with spaces to the 15th +character. ie: All NetBIOS names are 16 characters long (including the +name_type information). +

+WINS can store these 16 character names as they get registered. A client +that wants to log onto the network can ask the WINS server for a list +of all names that have registered the NetLogon service name_type. This saves +broadcast traffic and greatly expedites logon processing. Since broadcast +name resolution can not be used across network segments this type of +information can only be provided via WINS or via statically configured +lmhosts files that must reside on all clients in the +absence of WINS. +

+WINS also serves the purpose of forcing browse list synchronisation by all +LMB's. LMB's must synchronise their browse list with the DMB (domain master +browser) and WINS helps the LMB to identify it's DMB. By definition this +will work only within a single workgroup. Note that the domain master browser +has NOTHING to do with what is referred to as an MS Windows NT Domain. The +later is a reference to a security environment while the DMB refers to the +master controller for browse list information only. +

+Use of WINS will work correctly only if EVERY client TCP/IP protocol stack +has been configured to use the WINS server/s. Any client that has not been +configured to use the WINS server will continue to use only broadcast based +name registration so that WINS may NEVER get to know about it. In any case, +machines that have not registered with a WINS server will fail name to address +lookup attempts by other clients and will therefore cause workstation access +errors. +

+To configure Samba as a WINS server just add +wins support = yes to the smb.conf +file [global] section. +

+To configure Samba to register with a WINS server just add +wins server = a.b.c.d to your smb.conf file [global] section. +

Important

+Never use both wins support = yes together +with wins server = a.b.c.d +particularly not using it's own IP address. +Specifying both will cause nmbd to refuse to start! +

Setting up a WINS server

+Either a Samba machine or a Windows NT Server machine may be set up +as a WINS server. To set a Samba machine to be a WINS server you must +add the following option to the smb.conf file on the selected machine : +in the [global] section add the line +

+

wins support = yes

+

+Versions of Samba prior to 1.9.17 had this parameter default to +yes. If you have any older versions of Samba on your network it is +strongly suggested you upgrade to a recent version, or at the very +least set the parameter to 'no' on all these machines. +

+Machines with wins support = yes will keep a list of +all NetBIOS names registered with them, acting as a DNS for NetBIOS names. +

+You should set up only ONE WINS server. Do NOT set the +wins support = yes option on more than one Samba +server. +

+To set up a Windows NT Server as a WINS server you need to set up +the WINS service - see your NT documentation for details. Note that +Windows NT WINS Servers can replicate to each other, allowing more +than one to be set up in a complex subnet environment. As Microsoft +refuses to document these replication protocols, Samba cannot currently +participate in these replications. It is possible in the future that +a Samba->Samba WINS replication protocol may be defined, in which +case more than one Samba machine could be set up as a WINS server +but currently only one Samba server should have the +wins support = yes parameter set. +

+After the WINS server has been configured you must ensure that all +machines participating on the network are configured with the address +of this WINS server. If your WINS server is a Samba machine, fill in +the Samba machine IP address in the Primary WINS Server field of +the Control Panel->Network->Protocols->TCP->WINS Server dialogs +in Windows 95 or Windows NT. To tell a Samba server the IP address +of the WINS server add the following line to the [global] section of +all smb.conf files : +

+

wins server = <name or IP address>

+

+where <name or IP address> is either the DNS name of the WINS server +machine or its IP address. +

+Note that this line MUST NOT BE SET in the smb.conf file of the Samba +server acting as the WINS server itself. If you set both the +wins support = yes option and the +wins server = <name> option then +nmbd will fail to start. +

+There are two possible scenarios for setting up cross subnet browsing. +The first details setting up cross subnet browsing on a network containing +Windows 95, Samba and Windows NT machines that are not configured as +part of a Windows NT Domain. The second details setting up cross subnet +browsing on networks that contain NT Domains. +

WINS Replication

+Samba-3 permits WINS replication through the use of the wrepld utility. +This tool is not currently capable of being used as it is still in active development. +As soon as this tool becomes moderately functional we will prepare man pages and enhance this +section of the documentation to provide usage and technical details. +

Static WINS Entries

+Adding static entries to your Samba WINS server is actually fairly easy. +All you have to do is add a line to wins.dat, typically +located in /usr/local/samba/var/locks. +

+Entries in wins.dat take the form of + +

+"NAME#TYPE" TTL ADDRESS+ FLAGS
+

+ +where NAME is the NetBIOS name, TYPE is the NetBIOS type, TTL is the +time-to-live as an absolute time in seconds, ADDRESS+ is one or more +addresses corresponding to the registration and FLAGS are the NetBIOS +flags for the registration. +

+A typical dynamic entry looks like: +

+"MADMAN#03" 1055298378 192.168.1.2 66R
+

+ +To make it static, all that has to be done is set the TTL to 0: + +

+"MADMAN#03" 0 192.168.1.2 66R
+

+

+Though this method works with early Samba-3 versions, there's a +possibility that it may change in future versions if WINS replication +is added. +

Helpful Hints

+The following hints should be carefully considered as they are stumbling points +for many new network administrators. +

Windows Networking Protocols

Warning

+Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines +

+A very common cause of browsing problems results from installing more than +one protocol on an MS Windows machine. +

+Every NetBIOS machine takes part in a process of electing the LMB (and DMB) +every 15 minutes. A set of election criteria is used to determine the order +of precedence for winning this election process. A machine running Samba or +Windows NT will be biased so that the most suitable machine will predictably +win and thus retain it's role. +

+The election process is "fought out" so to speak over every NetBIOS network +interface. In the case of a Windows 9x machine that has both TCP/IP and IPX +installed and has NetBIOS enabled over both protocols the election will be +decided over both protocols. As often happens, if the Windows 9x machine is +the only one with both protocols then the LMB may be won on the NetBIOS +interface over the IPX protocol. Samba will then lose the LMB role as Windows +9x will insist it knows who the LMB is. Samba will then cease to function +as an LMB and thus browse list operation on all TCP/IP only machines will +fail. +

+Windows 95, 98, 98se, Me are referred to generically as Windows 9x. +The Windows NT4, 2000, XP and 2003 use common protocols. These are roughly +referred to as the WinNT family, but it should be recognised that 2000 and +XP/2003 introduce new protocol extensions that cause them to behave +differently from MS Windows NT4. Generally, where a server does NOT support +the newer or extended protocol, these will fall back to the NT4 protocols. +

+The safest rule of all to follow it this - USE ONLY ONE PROTOCOL! +

Name Resolution Order

+Resolution of NetBIOS names to IP addresses can take place using a number +of methods. The only ones that can provide NetBIOS name_type information +are: +

  • WINS: the best tool!

  • LMHOSTS: is static and hard to maintain.

  • Broadcast: uses UDP and can not resolve names across remote segments.

+Alternative means of name resolution includes: +

  • /etc/hosts: is static, hard to maintain, and lacks name_type info

  • DNS: is a good choice but lacks essential name_type info.

+Many sites want to restrict DNS lookups and want to avoid broadcast name +resolution traffic. The name resolve order parameter is of great help here. +The syntax of the name resolve order parameter is: +

name resolve order = wins lmhosts bcast host

+or +

name resolve order = wins lmhosts (eliminates bcast and host)

+The default is: +

name resolve order = host lmhost wins bcast

+where "host" refers to the native methods used by the UNIX system +to implement the gethostbyname() function call. This is normally +controlled by /etc/host.conf, /etc/nsswitch.conf and /etc/resolv.conf. +

Technical Overview of browsing

+SMB networking provides a mechanism by which clients can access a list +of machines in a network, a so-called browse list. This list +contains machines that are ready to offer file and/or print services +to other machines within the network. Thus it does not include +machines which aren't currently able to do server tasks. The browse +list is heavily used by all SMB clients. Configuration of SMB +browsing has been problematic for some Samba users, hence this +document. +

+MS Windows 2000 and later, as with Samba 3 and later, can be +configured to not use NetBIOS over TCP/IP. When configured this way, +it is imperative that name resolution (using DNS/LDAP/ADS) be correctly +configured and operative. Browsing will NOT work if name resolution +from SMB machine names to IP addresses does not function correctly. +

+Where NetBIOS over TCP/IP is enabled use of a WINS server is highly +recommended to aid the resolution of NetBIOS (SMB) names to IP addresses. +WINS allows remote segment clients to obtain NetBIOS name_type information +that can NOT be provided by any other means of name resolution. +

Browsing support in Samba

+Samba facilitates browsing. The browsing is supported by nmbd +and is also controlled by options in the smb.conf file. +Samba can act as a local browse master for a workgroup and the ability +to support domain logons and scripts is now available. +

+Samba can also act as a domain master browser for a workgroup. This +means that it will collate lists from local browse masters into a +wide area network server list. In order for browse clients to +resolve the names they may find in this list, it is recommended that +both Samba and your clients use a WINS server. +

+Note that you should NOT set Samba to be the domain master for a +workgroup that has the same name as an NT Domain: on each wide area +network, you must only ever have one domain master browser per workgroup, +regardless of whether it is NT, Samba or any other type of domain master +that is providing this service. +

Note

+Nmbd can be configured as a WINS server, but it is not +necessary to specifically use Samba as your WINS server. MS Windows +NT4, Server or Advanced Server 2000 or 2003 can be configured as +your WINS server. In a mixed NT/2000/2003 server and Samba environment on +a Wide Area Network, it is recommended that you use the Microsoft +WINS server capabilities. In a Samba-only environment, it is +recommended that you use one and only one Samba server as your WINS server. +

+To get browsing to work you need to run nmbd as usual, but will need +to use the workgroup option in smb.conf +to control what workgroup Samba becomes a part of. +

+Samba also has a useful option for a Samba server to offer itself for +browsing on another subnet. It is recommended that this option is only +used for 'unusual' purposes: announcements over the internet, for +example. See remote announce in the +smb.conf man page. +

Problem resolution

+If something doesn't work then hopefully the log.nmbd file will help +you track down the problem. Try a debug level of 2 or 3 for finding +problems. Also note that the current browse list usually gets stored +in text form in a file called browse.dat. +

+Note that if it doesn't work for you, then you should still be able to +type the server name as \\SERVER in filemanager then +hit enter and filemanager should display the list of available shares. +

+Some people find browsing fails because they don't have the global +guest account set to a valid account. Remember that the +IPC$ connection that lists the shares is done as guest, and thus you must +have a valid guest account. +

+MS Windows 2000 and upwards (as with Samba) can be configured to disallow +anonymous (ie: Guest account) access to the IPC$ share. In that case, the +MS Windows 2000/XP/2003 machine acting as an SMB/CIFS client will use the +name of the currently logged in user to query the IPC$ share. MS Windows +9X clients are not able to do this and thus will NOT be able to browse +server resources. +

+The other big problem people have is that their broadcast address, +netmask or IP address is wrong (specified with the "interfaces" option +in smb.conf) +

Browsing across subnets

+Since the release of Samba 1.9.17(alpha1), Samba has supported the +replication of browse lists across subnet boundaries. This section +describes how to set this feature up in different settings. +

+To see browse lists that span TCP/IP subnets (ie. networks separated +by routers that don't pass broadcast traffic), you must set up at least +one WINS server. The WINS server acts as a DNS for NetBIOS names, allowing +NetBIOS name to IP address translation to be done by doing a direct +query of the WINS server. This is done via a directed UDP packet on +port 137 to the WINS server machine. The reason for a WINS server is +that by default, all NetBIOS name to IP address translation is done +by broadcasts from the querying machine. This means that machines +on one subnet will not be able to resolve the names of machines on +another subnet without using a WINS server. +

+Remember, for browsing across subnets to work correctly, all machines, +be they Windows 95, Windows NT, or Samba servers must have the IP address +of a WINS server given to them by a DHCP server, or by manual configuration +(for Win95 and WinNT, this is in the TCP/IP Properties, under Network +settings) for Samba this is in the smb.conf file. +

How does cross subnet browsing work ?

+Cross subnet browsing is a complicated dance, containing multiple +moving parts. It has taken Microsoft several years to get the code +that achieves this correct, and Samba lags behind in some areas. +Samba is capable of cross subnet browsing when configured correctly. +

+ Consider a network set up as in the diagram below. +

Figure 10.1. Cross subnet browsing example

Cross subnet browsing example

+Consisting of 3 subnets (1, 2, 3) connected by two routers +(R1, R2) - these do not pass broadcasts. Subnet 1 has 5 machines +on it, subnet 2 has 4 machines, subnet 3 has 4 machines. Assume +for the moment that all these machines are configured to be in the +same workgroup (for simplicity's sake). Machine N1_C on subnet 1 +is configured as Domain Master Browser (ie. it will collate the +browse lists for the workgroup). Machine N2_D is configured as +WINS server and all the other machines are configured to register +their NetBIOS names with it. +

+As all these machines are booted up, elections for master browsers +will take place on each of the three subnets. Assume that machine +N1_C wins on subnet 1, N2_B wins on subnet 2, and N3_D wins on +subnet 3 - these machines are known as local master browsers for +their particular subnet. N1_C has an advantage in winning as the +local master browser on subnet 1 as it is set up as Domain Master +Browser. +

+On each of the three networks, machines that are configured to +offer sharing services will broadcast that they are offering +these services. The local master browser on each subnet will +receive these broadcasts and keep a record of the fact that +the machine is offering a service. This list of records is +the basis of the browse list. For this case, assume that +all the machines are configured to offer services so all machines +will be on the browse list. +

+For each network, the local master browser on that network is +considered 'authoritative' for all the names it receives via +local broadcast. This is because a machine seen by the local +master browser via a local broadcast must be on the same +network as the local master browser and thus is a 'trusted' +and 'verifiable' resource. Machines on other networks that +the local master browsers learn about when collating their +browse lists have not been directly seen - these records are +called 'non-authoritative'. +

+At this point the browse lists look as follows (these are +the machines you would see in your network neighborhood if +you looked in it on a particular network right now). +

+

Table 10.1. Browse subnet example 1

SubnetBrowse MasterList
Subnet1N1_CN1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E
Subnet2N2_BN2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D
Subnet3N3_DN3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D

+

+Note that at this point all the subnets are separate, no +machine is seen across any of the subnets. +

+Now examine subnet 2. As soon as N2_B has become the local +master browser it looks for a Domain master browser to synchronize +its browse list with. It does this by querying the WINS server +(N2_D) for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name +WORKGROUP<1B>. This name was registered by the Domain master +browser (N1_C) with the WINS server as soon as it was booted. +

+Once N2_B knows the address of the Domain master browser it +tells it that is the local master browser for subnet 2 by +sending a MasterAnnouncement packet as a UDP port 138 packet. +It then synchronizes with it by doing a NetServerEnum2 call. This +tells the Domain Master Browser to send it all the server +names it knows about. Once the domain master browser receives +the MasterAnnouncement packet it schedules a synchronization +request to the sender of that packet. After both synchronizations +are done the browse lists look like : +

+

Table 10.2. Browse subnet example 2

SubnetBrowse MasterList
Subnet1N1_CN1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, +N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*)
Subnet2N2_BN2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D, N1_A(*), +N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*)
Subnet3N3_DN3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D

+ +Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names. +

+At this point users looking in their network neighborhood on +subnets 1 or 2 will see all the servers on both, users on +subnet 3 will still only see the servers on their own subnet. +

+The same sequence of events that occurred for N2_B now occurs +for the local master browser on subnet 3 (N3_D). When it +synchronizes browse lists with the domain master browser (N1_A) +it gets both the server entries on subnet 1, and those on +subnet 2. After N3_D has synchronized with N1_C and vica-versa +the browse lists look like. +

+

Table 10.3. Browse subnet example 3

SubnetBrowse MasterList
Subnet1N1_CN1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, +N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*), N3_A(*), N3_B(*), N3_C(*), N3_D(*)
Subnet2N2_BN2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D, N1_A(*), +N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*)
Subnet3N3_DN3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D, N1_A(*), +N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*), N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*)

+ +Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names. +

+At this point users looking in their network neighborhood on +subnets 1 or 3 will see all the servers on all subnets, users on +subnet 2 will still only see the servers on subnets 1 and 2, but not 3. +

+Finally, the local master browser for subnet 2 (N2_B) will sync again +with the domain master browser (N1_C) and will receive the missing +server entries. Finally - and as a steady state (if no machines +are removed or shut off) the browse lists will look like : +

+

Table 10.4. Browse subnet example 4

SubnetBrowse MasterList
Subnet1N1_CN1_A, N1_B, N1_C, N1_D, N1_E, +N2_A(*), N2_B(*), N2_C(*), N2_D(*), N3_A(*), N3_B(*), +N3_C(*), N3_D(*)
Subnet2N2_BN2_A, N2_B, N2_C, N2_D, N1_A(*), +N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*), N3_A(*), N3_B(*), +N3_C(*), N3_D(*)
Subnet3N3_DN3_A, N3_B, N3_C, N3_D, N1_A(*), +N1_B(*), N1_C(*), N1_D(*), N1_E(*), N2_A(*), N2_B(*), +N2_C(*), N2_D(*)

+ +Servers with a (*) after them are non-authoritative names. +

+Synchronizations between the domain master browser and local +master browsers will continue to occur, but this should be a +steady state situation. +

+If either router R1 or R2 fails the following will occur: +

  1. + Names of computers on each side of the inaccessible network fragments + will be maintained for as long as 36 minutes, in the network neighbourhood + lists. +

  2. + Attempts to connect to these inaccessible computers will fail, but the + names will not be removed from the network neighbourhood lists. +

  3. + If one of the fragments is cut off from the WINS server, it will only + be able to access servers on its local subnet, by using subnet-isolated + broadcast NetBIOS name resolution. The effects are similar to that of + losing access to a DNS server. +

Common Errors

+Many questions are asked on the mailing lists regarding browsing. The majority of browsing +problems originate out of incorrect configuration of NetBIOS name resolution. Some are of +particular note. +

How can one flush the Samba NetBIOS name cache without restarting Samba?

+Samba's nmbd process controls all browse list handling. Under normal circumstances it is +safe to restart nmbd. This will effectively flush the Samba NetBIOS name cache and cause it +to be rebuilt. Note that this does NOT make certain that a rogue machine name will not re-appear +in the browse list. When nmbd is taken out of service another machine on the network will +become the browse master. This new list may still have the rogue entry in it. If you really +want to clear a rogue machine from the list then every machine on the network will need to be +shut down and restarted at after all machines are down. Failing a complete restart, the only +other thing you can do is wait until the entry times out and is then flushed from the list. +This may take a long time on some networks (months). +

My client reports "This server is not configured to list shared resources"

+Your guest account is probably invalid for some reason. Samba uses the +guest account for browsing in smbd. Check that your guest account is +valid. +

See also guest account in the smb.conf man page.

I get an Unable to browse the network error

This error can have multiple causes:

  • There is no local master browser. Configure nmbd + or any other machine to serve as local master browser.

  • You can not log onto the machine that is the local master + browser. Can you logon to it as guest user?

  • There is no IP connectivity to the local master browser. + Can you reach it by broadcast?

Prev Up Next
Part III. Advanced Configuration Home Chapter 11. Account Information Databases
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Other-Clients.html b/docs/htmldocs/Other-Clients.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dffa1122ac --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Other-Clients.html @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +Chapter 38. Samba and other CIFS clients
Chapter 38. Samba and other CIFS clients
Prev Part VI. Appendixes Next

Chapter 38. Samba and other CIFS clients

Jelmer R. Vernooij

The Samba Team

Jim McDonough

OS/2
IBM

5 Mar 2001

Table of Contents

Macintosh clients?
OS2 Client
Configuring OS/2 Warp Connect or + OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba
Configuring OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), + OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba
Printer driver download for for OS/2 clients?
Windows for Workgroups
Latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft
Delete .pwl files after password change
Configuring WfW password handling
Case handling of passwords
Use TCP/IP as default protocol
Speed improvement
Windows '95/'98
Speed improvement
Windows 2000 Service Pack 2
Windows NT 3.1

This chapter contains client-specific information.

Macintosh clients?

+ Yes. Thursby now has a CIFS Client / Server called DAVE +

+They test it against Windows 95, Windows NT and samba for +compatibility issues. At the time of writing, DAVE was at version +1.0.1. The 1.0.0 to 1.0.1 update is available as a free download from +the Thursby web site (the speed of finder copies has been greatly +enhanced, and there are bug-fixes included). +

+Alternatives - There are two free implementations of AppleTalk for +several kinds of UNIX machines, and several more commercial ones. +These products allow you to run file services and print services +natively to Macintosh users, with no additional support required on +the Macintosh. The two free implementations are +Netatalk, and +CAP. +What Samba offers MS +Windows users, these packages offer to Macs. For more info on these +packages, Samba, and Linux (and other UNIX-based systems) see +http://www.eats.com/linux_mac_win.html +

Newer versions of the Macintosh (Mac OS X) include Samba.

OS2 Client

Configuring OS/2 Warp Connect or + OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba

Basically, you need three components:

  • The File and Print Client ('IBM Peer')

  • TCP/IP ('Internet support')

  • The "NetBIOS over TCP/IP" driver ('TCPBEUI')

Installing the first two together with the base operating + system on a blank system is explained in the Warp manual. If Warp + has already been installed, but you now want to install the + networking support, use the "Selective Install for Networking" + object in the "System Setup" folder.

Adding the "NetBIOS over TCP/IP" driver is not described + in the manual and just barely in the online documentation. Start + MPTS.EXE, click on OK, click on "Configure LAPS" and click + on "IBM OS/2 NETBIOS OVER TCP/IP" in 'Protocols'. This line + is then moved to 'Current Configuration'. Select that line, + click on "Change number" and increase it from 0 to 1. Save this + configuration.

If the Samba server(s) is not on your local subnet, you + can optionally add IP names and addresses of these servers + to the "Names List", or specify a WINS server ('NetBIOS + Nameserver' in IBM and RFC terminology). For Warp Connect you + may need to download an update for 'IBM Peer' to bring it on + the same level as Warp 4. See the webpage mentioned above.

Configuring OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), + OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba

You can use the free Microsoft LAN Manager 2.2c Client + for OS/2 from + + ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/BusSys/Clients/LANMAN.OS2/. + In + a nutshell, edit the file \OS2VER in the root directory of + the OS/2 boot partition and add the lines:

+		20=setup.exe
+		20=netwksta.sys
+		20=netvdd.sys
+

before you install the client. Also, don't use the + included NE2000 driver because it is buggy. Try the NE2000 + or NS2000 driver from + + ftp://ftp.cdrom.com/pub/os2/network/ndis/ instead. +

Printer driver download for for OS/2 clients?

First, create a share called [PRINTDRV] that is + world-readable. Copy your OS/2 driver files there. Note + that the .EA_ files must still be separate, so you will need + to use the original install files, and not copy an installed + driver from an OS/2 system.

Install the NT driver first for that printer. Then, + add to your smb.conf a parameter, os2 driver map = filename. Then, in the file + specified by filename, map the + name of the NT driver name to the OS/2 driver name as + follows:

nt driver name = os2 driver name.device name, e.g.:

+ HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP LaserJet 5L

You can have multiple drivers mapped in this file.

If you only specify the OS/2 driver name, and not the + device name, the first attempt to download the driver will + actually download the files, but the OS/2 client will tell + you the driver is not available. On the second attempt, it + will work. This is fixed simply by adding the device name + to the mapping, after which it will work on the first attempt. +

Windows for Workgroups

Latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft

Use the latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft if you use Windows +for Workgroups. +

The early TCP/IP stacks had lots of bugs.

+Microsoft has released an incremental upgrade to their TCP/IP 32-Bit +VxD drivers. The latest release can be found on their ftp site at +ftp.microsoft.com, located in /peropsys/windows/public/tcpip/wfwt32.exe. +There is an update.txt file there that describes the problems that were +fixed. New files include WINSOCK.DLL, +TELNET.EXE, +WSOCK.386, +VNBT.386, +WSTCP.386, +TRACERT.EXE, +NETSTAT.EXE, and +NBTSTAT.EXE. +

Delete .pwl files after password change

+WfWg does a lousy job with passwords. I find that if I change my +password on either the unix box or the PC the safest thing to do is to +delete the .pwl files in the windows directory. The PC will complain about not finding the files, but will soon get over it, allowing you to enter the new password. +

+If you don't do this you may find that WfWg remembers and uses the old +password, even if you told it a new one. +

+Often WfWg will totally ignore a password you give it in a dialog box. +

Configuring WfW password handling

+There is a program call admincfg.exe +on the last disk (disk 8) of the WFW 3.11 disk set. To install it +type EXPAND A:\ADMINCFG.EX_ C:\WINDOWS\ADMINCFG.EXE. +Then add an icon +for it via the Program Manager New Menu. +This program allows you to control how WFW handles passwords. ie disable Password Caching etc +for use with security = user +

Case handling of passwords

Windows for Workgroups uppercases the password before sending it to the server. Unix passwords can be case-sensitive though. Check the smb.conf information on password level to specify what characters samba should try to uppercase when checking.

Use TCP/IP as default protocol

To support print queue reporting you may find +that you have to use TCP/IP as the default protocol under +WfWg. For some reason if you leave NetBEUI as the default +it may break the print queue reporting on some systems. +It is presumably a WfWg bug.

Speed improvement

+ Note that some people have found that setting DefaultRcvWindow in +the [MSTCP] section of the +SYSTEM.INI file under WfWg to 3072 gives a +big improvement. I don't know why. +

+My own experience with DefaultRcvWindow is that I get much better +performance with a large value (16384 or larger). Other people have +reported that anything over 3072 slows things down enormously. One +person even reported a speed drop of a factor of 30 when he went from +3072 to 8192. I don't know why. +

Windows '95/'98

+When using Windows 95 OEM SR2 the following updates are recommended where Samba +is being used. Please NOTE that the above change will affect you once these +updates have been installed. +

+There are more updates than the ones mentioned here. You are referred to the +Microsoft Web site for all currently available updates to your specific version +of Windows 95. +

Kernel Update: KRNLUPD.EXE
Ping Fix: PINGUPD.EXE
RPC Update: RPCRTUPD.EXE
TCP/IP Update: VIPUPD.EXE
Redirector Update: VRDRUPD.EXE

+Also, if using MS Outlook it is desirable to +install the OLEUPD.EXE fix. This +fix may stop your machine from hanging for an extended period when exiting +Outlook and you may also notice a significant speedup when accessing network +neighborhood services. +

Speed improvement

+Configure the win95 TCPIP registry settings to give better +performance. I use a program called MTUSPEED.exe which I got off the +net. There are various other utilities of this type freely available. +

Windows 2000 Service Pack 2

+There are several annoyances with Windows 2000 SP2. One of which +only appears when using a Samba server to host user profiles +to Windows 2000 SP2 clients in a Windows domain. This assumes +that Samba is a member of the domain, but the problem will +likely occur if it is not. +

+In order to serve profiles successfully to Windows 2000 SP2 +clients (when not operating as a PDC), Samba must have +nt acl support = no +added to the file share which houses the roaming profiles. +If this is not done, then the Windows 2000 SP2 client will +complain about not being able to access the profile (Access +Denied) and create multiple copies of it on disk (DOMAIN.user.001, +DOMAIN.user.002, etc...). See the +smb.conf man page +for more details on this option. Also note that the +nt acl support parameter was formally a global parameter in +releases prior to Samba 2.2.2. +

+The following is a minimal profile share: +

Example 38.1. Minimal profile share

[profile]
path = /export/profile
create mask = 0600
directory mask = 0700
nt acl support = no
read only = no

+The reason for this bug is that the Win2k SP2 client copies +the security descriptor for the profile which contains +the Samba server's SID, and not the domain SID. The client +compares the SID for SAMBA\user and realizes it is +different that the one assigned to DOMAIN\user. Hence the reason +for the access denied message. +

+By disabling the nt acl support parameter, Samba will send +the Win2k client a response to the QuerySecurityDescriptor +trans2 call which causes the client to set a default ACL +for the profile. This default ACL includes +

DOMAIN\user "Full Control">

Note

This bug does not occur when using winbind to +create accounts on the Samba host for Domain users.

Windows NT 3.1

If you have problems communicating across routers with Windows +NT 3.1 workstations, read this Microsoft Knowledge Base article. + +

Prev Up Next
Chapter 37. Portability Home Chapter 39. Samba Performance Tuning
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/PolicyMgmt.html b/docs/htmldocs/PolicyMgmt.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..754ca9b686 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/PolicyMgmt.html @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +Chapter 23. System and Account Policies
Chapter 23. System and Account Policies
Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

Chapter 23. System and Account Policies

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

April 3 2003

Table of Contents

Features and Benefits
Creating and Managing System Policies
Windows 9x/Me Policies
Windows NT4 Style Policy Files
MS Windows 200x / XP Professional Policies
Managing Account/User Policies
Samba Editreg Toolset
Windows NT4/200x
Samba PDC
System Startup and Logon Processing Overview
Common Errors
Policy Does Not Work

+This chapter summarises the current state of knowledge derived from personal +practice and knowledge from samba mailing list subscribers. Before reproduction +of posted information effort has been made to validate the information provided. +Where additional information was uncovered through this validation it is provided +also. +

Features and Benefits

+When MS Windows NT3.5 was introduced the hot new topic was the ability to implement +Group Policies for users and group. Then along came MS Windows NT4 and a few sites +started to adopt this capability. How do we know that? By way of the number of "booboos" +(or mistakes) administrators made and then requested help to resolve. +

+By the time that MS Windows 2000 and Active Directory was released, administrators +got the message: Group Policies are a good thing! They can help reduce administrative +costs and actually can help to create happier users. But adoption of the true +potential of MS Windows 200x Active Directory and Group Policy Objects (GPOs) for users +and machines were picked up on rather slowly. This was very obvious from the samba +mailing list as in 2000 and 2001 there were very few postings regarding GPOs and +how to replicate them in a Samba environment. +

+Judging by the traffic volume since mid 2002, GPOs have become a standard part of +the deployment in many sites. This chapter reviews techniques and methods that can +be used to exploit opportunities for automation of control over user desktops and +network client workstations. +

+A tool new to Samba may become an important part of the future Samba Administrators' +arsenal. The editreg tool is described in this document. +

Creating and Managing System Policies

+Under MS Windows platforms, particularly those following the release of MS Windows +NT4 and MS Windows 95) it is possible to create a type of file that would be placed +in the NETLOGON share of a domain controller. As the client logs onto the network +this file is read and the contents initiate changes to the registry of the client +machine. This file allows changes to be made to those parts of the registry that +affect users, groups of users, or machines. +

+For MS Windows 9x/Me this file must be called Config.POL and may +be generated using a tool called poledit.exe, better known as the +Policy Editor. The policy editor was provided on the Windows 98 installation CD, but +disappeared again with the introduction of MS Windows Me (Millennium Edition). From +comments from MS Windows network administrators it would appear that this tool became +a part of the MS Windows Me Resource Kit. +

+MS Windows NT4 Server products include the System Policy Editor +under the Start -> Programs -> Administrative Tools menu item. +For MS Windows NT4 and later clients this file must be called NTConfig.POL. +

+New with the introduction of MS Windows 2000 was the Microsoft Management Console +or MMC. This tool is the new wave in the ever changing landscape of Microsoft +methods for management of network access and security. Every new Microsoft product +or technology seems to obsolete the old rules and to introduce newer and more +complex tools and methods. To Microsoft's credit though, the MMC does appear to +be a step forward, but improved functionality comes at a great price. +

+Before embarking on the configuration of network and system policies it is highly +advisable to read the documentation available from Microsoft's web site regarding + +Implementing Profiles and Policies in Windows NT 4.0 available from Microsoft. +There are a large number of documents in addition to this old one that should also +be read and understood. Try searching on the Microsoft web site for "Group Policies". +

+What follows is a very brief discussion with some helpful notes. The information provided +here is incomplete - you are warned. +

Windows 9x/Me Policies

+ You need the Win98 Group Policy Editor to set Group Profiles up under Windows 9x/Me. + It can be found on the Original full product Win98 installation CD under + tools/reskit/netadmin/poledit. Install this using the + Add/Remove Programs facility and then click on the 'Have Disk' tab. +

+ Use the Group Policy Editor to create a policy file that specifies the location of + user profiles and/or the My Documents etc. Then save these + settings in a file called Config.POL that needs to be placed in the + root of the [NETLOGON] share. If Win98 is configured to log onto + the Samba Domain, it will automatically read this file and update the Win9x/Me registry + of the machine as it logs on. +

+ Further details are covered in the Win98 Resource Kit documentation. +

+ If you do not take the right steps, then every so often Win9x/Me will check the + integrity of the registry and will restore it's settings from the back-up + copy of the registry it stores on each Win9x/Me machine. Hence, you will + occasionally notice things changing back to the original settings. +

+ Install the group policy handler for Win9x to pick up group policies. Look on the + Win98 CD in \tools\reskit\netadmin\poledit. + Install group policies on a Win9x client by double-clicking + grouppol.inf. Log off and on again a couple of times and see + if Win98 picks up group policies. Unfortunately this needs to be done on every + Win9x/Me machine that uses group policies. +

Windows NT4 Style Policy Files

+ To create or edit ntconfig.pol you must use the NT Server + Policy Editor, poledit.exe which is included with NT4 Server + but not NT Workstation. There is a Policy Editor on a NT4 + Workstation but it is not suitable for creating Domain Policies. + Further, although the Windows 95 Policy Editor can be installed on an NT4 + Workstation/Server, it will not work with NT clients. However, the files from + the NT Server will run happily enough on an NT4 Workstation. +

+ You need poledit.exe, common.adm and winnt.adm. + It is convenient to put the two *.adm files in the c:\winnt\inf + directory which is where the binary will look for them unless told otherwise. Note also that that + directory is normally 'hidden'. +

+ The Windows NT policy editor is also included with the Service Pack 3 (and + later) for Windows NT 4.0. Extract the files using servicepackname /x, + i.e. that's Nt4sp6ai.exe /x for service pack 6a. The policy editor, + poledit.exe and the associated template files (*.adm) should + be extracted as well. It is also possible to downloaded the policy template + files for Office97 and get a copy of the policy editor. Another possible + location is with the Zero Administration Kit available for download from Microsoft. +

Registry Spoiling

+ With NT4 style registry based policy changes, a large number of settings are not + automatically reversed as the user logs off. Since the settings that were in the + NTConfig.POL file were applied to the client machine registry and that apply to the + hive key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE are permanent until explicitly reversed. This is known + as tattooing. It can have serious consequences down-stream and the administrator must + be extremely careful not to lock out the ability to manage the machine at a later date. +

MS Windows 200x / XP Professional Policies

+ Windows NT4 System policies allows setting of registry parameters specific to + users, groups and computers (client workstations) that are members of the NT4 + style domain. Such policy file will work with MS Windows 2000 / XP clients also. +

+ New to MS Windows 2000 Microsoft introduced a new style of group policy that confers + a superset of capabilities compared with NT4 style policies. Obviously, the tool used + to create them is different, and the mechanism for implementing them is much changed. +

+ The older NT4 style registry based policies are known as Administrative Templates + in MS Windows 2000/XP Group Policy Objects (GPOs). The later includes ability to set various security + configurations, enforce Internet Explorer browser settings, change and redirect aspects of the + users' desktop (including: the location of My Documents files (directory), as + well as intrinsics of where menu items will appear in the Start menu). An additional new + feature is the ability to make available particular software Windows applications to particular + users and/or groups. +

+ Remember: NT4 policy files are named NTConfig.POL and are stored in the root + of the NETLOGON share on the domain controllers. A Windows NT4 user enters a username, a password + and selects the domain name to which the logon will attempt to take place. During the logon + process the client machine reads the NTConfig.POL file from the NETLOGON share on the authenticating + server, modifies the local registry values according to the settings in this file. +

+ Windows 2K GPOs are very feature rich. They are NOT stored in the NETLOGON share, rather part of + a Windows 200x policy file is stored in the Active Directory itself and the other part is stored + in a shared (and replicated) volume called the SYSVOL folder. This folder is present on all Active + Directory domain controllers. The part that is stored in the Active Directory itself is called the + group policy container (GPC), and the part that is stored in the replicated share called SYSVOL is + known as the group policy template (GPT). +

+ With NT4 clients the policy file is read and executed upon only as each user logs onto the network. + MS Windows 200x policies are much more complex - GPOs are processed and applied at client machine + startup (machine specific part) and when the user logs onto the network the user specific part + is applied. In MS Windows 200x style policy management each machine and/or user may be subject + to any number of concurrently applicable (and applied) policy sets (GPOs). Active Directory allows + the administrator to also set filters over the policy settings. No such equivalent capability + exists with NT4 style policy files. +

Administration of Win2K / XP Policies

+ Instead of using the tool called The System Policy Editor, commonly called Poledit (from the + executable name poledit.exe), GPOs are created and managed using a + Microsoft Management Console (MMC) snap-in as follows:

  1. + Go to the Windows 200x / XP menu Start->Programs->Administrative Tools + and select the MMC snap-in called Active Directory Users and Computers +

  2. + Select the domain or organizational unit (OU) that you wish to manage, then right click + to open the context menu for that object, select the properties item. +

  3. + Now left click on the Group Policy tab, then left click on the New tab. Type a name + for the new policy you will create. +

  4. + Now left click on the Edit tab to commence the steps needed to create the GPO. +

+ All policy configuration options are controlled through the use of policy administrative + templates. These files have a .adm extension, both in NT4 as well as in Windows 200x / XP. + Beware however, since the .adm files are NOT interchangeable across NT4 and Windows 200x. + The later introduces many new features as well as extended definition capabilities. It is + well beyond the scope of this documentation to explain how to program .adm files, for that + the administrator is referred to the Microsoft Windows Resource Kit for your particular + version of MS Windows. +

Note

+ The MS Windows 2000 Resource Kit contains a tool called gpolmig.exe. This tool can be used + to migrate an NT4 NTConfig.POL file into a Windows 200x style GPO. Be VERY careful how you + use this powerful tool. Please refer to the resource kit manuals for specific usage information. +

Managing Account/User Policies

+Policies can define a specific user's settings or the settings for a group of users. The resulting +policy file contains the registry settings for all users, groups, and computers that will be using +the policy file. Separate policy files for each user, group, or computer are not necessary. +

+If you create a policy that will be automatically downloaded from validating domain controllers, +you should name the file NTconfig.POL. As system administrator, you have the option of renaming the +policy file and, by modifying the Windows NT-based workstation, directing the computer to update +the policy from a manual path. You can do this by either manually changing the registry or by using +the System Policy Editor. This path can even be a local path such that each machine has its own policy file, +but if a change is necessary to all machines, this change must be made individually to each workstation. +

+When a Windows NT4/200x/XP machine logs onto the network the NETLOGON share on the authenticating domain +controller for the presence of the NTConfig.POL file. If one exists it is downloaded, parsed and then +applied to the user's part of the registry. +

+MS Windows 200x/XP clients that log onto an MS Windows Active Directory security domain may additionally, +acquire policy settings through Group Policy Objects (GPOs) that are defined and stored in Active Directory +itself. The key benefit of using AS GPOs is that they impose no registry spoiling effect. +This has considerable advantage compared with the use of NTConfig.POL (NT4) style policy updates. +

+In addition to user access controls that may be imposed or applied via system and/or group policies +in a manner that works in conjunction with user profiles, the user management environment under +MS Windows NT4/200x/XP allows per domain as well as per user account restrictions to be applied. +Common restrictions that are frequently used includes: +

+

  • Logon Hours

  • Password Aging

  • Permitted Logon from certain machines only

  • Account type (Local or Global)

  • User Rights

+

Samba Editreg Toolset

+ A new tool called editreg is under development. This tool can be used + to edit registry files (called NTUser.DAT) that are stored in user and group profiles. + NTConfig.POL files have the same structure as the NTUser.DAT file and can be editted using + this tool. editreg is being built with the intent to enable NTConfig.POL + files to be saved in text format and to permit the building of new NTConfig.POL files with + extended capabilities. It is proving difficult to realise this capability, so do not be surprised + if this feature does not materialise. Formal capabilities will be announced at the time that + this tool is released for production use. +

Windows NT4/200x

+ The tools that may be used to configure these types of controls from the MS Windows environment are: + The NT4 User Manager for domains, the NT4 System and Group Policy Editor, the registry editor (regedt32.exe). + Under MS Windows 200x/XP this is done using the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) with appropriate + "snap-ins", the registry editor, and potentially also the NT4 System and Group Policy Editor. +

Samba PDC

+ With a Samba Domain Controller, the new tools for managing of user account and policy information includes: + smbpasswd, pdbedit, net, rpcclient. + The administrator should read the + man pages for these tools and become familiar with their use. +

System Startup and Logon Processing Overview

+The following attempts to document the order of processing of system and user policies following a system +reboot and as part of the user logon: +

  1. + Network starts, then Remote Procedure Call System Service (RPCSS) and Multiple Universal Naming + Convention Provider (MUP) start +

  2. + Where Active Directory is involved, an ordered list of Group Policy Objects (GPOs) is downloaded + and applied. The list may include GPOs that: +

    • Apply to the location of machines in a Directory

    • Apply only when settings have changed

    • Depend on configuration of scope of applicability: local, site, domain, organizational unit, etc.

    + No desktop user interface is presented until the above have been processed. +

  3. + Execution of start-up scripts (hidden and synchronous by default). +

  4. + A keyboard action to affect start of logon (Ctrl-Alt-Del). +

  5. + User credentials are validated, User profile is loaded (depends on policy settings). +

  6. + An ordered list of User GPOs is obtained. The list contents depends on what is configured in respect of: + +

    • Is user a domain member, thus subject to particular policies

    • Loopback enablement, and the state of the loopback policy (Merge or Replace)

    • Location of the Active Directory itself

    • Has the list of GPOs changed. No processing is needed if not changed.

    +

  7. + User Policies are applied from Active Directory. Note: There are several types. +

  8. + Logon scripts are run. New to Win2K and Active Directory, logon scripts may be obtained based on Group + Policy objects (hidden and executed synchronously). NT4 style logon scripts are then run in a normal + window. +

  9. + The User Interface as determined from the GPOs is presented. Note: In a Samba domain (like and NT4 + Domain) machine (system) policies are applied at start-up, User policies are applied at logon. +

Common Errors

+Policy related problems can be very difficult to diagnose and even more difficult to rectify. The following +collection demonstrates only basic issues. +

Policy Does Not Work

+ “We have created the config.pol file and put it in the NETLOGON share. +It has made no difference to our Win XP Pro machines, they just don't see it. IT worked fine with Win 98 but does not +work any longer since we upgraded to Win XP Pro. Any hints?” +

+Policy files are NOT portable between Windows 9x / Me and MS Windows NT4 / 200x / XP based +platforms. You need to use the NT4 Group Policy Editor to create a file called NTConfig.POL so that +it is in the correct format for your MS Windows XP Pro clients. +

Prev Up Next
Chapter 22. Advanced Network Management Home Chapter 24. Desktop Profile Management
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Portability.html b/docs/htmldocs/Portability.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..50d14207d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/Portability.html @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +Chapter 37. Portability
Chapter 37. Portability
Prev Part VI. Appendixes Next

Chapter 37. Portability

Jelmer R. Vernooij

The Samba Team

Table of Contents

HPUX
SCO UNIX
DNIX
RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II
AIX
Sequential Read Ahead
Solaris
Locking improvements
Winbind on Solaris 9

Samba works on a wide range of platforms but the interface all the +platforms provide is not always compatible. This chapter contains +platform-specific information about compiling and using samba.

HPUX

+HP's implementation of supplementary groups is, er, non-standard (for +hysterical reasons). There are two group files, /etc/group and +/etc/logingroup; the system maps UIDs to numbers using the former, but +initgroups() reads the latter. Most system admins who know the ropes +symlink /etc/group to /etc/logingroup +(hard link doesn't work for reasons too stupid to go into here). initgroups() will complain if one of the +groups you're in in /etc/logingroup has what it considers to be an invalid +ID, which means outside the range [0..UID_MAX], where UID_MAX is (I think) +60000 currently on HP-UX. This precludes -2 and 65534, the usual nobody +GIDs. +

+If you encounter this problem, make sure that the programs that are failing +to initgroups() be run as users not in any groups with GIDs outside the +allowed range. +

This is documented in the HP manual pages under setgroups(2) and passwd(4). +

+On HPUX you must use gcc or the HP ANSI compiler. The free compiler +that comes with HP-UX is not ANSI compliant and cannot compile +Samba. +

SCO UNIX

+If you run an old version of SCO UNIX then you may need to get important +TCP/IP patches for Samba to work correctly. Without the patch, you may +encounter corrupt data transfers using samba. +

+The patch you need is UOD385 Connection Drivers SLS. It is available from +SCO (ftp.sco.com, directory SLS, +files uod385a.Z and uod385a.ltr.Z). +

DNIX

+DNIX has a problem with seteuid() and setegid(). These routines are +needed for Samba to work correctly, but they were left out of the DNIX +C library for some reason. +

+For this reason Samba by default defines the macro NO_EID in the DNIX +section of includes.h. This works around the problem in a limited way, +but it is far from ideal, some things still won't work right. +

+To fix the problem properly you need to assemble the following two +functions and then either add them to your C library or link them into +Samba. +

+put this in the file setegid.s: +

+        .globl  _setegid
+_setegid:
+        moveq   #47,d0
+        movl    #100,a0
+        moveq   #1,d1
+        movl    4(sp),a1
+        trap    #9
+        bccs    1$
+        jmp     cerror
+1$:
+        clrl    d0
+        rts
+

+put this in the file seteuid.s: +

+        .globl  _seteuid
+_seteuid:
+        moveq   #47,d0
+        movl    #100,a0
+        moveq   #0,d1
+        movl    4(sp),a1
+        trap    #9
+        bccs    1$
+        jmp     cerror
+1$:
+        clrl    d0
+        rts
+

+after creating the above files you then assemble them using +

+$ as seteuid.s
+$ as setegid.s
+

+that should produce the files seteuid.o and +setegid.o +

+then you need to add these to the LIBSM line in the DNIX section of +the Samba Makefile. Your LIBSM line will then look something like this: +

+LIBSM = setegid.o seteuid.o -ln
+

+You should then remove the line: +

+#define NO_EID
+

from the DNIX section of includes.h

RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II

+By default RedHat Rembrandt-II during installation adds an +entry to /etc/hosts as follows: +

+	127.0.0.1 loopback "hostname"."domainname"
+

+

+This causes Samba to loop back onto the loopback interface. +The result is that Samba fails to communicate correctly with +the world and therefor may fail to correctly negotiate who +is the master browse list holder and who is the master browser. +

+Corrective Action: Delete the entry after the word loopback + in the line starting 127.0.0.1 +

AIX

Sequential Read Ahead

+Disabling Sequential Read Ahead using vmtune -r 0 improves +Samba performance significantly. +

Solaris

Locking improvements

Some people have been experiencing problems with F_SETLKW64/fcntl +when running Samba on Solaris. The built in file locking mechanism was +not scalable. Performance would degrade to the point where processes would +get into loops of trying to lock a file. It would try a lock, then fail, +then try again. The lock attempt was failing before the grant was +occurring. So the visible manifestation of this would be a handful of +processes stealing all of the CPU, and when they were trussed they would +be stuck if F_SETLKW64 loops. +

+Sun released patches for Solaris 2.6, 8, and 9. The patch for Solaris 7 +has not been released yet. +

+The patch revision for 2.6 is 105181-34 +for 8 is 108528-19 and for 9 is 112233-04 +

+After the install of these patches it is recommended to reconfigure +and rebuild samba. +

Thanks to Joe Meslovich for reporting

Winbind on Solaris 9

+Nsswitch on Solaris 9 refuses to use the winbind nss module. This behavior +is fixed by Sun in patch 113476-05 which as of March 2003 is not in any +roll-up packages. +

Prev Up Next
Chapter 36. How to compile Samba Home Chapter 38. Samba and other CIFS clients
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/ProfileMgmt.html b/docs/htmldocs/ProfileMgmt.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..765ae4b0c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/ProfileMgmt.html @@ -0,0 +1,652 @@ +Chapter 24. Desktop Profile Management
Chapter 24. Desktop Profile Management
Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

Chapter 24. Desktop Profile Management

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

April 3 2003

Table of Contents

Features and Benefits
Roaming Profiles
Samba Configuration for Profile Handling
Windows Client Profile Configuration Information
Sharing Profiles between W9x/Me and NT4/200x/XP workstations
Profile Migration from Windows NT4/200x Server to Samba
Mandatory profiles
Creating/Managing Group Profiles
Default Profile for Windows Users
MS Windows 9x/Me
MS Windows NT4 Workstation
MS Windows 200x/XP
Common Errors
Setting up roaming profiles for just a few user's or group's?
Can NOT use Roaming Profiles
Changing the default profile

Features and Benefits

+Roaming Profiles are feared by some, hated by a few, loved by many, and a Godsend for +some administrators. +

+Roaming Profiles allow an administrator to make available a consistent user desktop +as the user moves from one machine to another. This chapter provides much information +regarding how to configure and manage Roaming Profiles. +

+While Roaming Profiles might sound like nirvana to some, they are a real and tangible +problem to others. In particular, users of mobile computing tools, where often there may not +be a sustained network connection, are often better served by purely Local Profiles. +This chapter provides information to help the Samba administrator to deal with those +situations also. +

Roaming Profiles

Warning

+Roaming profiles support is different for Win9x / Me and Windows NT4/200x. +

+Before discussing how to configure roaming profiles, it is useful to see how +Windows 9x / Me and Windows NT4/200x clients implement these features. +

+Windows 9x / Me clients send a NetUserGetInfo request to the server to get the user's +profiles location. However, the response does not have room for a separate +profiles location field, only the user's home share. This means that Win9X/Me +profiles are restricted to being stored in the user's home directory. +

+Windows NT4/200x clients send a NetSAMLogon RPC request, which contains many fields, +including a separate field for the location of the user's profiles. +

Samba Configuration for Profile Handling

+This section documents how to configure Samba for MS Windows client profile support. +

NT4/200x User Profiles

+To support Windows NT4/200x clients, in the [global] section of smb.conf set the +following (for example): +

+

logon path = \\profileserver\profileshare\profilepath\%U\moreprofilepath

+ + This is typically implemented like: + +

logon path = \\%L\Profiles\%u

+where %L translates to the name of the Samba server and %u translates to the user name +

+The default for this option is \\%N\%U\profile, +namely \\sambaserver\username\profile. +The \\N%\%U service is created automatically by the [homes] service. If you are using +a samba server for the profiles, you _must_ make the share specified in the logon path +browseable. Please refer to the man page for smb.conf in respect of the different +semantics of %L and %N, as well as %U and %u. +

Note

+MS Windows NT/2K clients at times do not disconnect a connection to a server +between logons. It is recommended to NOT use the homes +meta-service name as part of the profile share path. +

Windows 9x / Me User Profiles

+ To support Windows 9x / Me clients, you must use the logon home parameter. Samba has +now been fixed so that net use /home now works as well, and it, too, relies +on the logon home parameter. +

+By using the logon home parameter, you are restricted to putting Win9x / Me +profiles in the user's home directory. But wait! There is a trick you +can use. If you set the following in the [global] section of your smb.conf file: +

logon home = \\%L\%U\.profiles

+then your Windows 9x / Me clients will dutifully put their clients in a subdirectory +of your home directory called .profiles (thus making them hidden). +

+Not only that, but net use /home will also work, because of a feature in +Windows 9x / Me. It removes any directory stuff off the end of the home directory area +and only uses the server and share portion. That is, it looks like you +specified \\%L\%U for logon home. +

Mixed Windows 9x / Me and Windows NT4/200x User Profiles

+You can support profiles for both Win9X and WinNT clients by setting both the +logon home and logon path parameters. For example: +

logon home = \\%L\%u\.profiles
logon path = \\%L\profiles\%u

Disabling Roaming Profile Support

+ A question often asked is “How may I enforce use of local profiles?” or + “How do I disable Roaming Profiles?” +

+There are three ways of doing this: +

In smb.conf

+ Affect the following settings and ALL clients + will be forced to use a local profile: +

logon home
logon path

+

MS Windows Registry:

+ By using the Microsoft Management Console gpedit.msc to instruct your MS Windows XP machine to use only a local profile. This of course modifies registry settings. The full path to the option is: + + + 

+	Local Computer Policy\
+		Computer Configuration\
+			Administrative Templates\
+				System\
+					User Profiles\
+
+	Disable:	Only Allow Local User Profiles
+	Disable:	Prevent Roaming Profile Change from Propagating to the Server
+

+

Change of Profile Type:

+ From the start menu right click on the + My Computer icon, select Properties, click on the User Profiles + tab, select the profile you wish to change from Roaming type to Local, click Change Type. +

+Consult the MS Windows registry guide for your particular MS Windows version for more +information about which registry keys to change to enforce use of only local user +profiles. +

Note

+The specifics of how to convert a local profile to a roaming profile, or a roaming profile +to a local one vary according to the version of MS Windows you are running. Consult the +Microsoft MS Windows Resource Kit for your version of Windows for specific information. +

Windows Client Profile Configuration Information

Windows 9x / Me Profile Setup

+When a user first logs in on Windows 9X, the file user.DAT is created, +as are folders Start Menu, Desktop, +Programs and Nethood. +These directories and their contents will be merged with the local +versions stored in c:\windows\profiles\username on subsequent logins, +taking the most recent from each. You will need to use the [global] +options preserve case = yes, short preserve case = yes and +case sensitive = no in order to maintain capital letters in shortcuts +in any of the profile folders. +

+The user.DAT file contains all the user's preferences. If you wish to +enforce a set of preferences, rename their user.DAT file to user.MAN, +and deny them write access to this file. +

  1. + On the Windows 9x / Me machine, go to Control Panel -> Passwords and + select the User Profiles tab. Select the required level of + roaming preferences. Press OK, but do _not_ allow the computer + to reboot. +

  2. + On the Windows 9x / Me machine, go to Control Panel -> Network -> + Client for Microsoft Networks -> Preferences. Select Log on to + NT Domain. Then, ensure that the Primary Logon is Client for + Microsoft Networks. Press OK, and this time allow the computer + to reboot. +

+Under Windows 9x / Me Profiles are downloaded from the Primary Logon. +If you have the Primary Logon as 'Client for Novell Networks', then +the profiles and logon script will be downloaded from your Novell +Server. If you have the Primary Logon as 'Windows Logon', then the +profiles will be loaded from the local machine - a bit against the +concept of roaming profiles, it would seem! +

+You will now find that the Microsoft Networks Login box contains +[user, password, domain] instead of just [user, password]. Type in +the samba server's domain name (or any other domain known to exist, +but bear in mind that the user will be authenticated against this +domain and profiles downloaded from it, if that domain logon server +supports it), user name and user's password. +

+Once the user has been successfully validated, the Windows 9x / Me machine +will inform you that The user has not logged on before and asks you +Do you wish to save the user's preferences?. Select yes. +

+Once the Windows 9x / Me client comes up with the desktop, you should be able +to examine the contents of the directory specified in the logon path +on the samba server and verify that the Desktop, Start Menu, +Programs and Nethood folders have been created. +

+These folders will be cached locally on the client, and updated when +the user logs off (if you haven't made them read-only by then). +You will find that if the user creates further folders or short-cuts, +that the client will merge the profile contents downloaded with the +contents of the profile directory already on the local client, taking +the newest folders and short-cuts from each set. +

+If you have made the folders / files read-only on the samba server, +then you will get errors from the Windows 9x / Me machine on logon and logout, as +it attempts to merge the local and the remote profile. Basically, if +you have any errors reported by the Windows 9x / Me machine, check the UNIX file +permissions and ownership rights on the profile directory contents, +on the samba server. +

+If you have problems creating user profiles, you can reset the user's +local desktop cache, as shown below. When this user then next logs in, +they will be told that they are logging in "for the first time". +

Warning

+ Before deleting the contents of the + directory listed in the ProfilePath (this is likely to be + c:\windows\profiles\username), ask them if they + have any important files stored on their desktop or in their start menu. + Delete the contents of the directory ProfilePath (making a backup if any + of the files are needed). +

+ This will have the effect of removing the local (read-only hidden + system file) user.DAT in their profile directory, as well as the + local "desktop", "nethood", "start menu" and "programs" folders. +

  1. + instead of logging in under the [user, password, domain] dialog, + press escape. +

  2. + run the regedit.exe program, and look in: +

    + HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Windows\CurrentVersion\ProfileList +

    + you will find an entry, for each user, of ProfilePath. Note the + contents of this key (likely to be c:\windows\profiles\username), + then delete the key ProfilePath for the required user. +

    [Exit the registry editor].

  3. + search for the user's .PWL password-caching file in the c:\windows + directory, and delete it. +

  4. + log off the windows 9x / Me client. +

  5. + check the contents of the profile path (see logon path described + above), and delete the user.DAT or user.MAN file for the user, + making a backup if required. +

+If all else fails, increase samba's debug log levels to between 3 and 10, +and / or run a packet trace program such as ethereal or netmon.exe, and +look for error messages. +

+If you have access to an Windows NT4/200x server, then first set up roaming profiles +and / or netlogons on the Windows NT4/200x server. Make a packet trace, or examine +the example packet traces provided with Windows NT4/200x server, and see what the +differences are with the equivalent samba trace. +

Windows NT4 Workstation

+When a user first logs in to a Windows NT Workstation, the profile +NTuser.DAT is created. The profile location can be now specified +through the logon path parameter. +

+There is a parameter that is now available for use with NT Profiles: +logon drive. This should be set to H: or any other drive, and +should be used in conjunction with the new logon home parameter. +

+The entry for the NT4 profile is a _directory_ not a file. The NT +help on profiles mentions that a directory is also created with a .PDS +extension. The user, while logging in, must have write permission to +create the full profile path (and the folder with the .PDS extension +for those situations where it might be created.) +

+In the profile directory, Windows NT4 creates more folders than Windows 9x / Me. +It creates Application Data and others, as well as Desktop, Nethood, +Start Menu and Programs. The profile itself is stored in a file +NTuser.DAT. Nothing appears to be stored in the .PDS directory, and +its purpose is currently unknown. +

+You can use the System Control Panel to copy a local profile onto +a samba server (see NT Help on profiles: it is also capable of firing +up the correct location in the System Control Panel for you). The +NT Help file also mentions that renaming NTuser.DAT to NTuser.MAN +turns a profile into a mandatory one. +

+The case of the profile is significant. The file must be called +NTuser.DAT or, for a mandatory profile, NTuser.MAN. +

Windows 2000/XP Professional

+You must first convert the profile from a local profile to a domain +profile on the MS Windows workstation as follows: +

  1. + Log on as the LOCAL workstation administrator. +

  2. + Right click on the My Computer Icon, select Properties +

  3. + Click on the User Profiles tab +

  4. + Select the profile you wish to convert (click on it once) +

  5. + Click on the button Copy To +

  6. + In the Permitted to use box, click on the Change button. +

  7. + Click on the 'Look in" area that lists the machine name, when you click + here it will open up a selection box. Click on the domain to which the + profile must be accessible. +

    Note

    You will need to log on if a logon box opens up. Eg: In the connect as: DOMAIN\root, password: mypassword.

  8. + To make the profile capable of being used by anyone select 'Everyone' +

  9. + Click OK. The Selection box will close. +

  10. + Now click on the Ok button to create the profile in the path you + nominated. +

+Done. You now have a profile that can be edited using the samba +profiles tool. +

Note

+Under NT/2K the use of mandatory profiles forces the use of MS Exchange +storage of mail data. That keeps desktop profiles usable. +

Procedure 24.2. Windows XP Service Pack 1

  1. +This is a security check new to Windows XP (or maybe only +Windows XP service pack 1). It can be disabled via a group policy in +Active Directory. The policy is:

    Computer Configuration\Administrative Templates\System\User +Profiles\Do not check for user ownership of Roaming Profile Folders

    ...and it should be set to Enabled. +Does the new version of samba have an Active Directory analogue? If so, +then you may be able to set the policy through this. +

    +If you cannot set group policies in samba, then you may be able to set +the policy locally on each machine. If you want to try this, then do +the following (N.B. I don't know for sure that this will work in the +same way as a domain group policy): +

  2. +On the XP workstation log in with an Administrator account. +

  3. Click: Start, Run

  4. Type: mmc

  5. Click: OK

  6. A Microsoft Management Console should appear.

  7. Click: File, Add/Remove Snap-in..., Add

  8. Double-Click: Group Policy

  9. Click: Finish, Close

  10. Click: OK

  11. In the "Console Root" window:

  12. Expand: Local Computer Policy, Computer Configuration, + Administrative Templates, System, User Profiles

  13. Double-Click: Do not check for user ownership of Roaming Profile Folders

  14. Select: Enabled

  15. Click: OK

  16. Close the whole console. You do not need to save the settings (this + refers to the console settings rather than the policies you have + changed).

  17. Reboot

Sharing Profiles between W9x/Me and NT4/200x/XP workstations

+Sharing of desktop profiles between Windows versions is NOT recommended. +Desktop profiles are an evolving phenomenon and profiles for later versions +of MS Windows clients add features that may interfere with earlier versions +of MS Windows clients. Probably the more salient reason to NOT mix profiles +is that when logging off an earlier version of MS Windows the older format +of profile contents may overwrite information that belongs to the newer +version resulting in loss of profile information content when that user logs +on again with the newer version of MS Windows. +

+If you then want to share the same Start Menu / Desktop with W9x/Me, you will +need to specify a common location for the profiles. The smb.conf parameters +that need to be common are logon path and +logon home. +

+If you have this set up correctly, you will find separate user.DAT and +NTuser.DAT files in the same profile directory. +

Profile Migration from Windows NT4/200x Server to Samba

+There is nothing to stop you specifying any path that you like for the +location of users' profiles. Therefore, you could specify that the +profile be stored on a samba server, or any other SMB server, as long as +that SMB server supports encrypted passwords. +

Windows NT4 Profile Management Tools

+Unfortunately, the Resource Kit information is specific to the version of MS Windows +NT4/200x. The correct resource kit is required for each platform. +

+Here is a quick guide: +

  1. +On your NT4 Domain Controller, right click on My Computer, then +select the tab labelled User Profiles. +

  2. +Select a user profile you want to migrate and click on it. +

    Note

    I am using the term "migrate" loosely. You can copy a profile to +create a group profile. You can give the user 'Everyone' rights to the +profile you copy this to. That is what you need to do, since your samba +domain is not a member of a trust relationship with your NT4 PDC.

  3. Click the Copy To button.

  4. In the box labelled Copy Profile to add your new path, eg: + c:\temp\foobar

  5. Click on the button Change in the Permitted to use box.

  6. Click on the group 'Everyone' and then click OK. This closes the + 'choose user' box.

  7. Now click OK.

+Follow the above for every profile you need to migrate. +

Side bar Notes

+You should obtain the SID of your NT4 domain. You can use smbpasswd to do +this. Read the man page.

moveuser.exe

+The W2K professional resource kit has moveuser.exe. moveuser.exe changes +the security of a profile from one user to another. This allows the account +domain to change, and/or the user name to change. +

Get SID

+You can identify the SID by using GetSID.exe from the Windows NT Server 4.0 +Resource Kit. +

+Windows NT 4.0 stores the local profile information in the registry under +the following key: +HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\ProfileList +

+Under the ProfileList key, there will be subkeys named with the SIDs of the +users who have logged on to this computer. (To find the profile information +for the user whose locally cached profile you want to move, find the SID for +the user with the GetSID.exe utility.) Inside of the appropriate user's +subkey, you will see a string value named ProfileImagePath. +

Mandatory profiles

+A Mandatory Profile is a profile that the user does NOT have the ability to overwrite. +During the user's session it may be possible to change the desktop environment, but +as the user logs out all changes made will be lost. If it is desired to NOT allow the +user any ability to change the desktop environment then this must be done through +policy settings. See previous chapter. +

Note

+Under NO circumstances should the profile directory (or it's contents) be made read-only +as this may render the profile un-usable. +

+For MS Windows NT4/200x/XP the above method can be used to create mandatory profiles +also. To convert a group profile into a mandatory profile simply locate the NTUser.DAT +file in the copied profile and rename it to NTUser.MAN. +

+For MS Windows 9x / Me it is the User.DAT file that must be renamed to User.MAN to +affect a mandatory profile. +

Creating/Managing Group Profiles

+Most organisations are arranged into departments. There is a nice benefit in +this fact since usually most users in a department will require the same desktop +applications and the same desktop layout. MS Windows NT4/200x/XP will allow the +use of Group Profiles. A Group Profile is a profile that is created firstly using +a template (example) user. Then using the profile migration tool (see above) the +profile is assigned access rights for the user group that needs to be given access +to the group profile. +

+The next step is rather important. Please note: Instead of assigning a group profile +to users (ie: Using User Manager) on a "per user" basis, the group itself is assigned +the now modified profile. +

Note

+ Be careful with group profiles, if the user who is a member of a group also + has a personal profile, then the result will be a fusion (merge) of the two. +

Default Profile for Windows Users

+MS Windows 9x / Me and NT4/200x/XP will use a default profile for any user for whom +a profile does not already exist. Armed with a knowledge of where the default profile +is located on the Windows workstation, and knowing which registry keys affect the path +from which the default profile is created, it is possible to modify the default profile +to one that has been optimised for the site. This has significant administrative +advantages. +

MS Windows 9x/Me

+To enable default per use profiles in Windows 9x / Me you can either use the Windows 98 System +Policy Editor or change the registry directly. +

+To enable default per user profiles in Windows 9x / Me, launch the System Policy Editor, then +select File -> Open Registry, then click on the +Local Computer icon, click on Windows 98 System, +select User Profiles, click on the enable box. Do not forget to save the registry changes. +

+To modify the registry directly, launch the Registry Editor (regedit.exe), select the hive +HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Network\Logon. Now add a DWORD type key with the name +"User Profiles", to enable user profiles set the value to 1, to disable user profiles set it to 0. +

How User Profiles Are Handled in Windows 9x / Me?

+When a user logs on to a Windows 9x / Me machine, the local profile path, +HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\ProfileList, is checked +for an existing entry for that user: +

+If the user has an entry in this registry location, Windows 9x / Me checks for a locally cached +version of the user profile. Windows 9x / Me also checks the user's home directory (or other +specified directory if the location has been modified) on the server for the User Profile. +If a profile exists in both locations, the newer of the two is used. If the User Profile exists +on the server, but does not exist on the local machine, the profile on the server is downloaded +and used. If the User Profile only exists on the local machine, that copy is used. +

+If a User Profile is not found in either location, the Default User Profile from the Windows 9x / Me +machine is used and is copied to a newly created folder for the logged on user. At log off, any +changes that the user made are written to the user's local profile. If the user has a roaming +profile, the changes are written to the user's profile on the server. +

MS Windows NT4 Workstation

+On MS Windows NT4 the default user profile is obtained from the location +%SystemRoot%\Profiles which in a default installation will translate to +C:\WinNT\Profiles. Under this directory on a clean install there will be +three (3) directories: Administrator, All Users, Default User. +

+The All Users directory contains menu settings that are common across all +system users. The Default User directory contains menu entries that are +customisable per user depending on the profile settings chosen/created. +

+When a new user first logs onto an MS Windows NT4 machine a new profile is created from: +

  • All Users settings

  • Default User settings (contains the default NTUser.DAT file)

+When a user logs onto an MS Windows NT4 machine that is a member of a Microsoft security domain +the following steps are followed in respect of profile handling: +

  1. + The users' account information which is obtained during the logon process contains + the location of the users' desktop profile. The profile path may be local to the + machine or it may be located on a network share. If there exists a profile at the location + of the path from the user account, then this profile is copied to the location + %SystemRoot%\Profiles\%USERNAME%. This profile then inherits the + settings in the All Users profile in the %SystemRoot%\Profiles + location. +

  2. + If the user account has a profile path, but at it's location a profile does not exist, + then a new profile is created in the %SystemRoot%\Profiles\%USERNAME% + directory from reading the Default User profile. +

  3. + If the NETLOGON share on the authenticating server (logon server) contains a policy file + (NTConfig.POL) then it's contents are applied to the NTUser.DAT + which is applied to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER part of the registry. +

  4. + When the user logs out, if the profile is set to be a roaming profile it will be written + out to the location of the profile. The NTuser.DAT file is then + re-created from the contents of the HKEY_CURRENT_USER contents. + Thus, should there not exist in the NETLOGON share an NTConfig.POL at the + next logon, the effect of the previous NTConfig.POL will still be held + in the profile. The effect of this is known as tatooing. +

+MS Windows NT4 profiles may be Local or Roaming. A Local profile +will stored in the %SystemRoot%\Profiles\%USERNAME% location. A roaming profile will +also remain stored in the same way, unless the following registry key is created: +

+

+HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\Software\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\
+winlogon\"DeleteRoamingCache"=dword:00000001
+

+ +In which case, the local copy (in %SystemRoot%\Profiles\%USERNAME%) will be +deleted on logout. +

+Under MS Windows NT4 default locations for common resources (like My Documents +may be redirected to a network share by modifying the following registry keys. These changes may be affected +via use of the System Policy Editor (to do so may require that you create your owns template extension +for the policy editor to allow this to be done through the GUI. Another way to do this is by way of first +creating a default user profile, then while logged in as that user, run regedt32 to edit the key settings. +

+The Registry Hive key that affects the behaviour of folders that are part of the default user profile +are controlled by entries on Windows NT4 is: +

+HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\User Shell Folders\ +

+The above hive key contains a list of automatically managed folders. The default entries are: +

+

Table 24.1. User Shell Folder registry keys default values

NameDefault Value
AppData%USERPROFILE%\Application Data
Desktop%USERPROFILE%\Desktop
Favorites%USERPROFILE%\Favorites
NetHood%USERPROFILE%\NetHood
PrintHood%USERPROFILE%\PrintHood
Programs%USERPROFILE%\Start Menu\Programs
Recent%USERPROFILE%\Recent
SendTo%USERPROFILE%\SendTo
Start Menu %USERPROFILE%\Start Menu
Startup%USERPROFILE%\Start Menu\Programs\Startup

+

+The registry key that contains the location of the default profile settings is: +

+HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\User Shell Folders +

+The default entries are: + +

Table 24.2. Defaults of profile settings registry keys

Common Desktop%SystemRoot%\Profiles\All Users\Desktop
Common Programs%SystemRoot%\Profiles\All Users\Programs
Common Start Menu%SystemRoot%\Profiles\All Users\Start Menu
Common Startup%SystemRoot%\Profiles\All Users\Start Menu\Programs\Startup

+

MS Windows 200x/XP

Note

+ MS Windows XP Home Edition does use default per user profiles, but can not participate + in domain security, can not log onto an NT/ADS style domain, and thus can obtain the profile + only from itself. While there are benefits in doing this the beauty of those MS Windows + clients that CAN participate in domain logon processes allows the administrator to create + a global default profile and to enforce it through the use of Group Policy Objects (GPOs). +

+When a new user first logs onto MS Windows 200x/XP machine the default profile is obtained from +C:\Documents and Settings\Default User. The administrator can modify (or change +the contents of this location and MS Windows 200x/XP will gladly use it. This is far from the optimum +arrangement since it will involve copying a new default profile to every MS Windows 200x/XP client +workstation. +

+When MS Windows 200x/XP participate in a domain security context, and if the default user +profile is not found, then the client will search for a default profile in the NETLOGON share +of the authenticating server. ie: In MS Windows parlance: +%LOGONSERVER%\NETLOGON\Default User and if one exits there it will copy this +to the workstation to the C:\Documents and Settings\ under the Windows +login name of the user. +

Note

+ This path translates, in Samba parlance, to the smb.conf [NETLOGON] share. The directory + should be created at the root of this share and must be called Default Profile. +

+If a default profile does not exist in this location then MS Windows 200x/XP will use the local +default profile. +

+On logging out, the users' desktop profile will be stored to the location specified in the registry +settings that pertain to the user. If no specific policies have been created, or passed to the client +during the login process (as Samba does automatically), then the user's profile will be written to +the local machine only under the path C:\Documents and Settings\%USERNAME%. +

+Those wishing to modify the default behaviour can do so through three methods: +

  • + Modify the registry keys on the local machine manually and place the new default profile in the + NETLOGON share root - NOT recommended as it is maintenance intensive. +

  • + Create an NT4 style NTConfig.POL file that specified this behaviour and locate this file + in the root of the NETLOGON share along with the new default profile. +

  • + Create a GPO that enforces this through Active Directory, and place the new default profile + in the NETLOGON share. +

+The Registry Hive key that affects the behaviour of folders that are part of the default user profile +are controlled by entries on Windows 200x/XP is: +

+HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\User Shell Folders\ +

+The above hive key contains a list of automatically managed folders. The default entries are: +

+

Table 24.3. Defaults of default user profile paths registry keys

NameDefault Value
AppData%USERPROFILE%\Application Data
Cache%USERPROFILE%\Local Settings\Temporary Internet Files
Cookies%USERPROFILE%\Cookies
Desktop%USERPROFILE%\Desktop
Favorites%USERPROFILE%\Favorites
History%USERPROFILE%\Local Settings\History
Local AppData%USERPROFILE%\Local Settings\Application Data
Local Settings%USERPROFILE%\Local Settings
My Pictures%USERPROFILE%\My Documents\My Pictures
NetHood%USERPROFILE%\NetHood
Personal%USERPROFILE%\My Documents
PrintHood%USERPROFILE%\PrintHood
Programs%USERPROFILE%\Start Menu\Programs
Recent%USERPROFILE%\Recent
SendTo%USERPROFILE%\SendTo
Start Menu%USERPROFILE%\Start Menu
Startup%USERPROFILE%\Start Menu\Programs\Startup
Templates%USERPROFILE%\Templates

+

+There is also an entry called "Default" that has no value set. The default entry is of type REG_SZ, all +the others are of type REG_EXPAND_SZ. +

+It makes a huge difference to the speed of handling roaming user profiles if all the folders are +stored on a dedicated location on a network server. This means that it will NOT be necessary to +write the Outlook PST file over the network for every login and logout. +

+To set this to a network location you could use the following examples: +

%LOGONSERVER%\%USERNAME%\Default Folders

+This would store the folders in the user's home directory under a directory called Default Folders +You could also use: +

\\SambaServer\FolderShare\%USERNAME%

+ in which case the default folders will be stored in the server named SambaServer +in the share called FolderShare under a directory that has the name of the MS Windows +user as seen by the Linux/UNIX file system. +

+Please note that once you have created a default profile share, you MUST migrate a user's profile +(default or custom) to it. +

+MS Windows 200x/XP profiles may be Local or Roaming. +A roaming profile will be cached locally unless the following registry key is created: +

+

+HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\Software\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\
+	winlogon\"DeleteRoamingCache"=dword:00000001

+In which case, the local cache copy will be deleted on logout. +

Common Errors

+The following are some typical errors/problems/questions that have been asked. +

Setting up roaming profiles for just a few user's or group's?

+With samba-2.2.x the choice you have is to enable or disable roaming +profiles support. It is a global only setting. The default is to have +roaming profiles and the default path will locate them in the user's home +directory. +

+If disabled globally then no-one will have roaming profile ability. +If enabled and you want it to apply only to certain machines, then on +those machines on which roaming profile support is NOT wanted it is then +necessary to disable roaming profile handling in the registry of each such +machine. +

+With samba-3 you can have a global profile +setting in smb.conf _AND_ you can over-ride this by per-user settings +using the Domain User Manager (as with MS Windows NT4/ Win 2Kx). +

+In any case, you can configure only one profile per user. That profile can +be either: +

  • A profile unique to that user

  • A mandatory profile (one the user can not change)

  • A group profile (really should be mandatory ie:unchangable)

Can NOT use Roaming Profiles

+A user requested the following: +“ +I do not want Roaming profiles to be implemented. I want to give users a local profile alone. ... +Please help me I am totally lost with this error. For the past two days I tried everything, I googled +around but found no useful pointers. Please help me. +”

+The choices are: +

Local profiles:

+ I know of no registry keys that will allow auto-deletion of LOCAL profiles on log out +

Roaming profiles:

+ As a user logs onto the network a centrally stored profile is copied to the workstation + to form a local profile. This local profile will persist (remain on the workstation disk) + unless a registry key is changed that will cause this profile to be automatically deleted + on logout. +

+The Roaming Profile choices are: +

Personal Roaming profiles

+ These are typically stored in a profile share on a central (or conveniently located + local) server. +

+ Workstations 'cache' (store) a local copy of the profile. This cached copy is used when + the profile can not be downloaded at next logon. +

Group profiles

These are loaded from a central profile server

Mandatory profiles

+ Mandatory profiles can be created for a user as well as for any group that a user + is a member of. Mandatory profiles can NOT be changed by ordinary users. Only the administrator + can change or reconfigure a mandatory profile. +

+A WinNT4/2K/XP profile can vary in size from 130KB to off the scale. +Outlook PST files are most often part of the profile and can be many GB in +size. On average (in a well controlled environment) roaming profile size of +2MB is a good rule of thumb to use for planning purposes. In an +undisciplined environment I have seen up to 2GB profiles. Users tend to +complain when it take an hour to log onto a workstation but they harvest +the fruits of folly (and ignorance). +

+The point of all the above is to show that roaming profiles and good +controls of how they can be changed as well as good discipline make up for +a problem free site. +

+Microsoft's answer to the PST problem is to store all email in an MS +Exchange Server back-end. This removes the need for a PST file. +

+LOCAL profiles mean: +

  • If each machine is used my many users then much local disk storage is needed for local profiles

  • Every workstation the user logs into has it's own profile, these can be very different from machine to machine

+On the other hand, use of roaming profiles means: +

  • The network administrator can control the desktop environment of all users.

  • Use of mandatory profiles drasitcally reduces network management overheads.

  • In the long run users will be experience fewer problems.

Changing the default profile

+Question: +“ +When the client logs onto the domain controller it searches for a profile to download, +where do I put this default profile? +”

+Firstly, the samba server needs to be configured as a domain controller. +This can be done by setting in smb.conf: +

security = user
os level = 32 (or more)
domain logons = Yes

+There must be an [netlogon] share that is world readable. +It is a good idea to add a logon script to pre-set printer and +drive connections. There is also a facility for automatically +synchronizing the workstation time clock with that of the logon +server (another good thing to do). +

Note

+To invoke auto-deletion of roaming profile from the local +workstation cache (disk storage) use the Group Policy Editor +to create a file called NTConfig.POL with the appropriate entries. This +file needs to be located in the netlogon share root directory.

+Windows clients need to be members of the domain. Workgroup machines do NOT use network logons so +they do not interoperate with domain profiles. +

+For roaming profiles add to smb.conf: +

+

logon path = \\%N\profiles\%U
# Default logon drive is Z:
logon drive = H:
# This requires a PROFILES share that is world writable.

+

Prev Up Next
Chapter 23. System and Account Policies Home Chapter 25. PAM based Distributed Authentication
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/SWAT.html b/docs/htmldocs/SWAT.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..30df1ed778 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/SWAT.html @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ +Chapter 32. SWAT - The Samba Web Administration Tool
Chapter 32. SWAT - The Samba Web Administration Tool
Prev Part IV. Migration and Updating Next

Chapter 32. SWAT - The Samba Web Administration Tool

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

April 21, 2003

Table of Contents

Features and Benefits
Enabling SWAT for use
Securing SWAT through SSL
The SWAT Home Page
Global Settings
Share Settings
Printers Settings
The SWAT Wizard
The Status Page
The View Page
The Password Change Page

+There are many and varied opinions regarding the usefulness or otherwise of SWAT. +No matter how hard one tries to produce the perfect configuration tool it remains +an object of personal taste. SWAT is a tool that will allow web based configuration +of samba. It has a wizard that may help to get samba configured quickly, it has context +sensitive help on each smb.conf parameter, it provides for monitoring of current state +of connection information, and it allows network wide MS Windows network password +management. +

Features and Benefits

+There are network administrators who believe that it is a good idea to write systems +documentation inside configuration files, for them SWAT will aways be a nasty tool. SWAT +does not store the configuration file in any intermediate form, rather, it stores only the +parameter settings, so when SWAT writes the smb.conf file to disk it will write only +those parameters that are at other than the default settings. The result is that all comments +will be lost from the smb.conf file. Additionally, the parameters will be written back in +internal ordering. +

Note

+So before using SWAT please be warned - SWAT will completely replace your smb.conf with +a fully optimised file that has been stripped of all comments you might have placed there +and only non-default settings will be written to the file. +

Enabling SWAT for use

+SWAT should be installed to run via the network super daemon. Depending on which system +your UNIX/Linux system has you will have either an inetd or +xinetd based system. +

+The nature and location of the network super-daemon varies with the operating system +implementation. The control file (or files) can be located in the file +/etc/inetd.conf or in the directory /etc/[x]inet.d +or similar. +

+The control entry for the older style file might be: +

+	# swat is the Samba Web Administration Tool
+	swat stream tcp nowait.400 root /usr/sbin/swat swat
+

+A control file for the newer style xinetd could be: +

+

+	# default: off
+	# description: SWAT is the Samba Web Admin Tool. Use swat \
+	#              to configure your Samba server. To use SWAT, \
+	#              connect to port 901 with your favorite web browser.
+	service swat
+	{
+		port    = 901
+		socket_type     = stream
+		wait    = no
+		only_from = localhost
+		user    = root
+		server  = /usr/sbin/swat
+		log_on_failure  += USERID
+		disable = yes
+	}
+

+ +

+Both the above examples assume that the swat binary has been +located in the /usr/sbin directory. In addition to the above +SWAT will use a directory access point from which it will load it's help files +as well as other control information. The default location for this on most Linux +systems is in the directory /usr/share/samba/swat. The default +location using samba defaults will be /usr/local/samba/swat. +

+Access to SWAT will prompt for a logon. If you log onto SWAT as any non-root user +the only permission allowed is to view certain aspects of configuration as well as +access to the password change facility. The buttons that will be exposed to the non-root +user are: HOME, STATUS, VIEW, +PASSWORD. The only page that allows +change capability in this case is PASSWORD. +

+So long as you log onto SWAT as the user root you should obtain +full change and commit ability. The buttons that will be exposed includes: +HOME, GLOBALS, SHARES, PRINTERS, +WIZARD, STATUS, VIEW, PASSWORD. +

Securing SWAT through SSL

+Lots of people have asked about how to setup SWAT with SSL to allow for secure remote +administration of Samba. Here is a method that works, courtesy of Markus Krieger +

+Modifications to the swat setup are as following: +

  1. + install OpenSSL +

  2. + generate certificate and private key + +

    +root# /usr/bin/openssl req -new -x509 -days 365 -nodes -config \
+	/usr/share/doc/packages/stunnel/stunnel.cnf \
+	-out /etc/stunnel/stunnel.pem -keyout /etc/stunnel/stunnel.pem
+

  3. + remove swat-entry from [x]inetd +

  4. + start stunnel + +

    +root# stunnel -p /etc/stunnel/stunnel.pem -d 901 \
+	 -l /usr/local/samba/bin/swat swat 
+

+afterwords simply contact to swat by using the URL https://myhost:901, accept the certificate +and the SSL connection is up. +

The SWAT Home Page

+The SWAT title page provides access to the latest Samba documentation. The manual page for +each samba component is accessible from this page as are the Samba-HOWTO-Collection (this +document) as well as the O'Reilly book "Using Samba". +

+Administrators who wish to validate their samba configuration may obtain useful information +from the man pages for the diagnostic utilities. These are available from the SWAT home page +also. One diagnostic tool that is NOT mentioned on this page, but that is particularly +useful is ethereal. +

Warning

+SWAT can be configured to run in demo mode. This is NOT recommended +as it runs SWAT without authentication and with full administrative ability. ie: Allows +changes to smb.conf as well as general operation with root privileges. The option that +creates this ability is the -a flag to swat. Do not use this in any +production environment. +

Global Settings

+The Globals button will expose a page that allows configuration of the global parameters +in smb.conf. There are three levels of exposure of the parameters: +

  • + Basic - exposes common configuration options. +

  • + Advanced - exposes configuration options needed in more + complex environments. +

  • + Developer - exposes configuration options that only the brave + will want to tamper with. +

+To switch to other than Basic editing ability click on either the +Advanced or the Developer button. You may also +do this by clicking on the radio button, then click the Commit Changes button. +

+After making any changes to configuration parameters make sure that you click on the +Commit Changes button before moving to another area otherwise +your changes will be immediately lost. +

Note

+SWAT has context sensitive help. To find out what each parameter is for simply click the +Help link to the left of the configuration parameter. +

Share Settings

+To affect a currently configured share, simply click on the pull down button between the +Choose Share and the Delete Share buttons, +select the share you wish to operate on, then to edit the settings click on the +Choose Share button, to delete the share simply press the +Delete Share button. +

+To create a new share, next to the button labelled Create Share enter +into the text field the name of the share to be created, then click on the +Create Share button. +

Printers Settings

+To affect a currently configured printer, simply click on the pull down button between the +Choose Printer and the Delete Printer buttons, +select the printer you wish to operate on, then to edit the settings click on the +Choose Printer button, to delete the share simply press the +Delete Printer button. +

+To create a new printer, next to the button labelled Create Printer enter +into the text field the name of the share to be created, then click on the +Create Printer button. +

The SWAT Wizard

+The purpose if the SWAT Wizard is to help the Microsoft knowledgeable network administrator +to configure Samba with a minimum of effort. +

+The Wizard page provides a tool for rewriting the smb.conf file in fully optimised format. +This will also happen if you press the commit button. The two differ in the the rewrite button +ignores any changes that may have been made, while the Commit button causes all changes to be +affected. +

+The Edit button permits the editing (setting) of the minimal set of +options that may be necessary to create a working Samba server. +

+Finally, there are a limited set of options that will determine what type of server Samba +will be configured for, whether it will be a WINS server, participate as a WINS client, or +operate with no WINS support. By clicking on one button you can elect to expose (or not) user +home directories. +

The Status Page

+The status page serves a limited purpose. Firstly, it allows control of the samba daemons. +The key daemons that create the samba server environment are: smbd, nmbd, winbindd. +

+The daemons may be controlled individually or as a total group. Additionally, you may set +an automatic screen refresh timing. As MS Windows clients interact with Samba new smbd processes +will be continually spawned. The auto-refresh facility will allow you to track the changing +conditions with minimal effort. +

+Lastly, the Status page may be used to terminate specific smbd client connections in order to +free files that may be locked. +

The View Page

+This page allows the administrator to view the optimised smb.conf file and, if you are +particularly masochistic, will permit you also to see all possible global configuration +parameters and their settings. +

The Password Change Page

+The Password Change page is a popular tool. This tool allows the creation, deletion, deactivation +and reactivation of MS Windows networking users on the local machine. Alternatively, you can use +this tool to change a local password for a user account. +

+When logged in as a non-root account the user will have to provide the old password as well as +the new password (twice). When logged in as root only the new password is +required. +

+One popular use for this tool is to change user passwords across a range of remote MS Windows +servers. +

Prev Up Next
Chapter 31. Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC Home Part V. Troubleshooting
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/SambaHA.html b/docs/htmldocs/SambaHA.html deleted file mode 100644 index d8614deeb7..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/SambaHA.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 29. High Availability Options
Chapter 29. High Availability Options
Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

Chapter 29. High Availability Options

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

Table of Contents

Note

Note

-This chapter did not make it into this release. -It is planned for the published release of this document. -

Prev Up Next
Chapter 28. Samba Backup Techniques Home Part IV. Migration and Updating
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/ServerType.html b/docs/htmldocs/ServerType.html index e624c5ee27..7b5b7117a6 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/ServerType.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/ServerType.html @@ -1,5 +1,4 @@ - -Chapter 4. Server Types and Security Modes
Chapter 4. Server Types and Security Modes
Prev Part II. Server Configuration Basics Next

Chapter 4. Server Types and Security Modes

Andrew Tridgell

Samba Team

Jelmer R. Vernooij

The Samba Team

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

Table of Contents

Features and Benefits
Server Types
Samba Security Modes
User Level Security
Share Level Security
Domain Security Mode (User Level Security)
ADS Security Mode (User Level Security)
Server Security (User Level Security)
Seamless Windows Network Integration
Common Errors
What makes Samba a SERVER?
What makes Samba a Domain Controller?
What makes Samba a Domain Member?
Constantly Losing Connections to Password Server

+Chapter 4. Server Types and Security Modes

Chapter 4. Server Types and Security Modes
Prev Part II. Server Configuration Basics Next

Chapter 4. Server Types and Security Modes

Andrew Tridgell

Samba Team

Jelmer R. Vernooij

The Samba Team

John H. Terpstra

Samba Team

Table of Contents

Features and Benefits
Server Types
Samba Security Modes
User Level Security
Share Level Security
Domain Security Mode (User Level Security)
ADS Security Mode (User Level Security)
Server Security (User Level Security)
Password checking
Common Errors
What makes Samba a SERVER?
What makes Samba a Domain Controller?
What makes Samba a Domain Member?
Constantly Losing Connections to Password Server

This chapter provides information regarding the types of server that Samba may be configured to be. A Microsoft network administrator who wishes to migrate to or to use Samba will want to know what, within a Samba context, terms familiar to MS Windows @@ -9,10 +8,11 @@ modes function BEFORE we get into the details of how to configure the server its The chapter provides an overview of the security modes of which Samba is capable and how these relate to MS Windows servers and clients.

-Firstly we should recognise the question so often asked, "Why would I want to use Samba?" -So, in those chapters where the answer may be important you will see a section that highlights -features and benefits. These may be for or against Samba. -

Features and Benefits

+A question often asked is, "Why would I want to use Samba?" Most chapters contain a section +that highlights features and benefits. We hope that the information provided will help to +answer this question. Be warned though, we want to be fair and reasonable, so not all +features are positive towards Samba so the benefit may be on the side of our competition. +

Features and Benefits

Two men were walking down a dusty road, when one suddenly kicked up a small red stone. It hurt his toe and lodged in his sandal. He took the stone out and cursed it with a passion and fury fitting his anguish. The other looked at the stone and said, that is a garnet - I @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ pleasure, but if you are forced upon it and have no time for its secrets then it a source of discomfort.

Samba started out as a project that sought to provide interoperability for MS Windows 3.x -clients with a Unix server. It has grown up a lot since its humble beginnings and now provides +clients with a UNIX server. It has grown up a lot since its humble beginnings and now provides features and functionality fit for large scale deployment. It also has some warts. In sections like this one we will tell of both.

@@ -48,14 +48,14 @@ So now, what are the benefits of features mentioned in this chapter? greater flexibility than MS Windows NT4 and in many cases a significantly higher utility than Active Directory domains with MS Windows 200x. -

Server Types

Administrators of Microsoft networks often refer to three -different type of servers:

  • Domain Controller

    Primary Domain Controller
    Backup Domain Controller
    ADS Domain Controller

  • Domain Member Server

    Active Directory Member Server
    NT4 Style Domain Member Server

  • Stand Alone Server

+

Server Types

Administrators of Microsoft networks often refer to three +different type of servers:

  • Domain Controller

    • Primary Domain Controller

    • Backup Domain Controller

    • ADS Domain Controller

  • Domain Member Server

    • Active Directory Domain Server

    • NT4 Style Domain Domain Server

  • Stand Alone Server

The chapters covering Domain Control, Backup Domain Control and Domain Membership provide -pertinent information regarding Samba-3 configuration for each of these server roles. +pertinent information regarding Samba configuration for each of these server roles. The reader is strongly encouraged to become intimately familiar with the information presented. -

Samba Security Modes

-In this section the function and purpose of Samba's security +

Samba Security Modes

+In this section the function and purpose of Samba's security modes are described. An accurate understanding of how Samba implements each security mode as well as how to configure MS Windows clients for each mode will significantly reduce user complaints and administrator heartache. @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ ways that allow the security levels to be implemented. In actual fact, Samba imp ADS, and SERVER modes. They are documented in this chapter.

-A SMB server tells the client at startup what security level + A SMB server tells the client at startup what security level it is running. There are two options: share level and user level. Which of these two the client receives affects the way the client then tries to authenticate itself. It does not directly affect @@ -78,8 +78,8 @@ the way the client then tries to authenticate itself. It does not directly affec but it fits in with the client/server approach of SMB. In SMB everything is initiated and controlled by the client, and the server can only tell the client what is available and whether an action is allowed. -

User Level Security

-We will describe user level security first, as it's simpler. +

User Level Security

+We will describe user level security first, as it's simpler. In user level security, the client will send a session setup command directly after the protocol negotiation. This contains a username and password. The server can either accept or reject that @@ -96,13 +96,11 @@ It is also possible for a client to send multiple ses requests. When the server responds, it gives the client a uid to use as an authentication tag for that username/password. The client can maintain multiple authentication contexts in this way (WinDD is an example of an application that does this). -

Example Configuration

+

Example Configuration

The smb.conf parameter that sets User Level Security is: -

-	security = user
-

+

security = user

This is the default setting since samba-2.2.x. -

Share Level Security

+

Share Level Security

Ok, now for share level security. In share level security, the client authenticates itself separately for each share. It will send a password along with each tree connection (share mount). It does not explicitly send a @@ -122,104 +120,92 @@ level security. They normally send a valid username but no password. Samba recor this username in a list of possible usernames. When the client then does a tree connection it also adds to this list the name of the share they try to connect to (useful for home directories) and any users -listed in the user = smb.conf line. The password is then checked +listed in the user smb.conf line. The password is then checked in turn against these possible usernames. If a match is found then the client is authenticated as that user. -

Example Configuration

+

Example Configuration

The smb.conf parameter that sets Share Level Security is: -

-	security = share
-

+

security = share

Please note that there are reports that recent MS Windows clients do not like to work with share mode security servers. You are strongly discouraged from using share level security. -

Domain Security Mode (User Level Security)

-When Samba is operating in security = domain mode, +

Domain Security Mode (User Level Security)

+When Samba is operating in security = domain mode, the Samba server has a domain security trust account (a machine account) and will cause all authentication requests to be passed through to the domain controllers. -

Example Configuration

+

Example Configuration

Samba as a Domain Member Server

This method involves addition of the following parameters in the smb.conf file: -

-        security = domain
-        workgroup = "name_of_NT_domain"
-

+

security = domain
workgroup = MIDEARTH

In order for this method to work, the Samba server needs to join the MS Windows NT security domain. This is done as follows:

  1. On the MS Windows NT domain controller, using the Server Manager, add a machine account for the Samba server. -

  2. Next, on the Unix/Linux system execute:

    root# smbpasswd -j DOMAIN_NAME -r PDC_NAME (samba-2.x)

    root# net join -U administrator%password (samba-3)

Note

-As of Samba-2.2.4 the Samba 2.2.x series can auto-join a Windows NT4 style Domain just -by executing: -
-root# smbpasswd -j DOMAIN_NAME -r PDC_NAME -U Administrator%password
-
+

  • Next, on the UNIX/Linux system execute:

    root# net rpc join -U administrator%password

    • Note

    +Samba-2.2.4 and later can auto-join a Windows NT4 style Domain just by executing: +

    +root# smbpasswd -j DOMAIN_NAME -r PDC_NAME \
+	 -U Administrator%password
+

    -As of Samba-3 the same can be done by executing: -

    -root# net join -U Administrator%password
-
    -It is not necessary with Samba-3 to specify the DOMAIN_NAME or the PDC_NAME as it -figures this out from the smb.conf file settings. -

    -Use of this mode of authentication does require there to be a standard Unix account +Samba-3 can do the same by executing: +

    +root# net rpc join -U Administrator%password
+

    +It is not necessary with Samba-3 to specify the DOMAIN_NAME or the +PDC_NAME as it figures this out from the smb.conf file settings. +

    +Use of this mode of authentication does require there to be a standard UNIX account for each user in order to assign a UID once the account has been authenticated by the remote Windows DC. This account can be blocked to prevent logons by clients other than MS Windows through means such as setting an invalid shell in the /etc/passwd entry.

    An alternative to assigning UIDs to Windows users on a Samba member server is -presented in the Winbind Overview chapter -in this HOWTO collection. +presented in the chapter about winbind.

    -For more information of being a domain member, see the Domain -Member section of this Howto. -

    ADS Security Mode (User Level Security)

    + For more information of being a domain member, see the chapter about domain membership. +

    ADS Security Mode (User Level Security)

    Both Samba 2.2 and 3.0 can join an Active Directory domain. This is -possible even if the domain is run in native mode. Active Directory in -native mode perfectly allows NT4-style domain members, contrary to +possible if the domain is run in native mode. Active Directory in +native mode perfectly allows NT4-style domain members. This is contrary to popular belief. The only thing that Active Directory in native mode prohibits is Backup Domain Controllers running NT4.

    -If you are running Active Directory starting with Samba 3.0 you can -however join as a native AD member. Why would you want to do that? +If you are using Active Directory, starting with Samba-3 you can +join as a native AD member. Why would you want to do that? Your security policy might prohibit the use of NT-compatible authentication protocols. All your machines are running Windows 2000 -and above and all use full Kerberos. In this case Samba as a NT4-style +and above and all use Kerberos. In this case Samba as a NT4-style domain would still require NT-compatible authentication data. Samba in -AD-member mode can accept Kerberos. -

    Example Configuration

    -	realm = your.kerberos.REALM
-	security = ADS
-

    - The following parameter may be required: -

    -	ads server = your.kerberos.server
-

    -Please refer to the Domain Membership and Active Directory -Membership sections for more information regarding this configuration option. -

    Server Security (User Level Security)

    +AD-member mode can accept Kerberos tickets. +

    Example Configuration

    realm = your.kerberos.REALM
    security = ADS

    +The following parameter may be required: +

    ads server = your.kerberos.server

    +Please refer to the chapter on domain membership +for more information regarding this configuration option. +

    Server Security (User Level Security)

    Server security mode is a left over from the time when Samba was not capable of acting as a domain member server. It is highly recommended NOT to use this feature. Server security mode has many draw backs. The draw backs include: -

    Potential Account Lockout on MS Windows NT4/200x password servers
    Lack of assurance that the password server is the one specified
    Does not work with Winbind, particularly needed when storing profiles remotely
    This mode may open connections to the password server, and keep them open for extended periods.
    Security on the Samba server breaks badly when the remote password server suddenly shuts down
    With this mode there is NO security account in the domain that the password server belongs to for the Samba server.

    +

    • Potential Account Lockout on MS Windows NT4/200x password servers

    • Lack of assurance that the password server is the one specified

    • Does not work with Winbind, particularly needed when storing profiles remotely

    • This mode may open connections to the password server, and keep them open for extended periods.

    • Security on the Samba server breaks badly when the remote password server suddenly shuts down

    • With this mode there is NO security account in the domain that the password server belongs to for the Samba server.

    In server security mode the Samba server reports to the client that it is in user level security. The client then does a session setup as described earlier. The Samba server takes the username/password that the client sends and attempts to login to the -password server by sending exactly the same username/password that +password server by sending exactly the same username/password that it got from the client. If that server is in user level security and accepts the password, then Samba accepts the clients connection. This allows the Samba server to use another SMB -server as the password server. +server as the password server.

    You should also note that at the very start of all this, where the server tells the client what security level it is in, it also tells the client if it supports encryption. If it does then it supplies the client with a random cryptkey. The client will then send all passwords in encrypted form. Samba supports this type of encryption by default.

    -The parameter security = server means that Samba reports to clients that +The parameter security = server means that Samba reports to clients that it is running in user mode but actually passes off all authentication requests to another user mode server. This requires an additional -parameter password server that points to the real authentication server. +parameter password server that points to the real authentication server. That real authentication server can be another Samba server or can be a Windows NT server, the later natively capable of encrypted password support.

    Note

    @@ -230,15 +216,11 @@ lookups because the choice of the target authentication server is arbitrary and be determined from a domain name. In essence, a Samba server that is in server security mode is operating in what used to be known as workgroup mode. -

    Example Configuration

    +

    Example Configuration

    Using MS Windows NT as an authentication server

    This method involves the additions of the following parameters in the smb.conf file: -

    -        encrypt passwords = Yes
-        security = server
-        password server = "NetBIOS_name_of_a_DC"
-

    +

    encrypt passwords = Yes
    security = server
    password server = "NetBIOS_name_of_a_DC"

    There are two ways of identifying whether or not a username and password pair was valid. One uses the reply information provided as part of the authentication messaging process, the other uses just an error code. @@ -249,9 +231,9 @@ server fails to reject the username and password pair then an alternative mode o identification of validation is used. Where a site uses password lock out after a certain number of failed authentication attempts this will result in user lockouts.

    -Use of this mode of authentication does require there to be a standard Unix account +Use of this mode of authentication does require there to be a standard UNIX account for the user, though this account can be blocked to prevent logons by non-SMB/CIFS clients. -

    Seamless Windows Network Integration

    +

    Password checking

    MS Windows clients may use encrypted passwords as part of a challenge/response authentication model (a.k.a. NTLMv1 and NTLMv2) or alone, or clear text strings for simple password based authentication. It should be realized that with the SMB protocol, @@ -288,21 +270,18 @@ is definitely not a good idea to re-enable plain text password support in such c The following parameters can be used to work around the issue of Windows 9x clients upper casing usernames and password before transmitting them to the SMB server when using clear text authentication. -

    -        password level = integer
-        username level = integer
-

    +

    password level = integer
    username level = integer

    By default Samba will lower case the username before attempting to lookup the user in the database of local system accounts. Because UNIX usernames conventionally -only contain lower-case characters, the username level parameter +only contain lower-case character, the username level parameter is rarely needed.

    However, passwords on UNIX systems often make use of mixed-case characters. This means that in order for a user on a Windows 9x client to connect to a Samba -server using clear text authentication, the password level +server using clear text authentication, the password level must be set to the maximum number of upper case letters which could -appear in a password. Note that the server OS uses the traditional DES version -of crypt(), a password level of 8 will result in case +appear in a password. Note that if the server OS uses the traditional DES version +of crypt(), a password level of 8 will result in case insensitive passwords as seen from Windows users. This will also result in longer login times as Samba has to compute the permutations of the password string and try them one by one until a match is located (or all combinations fail). @@ -310,7 +289,7 @@ try them one by one until a match is located (or all combinations fail). The best option to adopt is to enable support for encrypted passwords wherever Samba is used. Most attempts to apply the registry change to re-enable plain text passwords will eventually lead to user complaints and unhappiness. -

    Common Errors

    +

    Common Errors

    We all make mistakes. It is Ok to make mistakes, so long as they are made in the right places and at the right time. A mistake that causes lost productivity is seldom tolerated. A mistake made in a developmental test lab is expected. @@ -320,25 +299,26 @@ on the Samba mailing lists. Many of these are avoidable by doing you homework be a Samba implementation. Some are the result of misunderstanding of the English language. The English language has many turns of phrase that are potentially vague and may be highly confusing to those for whom English is not their native tongue. -

    What makes Samba a SERVER?

    +

    What makes Samba a SERVER?

    To some the nature of the Samba security mode is very obvious, but entirely -wrong all the same. It is assumed that security = server means that Samba +wrong all the same. It is assumed that security = server means that Samba will act as a server. Not so! See above - this setting means that Samba will try to use another SMB server as its source of user authentication alone. -

    What makes Samba a Domain Controller?

    -The smb.conf parameter security = domain does NOT really make Samba behave +

    What makes Samba a Domain Controller?

    +The smb.conf parameter security = domain does NOT really make Samba behave as a Domain Controller! This setting means we want Samba to be a domain member! -

    What makes Samba a Domain Member?

    -Guess! So many others do. But whatever you do, do NOT think that security = user +

    What makes Samba a Domain Member?

    +Guess! So many others do. But whatever you do, do NOT think that security = user makes Samba act as a domain member. Read the manufacturers manual before the warranty expires! See -the Domain Member section of this Howto for more information. -

    Constantly Losing Connections to Password Server

    +the chapter about domain membership for more information. +

    Constantly Losing Connections to Password Server

    + “ Why does server_validate() simply give up rather than re-establishing its connection to the password server? Though I am not fluent in the SMB protocol, perhaps the cluster server process passes along to its client workstation the session key it receives from the password server, which means the password hashes submitted by the client would not work on a subsequent -connection, whose session key would be different. So server_validate() must give up. +connection, whose session key would be different. So server_validate() must give up.”

    -Indeed. That's why security = server is at best a nasty hack. Please use security = domain. -security = server mode is also known as pass-through authentication. -

    Prev Up Next
    Part II. Server Configuration Basics Home Chapter 5. Domain Control
    + Indeed. That's why security = server is at best a nasty hack. Please use security = domain. +security = server mode is also known as pass-through authentication. +

    Prev Up Next
    Part II. Server Configuration Basics Home Chapter 5. Domain Control
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/StandAloneServer.html b/docs/htmldocs/StandAloneServer.html deleted file mode 100644 index 272df7a27b..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/StandAloneServer.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,144 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 8. Stand-Alone Servers
    Chapter 8. Stand-Alone Servers
    Prev Part II. Server Configuration Basics Next

    Chapter 8. Stand-Alone Servers

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    Background
    Example Configuration
    Reference Documentation Server
    Central Print Serving
    Common Errors

    -Stand-Alone servers are independent of Domain Controllers on the network. -They are NOT domain members and function more like workgroup servers. In many -cases a stand-alone server is configured with a minimum of security control -with the intent that all data served will be readily accessible to all users. -

    Features and Benefits

    -Stand-Alone servers can be as secure or as insecure as needs dictate. They can -have simple or complex configurations. Above all, despite the hoopla about -Domain security they remain a very common installation. -

    -If all that is needed is a server for read-only files, or for -printers alone, it may not make sense to affect a complex installation. -For example: A drafting office needs to store old drawings and reference -standards. No-one can write files to the server as it is legislatively -important that all documents remain unaltered. A share mode read-only stand-alone -server is an ideal solution. -

    -Another situation that warrants simplicity is an office that has many printers -that are queued off a single central server. Everyone needs to be able to print -to the printers, there is no need to affect any access controls and no files will -be served from the print server. Again a share mode stand-alone server makes -a great solution. -

    Background

    -The term stand-alone server means that the server -will provide local authentication and access control for all resources -that are available from it. In general this means that there will be a -local user database. In more technical terms, it means that resources -on the machine will be made available in either SHARE mode or in -USER mode. -

    -No special action is needed other than to create user accounts. Stand-alone -servers do NOT provide network logon services. This means that machines that -use this server do NOT perform a domain logon to it. Whatever logon facility -the workstations are subject to is independent of this machine. It is however -necessary to accommodate any network user so that the logon name they use will -be translated (mapped) locally on the stand-alone server to a locally known -user name. There are several ways this can be done. -

    -Samba tends to blur the distinction a little in respect of what is -a stand-alone server. This is because the authentication database may be -local or on a remote server, even if from the Samba protocol perspective -the Samba server is NOT a member of a domain security context. -

    -Through the use of PAM (Pluggable Authentication Modules) and nsswitch -(the name service switcher) the source of authentication may reside on -another server. We would be inclined to call this the authentication server. -This means that the Samba server may use the local Unix/Linux system password database -(/etc/passwd or /etc/shadow), may use a -local smbpasswd file, or may use -an LDAP back end, or even via PAM and Winbind another CIFS/SMB server -for authentication. -

    Example Configuration

    -The following examples are designed to inspire simplicity. It is too easy to -attempt a high level of creativity and to introduce too much complexity in -server and network design. -

    Reference Documentation Server

    -Configuration of a read-only data server that EVERYONE can access is very simple. -Here is the smb.conf file that will do this. Assume that all the reference documents -are stored in the directory /export, that the documents are owned by a user other than -nobody. No home directories are shared, that are no users in the /etc/passwd -Unix system database. This is a very simple system to administer. -

    -	# Global parameters
-	[global]
-		workgroup = MYGROUP
-		netbios name = REFDOCS
-		security = SHARE
-		passdb backend = guest
-		wins server = 192.168.1.1
-
-	[data]
-		comment = Data
-		path = /export
-		guest only = Yes
-

    -In the above example the machine name is set to REFDOCS, the workgroup is set to the name -of the local workgroup so that the machine will appear in with systems users are familiar -with. The only password backend required is the "guest" backend so as to allow default -unprivileged account names to be used. Given that there is a WINS server on this network -we do use it. -

    Central Print Serving

    -Configuration of a simple print server is very simple if you have all the right tools -on your system. -

    Assumptions:

    1. - The print server must require no administration -

    2. - The print spooling and processing system on our print server will be CUPS. - (Please refer to the CUPS Printing chapter for more information). -

    3. - All printers that the print server will service will be network - printers. They will be correctly configured, by the administrator, - in the CUPS environment. -

    4. - All workstations will be installed using postscript drivers. The printer - of choice is the Apple Color LaserWriter. -

    -In this example our print server will spool all incoming print jobs to -/var/spool/samba until the job is ready to be submitted by -Samba to the CUPS print processor. Since all incoming connections will be as -the anonymous (guest) user, two things will be required: -

    Enabling Anonymous Printing

    • - The Unix/Linux system must have a guest account. - The default for this is usually the account nobody. - To find the correct name to use for your version of Samba do the - following: - 
      -$ testparm -s -v | grep "guest account"
-
      - Then make sure that this account exists in your system password - database (/etc/passwd). -
    • - The directory into which Samba will spool the file must have write - access for the guest account. The following commands will ensure that - this directory is available for use: - 
      -root# mkdir /var/spool/samba
-root# chown nobody.nobody /var/spool/samba
-root# chmod a+rwt /var/spool/samba
-
      -
    -
    -	# Global parameters
-	[global]
-		workgroup = MYGROUP
-		netbios name = PTRSVR1
-		security = SHARE
-		passdb backend = guest
-		wins server = 192.168.1.1
-
-	[printers]
-		comment = All Printers
-		path = /var/spool/samba
-		printer admin = root
-		guest ok = Yes
-		printable = Yes
-		printing = cups
-		use client driver = Yes
-		browseable = No
-
    -

    Common Errors

    -The greatest mistake so often made is to make a network configuration too complex. -It pays to use the simplest solution that will meet the needs of the moment. -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 7. Domain Membership Home Chapter 9. MS Windows Network Configuration Guide
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/VFS.html b/docs/htmldocs/VFS.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0b22d2e1fb..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/VFS.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,106 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 20. Stackable VFS modules
    Chapter 20. Stackable VFS modules
    Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

    Chapter 20. Stackable VFS modules

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    The Samba Team

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Tim Potter

    Simo Sorce

    original vfs_skel README

    Alexander Bokovoy

    original vfs_netatalk docs

    Stefan Metzmacher

    Update for multiple modules

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Included modules
    audit
    extd_audit
    fake_perms
    recycle
    netatalk
    VFS modules available elsewhere
    DatabaseFS
    vscan
    Common Errors

    Features and Benefits

    -Since Samba-3, there is support for stackable VFS(Virtual File System) modules. -Samba passes each request to access the unix file system thru the loaded VFS modules. -This chapter covers all the modules that come with the samba source and references to -some external modules. -

    Discussion

    -If not supplied with your platform distribution binary Samba package you may have problems -to compile these modules, as shared libraries are compiled and linked in different ways -on different systems. They currently have been tested against GNU/Linux and IRIX. -

    -To use the VFS modules, create a share similar to the one below. The -important parameter is the vfs objects parameter where -you can list one or more VFS modules by name. For example, to log all access -to files and put deleted files in a recycle bin: - -
    -[audit]
-        comment = Audited /data directory
-        path = /data
-        vfs objects = audit recycle
-        writeable = yes
-        browseable = yes
-
    -

    -The modules are used in the order in which they are specified. -

    -Samba will attempt to load modules from the lib -directory in the root directory of the samba installation (usually -/usr/lib/samba/vfs or /usr/local/samba/lib/vfs -). -

    -Some modules can be used twice for the same share. -This can be done using a configuration similar to the one below. - -
    -[test]
-        comment = VFS TEST
-        path = /data
-        writeable = yes
-        browseable = yes
-        vfs objects = example:example1 example example:test
-		example1: parameter = 1
-		example:  parameter = 5
-		test:	  parameter = 7
-
    -

    Included modules

    audit

    - A simple module to audit file access to the syslog - facility. The following operations are logged: -
    share
    connect/disconnect
    directory opens/create/remove
    file open/close/rename/unlink/chmod
    -

    extd_audit

    - This module is identical with the audit module above except - that it sends audit logs to both syslog as well as the smbd log file/s. The - loglevel for this module is set in the smb.conf file. -

    - The logging information that will be written to the smbd log file is controlled by - the log level parameter in smb.conf. The - following information will be recorded: -

    Table 20.1. Extended Auditing Log Information

    Log LevelLog Details - File and Directory Operations
    0Creation / Deletion
    1Create / Delete / Rename / Permission Changes
    2Create / Delete / Rename / Perm Change / Open / Close

    fake_perms

    - This module was created to allow Roaming Profile files and directories to be set (on the Samba server - under Unix) as read only. This module will if installed on the Profiles share will report to the client - that the Profile files and directories are writable. This satisfies the client even though the files - will never be overwritten as the client logs out or shuts down. -

    recycle

    - A recycle-bin like module. When used any unlink call - will be intercepted and files moved to the recycle - directory instead of being deleted. -

    Supported options: -
    recycle:repository

    FIXME

    recycle:keeptree

    FIXME

    recycle:versions

    FIXME

    recycle:touch

    FIXME

    recycle:maxsize

    FIXME

    recycle:exclude

    FIXME

    recycle:exclude_dir

    FIXME

    recycle:noversions

    FIXME

    -

    netatalk

    - A netatalk module, that will ease co-existence of samba and - netatalk file sharing services. -

    Advantages compared to the old netatalk module: -
    it doesn't care about creating of .AppleDouble forks, just keeps them in sync
    if a share in smb.conf doesn't contain .AppleDouble item in hide or veto list, it will be added automatically
    -

    VFS modules available elsewhere

    -This section contains a listing of various other VFS modules that -have been posted but don't currently reside in the Samba CVS -tree for one reason or another (e.g. it is easy for the maintainer -to have his or her own CVS tree). -

    -No statements about the stability or functionality of any module -should be implied due to its presence here. -

    DatabaseFS

    - URL: http://www.css.tayloru.edu/~elorimer/databasefs/index.php -

    By Eric Lorimer.

    - I have created a VFS module which implements a fairly complete read-only - filesystem. It presents information from a database as a filesystem in - a modular and generic way to allow different databases to be used - (originally designed for organizing MP3s under directories such as - "Artists," "Song Keywords," etc... I have since applied it to a student - roster database very easily). The directory structure is stored in the - database itself and the module makes no assumptions about the database - structure beyond the table it requires to run. -

    - Any feedback would be appreciated: comments, suggestions, patches, - etc... If nothing else, hopefully it might prove useful for someone - else who wishes to create a virtual filesystem. -

    vscan

    URL: http://www.openantivirus.org/

    - samba-vscan is a proof-of-concept module for Samba, which - uses the VFS (virtual file system) features of Samba 2.2.x/3.0 - alphaX. Of course, Samba has to be compiled with VFS support. - samba-vscan supports various virus scanners and is maintained - by Rainer Link. -

    Common Errors

    -There must be some gotchas we should record here! Jelmer??? -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 19. CUPS Printing Support in Samba 3.0 Home Chapter 21. Integrated Logon Support using Winbind
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/bugreport.html b/docs/htmldocs/bugreport.html deleted file mode 100644 index e8d7a8ccd3..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/bugreport.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,120 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 35. Reporting Bugs
    Chapter 35. Reporting Bugs
    Prev Part V. Troubleshooting Next

    Chapter 35. Reporting Bugs

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    The Samba Team

    Someone; Tridge or Karl Auer perhaps?

    27 June 1997

    Table of Contents

    Introduction
    General info
    Debug levels
    Internal errors
    Attaching to a running process
    Patches

    Introduction

    Please report bugs using - bugzilla.

    -Please take the time to read this file before you submit a bug -report. Also, please see if it has changed between releases, as we -may be changing the bug reporting mechanism at some time. -

    -Please also do as much as you can yourself to help track down the -bug. Samba is maintained by a dedicated group of people who volunteer -their time, skills and efforts. We receive far more mail about it than -we can possibly answer, so you have a much higher chance of an answer -and a fix if you send us a "developer friendly" bug report that lets -us fix it fast. -

    -Do not assume that if you post the bug to the comp.protocols.smb -newsgroup or the mailing list that we will read it. If you suspect that your -problem is not a bug but a configuration problem then it is better to send -it to the Samba mailing list, as there are (at last count) 5000 other users on -that list that may be able to help you. -

    -You may also like to look though the recent mailing list archives, -which are conveniently accessible on the Samba web pages -at http://samba.org/samba/. -

    General info

    -Before submitting a bug report check your config for silly -errors. Look in your log files for obvious messages that tell you that -you've misconfigured something and run testparm to test your config -file for correct syntax. -

    -Have you run through the diagnosis? -This is very important. -

    -If you include part of a log file with your bug report then be sure to -annotate it with exactly what you were doing on the client at the -time, and exactly what the results were. -

    Debug levels

    -If the bug has anything to do with Samba behaving incorrectly as a -server (like refusing to open a file) then the log files will probably -be very useful. Depending on the problem a log level of between 3 and -10 showing the problem may be appropriate. A higher level gives more -detail, but may use too much disk space. -

    -To set the debug level use the log level in your -smb.conf. You may also find it useful to set the log -level higher for just one machine and keep separate logs for each machine. -To do this use: -

    -log level = 10
-log file = /usr/local/samba/lib/log.%m
-include = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m
-

    -then create a file -/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.machine where -machine is the name of the client you wish to debug. In that file -put any smb.conf commands you want, for example -log level may be useful. This also allows you to -experiment with different security systems, protocol levels etc on just -one machine. -

    -The smb.conf entry log level -is synonymous with the parameter debuglevel that has -been used in older versions of Samba and is being retained for backwards -compatibility of smb.conf files. -

    -As the log level value is increased you will record -a significantly increasing level of debugging information. For most -debugging operations you may not need a setting higher than -3. Nearly -all bugs can be tracked at a setting of 10, but be -prepared for a VERY large volume of log data. -

    Internal errors

    -If you get a INTERNAL ERROR message in your log files -it means that Samba got an unexpected signal while running. It is probably a -segmentation fault and almost certainly means a bug in Samba (unless -you have faulty hardware or system software). -

    -If the message came from smbd then it will probably be accompanied by -a message which details the last SMB message received by smbd. This -info is often very useful in tracking down the problem so please -include it in your bug report. -

    -You should also detail how to reproduce the problem, if -possible. Please make this reasonably detailed. -

    -You may also find that a core file appeared in a corefiles -subdirectory of the directory where you keep your samba log -files. This file is the most useful tool for tracking down the bug. To -use it you do this: -

    -	$ gdb smbd core
-

    -adding appropriate paths to smbd and core so gdb can find them. If you -don't have gdb then try dbx. Then within the debugger -use the command where to give a stack trace of where the -problem occurred. Include this in your report. -

    -If you know any assembly language then do a -disass of the routine -where the problem occurred (if its in a library routine then -disassemble the routine that called it) and try to work out exactly -where the problem is by looking at the surrounding code. Even if you -don't know assembly, including this info in the bug report can be -useful. -

    Attaching to a running process

    -Unfortunately some unixes (in particular some recent linux kernels) -refuse to dump a core file if the task has changed uid (which smbd -does often). To debug with this sort of system you could try to attach -to the running process using -gdb smbd PID where you get -PID from smbstatus. -Then use c to continue and try to cause the core dump -using the client. The debugger should catch the fault and tell you -where it occurred. -

    Patches

    -The best sort of bug report is one that includes a fix! If you send us -patches please use diff -u format if your version of -diff supports it, otherwise use diff -c4. Make sure -you do the diff against a clean version of the source and let me know -exactly what version you used. -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 34. Analysing and solving samba problems Home Part VI. Appendixes
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/compiling.html b/docs/htmldocs/compiling.html deleted file mode 100644 index 836fb50bb8..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/compiling.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,202 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 36. How to compile SAMBA
    Chapter 36. How to compile SAMBA
    Prev Part VI. Appendixes Next

    Chapter 36. How to compile SAMBA

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    The Samba Team

    Someone; Jerry perhaps?

    22 May 2001

    18 March 2003

    Table of Contents

    Access Samba source code via CVS
    Introduction
    CVS Access to samba.org
    Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp
    Verifying Samba's PGP signature
    Building the Binaries
    Compiling samba with Active Directory support
    Starting the smbd and nmbd
    Starting from inetd.conf
    Alternative: starting it as a daemon
    Common Errors

    -You can obtain the samba source from the -samba website. To obtain a development version, -you can download samba from CVS or using rsync. -

    Access Samba source code via CVS

    Introduction

    -Samba is developed in an open environment. Developers use CVS -(Concurrent Versioning System) to "checkin" (also known as -"commit") new source code. Samba's various CVS branches can -be accessed via anonymous CVS using the instructions -detailed in this chapter. -

    -This chapter is a modified version of the instructions found at -http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html -

    CVS Access to samba.org

    -The machine samba.org runs a publicly accessible CVS -repository for access to the source code of several packages, -including samba, rsync, distcc, ccache and jitterbug. There are two main ways -of accessing the CVS server on this host. -

    Access via CVSweb

    -You can access the source code via your -favourite WWW browser. This allows you to access the contents of -individual files in the repository and also to look at the revision -history and commit logs of individual files. You can also ask for a diff -listing between any two versions on the repository. -

    -Use the URL : http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb -

    Access via cvs

    -You can also access the source code via a -normal cvs client. This gives you much more control over what you can -do with the repository and allows you to checkout whole source trees -and keep them up to date via normal cvs commands. This is the -preferred method of access if you are a developer and not -just a casual browser. -

    -To download the latest cvs source code, point your -browser at the URL : -http://www.cyclic.com/. -and click on the 'How to get cvs' link. CVS is free software under -the GNU GPL (as is Samba). Note that there are several graphical CVS clients -which provide a graphical interface to the sometimes mundane CVS commands. -Links to theses clients are also available from the Cyclic website. -

    -To gain access via anonymous cvs use the following steps. -For this example it is assumed that you want a copy of the -samba source code. For the other source code repositories -on this system just substitute the correct package name -

    Procedure 36.1. Retrieving samba using CVS

    1. - Install a recent copy of cvs. All you really need is a - copy of the cvs client binary. -

    2. - Run the command -

      - cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot login -

    3. - When it asks you for a password type cvs. -

    4. - Run the command -

      - cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co samba -

      - This will create a directory called samba containing the - latest samba source code (i.e. the HEAD tagged cvs branch). This - currently corresponds to the 3.0 development tree. -

      - CVS branches other then HEAD can be obtained by using the - -r and defining a tag name. A list of branch tag names - can be found on the "Development" page of the samba web site. A common - request is to obtain the latest 3.0 release code. This could be done by - using the following command: -

      - cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co -r SAMBA_3_0 samba -

    5. - Whenever you want to merge in the latest code changes use - the following command from within the samba directory: -

      - cvs update -d -P -

    Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp

    - pserver.samba.org also exports unpacked copies of most parts of the CVS - tree at ftp://pserver.samba.org/pub/unpacked and also via anonymous rsync at - rsync://pserver.samba.org/ftp/unpacked/. I recommend using rsync rather than ftp. - See the rsync homepage for more info on rsync. -

    - The disadvantage of the unpacked trees is that they do not support automatic - merging of local changes like CVS does. rsync access is most convenient - for an initial install. -

    Verifying Samba's PGP signature

    -In these days of insecurity, it's strongly recommended that you verify the PGP -signature for any source file before installing it. Even if you're not -downloading from a mirror site, verifying PGP signatures should be a -standard reflex. -

    -With that said, go ahead and download the following files: -

    -$  wget http://us1.samba.org/samba/ftp/samba-2.2.8a.tar.asc
-$  wget http://us1.samba.org/samba/ftp/samba-pubkey.asc
-

    -The first file is the PGP signature for the Samba source file; the other is the Samba public -PGP key itself. Import the public PGP key with: -

    -	$ gpg --import samba-pubkey.asc
-

    -And verify the Samba source code integrity with: -

    -	$ gzip -d samba-2.2.8a.tar.gz
-	$ gpg --verify samba-2.2.8a.tar.asc
-

    -If you receive a message like, "Good signature from Samba Distribution -Verification Key..." -then all is well. The warnings about trust relationships can be ignored. An -example of what you would not want to see would be: -

    - gpg: BAD signature from "Samba Distribution Verification Key" -

    Building the Binaries

    To do this, first run the program ./configure - in the source directory. This should automatically - configure Samba for your operating system. If you have unusual - needs then you may wish to run

    root# ./configure --help -

    first to see what special options you can enable. - Then executing

    root# make

    will create the binaries. Once it's successfully - compiled you can use

    root# make install

    to install the binaries and manual pages. You can - separately install the binaries and/or man pages using

    root# make installbin -

    and

    root# make installman -

    Note that if you are upgrading for a previous version - of Samba you might like to know that the old versions of - the binaries will be renamed with a ".old" extension. You - can go back to the previous version with

    root# make revert -

    if you find this version a disaster!

    Compiling samba with Active Directory support

    In order to compile samba with ADS support, you need to have installed - on your system:

    • the MIT kerberos development libraries - (either install from the sources or use a package). The - Heimdal libraries will not work.

    • the OpenLDAP development libraries.

    If your kerberos libraries are in a non-standard location then - remember to add the configure option - --with-krb5=DIR.

    After you run configure make sure that - include/config.h it generates contains lines like - this:

    -#define HAVE_KRB5 1
-#define HAVE_LDAP 1
-

    If it doesn't then configure did not find your krb5 libraries or - your ldap libraries. Look in config.log to figure - out why and fix it.

    Installing the required packages for Debian

    On Debian you need to install the following packages:

    -
    libkrb5-dev
    krb5-user
    -

    Installing the required packages for RedHat

    On RedHat this means you should have at least:

    -
    krb5-workstation (for kinit)
    krb5-libs (for linking with)
    krb5-devel (because you are compiling from source)
    -

    in addition to the standard development environment.

    Note that these are not standard on a RedHat install, and you may need - to get them off CD2.

    Starting the smbd and nmbd

    You must choose to start smbd and nmbd either - as daemons or from inetd. Don't try - to do both! Either you can put them in - inetd.conf and have them started on demand - by inetd, or you can start them as - daemons either from the command line or in - /etc/rc.local. See the man pages for details - on the command line options. Take particular care to read - the bit about what user you need to be in order to start - Samba. In many cases you must be root.

    The main advantage of starting smbd - and nmbd using the recommended daemon method - is that they will respond slightly more quickly to an initial connection - request.

    Starting from inetd.conf

    Note

    The following will be different if - you use NIS, NIS+ or LDAP to distribute services maps.

    Look at your /etc/services. - What is defined at port 139/tcp. If nothing is defined - then add a line like this:

    netbios-ssn     139/tcp

    similarly for 137/udp you should have an entry like:

    netbios-ns	137/udp

    Next edit your /etc/inetd.conf - and add two lines something like this:

    -		netbios-ssn stream tcp nowait root /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd smbd 
-		netbios-ns dgram udp wait root /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd nmbd 
-

    The exact syntax of /etc/inetd.conf - varies between unixes. Look at the other entries in inetd.conf - for a guide.

    Note

    Some unixes already have entries like netbios_ns - (note the underscore) in /etc/services. - You must either edit /etc/services or - /etc/inetd.conf to make them consistent. -

    Note

    On many systems you may need to use the - interfaces option in smb.conf to specify the IP - address and netmask of your interfaces. Run - ifconfig - as root if you don't know what the broadcast is for your - net. nmbd tries to determine it at run - time, but fails on some unixes. -

    Warning

    Many unixes only accept around 5 - parameters on the command line in inetd.conf. - This means you shouldn't use spaces between the options and - arguments, or you should use a script, and start the script - from inetd.

    Restart inetd, perhaps just send - it a HUP. If you have installed an earlier version of nmbd then - you may need to kill nmbd as well.

    Alternative: starting it as a daemon

    To start the server as a daemon you should create - a script something like this one, perhaps calling - it startsmb.

    -		#!/bin/sh
-		/usr/local/samba/bin/smbd -D 
-		/usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd -D 
-

    then make it executable with chmod - +x startsmb

    You can then run startsmb by - hand or execute it from /etc/rc.local -

    To kill it send a kill signal to the processes - nmbd and smbd.

    Note

    If you use the SVR4 style init system then - you may like to look at the examples/svr4-startup - script to make Samba fit into that system.

    Common Errors

    “ -I'm using gcc 3 and I've compiled Samba-3 from the CVS and the -binaries are very large files (40 Mb and 20 Mb). I've the same result with ---enable-shared ? -” -

    -The dwarf format used by GCC 3 for storing debugging symbols is very inefficient. -Strip the binaries, don't compile with -g or compile with -gstabs. -

    Prev Up Next
    Part VI. Appendixes Home Chapter 37. Portability
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/diagnosis.html b/docs/htmldocs/diagnosis.html deleted file mode 100644 index 473f5e6985..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/diagnosis.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,303 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 33. The Samba checklist
    Chapter 33. The Samba checklist
    Prev Part V. Troubleshooting Next

    Chapter 33. The Samba checklist

    Andrew Tridgell

    Samba Team

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    The Samba Team

    Wed Jan 15

    Table of Contents

    Introduction
    Assumptions
    The tests
    Still having troubles?

    Introduction

    -This file contains a list of tests you can perform to validate your -Samba server. It also tells you what the likely cause of the problem -is if it fails any one of these steps. If it passes all these tests -then it is probably working fine. -

    -You should do ALL the tests, in the order shown. We have tried to -carefully choose them so later tests only use capabilities verified in -the earlier tests. However, do not stop at the first error as there -have been some instances when continuing with the tests has helped -to solve a problem. -

    -If you send one of the samba mailing lists an email saying "it doesn't work" -and you have not followed this test procedure then you should not be surprised -if your email is ignored. -

    Assumptions

    -In all of the tests it is assumed you have a Samba server called -BIGSERVER and a PC called ACLIENT both in workgroup TESTGROUP. -

    -The procedure is similar for other types of clients. -

    -It is also assumed you know the name of an available share in your -smb.conf. I will assume this share is called tmp. -You can add a tmp share like this by adding the -following to smb.conf: -

    -
-[tmp]
- comment = temporary files 
- path = /tmp
- read only = yes
-
-
    -

    Note

    -These tests assume version 3.0 or later of the samba suite. -Some commands shown did not exist in earlier versions. -

    -Please pay attention to the error messages you receive. If any error message -reports that your server is being unfriendly you should first check that your -IP name resolution is correctly set up. eg: Make sure your /etc/resolv.conf -file points to name servers that really do exist. -

    -Also, if you do not have DNS server access for name resolution please check -that the settings for your smb.conf file results in dns proxy = no. The -best way to check this is with testparm smb.conf. -

    -It is helpful to monitor the log files during testing by using the -tail -F log_file_name in a separate -terminal console (use ctrl-alt-F1 through F6 or multiple terminals in X). -Relevant log files can be found (for default installations) in -/usr/local/samba/var. Also, connection logs from -machines can be found here or possibly in /var/log/samba -depending on how or if you specified logging in your smb.conf file. -

    -If you make changes to your smb.conf file while going through these test, -don't forget to restart smbd and nmbd. -

    The tests

    Procedure 33.1. Diagnosing your samba server

    1. -In the directory in which you store your smb.conf file, run the command -testparm smb.conf. If it reports any errors then your smb.conf -configuration file is faulty. -

      Note

      -Your smb.conf file may be located in: /etc/samba -Or in: /usr/local/samba/lib -

    2. -Run the command ping BIGSERVER from the PC and -ping ACLIENT from -the unix box. If you don't get a valid response then your TCP/IP -software is not correctly installed. -

      -Note that you will need to start a "dos prompt" window on the PC to -run ping. -

      -If you get a message saying host not found or similar then your DNS -software or /etc/hosts file is not correctly setup. -It is possible to -run samba without DNS entries for the server and client, but I assume -you do have correct entries for the remainder of these tests. -

      -Another reason why ping might fail is if your host is running firewall -software. You will need to relax the rules to let in the workstation -in question, perhaps by allowing access from another subnet (on Linux -this is done via the ipfwadm program.) -

      Note

      -Modern Linux distributions install ipchains/iptables by default. -This is a common problem that is often overlooked. -

    3. -Run the command smbclient -L BIGSERVER on the unix box. You -should get a list of available shares back. -

      -If you get a error message containing the string "Bad password" then -you probably have either an incorrect hosts allow, -hosts deny or valid users line in your -smb.conf, or your guest account is not -valid. Check what your guest account is using testparm and -temporarily remove any hosts allow, hosts deny, valid users or invalid users lines. -

      -If you get a connection refused response then the smbd server may -not be running. If you installed it in inetd.conf then you probably edited -that file incorrectly. If you installed it as a daemon then check that -it is running, and check that the netbios-ssn port is in a LISTEN -state using netstat -a. -

      Note

      -Some Unix / Linux systems use xinetd in place of -inetd. Check your system documentation for the location -of the control file/s for your particular system implementation of -this network super daemon. -

      -If you get a session request failed then the server refused the -connection. If it says "Your server software is being unfriendly" then -its probably because you have invalid command line parameters to smbd, -or a similar fatal problem with the initial startup of smbd. Also -check your config file (smb.conf) for syntax errors with testparm -and that the various directories where samba keeps its log and lock -files exist. -

      -There are a number of reasons for which smbd may refuse or decline -a session request. The most common of these involve one or more of -the following smb.conf file entries: -

      -	hosts deny = ALL
-	hosts allow = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yy
-	bind interfaces only = Yes
-

      -In the above, no allowance has been made for any session requests that -will automatically translate to the loopback adapter address 127.0.0.1. -To solve this problem change these lines to: -

      -	hosts deny = ALL
-	hosts allow = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yy 127.
-

      -Do not use the bind interfaces only parameter where you -may wish to -use the samba password change facility, or where smbclient may need to -access a local service for name resolution or for local resource -connections. (Note: the bind interfaces only parameter deficiency -where it will not allow connections to the loopback address will be -fixed soon). -

      -Another common cause of these two errors is having something already running -on port 139, such as Samba -(ie: smbd is running from inetd already) or -something like Digital's Pathworks. Check your inetd.conf file before trying -to start smbd as a daemon, it can avoid a lot of frustration! -

      -And yet another possible cause for failure of this test is when the subnet mask -and / or broadcast address settings are incorrect. Please check that the -network interface IP Address / Broadcast Address / Subnet Mask settings are -correct and that Samba has correctly noted these in the log.nmbd file. -

    4. -Run the command nmblookup -B BIGSERVER __SAMBA__. You should get the -IP address of your Samba server back. -

      -If you don't then nmbd is incorrectly installed. Check your inetd.conf -if you run it from there, or that the daemon is running and listening -to udp port 137. -

      -One common problem is that many inetd implementations can't take many -parameters on the command line. If this is the case then create a -one-line script that contains the right parameters and run that from -inetd. -

    5. run the command nmblookup -B ACLIENT '*'

      -You should get the PCs IP address back. If you don't then the client -software on the PC isn't installed correctly, or isn't started, or you -got the name of the PC wrong. -

      -If ACLIENT doesn't resolve via DNS then use the IP address of the -client in the above test. -

    6. -Run the command nmblookup -d 2 '*' -

      -This time we are trying the same as the previous test but are trying -it via a broadcast to the default broadcast address. A number of -NetBIOS / TCP/IP hosts on the network should respond, although Samba may -not catch all of the responses in the short time it listens. You -should see got a positive name query response -messages from several hosts. -

      -If this doesn't give a similar result to the previous test then -nmblookup isn't correctly getting your broadcast address through its -automatic mechanism. In this case you should experiment with the -interfaces option in smb.conf to manually configure your IP -address, broadcast and netmask. -

      -If your PC and server aren't on the same subnet then you will need to -use the -B option to set the broadcast address to that of the PCs -subnet. -

      -This test will probably fail if your subnet mask and broadcast address are -not correct. (Refer to TEST 3 notes above). -

    7. -Run the command smbclient //BIGSERVER/TMP. You should -then be prompted for a password. You should use the password of the account -you are logged into the unix box with. If you want to test with -another account then add the -U accountname option to the end of -the command line. eg: -smbclient //bigserver/tmp -Ujohndoe -

      Note

      -It is possible to specify the password along with the username -as follows: -smbclient //bigserver/tmp -Ujohndoe%secret -

      -Once you enter the password you should get the smb> prompt. If you -don't then look at the error message. If it says invalid network -name then the service "tmp" is not correctly setup in your smb.conf. -

      -If it says bad password then the likely causes are: -

      1. - you have shadow passwords (or some other password system) but didn't - compile in support for them in smbd -

      2. - your valid users configuration is incorrect -

      3. - you have a mixed case password and you haven't enabled the password - level option at a high enough level -

      4. - the path = line in smb.conf is incorrect. Check it with testparm -

      5. - you enabled password encryption but didn't map unix to samba users -

      -Once connected you should be able to use the commands -dir get put etc. -Type help command for instructions. You should -especially check that the amount of free disk space shown is correct -when you type dir. -

    8. -On the PC, type the command net view \\BIGSERVER. You will -need to do this from within a "dos prompt" window. You should get back a -list of available shares on the server. -

      -If you get a network name not found or similar error then netbios -name resolution is not working. This is usually caused by a problem in -nmbd. To overcome it you could do one of the following (you only need -to choose one of them): -

      1. - fixup the nmbd installation -

      2. - add the IP address of BIGSERVER to the wins server box in the - advanced TCP/IP setup on the PC. -

      3. - enable windows name resolution via DNS in the advanced section of - the TCP/IP setup -

      4. - add BIGSERVER to your lmhosts file on the PC. -

      -If you get a invalid network name or bad password error then the -same fixes apply as they did for the smbclient -L test above. In -particular, make sure your hosts allow line is correct (see the man -pages) -

      -Also, do not overlook that fact that when the workstation requests the -connection to the samba server it will attempt to connect using the -name with which you logged onto your Windows machine. You need to make -sure that an account exists on your Samba server with that exact same -name and password. -

      -If you get specified computer is not receiving requests or similar -it probably means that the host is not contactable via tcp services. -Check to see if the host is running tcp wrappers, and if so add an entry in -the hosts.allow file for your client (or subnet, etc.) -

    9. -Run the command net use x: \\BIGSERVER\TMP. You should -be prompted for a password then you should get a command completed -successfully message. If not then your PC software is incorrectly -installed or your smb.conf is incorrect. make sure your hosts allow -and other config lines in smb.conf are correct. -

      -It's also possible that the server can't work out what user name to -connect you as. To see if this is the problem add the line user = -username to the [tmp] section of -smb.conf where username is the -username corresponding to the password you typed. If you find this -fixes things you may need the username mapping option. -

      -It might also be the case that your client only sends encrypted passwords -and you have encrypt passwords = no in smb.conf -Turn it back on to fix. -

    10. -Run the command nmblookup -M testgroup where -testgroup is the name of the workgroup that your Samba server and -Windows PCs belong to. You should get back the IP address of the -master browser for that workgroup. -

      -If you don't then the election process has failed. Wait a minute to -see if it is just being slow then try again. If it still fails after -that then look at the browsing options you have set in smb.conf. Make -sure you have preferred master = yes to ensure that -an election is held at startup. -

    11. ->From file manager try to browse the server. Your samba server should -appear in the browse list of your local workgroup (or the one you -specified in smb.conf). You should be able to double click on the name -of the server and get a list of shares. If you get a "invalid -password" error when you do then you are probably running WinNT and it -is refusing to browse a server that has no encrypted password -capability and is in user level security mode. In this case either set -security = server AND -password server = Windows_NT_Machine in your -smb.conf file, or make sure encrypted passwords is -set to "yes". -

    Still having troubles?

    Read the chapter on -Analysing and Solving Problems. -

    Prev Up Next
    Part V. Troubleshooting Home Chapter 34. Analysing and solving samba problems
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/domain-member.html b/docs/htmldocs/domain-member.html deleted file mode 100644 index 19f8fd8677..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/domain-member.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,532 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 7. Domain Membership
    Chapter 7. Domain Membership
    Prev Part II. Server Configuration Basics Next

    Chapter 7. Domain Membership

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Jeremy Allison

    Samba Team

    Gerald (Jerry) Carter

    Samba Team

    Andrew Tridgell

    Samba Team

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    The Samba Team

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    MS Windows Workstation/Server Machine Trust Accounts
    Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts
    Using NT4 Server Manager to Add Machine Accounts to the Domain
    "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts
    Making an MS Windows Workstation or Server a Domain Member
    Domain Member Server
    Joining an NT4 type Domain with Samba-3
    Why is this better than security = server?
    Samba ADS Domain Membership
    Setup your smb.conf
    Setup your /etc/krb5.conf
    Create the computer account
    Test your server setup
    Testing with smbclient
    Notes
    Common Errors
    Can Not Add Machine Back to Domain
    Adding Machine to Domain Fails

    -Domain Membership is a subject of vital concern, Samba must be able to -participate as a member server in a Microsoft Domain security context, and -Samba must be capable of providing Domain machine member trust accounts, -otherwise it would not be capable of offering a viable option for many users. -

    -This chapter covers background information pertaining to domain membership, -Samba configuration for it, and MS Windows client procedures for joining a -domain. Why is this necessary? Because both are areas in which there exists -within the current MS Windows networking world and particularly in the -Unix/Linux networking and administration world, a considerable level of -mis-information, incorrect understanding, and a lack of knowledge. Hopefully -this chapter will fill the voids. -

    Features and Benefits

    -MS Windows workstations and servers that want to participate in domain -security need to -be made Domain members. Participating in Domain security is often called -Single Sign On or SSO for short. This -chapter describes the process that must be followed to make a workstation -(or another server - be it an MS Windows NT4 / 200x -server) or a Samba server a member of an MS Windows Domain security context. -

    -Samba-3 can join an MS Windows NT4 style domain as a native member server, an -MS Windows Active Directory Domain as a native member server, or a Samba Domain -Control network. -

    -Domain membership has many advantages: -

    • - MS Windows workstation users get the benefit of SSO -

    • - Domain user access rights and file ownership / access controls can be set - from the single Domain SAM (Security Account Manager) database - (works with Domain member servers as well as with MS Windows workstations - that are domain members) -

    • - Only MS Windows NT4 / 200x / XP Professional - workstations that are Domain members - can use network logon facilities -

    • - Domain Member workstations can be better controlled through the use of - Policy files (NTConfig.POL) and Desktop Profiles. -

    • - Through the use of logon scripts, users can be given transparent access to network - applications that run off application servers -

    • - Network administrators gain better application and user access management - abilities because there is no need to maintain user accounts on any network - client or server, other than the central Domain database - (either NT4/Samba SAM style Domain, NT4 Domain that is back ended with an - LDAP directory, or via an Active Directory infrastructure) -

    MS Windows Workstation/Server Machine Trust Accounts

    -A machine trust account is an account that is used to authenticate a client -machine -(rather than a user) to the Domain Controller server. In Windows terminology, -this is known as a "Computer Account." -

    -The password of a machine trust account acts as the shared secret for -secure communication with the Domain Controller. This is a security -feature to prevent an unauthorized machine with the same NetBIOS name -from joining the domain and gaining access to domain user/group -accounts. Windows NT, 200x, XP Professional clients use machine trust -accounts, but Windows 9x / Me / XP Home clients do not. Hence, a -Windows 9x / Me / XP Home client is never a true member of a domain -because it does not possess a machine trust account, and thus has no -shared secret with the domain controller. -

    -A Windows NT4 PDC stores each machine trust account in the Windows Registry. -The introduction of MS Windows 2000 saw the introduction of Active Directory, -the new repository for machine trust accounts. -

    -A Samba PDC, however, stores each machine trust account in two parts, -as follows: - -

    • - A Domain Security Account (stored in the - passdb backend that has been configured in the - smb.conf file. The precise nature of the account information that is - stored depends on the type of backend database that has been chosen. -

      - The older format of this data is the smbpasswd database - which contains the unix login ID, the Unix user identifier (UID), and the - LanMan and NT encrypted passwords. There is also some other information in - this file that we do not need to concern ourselves with here. -

      - The two newer database types are called ldapsam, - tdbsam. Both store considerably more data than the - older smbpasswd file did. The extra information - enables new user account controls to be used. -

    • - A corresponding Unix account, typically stored in - /etc/passwd. Work is in progress to allow a - simplified mode of operation that does not require Unix user accounts, but - this may not be a feature of the early releases of Samba-3. -

    -

    -There are three ways to create machine trust accounts: -

    • - Manual creation from the Unix/Linux command line. Here, both the Samba and - corresponding Unix account are created by hand. -

    • - Using the MS Windows NT4 Server Manager (either from an NT4 Domain member - server, or using the Nexus toolkit available from the Microsoft web site. - This tool can be run from any MS Windows machine so long as the user is - logged on as the administrator account. -

    • - "On-the-fly" creation. The Samba machine trust account is automatically - created by Samba at the time the client is joined to the domain. - (For security, this is the recommended method.) The corresponding Unix - account may be created automatically or manually. -

    Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts

    -The first step in manually creating a machine trust account is to manually -create the corresponding Unix account in /etc/passwd. -This can be done using vipw or another 'add user' command -that is normally used to create new Unix accounts. The following is an example for a Linux based Samba server: -

    -root# /usr/sbin/useradd -g 100 -d /dev/null -c "machine nickname" -s /bin/false machine_name$ -

    -root# passwd -l machine_name$ -

    -On *BSD systems, this can be done using the chpass utility: -

    -root# chpass -a "machine_name$:*:101:100::0:0:Workstation machine_name:/dev/null:/sbin/nologin" -

    -The /etc/passwd entry will list the machine name -with a "$" appended, won't have a password, will have a null shell and no -home directory. For example a machine named 'doppy' would have an -/etc/passwd entry like this: -

    -doppy$:x:505:501:machine_nickname:/dev/null:/bin/false
-

    -Above, machine_nickname can be any -descriptive name for the client, i.e., BasementComputer. -machine_name absolutely must be the NetBIOS -name of the client to be joined to the domain. The "$" must be -appended to the NetBIOS name of the client or Samba will not recognize -this as a machine trust account. -

    -Now that the corresponding Unix account has been created, the next step is to create -the Samba account for the client containing the well-known initial -machine trust account password. This can be done using the smbpasswd(8) command -as shown here: -

    -
    -root# smbpasswd -a -m machine_name
-
    -

    -where machine_name is the machine's NetBIOS -name. The RID of the new machine account is generated from the UID of -the corresponding Unix account. -

    Join the client to the domain immediately

    - Manually creating a machine trust account using this method is the - equivalent of creating a machine trust account on a Windows NT PDC using - the Server Manager. From the time at which the - account is created to the time which the client joins the domain and - changes the password, your domain is vulnerable to an intruder joining - your domain using a machine with the same NetBIOS name. A PDC inherently - trusts members of the domain and will serve out a large degree of user - information to such clients. You have been warned! -

    Using NT4 Server Manager to Add Machine Accounts to the Domain

    -If the machine from which you are trying to manage the domain is an -MS Windows NT4 workstation -then the tool of choice is the package called SRVTOOLS.EXE. -When executed in the target directory this will unpack -SrvMge.exe and UsrMgr.exe (both are -Domain Management tools for MS Windows NT4 workstation. -

    -If your workstation is any other MS Windows product you should download the -Nexus.exe package from the Microsoft web site. When executed -from the target directory this will unpack the same tools but for use on -MS Windows 9x/Me/200x/XP. -

    -Launch the srvmgr.exe (Server Manager for Domains) and follow these steps: -

    Procedure 7.1. Server Manager Account Machine Account Management

    1. - From the menu select Computer -

    2. - Click on Select Domain -

    3. - Click on the name of the domain you wish to administer in the - Select Domain panel and then click - OK. -

    4. - Again from the menu select Computer -

    5. - Select Add to Domain -

    6. - In the dialog box, click on the radio button to - Add NT Workstation of Server, then - enter the machine name in the field provided, then click the - Add button. -

    "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts

    -The second (and recommended) way of creating machine trust accounts is -simply to allow the Samba server to create them as needed when the client -is joined to the domain. -

    Since each Samba machine trust account requires a corresponding Unix account, a method -for automatically creating the Unix account is usually supplied; this requires configuration of the -add machine script option in -smb.conf. This method is not required, however; corresponding Unix -accounts may also be created manually. -

    -Below is an example for a RedHat Linux system. -

    -[global]
-   # <...remainder of parameters...>
-   add machine script = /usr/sbin/useradd -d /dev/null -g 100 -s /bin/false -M %u 
-

    Making an MS Windows Workstation or Server a Domain Member

    -The procedure for making an MS Windows workstation of server a member of the domain varies -with the version of Windows: -

    Windows 200x XP Professional

    - When the user elects to make the client a domain member, Windows 200x prompts for - an account and password that has privileges to create machine accounts in the domain. - A Samba administrative account (i.e., a Samba account that has root privileges on the - Samba server) must be entered here; the operation will fail if an ordinary user - account is given. -

    - Note: For security reasons the password for this administrative account should be set - to a password that is other than that used for the root user in the - /etc/passwd. -

    - The name of the account that is used to create domain member machine accounts can be - anything the network administrator may choose. If it is other than root - then this is easily mapped to root using the file pointed to be the smb.conf parameter - username map = /etc/samba/smbusers. -

    - The session key of the Samba administrative account acts as an - encryption key for setting the password of the machine trust - account. The machine trust account will be created on-the-fly, or - updated if it already exists. -

    Windows NT4

    - If the machine trust account was created manually, on the - Identification Changes menu enter the domain name, but do not - check the box Create a Computer Account in the Domain. - In this case, the existing machine trust account is used to join the machine - to the domain. -

    - If the machine trust account is to be created - on-the-fly, on the Identification Changes menu enter the domain - name, and check the box Create a Computer Account in the - Domain. In this case, joining the domain proceeds as above - for Windows 2000 (i.e., you must supply a Samba administrative account when - prompted). -

    Samba

    Joining a Samba client to a domain is documented in - the Domain Member Server section of this chapter chapter. -

    Domain Member Server

    -This mode of server operation involves the Samba machine being made a member -of a domain security context. This means by definition that all user -authentication will be done from a centrally defined authentication regime. -The authentication regime may come from an NT3/4 style (old domain technology) -server, or it may be provided from an Active Directory server (ADS) running on -MS Windows 2000 or later. -

    - -Of course it should be clear that the authentication back end itself could be -from any distributed directory architecture server that is supported by Samba. -This can be LDAP (from OpenLDAP), or Sun's iPlanet, of NetWare Directory -Server, etc. - -

    -Please refer to the Domain Control chapter -for more information regarding how to create a domain -machine account for a domain member server as well as for information -regarding how to enable the Samba domain member machine to join the domain and -to be fully trusted by it. -

    Joining an NT4 type Domain with Samba-3

    -

    Table 7.1. Assumptions

    NetBIOS name:SERV1
    Win2K/NT domain name:DOM
    Domain's PDC NetBIOS name:DOMPDC
    Domain's BDC NetBIOS names:DOMBDC1 and DOMBDC2
    -

    -First, you must edit your smb.conf file to tell Samba it should -now use domain security. -

    -Change (or add) your -security line in the [global] section -of your smb.conf to read: -

    -
    -security = domain
-
    -

    -Next change the -workgroup line in the [global] -section to read: -

    -
    -workgroup = DOM
-
    -

    -as this is the name of the domain we are joining. -

    -You must also have the parameter -encrypt passwords set to yes - in order for your users to authenticate to the NT PDC. -

    -Finally, add (or modify) a -password server line in the [global] -section to read: -

    -
    -password server = DOMPDC DOMBDC1 DOMBDC2
-
    -

    -These are the primary and backup domain controllers Samba -will attempt to contact in order to authenticate users. Samba will -try to contact each of these servers in order, so you may want to -rearrange this list in order to spread out the authentication load -among domain controllers. -

    -Alternatively, if you want smbd to automatically determine -the list of Domain controllers to use for authentication, you may -set this line to be: -

    -
    -password server = *
-
    -

    -This method allows Samba to use exactly the same mechanism that NT does. This -method either broadcasts or uses a WINS database in order to -find domain controllers to authenticate against. -

    -In order to actually join the domain, you must run this command: -

    -
    -root# net join -S DOMPDC -UAdministrator%password
-
    -

    -If the -S DOMPDC argument is not given then -the domain name will be obtained from smb.conf. -

    -As we are joining the domain DOM and the PDC for that domain -(the only machine that has write access to the domain SAM database) -is DOMPDC, we use it for the -S option. -The Administrator%password is -the login name and password for an account which has the necessary -privilege to add machines to the domain. If this is successful -you will see the message: -

    -Joined domain DOM. -or Joined 'SERV1' to realm 'MYREALM' -

    -in your terminal window. See the -net(8) man page for more details. -

    -This process joins the server to the domain without having to create the machine -trust account on the PDC beforehand. -

    -This command goes through the machine account password -change protocol, then writes the new (random) machine account -password for this Samba server into a file in the same directory -in which an smbpasswd file would be stored - normally: -

    -/usr/local/samba/private/secrets.tdb -

    -This file is created and owned by root and is not -readable by any other user. It is the key to the domain-level -security for your system, and should be treated as carefully -as a shadow password file. -

    -Finally, restart your Samba daemons and get ready for -clients to begin using domain security! -

    Why is this better than security = server?

    -Currently, domain security in Samba doesn't free you from -having to create local Unix users to represent the users attaching -to your server. This means that if domain user DOM\fred - attaches to your domain security Samba server, there needs -to be a local Unix user fred to represent that user in the Unix -filesystem. This is very similar to the older Samba security mode -security = server, -where Samba would pass through the authentication request to a Windows -NT server in the same way as a Windows 95 or Windows 98 server would. -

    -Please refer to the Winbind chapter -for information on a system to automatically -assign UNIX uids and gids to Windows NT Domain users and groups. -

    -The advantage to domain-level security is that the -authentication in domain-level security is passed down the authenticated -RPC channel in exactly the same way that an NT server would do it. This -means Samba servers now participate in domain trust relationships in -exactly the same way NT servers do (i.e., you can add Samba servers into -a resource domain and have the authentication passed on from a resource -domain PDC to an account domain PDC). -

    -In addition, with security = server every Samba -daemon on a server has to keep a connection open to the -authenticating server for as long as that daemon lasts. This can drain -the connection resources on a Microsoft NT server and cause it to run -out of available connections. With security = domain, -however, the Samba daemons connect to the PDC/BDC only for as long -as is necessary to authenticate the user, and then drop the connection, -thus conserving PDC connection resources. -

    -And finally, acting in the same manner as an NT server -authenticating to a PDC means that as part of the authentication -reply, the Samba server gets the user identification information such -as the user SID, the list of NT groups the user belongs to, etc. -

    Note

    -Much of the text of this document -was first published in the Web magazine -LinuxWorld as the article Doing -the NIS/NT Samba. -

    Samba ADS Domain Membership

    -This is a rough guide to setting up Samba 3.0 with Kerberos authentication against a -Windows2000 KDC. A familiarity with Kerberos is assumed. -

    Setup your smb.conf

    -You must use at least the following 3 options in smb.conf: -

    -	realm = your.kerberos.REALM
-	security = ADS
-	encrypt passwords = yes
-
    -In case samba can't figure out your ads server using your realm name, use the -ads server option in smb.conf: -
    -	ads server = your.kerberos.server
-
    -

    Note

    -You do not need a smbpasswd file, and older clients will be authenticated as -if security = domain, although it won't do any harm and -allows you to have local users not in the domain. It is expected that the above -required options will change soon when active directory integration will get -better. -

    Setup your /etc/krb5.conf

    -The minimal configuration for krb5.conf is: -

    -        [libdefaults]
-            default_realm = YOUR.KERBEROS.REALM
-
-	[realms]
-	    YOUR.KERBEROS.REALM = {
-		kdc = your.kerberos.server
-	    }
-

    -Test your config by doing a kinit -USERNAME@REALM and -making sure that your password is accepted by the Win2000 KDC. -

    Note

    -The realm must be uppercase or you will get Cannot find KDC for -requested realm while getting initial credentials error. -

    Note

    -Time between the two servers must be synchronized. You will get a -kinit(v5): Clock skew too great while getting initial credentials -if the time difference is more than five minutes. -

    -You also must ensure that you can do a reverse DNS lookup on the IP -address of your KDC. Also, the name that this reverse lookup maps to -must either be the NetBIOS name of the KDC (ie. the hostname with no -domain attached) or it can alternatively be the NetBIOS name -followed by the realm. -

    -The easiest way to ensure you get this right is to add a -/etc/hosts entry mapping the IP address of your KDC to -its NetBIOS name. If you don't get this right then you will get a -local error when you try to join the realm. -

    -If all you want is Kerberos support in smbclient then you can skip -straight to Test with smbclient now. -Creating a computer account -and testing your servers -is only needed if you want Kerberos support for smbd and winbindd. -

    Create the computer account

    -As a user that has write permission on the Samba private directory -(usually root) run: -
    -	root# net join -U Administrator%password
-
    -

    Possible errors

    -
    ADS support not compiled in

    Samba must be reconfigured (remove config.cache) and recompiled - (make clean all install) after the Kerberos libs and headers are installed. -

    net join prompts for user name

    You need to login to the domain using kinit - USERNAME@REALM. - USERNAME must be a user who has rights to add a machine - to the domain.

    -

    Test your server setup

    -If the join was successful, you will see a new computer account with the -NetBIOS name of your Samba server in Active Directory (in the "Computers" -folder under Users and Computers. -

    -On a Windows 2000 client try net use * \\server\share. You should -be logged in with Kerberos without needing to know a password. If -this fails then run klist tickets. Did you get a ticket for the -server? Does it have an encoding type of DES-CBC-MD5 ? -

    Testing with smbclient

    -On your Samba server try to login to a Win2000 server or your Samba -server using smbclient and Kerberos. Use smbclient as usual, but -specify the -k option to choose Kerberos authentication. -

    Notes

    -You must change administrator password at least once after DC -install, to create the right encoding types -

    -W2k doesn't seem to create the _kerberos._udp and _ldap._tcp in -their defaults DNS setup. Maybe fixed in service packs? -

    Common Errors

    -In the process of adding / deleting / re-adding domain member machine accounts there are -many traps for the unwary player and there are many “little” things that can go wrong. -It is particularly interesting how often subscribers on the samba mailing list have concluded -after repeated failed attempts to add a machine account that it is necessary to "re-install" -MS Windows on t he machine. In truth, it is seldom necessary to reinstall because of this type -of problem. The real solution is often very simple, and with understanding of how MS Windows -networking functions. easily overcome. -

    Can Not Add Machine Back to Domain

    -Problem: A Windows workstation was reinstalled. The original domain machine -account was deleted and added immediately. The workstation will not join the domain if I use -the same machine name. Attempts to add the machine fail with a message that the machine already -exists on the network - I know it doesn't. Why is this failing? -

    -The original name is still in the NetBIOS name cache and must expire after machine account -deletion BEFORE adding that same name as a domain member again. The best advice is to delete -the old account and then to add the machine with a new name. -

    Adding Machine to Domain Fails

    -Adding a Windows 200x or XP Professional machine to the Samba PDC Domain fails with a -message that, The machine could not be added at this time, there is a network problem. -Please try again later. Why? -

    -You should check that there is an add machine script in your smb.conf -file. If there is not, please add one that is appropriate for your OS platform. If a script -has been defined you will need to debug it's operation. Increase the log level -in the smb.conf file to level 10, then try to rejoin the domain. Check the logs to see which -operation is failing. -

    -Possible causes include: -

    • - The script does not actually exist, or could not be located in the path specified. -

      - Corrective Action: Fix it. Make sure that when run manually - that the script will add both the Unix system account _and_ the Samba SAM account. -

    • - The machine could not be added to the Unix system accounts file /etc/passwd -

      - Corrective Action: Check that the machine name is a legal Unix - system account name. ie: If the Unix utility useradd is called - then make sure that the machine name you are trying to add can be added using this - tool. Useradd on some systems will not allow any upper case characters - nor will it allow spaces in the name. -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 6. Backup Domain Control Home Chapter 8. Stand-Alone Servers
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/groupmapping.html b/docs/htmldocs/groupmapping.html deleted file mode 100644 index aebddeeb08..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/groupmapping.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,179 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 12. Mapping MS Windows and Unix Groups
    Chapter 12. Mapping MS Windows and Unix Groups
    Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

    Chapter 12. Mapping MS Windows and Unix Groups

    Jean François Micouleau

    Gerald (Jerry) Carter

    Samba Team

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Example Configuration
    Configuration Scripts
    Sample smb.conf add group script
    Script to configure Group Mapping
    Common Errors
    Adding Groups Fails
    Adding MS Windows Groups to MS Windows Groups Fails

    - Starting with Samba-3, new group mapping functionality is available to create associations - between Windows group SIDs and UNIX groups. The groupmap subcommand - included with the net tool can be used to manage these associations. -

    Warning

    - The first immediate reason to use the group mapping on a Samba PDC, is that - the domain admin group has been removed and should no longer - be specified in smb.conf. This parameter was used to give the listed users membership - in the Domain Admins Windows group which gave local admin rights on their workstations - (in default configurations). -

    Features and Benefits

    - Samba allows the administrator to create MS Windows NT4 / 200x group accounts and to - arbitrarily associate them with Unix/Linux group accounts. -

    - Group accounts can be managed using the MS Windows NT4 or MS Windows 200x MMC tools - so long as appropriate interface scripts have been provided to smb.conf. -

    - Administrators should be aware that where smb.conf group interface scripts make - direct calls to the Unix/Linux system tools (eg: the shadow utilities, groupadd, - groupdel, groupmod) then the resulting Unix/Linux group names will be subject - to any limits imposed by these tools. If the tool does NOT allow upper case characters - or space characters, then the creation of an MS Windows NT4 / 200x style group of - Engineering Managers will attempt to create an identically named - Unix/Linux group, an attempt that will of course fail! -

    - There are several possible work-arounds for the operating system tools limitation. One - method is to use a script that generates a name for the Unix/Linux system group that - fits the operating system limits, and that then just passes the Unix/Linux group id (GID) - back to the calling Samba interface. This will provide a dynamic work-around solution. -

    - Another work-around is to manually create a Unix/Linux group, then manually create the - MS Windows NT4 / 200x group on the Samba server and then use the net groupmap - tool to connect the two to each other. -

    Discussion

    - When installing MS Windows NT4 / 200x on a computer, the installation - program creates default users and groups, notably the Administrators group, - and gives that group privileges necessary privileges to perform essential system tasks. - eg: Ability to change the date and time or to kill (or close) any process running on the - local machine. -

    - The 'Administrator' user is a member of the 'Administrators' group, and thus inherits - 'Administrators' group privileges. If a 'joe' user is created to be a member of the - 'Administrator' group, 'joe' has exactly the same rights as 'Administrator'. -

    - When an MS Windows NT4 / W200x is made a domain member, the "Domain Admins" group of the - PDC is added to the local 'Administrators' group of the workstation. Every member of the - 'Domain Administrators' group inherits the rights of the local 'Administrators' group when - logging on the workstation. -

    - The following steps describe how to make Samba PDC users members of the 'Domain Admins' group? -

    1. - create a unix group (usually in /etc/group), let's call it domadm -

    2. add to this group the users that must be Administrators. For example - if you want joe, john and mary, your entry in /etc/group will - look like: - 

      -		domadm:x:502:joe,john,mary
-
      -

    3. - Map this domadm group to the "Domain Admins" group by running the command: -

      - 
      -		root# net groupmap add ntgroup="Domain Admins" unixgroup=domadm
-
      -

      - The quotes around "Domain Admins" are necessary due to the space in the group name. - Also make sure to leave no whitespace surrounding the equal character (=). -

    - Now joe, john and mary are domain administrators! -

    - It is possible to map any arbitrary UNIX group to any Windows NT4 / 200x group as well as - making any UNIX group a Windows domain group. For example, if you wanted to include a - UNIX group (e.g. acct) in a ACL on a local file or printer on a domain member machine, - you would flag that group as a domain group by running the following on the Samba PDC: -

    - 
    -	root# net groupmap add rid=1000 ntgroup="Accounting" unixgroup=acct
-
    -

    - Be aware that the RID parameter is a unsigned 32 bit integer that should - normally start at 1000. However, this rid must not overlap with any RID assigned - to a user. Verifying this is done differently depending on on the passdb backend - you are using. Future versions of the tools may perform the verification automatically, - but for now the burden is on you. -

    Example Configuration

    - You can list the various groups in the mapping database by executing - net groupmap list. Here is an example: -

    - 
    -		root#  net groupmap list
-		System Administrators (S-1-5-21-2547222302-1596225915-2414751004-1002) -> sysadmin
-		Domain Admins (S-1-5-21-2547222302-1596225915-2414751004-512) -> domadmin
-		Domain Users (S-1-5-21-2547222302-1596225915-2414751004-513) -> domuser
-		Domain Guests (S-1-5-21-2547222302-1596225915-2414751004-514) -> domguest
-
    -

    - For complete details on net groupmap, refer to the net(8) man page. -

    Configuration Scripts

    - Everyone needs tools. Some of us like to create our own, others prefer to use canned tools - (ie: prepared by someone else for general use). -

    Sample smb.conf add group script

    - A script to great complying group names for use by the Samba group interfaces: -

    -

    Example 12.1. smbgrpadd.sh

    -
-#!/bin/bash
-
-# Add the group using normal system groupadd tool.
-groupadd smbtmpgrp00
-
-thegid=`cat /etc/group | grep smbtmpgrp00 | cut -d ":" -f3`
-
-# Now change the name to what we want for the MS Windows networking end
-cp /etc/group /etc/group.bak
-cat /etc/group.bak | sed s/smbtmpgrp00/$1/g > /etc/group
-
-# Now return the GID as would normally happen.
-echo $thegid
-exit 0
-
    - - The smb.conf entry for the above script would look like: - 
    -		add group script = /path_to_tool/smbgrpadd.sh %g
-
    -

    Script to configure Group Mapping

    - In our example we have created a Unix/Linux group called ntadmin. - Our script will create the additional groups Engineers, Marketoids, Gnomes: -

    -
    -#!/bin/bash
-
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Domain Admins" unixgroup=ntadmin
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Domain Users" unixgroup=users
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Domain Guests" unixgroup=nobody
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Administrators" unixgroup=root
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Users" unixgroup=users
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Guests" unixgroup=nobody
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="System Operators" unixgroup=sys
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Account Operators" unixgroup=root
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Backup Operators" unixgroup=bin
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Print Operators" unixgroup=lp
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Replicators" unixgroup=daemon
-net groupmap modify ntgroup="Power Users" unixgroup=sys
-
-#groupadd Engineers
-#groupadd Marketoids
-#groupadd Gnomes
-
-#net groupmap add ntgroup="Engineers"  unixgroup=Engineers    type=d
-#net groupmap add ntgroup="Marketoids" unixgroup=Marketoids   type=d
-#net groupmap add ntgroup="Gnomes"     unixgroup=Gnomes       type=d
-
    -

    - Of course it is expected that the administrator will modify this to suit local needs. - For information regarding the use of the net groupmap tool please - refer to the man page. -

    Common Errors

    -At this time there are many little surprises for the unwary administrator. In a real sense -it is imperative that every step of automated control scripts must be carefully tested -manually before putting them into active service. -

    Adding Groups Fails

    - This is a common problem when the groupadd is called directly - by the Samba interface script for the add group script in - the smb.conf file. -

    - The most common cause of failure is an attempt to add an MS Windows group account - that has either an upper case character and/or a space character in it. -

    - There are three possible work-arounds. Firstly, use only group names that comply - with the limitations of the Unix/Linux groupadd system tool. - The second involves use of the script mentioned earlier in this chapter, and the - third option is to manually create a Unix/Linux group account that can substitute - for the MS Windows group name, then use the procedure listed above to map that group - to the MS Windows group. -

    Adding MS Windows Groups to MS Windows Groups Fails

    - Samba-3 does NOT support nested groups from the MS Windows control environment. -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 11. Account Information Databases Home Chapter 13. File, Directory and Share Access Controls
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/index.html b/docs/htmldocs/index.html deleted file mode 100755 index fb21bbe639..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/index.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,77 +0,0 @@ - -SAMBA Project Documentation
    SAMBA Project Documentation
       Next

    SAMBA Project Documentation

    Edited by

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    John H. Terpstra

    Gerald (Jerry) Carter

    -This documentation is distributed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) -version 2. A copy of the license is included with the Samba source -distribution. A copy can be found on-line at http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.txt -

    Attributions.  -
    Introduction to Samba
    How to Install and Test SAMBA
    Fast Start for the Impatient
    Server Types and Security Modes
    Domain Control
    Backup Domain Control
    Domain Membership
    Stand-Alone Servers
    MS Windows Network Configuration Guide
    Samba / MS Windows Network Browsing Guide
    Account Information Databases
    Mapping MS Windows and Unix Groups
    File, Directory and Share Access Controls
    File and Record Locking
    Securing Samba
    Interdomain Trust Relationships
    Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba
    Classical Printing Support
    CUPS Printing Support in Samba 3.0
    Stackable VFS modules

    • Jelmer Vernooij <jelmer@samba.org>

    • John Terpstra <jht@samba.org>

    • Tim Potter

    • Simo Sorce (original vfs_skel README)

    • Alexander Bokovoy (original vfs_netatalk docs)

    • Stefan Metzmacher (Update for multiple modules)

    Integrated Logon Support using Winbind
    Advanced Network Management
    System and Account Policies
    Desktop Profile Management
    PAM based Distributed Authentication
    Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba
    Unicode/Charsets
    Samba Backup Techniques
    High Availability Options
    Upgrading from Samba-2.x to Samba-3.0.0
    Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC
    SWAT - The Samba Web Administration Tool
    The Samba checklist
    Analysing and solving samba problems
    Reporting Bugs
    How to compile SAMBA
    Portability
    Samba and other CIFS clients
    Samba Performance Tuning
    DNS and DHCP Configuration Guide
    Further Resources
    - -

    Monday April 21, 2003

    Abstract

    -This book is a collection of HOWTOs added to Samba documentation over the years. -Samba is always under development, and so is its' documentation. This release of the -documentation represents a major revision or layout as well as contents. -The most recent version of this document can be found at -http://www.samba.org/ -on the "Documentation" page. Please send updates to -Jelmer Vernooij, -John H. Terpstra or -Gerald (Jerry) Carter. -

    -The Samba-Team would like to express sincere thanks to the many people who have with -or without their knowledge contributed to this update. The size and scope of this -project would not have been possible without significant community contribution. A not -insignificant number of ideas for inclusion (if not content itself) has been obtained -from a number of Unofficial HOWTOs - to each such author a big "Thank-you" is also offered. -Please keep publishing your Unofficial HOWTOs - they are a source of inspiration and -application knowledge that is most to be desired by many Samba users and administrators. -

    Table of Contents

    I. General Installation
    1. Introduction to Samba
    Background
    Terminology
    Related Projects
    SMB Methodology
    Epilogue
    Miscellaneous
    2. How to Install and Test SAMBA
    Obtaining and installing samba
    Configuring samba (smb.conf)
    Example Configuration
    SWAT
    Try listing the shares available on your - server
    Try connecting with the unix client
    Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, - Win2k, OS/2, etc... client
    What If Things Don't Work?
    Common Errors
    Why are so many smbd processes eating memory?
    I'm getting "open_oplock_ipc: Failed to get local UDP socket for address 100007f. Error was Cannot assign requested" in the logs
    3. Fast Start for the Impatient
    Note
    II. Server Configuration Basics
    4. Server Types and Security Modes
    Features and Benefits
    Server Types
    Samba Security Modes
    User Level Security
    Share Level Security
    Domain Security Mode (User Level Security)
    ADS Security Mode (User Level Security)
    Server Security (User Level Security)
    Seamless Windows Network Integration
    Common Errors
    What makes Samba a SERVER?
    What makes Samba a Domain Controller?
    What makes Samba a Domain Member?
    Constantly Losing Connections to Password Server
    5. Domain Control
    Features and Benefits
    Basics of Domain Control
    Domain Controller Types
    Preparing for Domain Control
    Domain Control - Example Configuration
    Samba ADS Domain Control
    Domain and Network Logon Configuration
    Domain Network Logon Service
    Security Mode and Master Browsers
    Common Problems and Errors
    I cannot include a '$' in a machine name
    I get told "You already have a connection to the Domain...." -or "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied conflict with an -existing set.." when creating a machine trust account.
    The system can not log you on (C000019B)....
    The machine trust account for this computer either does not -exist or is not accessible.
    When I attempt to login to a Samba Domain from a NT4/W2K workstation, -I get a message about my account being disabled.
    Until a few minutes after Samba has started, clients get the error "Domain Controller Unavailable"
    6. Backup Domain Control
    Features And Benefits
    Essential Background Information
    MS Windows NT4 Style Domain Control
    Active Directory Domain Control
    What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?
    How does a Workstation find its domain controller?
    Backup Domain Controller Configuration
    Example Configuration
    Common Errors
    Machine Accounts keep expiring, what can I do?
    Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT4 PDC?
    How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?
    Can I do this all with LDAP?
    7. Domain Membership
    Features and Benefits
    MS Windows Workstation/Server Machine Trust Accounts
    Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts
    Using NT4 Server Manager to Add Machine Accounts to the Domain
    "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts
    Making an MS Windows Workstation or Server a Domain Member
    Domain Member Server
    Joining an NT4 type Domain with Samba-3
    Why is this better than security = server?
    Samba ADS Domain Membership
    Setup your smb.conf
    Setup your /etc/krb5.conf
    Create the computer account
    Test your server setup
    Testing with smbclient
    Notes
    Common Errors
    Can Not Add Machine Back to Domain
    Adding Machine to Domain Fails
    8. Stand-Alone Servers
    Features and Benefits
    Background
    Example Configuration
    Reference Documentation Server
    Central Print Serving
    Common Errors
    9. MS Windows Network Configuration Guide
    Note
    III. Advanced Configuration
    10. Samba / MS Windows Network Browsing Guide
    Features and Benefits
    What is Browsing?
    Discussion
    NetBIOS over TCP/IP
    TCP/IP - without NetBIOS
    DNS and Active Directory
    How Browsing Functions
    Setting up WORKGROUP Browsing
    Setting up DOMAIN Browsing
    Forcing Samba to be the master
    Making Samba the domain master
    Note about broadcast addresses
    Multiple interfaces
    Use of the Remote Announce parameter
    Use of the Remote Browse Sync parameter
    WINS - The Windows Internetworking Name Server
    Setting up a WINS server
    WINS Replication
    Static WINS Entries
    Helpful Hints
    Windows Networking Protocols
    Name Resolution Order
    Technical Overview of browsing
    Browsing support in Samba
    Problem resolution
    Browsing across subnets
    Common Errors
    How can one flush the Samba NetBIOS name cache without restarting Samba?
    My client reports "This server is not configured to list shared resources"
    11. Account Information Databases
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Information
    Important Notes About Security
    Mapping User Identifiers between MS Windows and Unix
    Account Management Tools
    The smbpasswd Command
    The pdbedit Command
    Password Backends
    Plain Text
    smbpasswd - Encrypted Password Database
    tdbsam
    ldapsam
    MySQL
    XML
    Common Errors
    Users can not logon - Users not in Samba SAM
    Users are being added to the wrong backend database
    auth methods does not work
    12. Mapping MS Windows and Unix Groups
    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Example Configuration
    Configuration Scripts
    Sample smb.conf add group script
    Script to configure Group Mapping
    Common Errors
    Adding Groups Fails
    Adding MS Windows Groups to MS Windows Groups Fails
    13. File, Directory and Share Access Controls
    Features and Benefits
    File System Access Controls
    MS Windows NTFS Comparison with Unix File Systems
    Managing Directories
    File and Directory Access Control
    Share Definition Access Controls
    User and Group Based Controls
    File and Directory Permissions Based Controls
    Miscellaneous Controls
    Access Controls on Shares
    Share Permissions Management
    MS Windows Access Control Lists and Unix Interoperability
    Managing UNIX permissions Using NT Security Dialogs
    Viewing File Security on a Samba Share
    Viewing file ownership
    Viewing File or Directory Permissions
    Modifying file or directory permissions
    Interaction with the standard Samba create mask - parameters
    Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute - mapping
    Common Errors
    Users can not write to a public share
    I have set force user and Samba still makes root the owner of all the files - I touch!
    14. File and Record Locking
    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Opportunistic Locking Overview
    Samba Opportunistic Locking Control
    Example Configuration
    MS Windows Opportunistic Locking and Caching Controls
    Workstation Service Entries
    Server Service Entries
    Persistent Data Corruption
    Common Errors
    locking.tdb error messages
    Additional Reading
    15. Securing Samba
    Introduction
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Discussion of Protective Measures and Issues
    Using host based protection
    User based protection
    Using interface protection
    Using a firewall
    Using a IPC$ share deny
    NTLMv2 Security
    Upgrading Samba
    Common Errors
    Smbclient works on localhost, but the network is dead
    Why can users access home directories of other users?
    16. Interdomain Trust Relationships
    Features and Benefits
    Trust Relationship Background
    Native MS Windows NT4 Trusts Configuration
    NT4 as the Trusting Domain (ie. creating the trusted account)
    NT4 as the Trusted Domain (ie. creating trusted account's password)
    Configuring Samba NT-style Domain Trusts
    Samba-3 as the Trusting Domain
    Samba-3 as the Trusted Domain
    Common Errors
    Tell me about Trust Relationships using Samba
    17. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba
    Features and Benefits
    Common Errors
    18. Classical Printing Support
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Introduction
    What happens if you send a Job from a Client
    Printing Related Configuration Parameters
    Parameters Recommended for Use
    Parameters for Backwards Compatibility
    Parameters no longer in use
    A simple Configuration to Print with Samba-3
    Verification of "Settings in Use" with testparm
    A little Experiment to warn you
    Extended Sample Configuration to Print with Samba-3
    Detailed Explanation of the Example's Settings
    The [global] Section
    The [printers] Section
    Any [my_printer_name] Section
    Print Commands
    Default Print Commands for various Unix Print Subsystems
    Setting up your own Print Commands
    Innovations in Samba Printing since 2.2
    Client Drivers on Samba Server for Point'n'Print
    The [printer$] Section is removed from Samba-3
    Creating the [print$] Share
    Parameters in the [print$] Section
    Subdirectory Structure in [print$]
    Installing Drivers into [print$]
    Setting Drivers for existing Printers with a Client GUI
    Setting Drivers for existing Printers with -rpcclient
    "The Proof of the Pudding lies in the Eating" (Client Driver Install -Procedure)
    The first Client Driver Installation
    IMPORTANT! Setting Device Modes on new Printers
    Further Client Driver Install Procedures
    Always make first Client Connection as root or "printer admin"
    Other Gotchas
    Setting Default Print Options for the Client Drivers
    Supporting large Numbers of Printers
    Adding new Printers with the Windows NT APW
    Weird Error Message Cannot connect under a -different Name
    Be careful when assembling Driver Files
    Samba and Printer Ports
    Avoiding the most common Misconfigurations of the Client Driver
    The Imprints Toolset
    What is Imprints?
    Creating Printer Driver Packages
    The Imprints Server
    The Installation Client
    Add Network Printers at Logon without User Interaction
    The addprinter command
    Migration of "Classical" printing to Samba-3
    Publishing Printer Information in Active Directory or LDAP
    Common Errors and Problems
    I give my root password but I don't get access
    My printjobs get spooled into the spooling directory, but then get lost
    19. CUPS Printing Support in Samba 3.0
    Introduction
    Features and Benefits
    Overview
    Basic Configuration of CUPS support
    Linking of smbd with libcups.so
    Simple smb.conf Settings for CUPS
    More complex smb.conf Settings for -CUPS
    Advanced Configuration
    Central spooling vs. "Peer-to-Peer" printing
    CUPS/Samba as a "spooling-only" Print Server; "raw" printing -with Vendor Drivers on Windows Clients
    Driver Installation Methods on Windows Clients
    Explicitly enable "raw" printing for -application/octet-stream!
    Three familiar Methods for driver upload plus a new one
    Using CUPS/Samba in an advanced Way -- intelligent printing -with PostScript Driver Download
    GDI on Windows -- PostScript on Unix
    Windows Drivers, GDI and EMF
    Unix Printfile Conversion and GUI Basics
    PostScript and Ghostscript
    Ghostscript -- the Software RIP for non-PostScript Printers
    PostScript Printer Description (PPD) Specification
    CUPS can use all Windows-formatted Vendor PPDs
    CUPS also uses PPDs for non-PostScript Printers
    The CUPS Filtering Architecture
    MIME types and CUPS Filters
    MIME type Conversion Rules
    Filter Requirements
    Prefilters
    pstops
    pstoraster
    imagetops and imagetoraster
    rasterto [printers specific]
    CUPS Backends
    cupsomatic/Foomatic -- how do they fit into the Picture?
    The Complete Picture
    mime.convs
    "Raw" printing
    "application/octet-stream" printing
    PostScript Printer Descriptions (PPDs) for non-PS Printers
    Difference between cupsomatic/foomatic-rip and -native CUPS printing
    Examples for filtering Chains
    Sources of CUPS drivers / PPDs
    Printing with Interface Scripts
    Network printing (purely Windows)
    From Windows Clients to an NT Print Server
    Driver Execution on the Client
    Driver Execution on the Server
    Network Printing (Windows clients -- UNIX/Samba Print -Servers)
    From Windows Clients to a CUPS/Samba Print Server
    Samba receiving Jobfiles and passing them to CUPS
    Network PostScript RIP: CUPS Filters on Server -- clients use -PostScript Driver with CUPS-PPDs
    PPDs for non-PS Printers on UNIX
    PPDs for non-PS Printers on Windows
    Windows Terminal Servers (WTS) as CUPS Clients
    Printer Drivers running in "Kernel Mode" cause many -Problems
    Workarounds impose Heavy Limitations
    CUPS: a "Magical Stone"?
    PostScript Drivers with no major problems -- even in Kernel -Mode
    Setting up CUPS for driver Download
    cupsaddsmb: the unknown Utility
    Prepare your smb.conf for -cupsaddsmb
    CUPS Package of "PostScript Driver for WinNT/2k/XP"
    Recognize the different Driver Files
    Acquiring the Adobe Driver Files
    ESP Print Pro Package of "PostScript Driver for -WinNT/2k/XP"
    Caveats to be considered
    What are the Benefits of using the "CUPS PostScript Driver for -Windows NT/2k/XP" as compared to the Adobe Driver?
    Run "cupsaddsmb" (quiet Mode)
    Run "cupsaddsmb" with verbose Output
    Understanding cupsaddsmb
    How to recognize if cupsaddsm completed successfully
    cupsaddsmb with a Samba PDC
    cupsaddsmb Flowchart
    Installing the PostScript Driver on a Client
    Avoiding critical PostScript Driver Settings on the -Client
    Installing PostScript Driver Files manually (using -rpcclient)
    A Check of the rpcclient man Page
    Understanding the rpcclient man Page
    Producing an Example by querying a Windows Box
    What is required for adddriver and setdriver to succeed
    Manual Commandline Driver Installation in 15 little Steps
    Troubleshooting revisited
    The printing *.tdb Files
    Trivial DataBase Files
    Binary Format
    Losing *.tdb Files
    Using tdbbackup
    CUPS Print Drivers from Linuxprinting.org
    foomatic-rip and Foomatic explained
    foomatic-rip and Foomatic-PPD Download and Installation
    Page Accounting with CUPS
    Setting up Quotas
    Correct and incorrect Accounting
    Adobe and CUPS PostScript Drivers for Windows Clients
    The page_log File Syntax
    Possible Shortcomings
    Future Developments
    Other Accounting Tools
    Additional Material
    Auto-Deletion or Preservation of CUPS Spool Files
    CUPS Configuration Settings explained
    Pre-conditions
    Manual Configuration
    When not to use Samba to print to -CUPS
    In Case of Trouble.....
    Where to find Documentation
    How to ask for Help
    Where to find Help
    Appendix
    Printing from CUPS to Windows attached -Printers
    More CUPS filtering Chains
    Trouble Shooting Guidelines to fix typical Samba printing -Problems
    An Overview of the CUPS Printing Processes
    20. Stackable VFS modules
    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Included modules
    audit
    extd_audit
    fake_perms
    recycle
    netatalk
    VFS modules available elsewhere
    DatabaseFS
    vscan
    Common Errors
    21. Integrated Logon Support using Winbind
    Features and Benefits
    Introduction
    What Winbind Provides
    Target Uses
    How Winbind Works
    Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls
    Microsoft Active Directory Services
    Name Service Switch
    Pluggable Authentication Modules
    User and Group ID Allocation
    Result Caching
    Installation and Configuration
    Introduction
    Requirements
    Testing Things Out
    Conclusion
    Common Errors
    22. Advanced Network Management
    Features and Benefits
    Remote Server Administration
    Remote Desktop Management
    Remote Management from NoMachines.Com
    Network Logon Script Magic
    Adding printers without user intervention
    Common Errors
    23. System and Account Policies
    Features and Benefits
    Creating and Managing System Policies
    Windows 9x/Me Policies
    Windows NT4 Style Policy Files
    MS Windows 200x / XP Professional Policies
    Managing Account/User Policies
    Samba Editreg Toolset
    Windows NT4/200x
    Samba PDC
    System Startup and Logon Processing Overview
    Common Errors
    Policy Does Not Work
    24. Desktop Profile Management
    Features and Benefits
    Roaming Profiles
    Samba Configuration for Profile Handling
    Windows Client Profile Configuration Information
    Sharing Profiles between W9x/Me and NT4/200x/XP workstations
    Profile Migration from Windows NT4/200x Server to Samba
    Mandatory profiles
    Creating/Managing Group Profiles
    Default Profile for Windows Users
    MS Windows 9x/Me
    MS Windows NT4 Workstation
    MS Windows 200x/XP
    Common Errors
    How does one set up roaming profiles for just one (or a few) user/s or group/s?
    Can NOT use Roaming Profiles
    Changing the default profile
    25. PAM based Distributed Authentication
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Discussion
    PAM Configuration Syntax
    Example System Configurations
    smb.conf PAM Configuration
    Remote CIFS Authentication using winbindd.so
    Password Synchronization using pam_smbpass.so
    Common Errors
    pam_winbind problem
    26. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba
    Features and Benefits
    Background Information
    Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world
    /etc/hosts
    /etc/resolv.conf
    /etc/host.conf
    /etc/nsswitch.conf
    Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking
    The NetBIOS Name Cache
    The LMHOSTS file
    HOSTS file
    DNS Lookup
    WINS Lookup
    Common Errors
    My Boomerang Won't Come Back
    Very Slow Network Connections
    Samba server name change problem
    27. Unicode/Charsets
    Features and Benefits
    What are charsets and unicode?
    Samba and charsets
    Conversion from old names
    Japanese charsets
    28. Samba Backup Techniques
    Note
    Features and Benefits
    29. High Availability Options
    Note
    IV. Migration and Updating
    30. Upgrading from Samba-2.x to Samba-3.0.0
    Charsets
    Obsolete configuration options
    Password Backend
    31. Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC
    Planning and Getting Started
    Objectives
    Steps In Migration Process
    Migration Options
    Planning for Success
    Samba Implementation Choices
    32. SWAT - The Samba Web Administration Tool
    Features and Benefits
    Enabling SWAT for use
    Securing SWAT through SSL
    The SWAT Home Page
    Global Settings
    Share Settings
    Printers Settings
    The SWAT Wizard
    The Status Page
    The View Page
    The Password Change Page
    V. Troubleshooting
    33. The Samba checklist
    Introduction
    Assumptions
    The tests
    Still having troubles?
    34. Analysing and solving samba problems
    Diagnostics tools
    Installing 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation or a Windows 9x box
    Useful URLs
    Getting help from the mailing lists
    How to get off the mailing lists
    35. Reporting Bugs
    Introduction
    General info
    Debug levels
    Internal errors
    Attaching to a running process
    Patches
    VI. Appendixes
    36. How to compile SAMBA
    Access Samba source code via CVS
    Introduction
    CVS Access to samba.org
    Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp
    Verifying Samba's PGP signature
    Building the Binaries
    Compiling samba with Active Directory support
    Starting the smbd and nmbd
    Starting from inetd.conf
    Alternative: starting it as a daemon
    Common Errors
    37. Portability
    HPUX
    SCO Unix
    DNIX
    RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II
    AIX
    Sequential Read Ahead
    Solaris
    Locking improvements
    Winbind on Solaris 9
    38. Samba and other CIFS clients
    Macintosh clients?
    OS2 Client
    How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or - OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?
    How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), - OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?
    How do I get printer driver download working - for OS/2 clients?
    Windows for Workgroups
    Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft
    Delete .pwl files after password change
    Configure WfW password handling
    Case handling of passwords
    Use TCP/IP as default protocol
    Speed improvement
    Windows '95/'98
    Speed improvement
    Windows 2000 Service Pack 2
    Windows NT 3.1
    39. Samba Performance Tuning
    Comparisons
    Socket options
    Read size
    Max xmit
    Log level
    Read raw
    Write raw
    Slow Logins
    Client tuning
    Samba performance problem due changing kernel
    Corrupt tdb Files
    40. DNS and DHCP Configuration Guide
    Note
    41. Further Resources
    Websites
    Related updates from Microsoft
    Books
    Index

    List of Figures

    19.1. Windows Printing to a local Printer
    19.2. Printing to a Postscript Printer
    19.3. Ghostscript as a RIP for non-postscript printers
    19.4. Prefiltering in CUPS to form Postscript
    19.5. Adding Device-specific Print Options
    19.6. Postscript to intermediate Raster format
    19.7. CUPS-raster production using Ghostscript
    19.8. Image format to CUPS-raster format conversion
    19.9. Raster to Printer Specific formats
    19.10. cupsomatic/foomatic processing versus Native CUPS
    19.11. Print Driver execution on the Client
    19.12. Print Driver execution on the Server
    19.13. Printing via CUPS/samba server
    19.14. cupsaddsmb flowchart
    19.15. CUPS Printing Overview

    List of Tables

    7.1. Assumptions
    10.1. Browse subnet example 1
    10.2. Browse subnet example 2
    10.3. Browse subnet example 3
    10.4. Browse subnet example 4
    11.1. Attributes in the sambaSamAccount objectclass (LDAP)
    11.2. Basic smb.conf options for MySQL passdb backend
    11.3. MySQL field names for MySQL passdb backend
    13.1. Managing directories with unix and windows
    13.2. User and Group Based Controls
    13.3. File and Directory Permission Based Controls
    13.4. Other Controls
    20.1. Extended Auditing Log Information
    24.1. User Shell Folder registry keys default values
    24.2. Defaults of profile settings registry keys
    24.3. Defaults of default user profile paths registry keys
    25.1. Options recognized by pam_smbpass
    31.1. The 3 Major Site Types
    31.2. Nature of the Conversion Choices

    List of Examples

    12.1. smbgrpadd.sh
    13.1. Example File
       Next
       Part I. General Installation
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/install.html b/docs/htmldocs/install.html index d602d123c7..02264c558d 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/install.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/install.html @@ -1,49 +1,39 @@ - -Chapter 2. How to Install and Test SAMBA
    Chapter 2. How to Install and Test SAMBA
    Prev Part I. General Installation Next

    Chapter 2. How to Install and Test SAMBA

    Andrew Tridgell

    Samba Team

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    The Samba Team

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Karl Auer

    Table of Contents

    Obtaining and installing samba
    Configuring samba (smb.conf)
    Example Configuration
    SWAT
    Try listing the shares available on your - server
    Try connecting with the unix client
    Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, - Win2k, OS/2, etc... client
    What If Things Don't Work?
    Common Errors
    Why are so many smbd processes eating memory?
    I'm getting "open_oplock_ipc: Failed to get local UDP socket for address 100007f. Error was Cannot assign requested" in the logs

    Obtaining and installing samba

    +Chapter 2. How to Install and Test SAMBA

    Chapter 2. How to Install and Test SAMBA
    Prev Part I. General Installation Next

    Chapter 2. How to Install and Test SAMBA

    Andrew Tridgell

    Samba Team

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    The Samba Team

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Karl Auer

    Table of Contents

    Obtaining and installing samba
    Configuring samba (smb.conf)
    Example Configuration
    SWAT
    Try listing the shares available on your + server
    Try connecting with the unix client
    Try connecting from another SMB client
    What If Things Don't Work?
    Common Errors
    Large number of smbd processes
    "open_oplock_ipc: Failed to get local UDP socket for address 100007f. Error was Cannot assign requested"
    "The network name cannot be found"

    Obtaining and installing samba

    Binary packages of samba are included in almost any Linux or - Unix distribution. There are also some packages available at + UNIX distribution. There are also some packages available at the samba homepage. -

    If you need to compile samba from source, check the - appropriate appendix chapter.

    If you have already installed samba, or if your operating system +

    If you need to compile samba from source, check + the chapter about compiling samba from scratch.

    If you have already installed samba, or if your operating system was pre-installed with samba, then you may not need to bother with this chapter. On the other hand, you may want to read this chapter anyhow - for information about updating samba.

    Configuring samba (smb.conf)

    + for information about updating samba.

    Configuring samba (smb.conf)

    Samba's configuration is stored in the smb.conf file, that usually resides in /etc/samba/smb.conf or /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf. You can either edit this file yourself or do it using one of the many graphical tools that are available, such as the web-based interface swat, that is included with samba. -

    Example Configuration

    +

    Example Configuration

    There are sample configuration files in the examples subdirectory in the distribution. I suggest you read them carefully so you can see how the options go together in practice. See the man page for all the options.

    The simplest useful configuration file would be something like this: -

    - 
    -	[global]
-		workgroup = MYGROUP
-
-	[homes]
-		guest ok = no
-		read only = no
-
    -

    +

    +

    Example 2.1. Simplest possible smb.conf file

    [global]
    workgroup = MIDEARTH
    [homes]
    guest ok = no
    read only = no

    +

    This will allow connections by anyone with an account on the server, using either - their login name or "homes" as the service name. + their login name or homes" as the service name. (Note that the workgroup that Samba must also be set.)

    - Make sure you put the smb.conf file in the same place - you specified in the Makefile (the default is to - look for it in /usr/local/samba/lib/). + Make sure you put the smb.conf file in the correct place + (usually in /etc/samba).

    For more information about security settings for the - [homes] share please refer to the chapter - Securing Samba. -

    Test your config file with testparm

    + [homes] share please refer to + "Securing Samba". +

    Test your config file with testparm

    It's important that you test the validity of your smb.conf file using the testparm program. If testparm runs OK then it will list the loaded services. If not it will give an error message. @@ -51,7 +41,7 @@ Make sure it runs OK and that the services look reasonable before proceeding.

    Always run testparm again when you change smb.conf! -

    SWAT

    +

    SWAT

    SWAT is a web-based interface that helps you configure samba. SWAT might not be available in the samba package on your platform, but in a separate package. Please read the swat manpage @@ -67,9 +57,10 @@ machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent in the clear over the wire. -

    Try listing the shares available on your - server

    $ smbclient -L - yourhostname

    You should get back a list of shares available on +

    Try listing the shares available on your + server

    +$ smbclient -L yourhostname
+

    You should get back a list of shares available on your server. If you don't then something is incorrectly setup. Note that this method can also be used to see what shares are available on other LanManager clients (such as WfWg).

    If you choose user level security then you may find @@ -77,68 +68,31 @@ See the smbclient man page for details. (you can force it to list the shares without a password by adding the option -U% to the command line. This will not work - with non-Samba servers)

    Try connecting with the unix client

    $ smbclient - //yourhostname/aservice

    Typically the yourhostname + with non-Samba servers)

    Try connecting with the unix client

    +

    +$ smbclient  //yourhostname/aservice
+

    Typically the yourhostname would be the name of the host where you installed smbd. The aservice is any service you have defined in the smb.conf file. Try your user name if you just have a [homes] section in smb.conf.

    For example if your unix host is bambi - and your login name is fred you would type:

    $ smbclient //bambi/fred -

    Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, - Win2k, OS/2, etc... client

    Try mounting disks. eg:

    C:\WINDOWS\> net use d: \\servername\service -

    Try printing. eg:

    C:\WINDOWS\> net use lpt1: - \\servername\spoolservice

    C:\WINDOWS\> print filename -

    What If Things Don't Work?

    Then you might read the file chapter - Diagnosis and the - FAQ. If you are still stuck then try to follow - the Analysing and Solving Problems chapter + and your login name is fred you would type:

    +$ smbclient //bambi/fred
+

    Try connecting from another SMB client

    Try mounting disks. from a DOS, Windows or OS/2 client, eg:

    +C:\> net use d: \\servername\service
+

    Try printing. eg:

    +

    +C:\> net use lpt1:	\\servername\spoolservice
+

    +

    C:\> print filename
+

    What If Things Don't Work?

    Then you might read the file chapter diagnosis + and the FAQ. If you are still stuck then refer to "Analysing and solving problems". Samba has been successfully installed at thousands of sites worldwide, - so maybe someone else has hit your problem and has overcome it.

    Common Errors

    + so maybe someone else has hit your problem and has overcome it.

    Common Errors

    The following questions and issues get raised on the samba mailing list over and over again. -

    Why are so many smbd processes eating memory?

    -“ -Site that is running Samba on an AIX box. They are sharing out about 2 terabytes using samba. -Samba was installed using smitty and the binaries. We seem to be experiencing a memory problem -with this box. When I do a svmon -Pu the monitoring program shows that smbd has several -processes of smbd running: -” -

    - “ -Is samba suppose to start this many different smbd processes? Or does it run as one smbd process? Also -is it normal for it to be taking up this much memory? -” -

    -
    -Inuse * 4096 = amount of memory being used by this process
-
-     Pid Command        Inuse      Pin     Pgsp  Virtual   64-bit    Mthrd
-   20950 smbd           33098     1906      181     5017        N        N
-   22262 smbd            9104     1906      5410
-   21060 smbd            9048     1906      181     5479        N        N
-   25972 smbd            8678     1906      181     5109        N        N
-   24524 smbd            8674     1906      181     5105        N        N
-   19262 smbd            8582     1906      181     5013        N        N
-   20722 smbd            8572     1906      181     5003        N        N
-   21454 smbd            8572     1906      181     5003        N        N
-   28946 smbd            8567     1906      181     4996        N        N
-   24076 smbd            8566     1906      181     4996        N        N
-   20138 smbd            8566     1906      181     4996        N        N
-   17608 smbd            8565     1906      181     4996        N        N
-   21820 smbd            8565     1906      181     4996        N        N
-   26940 smbd            8565     1906      181     4996        N        N
-   19884 smbd            8565     1906      181     4996        N        N
-    9912 smbd            8565     1906      181     4996        N        N
-   25800 smbd            8564     1906      181     4995        N        N
-   20452 smbd            8564     1906      181     4995        N        N
-   18592 smbd            8562     1906      181     4993        N        N
-   28216 smbd            8521     1906      181     4954        N        N
-   19110 smbd            8404     1906      181     4862        N        N
-
-   Total memory used:  841,592,832 bytes
-
    -

    +

    Large number of smbd processes

    Samba consists on three core programs: nmbd, smbd, winbindd. nmbd is the name server message daemon, smbd is the server message daemon, winbindd is the daemon that @@ -153,4 +107,9 @@ connection made. That is why you are seeing so many of them, one (1) per client

    winbindd will run as one or two daemons, depending on whether or not it is being run in "split mode" (in which case there will be two instances). -

    I'm getting "open_oplock_ipc: Failed to get local UDP socket for address 100007f. Error was Cannot assign requested" in the logs

    Your loopback device isn't working correctly. Make sure it's running.

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 1. Introduction to Samba Home Chapter 3. Fast Start for the Impatient
    +

    "open_oplock_ipc: Failed to get local UDP socket for address 100007f. Error was Cannot assign requested"

    Your loopback device isn't working correctly. Make sure it's configured properly. The loopback device is an internal (virtual) network device with + the ip address 127.0.0.1. Read your OS documentation for details + on how to configure the loopback on your system.

    "The network name cannot be found"

    + This error can be caused by one of these misconfigurations: +

    • You specified an nonexisting path for the share in smb.conf

    • The user you are trying to access the share with does not + have sufficient permissions to access the path for the share. Both read (r) and access (x) should be possible.

    • The share you are trying to access does not exist.

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 1. Introduction to Samba Home Chapter 3. Fast Start for the Impatient
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/integrate-ms-networks.html b/docs/htmldocs/integrate-ms-networks.html deleted file mode 100644 index 07331fd9d0..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/integrate-ms-networks.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,428 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 26. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba
    Chapter 26. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba
    Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

    Chapter 26. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    (Jan 01 2001)

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    Background Information
    Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world
    /etc/hosts
    /etc/resolv.conf
    /etc/host.conf
    /etc/nsswitch.conf
    Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking
    The NetBIOS Name Cache
    The LMHOSTS file
    HOSTS file
    DNS Lookup
    WINS Lookup
    Common Errors
    My Boomerang Won't Come Back
    Very Slow Network Connections
    Samba server name change problem

    -This section deals with NetBIOS over TCP/IP name to IP address resolution. If -your MS Windows clients are NOT configured to use NetBIOS over TCP/IP then this -section does not apply to your installation. If your installation involves use of -NetBIOS over TCP/IP then this section may help you to resolve networking problems. -

    Note

    - NetBIOS over TCP/IP has nothing to do with NetBEUI. NetBEUI is NetBIOS - over Logical Link Control (LLC). On modern networks it is highly advised - to NOT run NetBEUI at all. Note also that there is NO such thing as - NetBEUI over TCP/IP - the existence of such a protocol is a complete - and utter mis-apprehension. -

    Features and Benefits

    -Many MS Windows network administrators have never been exposed to basic TCP/IP -networking as it is implemented in a Unix/Linux operating system. Likewise, many Unix and -Linux administrators have not been exposed to the intricacies of MS Windows TCP/IP based -networking (and may have no desire to be either). -

    -This chapter gives a short introduction to the basics of how a name can be resolved to -it's IP address for each operating system environment. -

    Background Information

    -Since the introduction of MS Windows 2000 it is possible to run MS Windows networking -without the use of NetBIOS over TCP/IP. NetBIOS over TCP/IP uses UDP port 137 for NetBIOS -name resolution and uses TCP port 139 for NetBIOS session services. When NetBIOS over -TCP/IP is disabled on MS Windows 2000 and later clients then only TCP port 445 will be -used and UDP port 137 and TCP port 139 will not. -

    Note

    -When using Windows 2000 or later clients, if NetBIOS over TCP/IP is NOT disabled, then -the client will use UDP port 137 (NetBIOS Name Service, also known as the Windows Internet -Name Service or WINS), TCP port 139 AND TCP port 445 (for actual file and print traffic). -

    -When NetBIOS over TCP/IP is disabled the use of DNS is essential. Most installations that -disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP today use MS Active Directory Service (ADS). ADS requires -Dynamic DNS with Service Resource Records (SRV RR) and with Incremental Zone Transfers (IXFR). -Use of DHCP with ADS is recommended as a further means of maintaining central control -over client workstation network configuration. -

    Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world

    -The key configuration files covered in this section are: -

    • /etc/hosts

    • /etc/resolv.conf

    • /etc/host.conf

    • /etc/nsswitch.conf

    /etc/hosts

    -Contains a static list of IP addresses and names. -eg: -

    -	127.0.0.1	localhost localhost.localdomain
-	192.168.1.1	bigbox.caldera.com	bigbox	alias4box
-

    -The purpose of /etc/hosts is to provide a -name resolution mechanism so that uses do not need to remember -IP addresses. -

    -Network packets that are sent over the physical network transport -layer communicate not via IP addresses but rather using the Media -Access Control address, or MAC address. IP addresses are currently -32 bits in length and are typically presented as four (4) decimal -numbers that are separated by a dot (or period). eg: 168.192.1.1. -

    -MAC Addresses use 48 bits (or 6 bytes) and are typically represented -as two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons. eg: -40:8e:0a:12:34:56 -

    -Every network interface must have an MAC address. Associated with -a MAC address there may be one or more IP addresses. There is NO -relationship between an IP address and a MAC address, all such assignments -are arbitrary or discretionary in nature. At the most basic level all -network communications takes place using MAC addressing. Since MAC -addresses must be globally unique, and generally remains fixed for -any particular interface, the assignment of an IP address makes sense -from a network management perspective. More than one IP address can -be assigned per MAC address. One address must be the primary IP address, -this is the address that will be returned in the ARP reply. -

    -When a user or a process wants to communicate with another machine -the protocol implementation ensures that the "machine name" or "host -name" is resolved to an IP address in a manner that is controlled -by the TCP/IP configuration control files. The file -/etc/hosts is one such file. -

    -When the IP address of the destination interface has been -determined a protocol called ARP/RARP is used to identify -the MAC address of the target interface. ARP stands for Address -Resolution Protocol, and is a broadcast oriented method that -uses UDP (User Datagram Protocol) to send a request to all -interfaces on the local network segment using the all 1's MAC -address. Network interfaces are programmed to respond to two -MAC addresses only; their own unique address and the address -ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff. The reply packet from an ARP request will -contain the MAC address and the primary IP address for each -interface. -

    -The /etc/hosts file is foundational to all -Unix/Linux TCP/IP installations and as a minimum will contain -the localhost and local network interface IP addresses and the -primary names by which they are known within the local machine. -This file helps to prime the pump so that a basic level of name -resolution can exist before any other method of name resolution -becomes available. -

    /etc/resolv.conf

    -This file tells the name resolution libraries: -

    • The name of the domain to which the machine - belongs -

    • The name(s) of any domains that should be - automatically searched when trying to resolve unqualified - host names to their IP address -

    • The name or IP address of available Domain - Name Servers that may be asked to perform name to address - translation lookups -

    /etc/host.conf

    -/etc/host.conf is the primary means by -which the setting in /etc/resolv.conf may be affected. It is a -critical configuration file. This file controls the order by -which name resolution may proceed. The typical structure is: -

    -	order hosts,bind
-	multi on
-

    -then both addresses should be returned. Please refer to the -man page for host.conf for further details. -

    /etc/nsswitch.conf

    -This file controls the actual name resolution targets. The -file typically has resolver object specifications as follows: -

    -	# /etc/nsswitch.conf
-	#
-	# Name Service Switch configuration file.
-	#
-
-	passwd:		compat
-	# Alternative entries for password authentication are:
-	# passwd:	compat files nis ldap winbind
-	shadow:		compat
-	group:		compat
-
-	hosts:		files nis dns
-	# Alternative entries for host name resolution are:
-	# hosts:	files dns nis nis+ hesiod db compat ldap wins
-	networks:	nis files dns
-
-	ethers:		nis files
-	protocols:	nis files
-	rpc:		nis files
-	services:	nis files
-

    -Of course, each of these mechanisms requires that the appropriate -facilities and/or services are correctly configured. -

    -It should be noted that unless a network request/message must be -sent, TCP/IP networks are silent. All TCP/IP communications assumes a -principal of speaking only when necessary. -

    -Starting with version 2.2.0 samba has Linux support for extensions to -the name service switch infrastructure so that linux clients will -be able to obtain resolution of MS Windows NetBIOS names to IP -Addresses. To gain this functionality Samba needs to be compiled -with appropriate arguments to the make command (i.e.: make -nsswitch/libnss_wins.so). The resulting library should -then be installed in the /lib directory and -the "wins" parameter needs to be added to the "hosts:" line in -the /etc/nsswitch.conf file. At this point it -will be possible to ping any MS Windows machine by its NetBIOS -machine name, so long as that machine is within the workgroup to -which both the samba machine and the MS Windows machine belong. -

    Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking

    -MS Windows networking is predicated about the name each machine -is given. This name is known variously (and inconsistently) as -the "computer name", "machine name", "networking name", "netbios name", -or "SMB name". All terms mean the same thing with the exception of -"netbios name" which can apply also to the name of the workgroup or the -domain name. The terms "workgroup" and "domain" are really just a -simple name with which the machine is associated. All NetBIOS names -are exactly 16 characters in length. The 16th character is reserved. -It is used to store a one byte value that indicates service level -information for the NetBIOS name that is registered. A NetBIOS machine -name is therefore registered for each service type that is provided by -the client/server. -

    -The following are typical NetBIOS name/service type registrations: -

    -	Unique NetBIOS Names:
-		MACHINENAME<00>	= Server Service is running on MACHINENAME
-		MACHINENAME<03> = Generic Machine Name (NetBIOS name)
-		MACHINENAME<20> = LanMan Server service is running on MACHINENAME
-		WORKGROUP<1b> = Domain Master Browser
-
-	Group Names:
-		WORKGROUP<03> = Generic Name registered by all members of WORKGROUP
-		WORKGROUP<1c> = Domain Controllers / Netlogon Servers
-		WORKGROUP<1d> = Local Master Browsers
-		WORKGROUP<1e> = Internet Name Resolvers
-

    -It should be noted that all NetBIOS machines register their own -names as per the above. This is in vast contrast to TCP/IP -installations where traditionally the system administrator will -determine in the /etc/hosts or in the DNS database what names -are associated with each IP address. -

    -One further point of clarification should be noted, the /etc/hosts -file and the DNS records do not provide the NetBIOS name type information -that MS Windows clients depend on to locate the type of service that may -be needed. An example of this is what happens when an MS Windows client -wants to locate a domain logon server. It finds this service and the IP -address of a server that provides it by performing a lookup (via a -NetBIOS broadcast) for enumeration of all machines that have -registered the name type *<1c>. A logon request is then sent to each -IP address that is returned in the enumerated list of IP addresses. -Whichever machine first replies then ends up providing the logon services. -

    -The name "workgroup" or "domain" really can be confusing since these -have the added significance of indicating what is the security -architecture of the MS Windows network. The term "workgroup" indicates -that the primary nature of the network environment is that of a -peer-to-peer design. In a WORKGROUP all machines are responsible for -their own security, and generally such security is limited to use of -just a password (known as SHARE MODE security). In most situations -with peer-to-peer networking the users who control their own machines -will simply opt to have no security at all. It is possible to have -USER MODE security in a WORKGROUP environment, thus requiring use -of a user name and a matching password. -

    -MS Windows networking is thus predetermined to use machine names -for all local and remote machine message passing. The protocol used is -called Server Message Block (SMB) and this is implemented using -the NetBIOS protocol (Network Basic Input Output System). NetBIOS can -be encapsulated using LLC (Logical Link Control) protocol - in which case -the resulting protocol is called NetBEUI (Network Basic Extended User -Interface). NetBIOS can also be run over IPX (Internetworking Packet -Exchange) protocol as used by Novell NetWare, and it can be run -over TCP/IP protocols - in which case the resulting protocol is called -NBT or NetBT, the NetBIOS over TCP/IP. -

    -MS Windows machines use a complex array of name resolution mechanisms. -Since we are primarily concerned with TCP/IP this demonstration is -limited to this area. -

    The NetBIOS Name Cache

    -All MS Windows machines employ an in memory buffer in which is -stored the NetBIOS names and IP addresses for all external -machines that that machine has communicated with over the -past 10-15 minutes. It is more efficient to obtain an IP address -for a machine from the local cache than it is to go through all the -configured name resolution mechanisms. -

    -If a machine whose name is in the local name cache has been shut -down before the name had been expired and flushed from the cache, then -an attempt to exchange a message with that machine will be subject -to time-out delays. i.e.: Its name is in the cache, so a name resolution -lookup will succeed, but the machine can not respond. This can be -frustrating for users - but it is a characteristic of the protocol. -

    -The MS Windows utility that allows examination of the NetBIOS -name cache is called "nbtstat". The Samba equivalent of this -is called nmblookup. -

    The LMHOSTS file

    -This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or -2000 in C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC and contains -the IP Address and the machine name in matched pairs. The -LMHOSTS file performs NetBIOS name -to IP address mapping. -

    -It typically looks like: -

    -	# Copyright (c) 1998 Microsoft Corp.
-	#
-	# This is a sample LMHOSTS file used by the Microsoft Wins Client (NetBIOS
-	# over TCP/IP) stack for Windows98
-	#
-	# This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to NT computernames
-	# (NetBIOS) names.  Each entry should be kept on an individual line.
-	# The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the
-	# corresponding computername. The address and the computername
-	# should be separated by at least one space or tab. The "#" character
-	# is generally used to denote the start of a comment (see the exceptions
-	# below).
-	#
-	# This file is compatible with Microsoft LAN Manager 2.x TCP/IP lmhosts
-	# files and offers the following extensions:
-	#
-	#      #PRE
-	#      #DOM:<domain>
-	#      #INCLUDE <filename>
-	#      #BEGIN_ALTERNATE
-	#      #END_ALTERNATE
-	#      \0xnn (non-printing character support)
-	#
-	# Following any entry in the file with the characters "#PRE" will cause
-	# the entry to be preloaded into the name cache. By default, entries are
-	# not preloaded, but are parsed only after dynamic name resolution fails.
-	#
-	# Following an entry with the "#DOM:<domain>" tag will associate the
-	# entry with the domain specified by <domain>. This affects how the
-	# browser and logon services behave in TCP/IP environments. To preload
-	# the host name associated with #DOM entry, it is necessary to also add a
-	# #PRE to the line. The <domain> is always preloaded although it will not
-	# be shown when the name cache is viewed.
-	#
-	# Specifying "#INCLUDE <filename>" will force the RFC NetBIOS (NBT)
-	# software to seek the specified <filename> and parse it as if it were
-	# local. <filename> is generally a UNC-based name, allowing a
-	# centralized lmhosts file to be maintained on a server.
-	# It is ALWAYS necessary to provide a mapping for the IP address of the
-	# server prior to the #INCLUDE. This mapping must use the #PRE directive.
-	# In addition the share "public" in the example below must be in the
-	# LanManServer list of "NullSessionShares" in order for client machines to
-	# be able to read the lmhosts file successfully. This key is under
-	# \machine\system\currentcontrolset\services\lanmanserver\parameters\nullsessionshares
-	# in the registry. Simply add "public" to the list found there.
-	#
-	# The #BEGIN_ and #END_ALTERNATE keywords allow multiple #INCLUDE
-	# statements to be grouped together. Any single successful include
-	# will cause the group to succeed.
-	#
-	# Finally, non-printing characters can be embedded in mappings by
-	# first surrounding the NetBIOS name in quotations, then using the
-	# \0xnn notation to specify a hex value for a non-printing character.
-	#
-	# The following example illustrates all of these extensions:
-	#
-	# 102.54.94.97     rhino         #PRE #DOM:networking  #net group's DC
-	# 102.54.94.102    "appname  \0x14"                    #special app server
-	# 102.54.94.123    popular            #PRE             #source server
-	# 102.54.94.117    localsrv           #PRE             #needed for the include
-	#
-	# #BEGIN_ALTERNATE
-	# #INCLUDE \\localsrv\public\lmhosts
-	# #INCLUDE \\rhino\public\lmhosts
-	# #END_ALTERNATE
-	#
-	# In the above example, the "appname" server contains a special
-	# character in its name, the "popular" and "localsrv" server names are
-	# preloaded, and the "rhino" server name is specified so it can be used
-	# to later #INCLUDE a centrally maintained lmhosts file if the "localsrv"
-	# system is unavailable.
-	#
-	# Note that the whole file is parsed including comments on each lookup,
-	# so keeping the number of comments to a minimum will improve performance.
-	# Therefore it is not advisable to simply add lmhosts file entries onto the
-	# end of this file.
-

    HOSTS file

    -This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 in -C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC and contains -the IP Address and the IP hostname in matched pairs. It can be -used by the name resolution infrastructure in MS Windows, depending -on how the TCP/IP environment is configured. This file is in -every way the equivalent of the Unix/Linux /etc/hosts file. -

    DNS Lookup

    -This capability is configured in the TCP/IP setup area in the network -configuration facility. If enabled, an elaborate name resolution sequence -is followed the precise nature of which is dependant on how the NetBIOS -Node Type parameter is configured. A Node Type of 0 means that -NetBIOS broadcast (over UDP broadcast) is used if the name -that is the subject of a name lookup is not found in the NetBIOS name -cache. If that fails then DNS, HOSTS and LMHOSTS are checked. If set to -Node Type 8, then a NetBIOS Unicast (over UDP Unicast) is sent to the -WINS Server to obtain a lookup before DNS, HOSTS, LMHOSTS, or broadcast -lookup is used. -

    WINS Lookup

    -A WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) service is the equivalent of the -rfc1001/1002 specified NBNS (NetBIOS Name Server). A WINS server stores -the names and IP addresses that are registered by a Windows client -if the TCP/IP setup has been given at least one WINS Server IP Address. -

    -To configure Samba to be a WINS server the following parameter needs -to be added to the smb.conf file: -

    -	wins support = Yes
-

    -To configure Samba to use a WINS server the following parameters are -needed in the smb.conf file: -

    -	wins support = No
-	wins server = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
-

    -where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address -of the WINS server. -

    Common Errors

    -TCP/IP network configuration problems find every network administrator sooner or later. -The cause can be anything from keyboard mishaps, forgetfulness, simple mistakes, and -carelessness. Of course, no one is every deliberately careless! -

    My Boomerang Won't Come Back

    - Well, the real complaint said, "I can ping my samba server from Windows, but I can - not ping my Windows machine from the samba server." -

    - The Windows machine was at IP Address 192.168.1.2 with netmask 255.255.255.0, the - Samba server (Linux) was at IP Address 192.168.1.130 with netmask 255.255.255.128. - The machines were on a local network with no external connections. -

    - Due to inconsistent netmasks, the Windows machine was on network 192.168.1.0/24, while - the Samba server was on network 192.168.1.128/25 - logically a different network. -

    Very Slow Network Connections

    - A common causes of slow network response includes: -

    • Client is configured to use DNS and DNS server is down

    • Client is configured to use remote DNS server, but remote connection is down

    • Client is configured to use a WINS server, but there is no WINS server

    • Client is NOT configured to use a WINS server, but there is a WINS server

    • Firewall is filtering our DNS or WINS traffic

    Samba server name change problem

    - The name of the samba server was changed, samba was restarted, samba server can not be - pinged by new name from MS Windows NT4 Workstation, but it does still respond to ping using - the old name. Why? -

    - From this description three (3) things are rather obvious: -

    • WINS is NOT in use, only broadcast based name resolution is used

    • The samba server was renamed and restarted within the last 10-15 minutes

    • The old samba server name is still in the NetBIOS name cache on the MS Windows NT4 Workstation

    - To find what names are present in the NetBIOS name cache on the MS Windows NT4 machine, - open a cmd shell, then: -

    - 
    -	C:\temp\>nbtstat -n
-
-	              NetBIOS Local Name Table
-
-	   Name                 Type          Status
-	------------------------------------------------
-	SLACK            <03>  UNIQUE      Registered
-	ADMINISTRATOR    <03>  UNIQUE      Registered
-	SLACK            <00>  UNIQUE      Registered
-	SARDON           <00>  GROUP       Registered
-	SLACK            <20>  UNIQUE      Registered
-	SLACK            <1F>  UNIQUE      Registered
-
-
-	C:\Temp\>nbtstat -c
-
-	             NetBIOS Remote Cache Name Table
-
-	   Name                 Type       Host Address     Life [sec]
-	--------------------------------------------------------------
-	FRODO            <20>  UNIQUE      192.168.1.1          240
-
-	C:\Temp\>
-
    -

    - In the above example, FRODO is the Samba server and SLACK is the MS Windows NT4 Workstation. - The first listing shows the contents of the Local Name Table (i.e.: Identity information on - the MS Windows workstation), the second shows the NetBIOS name in the NetBIOS name cache. - The name cache contains the remote machines known to this workstation. -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 25. PAM based Distributed Authentication Home Chapter 27. Unicode/Charsets
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/introduction.html b/docs/htmldocs/introduction.html index f2e9d6f63f..10cb806270 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/introduction.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/introduction.html @@ -1,6 +1,4 @@ - -Part I. General Installation
    Part I. General Installation
    Prev   Next

    General Installation

    Preparing Samba for Configuration

    This section of the Samba-HOWTO-Collection contains general info on how to install samba +Part I. General Installation

    Part I. General Installation
    Prev   Next

    General Installation

    Preparing Samba for Configuration

    This section of the Samba-HOWTO-Collection contains general info on how to install samba and how to configure the parts of samba you will most likely need. -PLEASE read this.

    Table of Contents

    1. Introduction to Samba
    Background
    Terminology
    Related Projects
    SMB Methodology
    Epilogue
    Miscellaneous
    2. How to Install and Test SAMBA
    Obtaining and installing samba
    Configuring samba (smb.conf)
    Example Configuration
    SWAT
    Try listing the shares available on your - server
    Try connecting with the unix client
    Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT, - Win2k, OS/2, etc... client
    What If Things Don't Work?
    Common Errors
    Why are so many smbd processes eating memory?
    I'm getting "open_oplock_ipc: Failed to get local UDP socket for address 100007f. Error was Cannot assign requested" in the logs
    3. Fast Start for the Impatient
    Note
    Prev Up Next
    SAMBA Project Documentation Home Chapter 1. Introduction to Samba
    +PLEASE read this.

    Table of Contents

    1. Introduction to Samba
    Background
    Terminology
    Related Projects
    SMB Methodology
    Epilogue
    Miscellaneous
    2. How to Install and Test SAMBA
    Obtaining and installing samba
    Configuring samba (smb.conf)
    Example Configuration
    SWAT
    Try listing the shares available on your + server
    Try connecting with the unix client
    Try connecting from another SMB client
    What If Things Don't Work?
    Common Errors
    Large number of smbd processes
    "open_oplock_ipc: Failed to get local UDP socket for address 100007f. Error was Cannot assign requested"
    "The network name cannot be found"
    3. Fast Start for the Impatient
    Note
    Prev Up Next
    Attributions Home Chapter 1. Introduction to Samba
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/ix01.html b/docs/htmldocs/ix01.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6d8bfe0633..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/ix01.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ - -Index
    Index
    Prev   

    Index

    Prev Up 
    Chapter 41. Further Resources Home 
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/locking.html b/docs/htmldocs/locking.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6214254ce0..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/locking.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,657 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 14. File and Record Locking
    Chapter 14. File and Record Locking
    Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

    Chapter 14. File and Record Locking

    Jeremy Allison

    Samba Team

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    The Samba Team

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Eric Roseme

    HP Oplocks Usage Recommendations Whitepaper

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Opportunistic Locking Overview
    Samba Opportunistic Locking Control
    Example Configuration
    MS Windows Opportunistic Locking and Caching Controls
    Workstation Service Entries
    Server Service Entries
    Persistent Data Corruption
    Common Errors
    locking.tdb error messages
    Additional Reading

    -One area which causes trouble for many network administrators is locking. -The extent of the problem is readily evident from searches over the internet. -

    Features and Benefits

    -Samba provides all the same locking semantics that MS Windows clients expect -and that MS Windows NT4 / 200x servers provide also. -

    -The term locking has exceptionally broad meaning and covers -a range of functions that are all categorized under this one term. -

    -Opportunistic locking is a desirable feature when it can enhance the -perceived performance of applications on a networked client. However, the -opportunistic locking protocol is not robust, and therefore can -encounter problems when invoked beyond a simplistic configuration, or -on extended, slow, or faulty networks. In these cases, operating -system management of opportunistic locking and/or recovering from -repetitive errors can offset the perceived performance advantage that -it is intended to provide. -

    -The MS Windows network administrator needs to be aware that file and record -locking semantics (behaviour) can be controlled either in Samba or by way of registry -settings on the MS Windows client. -

    Note

    -Sometimes it is necessary to disable locking control settings BOTH on the Samba -server as well as on each MS Windows client! -

    Discussion

    -There are two types of locking which need to be performed by a SMB server. -The first is record locking which allows a client to lock -a range of bytes in a open file. The second is the deny modes -that are specified when a file is open. -

    -Record locking semantics under Unix are very different from record locking under -Windows. Versions of Samba before 2.2 have tried to use the native fcntl() unix -system call to implement proper record locking between different Samba clients. -This can not be fully correct due to several reasons. The simplest is the fact -that a Windows client is allowed to lock a byte range up to 2^32 or 2^64, -depending on the client OS. The unix locking only supports byte ranges up to 2^31. -So it is not possible to correctly satisfy a lock request above 2^31. There are -many more differences, too many to be listed here. -

    -Samba 2.2 and above implements record locking completely independent of the -underlying unix system. If a byte range lock that the client requests happens -to fall into the range 0-2^31, Samba hands this request down to the Unix system. -All other locks can not be seen by unix anyway. -

    -Strictly a SMB server should check for locks before every read and write call on -a file. Unfortunately with the way fcntl() works this can be slow and may overstress -the rpc.lockd. It is also almost always unnecessary as clients are supposed to -independently make locking calls before reads and writes anyway if locking is -important to them. By default Samba only makes locking calls when explicitly asked -to by a client, but if you set strict locking = yes then it -will make lock checking calls on every read and write. -

    -You can also disable byte range locking completely using locking = no. -This is useful for those shares that don't support locking or don't need it -(such as cdroms). In this case Samba fakes the return codes of locking calls to -tell clients that everything is OK. -

    -The second class of locking is the deny modes. These -are set by an application when it opens a file to determine what types of -access should be allowed simultaneously with its open. A client may ask for -DENY_NONE, DENY_READ, -DENY_WRITE or DENY_ALL. There are also special compatibility -modes called DENY_FCB and DENY_DOS. -

    Opportunistic Locking Overview

    -Opportunistic locking (Oplocks) is invoked by the Windows file system -(as opposed to an API) via registry entries (on the server AND client) -for the purpose of enhancing network performance when accessing a file -residing on a server. Performance is enhanced by caching the file -locally on the client which allows: -

    Read-ahead:

    - The client reads the local copy of the file, eliminating network latency -

    Write caching:

    - The client writes to the local copy of the file, eliminating network latency -

    Lock caching:

    - The client caches application locks locally, eliminating network latency -

    -The performance enhancement of oplocks is due to the opportunity of -exclusive access to the file - even if it is opened with deny-none - -because Windows monitors the file's status for concurrent access from -other processes. -

    Windows defines 4 kinds of Oplocks:

    Level1 Oplock:

    - The redirector sees that the file was opened with deny - none (allowing concurrent access), verifies that no - other process is accessing the file, checks that - oplocks are enabled, then grants deny-all/read-write/exclusive - access to the file. The client now performs - operations on the cached local file. -

    - If a second process attempts to open the file, the open - is deferred while the redirector "breaks" the original - oplock. The oplock break signals the caching client to - write the local file back to the server, flush the - local locks, and discard read-ahead data. The break is - then complete, the deferred open is granted, and the - multiple processes can enjoy concurrent file access as - dictated by mandatory or byte-range locking options. - However, if the original opening process opened the - file with a share mode other than deny-none, then the - second process is granted limited or no access, despite - the oplock break. -

    Level2 Oplock:

    - Performs like a level1 oplock, except caching is only - operative for reads. All other operations are performed - on the server disk copy of the file. -

    Filter Oplock:

    - Does not allow write or delete file access -

    Batch Oplock:

    - Manipulates file openings and closings - allows caching - of file attributes -

    -An important detail is that oplocks are invoked by the file system, not -an application API. Therefore, an application can close an oplocked -file, but the file system does not relinquish the oplock. When the -oplock break is issued, the file system then simply closes the file in -preparation for the subsequent open by the second process. -

    -Opportunistic Locking is actually an improper name for this feature. -The true benefit of this feature is client-side data caching, and -oplocks is merely a notification mechanism for writing data back to the -networked storage disk. The limitation of opportunistic locking is the -reliability of the mechanism to process an oplock break (notification) -between the server and the caching client. If this exchange is faulty -(usually due to timing out for any number of reasons) then the -client-side caching benefit is negated. -

    -The actual decision that a user or administrator should consider is -whether it is sensible to share amongst multiple users data that will -be cached locally on a client. In many cases the answer is no. -Deciding when to cache or not cache data is the real question, and thus -"opportunistic locking" should be treated as a toggle for client-side -caching. Turn it "ON" when client-side caching is desirable and -reliable. Turn it "OFF" when client-side caching is redundant, -unreliable, or counter-productive. -

    -Opportunistic locking is by default set to "on" by Samba on all -configured shares, so careful attention should be given to each case to -determine if the potential benefit is worth the potential for delays. -The following recommendations will help to characterize the environment -where opportunistic locking may be effectively configured. -

    -Windows Opportunistic Locking is a lightweight performance-enhancing -feature. It is not a robust and reliable protocol. Every -implementation of Opportunistic Locking should be evaluated as a -tradeoff between perceived performance and reliability. Reliability -decreases as each successive rule above is not enforced. Consider a -share with oplocks enabled, over a wide area network, to a client on a -South Pacific atoll, on a high-availability server, serving a -mission-critical multi-user corporate database, during a tropical -storm. This configuration will likely encounter problems with oplocks. -

    -Oplocks can be beneficial to perceived client performance when treated -as a configuration toggle for client-side data caching. If the data -caching is likely to be interrupted, then oplock usage should be -reviewed. Samba enables opportunistic locking by default on all -shares. Careful attention should be given to the client usage of -shared data on the server, the server network reliability, and the -opportunistic locking configuration of each share. -n mission critical high availability environments, data integrity is -often a priority. Complex and expensive configurations are implemented -to ensure that if a client loses connectivity with a file server, a -failover replacement will be available immediately to provide -continuous data availability. -

    -Windows client failover behavior is more at risk of application -interruption than other platforms because it is dependant upon an -established TCP transport connection. If the connection is interrupted -- as in a file server failover - a new session must be established. -It is rare for Windows client applications to be coded to recover -correctly from a transport connection loss, therefore most applications -will experience some sort of interruption - at worst, abort and -require restarting. -

    -If a client session has been caching writes and reads locally due to -opportunistic locking, it is likely that the data will be lost when the -application restarts, or recovers from the TCP interrupt. When the TCP -connection drops, the client state is lost. When the file server -recovers, an oplock break is not sent to the client. In this case, the -work from the prior session is lost. Observing this scenario with -oplocks disabled, and the client was writing data to the file server -real-time, then the failover will provide the data on disk as it -existed at the time of the disconnect. -

    -In mission critical high availability environments, careful attention -should be given to opportunistic locking. Ideally, comprehensive -testing should be done with all affected applications with oplocks -enabled and disabled. -

    Exclusively Accessed Shares

    -Opportunistic locking is most effective when it is confined to shares -that are exclusively accessed by a single user, or by only one user at -a time. Because the true value of opportunistic locking is the local -client caching of data, any operation that interrupts the caching -mechanism will cause a delay. -

    -Home directories are the most obvious examples of where the performance -benefit of opportunistic locking can be safely realized. -

    Multiple-Accessed Shares or Files

    -As each additional user accesses a file in a share with opportunistic -locking enabled, the potential for delays and resulting perceived poor -performance increases. When multiple users are accessing a file on a -share that has oplocks enabled, the management impact of sending and -receiving oplock breaks, and the resulting latency while other clients -wait for the caching client to flush data, offset the performance gains -of the caching user. -

    -As each additional client attempts to access a file with oplocks set, -the potential performance improvement is negated and eventually results -in a performance bottleneck. -

    Unix or NFS Client Accessed Files

    -Local Unix and NFS clients access files without a mandatory -file locking mechanism. Thus, these client platforms are incapable of -initiating an oplock break request from the server to a Windows client -that has a file cached. Local Unix or NFS file access can therefore -write to a file that has been cached by a Windows client, which -exposes the file to likely data corruption. -

    -If files are shared between Windows clients, and either local Unix -or NFS users, then turn opportunistic locking off. -

    Slow and/or Unreliable Networks

    -The biggest potential performance improvement for opportunistic locking -occurs when the client-side caching of reads and writes delivers the -most differential over sending those reads and writes over the wire. -This is most likely to occur when the network is extremely slow, -congested, or distributed (as in a WAN). However, network latency also -has a very high impact on the reliability of the oplock break -mechanism, and thus increases the likelihood of encountering oplock -problems that more than offset the potential perceived performance -gain. Of course, if an oplock break never has to be sent, then this is -the most advantageous scenario to utilize opportunistic locking. -

    -If the network is slow, unreliable, or a WAN, then do not configure -opportunistic locking if there is any chance of multiple users -regularly opening the same file. -

    Multi-User Databases

    -Multi-user databases clearly pose a risk due to their very nature - -they are typically heavily accessed by numerous users at random -intervals. Placing a multi-user database on a share with opportunistic -locking enabled will likely result in a locking management bottleneck -on the Samba server. Whether the database application is developed -in-house or a commercially available product, ensure that the share -has opportunistic locking disabled. -

    PDM Data Shares

    -Process Data Management (PDM) applications such as IMAN, Enovia, and -Clearcase, are increasing in usage with Windows client platforms, and -therefore SMB data stores. PDM applications manage multi-user -environments for critical data security and access. The typical PDM -environment is usually associated with sophisticated client design -applications that will load data locally as demanded. In addition, the -PDM application will usually monitor the data-state of each client. -In this case, client-side data caching is best left to the local -application and PDM server to negotiate and maintain. It is -appropriate to eliminate the client OS from any caching tasks, and the -server from any oplock management, by disabling opportunistic locking on -the share. -

    Beware of Force User

    -Samba includes an smb.conf parameter called force user that changes -the user accessing a share from the incoming user to whatever user is -defined by the smb.conf variable. If opportunistic locking is enabled -on a share, the change in user access causes an oplock break to be sent -to the client, even if the user has not explicitly loaded a file. In -cases where the network is slow or unreliable, an oplock break can -become lost without the user even accessing a file. This can cause -apparent performance degradation as the client continually reconnects -to overcome the lost oplock break. -

    -Avoid the combination of the following: -

    • - force user in the smb.conf share configuration. -

    • - Slow or unreliable networks -

    • - Opportunistic Locking Enabled -

    Advanced Samba Opportunistic Locking Parameters

    -Samba provides opportunistic locking parameters that allow the -administrator to adjust various properties of the oplock mechanism to -account for timing and usage levels. These parameters provide good -versatility for implementing oplocks in environments where they would -likely cause problems. The parameters are: -oplock break wait time, -oplock contention limit. -

    -For most users, administrators, and environments, if these parameters -are required, then the better option is to simply turn oplocks off. -The samba SWAT help text for both parameters reads "DO NOT CHANGE THIS -PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE." -This is good advice. -

    Mission Critical High Availability

    -In mission critical high availability environments, data integrity is -often a priority. Complex and expensive configurations are implemented -to ensure that if a client loses connectivity with a file server, a -failover replacement will be available immediately to provide -continuous data availability. -

    -Windows client failover behavior is more at risk of application -interruption than other platforms because it is dependant upon an -established TCP transport connection. If the connection is interrupted -- as in a file server failover - a new session must be established. -It is rare for Windows client applications to be coded to recover -correctly from a transport connection loss, therefore most applications -will experience some sort of interruption - at worst, abort and -require restarting. -

    -If a client session has been caching writes and reads locally due to -opportunistic locking, it is likely that the data will be lost when the -application restarts, or recovers from the TCP interrupt. When the TCP -connection drops, the client state is lost. When the file server -recovers, an oplock break is not sent to the client. In this case, the -work from the prior session is lost. Observing this scenario with -oplocks disabled, and the client was writing data to the file server -real-time, then the failover will provide the data on disk as it -existed at the time of the disconnect. -

    -In mission critical high availability environments, careful attention -should be given to opportunistic locking. Ideally, comprehensive -testing should be done with all affected applications with oplocks -enabled and disabled. -

    Samba Opportunistic Locking Control

    -Opportunistic Locking is a unique Windows file locking feature. It is -not really file locking, but is included in most discussions of Windows -file locking, so is considered a defacto locking feature. -Opportunistic Locking is actually part of the Windows client file -caching mechanism. It is not a particularly robust or reliable feature -when implemented on the variety of customized networks that exist in -enterprise computing. -

    -Like Windows, Samba implements Opportunistic Locking as a server-side -component of the client caching mechanism. Because of the lightweight -nature of the Windows feature design, effective configuration of -Opportunistic Locking requires a good understanding of its limitations, -and then applying that understanding when configuring data access for -each particular customized network and client usage state. -

    -Opportunistic locking essentially means that the client is allowed to download and cache -a file on their hard drive while making changes; if a second client wants to access the -file, the first client receives a break and must synchronise the file back to the server. -This can give significant performance gains in some cases; some programs insist on -synchronising the contents of the entire file back to the server for a single change. -

    -Level1 Oplocks (aka just plain "oplocks") is another term for opportunistic locking. -

    -Level2 Oplocks provides opportunistic locking for a file that will be treated as -read only. Typically this is used on files that are read-only or -on files that the client has no initial intention to write to at time of opening the file. -

    -Kernel Oplocks are essentially a method that allows the Linux kernel to co-exist with -Samba's oplocked files, although this has provided better integration of MS Windows network -file locking with the under lying OS, SGI IRIX and Linux are the only two OS's that are -oplock aware at this time. -

    -Unless your system supports kernel oplocks, you should disable oplocks if you are -accessing the same files from both Unix/Linux and SMB clients. Regardless, oplocks should -always be disabled if you are sharing a database file (e.g., Microsoft Access) between -multiple clients, as any break the first client receives will affect synchronisation of -the entire file (not just the single record), which will result in a noticeable performance -impairment and, more likely, problems accessing the database in the first place. Notably, -Microsoft Outlook's personal folders (*.pst) react very badly to oplocks. If in doubt, -disable oplocks and tune your system from that point. -

    -If client-side caching is desirable and reliable on your network, you will benefit from -turning on oplocks. If your network is slow and/or unreliable, or you are sharing your -files among other file sharing mechanisms (e.g., NFS) or across a WAN, or multiple people -will be accessing the same files frequently, you probably will not benefit from the overhead -of your client sending oplock breaks and will instead want to disable oplocks for the share. -

    -Another factor to consider is the perceived performance of file access. If oplocks provide no -measurable speed benefit on your network, it might not be worth the hassle of dealing with them. -

    Example Configuration

    -In the following we examine two distinct aspects of Samba locking controls. -

    Disabling Oplocks

    -You can disable oplocks on a per-share basis with the following: -

    -
    -[acctdata]
-	oplocks = False
-	level2 oplocks = False
-
    -

    -The default oplock type is Level1. Level2 Oplocks are enabled on a per-share basis -in the smb.conf file. -

    -Alternately, you could disable oplocks on a per-file basis within the share: -

    -
    -	veto oplock files = /*.mdb/*.MDB/*.dbf/*.DBF/
-
    -

    -If you are experiencing problems with oplocks as apparent from Samba's log entries, -you may want to play it safe and disable oplocks and level2 oplocks. -

    Disabling Kernel OpLocks

    -Kernel OpLocks is an smb.conf parameter that notifies Samba (if -the UNIX kernel has the capability to send a Windows client an oplock -break) when a UNIX process is attempting to open the file that is -cached. This parameter addresses sharing files between UNIX and -Windows with Oplocks enabled on the Samba server: the UNIX process -can open the file that is Oplocked (cached) by the Windows client and -the smbd process will not send an oplock break, which exposes the file -to the risk of data corruption. If the UNIX kernel has the ability to -send an oplock break, then the kernel oplocks parameter enables Samba -to send the oplock break. Kernel oplocks are enabled on a per-server -basis in the smb.conf file. -

    -
    -[global]
-kernel oplocks = yes
-
    -The default is "no". -

    -Veto OpLocks is an smb.conf parameter that identifies specific files for -which Oplocks are disabled. When a Windows client opens a file that -has been configured for veto oplocks, the client will not be granted -the oplock, and all operations will be executed on the original file on -disk instead of a client-cached file copy. By explicitly identifying -files that are shared with UNIX processes, and disabling oplocks for -those files, the server-wide Oplock configuration can be enabled to -allow Windows clients to utilize the performance benefit of file -caching without the risk of data corruption. Veto Oplocks can be -enabled on a per-share basis, or globally for the entire server, in the -smb.conf file: -

    -
    <title>Example Veto OpLock Settings</title>
-[global]
-        veto oplock files = /filename.htm/*.txt/
-
-[share_name]
-        veto oplock files = /*.exe/filename.ext/
-
    -

    -Oplock break wait time is an smb.conf parameter that adjusts the time -interval for Samba to reply to an oplock break request. Samba -recommends "DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND -UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE." Oplock Break Wait Time can only be -configured globally in the smb.conf file: -

    -
    -[global]
-          oplock break wait time =  0 (default)
-
    -

    -Oplock break contention limit is an smb.conf parameter that limits the -response of the Samba server to grant an oplock if the configured -number of contending clients reaches the limit specified by the -parameter. Samba recommends "DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU -HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE." Oplock Break -Contention Limit can be enable on a per-share basis, or globally for -the entire server, in the smb.conf file: -

    -
    -[global]
-          oplock break contention limit =  2 (default)
-
-[share_name]
-         oplock break contention limit =  2 (default)
-
    -

    MS Windows Opportunistic Locking and Caching Controls

    -There is a known issue when running applications (like Norton Anti-Virus) on a Windows 2000/ XP -workstation computer that can affect any application attempting to access shared database files -across a network. This is a result of a default setting configured in the Windows 2000/XP -operating system known as Opportunistic Locking. When a workstation -attempts to access shared data files located on another Windows 2000/XP computer, -the Windows 2000/XP operating system will attempt to increase performance by locking the -files and caching information locally. When this occurs, the application is unable to -properly function, which results in an Access Denied - error message being displayed during network operations. -

    -All Windows operating systems in the NT family that act as database servers for data files -(meaning that data files are stored there and accessed by other Windows PCs) may need to -have opportunistic locking disabled in order to minimize the risk of data file corruption. -This includes Windows 9x/Me, Windows NT, Windows 200x and Windows XP. -

    -If you are using a Windows NT family workstation in place of a server, you must also -disable opportunistic locking (oplocks) on that workstation. For example, if you use a -PC with the Windows NT Workstation operating system instead of Windows NT Server, and you -have data files located on it that are accessed from other Windows PCs, you may need to -disable oplocks on that system. -

    -The major difference is the location in the Windows registry where the values for disabling -oplocks are entered. Instead of the LanManServer location, the LanManWorkstation location -may be used. -

    -You can verify (or change or add, if necessary) this Registry value using the Windows -Registry Editor. When you change this registry value, you will have to reboot the PC -to ensure that the new setting goes into effect. -

    -The location of the client registry entry for opportunistic locking has changed in -Windows 2000 from the earlier location in Microsoft Windows NT. -

    Note

    -Windows 2000 will still respect the EnableOplocks registry value used to disable oplocks -in earlier versions of Windows. -

    -You can also deny the granting of opportunistic locks by changing the following registry entries: -

    -
    -	HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\
-		CurrentControlSet\Services\MRXSmb\Parameters\
-
-		OplocksDisabled REG_DWORD 0 or 1
-		Default: 0 (not disabled)
-
    -

    Note

    -The OplocksDisabled registry value configures Windows clients to either request or not -request opportunistic locks on a remote file. To disable oplocks, the value of - OplocksDisabled must be set to 1. -

    -
    -	HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\
-		CurrentControlSet\Services\LanmanServer\Parameters
-
-		EnableOplocks REG_DWORD 0 or 1
-		Default: 1 (Enabled by Default)
-
-		EnableOpLockForceClose REG_DWORD 0 or 1
-		Default: 0 (Disabled by Default)
-
    -

    Note

    -The EnableOplocks value configures Windows-based servers (including Workstations sharing -files) to allow or deny opportunistic locks on local files. -

    -To force closure of open oplocks on close or program exit EnableOpLockForceClose must be set to 1. -

    -An illustration of how level II oplocks work: -

    • - Station 1 opens the file, requesting oplock. -

    • - Since no other station has the file open, the server grants station 1 exclusive oplock. -

    • - Station 2 opens the file, requesting oplock. -

    • - Since station 1 has not yet written to the file, the server asks station 1 to Break - to Level II Oplock. -

    • - Station 1 complies by flushing locally buffered lock information to the server. -

    • - Station 1 informs the server that it has Broken to Level II Oplock (alternatively, - station 1 could have closed the file). -

    • - The server responds to station 2's open request, granting it level II oplock. - Other stations can likewise open the file and obtain level II oplock. -

    • - Station 2 (or any station that has the file open) sends a write request SMB. - The server returns the write response. -

    • - The server asks all stations that have the file open to Break to None, meaning no - station holds any oplock on the file. Because the workstations can have no cached - writes or locks at this point, they need not respond to the break-to-none advisory; - all they need do is invalidate locally cashed read-ahead data. -

    Workstation Service Entries

    -	\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\
-		CurrentControlSet\Services\LanmanWorkstation\Parameters
-
-	UseOpportunisticLocking   REG_DWORD   0 or 1
-	Default: 1 (true)
-

    -Indicates whether the redirector should use opportunistic-locking (oplock) performance -enhancement. This parameter should be disabled only to isolate problems. -

    Server Service Entries

    -	\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\
-		CurrentControlSet\Services\LanmanServer\Parameters
-
-	EnableOplocks   REG_DWORD   0 or 1
-	Default: 1 (true)
-

    -Specifies whether the server allows clients to use oplocks on files. Oplocks are a -significant performance enhancement, but have the potential to cause lost cached -data on some networks, particularly wide-area networks. -

    -	MinLinkThroughput   REG_DWORD   0 to infinite bytes per second
-	Default: 0
-

    -Specifies the minimum link throughput allowed by the server before it disables -raw and opportunistic locks for this connection. -

    -	MaxLinkDelay   REG_DWORD   0 to 100,000 seconds
-	Default: 60
-

    -Specifies the maximum time allowed for a link delay. If delays exceed this number, -the server disables raw I/O and opportunistic locking for this connection. -

    -	OplockBreakWait   REG_DWORD   10 to 180 seconds
-	Default: 35
-

    -Specifies the time that the server waits for a client to respond to an oplock break -request. Smaller values can allow detection of crashed clients more quickly but can -potentially cause loss of cached data. -

    Persistent Data Corruption

    -If you have applied all of the settings discussed in this paper but data corruption problems -and other symptoms persist, here are some additional things to check out: -

    -We have credible reports from developers that faulty network hardware, such as a single -faulty network card, can cause symptoms similar to read caching and data corruption. -If you see persistent data corruption even after repeated reindexing, you may have to -rebuild the data files in question. This involves creating a new data file with the -same definition as the file to be rebuilt and transferring the data from the old file -to the new one. There are several known methods for doing this that can be found in -our Knowledge Base. -

    Common Errors

    -In some sites locking problems surface as soon as a server is installed, in other sites -locking problems may not surface for a long time. Almost without exception, when a locking -problem does surface it will cause embarrassment and potential data corruption. -

    -Over the past few years there have been a number of complaints on the samba mailing lists -that have claimed that samba caused data corruption. Three causes have been identified -so far: -

    • - Incorrect configuration of opportunistic locking (incompatible with the application - being used. This is a VERY common problem even where MS Windows NT4 or MS Windows 200x - based servers were in use. It is imperative that the software application vendors' - instructions for configuration of file locking should be followed. If in doubt, - disable oplocks on both the server and the client. Disabling of all forms of file - caching on the MS Windows client may be necessary also. -

    • - Defective network cards, cables, or HUBs / Switched. This is generally a more - prevalent factor with low cost networking hardware, though occasionally there - have been problems with incompatibilities in more up market hardware also. -

    • - There have been some random reports of samba log files being written over data - files. This has been reported by very few sites (about 5 in the past 3 years) - and all attempts to reproduce the problem have failed. The Samba-Team has been - unable to catch this happening and thus has NOT been able to isolate any particular - cause. Considering the millions of systems that use samba, for the sites that have - been affected by this as well as for the Samba-Team this is a frustrating and - a vexing challenge. If you see this type of thing happening please create a bug - report on https://bugzilla.samba.org without delay. Make sure that you give as much - information as you possibly can to help isolate the cause and to allow reproduction - of the problem (an essential step in problem isolation and correction). -

    locking.tdb error messages

    - 
    -	> We are seeing lots of errors in the samba logs like:
-	>
-	>    tdb(/usr/local/samba_2.2.7/var/locks/locking.tdb): rec_read bad magic
-	> 0x4d6f4b61 at offset=36116
-	>
-	> What do these mean?
-
    -

    - Corrupted tdb. Stop all instances of smbd, delete locking.tdb, restart smbd. -

    Additional Reading

    -You may want to check for an updated version of this white paper on our Web site from -time to time. Many of our white papers are updated as information changes. For those papers, -the Last Edited date is always at the top of the paper. -

    -Section of the Microsoft MSDN Library on opportunistic locking: -

    -Opportunistic Locks, Microsoft Developer Network (MSDN), Windows Development > -Windows Base Services > Files and I/O > SDK Documentation > File Storage > File Systems -> About File Systems > Opportunistic Locks, Microsoft Corporation. -http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/en-us/fileio/storage_5yk3.asp -

    -Microsoft Knowledge Base Article Q224992 "Maintaining Transactional Integrity with OPLOCKS", -Microsoft Corporation, April 1999, http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;Q224992. -

    -Microsoft Knowledge Base Article Q296264 "Configuring Opportunistic Locking in Windows 2000", -Microsoft Corporation, April 2001, http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;Q296264. -

    -Microsoft Knowledge Base Article Q129202 "PC Ext: Explanation of Opportunistic Locking on Windows NT", - Microsoft Corporation, April 1995, http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;Q129202. -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 13. File, Directory and Share Access Controls Home Chapter 15. Securing Samba
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/migration.html b/docs/htmldocs/migration.html deleted file mode 100644 index c099bb5137..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/migration.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2 +0,0 @@ - -Part IV. Migration and Updating
    Part IV. Migration and Updating
    Prev   Next

    Migration and Updating

    Table of Contents

    30. Upgrading from Samba-2.x to Samba-3.0.0
    Charsets
    Obsolete configuration options
    Password Backend
    31. Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC
    Planning and Getting Started
    Objectives
    Steps In Migration Process
    Migration Options
    Planning for Success
    Samba Implementation Choices
    32. SWAT - The Samba Web Administration Tool
    Features and Benefits
    Enabling SWAT for use
    Securing SWAT through SSL
    The SWAT Home Page
    Global Settings
    Share Settings
    Printers Settings
    The SWAT Wizard
    The Status Page
    The View Page
    The Password Change Page
    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 29. High Availability Options Home Chapter 30. Upgrading from Samba-2.x to Samba-3.0.0
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/msdfs.html b/docs/htmldocs/msdfs.html deleted file mode 100644 index fc05fee538..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/msdfs.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 17. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba
    Chapter 17. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba
    Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

    Chapter 17. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba

    Shirish Kalele

    Samba Team & Veritas Software


    -
    -

    12 Jul 2000

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    Common Errors

    Features and Benefits

    - The Distributed File System (or DFS) provides a means of separating the logical - view of files and directories that users see from the actual physical locations - of these resources on the network. It allows for higher availability, smoother - storage expansion, load balancing etc. -

    - For information about DFS, refer to - - Microsoft documentation at http://www.microsoft.com/NTServer/nts/downloads/winfeatures/NTSDistrFile/AdminGuide.asp. -

    - This document explains how to host a DFS tree on a Unix machine (for DFS-aware - clients to browse) using Samba. -

    - To enable SMB-based DFS for Samba, configure it with the --with-msdfs - option. Once built, a Samba server can be made a DFS server by setting the global - boolean host msdfs - parameter in the smb.conf file. You designate a share as a DFS - root using the share level boolean - msdfs root parameter. A DFS root directory on Samba hosts DFS - links in the form of symbolic links that point to other servers. For example, a symbolic link - junction->msdfs:storage1\share1 in the share directory acts - as the DFS junction. When DFS-aware clients attempt to access the junction link, - they are redirected to the storage location (in this case, \\storage1\share1). -

    - DFS trees on Samba work with all DFS-aware clients ranging from Windows 95 to 200x. -

    - Here's an example of setting up a DFS tree on a Samba server. - 

    -# The smb.conf file:
-[global]
-	netbios name = SMOKEY
-	host msdfs   = yes
-
-[dfs]
-	path = /export/dfsroot
-	msdfs root = yes
-

    In the /export/dfsroot directory we set up our dfs links to - other servers on the network.

    -	root# cd /export/dfsroot
-	root# chown root /export/dfsroot
-	root# chmod 755 /export/dfsroot
-	root# ln -s msdfs:storageA\\shareA linka
-	root# ln -s msdfs:serverB\\share,serverC\\share linkb
-

    You should set up the permissions and ownership of - the directory acting as the DFS root such that only designated - users can create, delete or modify the msdfs links. Also note - that symlink names should be all lowercase. This limitation exists - to have Samba avoid trying all the case combinations to get at - the link name. Finally set up the symbolic links to point to the - network shares you want, and start Samba.

    Users on DFS-aware clients can now browse the DFS tree - on the Samba server at \\samba\dfs. Accessing - links linka or linkb (which appear as directories to the client) - takes users directly to the appropriate shares on the network.

    Common Errors

    • Windows clients need to be rebooted - if a previously mounted non-dfs share is made a dfs - root or vice versa. A better way is to introduce a - new share and make it the dfs root.

    • Currently there's a restriction that msdfs - symlink names should all be lowercase.

    • For security purposes, the directory - acting as the root of the DFS tree should have ownership - and permissions set so that only designated users can - modify the symbolic links in the directory.

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 16. Interdomain Trust Relationships Home Chapter 18. Classical Printing Support
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/net.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/net.8.html index dd7c0165ad..4db6d92a8a 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/net.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/net.8.html @@ -1,146 +1,943 @@ -net

    Name

    net — Tool for administration of Samba and remote + + + %globalentities; + ]> + + + + net + 8 + + + + + net + Tool for administration of Samba and remote CIFS servers. -

    Synopsis

    net {<ads|rap|rpc>} [-h] [-w workgroup] [-W myworkgroup] [-U user] [-I ip-address] [-p port] [-n myname] [-s conffile] [-S server] [-l] [-P] [-D debuglevel]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.

    The samba net utility is meant to work just like the net utility + + + + + + net + <ads|rap|rpc> + -h + -w workgroup + -W myworkgroup + -U user + -I ip-address + -p port + -n myname + -s conffile + -S server + -l + -P + -D debuglevel + + + + + DESCRIPTION + + This tool is part of the Samba + 7 suite. + + The samba net utility is meant to work just like the net utility available for windows and DOS. The first argument should be used to specify the protocol to use when executing a certain command. ADS is used for ActiveDirectory, RAP is using for old (Win9x/NT3) clients and RPC can be used for NT4 and Windows 2000. If this argument is omitted, net will try to determine it automatically. Not all commands are available on all protocols. -

    OPTIONS

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    -w target-workgroup

    + + + + + + OPTIONS + + + + +-h|--help +Print a summary of command line options. + + + + + -w target-workgroup + Sets target workgroup or domain. You have to specify either this option or the IP address or the name of a server. -

    -W workgroup

    + + + + + -W workgroup + Sets client workgroup or domain -

    -U user

    + + + + + -U user + User name to use -

    -I ip-address

    + + + + + -I ip-address + IP address of target server to use. You have to specify either this option or a target workgroup or a target server. -

    -p port

    + + + + + -p port + Port on the target server to connect to (usually 139 or 445). Defaults to trying 445 first, then 139. -

    -n <primary NetBIOS name>

    This option allows you to override + + + + + +-n <primary NetBIOS name> +This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical -to setting the NetBIOS -name parameter in the smb.conf(5) file. However, a command +to setting the netbios namenetbios name parameter in the smb.conf file. +However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in -smb.conf(5).

    -s <configuration file>

    The file specified contains the +smb.conf. + + + +-s <configuration file> +The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at -compile time.

    -S server

    +compile time. + + + + -S server + Name of target server. You should specify either this option or a target workgroup or a target IP address. -

    -l

    + + + + + -l + When listing data, give more information on each item. -

    -P

    + + + + + -P + Make queries to the external server using the machine account of the local server. -

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer + + + + + +-d|--debug=debuglevel + +debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is -not specified is zero.

    The higher this value, the more detail will be +not specified is zero. + +The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day to day running - it generates a small amount of -information about operations carried out.

    Levels above 1 will generate considerable +information about operations carried out. + +Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log -data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    COMMANDS

    TIME

    The NET TIME command allows you to view the time on a remote server - or synchronise the time on the local server with the time on the remote server.

    TIME

    Without any options, the NET TIME command +data, most of which is extremely cryptic. + +Note that specifying this parameter here will +override the log levellog level parameter +in the smb.conf file. + + + + + + +COMMANDS + + + TIME + + The NET TIME command allows you to view the time on a remote server + or synchronise the time on the local server with the time on the remote server. + + +TIME + +Without any options, the NET TIME command displays the time on the remote server. -

    TIME SYSTEM

    Displays the time on the remote server in a format ready for /bin/date

    TIME SET

    Tries to set the date and time of the local server to that on -the remote server using /bin/date.

    TIME ZONE

    Displays the timezone in hours from GMT on the remote computer.

    [RPC|ADS] JOIN [TYPE] [-U username[%password]] [options]

    + + + + + +TIME SYSTEM + + Displays the time on the remote server in a format ready for /bin/date + + + + +TIME SET +Tries to set the date and time of the local server to that on +the remote server using /bin/date. + + + + +TIME ZONE + +Displays the timezone in hours from GMT on the remote computer. + + + + + +[RPC|ADS] JOIN [TYPE] [-U username[%password]] [options] + + Join a domain. If the account already exists on the server, and [TYPE] is MEMBER, the machine will attempt to join automatically. (Assuming that the machine has been created in server manager) Otherwise, a password will be prompted for, and a new account may -be created.

    +be created. + + [TYPE] may be PDC, BDC or MEMBER to specify the type of server joining the domain. -

    [RPC] OLDJOIN [options]

    Join a domain. Use the OLDJOIN option to join the domain + + + + +[RPC] OLDJOIN [options] + +Join a domain. Use the OLDJOIN option to join the domain using the old style of domain joining - you need to create a trust -account in server manager first.

    [RPC|ADS] USER

    [RPC|ADS] USER DELETE target

    Delete specified user

    [RPC|ADS] USER LIST

    List all users

    [RPC|ADS] USER INFO target

    List the domain groups of a the specified user.

    [RPC|ADS] USER ADD name [password] [-F user flags] [-C comment]

    Add specified user.

    [RPC|ADS] GROUP

    [RPC|ADS] GROUP [misc options] [targets]

    List user groups.

    [RPC|ADS] GROUP DELETE name [misc. options]

    Delete specified group.

    [RPC|ADS] GROUP ADD name [-C comment]

    Create specified group.

    [RAP|RPC] SHARE

    [RAP|RPC] SHARE [misc. options] [targets]

    Enumerates all exported resources (network shares) on target server.

    [RAP|RPC] SHARE ADD name=serverpath [-C comment] [-M maxusers] [targets]

    Adds a share from a server (makes the export active). Maxusers +account in server manager first. + + + +[RPC|ADS] USER + + +[RPC|ADS] USER DELETE <replaceable>target</replaceable> + +Delete specified user + + + + +[RPC|ADS] USER LIST + +List all users + + + + +[RPC|ADS] USER INFO <replaceable>target</replaceable> + +List the domain groups of a the specified user. + + + + +[RPC|ADS] USER ADD <replaceable>name</replaceable> [password] [-F user flags] [-C comment] + +Add specified user. + + + + +[RPC|ADS] GROUP + + +[RPC|ADS] GROUP [misc options] [targets] +List user groups. + + + +[RPC|ADS] GROUP DELETE <replaceable>name</replaceable> [misc. options] + +Delete specified group. + + + + +[RPC|ADS] GROUP ADD <replaceable>name</replaceable> [-C comment] + +Create specified group. + + + + + +[RAP|RPC] SHARE + + +[RAP|RPC] SHARE [misc. options] [targets] + +Enumerates all exported resources (network shares) on target server. + + + + +[RAP|RPC] SHARE ADD <replaceable>name=serverpath</replaceable> [-C comment] [-M maxusers] [targets] + +Adds a share from a server (makes the export active). Maxusers specifies the number of users that can be connected to the -share simultaneously.

    SHARE DELETE sharenam

    Delete specified share.

    [RPC|RAP] FILE

    [RPC|RAP] FILE

    List all open files on remote server.

    [RPC|RAP] FILE CLOSE fileid

    Close file with specified fileid on -remote server.

    [RPC|RAP] FILE INFO fileid

    -Print information on specified fileid. +share simultaneously. + + + + +SHARE DELETE <replaceable>sharenam</replaceable> + +Delete specified share. + + + + +[RPC|RAP] FILE + + +[RPC|RAP] FILE + +List all open files on remote server. + + + + +[RPC|RAP] FILE CLOSE <replaceable>fileid</replaceable> + +Close file with specified fileid on +remote server. + + + + +[RPC|RAP] FILE INFO <replaceable>fileid</replaceable> + + +Print information on specified fileid. Currently listed are: file-id, username, locks, path, permissions. -

    [RAP|RPC] FILE USER

    Note

    Currently NOT implemented.

    SESSION

    RAP SESSION

    Without any other options, SESSION enumerates all active SMB/CIFS -sessions on the target server.

    RAP SESSION DELETE|CLOSE CLIENT_NAME

    Close the specified sessions.

    RAP SESSION INFO CLIENT_NAME

    Give a list with all the open files in specified session.

    RAP SERVER DOMAIN

    List all servers in specified domain or workgroup. Defaults -to local domain.

    RAP DOMAIN

    Lists all domains and workgroups visible on the -current network.

    RAP PRINTQ

    RAP PRINTQ LIST QUEUE_NAME

    Lists the specified print queue and print jobs on the server. -If the QUEUE_NAME is omitted, all -queues are listed.

    RAP PRINTQ DELETE JOBID

    Delete job with specified id.

    RAP VALIDATE user [password]

    + + + + + +[RAP|RPC] FILE USER + +Currently NOT implemented. + + + + + + +SESSION + + +RAP SESSION + +Without any other options, SESSION enumerates all active SMB/CIFS +sessions on the target server. + + + + +RAP SESSION DELETE|CLOSE <replaceable>CLIENT_NAME</replaceable> + +Close the specified sessions. + + + + +RAP SESSION INFO <replaceable>CLIENT_NAME</replaceable> + +Give a list with all the open files in specified session. + + + + + + +RAP SERVER <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable> + +List all servers in specified domain or workgroup. Defaults +to local domain. + + + + +RAP DOMAIN + +Lists all domains and workgroups visible on the +current network. + + + + +RAP PRINTQ + + +RAP PRINTQ LIST <replaceable>QUEUE_NAME</replaceable> + +Lists the specified print queue and print jobs on the server. +If the QUEUE_NAME is omitted, all +queues are listed. + + + + +RAP PRINTQ DELETE <replaceable>JOBID</replaceable> + +Delete job with specified id. + + + + + + +RAP VALIDATE <replaceable>user</replaceable> [<replaceable>password</replaceable>] + + Validate whether the specified user can log in to the remote server. If the password is not specified on the commandline, it will be prompted. -

    Note

    Currently NOT implemented.

    RAP GROUPMEMBER

    RAP GROUPMEMBER LIST GROUP

    List all members of the specified group.

    RAP GROUPMEMBER DELETE GROUP USER

    Delete member from group.

    RAP GROUPMEMBER ADD GROUP USER

    Add member to group.

    RAP ADMIN command

    Execute the specified command on + + +Currently NOT implemented. + + + + +RAP GROUPMEMBER + + +RAP GROUPMEMBER LIST <replaceable>GROUP</replaceable> + +List all members of the specified group. + + + + +RAP GROUPMEMBER DELETE <replaceable>GROUP</replaceable> <replaceable>USER</replaceable> + +Delete member from group. + + + + +RAP GROUPMEMBER ADD <replaceable>GROUP</replaceable> <replaceable>USER</replaceable> + +Add member to group. + + + + + + +RAP ADMIN <replaceable>command</replaceable> + +Execute the specified command on the remote server. Only works with OS/2 servers. -

    Note

    Currently NOT implemented.

    RAP SERVICE

    RAP SERVICE START NAME [arguments...]

    Start the specified service on the remote server. Not implemented yet.

    Note

    Currently NOT implemented.

    RAP SERVICE STOP

    Stop the specified service on the remote server.

    Note

    Currently NOT implemented.

    RAP PASSWORD USER OLDPASS NEWPASS

    -Change password of USER from OLDPASS to NEWPASS. -

    LOOKUP

    LOOKUP HOST HOSTNAME [TYPE]

    + + +Currently NOT implemented. + + + + +RAP SERVICE + + +RAP SERVICE START <replaceable>NAME</replaceable> [arguments...] + +Start the specified service on the remote server. Not implemented yet. + +Currently NOT implemented. + + + + +RAP SERVICE STOP + +Stop the specified service on the remote server. + +Currently NOT implemented. + + + + + + +RAP PASSWORD <replaceable>USER</replaceable> <replaceable>OLDPASS</replaceable> <replaceable>NEWPASS</replaceable> + + +Change password of USER from OLDPASS to NEWPASS. + + + + + +LOOKUP + + +LOOKUP HOST <replaceable>HOSTNAME</replaceable> [<replaceable>TYPE</replaceable>] + + Lookup the IP address of the given host with the specified type (netbios suffix). The type defaults to 0x20 (workstation). -

    LOOKUP LDAP [DOMAIN

    Give IP address of LDAP server of specified DOMAIN. Defaults to local domain.

    LOOKUP KDC [REALM]

    Give IP address of KDC for the specified REALM. -Defaults to local realm.

    LOOKUP DC [DOMAIN]

    Give IP's of Domain Controllers for specified -DOMAIN. Defaults to local domain.

    LOOKUP MASTER DOMAIN

    Give IP of master browser for specified DOMAIN -or workgroup. Defaults to local domain.

    CACHE

    Samba uses a general caching interface called 'gencache'. It -can be controlled using 'NET CACHE'.

    All the timeout parameters support the suffixes: + + + -
    s - Seconds
    m - Minutes
    h - Hours
    d - Days
    w - Weeks
    + +LOOKUP LDAP [<replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable> -

    CACHE ADD key data time-out

    Add specified key+data to the cache with the given timeout.

    CACHE DEL key

    Delete key from the cache.

    CACHE SET key data time-out

    Update data of existing cache entry.

    CACHE SEARCH PATTERN

    Search for the specified pattern in the cache data.

    CACHE LIST

    +Give IP address of LDAP server of specified DOMAIN. Defaults to local domain. + + + + +LOOKUP KDC [<replaceable>REALM</replaceable>] + +Give IP address of KDC for the specified REALM. +Defaults to local realm. + + + + +LOOKUP DC [<replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable>] + +Give IP's of Domain Controllers for specified +DOMAIN. Defaults to local domain. + + + + +LOOKUP MASTER <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable> + +Give IP of master browser for specified DOMAIN +or workgroup. Defaults to local domain. + + + + + + +CACHE + +Samba uses a general caching interface called 'gencache'. It +can be controlled using 'NET CACHE'. + +All the timeout parameters support the suffixes: + + +s - Seconds +m - Minutes +h - Hours +d - Days +w - Weeks + + + + + +CACHE ADD <replaceable>key</replaceable> <replaceable>data</replaceable> <replaceable>time-out</replaceable> + +Add specified key+data to the cache with the given timeout. + + + + +CACHE DEL <replaceable>key</replaceable> + +Delete key from the cache. + + + + +CACHE SET <replaceable>key</replaceable> <replaceable>data</replaceable> <replaceable>time-out</replaceable> + +Update data of existing cache entry. + + + + +CACHE SEARCH <replaceable>PATTERN</replaceable> + +Search for the specified pattern in the cache data. + + + + +CACHE LIST + + List all current items in the cache. -

    CACHE FLUSH

    Remove all the current items from the cache.

    GETLOCALSID [DOMAIN]

    Print the SID of the specified domain, or if the parameter is -omitted, the SID of the domain the local server is in.

    SETLOCALSID S-1-5-21-x-y-z

    Sets domain sid for the local server to the specified SID.

    GROUPMAP

    Manage the mappings between Windows group SIDs and UNIX groups. -Parameters take the for "parameter=value". Common options include:

    • unixgroup - Name of the UNIX group

    • ntgroup - Name of the Windows NT group (must be - resolvable to a SID

    • rid - Unsigned 32-bit integer

    • sid - Full SID in the form of "S-1-..."

    • type - Type of the group; either 'domain', 'local', - or 'builtin'

    • comment - Freeform text description of the group

    GROUPMAP ADD

    Add a new group mapping entry

    net groupmap add {rid=int|sid=string} unixgroup=string [type={domain|local|builtin}] [ntgroup=string] [comment=string]

    GROUPMAP DELETE

    Delete a group mapping entry

    net groupmap delete {ntgroup=string|sid=SID}

    GROUPMAP MODIFY

    Update en existing group entry

    net groupmap modify {ntgroup=string|sid=SID} [unixgroup=string] [comment=string] [type={domain|local}

    GROUPMAP LIST

    List existing group mapping entries

    net groupmap list [verbose] [ntgroup=string] [sid=SID]

    MAXRID

    Prints out the highest RID currently in use on the local + + + + + +CACHE FLUSH + +Remove all the current items from the cache. + + + + + + +GETLOCALSID [DOMAIN] + +Print the SID of the specified domain, or if the parameter is +omitted, the SID of the domain the local server is in. + + + + +SETLOCALSID S-1-5-21-x-y-z + +Sets domain sid for the local server to the specified SID. + + + + +GROUPMAP + +Manage the mappings between Windows group SIDs and UNIX groups. +Parameters take the for "parameter=value". Common options include: + + +unixgroup - Name of the UNIX group +ntgroup - Name of the Windows NT group (must be + resolvable to a SID +rid - Unsigned 32-bit integer +sid - Full SID in the form of "S-1-..." +type - Type of the group; either 'domain', 'local', + or 'builtin' +comment - Freeform text description of the group + + + +GROUPMAP ADD + +Add a new group mapping entry + +net groupmap add {rid=int|sid=string} unixgroup=string [type={domain|local|builtin}] [ntgroup=string] [comment=string] + + + + +GROUPMAP DELETE + +Delete a group mapping entry + +net groupmap delete {ntgroup=string|sid=SID} + + + + +GROUPMAP MODIFY + +Update en existing group entry + +net groupmap modify {ntgroup=string|sid=SID} [unixgroup=string] [comment=string] [type={domain|local} + + + +GROUPMAP LIST + +List existing group mapping entries + +net groupmap list [verbose] [ntgroup=string] [sid=SID] + + + + + + + +MAXRID + +Prints out the highest RID currently in use on the local server (by the active 'passdb backend'). -

    RPC INFO

    Print information about the domain of the remote server, + + + + + +RPC INFO + +Print information about the domain of the remote server, such as domain name, domain sid and number of users and groups. -

    [RPC|ADS] TESTJOIN

    Check whether participation in a domain is still valid.

    [RPC|ADS] CHANGETRUSTPW

    Force change of domain trust password.

    RPC TRUSTDOM

    RPC TRUSTDOM ADD DOMAIN

    Add a interdomain trust account for -DOMAIN to the remote server. -

    RPC TRUSTDOM DEL DOMAIM

    Remove interdomain trust account for -DOMAIN from the remote server. -

    Note

    Currently NOT implemented.

    RPC TRUSTDOM ESTABLISH DOMAIN

    + + + + + +[RPC|ADS] TESTJOIN + +Check whether participation in a domain is still valid. + + + + +[RPC|ADS] CHANGETRUSTPW + +Force change of domain trust password. + + + + +RPC TRUSTDOM + + +RPC TRUSTDOM ADD <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable> + +Add a interdomain trust account for +DOMAIN to the remote server. + + + + + +RPC TRUSTDOM DEL <replaceable>DOMAIM</replaceable> + +Remove interdomain trust account for +DOMAIN from the remote server. + + +Currently NOT implemented. + + + + +RPC TRUSTDOM ESTABLISH <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable> + + Establish a trust relationship to a trusting domain. Interdomain account must already be created on the remote PDC. -

    RPC TRUSTDOM REVOKE DOMAIN

    Abandon relationship to trusted domain

    RPC TRUSTDOM LIST

    List all current interdomain trust relationships.

    RPC ABORTSHUTDOWN

    Abort the shutdown of a remote server.

    SHUTDOWN [-t timeout] [-r] [-f] [-C message]

    Shut down the remote server.

    -r

    + + + + + +RPC TRUSTDOM REVOKE <replaceable>DOMAIN</replaceable> +Abandon relationship to trusted domain + + + + +RPC TRUSTDOM LIST + +List all current interdomain trust relationships. + + + + + + +RPC ABORTSHUTDOWN + +Abort the shutdown of a remote server. + + + + +SHUTDOWN [-t timeout] [-r] [-f] [-C message] + +Shut down the remote server. + + + +-r + Reboot after shutdown. -

    -f

    + + + + +-f + Force shutting down all applications. -

    -t timeout

    + + + + +-t timeout + Timeout before system will be shut down. An interactive user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown. -

    -C message

    Display the specified message on the screen to -announce the shutdown.

    SAMDUMP

    Print out sam database of remote server. You need -to run this on either a BDC.

    VAMPIRE

    Export users, aliases and groups from remote server to + +'> + + +-C message +Display the specified message on the screen to +announce the shutdown. + + + + + + +SAMDUMP + +Print out sam database of remote server. You need +to run this on either a BDC. + + + +VAMPIRE + +Export users, aliases and groups from remote server to local server. Can only be run an a BDC. -

    GETSID

    Fetch domain SID and store it in the local secrets.tdb.

    ADS LEAVE

    Make the remote host leave the domain it is part of.

    ADS STATUS

    Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS. + + + + + +GETSID + +Fetch domain SID and store it in the local secrets.tdb. + + + + +ADS LEAVE + +Make the remote host leave the domain it is part of. + + + + +ADS STATUS + +Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS. Prints out quite some debug info. Aimed at developers, regular -users should use NET ADS TESTJOIN.

    ADS PRINTER

    ADS PRINTER INFO [PRINTER] [SERVER]

    -Lookup info for PRINTER on SERVER. The printer name defaults to "*", the -server name defaults to the local host.

    ADS PRINTER PUBLISH PRINTER

    Publish specified printer using ADS.

    ADS PRINTER REMOVE PRINTER

    Remove specified printer from ADS directory.

    ADS SEARCH EXPRESSION ATTRIBUTES...

    Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The +users should use NET ADS TESTJOIN. + + + + +ADS PRINTER + + +ADS PRINTER INFO [<replaceable>PRINTER</replaceable>] [<replaceable>SERVER</replaceable>] + + +Lookup info for PRINTER on SERVER. The printer name defaults to "*", the +server name defaults to the local host. + + + + +ADS PRINTER PUBLISH <replaceable>PRINTER</replaceable> + +Publish specified printer using ADS. + + + + +ADS PRINTER REMOVE <replaceable>PRINTER</replaceable> + +Remove specified printer from ADS directory. + + + + + + +ADS SEARCH <replaceable>EXPRESSION</replaceable> <replaceable>ATTRIBUTES...</replaceable> + +Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The expression is a standard LDAP search expression, and the -attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the results.

    Example: net ads search '(objectCategory=group)' sAMAccountName -

    ADS DN DN (attributes)

    +attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the results. + +Example: net ads search '(objectCategory=group)' sAMAccountName + + + + + +ADS DN <replaceable>DN</replaceable> <replaceable>(attributes)</replaceable> + + Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The DN standard LDAP DN, and the attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the result. -

    Example: net ads dn 'CN=administrator,CN=Users,DC=my,DC=domain' SAMAccountName

    WORKGROUP

    Print out workgroup name for specified kerberos realm.

    HELP [COMMAND]

    Gives usage information for the specified command.

    VERSION

    This man page is complete for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + + +Example: net ads dn 'CN=administrator,CN=Users,DC=my,DC=domain' SAMAccountName + + + + +WORKGROUP + +Print out workgroup name for specified kerberos realm. + + + + + +HELP [COMMAND] + +Gives usage information for the specified command. + + + + + + + VERSION + + This man page is complete for version 3.0 of the Samba + suite. + + + + AUTHOR + + The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The net manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij.

    + to the way the Linux kernel is developed. + + The net manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij. + + + + diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html index c282bde89d..815534dad9 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html @@ -1,153 +1,354 @@ -nmbd

    Name

    nmbd — NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS - over IP naming services to clients

    Synopsis

    nmbd [-D] [-F] [-S] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log directory>] [-n <primary netbios name>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>]

    DESCRIPTION

    This program is part of the Samba(7) suite.

    nmbd is a server that understands + + + %globalentities; + ]> + + + + nmbd + 8 + + + + + nmbd + NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS + over IP naming services to clients + + + + + nmbd + -D + -F + -S + -a + -i + -o + -h + -V + -d <debug level> + -H <lmhosts file> + -l <log directory> + -n <primary netbios name> + -p <port number> + -s <configuration file> + + + + + DESCRIPTION + This program is part of the Samba + 7 suite. + + nmbd is a server that understands and can reply to NetBIOS over IP name service requests, like those produced by SMB/CIFS clients such as Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and LanManager clients. It also participates in the browsing protocols which make up the - Windows "Network Neighborhood" view.

    SMB/CIFS clients, when they start up, may wish to + Windows "Network Neighborhood" view. + + SMB/CIFS clients, when they start up, may wish to locate an SMB/CIFS server. That is, they wish to know what - IP number a specified host is using.

    Amongst other services, nmbd will + IP number a specified host is using. + + Amongst other services, nmbd will listen for such requests, and if its own NetBIOS name is specified it will respond with the IP number of the host it is running on. Its "own NetBIOS name" is by default the primary DNS name of the host it is running on, - but this can be overridden with the -n - option (see OPTIONS below). Thus nmbd will + but this can be overridden with the -n + option (see OPTIONS below). Thus nmbd will reply to broadcast queries for its own name(s). Additional - names for nmbd to respond on can be set - via parameters in the smb.conf(5) configuration file.

    nmbd can also be used as a WINS + names for nmbd to respond on can be set + via parameters in the smb.conf + 5 configuration file. + + nmbd can also be used as a WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) server. What this basically means is that it will act as a WINS database server, creating a database from name registration requests that it receives and - replying to queries from clients for these names.

    In addition, nmbd can act as a WINS + replying to queries from clients for these names. + + In addition, nmbd can act as a WINS proxy, relaying broadcast queries from clients that do not understand how to talk the WINS protocol to a WINS - server.

    OPTIONS

    -D

    If specified, this parameter causes - nmbd to operate as a daemon. That is, + server. + + + + OPTIONS + + + + -D + If specified, this parameter causes + nmbd to operate as a daemon. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding - requests on the appropriate port. By default, nmbd + requests on the appropriate port. By default, nmbd will operate as a daemon if launched from a command shell. - nmbd can also be operated from the inetd + nmbd can also be operated from the inetd meta-daemon, although this is not recommended. -

    -F

    If specified, this parameter causes - the main nmbd process to not daemonize, + + + + + -F + If specified, this parameter causes + the main nmbd process to not daemonize, i.e. double-fork and disassociate with the terminal. Child processes are still created as normal to service each connection request, but the main process does not exit. This operation mode is suitable for running - nmbd under process supervisors such - as supervise and svscan - from Daniel J. Bernstein's daemontools + nmbd under process supervisors such + as supervise and svscan + from Daniel J. Bernstein's daemontools package, or the AIX process monitor. -

    -S

    If specified, this parameter causes - nmbd to log to standard output rather - than a file.

    -i

    If this parameter is specified it causes the + + + + + -S + If specified, this parameter causes + nmbd to log to standard output rather + than a file. + + + + -i + If this parameter is specified it causes the server to run "interactively", not as a daemon, even if the server is executed on the command line of a shell. Setting this parameter negates the implicit daemon mode when run from the - command line. nmbd also logs to standard - output, as if the -S parameter had been - given.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    -H <filename>

    NetBIOS lmhosts file. The lmhosts + command line. nmbd also logs to standard + output, as if the -S parameter had been + given. + + + + +-h|--help +Print a summary of command line options. + + + + + -H <filename> + NetBIOS lmhosts file. The lmhosts file is a list of NetBIOS names to IP addresses that is loaded by the nmbd server and used via the name - resolution mechanism name resolve - order described in smb.conf(5) to resolve any + resolution mechanism name resolve ordername resolve order described in smb.conf + 5 to resolve any NetBIOS name queries needed by the server. Note - that the contents of this file are NOT - used by nmbd to answer any name queries. + that the contents of this file are NOT + used by nmbd to answer any name queries. Adding a line to this file affects name NetBIOS resolution - from this host ONLY.

    The default path to this file is compiled into + from this host ONLY. + + The default path to this file is compiled into Samba as part of the build process. Common defaults - are /usr/local/samba/lib/lmhosts, - /usr/samba/lib/lmhosts or - /etc/samba/lmhosts. See the lmhosts(5) man page for details on the contents of this file.

    -V

    Prints the version number for -smbd.

    -s <configuration file>

    The file specified contains the + are /usr/local/samba/lib/lmhosts, + /usr/samba/lib/lmhosts or + /etc/samba/lmhosts. See the lmhosts + 5 man page for details on the contents of this file. + + + + + +-V +Prints the version number for +smbd. + + + +-s <configuration file> +The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at -compile time.

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer +compile time. + + + +-d|--debug=debuglevel + +debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is -not specified is zero.

    The higher this value, the more detail will be +not specified is zero. + +The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day to day running - it generates a small amount of -information about operations carried out.

    Levels above 1 will generate considerable +information about operations carried out. + +Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log -data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension -".client" will be appended. The log file is +data, most of which is extremely cryptic. + +Note that specifying this parameter here will +override the log levellog level parameter +in the smb.conf file. + + + + +-l|--logfile=logbasename +File name for log/debug files. The extension +".client" will be appended. The log file is never removed by the client. -

    -p <UDP port number>

    UDP port number is a positive integer value. + + + + + + -p <UDP port number> + UDP port number is a positive integer value. This option changes the default UDP port number (normally 137) - that nmbd responds to name queries on. Don't + that nmbd responds to name queries on. Don't use this option unless you are an expert, in which case you - won't need help!

    FILES

    /etc/inetd.conf

    If the server is to be run by the - inetd meta-daemon, this file + won't need help! + + + + + + + FILES + + + + /etc/inetd.conf + If the server is to be run by the + inetd meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the - meta-daemon. See the install document - for details. -

    /etc/rc

    or whatever initialization script your - system uses).

    If running the server as a daemon at startup, + meta-daemon. + + + + + /etc/rc + or whatever initialization script your + system uses). + + If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup - sequence for the server. See the "How to Install and Test SAMBA" document - for details.

    /etc/services

    If running the server via the - meta-daemon inetd, this file + sequence for the server. + + + + /etc/services + If running the server via the + meta-daemon inetd, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e.g., netbios-ssn) to service port (e.g., 139) and protocol type (e.g., tcp). - See the "How to Install and Test SAMBA" - document for details.

    /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf

    This is the default location of - the smb.conf(5) server + + + + + /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf + This is the default location of + the smb.conf + 5 server configuration file. Other common places that systems - install this file are /usr/samba/lib/smb.conf - and /etc/samba/smb.conf.

    When run as a WINS server (see the - wins support - parameter in the smb.conf(5) man page), - nmbd - will store the WINS database in the file wins.dat - in the var/locks directory configured under - wherever Samba was configured to install itself.

    If nmbd is acting as a - browse master (see the local master - parameter in the smb.conf(5) man page, nmbd - will store the browsing database in the file browse.dat - in the var/locks directory + install this file are /usr/samba/lib/smb.conf + and /etc/samba/smb.conf. + + When run as a WINS server (see the + wins supportwins support + parameter in the smb.conf + 5 man page), + nmbd + will store the WINS database in the file wins.dat + in the var/locks directory configured under + wherever Samba was configured to install itself. + + If nmbd is acting as a + browse master (see the local masterlocal master + parameter in the smb.conf + 5 man page, nmbd + will store the browsing database in the file browse.dat + in the var/locks directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself. -

    SIGNALS

    To shut down an nmbd process it is recommended - that SIGKILL (-9) NOT be used, except as a last + + + + + + + SIGNALS + + To shut down an nmbd process it is recommended + that SIGKILL (-9) NOT be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the name database in an inconsistent state. - The correct way to terminate nmbd is to send it - a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for it to die on its own.

    nmbd will accept SIGHUP, which will cause - it to dump out its namelists into the file namelist.debug - in the /usr/local/samba/var/locks - directory (or the var/locks directory configured + The correct way to terminate nmbd is to send it + a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for it to die on its own. + + nmbd will accept SIGHUP, which will cause + it to dump out its namelists into the file namelist.debug + in the /usr/local/samba/var/locks + directory (or the var/locks directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself). This will also - cause nmbd to dump out its server database in - the log.nmb file.

    The debug log level of nmbd may be raised or lowered - using smbcontrol(1) (SIGUSR[1|2] signals + cause nmbd to dump out its server database in + the log.nmb file. + + The debug log level of nmbd may be raised or lowered + using smbcontrol + 1 (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2.2). This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running - at a normally low log level.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    - inetd(8), smbd(8), smb.conf(5), smbclient(1), testparm(1), testprns(1), and the Internet - RFC's rfc1001.txt, rfc1002.txt. + at a normally low log level. + + + + + VERSION + + This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite. + + + + SEE ALSO + + inetd + 8, smbd + 8, smb.conf + 5, smbclient + 1, testparm + 1, testprns + 1, and the Internet + RFC's rfc1001.txt, rfc1002.txt. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available - as a link from the Web page - http://samba.org/cifs/.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + as a link from the Web page + http://samba.org/cifs/. + + + + AUTHOR + + The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. + to the way the Linux kernel is developed. + + The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at - ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook - XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.

    + XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy. + + + diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html index 46c17ce706..26320c93b2 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html @@ -1,107 +1,322 @@ -nmblookup

    Name

    nmblookup — NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS - names

    Synopsis

    nmblookup [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] [-f] {name}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.

    nmblookup is used to query NetBIOS names + + + %globalentities; + ]> + + + + nmblookup + 1 + + + + + nmblookup + NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS + names + + + + + nmblookup + -M + -R + -S + -r + -A + -h + -B <broadcast address> + -U <unicast address> + -d <debug level> + -s <smb config file> + -i <NetBIOS scope> + -T + -f + name + + + + + DESCRIPTION + + This tool is part of the Samba + 7 suite. + + nmblookup is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP addresses in a network using NetBIOS over TCP/IP queries. The options allow the name queries to be directed at a particular IP broadcast area or to a particular machine. All queries - are done over UDP.

    OPTIONS

    -M

    Searches for a master browser by looking - up the NetBIOS name name with a - type of 0x1d. If - name is "-" then it does a lookup on the special name - __MSBROWSE__. Please note that in order to + are done over UDP. + + + + OPTIONS + + + + -M + Searches for a master browser by looking + up the NetBIOS name name with a + type of 0x1d. If + name is "-" then it does a lookup on the special name + __MSBROWSE__. Please note that in order to use the name "-", you need to make sure "-" isn't parsed as an argument, e.g. use : - nmblookup -M -- -.

    -R

    Set the recursion desired bit in the packet + nmblookup -M -- -. + + + + -R + Set the recursion desired bit in the packet to do a recursive lookup. This is used when sending a name query to a machine running a WINS server and the user wishes to query the names in the WINS server. If this bit is unset the normal (broadcast responding) NetBIOS processing code on a machine is used instead. See RFC1001, RFC1002 for details. -

    -S

    Once the name query has returned an IP + + + + + -S + Once the name query has returned an IP address then do a node status query as well. A node status query returns the NetBIOS names registered by a host. -

    -r

    Try and bind to UDP port 137 to send and receive UDP + + + + + + -r + Try and bind to UDP port 137 to send and receive UDP datagrams. The reason for this option is a bug in Windows 95 where it ignores the source port of the requesting packet and only replies to UDP port 137. Unfortunately, on most UNIX systems root privilege is needed to bind to this port, and - in addition, if the nmbd(8) daemon is running on this machine it also binds to this port. -

    -A

    Interpret name as - an IP Address and do a node status query on this address.

    -n <primary NetBIOS name>

    This option allows you to override + in addition, if the nmbd + 8 daemon is running on this machine it also binds to this port. + + + + + + -A + Interpret name as + an IP Address and do a node status query on this address. + + + + + + + + +-n <primary NetBIOS name> +This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical -to setting the NetBIOS -name parameter in the smb.conf(5) file. However, a command +to setting the netbios namenetbios name parameter in the smb.conf file. +However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in -smb.conf(5).

    -i <scope>

    This specifies a NetBIOS scope that -nmblookup will use to communicate with when +smb.conf. + + + +-i <scope> +This specifies a NetBIOS scope that +nmblookup will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes are -very rarely used, only set this parameter +very rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all the -NetBIOS systems you communicate with.

    -W|--workgroup=domain

    Set the SMB domain of the username. This +NetBIOS systems you communicate with. + + + +-W|--workgroup=domain +Set the SMB domain of the username. This overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in smb.conf. If the domain specified is the same as the servers NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the servers local -SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM).

    -O socket options

    TCP socket options to set on the client +SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM). + + + +-O socket options +TCP socket options to set on the client socket. See the socket options parameter in -the smb.conf(5) manual page for the list of valid -options.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    -B <broadcast address>

    Send the query to the given broadcast address. Without +the smb.conf manual page for the list of valid +options. + + + + + +-h|--help +Print a summary of command line options. + + + + + -B <broadcast address> + Send the query to the given broadcast address. Without this option the default behavior of nmblookup is to send the query to the broadcast address of the network interfaces as - either auto-detected or defined in the interfaces - parameter of the smb.conf(5) file. -

    -U <unicast address>

    Do a unicast query to the specified address or - host unicast address. This option - (along with the -R option) is needed to - query a WINS server.

    -V

    Prints the version number for -smbd.

    -s <configuration file>

    The file specified contains the + either auto-detected or defined in the interfaces + parameter of the smb.conf + 5 file. + + + + + + + -U <unicast address> + Do a unicast query to the specified address or + host unicast address. This option + (along with the -R option) is needed to + query a WINS server. + + + + + + +-V +Prints the version number for +smbd. + + + +-s <configuration file> +The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at -compile time.

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer +compile time. + + + +-d|--debug=debuglevel + +debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is -not specified is zero.

    The higher this value, the more detail will be +not specified is zero. + +The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day to day running - it generates a small amount of -information about operations carried out.

    Levels above 1 will generate considerable +information about operations carried out. + +Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log -data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension -".client" will be appended. The log file is +data, most of which is extremely cryptic. + +Note that specifying this parameter here will +override the log levellog level parameter +in the smb.conf file. + + + + +-l|--logfile=logbasename +File name for log/debug files. The extension +".client" will be appended. The log file is never removed by the client. -

    -T

    This causes any IP addresses found in the + + + + + + -T + This causes any IP addresses found in the lookup to be looked up via a reverse DNS lookup into a - DNS name, and printed out before each

    IP address .... NetBIOS name

    pair that is the normal output.

    -f

    + DNS name, and printed out before each + + IP address .... NetBIOS name + + pair that is the normal output. + + + + -f + Show which flags apply to the name that has been looked up. Possible answers are zero or more of: Response, Authoritative, Truncated, Recursion_Desired, Recursion_Available, Broadcast. -

    name

    This is the NetBIOS name being queried. Depending + + + + + + name + This is the NetBIOS name being queried. Depending upon the previous options this may be a NetBIOS name or IP address. If a NetBIOS name then the different name types may be specified by appending '#<type>' to the name. This name may also be '*', which will return all registered names within a broadcast - area.

    EXAMPLES

    nmblookup can be used to query - a WINS server (in the same way nslookup is - used to query DNS servers). To query a WINS server, nmblookup - must be called like this:

    nmblookup -U server -R 'name'

    For example, running :

    nmblookup -U samba.org -R 'IRIX#1B'

    would query the WINS server samba.org for the domain - master browser (1B name type) for the IRIX workgroup.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    nmbd(8), samba(7), and smb.conf(5).

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + area. + + + + + + + EXAMPLES + + nmblookup can be used to query + a WINS server (in the same way nslookup is + used to query DNS servers). To query a WINS server, nmblookup + must be called like this: + + nmblookup -U server -R 'name' + + For example, running : + + nmblookup -U samba.org -R 'IRIX#1B' + + would query the WINS server samba.org for the domain + master browser (1B name type) for the IRIX workgroup. + + + + VERSION + + This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite. + + + + SEE ALSO + nmbd + 8, samba + 7, and smb.conf + 5. + + + + AUTHOR + + The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. + to the way the Linux kernel is developed. + + The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at - ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook - XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.

    + XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy. + + + diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/ntlm_auth.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/ntlm_auth.1.html index d2ee979d4d..3fe48ac02d 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/ntlm_auth.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/ntlm_auth.1.html @@ -17,8 +17,7 @@ configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is @@ -32,9 +31,8 @@ amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension +override the log level parameter +in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension ".client" will be appended. The log file is never removed by the client.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/optional.html b/docs/htmldocs/optional.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1a6d971f5f..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/optional.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ - -Part III. Advanced Configuration

    Part III. Advanced Configuration
    Prev   Next

    Advanced Configuration

    Valuable Nuts and Bolts Information

    -Samba has several features that you might want or might not want to use. The chapters in this part each cover specific Samba features. -

    Table of Contents

    10. Samba / MS Windows Network Browsing Guide
    Features and Benefits
    What is Browsing?
    Discussion
    NetBIOS over TCP/IP
    TCP/IP - without NetBIOS
    DNS and Active Directory
    How Browsing Functions
    Setting up WORKGROUP Browsing
    Setting up DOMAIN Browsing
    Forcing Samba to be the master
    Making Samba the domain master
    Note about broadcast addresses
    Multiple interfaces
    Use of the Remote Announce parameter
    Use of the Remote Browse Sync parameter
    WINS - The Windows Internetworking Name Server
    Setting up a WINS server
    WINS Replication
    Static WINS Entries
    Helpful Hints
    Windows Networking Protocols
    Name Resolution Order
    Technical Overview of browsing
    Browsing support in Samba
    Problem resolution
    Browsing across subnets
    Common Errors
    How can one flush the Samba NetBIOS name cache without restarting Samba?
    My client reports "This server is not configured to list shared resources"
    11. Account Information Databases
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Information
    Important Notes About Security
    Mapping User Identifiers between MS Windows and Unix
    Account Management Tools
    The smbpasswd Command
    The pdbedit Command
    Password Backends
    Plain Text
    smbpasswd - Encrypted Password Database
    tdbsam
    ldapsam
    MySQL
    XML
    Common Errors
    Users can not logon - Users not in Samba SAM
    Users are being added to the wrong backend database
    auth methods does not work
    12. Mapping MS Windows and Unix Groups
    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Example Configuration
    Configuration Scripts
    Sample smb.conf add group script
    Script to configure Group Mapping
    Common Errors
    Adding Groups Fails
    Adding MS Windows Groups to MS Windows Groups Fails
    13. File, Directory and Share Access Controls
    Features and Benefits
    File System Access Controls
    MS Windows NTFS Comparison with Unix File Systems
    Managing Directories
    File and Directory Access Control
    Share Definition Access Controls
    User and Group Based Controls
    File and Directory Permissions Based Controls
    Miscellaneous Controls
    Access Controls on Shares
    Share Permissions Management
    MS Windows Access Control Lists and Unix Interoperability
    Managing UNIX permissions Using NT Security Dialogs
    Viewing File Security on a Samba Share
    Viewing file ownership
    Viewing File or Directory Permissions
    Modifying file or directory permissions
    Interaction with the standard Samba create mask - parameters
    Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute - mapping
    Common Errors
    Users can not write to a public share
    I have set force user and Samba still makes root the owner of all the files - I touch!
    14. File and Record Locking
    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Opportunistic Locking Overview
    Samba Opportunistic Locking Control
    Example Configuration
    MS Windows Opportunistic Locking and Caching Controls
    Workstation Service Entries
    Server Service Entries
    Persistent Data Corruption
    Common Errors
    locking.tdb error messages
    Additional Reading
    15. Securing Samba
    Introduction
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Discussion of Protective Measures and Issues
    Using host based protection
    User based protection
    Using interface protection
    Using a firewall
    Using a IPC$ share deny
    NTLMv2 Security
    Upgrading Samba
    Common Errors
    Smbclient works on localhost, but the network is dead
    Why can users access home directories of other users?
    16. Interdomain Trust Relationships
    Features and Benefits
    Trust Relationship Background
    Native MS Windows NT4 Trusts Configuration
    NT4 as the Trusting Domain (ie. creating the trusted account)
    NT4 as the Trusted Domain (ie. creating trusted account's password)
    Configuring Samba NT-style Domain Trusts
    Samba-3 as the Trusting Domain
    Samba-3 as the Trusted Domain
    Common Errors
    Tell me about Trust Relationships using Samba
    17. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba
    Features and Benefits
    Common Errors
    18. Classical Printing Support
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Introduction
    What happens if you send a Job from a Client
    Printing Related Configuration Parameters
    Parameters Recommended for Use
    Parameters for Backwards Compatibility
    Parameters no longer in use
    A simple Configuration to Print with Samba-3
    Verification of "Settings in Use" with testparm
    A little Experiment to warn you
    Extended Sample Configuration to Print with Samba-3
    Detailed Explanation of the Example's Settings
    The [global] Section
    The [printers] Section
    Any [my_printer_name] Section
    Print Commands
    Default Print Commands for various Unix Print Subsystems
    Setting up your own Print Commands
    Innovations in Samba Printing since 2.2
    Client Drivers on Samba Server for Point'n'Print
    The [printer$] Section is removed from Samba-3
    Creating the [print$] Share
    Parameters in the [print$] Section
    Subdirectory Structure in [print$]
    Installing Drivers into [print$]
    Setting Drivers for existing Printers with a Client GUI
    Setting Drivers for existing Printers with -rpcclient
    "The Proof of the Pudding lies in the Eating" (Client Driver Install -Procedure)
    The first Client Driver Installation
    IMPORTANT! Setting Device Modes on new Printers
    Further Client Driver Install Procedures
    Always make first Client Connection as root or "printer admin"
    Other Gotchas
    Setting Default Print Options for the Client Drivers
    Supporting large Numbers of Printers
    Adding new Printers with the Windows NT APW
    Weird Error Message Cannot connect under a -different Name
    Be careful when assembling Driver Files
    Samba and Printer Ports
    Avoiding the most common Misconfigurations of the Client Driver
    The Imprints Toolset
    What is Imprints?
    Creating Printer Driver Packages
    The Imprints Server
    The Installation Client
    Add Network Printers at Logon without User Interaction
    The addprinter command
    Migration of "Classical" printing to Samba-3
    Publishing Printer Information in Active Directory or LDAP
    Common Errors and Problems
    I give my root password but I don't get access
    My printjobs get spooled into the spooling directory, but then get lost
    19. CUPS Printing Support in Samba 3.0
    Introduction
    Features and Benefits
    Overview
    Basic Configuration of CUPS support
    Linking of smbd with libcups.so
    Simple smb.conf Settings for CUPS
    More complex smb.conf Settings for -CUPS
    Advanced Configuration
    Central spooling vs. "Peer-to-Peer" printing
    CUPS/Samba as a "spooling-only" Print Server; "raw" printing -with Vendor Drivers on Windows Clients
    Driver Installation Methods on Windows Clients
    Explicitly enable "raw" printing for -application/octet-stream!
    Three familiar Methods for driver upload plus a new one
    Using CUPS/Samba in an advanced Way -- intelligent printing -with PostScript Driver Download
    GDI on Windows -- PostScript on Unix
    Windows Drivers, GDI and EMF
    Unix Printfile Conversion and GUI Basics
    PostScript and Ghostscript
    Ghostscript -- the Software RIP for non-PostScript Printers
    PostScript Printer Description (PPD) Specification
    CUPS can use all Windows-formatted Vendor PPDs
    CUPS also uses PPDs for non-PostScript Printers
    The CUPS Filtering Architecture
    MIME types and CUPS Filters
    MIME type Conversion Rules
    Filter Requirements
    Prefilters
    pstops
    pstoraster
    imagetops and imagetoraster
    rasterto [printers specific]
    CUPS Backends
    cupsomatic/Foomatic -- how do they fit into the Picture?
    The Complete Picture
    mime.convs
    "Raw" printing
    "application/octet-stream" printing
    PostScript Printer Descriptions (PPDs) for non-PS Printers
    Difference between cupsomatic/foomatic-rip and -native CUPS printing
    Examples for filtering Chains
    Sources of CUPS drivers / PPDs
    Printing with Interface Scripts
    Network printing (purely Windows)
    From Windows Clients to an NT Print Server
    Driver Execution on the Client
    Driver Execution on the Server
    Network Printing (Windows clients -- UNIX/Samba Print -Servers)
    From Windows Clients to a CUPS/Samba Print Server
    Samba receiving Jobfiles and passing them to CUPS
    Network PostScript RIP: CUPS Filters on Server -- clients use -PostScript Driver with CUPS-PPDs
    PPDs for non-PS Printers on UNIX
    PPDs for non-PS Printers on Windows
    Windows Terminal Servers (WTS) as CUPS Clients
    Printer Drivers running in "Kernel Mode" cause many -Problems
    Workarounds impose Heavy Limitations
    CUPS: a "Magical Stone"?
    PostScript Drivers with no major problems -- even in Kernel -Mode
    Setting up CUPS for driver Download
    cupsaddsmb: the unknown Utility
    Prepare your smb.conf for -cupsaddsmb
    CUPS Package of "PostScript Driver for WinNT/2k/XP"
    Recognize the different Driver Files
    Acquiring the Adobe Driver Files
    ESP Print Pro Package of "PostScript Driver for -WinNT/2k/XP"
    Caveats to be considered
    What are the Benefits of using the "CUPS PostScript Driver for -Windows NT/2k/XP" as compared to the Adobe Driver?
    Run "cupsaddsmb" (quiet Mode)
    Run "cupsaddsmb" with verbose Output
    Understanding cupsaddsmb
    How to recognize if cupsaddsm completed successfully
    cupsaddsmb with a Samba PDC
    cupsaddsmb Flowchart
    Installing the PostScript Driver on a Client
    Avoiding critical PostScript Driver Settings on the -Client
    Installing PostScript Driver Files manually (using -rpcclient)
    A Check of the rpcclient man Page
    Understanding the rpcclient man Page
    Producing an Example by querying a Windows Box
    What is required for adddriver and setdriver to succeed
    Manual Commandline Driver Installation in 15 little Steps
    Troubleshooting revisited
    The printing *.tdb Files
    Trivial DataBase Files
    Binary Format
    Losing *.tdb Files
    Using tdbbackup
    CUPS Print Drivers from Linuxprinting.org
    foomatic-rip and Foomatic explained
    foomatic-rip and Foomatic-PPD Download and Installation
    Page Accounting with CUPS
    Setting up Quotas
    Correct and incorrect Accounting
    Adobe and CUPS PostScript Drivers for Windows Clients
    The page_log File Syntax
    Possible Shortcomings
    Future Developments
    Other Accounting Tools
    Additional Material
    Auto-Deletion or Preservation of CUPS Spool Files
    CUPS Configuration Settings explained
    Pre-conditions
    Manual Configuration
    When not to use Samba to print to -CUPS
    In Case of Trouble.....
    Where to find Documentation
    How to ask for Help
    Where to find Help
    Appendix
    Printing from CUPS to Windows attached -Printers
    More CUPS filtering Chains
    Trouble Shooting Guidelines to fix typical Samba printing -Problems
    An Overview of the CUPS Printing Processes
    20. Stackable VFS modules
    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Included modules
    audit
    extd_audit
    fake_perms
    recycle
    netatalk
    VFS modules available elsewhere
    DatabaseFS
    vscan
    Common Errors
    21. Integrated Logon Support using Winbind
    Features and Benefits
    Introduction
    What Winbind Provides
    Target Uses
    How Winbind Works
    Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls
    Microsoft Active Directory Services
    Name Service Switch
    Pluggable Authentication Modules
    User and Group ID Allocation
    Result Caching
    Installation and Configuration
    Introduction
    Requirements
    Testing Things Out
    Conclusion
    Common Errors
    22. Advanced Network Management
    Features and Benefits
    Remote Server Administration
    Remote Desktop Management
    Remote Management from NoMachines.Com
    Network Logon Script Magic
    Adding printers without user intervention
    Common Errors
    23. System and Account Policies
    Features and Benefits
    Creating and Managing System Policies
    Windows 9x/Me Policies
    Windows NT4 Style Policy Files
    MS Windows 200x / XP Professional Policies
    Managing Account/User Policies
    Samba Editreg Toolset
    Windows NT4/200x
    Samba PDC
    System Startup and Logon Processing Overview
    Common Errors
    Policy Does Not Work
    24. Desktop Profile Management
    Features and Benefits
    Roaming Profiles
    Samba Configuration for Profile Handling
    Windows Client Profile Configuration Information
    Sharing Profiles between W9x/Me and NT4/200x/XP workstations
    Profile Migration from Windows NT4/200x Server to Samba
    Mandatory profiles
    Creating/Managing Group Profiles
    Default Profile for Windows Users
    MS Windows 9x/Me
    MS Windows NT4 Workstation
    MS Windows 200x/XP
    Common Errors
    How does one set up roaming profiles for just one (or a few) user/s or group/s?
    Can NOT use Roaming Profiles
    Changing the default profile
    25. PAM based Distributed Authentication
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Discussion
    PAM Configuration Syntax
    Example System Configurations
    smb.conf PAM Configuration
    Remote CIFS Authentication using winbindd.so
    Password Synchronization using pam_smbpass.so
    Common Errors
    pam_winbind problem
    26. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba
    Features and Benefits
    Background Information
    Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world
    /etc/hosts
    /etc/resolv.conf
    /etc/host.conf
    /etc/nsswitch.conf
    Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking
    The NetBIOS Name Cache
    The LMHOSTS file
    HOSTS file
    DNS Lookup
    WINS Lookup
    Common Errors
    My Boomerang Won't Come Back
    Very Slow Network Connections
    Samba server name change problem
    27. Unicode/Charsets
    Features and Benefits
    What are charsets and unicode?
    Samba and charsets
    Conversion from old names
    Japanese charsets
    28. Samba Backup Techniques
    Note
    Features and Benefits
    29. High Availability Options
    Note
    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 9. MS Windows Network Configuration Guide Home Chapter 10. Samba / MS Windows Network Browsing Guide
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/pam.html b/docs/htmldocs/pam.html deleted file mode 100644 index b3d0314add..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/pam.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,523 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 25. PAM based Distributed Authentication
    Chapter 25. PAM based Distributed Authentication
    Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

    Chapter 25. PAM based Distributed Authentication

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Stephen Langasek

    May 31, 2003

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    Technical Discussion
    PAM Configuration Syntax
    Example System Configurations
    smb.conf PAM Configuration
    Remote CIFS Authentication using winbindd.so
    Password Synchronization using pam_smbpass.so
    Common Errors
    pam_winbind problem

    -This chapter you should help you to deploy winbind based authentication on any PAM enabled -Unix/Linux system. Winbind can be used to enable user level application access authentication -from any MS Windows NT Domain, MS Windows 200x Active Directory based domain, or any Samba -based domain environment. It will also help you to configure PAM based local host access -controls that are appropriate to your Samba configuration. -

    -In addition to knowing how to configure winbind into PAM, you will learn generic PAM management -possibilities and in particular how to deploy tools like pam_smbpass.so to your advantage. -

    Note

    -The use of Winbind require more than PAM configuration alone. Please refer to the Winbind chapter. -

    Features and Benefits

    -A number of Unix systems (eg: Sun Solaris), as well as the xxxxBSD family and Linux, -now utilize the Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM) facility to provide all authentication, -authorization and resource control services. Prior to the introduction of PAM, a decision -to use an alternative to the system password database (/etc/passwd) -would require the provision of alternatives for all programs that provide security services. -Such a choice would involve provision of alternatives to such programs as: login, -passwd, chown, etc. -

    -PAM provides a mechanism that disconnects these security programs from the underlying -authentication/authorization infrastructure. PAM is configured either through one file -/etc/pam.conf (Solaris), or by editing individual files that are -located in /etc/pam.d. -

    -On PAM enabled Unix/Linux systems it is an easy matter to configure the system to use any -authentication backend, so long as the appropriate dynamically loadable library modules -are available for it. The backend may be local to the system, or may be centralised on a -remote server. -

    -PAM support modules are available for: -

    /etc/passwd

    -

    - There are several PAM modules that interact with this standard Unix user - database. The most common are called: pam_unix.so, pam_unix2.so, pam_pwdb.so - and pam_userdb.so. -

    Kerberos

    -

    - The pam_krb5.so module allows the use of any Kerberos compliant server. - This tool is used to access MIT Kerberos, Heimdal Kerberos, and potentially - Microsoft Active Directory (if enabled). -

    LDAP

    -

    - The pam_ldap.so module allows the use of any LDAP v2 or v3 compatible backend - server. Commonly used LDAP backend servers include: OpenLDAP v2.0 and v2.1, - Sun ONE iDentity server, Novell eDirectory server, Microsoft Active Directory. -

    NetWare Bindery

    -

    - The pam_ncp_auth.so module allows authentication off any bindery enabled - NetWare Core Protocol based server. -

    SMB Password

    -

    - This module, called pam_smbpass.so, will allow user authentication off - the passdb backend that is configured in the Samba smb.conf file. -

    SMB Server

    -

    - The pam_smb_auth.so module is the original MS Windows networking authentication - tool. This module has been somewhat outdated by the Winbind module. -

    Winbind

    -

    - The pam_winbind.so module allows Samba to obtain authentication from any - MS Windows Domain Controller. It can just as easily be used to authenticate - users for access to any PAM enabled application. -

    RADIUS

    -

    - There is a PAM RADIUS (Remote Access Dial-In User Service) authentication - module. In most cases the administrator will need to locate the source code - for this tool and compile and install it themselves. RADIUS protocols are - used by many routers and terminal servers. -

    -Of the above, Samba provides the pam_smbpasswd.so and the pam_winbind.so modules alone. -

    -Once configured, these permit a remarkable level of flexibility in the location and use -of distributed samba domain controllers that can provide wide are network bandwidth -efficient authentication services for PAM capable systems. In effect, this allows the -deployment of centrally managed and maintained distributed authentication from a single -user account database. -

    Technical Discussion

    -PAM is designed to provide the system administrator with a great deal of flexibility in -configuration of the privilege granting applications of their system. The local -configuration of system security controlled by PAM is contained in one of two places: -either the single system file, /etc/pam.conf; or the /etc/pam.d/ directory. -

    PAM Configuration Syntax

    -In this section we discuss the correct syntax of and generic options respected by entries to these files. -PAM specific tokens in the configuration file are case insensitive. The module paths, however, are case -sensitive since they indicate a file's name and reflect the case dependence of typical file-systems. -The case-sensitivity of the arguments to any given module is defined for each module in turn. -

    -In addition to the lines described below, there are two special characters provided for the convenience -of the system administrator: comments are preceded by a `#' and extend to the next end-of-line; also, -module specification lines may be extended with a `\' escaped newline. -

    -If the PAM authentication module (loadable link library file) is located in the -default location then it is not necessary to specify the path. In the case of -Linux, the default location is /lib/security. If the module -is located outside the default then the path must be specified as: -

    -
    -auth  required  /other_path/pam_strange_module.so
-
    -

    Anatomy of /etc/pam.d Entries

    -The remaining information in this subsection was taken from the documentation of the Linux-PAM -project. For more information on PAM, see - -http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/pam The Official Linux-PAM home page. -

    -A general configuration line of the /etc/pam.conf file has the following form: -

    -
    -service-name   module-type   control-flag   module-path   args
-
    -

    -Below, we explain the meaning of each of these tokens. The second (and more recently adopted) -way of configuring Linux-PAM is via the contents of the /etc/pam.d/ directory. -Once we have explained the meaning of the above tokens, we will describe this method. -

    service-name

    -

    - The name of the service associated with this entry. Frequently the service name is the conventional - name of the given application. For example, `ftpd', `rlogind' and `su', etc. . -

    - There is a special service-name, reserved for defining a default authentication mechanism. It has - the name `OTHER' and may be specified in either lower or upper case characters. Note, when there - is a module specified for a named service, the `OTHER' entries are ignored. -

    module-type

    -

    - One of (currently) four types of module. The four types are as follows: -

    • - auth: this module type provides two aspects of authenticating the user. - Firstly, it establishes that the user is who they claim to be, by instructing the application - to prompt the user for a password or other means of identification. Secondly, the module can - grant group membership (independently of the /etc/groups file discussed - above) or other privileges through its credential granting properties. -

    • - account: this module performs non-authentication based account management. - It is typically used to restrict/permit access to a service based on the time of day, currently - available system resources (maximum number of users) or perhaps the location of the applicant - user `root' login only on the console. -

    • - session: primarily, this module is associated with doing things that need - to be done for the user before/after they can be given service. Such things include the logging - of information concerning the opening/closing of some data exchange with a user, mounting - directories, etc. -

    • - password: this last module type is required for updating the authentication - token associated with the user. Typically, there is one module for each `challenge/response' - based authentication (auth) module-type. -

    control-flag

    -

    - The control-flag is used to indicate how the PAM library will react to the success or failure of the - module it is associated with. Since modules can be stacked (modules of the same type execute in series, - one after another), the control-flags determine the relative importance of each module. The application - is not made aware of the individual success or failure of modules listed in the - /etc/pam.conf file. Instead, it receives a summary success or fail response from - the Linux-PAM library. The order of execution of these modules is that of the entries in the - /etc/pam.conf file; earlier entries are executed before later ones. - As of Linux-PAM v0.60, this control-flag can be defined with one of two syntaxes. -

    - The simpler (and historical) syntax for the control-flag is a single keyword defined to indicate the - severity of concern associated with the success or failure of a specific module. There are four such - keywords: required, requisite, sufficient and optional. -

    - The Linux-PAM library interprets these keywords in the following manner: -

    • - required: this indicates that the success of the module is required for the - module-type facility to succeed. Failure of this module will not be apparent to the user until all - of the remaining modules (of the same module-type) have been executed. -

    • - requisite: like required, however, in the case that such a module returns a - failure, control is directly returned to the application. The return value is that associated with - the first required or requisite module to fail. Note, this flag can be used to protect against the - possibility of a user getting the opportunity to enter a password over an unsafe medium. It is - conceivable that such behavior might inform an attacker of valid accounts on a system. This - possibility should be weighed against the not insignificant concerns of exposing a sensitive - password in a hostile environment. -

    • - sufficient: the success of this module is deemed `sufficient' to satisfy - the Linux-PAM library that this module-type has succeeded in its purpose. In the event that no - previous required module has failed, no more `stacked' modules of this type are invoked. (Note, - in this case subsequent required modules are not invoked.). A failure of this module is not deemed - as fatal to satisfying the application that this module-type has succeeded. -

    • - optional: as its name suggests, this control-flag marks the module as not - being critical to the success or failure of the user's application for service. In general, - Linux-PAM ignores such a module when determining if the module stack will succeed or fail. - However, in the absence of any definite successes or failures of previous or subsequent stacked - modules this module will determine the nature of the response to the application. One example of - this latter case, is when the other modules return something like PAM_IGNORE. -

    - The more elaborate (newer) syntax is much more specific and gives the administrator a great deal of control - over how the user is authenticated. This form of the control flag is delimited with square brackets and - consists of a series of value=action tokens: - 

    -		[value1=action1 value2=action2 ...]
-

    - Here, value1 is one of the following return values: success; open_err; symbol_err; service_err; - system_err; buf_err; perm_denied; auth_err; cred_insufficient; authinfo_unavail; user_unknown; maxtries; - new_authtok_reqd; acct_expired; session_err; cred_unavail; cred_expired; cred_err; no_module_data; conv_err; - authtok_err; authtok_recover_err; authtok_lock_busy; authtok_disable_aging; try_again; ignore; abort; - authtok_expired; module_unknown; bad_item; and default. The last of these (default) can be used to set - the action for those return values that are not explicitly defined. -

    - The action1 can be a positive integer or one of the following tokens: ignore; ok; done; bad; die; and reset. - A positive integer, J, when specified as the action, can be used to indicate that the next J modules of the - current module-type will be skipped. In this way, the administrator can develop a moderately sophisticated - stack of modules with a number of different paths of execution. Which path is taken can be determined by the - reactions of individual modules. -

    • - ignore: when used with a stack of modules, the module's return status will not - contribute to the return code the application obtains. -

    • - bad: this action indicates that the return code should be thought of as indicative - of the module failing. If this module is the first in the stack to fail, its status value will be used - for that of the whole stack. -

    • - die: equivalent to bad with the side effect of terminating the module stack and - PAM immediately returning to the application. -

    • - ok: this tells PAM that the administrator thinks this return code should - contribute directly to the return code of the full stack of modules. In other words, if the former - state of the stack would lead to a return of PAM_SUCCESS, the module's return code will override - this value. Note, if the former state of the stack holds some value that is indicative of a modules - failure, this 'ok' value will not be used to override that value. -

    • - done: equivalent to ok with the side effect of terminating the module stack and - PAM immediately returning to the application. -

    • - reset: clear all memory of the state of the module stack and start again with - the next stacked module. -

    - Each of the four keywords: required; requisite; sufficient; and optional, have an equivalent expression in - terms of the [...] syntax. They are as follows: -

    -

    • - required is equivalent to [success=ok new_authtok_reqd=ok ignore=ignore default=bad] -

    • - requisite is equivalent to [success=ok new_authtok_reqd=ok ignore=ignore default=die] -

    • - sufficient is equivalent to [success=done new_authtok_reqd=done default=ignore] -

    • - optional is equivalent to [success=ok new_authtok_reqd=ok default=ignore] -

    -

    - Just to get a feel for the power of this new syntax, here is a taste of what you can do with it. With Linux-PAM-0.63, - the notion of client plug-in agents was introduced. This is something that makes it possible for PAM to support - machine-machine authentication using the transport protocol inherent to the client/server application. With the - [ ... value=action ... ] control syntax, it is possible for an application to be configured - to support binary prompts with compliant clients, but to gracefully fall over into an alternative authentication - mode for older, legacy, applications. -

    module-path

    -

    - The path-name of the dynamically loadable object file; the pluggable module itself. If the first character of the - module path is `/', it is assumed to be a complete path. If this is not the case, the given module path is appended - to the default module path: /lib/security (but see the notes above). -

    - The args are a list of tokens that are passed to the module when it is invoked. Much like arguments to a typical - Linux shell command. Generally, valid arguments are optional and are specific to any given module. Invalid arguments - are ignored by a module, however, when encountering an invalid argument, the module is required to write an error - to syslog(3). For a list of generic options see the next section. -

    - Note, if you wish to include spaces in an argument, you should surround that argument with square brackets. For example: - 

    -squid auth required pam_mysql.so user=passwd_query passwd=mada \
-        db=eminence [query=select user_name from internet_service where \
-                     user_name='%u' and password=PASSWORD('%p') and \
-                     service='web_proxy']
-

    - Note, when using this convention, you can include `[' characters inside the string, and if you wish to include a `]' - character inside the string that will survive the argument parsing, you should use `\['. In other words: - 

    -[..[..\]..]    -->   ..[..]..
-

    - Any line in (one of) the configuration file(s), that is not formatted correctly, will generally tend (erring on the - side of caution) to make the authentication process fail. A corresponding error is written to the system log files - with a call to syslog(3). -

    Example System Configurations

    -The following is an example /etc/pam.d/login configuration file. -This example had all options been uncommented is probably not usable -as it stacks many conditions before allowing successful completion -of the login process. Essentially all conditions can be disabled -by commenting them out except the calls to pam_pwdb.so. -

    PAM: original login config

    -#%PAM-1.0
-# The PAM configuration file for the `login' service
-#
-auth         required    pam_securetty.so
-auth         required    pam_nologin.so
-# auth       required    pam_dialup.so
-# auth       optional    pam_mail.so
-auth         required    pam_pwdb.so shadow md5
-# account    requisite   pam_time.so
-account      required    pam_pwdb.so
-session      required    pam_pwdb.so
-# session    optional    pam_lastlog.so
-# password   required    pam_cracklib.so retry=3
-password     required    pam_pwdb.so shadow md5
-

    PAM: login using pam_smbpass

    -PAM allows use of replaceable modules. Those available on a sample system include: -

    $/bin/ls /lib/security -
    -pam_access.so    pam_ftp.so          pam_limits.so     
-pam_ncp_auth.so  pam_rhosts_auth.so  pam_stress.so     
-pam_cracklib.so  pam_group.so        pam_listfile.so   
-pam_nologin.so   pam_rootok.so       pam_tally.so      
-pam_deny.so      pam_issue.so        pam_mail.so       
-pam_permit.so    pam_securetty.so    pam_time.so       
-pam_dialup.so    pam_lastlog.so      pam_mkhomedir.so  
-pam_pwdb.so      pam_shells.so       pam_unix.so       
-pam_env.so       pam_ldap.so         pam_motd.so       
-pam_radius.so    pam_smbpass.so      pam_unix_acct.so  
-pam_wheel.so     pam_unix_auth.so    pam_unix_passwd.so
-pam_userdb.so    pam_warn.so         pam_unix_session.so
-

    -The following example for the login program replaces the use of -the pam_pwdb.so module which uses the system -password database (/etc/passwd, -/etc/shadow, /etc/group) with -the module pam_smbpass.so which uses the Samba -database which contains the Microsoft MD4 encrypted password -hashes. This database is stored in either -/usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd, -/etc/samba/smbpasswd, or in -/etc/samba.d/smbpasswd, depending on the -Samba implementation for your Unix/Linux system. The -pam_smbpass.so module is provided by -Samba version 2.2.1 or later. It can be compiled by specifying the ---with-pam_smbpass options when running Samba's -configure script. For more information -on the pam_smbpass module, see the documentation -in the source/pam_smbpass directory of the Samba -source distribution. -

    -#%PAM-1.0
-# The PAM configuration file for the `login' service
-#
-auth        required    pam_smbpass.so nodelay
-account     required    pam_smbpass.so nodelay
-session     required    pam_smbpass.so nodelay
-password    required    pam_smbpass.so nodelay
-

    -The following is the PAM configuration file for a particular -Linux system. The default condition uses pam_pwdb.so. -

    -#%PAM-1.0
-# The PAM configuration file for the `samba' service
-#
-auth       required     pam_pwdb.so nullok nodelay shadow audit
-account    required     pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay
-session    required     pam_pwdb.so nodelay
-password   required     pam_pwdb.so shadow md5
-

    -In the following example the decision has been made to use the -smbpasswd database even for basic samba authentication. Such a -decision could also be made for the passwd program and would -thus allow the smbpasswd passwords to be changed using the passwd -program. -

    -#%PAM-1.0
-# The PAM configuration file for the `samba' service
-#
-auth       required     pam_smbpass.so nodelay
-account    required     pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay
-session    required     pam_pwdb.so nodelay
-password   required     pam_smbpass.so nodelay smbconf=/etc/samba.d/smb.conf
-

    Note

    PAM allows stacking of authentication mechanisms. It is -also possible to pass information obtained within one PAM module through -to the next module in the PAM stack. Please refer to the documentation for -your particular system implementation for details regarding the specific -capabilities of PAM in this environment. Some Linux implementations also -provide the pam_stack.so module that allows all -authentication to be configured in a single central file. The -pam_stack.so method has some very devoted followers -on the basis that it allows for easier administration. As with all issues in -life though, every decision makes trade-offs, so you may want examine the -PAM documentation for further helpful information. -

    smb.conf PAM Configuration

    -There is an option in smb.conf called obey pam restrictions. -The following is from the on-line help for this option in SWAT; -

    -When Samba-3 is configured to enable PAM support (i.e. ---with-pam), this parameter will -control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account -and session management directives. The default behavior -is to use PAM for clear text authentication only and to -ignore any account or session management. Note that Samba always -ignores PAM for authentication in the case of -encrypt passwords = yes. -The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response -authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB -password encryption. -

    Default: obey pam restrictions = no

    Remote CIFS Authentication using winbindd.so

    -All operating systems depend on the provision of users credentials acceptable to the platform. -Unix requires the provision of a user identifier (UID) as well as a group identifier (GID). -These are both simple integer type numbers that are obtained from a password backend such -as /etc/passwd. -

    -Users and groups on a Windows NT server are assigned a relative id (rid) which is unique for -the domain when the user or group is created. To convert the Windows NT user or group into -a unix user or group, a mapping between rids and unix user and group ids is required. This -is one of the jobs that winbind performs. -

    -As winbind users and groups are resolved from a server, user and group ids are allocated -from a specified range. This is done on a first come, first served basis, although all -existing users and groups will be mapped as soon as a client performs a user or group -enumeration command. The allocated unix ids are stored in a database file under the Samba -lock directory and will be remembered. -

    -The astute administrator will realize from this that the combination of pam_smbpass.so, -winbindd, and a distributed passdb backend, such as ldap, will allow the establishment of a -centrally managed, distributed user/password database that can also be used by all PAM (eg: Linux) aware -programs and applications. This arrangement can have particularly potent advantages compared with the use of -Microsoft Active Directory Service (ADS) in so far as reduction of wide area network authentication traffic. -

    Warning

    -The rid to unix id database is the only location where the user and group mappings are -stored by winbindd. If this file is deleted or corrupted, there is no way for winbindd -to determine which user and group ids correspond to Windows NT user and group rids. -

    Password Synchronization using pam_smbpass.so

    -pam_smbpass is a PAM module which can be used on conforming systems to -keep the smbpasswd (Samba password) database in sync with the unix -password file. PAM (Pluggable Authentication Modules) is an API supported -under some Unices, such as Solaris, HPUX and Linux, that provides a -generic interface to authentication mechanisms. -

    -This module authenticates a local smbpasswd user database. If you require -support for authenticating against a remote SMB server, or if you're -concerned about the presence of suid root binaries on your system, it is -recommended that you use pam_winbind instead. -

    -Options recognized by this module are as follows: -

    Table 25.1. Options recognized by pam_smbpass

    debuglog more debugging info
    auditlike debug, but also logs unknown usernames
    use_first_passdon't prompt the user for passwords; take them from PAM_ items instead
    try_first_passtry to get the password from a previous PAM module, fall back to prompting the user
    use_authtoklike try_first_pass, but *fail* if the new PAM_AUTHTOK has not been previously set. (intended for stacking password modules only)
    not_set_passdon't make passwords used by this module available to other modules.
    nodelaydon't insert ~1 second delays on authentication failure.
    nulloknull passwords are allowed.
    nonullnull passwords are not allowed. Used to override the Samba configuration.
    migrateonly meaningful in an "auth" context; used to update smbpasswd file with a password used for successful authentication.
    smbconf=filespecify an alternate path to the smb.conf file.
    - -Thanks go to the following people: -
    Andrew Morgan, for providing the Linux-PAM - framework, without which none of this would have happened
    Christian Gafton and Andrew Morgan again, for the - pam_pwdb module upon which pam_smbpass was originally based
    Luke Leighton for being receptive to the idea, - and for the occasional good-natured complaint about the project's status - that keep me working on it :)
    . -

    -The following are examples of the use of pam_smbpass.so in the format of Linux -/etc/pam.d/ files structure. Those wishing to implement this -tool on other platforms will need to adapt this appropriately. -

    Password Synchronisation Configuration

    -A sample PAM configuration that shows the use of pam_smbpass to make -sure private/smbpasswd is kept in sync when /etc/passwd (/etc/shadow) -is changed. Useful when an expired password might be changed by an -application (such as ssh). -

    -#%PAM-1.0
-# password-sync
-#
-auth       requisite    pam_nologin.so
-auth       required     pam_unix.so
-account    required     pam_unix.so
-password   requisite    pam_cracklib.so retry=3
-password   requisite    pam_unix.so shadow md5 use_authtok try_first_pass
-password   required     pam_smbpass.so nullok use_authtok try_first_pass
-session    required     pam_unix.so
-

    Password Migration Configuration

    -A sample PAM configuration that shows the use of pam_smbpass to migrate -from plaintext to encrypted passwords for Samba. Unlike other methods, -this can be used for users who have never connected to Samba shares: -password migration takes place when users ftp in, login using ssh, pop -their mail, etc. -

    -#%PAM-1.0
-# password-migration
-#
-auth       requisite   pam_nologin.so
-# pam_smbpass is called IF pam_unix succeeds.
-auth       requisite   pam_unix.so
-auth       optional    pam_smbpass.so migrate
-account    required    pam_unix.so
-password   requisite   pam_cracklib.so retry=3
-password   requisite   pam_unix.so shadow md5 use_authtok try_first_pass
-password   optional    pam_smbpass.so nullok use_authtok try_first_pass
-session    required    pam_unix.so
-

    Mature Password Configuration

    -A sample PAM configuration for a 'mature' smbpasswd installation. -private/smbpasswd is fully populated, and we consider it an error if -the smbpasswd doesn't exist or doesn't match the Unix password. -

    -#%PAM-1.0
-# password-mature
-#
-auth       requisite    pam_nologin.so
-auth       required     pam_unix.so
-account    required     pam_unix.so
-password   requisite    pam_cracklib.so retry=3
-password   requisite    pam_unix.so shadow md5 use_authtok try_first_pass
-password   required     pam_smbpass.so use_authtok use_first_pass
-session    required     pam_unix.so
-

    Kerberos Password Integration Configuration

    -A sample PAM configuration that shows pam_smbpass used together with -pam_krb5. This could be useful on a Samba PDC that is also a member of -a Kerberos realm. -

    -#%PAM-1.0
-# kdc-pdc
-#
-auth       requisite   pam_nologin.so
-auth       requisite   pam_krb5.so
-auth       optional    pam_smbpass.so migrate
-account    required    pam_krb5.so
-password   requisite   pam_cracklib.so retry=3
-password   optional    pam_smbpass.so nullok use_authtok try_first_pass
-password   required    pam_krb5.so use_authtok try_first_pass
-session    required    pam_krb5.so
-

    Common Errors

    -PAM can be a very fickle and sensitive to configuration glitches. Here we look at a few cases from -the Samba mailing list. -

    pam_winbind problem

    - I have the following PAM configuration: -

    -
    -auth required /lib/security/pam_securetty.so
-auth sufficient /lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-auth sufficient /lib/security/pam_unix.so use_first_pass nullok
-auth required /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-auth required /lib/security/pam_nologin.so
-account required /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-account required /lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-password required /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-
    -

    - When I open a new console with [ctrl][alt][F1], then I cant log in with my user "pitie". - I've tried with user "scienceu+pitie" also. -

    - Answer: The problem may lie with your inclusion of pam_stack.so - service=system-auth. That file often contains a lot of stuff that may - duplicate what you're already doing. Try commenting out the pam_stack lines - for auth and account and see if things work. If they do, look at - /etc/pam.d/system-auth and copy only what you need from it into your - /etc/pam.d/login file. Alternatively, if you want all services to use - winbind, you can put the winbind-specific stuff in /etc/pam.d/system-auth. -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 24. Desktop Profile Management Home Chapter 26. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/passdb.html b/docs/htmldocs/passdb.html deleted file mode 100644 index e627eb015f..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/passdb.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,813 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 11. Account Information Databases
    Chapter 11. Account Information Databases
    Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

    Chapter 11. Account Information Databases

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    The Samba Team

    Gerald (Jerry) Carter

    Samba Team

    Jeremy Allison

    Samba Team

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Olivier (lem) Lemaire

    IDEALX

    May 24, 2003

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    Technical Information
    Important Notes About Security
    Mapping User Identifiers between MS Windows and Unix
    Account Management Tools
    The smbpasswd Command
    The pdbedit Command
    Password Backends
    Plain Text
    smbpasswd - Encrypted Password Database
    tdbsam
    ldapsam
    MySQL
    XML
    Common Errors
    Users can not logon - Users not in Samba SAM
    Users are being added to the wrong backend database
    auth methods does not work

    -Samba-3 implements a new capability to work concurrently with multiple account backends. -The possible new combinations of password backends allows Samba-3 a degree of flexibility -and scalability that previously could be achieved only with MS Windows Active Directory. -This chapter describes the new functionality and how to get the most out of it. -

    -In the course of development of Samba-3, a number of requests were received to provide the -ability to migrate MS Windows NT4 SAM accounts to Samba-3 without the need to provide -matching Unix/Linux accounts. We called this the Non Unix Accounts (NUA) -capability. The intent was that an administrator could decide to use the tdbsam -backend and by simply specifying "passdb backend = tdbsam_nua, guest" -this would allow Samba-3 to implement a solution that did not use Unix accounts per se. Late -in the development cycle, the team doing this work hit upon some obstacles that prevents this -solution from being used. Given the delays with Samba-3 release a decision was made to NOT -deliver this functionality until a better method of recognising NT Group SIDs from NT User -SIDs could be found. This feature may thus return during the life cycle for the Samba-3 series. -

    Note

    -Samba-3.0.0 does NOT support Non-Unix Account (NUA) operation. -

    Features and Benefits

    -Samba-3 provides for complete backwards compatibility with Samba-2.2.x functionality -as follows: -

    Backwards Compatibility Backends

    Plain Text:

    - This option uses nothing but the Unix/Linux /etc/passwd - style back end. On systems that have PAM (Pluggable Authentication Modules) - support all PAM modules are supported. The behaviour is just as it was with - Samba-2.2.x, and the protocol limitations imposed by MS Windows clients - apply likewise. -

    smbpasswd:

    - This option allows continues use of the smbpasswd - file that maintains a plain ASCII (text) layout that includes the MS Windows - LanMan and NT encrypted passwords as well as a field that stores some - account information. This form of password backend does NOT store any of - the MS Windows NT/200x SAM (Security Account Manager) information needed to - provide the extended controls that are needed for more comprehensive - interoperation with MS Windows NT4 / 200x servers. -

    - This backend should be used only for backwards compatibility with older - versions of Samba. It may be deprecated in future releases. -

    ldapsam_compat (Samba-2.2 LDAP Compatibility):

    - There is a password backend option that allows continued operation with - a existing OpenLDAP backend that uses the Samba-2.2.x LDAP schema extension. - This option is provided primarily as a migration tool, although there is - no reason to force migration at this time. Note that this tool will eventually - be deprecated. -

    -Samba-3 introduces the following new password backend capabilities: -

    New Backends

    guest:

    - This is always required as the last backend specified. - It provides the ability to handle guest account requirements for access to - resources like IPC$ which is used for browsing. -

    tdbsam:

    - This backend provides a rich database backend for local servers. This - backend is NOT suitable for multiple domain controller (ie: PDC + one - or more BDC) installations. -

    - The tdbsam password backend stores the old - smbpasswd information PLUS the extended MS Windows NT / 200x - SAM information into a binary format TDB (trivial database) file. - The inclusion of the extended information makes it possible for Samba-3 - to implement the same account and system access controls that are possible - with MS Windows NT4 and MS Windows 200x based systems. -

    - The inclusion of the tdbsam capability is a direct - response to user requests to allow simple site operation without the overhead - of the complexities of running OpenLDAP. It is recommended to use this only - for sites that have fewer than 250 users. For larger sites or implementations - the use of OpenLDAP or of Active Directory integration is strongly recommended. -

    ldapsam:

    - This provides a rich directory backend for distributed account installation. -

    - Samba-3 has a new and extended LDAP implementation that requires configuration - of OpenLDAP with a new format samba schema. The new format schema file is - included in the examples/LDAP directory of the Samba distribution. -

    - The new LDAP implementation significantly expands the control abilities that - were possible with prior versions of Samba. It is now possible to specify - "per user" profile settings, home directories, account access controls, and - much more. Corporate sites will see that the Samba-Team has listened to their - requests both for capability and to allow greater scalability. -

    mysqlsam (MySQL based backend):

    - It is expected that the MySQL based SAM will be very popular in some corners. - This database backend will be on considerable interest to sites that want to - leverage existing MySQL technology. -

    xmlsam (XML based datafile):

    - Allows the account and password data to be stored in an XML format - data file. This backend can not be used for normal operation, it can only - be used in conjunction with pdbedit's pdb2pdb - functionality. The DTD that is used might be subject to changes in the future. -

    - The xmlsam option can be useful for account migration between database - backends or backups. Use of this tool will allow the data to be edited before migration - into another backend format. -

    nisplussam:

    - The NIS+ based passdb backend. Takes name NIS domain as an - optional argument. Only works with Sun NIS+ servers. -

    Technical Information

    - Old windows clients send plain text passwords over the wire. Samba can check these - passwords by crypting them and comparing them to the hash stored in the unix user database. -

    - Newer windows clients send encrypted passwords (so-called Lanman and NT hashes) over - the wire, instead of plain text passwords. The newest clients will send only encrypted - passwords and refuse to send plain text passwords, unless their registry is tweaked. -

    - These passwords can't be converted to unix style encrypted passwords. Because of that, - you can't use the standard unix user database, and you have to store the Lanman and NT - hashes somewhere else. -

    - In addition to differently encrypted passwords, windows also stores certain data for each - user that is not stored in a unix user database. e.g: workstations the user may logon from, - the location where the users' profile is stored, and so on. Samba retrieves and stores this - information using a passdb backend. Commonly available backends are LDAP, plain text - file, MySQL and nisplus. For more information, see the man page for smb.conf regarding the - passdb backend parameter. -

    Important Notes About Security

    - The unix and SMB password encryption techniques seem similar on the surface. This - similarity is, however, only skin deep. The unix scheme typically sends clear text - passwords over the network when logging in. This is bad. The SMB encryption scheme - never sends the cleartext password over the network but it does store the 16 byte - hashed values on disk. This is also bad. Why? Because the 16 byte hashed values - are a "password equivalent". You cannot derive the user's password from them, but - they could potentially be used in a modified client to gain access to a server. - This would require considerable technical knowledge on behalf of the attacker but - is perfectly possible. You should thus treat the data stored in whatever passdb - backend you use (smbpasswd file, ldap, mysql) as though it contained the cleartext - passwords of all your users. Its contents must be kept secret, and the file should - be protected accordingly. -

    - Ideally we would like a password scheme that involves neither plain text passwords - on the net nor on disk. Unfortunately this is not available as Samba is stuck with - having to be compatible with other SMB systems (WinNT, WfWg, Win95 etc). -

    - Windows NT 4.0 Service pack 3 changed the default setting so that plaintext passwords - are disabled from being sent over the wire. This mandates either the use of encrypted - password support or edit the Windows NT registry to re-enable plaintext passwords. -

    - The following versions of MS Windows do not support full domain security protocols, - although they may log onto a domain environment: -

    MS DOS Network client 3.0 with the basic network redirector installed
    Windows 95 with the network redirector update installed
    Windows 98 [se]
    Windows Me

    Note

    - MS Windows XP Home does not have facilities to become a domain member and it can - not participate in domain logons. -

    - The following versions of MS Windows fully support domain security protocols. -

    Windows NT 3.5x
    Windows NT 4.0
    Windows 2000 Professional
    Windows 200x Server/Advanced Server
    Windows XP Professional

    - All current release of Microsoft SMB/CIFS clients support authentication via the - SMB Challenge/Response mechanism described here. Enabling clear text authentication - does not disable the ability of the client to participate in encrypted authentication. - Instead, it allows the client to negotiate either plain text _or_ encrypted password - handling. -

    - MS Windows clients will cache the encrypted password alone. Where plain text passwords - are re-enabled, through the appropriate registry change, the plain text password is NEVER - cached. This means that in the event that a network connections should become disconnected - (broken) only the cached (encrypted) password will be sent to the resource server to - affect a auto-reconnect. If the resource server does not support encrypted passwords the - auto-reconnect will fail. USE OF ENCRYPTED PASSWORDS IS STRONGLY ADVISED. -

    Advantages of Encrypted Passwords

    • Plain text passwords are not passed across - the network. Someone using a network sniffer cannot just - record passwords going to the SMB server.

    • Plain text passwords are not stored anywhere in - memory or on disk.

    • WinNT doesn't like talking to a server - that does not support encrypted passwords. It will refuse - to browse the server if the server is also in user level - security mode. It will insist on prompting the user for the - password on each connection, which is very annoying. The - only things you can do to stop this is to use SMB encryption. -

    • Encrypted password support allows automatic share - (resource) reconnects.

    • Encrypted passwords are essential for PDC/BDC - operation.

    Advantages of non-encrypted passwords

    • Plain text passwords are not kept - on disk, and are NOT cached in memory.

    • Uses same password file as other unix - services such as login and ftp

    • Use of other services (such as telnet and ftp) which - send plain text passwords over the net, so sending them for SMB - isn't such a big deal.

    Mapping User Identifiers between MS Windows and Unix

    - Every operation in Unix/Linux requires a user identifier (UID), just as in - MS Windows NT4 / 200x this requires a Security Identifier (SID). Samba provides - two means for mapping an MS Windows user to a Unix/Linux UID. -

    - Firstly, all Samba SAM (Security Account Manager database) accounts require - a Unix/Linux UID that the account will map to. As users are added to the account - information database, Samba-3 will call the add user script - interface to add the account to the Samba host OS. In essence, all accounts in - the local SAM require a local user account. -

    - The second way to affect Windows SID to Unix UID mapping is via the - idmap uid, idmap gid parameters in smb.conf. - Please refer to the man page for information about these parameters. - These parameters are essential when mapping users from a remote SAM server. -

    Account Management Tools

    -Samba-3 provides two (2) tools for management of User and machine accounts. These tools are -called smbpasswd and pdbedit. A third tool is under -development but is NOT expected to ship in time for Samba-3.0.0. The new tool will be a TCL/TK -GUI tool that looks much like the MS Windows NT4 Domain User Manager - hopefully this will -be announced in time for the Samba-3.0.1 release. -

    The smbpasswd Command

    - The smbpasswd utility is a utility similar to the passwd - or yppasswd programs. It maintains the two 32 byte password - fields in the passdb backend. -

    - smbpasswd works in a client-server mode where it contacts the - local smbd to change the user's password on its behalf. This has enormous benefits - as follows: -

    - smbpasswd has the capability to change passwords on Windows NT - servers (this only works when the request is sent to the NT Primary Domain Controller - if changing an NT Domain user's password). -

    - smbpasswd can be used to: -

    add user or machine accounts
    delete user or machine accounts
    enable user or machine accounts
    disable user or machine accounts
    set to NULL user passwords
    manage interdomain trust accounts

    - To run smbpasswd as a normal user just type: -

    - 
    -		$ smbpasswd
-		Old SMB password: secret
-
    - For secret type old value here - or hit return if - there was no old password - 
    -		New SMB Password: new secret
-		Repeat New SMB Password: new secret
-
    -

    - If the old value does not match the current value stored for that user, or the two - new values do not match each other, then the password will not be changed. -

    - When invoked by an ordinary user it will only allow change of their own - SMB password. -

    - When run by root smbpasswd may take an optional argument, specifying - the user name whose SMB password you wish to change. When run as root, smbpasswd - does not prompt for or check the old password value, thus allowing root to set passwords - for users who have forgotten their passwords. -

    - smbpasswd is designed to work in the way familiar to UNIX - users who use the passwd or yppasswd commands. - While designed for administrative use, this tool provides essential user level - password change capabilities. -

    - For more details on using smbpasswd refer to the man page (the - definitive reference). -

    The pdbedit Command

    - pdbedit is a tool that can be used only by root. It is used to - manage the passdb backend. pdbedit can be used to: -

    add, remove or modify user accounts
    listing user accounts
    migrate user accounts

    - The pdbedit tool is the only one that can manage the account - security and policy settings. It is capable of all operations that smbpasswd can - do as well as a super set of them. -

    - One particularly important purpose of the pdbedit is to allow - the migration of account information from one passdb backend to another. See the - XML password backend section of this chapter. -

    - The following is an example of the user account information that is stored in - a tdbsam password backend. This listing was produced by running: - 

    -		$ pdbedit -Lv met
-		Unix username:        met
-		NT username:
-		Account Flags:        [UX         ]
-		User SID:             S-1-5-21-1449123459-1407424037-3116680435-2004
-		Primary Group SID:    S-1-5-21-1449123459-1407424037-3116680435-1201
-		Full Name:            Melissa E Terpstra
-		Home Directory:       \\frodo\met\Win9Profile
-		HomeDir Drive:        H:
-		Logon Script:         scripts\logon.bat
-		Profile Path:         \\frodo\Profiles\met
-		Domain:               MIDEARTH
-		Account desc:
-		Workstations:         melbelle
-		Munged dial:
-		Logon time:           0
-		Logoff time:          Mon, 18 Jan 2038 20:14:07 GMT
-		Kickoff time:         Mon, 18 Jan 2038 20:14:07 GMT
-		Password last set:    Sat, 14 Dec 2002 14:37:03 GMT
-		Password can change:  Sat, 14 Dec 2002 14:37:03 GMT
-		Password must change: Mon, 18 Jan 2038 20:14:07 GMT
-

    Password Backends

    -Samba-3 offers the greatest flexibility in backend account database design of any SMB/CIFS server -technology available today. The flexibility is immediately obvious as one begins to explore this -capability. -

    -It is possible to specify not only multiple different password backends, but even multiple -backends of the same type. For example, to use two different tdbsam databases: -

    -
    -[globals]
-		passdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/passdb.tdb, \
-		tdbsam:/etc/samba/old-passdb.tdb, guest
-
    -

    Plain Text

    - Older versions of Samba retrieved user information from the unix user database - and eventually some other fields from the file /etc/samba/smbpasswd - or /etc/smbpasswd. When password encryption is disabled, no - SMB specific data is stored at all. Instead all operations are conducted via the way - that the Samba host OS will access its /etc/passwd database. - eg: On Linux systems that is done via PAM. -

    smbpasswd - Encrypted Password Database

    - Traditionally, when configuring encrypt - passwords = yes in Samba's smb.conf file, user account - information such as username, LM/NT password hashes, password change times, and account - flags have been stored in the smbpasswd(5) file. There are several - disadvantages to this approach for sites with very large numbers of users (counted - in the thousands). -

    • - The first is that all lookups must be performed sequentially. Given that - there are approximately two lookups per domain logon (one for a normal - session connection such as when mapping a network drive or printer), this - is a performance bottleneck for large sites. What is needed is an indexed approach - such as is used in databases. -

    • - The second problem is that administrators who desire to replicate a smbpasswd file - to more than one Samba server were left to use external tools such as - rsync(1) and ssh(1) and wrote custom, - in-house scripts. -

    • - And finally, the amount of information which is stored in an smbpasswd entry leaves - no room for additional attributes such as a home directory, password expiration time, - or even a Relative Identifier (RID). -

    - As a result of these deficiencies, a more robust means of storing user attributes - used by smbd was developed. The API which defines access to user accounts - is commonly referred to as the samdb interface (previously this was called the passdb - API, and is still so named in the Samba CVS trees). -

    - Samba-3 provides an enhanced set of passdb backends that overcome the deficiencies - of the smbpasswd plain text database. These are tdbsam, ldapsam, and xmlsam. - Of these ldapsam will be of most interest to large corporate or enterprise sites. -

    tdbsam

    Samba can store user and machine account data in a "TDB" (Trivial Database). - Using this backend doesn't require any additional configuration. This backend is - recommended for new installations that do not require LDAP. -

    - As a general guide the Samba-Team does NOT recommend using the tdbsam backend for sites - that have 250 or more users. Additionally, tdbsam is not capable of scaling for use - in sites that require PDB/BDC implementations that requires replication of the account - database. Clearly, for reason of scalability, the use of ldapsam should be encouraged. -

    ldapsam

    - There are a few points to stress that the ldapsam does not provide. The LDAP - support referred to in the this documentation does not include: -

    • A means of retrieving user account information from - an Windows 200x Active Directory server.

    • A means of replacing /etc/passwd.

    - The second item can be accomplished by using LDAP NSS and PAM modules. LGPL - versions of these libraries can be obtained from PADL Software - (http://www.padl.com/). More - information about the configuration of these packages may be found at "LDAP, - System Administration; Gerald Carter, O'Reilly; Chapter 6: Replacing NIS". - Refer to - http://safari.oreilly.com/?XmlId=1-56592-491-6 for those who might wish to know - more about configuration and administration of an OpenLDAP server. -

    Note

    - This section is outdated for Samba-3 schema. Samba-3 introduces a new schema - that has not been documented at the time of this publication. -

    - This document describes how to use an LDAP directory for storing Samba user - account information traditionally stored in the smbpasswd(5) file. It is - assumed that the reader already has a basic understanding of LDAP concepts - and has a working directory server already installed. For more information - on LDAP architectures and Directories, please refer to the following sites. -

    - Two additional Samba resources which may prove to be helpful are -

    • The Samba-PDC-LDAP-HOWTO - maintained by Ignacio Coupeau.

    • The NT migration scripts from IDEALX that are - geared to manage users and group in such a Samba-LDAP Domain Controller configuration. -

    Supported LDAP Servers

    - The LDAP ldapsam code has been developed and tested using the OpenLDAP 2.0 and 2.1 server and - client libraries. The same code should work with Netscape's Directory Server and client SDK. - However, there are bound to be compile errors and bugs. These should not be hard to fix. - Please submit fixes via Bug reporting facility. -

    Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount

    - Samba 3.0 includes the necessary schema file for OpenLDAP 2.0 in - examples/LDAP/samba.schema. The sambaSamAccount objectclass is given here: -

    -
    -objectclass ( 1.3.6.1.4.1.7165.2.2.3 NAME 'sambaSamAccount' SUP top AUXILIARY
-    DESC 'Samba Auxiliary Account'
-    MUST ( uid $ rid )
-    MAY  ( cn $ lmPassword $ ntPassword $ pwdLastSet $ logonTime $
-           logoffTime $ kickoffTime $ pwdCanChange $ pwdMustChange $ acctFlags $
-           displayName $ smbHome $ homeDrive $ scriptPath $ profilePath $
-           description $ userWorkstations $ primaryGroupID $ domain ))
-
    -

    - The samba.schema file has been formatted for OpenLDAP 2.0/2.1. - The OID's are owned by the Samba Team and as such is legal to be openly published. - If you translate the schema to be used with Netscape DS, please - submit the modified schema file as a patch to - jerry@samba.org. -

    - Just as the smbpasswd file is meant to store information which supplements a - user's /etc/passwd entry, so is the sambaSamAccount object - meant to supplement the UNIX user account information. A sambaSamAccount is a - STRUCTURAL objectclass so it can be stored individually - in the directory. However, there are several fields (e.g. uid) which overlap - with the posixAccount objectclass outlined in RFC2307. This is by design. -

    - In order to store all user account information (UNIX and Samba) in the directory, - it is necessary to use the sambaSamAccount and posixAccount objectclasses in - combination. However, smbd will still obtain the user's UNIX account - information via the standard C library calls (e.g. getpwnam(), et. al.). - This means that the Samba server must also have the LDAP NSS library installed - and functioning correctly. This division of information makes it possible to - store all Samba account information in LDAP, but still maintain UNIX account - information in NIS while the network is transitioning to a full LDAP infrastructure. -

    OpenLDAP configuration

    - To include support for the sambaSamAccount object in an OpenLDAP directory - server, first copy the samba.schema file to slapd's configuration directory. - The samba.schema file can be found in the directory examples/LDAP - in the samba source distribution. -

    -
    -root# cp samba.schema /etc/openldap/schema/
-
    -

    - Next, include the samba.schema file in slapd.conf. - The sambaSamAccount object contains two attributes which depend upon other schema - files. The 'uid' attribute is defined in cosine.schema and - the 'displayName' attribute is defined in the inetorgperson.schema - file. Both of these must be included before the samba.schema file. -

    -
    -## /etc/openldap/slapd.conf
-
-## schema files (core.schema is required by default)
-include	           /etc/openldap/schema/core.schema
-
-## needed for sambaSamAccount
-include            /etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema
-include            /etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema
-include            /etc/openldap/schema/samba.schema
-include            /etc/openldap/schema/nis.schema
-....
-
    -

    - It is recommended that you maintain some indices on some of the most useful attributes, - like in the following example, to speed up searches made on sambaSamAccount objectclasses - (and possibly posixAccount and posixGroup as well). -

    -
    -# Indices to maintain
-## required by OpenLDAP
-index objectclass             eq
-
-index cn                      pres,sub,eq
-index sn                      pres,sub,eq
-## required to support pdb_getsampwnam
-index uid                     pres,sub,eq
-## required to support pdb_getsambapwrid()
-index displayName             pres,sub,eq
-
-## uncomment these if you are storing posixAccount and
-## posixGroup entries in the directory as well
-##index uidNumber               eq
-##index gidNumber               eq
-##index memberUid               eq
-
-index   sambaSID              eq
-index   sambaPrimaryGroupSID  eq
-index   sambaDomainName       eq
-index   default               sub
-
    -

    - Create the new index by executing: -

    -
    -./sbin/slapindex -f slapd.conf
-
    -

    - Remember to restart slapd after making these changes: -

    -
    -root# /etc/init.d/slapd restart
-
    -

    Initialise the LDAP database

    - Before you can add accounts to the LDAP database you must create the account containers - that they will be stored in. The following LDIF file should be modified to match your - needs (ie: Your DNS entries, etc.). -

    -
    -# Organization for Samba Base
-dn: dc=plainjoe,dc=org
-objectclass: dcObject
-objectclass: organization
-dc: plainjoe
-o: Terpstra Org Network
-description: The Samba-3 Network LDAP Example
-
-# Organizational Role for Directory Management
-dn: cn=Manager,dc=plainjoe,dc=org
-objectclass: organizationalRole
-cn: Manager
-description: Directory Manager
-
-# Setting up container for users
-dn: ou=People,dc=plainjoe,dc=org
-objectclass: top
-objectclass: organizationalUnit
-ou: People
-
-# Setting up admin handle for People OU
-dn: cn=admin,ou=People,dc=plainjoe,dc=org
-cn: admin
-objectclass: top
-objectclass: organizationalRole
-objectclass: simpleSecurityObject
-userPassword: {SSHA}c3ZM9tBaBo9autm1dL3waDS21+JSfQVz
-
    -

    - The userPassword shown above should be generated using slappasswd. -

    - The following command will then load the contents of the LDIF file into the LDAP - database. -

    -
    -$ slapadd -v -l initldap.dif
-
    -

    - Do not forget to secure your LDAP server with an adequate access control list, - as well as an admin password. -

    Note

    - Before Samba can access the LDAP server you need to store the LDAP admin password - into the Samba-3 secrets.tdb database by: - 
    -root#  smbpasswd -w secret
-
    -

    Configuring Samba

    - The following parameters are available in smb.conf only if your - version of samba was built with LDAP support. Samba automatically builds with LDAP support if the - LDAP libraries are found. -

    - These are described in the smb.conf man - page and so will not be repeated here. However, a sample smb.conf file for - use with an LDAP directory could appear as -

    -
    -## /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf
-[global]
-     security = user
-     encrypt passwords = yes
-
-     netbios name = TASHTEGO
-     workgroup = NARNIA
-
-     # ldap related parameters
-
-     # define the DN to use when binding to the directory servers
-     # The password for this DN is not stored in smb.conf.  Rather it
-     # must be set by using 'smbpasswd -w secretpw' to store the
-     # passphrase in the secrets.tdb file.  If the "ldap admin dn" values
-     # change, this password will need to be reset.
-     ldap admin dn = "cn=Samba Manager,ou=people,dc=samba,dc=org"
-
-     # Define the SSL option when connecting to the directory
-     # ('off', 'start tls', or 'on' (default))
-     ldap ssl = start tls
-
-     # syntax: passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://server-name[:port]
-     passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://funball.samba.org, guest
-
-     # smbpasswd -x delete the entire dn-entry
-     ldap delete dn = no
-
-     # the machine and user suffix added to the base suffix
-     # wrote WITHOUT quotes. NULL suffixes by default
-     ldap user suffix = ou=People
-     ldap machine suffix = ou=Systems
-
-     # Trust unix account information in LDAP
-     #  (see the smb.conf manpage for details)
-     ldap trust ids = Yes
-
-     # specify the base DN to use when searching the directory
-     ldap suffix = "ou=people,dc=samba,dc=org"
-
-     # generally the default ldap search filter is ok
-     # ldap filter = "(&(uid=%u)(objectclass=sambaSamAccount))"
-
    -

    Accounts and Groups management

    - As users accounts are managed through the sambaSamAccount objectclass, you should - modify your existing administration tools to deal with sambaSamAccount attributes. -

    - Machines accounts are managed with the sambaSamAccount objectclass, just - like users accounts. However, it's up to you to store those accounts - in a different tree of your LDAP namespace: you should use - "ou=Groups,dc=plainjoe,dc=org" to store groups and - "ou=People,dc=plainjoe,dc=org" to store users. Just configure your - NSS and PAM accordingly (usually, in the /etc/ldap.conf configuration - file). -

    - In Samba release 3.0, the group management system is based on POSIX - groups. This means that Samba makes use of the posixGroup objectclass. - For now, there is no NT-like group system management (global and local - groups). -

    Security and sambaSamAccount

    - There are two important points to remember when discussing the security - of sambaSamAccount entries in the directory. -

    • Never retrieve the lmPassword or - ntPassword attribute values over an unencrypted LDAP session.

    • Never allow non-admin users to - view the lmPassword or ntPassword attribute values.

    - These password hashes are clear text equivalents and can be used to impersonate - the user without deriving the original clear text strings. For more information - on the details of LM/NT password hashes, refer to the - Account Information Database section of this chapter. -

    - To remedy the first security issue, the ldap ssl smb.conf parameter defaults - to require an encrypted session (ldap ssl = on) using - the default port of 636 - when contacting the directory server. When using an OpenLDAP server, it - is possible to use the use the StartTLS LDAP extended operation in the place of - LDAPS. In either case, you are strongly discouraged to disable this security - (ldap ssl = off). -

    - Note that the LDAPS protocol is deprecated in favor of the LDAPv3 StartTLS - extended operation. However, the OpenLDAP library still provides support for - the older method of securing communication between clients and servers. -

    - The second security precaution is to prevent non-administrative users from - harvesting password hashes from the directory. This can be done using the - following ACL in slapd.conf: -

    -
    -## allow the "ldap admin dn" access, but deny everyone else
-access to attrs=lmPassword,ntPassword
-     by dn="cn=Samba Admin,ou=people,dc=plainjoe,dc=org" write
-     by * none
-
    -

    LDAP special attributes for sambaSamAccounts

    - The sambaSamAccount objectclass is composed of the following attributes: -

    -

    Table 11.1. Attributes in the sambaSamAccount objectclass (LDAP)

    lmPasswordthe LANMAN password 16-byte hash stored as a character - representation of a hexadecimal string.
    ntPasswordthe NT password hash 16-byte stored as a character - representation of a hexadecimal string.
    pwdLastSetThe integer time in seconds since 1970 when the - lmPassword and ntPassword attributes were last set. -
    acctFlagsstring of 11 characters surrounded by square brackets [] - representing account flags such as U (user), W(workstation), X(no password expiration), - I(Domain trust account), H(Home dir required), S(Server trust account), - and D(disabled).
    logonTimeInteger value currently unused
    logoffTimeInteger value currently unused
    kickoffTimeInteger value currently unused
    pwdCanChangeInteger value currently unused
    pwdMustChangeInteger value currently unused
    homeDrivespecifies the drive letter to which to map the - UNC path specified by homeDirectory. The drive letter must be specified in the form "X:" - where X is the letter of the drive to map. Refer to the "logon drive" parameter in the - smb.conf(5) man page for more information.
    scriptPathThe scriptPath property specifies the path of - the user's logon script, .CMD, .EXE, or .BAT file. The string can be null. The path - is relative to the netlogon share. Refer to the "logon script" parameter in the - smb.conf(5) man page for more information.
    profilePathspecifies a path to the user's profile. - This value can be a null string, a local absolute path, or a UNC path. Refer to the - "logon path" parameter in the smb.conf(5) man page for more information.
    smbHomeThe homeDirectory property specifies the path of - the home directory for the user. The string can be null. If homeDrive is set and specifies - a drive letter, homeDirectory should be a UNC path. The path must be a network - UNC path of the form \\server\share\directory. This value can be a null string. - Refer to the logon home parameter in the smb.conf man page for more information. -
    userWorkstationcharacter string value currently unused. -
    ridthe integer representation of the user's relative identifier - (RID).
    primaryGroupIDthe relative identifier (RID) of the primary group - of the user.
    domaindomain the user is part of.
    -

    - The majority of these parameters are only used when Samba is acting as a PDC of - a domain (refer to the Samba as a primary domain controller chapter for details on - how to configure Samba as a Primary Domain Controller). The following four attributes - are only stored with the sambaSamAccount entry if the values are non-default values: -

    smbHome
    scriptPath
    logonPath
    homeDrive

    - These attributes are only stored with the sambaSamAccount entry if - the values are non-default values. For example, assume TASHTEGO has now been - configured as a PDC and that logon home = \\%L\%u was defined in - its smb.conf file. When a user named "becky" logons to the domain, - the logon home string is expanded to \\TASHTEGO\becky. - If the smbHome attribute exists in the entry "uid=becky,ou=people,dc=samba,dc=org", - this value is used. However, if this attribute does not exist, then the value - of the logon home parameter is used in its place. Samba - will only write the attribute value to the directory entry if the value is - something other than the default (e.g. \\MOBY\becky). -

    Example LDIF Entries for a sambaSamAccount

    - The following is a working LDIF with the inclusion of the posixAccount objectclass: -

    - 
    -	dn: uid=guest2, ou=people,dc=plainjoe,dc=org
-	ntPassword: 878D8014606CDA29677A44EFA1353FC7
-	pwdMustChange: 2147483647
-	primaryGroupID: 1201
-	lmPassword: 552902031BEDE9EFAAD3B435B51404EE
-	pwdLastSet: 1010179124
-	logonTime: 0
-	objectClass: sambaSamAccount
-	uid: guest2
-	kickoffTime: 2147483647
-	acctFlags: [UX         ]
-	logoffTime: 2147483647
-	rid: 19006
-	pwdCanChange: 0
-
    -

    - The following is an LDIF entry for using both the sambaSamAccount and - posixAccount objectclasses: -

    - 
    -	dn: uid=gcarter, ou=people,dc=plainjoe,dc=org
-	logonTime: 0
-	displayName: Gerald Carter
-	lmPassword: 552902031BEDE9EFAAD3B435B51404EE
-	primaryGroupID: 1201
-	objectClass: posixAccount
-	objectClass: sambaSamAccount
-	acctFlags: [UX         ]
-	userPassword: {crypt}BpM2ej8Rkzogo
-	uid: gcarter
-	uidNumber: 9000
-	cn: Gerald Carter
-	loginShell: /bin/bash
-	logoffTime: 2147483647
-	gidNumber: 100
-	kickoffTime: 2147483647
-	pwdLastSet: 1010179230
-	rid: 19000
-	homeDirectory: /home/tashtego/gcarter
-	pwdCanChange: 0
-	pwdMustChange: 2147483647
-	ntPassword: 878D8014606CDA29677A44EFA1353FC7
-
    -

    Password synchronisation

    - Since version 3.0 samba can update the non-samba (LDAP) password stored with an account. When - using pam_ldap, this allows changing both unix and windows passwords at once. -

    The ldap passwd sync options can have the following values:

    yes

    When the user changes his password, update - ntPassword, lmPassword - and the password fields.

    no

    Only update ntPassword and lmPassword.

    only

    Only update the LDAP password and let the LDAP server worry - about the other fields. This option is only available when the LDAP server supports LDAP_EXOP_X_MODIFY_PASSWD.

    More information can be found in the smb.conf manpage. -

    MySQL

    - Every so often someone will come along with a great new idea. Storing of user accounts in an - SQL backend is one of them. Those who want to do this are in the best position to know what the - specific benefits are to them. This may sound like a cop-out, but in truth we can not attempt - to document every nitty little detail why certain things of marginal utility to the bulk of - Samba users might make sense to the rest. In any case, the following instructions should help - the determined SQL user to implement a working system. -

    Creating the database

    - You either can set up your own table and specify the field names to pdb_mysql (see below - for the column names) or use the default table. The file examples/pdb/mysql/mysql.dump - contains the correct queries to create the required tables. Use the command : - - 
    $ mysql -uusername -hhostname -ppassword \
-databasename < /path/to/samba/examples/pdb/mysql/mysql.dump
    -

    Configuring

    This plugin lacks some good documentation, but here is some short info:

    Add a the following to the passdb backend variable in your smb.conf: - 
    -			passdb backend = [other-plugins] mysql:identifier [other-plugins]
-
    -

    The identifier can be any string you like, as long as it doesn't collide with - the identifiers of other plugins or other instances of pdb_mysql. If you - specify multiple pdb_mysql.so entries in passdb backend, you also need to - use different identifiers! -

    - Additional options can be given through the smb.conf file in the [global] section. -

    -

    Table 11.2. Basic smb.conf options for MySQL passdb backend

    FieldContents
    identifier:mysql hosthost name, defaults to 'localhost'
    identifier:mysql password 
    identifier:mysql userdefaults to 'samba'
    identifier:mysql databasedefaults to 'samba'
    identifier:mysql portdefaults to 3306
    identifier:tableName of the table containing users
    -

    Warning

    - Since the password for the MySQL user is stored in the - smb.conf file, you should make the the smb.conf file - readable only to the user that runs Samba This is considered a security - bug and will be fixed soon. -

    Names of the columns in this table (I've added column types those columns should have first):

    -

    Table 11.3. MySQL field names for MySQL passdb backend

    FieldTypeContents
    identifier:logon time columnint(9) 
    identifier:logoff time columnint(9) 
    identifier:kickoff time columnint(9) 
    identifier:pass last set time columnint(9) 
    identifier:pass can change time columnint(9) 
    identifier:pass must change time columnint(9) 
    identifier:username columnvarchar(255)unix username
    identifier:domain columnvarchar(255)NT domain user is part of
    identifier:nt username columnvarchar(255)NT username
    identifier:fullname columnvarchar(255)Full name of user
    identifier:home dir columnvarchar(255)Unix homedir path
    identifier:dir drive columnvarchar(2)Directory drive path (eg: 'H:')
    identifier:logon script columnvarchar(255)Batch file to run on client side when logging on
    identifier:profile path columnvarchar(255)Path of profile
    identifier:acct desc columnvarchar(255)Some ASCII NT user data
    identifier:workstations columnvarchar(255)Workstations user can logon to (or NULL for all)
    identifier:unknown string columnvarchar(255)unknown string
    identifier:munged dial columnvarchar(255)?
    identifier:user sid columnvarchar(255)NT user SID
    identifier:group sid columnvarchar(255)NT group ID
    identifier:lanman pass columnvarchar(255)encrypted lanman password
    identifier:nt pass columnvarchar(255)encrypted nt passwd
    identifier:plain pass columnvarchar(255)plaintext password
    identifier:acct control columnint(9)nt user data
    identifier:unknown 3 columnint(9)unknown
    identifier:logon divs columnint(9)?
    identifier:hours len columnint(9)?
    identifier:unknown 5 columnint(9)unknown
    identifier:unknown 6 columnint(9)unknown
    -

    - Eventually, you can put a colon (:) after the name of each column, which - should specify the column to update when updating the table. You can also - specify nothing behind the colon - then the data from the field will not be - updated. -

    Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password

    - I strongly discourage the use of plaintext passwords, however, you can use them: -

    - If you would like to use plaintext passwords, set - 'identifier:lanman pass column' and 'identifier:nt pass column' to - 'NULL' (without the quotes) and 'identifier:plain pass column' to the - name of the column containing the plaintext passwords. -

    - If you use encrypted passwords, set the 'identifier:plain pass - column' to 'NULL' (without the quotes). This is the default. -

    Getting non-column data from the table

    - It is possible to have not all data in the database and making some 'constant'. -

    - For example, you can set 'identifier:fullname column' to : - CONCAT(First_name,' ',Sur_name) -

    - Or, set 'identifier:workstations column' to : - NULL

    See the MySQL documentation for more language constructs.

    XML

    This module requires libxml2 to be installed.

    The usage of pdb_xml is pretty straightforward. To export data, use: -

    - $ pdbedit -e xml:filename -

    - (where filename is the name of the file to put the data in) -

    - To import data, use: - $ pdbedit -i xml:filename -

    Common Errors

    Users can not logon - Users not in Samba SAM

    - People forget to put their users in their backend and then complain Samba won't authorize them. -

    Users are being added to the wrong backend database

    - A few complaints have been received from users that just moved to Samba-3. The following - smb.conf file entries were causing problems, new accounts were being added to the old - smbpasswd file, not to the tdbsam passdb.tdb file: -

    - 
    -	[globals]
-		...
-		passdb backend = smbpasswd, tdbsam, guest
-		...
-
    -

    - Samba will add new accounts to the first entry in the passdb backend - parameter entry. If you want to update to the tdbsam, then change the entry to: -

    - 
    -	[globals]
-		...
-		passdb backend = tdbsam, smbpasswd, guest
-		...
-
    -

    auth methods does not work

    - If you explicitly set an 'auth methods' parameter, guest must be specified as the first - entry on the line. Eg: auth methods = guest sam. -

    - This is the exact opposite of the requirement for the passdb backed - option, where it must be the LAST parameter on the line. -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 10. Samba / MS Windows Network Browsing Guide Home Chapter 12. Mapping MS Windows and Unix Groups
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/pdbedit.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/pdbedit.8.html index 54068305a1..57b69487c9 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/pdbedit.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/pdbedit.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -pdbedit

    Name

    pdbedit — manage the SAM database

    Synopsis

    pdbedit [-L] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S script] [-p profile] [-a] [-m] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] [-b passdb-backend] [-g] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy] [-C value]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.

    The pdbedit program is used to manage the users accounts +pdbedit

    Name

    pdbedit — manage the SAM database

    Synopsis

    pdbedit [-L] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S script] [-p profile] [-a] [-m] [-r] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] [-b passdb-backend] [-g] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy] [-C value] [-c account-control]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.

    The pdbedit program is used to manage the users accounts stored in the sam database and can only be run by root.

    The pdbedit tool uses the passdb modular interface and is independent from the kind of users database used (currently there are smbpasswd, ldap, nis+ and tdb based and more can be added @@ -65,14 +65,14 @@ samba:45:0F2B255F7B67A7A9AAD3B435B51404EE:BC281CE3F53B6A5146629CD4751D3490:[UX rid.

    Example: -U S-1-5-21-2447931902-1787058256-3961074038-5004

    -c account-control

    This option can be used while adding or modifying a user account. It will specify the users' account control property. Possible flags that can be set are: N, D, H, L, X. -

    Example: -c "[X ]"

    -a

    This option is used to add a user into the +

    Example: -c "[X ]"

    -a

    This option is used to add a user into the database. This command needs a user name specified with the -u switch. When adding a new user, pdbedit will also - ask for the password to be used.

    Example: pdbedit -a -u sorce -
    new password:
+		ask for the password to be used.
    Example: pdbedit -a -u sorce
+
    new password:
 retype new password
-
    
-
    -r

    This option is used to modify an existing user +

    +

    -r

    This option is used to modify an existing user in the database. This command needs a user name specified with the -u switch. Other options can be specified to modify the properties of the specified user. This flag is kept for backwards compatibility, but @@ -109,8 +109,7 @@ configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is @@ -124,9 +123,8 @@ amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension +override the log level parameter +in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension ".client" will be appended. The log file is never removed by the client.

    NOTES

    This command may be used only by root.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/pr01.html b/docs/htmldocs/pr01.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..193564ca32 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/pr01.html @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +Legal Notice

    Legal Notice
    Prev   Next

    Legal Notice

    +This documentation is distributed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) +version 2. A copy of the license is included with the Samba source +distribution. A copy can be found on-line at http://www.fsf.org/licenses/gpl.txt +

    Prev Up Next
    SAMBA Project Documentation Home Attributions
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/pr02.html b/docs/htmldocs/pr02.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..08a02a7142 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/pr02.html @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +Attributions
    Attributions
    Prev   Next

    Attributions

    Introduction to Samba

    How to Install and Test SAMBA

    Fast Start for the Impatient

    Server Types and Security Modes

    Domain Control

    Backup Domain Control

    Domain Membership

    Stand-Alone Servers

    MS Windows Network Configuration Guide

    Samba / MS Windows Network Browsing Guide

    Account Information Databases

    Mapping MS Windows and UNIX Groups

    File, Directory and Share Access Controls

    File and Record Locking

    Securing Samba

    Interdomain Trust Relationships

    Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba

    Classical Printing Support

    CUPS Printing Support in Samba 3.0

    Stackable VFS modules

    • Jelmer R. Vernooij <jelmer@samba.org>

    • John H. Terpstra <jht@samba.org>

    • Tim Potter

    • Simo Sorce (original vfs_skel README)

    • Alexander Bokovoy (original vfs_netatalk docs)

    • Stefan Metzmacher (Update for multiple modules)

    Advanced Network Management

    System and Account Policies

    Desktop Profile Management

    PAM based Distributed Authentication

    Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba

    Unicode/Charsets

    Samba Backup Techniques

    High Availability Options

    Upgrading from Samba-2.x to Samba-3.0.0

    Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC

    SWAT - The Samba Web Administration Tool

    The Samba checklist

    Analysing and solving samba problems

    Reporting Bugs

    How to compile Samba

    Portability

    Samba and other CIFS clients

    Samba Performance Tuning

    DNS and DHCP Configuration Guide

    Further Resources

    Prev Up Next
    Legal Notice Home Part I. General Installation
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/printing.html b/docs/htmldocs/printing.html deleted file mode 100644 index 578e078371..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/printing.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2241 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 18. Classical Printing Support
    Chapter 18. Classical Printing Support
    Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

    Chapter 18. Classical Printing Support

    Kurt Pfeifle

    Danka Deutschland GmbH

    Gerald (Jerry) Carter

    Samba Team

    May 32, 2003

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    Technical Introduction
    What happens if you send a Job from a Client
    Printing Related Configuration Parameters
    Parameters Recommended for Use
    Parameters for Backwards Compatibility
    Parameters no longer in use
    A simple Configuration to Print with Samba-3
    Verification of "Settings in Use" with testparm
    A little Experiment to warn you
    Extended Sample Configuration to Print with Samba-3
    Detailed Explanation of the Example's Settings
    The [global] Section
    The [printers] Section
    Any [my_printer_name] Section
    Print Commands
    Default Print Commands for various Unix Print Subsystems
    Setting up your own Print Commands
    Innovations in Samba Printing since 2.2
    Client Drivers on Samba Server for Point'n'Print
    The [printer$] Section is removed from Samba-3
    Creating the [print$] Share
    Parameters in the [print$] Section
    Subdirectory Structure in [print$]
    Installing Drivers into [print$]
    Setting Drivers for existing Printers with a Client GUI
    Setting Drivers for existing Printers with -rpcclient
    "The Proof of the Pudding lies in the Eating" (Client Driver Install -Procedure)
    The first Client Driver Installation
    IMPORTANT! Setting Device Modes on new Printers
    Further Client Driver Install Procedures
    Always make first Client Connection as root or "printer admin"
    Other Gotchas
    Setting Default Print Options for the Client Drivers
    Supporting large Numbers of Printers
    Adding new Printers with the Windows NT APW
    Weird Error Message Cannot connect under a -different Name
    Be careful when assembling Driver Files
    Samba and Printer Ports
    Avoiding the most common Misconfigurations of the Client Driver
    The Imprints Toolset
    What is Imprints?
    Creating Printer Driver Packages
    The Imprints Server
    The Installation Client
    Add Network Printers at Logon without User Interaction
    The addprinter command
    Migration of "Classical" printing to Samba-3
    Publishing Printer Information in Active Directory or LDAP
    Common Errors and Problems
    I give my root password but I don't get access
    My printjobs get spooled into the spooling directory, but then get lost

    Features and Benefits

    -Printing is often a mission-critical service for the users. Samba can -provide this service reliably and seamlessly for a client network -consisting of Windows workstations. -

    -A Samba-3.0 print service may be run on a Standalone or a Domain -member server, side by side with file serving functions, or on a -dedicated print server. It can be made as tight or as loosely secured -as needs dictate. Configurations may be simple or complex. Available -authentication schemes are essentially the same as described for file -services in previous chapters. Overall, Samba's printing support is -now able to replace an NT or Windows 2000 print server full-square, -with additional benefits in many cases. Clients may download and -install drivers and printers through their familiar "Point'n'Print" -mechanism. Printer installations executed by "Logon Scripts" are no -problem. Administrators can upload and manage drivers to be used by -clients through the familiar "Add Printer Wizard". As an additional -benefit, driver and printer management may be run from the command line -or through scripts, making it more efficient in case of large numbers -of printers. If a central accounting of print jobs (tracking every -single page and supplying the raw data for all sorts of statistical -reports) is required, this is best supported by CUPS as the print -subsystem underneath the Samba hood. -

    -This chapter deals with the foundations of Samba printing, as they -implemented by the more traditional UNIX (BSD- and System V-style) -printing systems. Many things apply to CUPS, the newer Common UNIX -Printing System, too; so if you use CUPS, you might be tempted to jump -to the next chapter -- but you will certainly miss a few things if you -do so. Better read this chapter too. -

    Note

    -Most of the given examples have been verified on Windows XP -Professional clients. Where this document describes the responses to -commands given, bear in mind that Windows 2000 clients are very -similar, but may differ in details. Windows NT is somewhat different -again. -

    Technical Introduction

    -Samba's printing support always relies on the installed print -subsystem of the Unix OS it runs on. Samba is a "middleman". It takes -printfiles from Windows (or other SMB) clients and passes them to the -real printing system for further processing. Therefore it needs to -"talk" to two sides: to the Windows print clients and to the Unix -printing system. Hence we must differentiate between the various -client OS types each of which behave differently, as well as the -various UNIX print subsystems, which themselves have different -features and are accessed differently. This part of the Samba HOWTO -Collection deals with the "traditional" way of Unix printing first; -the next chapter covers in great detail the more modern -Common UNIX Printing System -(CUPS). - -

    Important

    CUPS users, be warned: don't just jump on to the next -chapter. You might miss important information contained only -here!

    -

    What happens if you send a Job from a Client

    -To successfully print a job from a Windows client via a Samba -print server to a UNIX printer, there are 6 (potentially 7) -stages: -

    1. Windows opens a connection to the printershare

    2. Samba must authenticate the user

    3. Windows sends a copy of the printfile over the network -into Samba's spooling area

    4. Windows closes the connection again

    5. Samba invokes the print command to hand the file over -to the UNIX print subsystem's spooling area

    6. The Unix print subsystem processes the print -job

    7. The printfile may need to be explicitly deleted -from the Samba spooling area.

    Printing Related Configuration Parameters

    -There are a number of configuration parameters in - controlling Samba's printing -behaviour. Please also refer to the man page for smb.conf to -acquire an overview about these. As with other parameters, there are -Global Level (tagged with a "G" in the listings) and -Service Level ("S") parameters. -

    Service Level Parameters

    These may go into the -[global] section of -. In this case they define the default -behaviour of all individual or service level shares (provided those -don't have a different setting defined for the same parameter, thus -overriding the global default).

    Global Parameters

    These may not go into individual -shares. If they go in by error, the "testparm" utility can discover -this (if you run it) and tell you so.

    Parameters Recommended for Use

    The following smb.conf parameters directly -related to printing are used in Samba-3. See also the -smb.conf man page for detailed explanations: -

    List of printing related parameters in Samba-3.  -

    Global level parameters:

    • addprinter command (G)

    • deleteprinter command (G)

    • disable spoolss (G)

    • enumports command (G)

    • load printers (G)

    • lpq cache time (G)

    • os2 driver map (G)

    • printcap name (G), printcap (G)

    • show add printer wizard (G)

    • total print jobs (G)

    • use client driver (G)

    - -

    Service level parameters:

    • hosts allow (S)

    • hosts deny (S)

    • lppause command (S)

    • lpq command (S)

    • lpresume command (S)

    • lprm command (S)

    • max print jobs (S)

    • min print space (S)

    • print command (S)

    • printable (S), print ok (S)

    • printer name (S), printer (S)

    • printer admin (S)

    • printing = [cups|bsd|lprng...] (S)

    • queuepause command (S)

    • queueresume command (S)

    • total print jobs (S)

    -

    -Samba's printing support implements the Microsoft Remote Procedure -Calls (MS-RPC) methods for printing. These are used by Windows NT (and -later) print servers. The old "LanMan" protocol is still supported as -a fallback resort, and for older clients to use. More details will -follow further beneath. -

    Parameters for Backwards Compatibility

    -Two new parameters that were added in Samba 2.2.2, are still present -in Samba-3.0. Both of these options are described in the -smb.conf man page and are disabled by -default. Use them with caution! -

    disable spoolss(G)

    This is -provided for better support of Samba 2.0.x backwards capability. It -will disable Samba's support for MS-RPC printing and yield identical -printing behaviour to Samba 2.0.x.

    use client driver (G)

    was provided -for using local printer drivers on Windows NT/2000 clients. It does -not apply to Windows 95/98/ME clients.

    Parameters "for backward compatibility only", use with caution.  -

    • disable spoolss (G)

    • use client driver (S)

    -

    Parameters no longer in use

    -Samba users upgrading from 2.2.x to 3.0 need to be aware that some -previously available settings are no longer supported (as was -announced some time ago). Here is a list of them: -

    "old" parameters, removed in Samba-3.  -The following smb.conf parameters have been -deprecated already in Samba 2.2 and are now completely removed from -Samba-3. You cannot use them in new 3.0 installations: - -

    • printer driver file (G)

    • total print jobs (G)

    • postscript (S)

    • printer driver (S)

    • printer driver location (S)

    -

    A simple Configuration to Print with Samba-3

    -Here is a very simple example configuration for print related settings -in the file. If you compare it with your -own system's , you probably find some -additional parameters included there (as pre-configured by your OS -vendor). Further below is a discussion and explanation of the -parameters. Note, that this example doesn't use many parameters. -However, in many environments these are enough to provide a valid - which enables all clients to print. -

    - [global]
-         printing = bsd
-         load printers = yes
-
- [printers]
-         path = /var/spool/samba
-         printable = yes
-         public = yes
-         writable = no
-

    -This is only an example configuration. Many settings, if not -explicitly set to a specific value, are used and set by Samba -implicitly to its own default, because these have been compiled in. -To see all settings, let root use the testparm -utility. testparm also gives warnings if you have -mis-configured certain things. Its complete output is easily 340 lines -and more. You may want to pipe it through a pager program. -

    -The syntax for the configuration file is easy to grasp. You should -know that is not very picky about its -syntax. It has been explained elsewhere in this document. A short -reminder: It even tolerates some spelling errors (like "browsable" -instead of "browseable"). Most spelling is case-insensitive. Also, you -can use "Yes|No" or "True|False" for boolean settings. Lists of names -may be separated by commas, spaces or tabs. -

    Verification of "Settings in Use" with testparm

    -To see all (or at least most) printing related settings in Samba, -including the implicitly used ones, try the command outlined below -(hit "ENTER" twice!). It greps for all occurrences of "lp", "print", -"spool", "driver", "ports" and "[" in testparm's output and gives you -a nice overview about the running smbd's print configuration. (Note -that this command does not show individually created printer shares, -or the spooling paths in each case). Here is the output of my Samba -setup, with exactly the same settings in -as shown above: -

    -root# testparm -v | egrep "(lp|print|spool|driver|ports|\[)"
- Load smb config files from /etc/samba/smb.conf.simpleprinting
- Processing section "[homes]"
- Processing section "[printers]"
- 
- [global]
-        smb ports = 445 139
-        lpq cache time = 10
-        total print jobs = 0
-        load printers = Yes
-        printcap name = /etc/printcap
-        disable spoolss = No
-        enumports command =
-        addprinter command = 
-        deleteprinter command = 
-        show add printer wizard = Yes
-        os2 driver map =
-        printer admin =
-        min print space = 0
-        max print jobs = 1000
-        printable = No
-        printing = bsd
-        print command = lpr -r -P'%p' %s
-        lpq command = lpq -P'%p'
-        lprm command = lprm -P'%p' %j
-        lppause command =
-        lpresume command =
-        printer name =
-        use client driver = No
-
- [homes]
-
- [printers]
-        path = /var/spool/samba
-        printable = Yes
-
-

    -You can easily verify which settings were implicitly added by Samba's -default behaviour. Don't forget about this point: it may -be important in your future dealings with Samba. -

    Note

    testparm in Samba-3.0 behaves differently from 2.2.x: used -without the "-v" switch it only shows you the settings actually -written into ! To see the complete -configuration used, add the "-v" parameter to testparm.

    A little Experiment to warn you

    -Should you need to troubleshoot at any stage, please always come back -to this point first and verify if "testparm" shows the parameters you -expect! To give you an example from personal experience as a warning, -try to just "comment out" the load printers" -parameter. If your 2.2.x system behaves like mine, you'll see this: -

    -root# grep "load printers" /etc/samba/smb.conf
- #      load printers = Yes
-        # This setting is commented ooouuuuut!!
-
-root# testparm -v /etc/samba/smb.conf | egrep "(load printers)"
-        load printers = Yes
-
-

    -Despite my imagination that the commenting out of this setting should -prevent Samba from publishing my printers, it still did! Oh Boy -- it -cost me quite some time to find out the reason. But I am not fooled -any more... at least not by this ;-) -

    -root# grep -A1 "load printers" /etc/samba/smb.conf
-        load printers = No
-        # This setting is what I mean!!
- #      load printers = Yes
-        # This setting is commented ooouuuuut!!
-
-root# testparm -v smb.conf.simpleprinting | egrep "(load printers)"
-        load printers = No
-
-

    -Only when setting the parameter explicitly to -"load printers = No" -would Samba recognize my intentions. So my strong advice is: -

    • Never rely on "commented out" parameters!

    • Always set it up explicitly as you intend it to -behave.

    • Use testparm to uncover hidden -settings which might not reflect your intentions.

    -You can have a working Samba print configuration with this -minimal : -

    -root# cat /etc/samba/smb.conf-minimal
-        [printers]
-
-

    -This example should show you that you can use testparm to test any -filename for fitness as a Samba configuration. Actually, we want to -encourage you not to change your - on a working system (unless you know -exactly what you are doing)! Don't rely on an assumption that changes -will only take effect after you re-start smbd! This is not the -case. Samba re-reads its every 60 -seconds and on each new client connection. You might have to face -changes for your production clients that you didn't intend to apply at -this time! You will now note a few more interesting things. Let's now -ask testparm what the Samba print configuration -would be, if you used this minimalistic file as your real -: -

    -root#  testparm -v /etc/samba/smb.conf-minimal | egrep "(print|lpq|spool|driver|ports|[)"
- Processing section "[printers]"
- WARNING: [printers] service MUST be printable!
- No path in service printers - using /tmp
-
-        lpq cache time = 10
-        total print jobs = 0
-        load printers = Yes
-        printcap name = /etc/printcap
-        disable spoolss = No
-        enumports command =
-        addprinter command =
-        deleteprinter command =
-        show add printer wizard = Yes
-        os2 driver map =
-        printer admin =
-        min print space = 0
-        max print jobs = 1000
-        printable = No
-        printing = bsd
-        print command = lpr -r -P%p %s
-        lpq command = lpq -P%p
-        printer name =
-        use client driver = No
- [printers]
-        printable = Yes
-
-

    -testparm issued 2 warnings: -

    • because we didn't specify the -[printers] section as printable, -and

    • because we didn't tell it which spool directory to -use.

    -However, this was not fatal, and Samba-3.0 will default to values that -will work here. But, please!, don't rely on this and don't use this -example! This was only meant to make you careful to design and specify -your setup to be what you really want it to be. The outcome on your -system may vary for some parameters, since you may have a Samba built -with a different compile-time configuration. -Warning: don't put a comment sign at -the end of a valid line. It -will cause the parameter to be ignored (just as if you had put the -comment sign at the front). At first I regarded this as a bug in my -Samba version(s). But the man page states: “Internal whitespace -in a parameter value is retained verbatim.” This means that a -line consisting of, for example, -

    -printing = lprng     #This defines LPRng as the printing system"
-

    -will regard the whole of the string after the "=" -sign as the value you want to define. And this is an invalid value -that will be ignored, and a default value used instead.] -

    Extended Sample Configuration to Print with Samba-3

    -Here we show a more verbose example configuration for print related -settings in an . Below is a discussion -and explanation of the various parameters. We chose to use BSD-style -printing here, because we guess it is still the most commonly used -system on legacy Linux installations (new installs now predominantly -have CUPS, which is discussed entirely in the next chapter of this -document). Note, that this example explicitly names many parameters -which don't need to be stated because they are set by default. You -might be able to do with a leaner .

    Tip

    -if you read access it with the Samba Web Administration Tool (SWAT), -and then write it to disk again, it will be optimized in a way such -that it doesn't contain any superfluous parameters and comments. SWAT -organizes the file for best performance. Remember that each smbd -re-reads the Samba configuration once a minute, and that each -connection spawns an smbd process of its own, so it is not a bad idea -to optimize the in environments with -hundreds or thousands of clients.

    - [global]
-         printing = bsd
-         load printers = yes
-         show add printer wizard = yes
-         printcap name = /etc/printcap
-         printer admin = @ntadmin, root
-         total print jobs = 100
-         lpq cache time = 20
-         use client driver = no
-
- [printers]
-         comment = All Printers
-         printable = yes
-         path = /var/spool/samba
-         browseable = no
-         guest ok = yes
-         public = yes
-         read only = yes
-         writable = no       
-
- [my_printer_name]
-         comment = Printer with Restricted Access
-         path = /var/spool/samba_my_printer
-         printer admin = kurt
-         browseable = yes
-         printable = yes
-         writeable = no
-         hosts allow = 0.0.0.0
-         hosts deny = turbo_xp, 10.160.50.23, 10.160.51.60
-         guest ok = no
-

    -This also is only an example configuration. You -may not find all the settings in your own - (as pre-configured by your OS -vendor). Many configuration parameters, if not explicitly set to a -specific value, are used and set by Samba implicitly to its own -default, because these have been compiled in. To see all settings, let -root use the testparm -utility. testparm also gives warnings if you have -mis-configured certain things.. -

    Detailed Explanation of the Example's Settings

    -Following is a discussion of the settings from above shown example. -

    The [global] Section

    -The [global] section is one of 4 special -sections (along with [[homes], -[printers] and -[print$]...) It contains all parameters which -apply to the server as a whole. It is the place for parameters which -have only a "global" meaning (G). It may also contain service level -parameters (S) which then define default settings for all other -sections and shares. This way you can simplify the configuration and -avoid setting the same value repeatedly. (Within each individual -section or share you may however override these globally set "share -level" settings and specify other values). -

    printing = bsd

    this causes Samba to use default print commands -applicable for the BSD (a.k.a. RFC 1179 style or LPR/LPD) printing -system. In general, the "printing" parameter informs Samba about the -print subsystem it should expect. Samba supports CUPS, LPD, LPRNG, -SYSV, HPUX, AIX, QNX and PLP. Each of these systems defaults to a -different print command (and other queue control -commands).

    Caution

    The printing parameter is -normally a service level parameter. Since it is included here in the -[global] section, it will take effect for all -printer shares that are not defined differently. Samba-3.0 no longer -supports the SOFTQ printing system.

    load printers = yes

    this tells Samba to create automatically all -available printer shares. "Available" printer shares are discovered by -scanning the printcap file. All created printer shares are also loaded -for browsing. If you use this parameter, you do not need to specify -separate shares for each printer. Each automatically created printer -share will clone the configuration options found in the -[printers] section. (A load printers -= no setting will allow you to specify each UNIX printer -you want to share separately, leaving out some you don't want to be -publicly visible and available).

    show add printer wizard = -yes

    this setting is normally -enabled by default (even if the parameter is not written into the -). It makes the Add Printer Wizard icon -show up in the Printers folder of the Samba host's -share listing (as shown in Network Neighbourhood or -by the net view command). To disable it, you need to -explicitly set it to no (commenting it out -will not suffice!). The Add Printer Wizard lets you upload printer -drivers to the [print$] share and associate it -with a printer (if the respective queue exists there before the -action), or exchange a printer's driver against any other previously -uploaded driver.

    total print jobs = 100

    this setting sets the upper limit to 100 print jobs -being active on the Samba server at any one time. Should a client -submit a job which exceeds this number, a “no more space -available on server” type of error message will be returned by -Samba to the client. A setting of "0" (the default) means there is -no limit at all! -

    printcap name = /etc/printcap

    this tells Samba where to look for a list of -available printer names. (If you use CUPS, make sure that a printcap -file is written: this is controlled by the "Printcap" directive of -cupsd.conf). -

    printer admin = @ntadmin

    members of the ntadmin group should be able to add -drivers and set printer properties ("ntadmin" is only an example name, -it needs to be a valid UNIX group name); root is implicitly always a -printer admin. The "@" sign precedes group names in -. A printer admin can do anything to -printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC -(see below). Note that the printer admin -parameter is normally a share level parameter, so you may associate -different groups to different printer shares in larger installations, -if you use the printer admin parameter on the -share levels). -

    lpq cache time = 20

    this controls the cache time for the results of the -lpq command. It prevents the lpq command being called too often and -reduces load on a heavily used print server. -

    use client driver = no

    if set to yes, this setting only -takes effect for Win NT/2k/XP clients (and not for Win 95/98/ME). Its -default value is No (or False). -It must not be enabled on print shares -(with a yes or true setting) which -have valid drivers installed on the Samba server! For more detailed -explanations see the man page of smb.conf. -

    The [printers] Section

    -This is the second special section. If a section with this name -appears in the smb.conf, users are able to -connect to any printer specified in the Samba host's printcap file, -because Samba on startup then creates a printer share for every -printername it finds in the printcap file. You could regard this -section as a general convenience shortcut to share all printers with -minimal configuration. It is also a container for settings which -should apply as default to all printers. (For more details see the -smb.conf man page.) Settings inside this -container must be share level parameters (S). -

    comment = All printers

    the comment is shown next to -the share if a client queries the server, either via Network -Neighbourhood or with the net view command to list -available shares. -

    printable = yes

    please note well, that the -[printers] service must be -declared as printable. If you specify otherwise, smbd will refuse to -load at startup. This parameter allows -connected clients to open, write to and submit spool files into the -directory specified with the path parameter for -this service. It is used by Samba to differentiate printer shares from -file shares.

    path = /var/spool/samba

    this must point to a directory used by Samba to spool -incoming print files. It must not be the same as the spool -directory specified in the configuration of your UNIX print -subsystem! The path would typically point to a directory -which is world writeable, with the "sticky" bit set to it. -

    browseable = no

    this is always set to no if -printable = yes. It makes the -[printer] share itself invisible in the -list of available shares in a net view command or -in the Explorer browse list. (Note that you will of course see the -individual printers). -

    guest ok = yes

    -if set to yes, then no password is required to -connect to the printers service. Access will be granted with the -privileges of the guest account. On many systems the -guest account will map to a user named "nobody". This user is in the UNIX -passwd file with an empty password, but with no valid UNIX login. -(Note: on some systems the guest account might not have the -privilege to be able to print. Test this by logging in as your -guest user using su - guest and run a system print -command like -

    lpr -P printername /etc/motd

    public = yes

    this is a synonym for guest ok = -yes. Since we have guest ok = yes, -it really doesn't need to be here! (This leads to the interesting -question: “What, if I by accident have to contradictory settings -for the same share?” The answer is: the last one encountered by -Samba wins. The "winner" is shown by testparm. Testparm doesn't -complain about different settings of the same parameter for the same -share! You can test this by setting up multiple lines for the "guest -account" parameter with different usernames, and then run testparm to -see which one is actually used by Samba.) -

    read only = yes

    this normally (for other types of shares) prevents -users creating or modifying files in the service's directory. However, -in a "printable" service, it is always allowed to -write to the directory (if user privileges allow the connection), but -only via print spooling operations. "Normal" write operations are not -allowed.

    writeable = no

    -synonym for read only = yes -

    Any [my_printer_name] Section

    -If a section appears in the , which is -tagged as printable = yes, Samba presents it as -a printer share to its clients. Note, that Win95/98/ME clients may -have problems with connecting or loading printer drivers if the share -name has more than 8 characters! Also be very careful if you give a -printer the same name as an existing user or file share name: upon a -client's connection request to a certain sharename, Samba always tries -to find file shares with that name first; if it finds one, it will -connect to this and will never ultimately connect to a printer with -the same name! -

    comment = Printer with Restricted Access

    the comment says it all. -

    path = /var/spool/samba_my_printer

    here we set the spooling area for this printer to -another directory than the default. It is not a requirement to set it -differently, but the option is available. -

    printer admin = kurt

    the printer admin definition is different for this -explicitly defined printer share from the general -[printers] share. It is not a requirement; we -did it to show that it is possible if you want it. -

    browseable = yes

    we also made this printer browseable (so that the -clients may conveniently find it when browsing the Network -Neighbourhood). -

    printable = yes

    see explanation in last subsection. -

    writeable = no

    see explanation in last subsection. -

    hosts allow = 10.160.50.,10.160.51.

    here we exercise a certain degree of access control -by using the hosts allow and hosts deny parameters. Note, that -this is not by any means a safe bet. It is not a way to secure your -printers. This line accepts all clients from a certain subnet in a -first evaluation of access control -

    hosts deny = turbo_xp,10.160.50.23,10.160.51.60 -

    all listed hosts are not allowed here (even if they -belong to the "allowed subnets"). As you can see, you could name IP -addresses as well as NetBIOS hostnames -here. -

    guest ok = no

    this printer is not open for the guest account! -

    Print Commands

    -In each section defining a printer (or in the -[printers] section), a print -command parameter may be defined. It sets a command to -process the files which have been placed into the Samba print spool -directory for that printer. (That spool directory was, if you -remember, set up with the path -parameter). Typically, this command will submit the spool file to the -Samba host's print subsystem, using the suitable system print -command. But there is no requirement that this needs to be the -case. For debugging purposes or some other reason you may want to do -something completely different than "print" the file. An example is a -command that just copies the print file to a temporary location for -further investigation when you need to debug printing. If you craft -your own print commands (or even develop print command shell scripts), -make sure you pay attention to the need to remove the files from the -Samba spool directory. Otherwise your hard disk may soon suffer from -shortage of free space. -

    Default Print Commands for various Unix Print Subsystems

    -You learned earlier on, that Samba in most cases uses its built-in -settings for many parameters if it can not find an explicitly stated -one in its configuration file. The same is true for the -print command. The default print command varies -depending on the printing =... parameter -setting. In the commands listed below, you will notice some parameters -of the form %X where X is -p, s, J etc. These letters stand for -"printername", "spoolfile" and "job ID" respectively. They are -explained in more detail further below. Here is an overview (excluding -the special case of CUPS, which is discussed in the next chapter): -

    If this setting is active......this is used in lieu of an explicit command:
    printing = bsd|aix|lprng|plpprint command is lpr -r -P%p %s
    printing = sysv|hpuxprint command is lp -c -P%p %s; rm %s
    printing = qnxprint command is lp -r -P%p -s %s
    printing = bsd|aix|lprng|plplpq command is lpq -P%p
    printing = sysv|hpuxlpq command is lpstat -o%p
    printing = qnxlpq command is lpq -P%p
    printing = bsd|aix|lprng|plplprm command is lprm -P%p %j
    printing = sysv|hpuxlprm command is cancel %p-%j
    printing = qnxlprm command is cancel %p-%j
    printing = bsd|aix|lprng|plplppause command is lp -i %p-%j -H hold
    printing = sysv|hpuxlppause command (...is empty)
    printing = qnxlppause command (...is empty)
    printing = bsd|aix|lprng|plplpresume command is lp -i %p-%j -H resume
    printing = sysv|hpuxlpresume command (...is empty)
    printing = qnxlpresume command (...is empty)

    -We excluded the special CUPS case here, because it is discussed in the -next chapter. Just a short summary. For printing = -CUPS: If SAMBA is compiled against libcups, it uses the -CUPS API to submit jobs, etc. (It is a good idea also to set -printcap = cups in case your -cupsd.conf is set to write its autogenerated -printcap file to an unusual place). Otherwise Samba maps to the System -V printing commands with the -oraw option for printing, i.e. it uses -lp -c -d%p -oraw; rm %s With printing = -cups , and if SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any -manually set print command will be ignored! -

    -Having listed the above mappings here, you should note that there used -to be a bug in recent 2.2.x versions which -prevented the mapping from taking effect. It lead to the -"bsd|aix|lprng|plp" settings taking effect for all other systems, for -the most important commands (the print command, the -lpq command and the lprm -command). The lppause command and the -lpresume command remained empty. Of course, these -commands worked on bsd|aix|lprng|plp but they didn't work on -sysv|hpux|qnx systems. To work around this bug, you need to -explicitly set the commands. Use testparm -v to -check which command takes effect. Then check that this command is -adequate and actually works for your installed print subsystem. It is -always a good idea to explicitly set up your configuration files the -way you want them to work and not rely on any built-in defaults. -

    Setting up your own Print Commands

    -After a print job has finished spooling to a service, the -print command will be used by Samba via a -system() call to process the spool file. Usually -the command specified will submit the spool file to the host's -printing subsystem. But there is no requirement at all that this must -be the case. The print subsystem will probably not remove the spool -file on its own. So whatever command you specify on your own you -should ensure that the spool file is deleted after it has been -processed. -

    -There is no difficulty with using your own customized print commands -with the traditional printing systems. However, if you don't wish to -"roll your own", you should be well informed about the default -built-in commands that Samba uses for each printing subsystem (see the -table above). In all the commands listed in the last paragraphs you -see parameters of the form %X These are -macros, or shortcuts, used as place holders for -the names of real objects. At the time of running a command with such -a placeholder, Samba will insert the appropriate value -automatically. Print commands can handle all Samba macro -substitutions. In regard to printing, the following ones do have -special relevance: -

    • %s, %f - the path to the spool -file name

    • %p - the appropriate printer -name

    • %J - the job name as -transmitted by the client.

    • %c - the number of printed -pages of the spooled job (if known).

    • %z - the size of the spooled -print job (in bytes)

    -The print command MUST contain at least one occurrence of -%s or %f. -- The -%p is optional. If no printer name is supplied, -the %p will be silently removed from the print -command. In this case the job is sent to the default printer. -

    -If specified in the [global] section, the print -command given will be used for any printable service that does not -have its own print command specified. If there is neither a specified -print command for a printable service nor a global print command, -spool files will be created but not processed! And (most importantly): -print files will not be removed, so they will start filling your Samba -hard disk. -

    -Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the "nobody" -account. If this happens, create an alternative guest account and -supply it with the privilege to print. Set up this guest account in -the [global] section with the guest -account parameter. -

    -You can form quite complex print commands. You need to realize that -print commands are just passed to a UNIX shell. The shell is able to -expand the included environment variables as usual. (The syntax to -include a UNIX environment variable $variable -in or in the Samba print command is -%$variable.) To give you a working -print command example, the following will log a -print job to /tmp/print.log, print the file, then -remove it. Note that ';' is the usual separator for commands in shell -scripts: -

    -
- print command = echo Printing %s >> /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s
-
-

    -You may have to vary your own command considerably from this example -depending on how you normally print files on your system. The default -for the print command parameter varies depending on the setting of -the printing parameter. Another example is: -

    - print command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s
-

    Innovations in Samba Printing since 2.2

    -Before version 2.2.0, Samba's print server support for Windows clients -was limited to the level of LanMan printing -calls. This is the same protocol level as Windows 9x PCs offer when -they share printers. Beginning with the 2.2.0 release, Samba started -to support the native Windows NT printing mechanisms. These are -implemented via MS-RPC (RPC = Remote -Procedure Calls ). MS-RPCs use the -SPOOLSS named pipe for all printing. -

    -The additional functionality provided by the new SPOOLSS support includes: -

    • Support for downloading printer driver files to Windows -95/98/NT/2000 clients upon demand (Point'n'Print); -

    • Uploading of printer drivers via the Windows NT -Add Printer Wizard (APW) or the -Imprints tool set (refer to http://imprints.sourceforge.net); -

    • Support for the native MS-RPC printing calls such as -StartDocPrinter, EnumJobs(), etc... (See the MSDN documentation -at http://msdn.microsoft.com/ -for more information on the Win32 printing API);

    • Support for NT Access Control -Lists (ACL) on printer objects;

    • Improved support for printer queue manipulation -through the use of internal databases for spooled job information -(implemented by various *.tdb -files).

    -One other benefit of an update is this: Samba-3 is able to publish -all its printers in Active Directory (or LDAP)! -

    -One slight difference is here: it is possible on a Windows NT print -server to have printers listed in the Printers folder which are -not shared. Samba does not make this -distinction. By definition, the only printers of which Samba is aware -are those which are specified as shares in -. The reason is that Windows NT/200x/XP Professional -clients do not normally need to use the standard SMB printer share; -rather they can print directly to any printer on another Windows NT -host using MS-RPC. This of course assumes that the printing client has -the necessary privileges on the remote host serving the printer. The -default permissions assigned by Windows NT to a printer gives the -"Print" permissions to the well-known Everyone -group. (The older clients of type Win9x can only print to "shared" -printers). -

    Client Drivers on Samba Server for Point'n'Print

    -There is still confusion about what all this means: Is it or -is it not a requirement for printer drivers to be installed on a Samba -host in order to support printing from Windows clients? The -answer to this is: No, it is not a -requirement. Windows NT/2000 clients can, of -course, also run their APW to install drivers -locally (which then connect to a Samba served -print queue). This is the same method as used by Windows 9x -clients. (However, a bug existed in Samba 2.2.0 -which made Windows NT/2000 clients require that the Samba server -possess a valid driver for the printer. This was fixed in Samba -2.2.1). -

    -But it is a new option to install the printer -drivers into the [print$] share of the Samba -server, and a big convenience too. Then all -clients (including 95/98/ME) get the driver installed when they first -connect to this printer share. The uploading or -depositing of the driver into this -[print$] share, and the following binding of -this driver to an existing Samba printer share can be achieved by -different means: -

    • running the APW on an -NT/200x/XP Professional client (this doesn't work from 95/98/ME -clients);

    • using the Imprints -toolset;

    • using the smbclient and -rpcclient commandline tools;

    • using cupsaddsmb(only works for -the CUPS printing system, not for LPR/LPD, LPRng -etc.).

    -Please take additional note of the following fact: Samba -does not use these uploaded drivers in any way to process spooled -files. Drivers are utilized entirely by the clients, who -download and install them via the "Point'n'Print" mechanism supported -by Samba. The clients use these drivers to generate print files in the -format the printer (or the Unix print system) requires. Print files -received by Samba are handed over to the Unix printing system, which -is responsible for all further processing, if needed. -

    The [printer$] Section is removed from Samba-3

    -[print$] vs. [printer$] -.  -Versions of Samba prior to 2.2 made it possible to use a share -named [printer$]. This name was taken from the -same named service created by Windows 9x clients when a printer was -shared by them. Windows 9x printer servers always have a -[printer$] service which provides read-only -access (with no password required) in order to support printer driver -downloads. However, Samba's initial implementation allowed for a -parameter named printer driver location to be -used on a per share basis. This specified the location of the driver -files associated with that printer. Another parameter named -printer driver provided a means of defining the -printer driver name to be sent to the client. These parameters, -including the printer driver file parameter, -are now removed and can not be used in installations of Samba-3.0. -Now the share name [print$] is used for the -location of downloadable printer drivers. It is taken from the -[print$] service created by Windows NT PCs when -a printer is shared by them. Windows NT print servers always have a -[print$] service which provides read-write -access (in the context of its ACLs) in order to support printer driver -down- and uploads. Don't fear -- this does not mean Windows 9x -clients are thrown aside now. They can use Samba's -[print$] share support just fine. -

    Creating the [print$] Share

    -In order to support the up- and downloading of printer driver files, -you must first configure a file share named -[print$]. The "public" name of this share is -hard coded in Samba's internals (because it is hard coded in the MS -Windows clients too). It cannot be renamed since Windows clients are -programmed to search for a service of exactly this name if they want -to retrieve printer driver files. -

    -You should modify the server's file to -add the global parameters and create the -[print$] file share (of course, some of the -parameter values, such as 'path' are arbitrary and should be replaced -with appropriate values for your site): -

    - [global]
-      ; members of the ntadmin group should be able to add drivers and set
-      ; printer properties. root is implicitly always a 'printer admin'.
-      printer admin = @ntadmin
-      [....]
-
- [printers]
-      [....]
-
- [print$]
-      comment = Printer Driver Download Area
-      path = /etc/samba/drivers
-      browseable = yes
-      guest ok = yes
-      read only = yes
-      write list = @ntadmin, root
-

    -Of course, you also need to ensure that the directory named by the -path parameter exists on the Unix file system. -

    Parameters in the [print$] Section

    -[print$] is a special section in -. It contains settings relevant to -potential printer driver download and local installation by clients. -

    comment = Printer Driver -Download Area

    the comment appears next to the share name if it is -listed in a share list (usually Windows clients won't see it often but -it will also appear up in a smbclient -L sambaserver - output).

    path = /etc/samba/printers

    this is the path to the location of the Windows -driver file deposit from the UNIX point of -view.

    browseable = no

    this makes the [print$] share -"invisible" in Network Neighbourhood to clients. However, you can -still "mount" it from any client using the net use -g:\\sambaserver\print$ command in a "DOS box" or the -"Connect network drive" menu from Windows -Explorer.

    guest ok = yes

    this gives read only access to this share for all -guest users. Access may be used to download and install printer -drivers on clients. The requirement for guest ok = -yes depends upon how your site is configured. If users -will be guaranteed to have an account on the Samba host, then this is -a non-issue.

    Note

    -The non-issue is this: if all your Windows NT users are guaranteed to -be authenticated by the Samba server (for example if Samba -authenticates via an NT domain server and the NT user has already been -validated by the Domain Controller in order to logon to the Windows NT -session), then guest access is not necessary. Of course, in a -workgroup environment where you just want to be able to print without -worrying about silly accounts and security, then configure the share -for guest access. You'll probably want to add map to guest -= Bad User in the [global] section -as well. Make sure you understand what this parameter does before -using it. -

    read only = yes

    as we don't want everybody to upload driver files (or -even change driver settings) we tagged this share as not -writeable.

    write list = @ntadmin,root

    since the [print$] was made -read only by the previous setting, we need to create a "write list" -also. UNIX groups (denoted with a leading "@" character) and users -listed here are allowed write access (as an exception to the general -public's "read-only" access), which they need to update files on the -share. Normally you will want to only name administrative level user -accounts in this setting. Check the file system permissions to make -sure these accounts can copy files to the share. If this is a non-root -account, then the account should also be mentioned in the global -printer admin parameter. See the - man page for more information on -configuring file shares.

    Subdirectory Structure in [print$]

    -In order for a Windows NT print server to support the downloading of -driver files by multiple client architectures, you must create several -subdirectories within the [print$] service -(i.e. the Unix directory named by the path -parameter). These correspond to each of the supported client -architectures. Samba follows this model as well. Just like the name of -the [print$] share itself, the subdirectories -*must* be exactly the names listed below (you may leave out the -subdirectories of architectures you don't want to support). -

    -Therefore, create a directory tree below the -[print$] share for each architecture you wish -to support. -

    -[print$]--+--
-          |--W32X86           # serves drivers to "Windows NT x86"
-          |--WIN40            # serves drivers to "Windows 95/98"
-          |--W32ALPHA         # serves drivers to "Windows NT Alpha_AXP"
-          |--W32MIPS          # serves drivers to "Windows NT R4000"
-          |--W32PPC           # serves drivers to "Windows NT PowerPC"
-

    Required permissions

    -In order to add a new driver to your Samba host, one of two conditions -must hold true: -

    • The account used to connect to the Samba host must -have a UID of 0 (i.e. a root account)

    • The account used to connect to the Samba host must be -named in the printer adminlist.

    -Of course, the connected account must still possess access to add -files to the subdirectories beneath -[print$]. Remember that all file shares are set -to 'read only' by default. -

    -Once you have created the required [print$] -service and associated subdirectories, go to a Windows NT 4.0/2k/XP -client workstation. Open Network Neighbourhood or -My Network Places and browse for the Samba host. -Once you have located the server, navigate to its Printers and -Faxes folder. You should see an initial listing of printers -that matches the printer shares defined on your Samba host. -

    Installing Drivers into [print$]

    -You have successfully created the [print$] -share in ? And Samba has re-read its -configuration? Good. But you are not yet ready to take off. The -driver files need to be present in this share, -too! So far it is still an empty share. Unfortunately, it is not enough -to just copy the driver files over. They need to be set -up too. And that is a bit tricky, to say the least. We -will now discuss two alternative ways to install the drivers into -[print$]: -

    • using the Samba commandline utility -rpcclient with its various subcommands (here: -adddriver and setdriver) from -any UNIX workstation;

    • running a GUI (Printer -Properties and Add Printer Wizard) -from any Windows NT/2k/XP client workstation.

    -The latter option is probably the easier one (even if the only -entrance to this realm seems a little bit weird at first). -

    Setting Drivers for existing Printers with a Client GUI

    -The initial listing of printers in the Samba host's -Printers folder accessed from a client's Explorer -will have no real printer driver assigned to them. By default, in -Samba-3 (as in 2.2.1 and later) this driver name is set to a NULL -string. This must be changed now. The local Add Printer -Wizard, run from NT/2000/XP clients, will help us in this -task. -

    -However, the job to set a valid driver for the printer is not a -straightforward one: You must attempt to view the printer properties -for the printer to which you want the driver assigned. Open the -Windows Explorer, open Network Neighbourhood, browse to the Samba -host, open Samba's Printers folder, right-click the printer icon and -select Properties.... You are now trying to view printer and driver -properties for a queue which has this default NULL driver -assigned. This will result in an error message (this is normal here): -

    Device settings cannot be displayed. The driver -for the specified printer is not installed, only spooler properties -will be displayed. Do you want to install the driver -now?

    -Important:Don't click Yes! Instead, -click No in the error dialog. -Only now you will be presented with the printer properties window. From here, -the way to assign a driver to a printer is open to us. You have now the choice -either: -

    • select a driver from the pop-up list of installed -drivers. Initially this list will be empty. -Or

    • use the New Driver... button to -install a new printer driver (which will in fact start up the -APW).

    -Once the APW is started, the procedure is exactly the same as the one -you are familiar with in Windows (we assume here that you are -familiar with the printer driver installations procedure on Windows -NT). Make sure your connection is in fact setup as a user with -printer admin privileges (if in doubt, use -smbstatus to check for this). If you wish to -install printer drivers for client operating systems other than -Windows NT x86, you will need to use the -Sharing tab of the printer properties dialog. -

    -Assuming you have connected with an administrative (or root) account -(as named by the printer admin parameter), -you will also be able to modify other printer properties such as ACLs -and default device settings using this dialog. For the default device -settings, please consider the advice given further below. -

    Setting Drivers for existing Printers with -rpcclient

    -The second way to install printer drivers into -[print$] and set them up in a valid way can be -done from the UNIX command line. This involves four distinct steps: -

    1. gathering the info about the required driver files -and collecting the files together;

    2. deposit the driver files into the -[print$] share's correct subdirectories -(possibly by using smbclient);

    3. running the rpcclient -commandline utility once with the adddriver -subcommand,

    4. running rpcclient a second -time with the setdriver -subcommand.

    -We will provide detailed hints for each of these steps in the next few -paragraphs. -

    Identifying the Driver Files

    -To find out about the driver files, you have two options: you could -investigate the driver CD which comes with your printer. Study the -*.inf file on the CD, if it is contained. This -may not be the possible, since the *.inf file might be -missing. Unfortunately, many vendors have now started to use their own -installation programs. These installations packages are often some -sort of Windows platform archive format, plus, the files may get -re-named during the installation process. This makes it extremely -difficult to identify the driver files you need. -

    -Then you only have the second option: install the driver first on a -Windows client *locally* and investigate which file names and paths it -uses after they are installed. (Note, that you need to repeat this -procedure for every client platform you want to support. We are going -to show it here for the W32X86 platform only, a -name used by Microsoft for all WinNT/2k/XP clients...) -

    -A good method to recognize the driver files this is to print the test -page from the driver's Properties Dialog -(General tab). Then look at the list of driver -files named on the printout. You'll need to recognize what Windows -(and Samba) are calling the Driver File , the -Data File, the Config File, -the Help File and (optionally) the -Dependent Driver Files (this may vary slightly -for Windows NT). You need to remember all names (or better take a -note) for the next steps. -

    -Another method to quickly test the driver filenames and related paths -is provided by the rpcclient utility. Run it with -enumdrivers or with the -getdriver subcommand, each in the -3 level. In the following example, -TURBO_XP is the name of the Windows PC (in this -case it was a Windows XP Professional laptop, BTW). I had installed -the driver locally to TURBO_XP while kde-bitshop is -the name of the Linux host from which I am working. We could run an -interactive rpcclient session; -then we'd get an rpcclient /> prompt and would -type the subcommands at this prompt. This is left as a good exercise -to the reader. For now we use rpcclient with the --c parameter to execute a single subcommand -line and exit again. This is the method you would use if you want to -create scripts to automate the procedure for a large number of -printers and drivers. Note the different quotes used to overcome the -different spaces in between words: -

    -root# rpcclient -U'Danka%xxxx' -c 'getdriver "Heidelberg Digimaster 9110 (PS)" 3' TURBO_XP
-  cmd = getdriver "Heidelberg Digimaster 9110 (PS)" 3
-
-  [Windows NT x86]
-  Printer Driver Info 3:
-          Version: [2]
-          Driver Name: [Heidelberg Digimaster 9110 (PS)]
-          Architecture: [Windows NT x86]
-          Driver Path: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\HDNIS01_de.DLL]
-          Datafile: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.ppd]
-          Configfile: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\HDNIS01U_de.DLL]
-          Helpfile: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\HDNIS01U_de.HLP]
-  
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.DLL]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.INI]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1KMMin.DLL]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.dat]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.cat]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.def]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.hre]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.vnd]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.hlp]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de_reg.HLP]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\HDNIS01Aux.dll]
-          Dependentfiles: [C:\WINNT\System32\spool\DRIVERS\W32X86\2\HDNIS01_de.NTF]
-  
-          Monitorname: []
-          Defaultdatatype: []
-
-

    -You may notice, that this driver has quite a big number of -Dependentfiles (I know worse cases however). Also, -strangely, the Driver File is here tagged as -Driver Path.... oh, well. Here we don't have yet -support for the so-called WIN40 architecture -installed. This name is used by Microsoft for the Win95/98/ME platforms. -If we want to support these, we need to install the Win95/98/ME driver -files in addition to those for W32X86 -(i.e. the WinNT72000/XP clients) onto a Windows PC. This PC -can also host the Win9x drivers, even if itself runs on Windows NT, -2000 or XP. -

    -Since the [print$] share is usually accessible -through the Network Neighbourhood, you can also use the UNC notation -from Windows Explorer to poke at it. The Win9x driver files will end -up in subdirectory "0" of the "WIN40" directory. The full path to -access them will be -\\WINDOWSHOST\print$\WIN40\0\. -

    Note

    more recent drivers on Windows 2000 and Windows XP are -installed into the "3" subdirectory instead of the "2". The version 2 -of drivers, as used in Windows NT, were running in Kernel Mode. -Windows 2000 changed this. While it still can use the Kernel Mode -drivers (if this is enabled by the Admin), its native mode for printer -drivers is User Mode execution. This requires drivers designed for -this. These type of drivers install into the "3" subdirectory. -

    Collecting the Driver Files from a Windows Host's -[print$] Share

    -Now we need to collect all the driver files we identified. in our -previous step. Where do we get them from? Well, why not retrieve them -from the very PC and the same [print$] share -which we investigated in our last step to identify the files? We can -use smbclient to do this. We will use the paths and -names which were leaked to us by getdriver. The -listing is edited to include linebreaks for readability: -

    -root# smbclient //TURBO_XP/print\$ -U'Danka%xxxx'	\ 
-	-c 'cd W32X86/2;mget HD*_de.*             \
-	hd*ppd Hd*_de.* Hddm*dll HDN*Aux.DLL'
-  added interface ip=10.160.51.60 bcast=10.160.51.255 nmask=255.255.252.0
-  Got a positive name query response from 10.160.50.8 ( 10.160.50.8 )
-  Domain=[DEVELOPMENT] OS=[Windows 5.1] Server=[Windows 2000 LAN Manager]
-  Get file Hddm91c1_de.ABD? n
-  Get file Hddm91c1_de.def? y
-  getting file \W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.def of size 428 as Hddm91c1_de.def (22.0 kb/s) (average 22.0 kb/s)
-  Get file Hddm91c1_de.DLL? y
-  getting file \W32X86\2\Hddm91c1_de.DLL of size 876544 as Hddm91c1_de.DLL (737.3 kb/s) (average 737.3 kb/s)
-  [...]
-
-

    -After this command is complete, the files are in our current local -directory. You probably have noticed that this time we passed several -commands to the -c parameter, separated by semi-colons. This -effects that all commands are executed in sequence on the remote -Windows server before smbclient exits again. -

    -Don't forget to repeat the procedure for the WIN40 -architecture should you need to support Win95/98/XP clients. Remember, the -files for these architectures are in the WIN40/0/ subdir. Once we are -complete, we can run smbclient ... put to store -the collected files on the Samba server's -[print$] share. -

    Depositing the Driver Files into [print$]

    -So, now we are going to put the driver files into the -[print$] share. Remember, the UNIX path to this -share has been defined previously in your -. You also have created subdirectories -for the different Windows client types you want to support. Supposing -your [print$] share maps to the UNIX path -/etc/samba/drivers/, your driver files should now -go here: -

    • for all Windows NT, 2000 and XP clients into -/etc/samba/drivers/W32X86/ but -*not*(yet) into the "2" subdir!

    • for all Windows 95, 98 and ME clients into -/etc/samba/drivers/WIN40/ -- but *not* -(yet) into the "0" subdir!

    -We again use smbclient to transfer the driver files across the -network. We specify the same files and paths as were leaked to us by -running getdriver against the original -Windows install. However, now we are going to -store the files into a Samba/UNIX print server's -[print$] share... -

    -root# smbclient //SAMBA-CUPS/print\$ -U'root%xxxx' -c 'cd W32X86; put HDNIS01_de.DLL; \
-  put Hddm91c1_de.ppd; put HDNIS01U_de.DLL;        \
-  put HDNIS01U_de.HLP; put Hddm91c1_de.DLL;        \
-  put Hddm91c1_de.INI; put Hddm91c1KMMin.DLL;      \
-  put Hddm91c1_de.dat; put Hddm91c1_de.dat;        \
-  put Hddm91c1_de.def; put Hddm91c1_de.hre;        \
-  put Hddm91c1_de.vnd; put Hddm91c1_de.hlp;        \
-  put Hddm91c1_de_reg.HLP; put HDNIS01Aux.dll;     \
-  put HDNIS01_de.NTF'
- added interface ip=10.160.51.60 bcast=10.160.51.255 nmask=255.255.252.0
- Got a positive name query response from 10.160.51.162 ( 10.160.51.162 )
- Domain=[CUPS-PRINT] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.7a]
- putting file HDNIS01_de.DLL as \W32X86\HDNIS01_de.DLL (4465.5 kb/s) (average 4465.5 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1_de.ppd as \W32X86\Hddm91c1_de.ppd (12876.8 kb/s) (average 4638.9 kb/s)
- putting file HDNIS01U_de.DLL as \W32X86\HDNIS01U_de.DLL (20249.8 kb/s) (average 5828.3 kb/s)
- putting file HDNIS01U_de.HLP as \W32X86\HDNIS01U_de.HLP (9652.8 kb/s) (average 5899.8 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1_de.DLL as \W32X86\Hddm91c1_de.DLL (23777.7 kb/s) (average 10400.6 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1_de.INI as \W32X86\Hddm91c1_de.INI (98.6 kb/s) (average 10329.0 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1KMMin.DLL as \W32X86\Hddm91c1KMMin.DLL (22931.5 kb/s) (average 10501.7 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1_de.dat as \W32X86\Hddm91c1_de.dat (2462.8 kb/s) (average 10393.0 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1_de.dat as \W32X86\Hddm91c1_de.dat (4925.3 kb/s) (average 10356.3 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1_de.def as \W32X86\Hddm91c1_de.def (417.9 kb/s) (average 10290.1 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1_de.hre as \W32X86\Hddm91c1_de.hre (22571.3 kb/s) (average 11338.5 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1_de.vnd as \W32X86\Hddm91c1_de.vnd (3384.6 kb/s) (average 10754.3 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1_de.hlp as \W32X86\Hddm91c1_de.hlp (18406.8 kb/s) (average 10839.8 kb/s)
- putting file Hddm91c1_de_reg.HLP as \W32X86\Hddm91c1_de_reg.HLP (20278.3 kb/s) (average 11386.3 kb/s)
- putting file HDNIS01Aux.dll as \W32X86\HDNIS01Aux.dll (14994.6 kb/s) (average 11405.2 kb/s)
- putting file HDNIS01_de.NTF as \W32X86\HDNIS01_de.NTF (23390.2 kb/s) (average 13170.8 kb/s)
-
-

    -Phewww -- that was a lot of typing! Most drivers are a lot smaller -- -many only having 3 generic PostScript driver files plus 1 PPD. Note, -that while we did retrieve the files from the "2" subdirectory of the -"W32X86" directory from the Windows box, we don't -put them (for now) in this same subdirectory of the Samba box! This -re-location will automatically be done by the -adddriver command which we will run shortly (and -don't forget to also put the files for the Win95/98/ME architecture -into the WIN40/ subdirectory should you need -them). -

    Check if the Driver Files are there (with smbclient)

    -For now we verify that our files are there. This can be done with -smbclient too (but of course you can log in via SSH -also and do this through a standard UNIX shell access too): -

    -root# smbclient //SAMBA-CUPS/print\$ -U 'root%xxxx' -c 'cd W32X86; pwd; dir; cd 2; pwd; dir'
- added interface ip=10.160.51.60 bcast=10.160.51.255 nmask=255.255.252.0
- Got a positive name query response from 10.160.51.162 ( 10.160.51.162 )
- Domain=[CUPS-PRINT] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.7a]
-
-  Current directory is \\SAMBA-CUPS\print$\W32X86\
-  .                                   D        0  Sun May  4 03:56:35 2003
-  ..                                  D        0  Thu Apr 10 23:47:40 2003
-  2                                   D        0  Sun May  4 03:56:18 2003
-  HDNIS01Aux.dll                      A    15356  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  Hddm91c1KMMin.DLL                   A    46966  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  HDNIS01_de.DLL                      A   434400  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  HDNIS01_de.NTF                      A   790404  Sun May  4 03:56:35 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.DLL                     A   876544  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.INI                     A      101  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.dat                     A     5044  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.def                     A      428  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.hlp                     A    37699  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.hre                     A   323584  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.ppd                     A    26373  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.vnd                     A    45056  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  HDNIS01U_de.DLL                     A   165888  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  HDNIS01U_de.HLP                     A    19770  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de_reg.HLP                 A   228417  Sun May  4 03:58:59 2003
-                40976 blocks of size 262144. 709 blocks available
-
-  Current directory is \\SAMBA-CUPS\print$\W32X86\2\
-  .                                   D        0  Sun May  4 03:56:18 2003
-  ..                                  D        0  Sun May  4 03:56:35 2003
-  ADOBEPS5.DLL                        A   434400  Sat May  3 23:18:45 2003
-  laserjet4.ppd                       A     9639  Thu Apr 24 01:05:32 2003
-  ADOBEPSU.DLL                        A   109568  Sat May  3 23:18:45 2003
-  ADOBEPSU.HLP                        A    18082  Sat May  3 23:18:45 2003
-  PDFcreator2.PPD                     A    15746  Sun Apr 20 22:24:07 2003
-                40976 blocks of size 262144. 709 blocks available
-
-

    -Notice that there are already driver files present in the -2 subdir (probably from a previous -installation). Once the files for the new driver are there too, you -are still a few steps away from being able to use them on the -clients. The only thing you could do *now* is to retrieve them from a -client just like you retrieve ordinary files from a file share, by -opening print$ in Windows Explorer. But that wouldn't install them per -Point'n'Print. The reason is: Samba doesn't know yet that these files -are something special, namely printer driver -files and it doesn't know yet to which print queue(s) these -driver files belong. -

    Running rpcclient with -adddriver

    -So, next you must tell Samba about the special category of the files -you just uploaded into the [print$] share. This -is done by the adddriver command. It will -prompt Samba to register the driver files into its internal TDB -database files. The following command and its output has been edited, -again, for readability: -

    -root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx -c 'adddriver "Windows NT x86" "dm9110:HDNIS01_de.DLL: \
-  Hddm91c1_de.ppd:HDNIS01U_de.DLL:HDNIS01U_de.HLP:   \
-  NULL:RAW:Hddm91c1_de.DLL,Hddm91c1_de.INI,          \
-  Hddm91c1_de.dat,Hddm91c1_de.def,Hddm91c1_de.hre,   \
-  Hddm91c1_de.vnd,Hddm91c1_de.hlp,Hddm91c1KMMin.DLL, \
-  HDNIS01Aux.dll,HDNIS01_de.NTF,                     \
-  Hddm91c1_de_reg.HLP' SAMBA-CUPS
-
- cmd = adddriver "Windows NT x86" "dm9110:HDNIS01_de.DLL:Hddm91c1_de.ppd:HDNIS01U_de.DLL:    \
-  HDNIS01U_de.HLP:NULL:RAW:Hddm91c1_de.DLL,Hddm91c1_de.INI, \
-  Hddm91c1_de.dat,Hddm91c1_de.def,Hddm91c1_de.hre,          \
-  Hddm91c1_de.vnd,Hddm91c1_de.hlp,Hddm91c1KMMin.DLL,        \
-  HDNIS01Aux.dll,HDNIS01_de.NTF,Hddm91c1_de_reg.HLP"
-
- Printer Driver dm9110 successfully installed.
-
-

    -After this step the driver should be recognized by Samba on the print -server. You need to be very careful when typing the command. Don't -exchange the order of the fields. Some changes would lead to a -NT_STATUS_UNSUCCESSFUL error -message. These become obvious. Other changes might install the driver -files successfully, but render the driver unworkable. So take care! -Hints about the syntax of the adddriver command are in the man -page. The CUPS printing chapter of this HOWTO collection provides a -more detailed description, if you should need it. -

    Check how Driver Files have been moved after -adddriver finished

    -One indication for Samba's recognition of the files as driver files is -the successfully installed message. -Another one is the fact, that our files have been moved by the -adddriver command into the 2 -subdirectory. You can check this again with -smbclient: -

    -root# smbclient //SAMBA-CUPS/print\$ -Uroot%xxxx -c 'cd W32X86;dir;pwd;cd 2;dir;pwd'
- added interface ip=10.160.51.162 bcast=10.160.51.255 nmask=255.255.252.0
- Domain=[CUPS-PRINT] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.7a]
-
-  Current directory is \\SAMBA-CUPS\print$\W32X86\
-  .                                   D        0  Sun May  4 04:32:48 2003
-  ..                                  D        0  Thu Apr 10 23:47:40 2003
-  2                                   D        0  Sun May  4 04:32:48 2003
-                40976 blocks of size 262144. 731 blocks available 
-
-  Current directory is \\SAMBA-CUPS\print$\W32X86\2\
-  .                                   D        0  Sun May  4 04:32:48 2003
-  ..                                  D        0  Sun May  4 04:32:48 2003
-  DigiMaster.PPD                      A   148336  Thu Apr 24 01:07:00 2003
-  ADOBEPS5.DLL                        A   434400  Sat May  3 23:18:45 2003
-  laserjet4.ppd                       A     9639  Thu Apr 24 01:05:32 2003
-  ADOBEPSU.DLL                        A   109568  Sat May  3 23:18:45 2003
-  ADOBEPSU.HLP                        A    18082  Sat May  3 23:18:45 2003
-  PDFcreator2.PPD                     A    15746  Sun Apr 20 22:24:07 2003
-  HDNIS01Aux.dll                      A    15356  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  Hddm91c1KMMin.DLL                   A    46966  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  HDNIS01_de.DLL                      A   434400  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  HDNIS01_de.NTF                      A   790404  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.DLL                     A   876544  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.INI                     A      101  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.dat                     A     5044  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.def                     A      428  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.hlp                     A    37699  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.hre                     A   323584  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.ppd                     A    26373  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de.vnd                     A    45056  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  HDNIS01U_de.DLL                     A   165888  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  HDNIS01U_de.HLP                     A    19770  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-  Hddm91c1_de_reg.HLP                 A   228417  Sun May  4 04:32:18 2003
-                40976 blocks of size 262144. 731 blocks available
-
-

    -Another verification is that the timestamp of the printing TDB files -is now updated (and possibly their filesize has increased). -

    Check if the Driver is recognized by Samba

    -Now the driver should be registered with Samba. We can easily verify -this, and will do so in a moment. However, this driver is -not yet associated with a particular -printer. We may check the driver status of the -files by at least three methods: -

    • from any Windows client browse Network Neighbourhood, -find the Samba host and open the Samba Printers and -Faxes folder. Select any printer icon, right-click and -select the printer Properties. Click on the -Advanced tab. Here is a field indicating the -driver for that printer. A drop down menu allows you to change that -driver (be careful to not do this unwittingly.). You can use this -list to view all drivers know to Samba. Your new one should be amongst -them. (Each type of client will only see his own architecture's -list. If you don't have every driver installed for each platform, the -list will differ if you look at it from Windows95/98/ME or -WindowsNT/2000/XP.)

    • from a Windows 2000 or XP client (not WinNT) browse -Network Neighbourhood, search for the Samba -server and open the server's Printers folder, -right-click the white background (with no printer highlighted). Select -Server Properties. On the -Drivers tab you will see the new driver listed -now. This view enables you to also inspect the list of files belonging -to that driver (this doesn't work on Windows NT, but only on -Windows 2000 and Windows XP. WinNT doesn't provide the "Drivers" -tab).. An alternative, much quicker method for Windows -2000/XP to start this dialog is by typing into a DOS box (you must of -course adapt the name to your Samba server instead of SAMBA-CUPS): -

      rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /s /t2 /n\\SAMBA-CUPS

    • from a UNIX prompt run this command (or a variant -thereof), where SAMBA-CUPS is the name of the Samba -host and "xxxx" represents the actual Samba password assigned to root: -

      rpcclient -U'root%xxxx' -c 'enumdrivers' SAMBA-CUPS

      -You will see a listing of all drivers Samba knows about. Your new one -should be amongst them. But it is only listed under the [Windows NT -x86] heading, not under [Windows 4.0], -since we didn't install that part. Or did *you*? -- You will see a listing of -all drivers Samba knows about. Your new one should be amongst them. In our -example it is named dm9110. Note that the 3rd column -shows the other installed drivers twice, for each supported architecture one -time. Our new driver only shows up for -Windows NT 4.0 or 2000. To -have it present for Windows 95, 98 and ME you'll -have to repeat the whole procedure with the WIN40 architecture and subdirectory. -

    A side note: you are not bound to specific driver names

    -You can name the driver as you like. If you repeat the -adddriver step, with the same files as before, but -with a different driver name, it will work the same: -

    -root# rpcclient -Uroot%xxxx                                        \
-      -c 'adddriver "Windows NT x86"                     \
-      "myphantasydrivername:HDNIS01_de.DLL:              \
-      Hddm91c1_de.ppd:HDNIS01U_de.DLL:HDNIS01U_de.HLP:   \
-      NULL:RAW:Hddm91c1_de.DLL,Hddm91c1_de.INI,          \
-      Hddm91c1_de.dat,Hddm91c1_de.def,Hddm91c1_de.hre,   \
-      Hddm91c1_de.vnd,Hddm91c1_de.hlp,Hddm91c1KMMin.DLL, \
-      HDNIS01Aux.dll,HDNIS01_de.NTF,Hddm91c1_de_reg.HLP' SAMBA-CUPS
-  
-
- cmd = adddriver "Windows NT x86" 
-                 "myphantasydrivername:HDNIS01_de.DLL:Hddm91c1_de.ppd:HDNIS01U_de.DLL:\
-                  HDNIS01U_de.HLP:NULL:RAW:Hddm91c1_de.DLL,Hddm91c1_de.INI,           \
-                  Hddm91c1_de.dat,Hddm91c1_de.def,Hddm91c1_de.hre,                    \
-                  Hddm91c1_de.vnd,Hddm91c1_de.hlp,Hddm91c1KMMin.DLL,                  \
-                  HDNIS01Aux.dll,HDNIS01_de.NTF,Hddm91c1_de_reg.HLP"
-
- Printer Driver myphantasydrivername successfully installed.
-
-

    -You will also be able to bind that driver to any print queue (however, -you are responsible yourself that you associate drivers to queues -which make sense to the target printer). Note, that you can't run the -rpcclient adddriver command -repeatedly. Each run "consumes" the files you had put into the -[print$] share by moving them into the -respective subdirectories. So you must precede an -smbclient ... put command before each -rpcclient ... adddriver" command. -

    La Grande Finale: Running rpcclient with -setdriver

    -Samba still needs to know which printer's driver -this is. It needs to create a mapping of the driver to a printer, and -store this info in its "memory", the TDB files. The rpcclient -setdriver command achieves exactly this: -

    -root# rpcclient -U'root%xxxx' -c 'setdriver dm9110 myphantasydrivername' SAMBA-CUPS
- cmd = setdriver dm9110 myphantasydrivername
- Successfully set dm9110 to driver myphantasydrivername.
-

    -Ahhhhh -- no, I didn't want to do that. Repeat, this time with the -name I intended: -

    -root# rpcclient -U'root%xxxx' -c 'setdriver dm9110 dm9110' SAMBA-CUPS
- cmd = setdriver dm9110 dm9110
- Successfully set dm9110 to driver dm9110.
-

    -The syntax of the command is rpcclient --U'root%sambapassword' -c 'setdriver -"printername" -"drivername' -SAMBA-Hostname . -- -Now we have done *most* of the work. But not yet all.... -

    Note

    -the setdriver command will only succeed if the printer is -known to -Samba already. A bug in 2.2.x prevented Samba from recognizing freshly -installed printers. You had to restart Samba, or at least send a HUP -signal to all running smbd processes to work around this: -kill -HUP `pidof smbd`.

    "The Proof of the Pudding lies in the Eating" (Client Driver Install -Procedure)

    -A famous philosopher said once: “The Proof of the Pudding lies -in the Eating”. The proof for our setup lies in the printing. -So let's install the printer driver onto the client PCs. This is not -as straightforward as it may seem. Read on. -

    The first Client Driver Installation

    -Especially important is the installation onto the first client PC (for -each architectural platform separately). Once this is done correctly, -all further clients are easy to setup and shouldn't need further -attention. What follows is a description for the recommended first -procedure. You work now from a client workstation. First you should -guarantee that your connection is not unwittingly mapped to -bad user "nobody". In a DOS box type: -

    net use \\SAMBA-SERVER\print$ /user:root

    -Replace root, if needed, by another valid -printer admin user as given in the definition. -Should you already be connected as a different user, you'll get an error -message. There is no easy way to get rid of that connection, because -Windows doesn't seem to know a concept of "logging off" from a share -connection (don't confuse this with logging off from the local -workstation; that is a different matter). You can try to close -all Windows file explorer and Internet Explorer -windows. As a last resort, you may have to reboot. Make sure there is -no automatic re-connection set up. It may be easier to go to a -different workstation and try from there. After you have made sure you -are connected as a printer admin user (you can check this with the -smbstatus command on Samba) do this from the -Windows workstation: -

    • Open Network -Neighbourhood

    • Browse to Samba server

    • Open its Printers and -Faxes folder

    • Highlight and right-click the printer

    • Select Connect... (for WinNT4/2K -it is possibly Install...)

    -A new printer (named printername on -samba-server) should now have appeared in your -local Printer folder (check Start -- -Settings -- Control Panel --- Printers and Faxes). -

    -Most likely you are now tempted to try and print a test page. After -all, you now can open the printer properties and on the "General" tab, -there is a button offering to do just that. But chances are that you -get an error message saying Unable to print Test -Page. The reason might be that there is not yet a -valid Device Mode set for the driver, or that the "Printer Driver -Data" set is still incomplete. -

    -You must now make sure that a valid "Device Mode" is set for the -driver. Don't fear -- we will explain now what that means. -

    IMPORTANT! Setting Device Modes on new Printers

    -In order for a printer to be truly usable by a Windows NT/2K/XP -client, it must possess: -

    • a valid Device Mode generated by -the driver for the printer (defining things like paper size, -orientation and duplex settings), and

    • a complete set of -Printer Driver Data generated by the -driver.

    -If either one of these is incomplete, the clients can produce less -than optimal output at best. In the worst cases, unreadable garbage or -nothing at all comes from the printer or they produce a harvest of -error messages when attempting to print. Samba stores the named values -and all printing related info in its internal TDB database files -(ntprinters.tdb, -ntdrivers.tdb, printing.tdb -and ntforms.tdb). -

    -What do these two words stand for? Basically, the Device Mode and the -set of Printer Driver Data is a collection of settings for all print -queue properties, initialized in a sensible way. Device Modes and -Printer Driver Data should initially be set on the print server (that is -here: the Samba host) to healthy values so that the clients can start -to use them immediately. How do we set these initial healthy values? -This can be achieved by accessing the drivers remotely from an NT (or -2k/XP) client, as is discussed in the next paragraphs. -

    -Be aware, that a valid Device Mode can only be initiated by a -printer admin, or root (the reason should be -obvious). Device Modes can only correctly be set by executing the -printer driver program itself. Since Samba can not execute this Win32 -platform driver code, it sets this field initially to NULL (which is -not a valid setting for clients to use). Fortunately, most drivers -generate themselves the Printer Driver Data that is needed, when they -are uploaded to the [print$] share with the -help of the APW or rpcclient. -

    -The generation and setting of a first valid Device Mode however -requires some "tickling" from a client, to set it on the Samba -server. The easiest means of doing so is to simply change the page -orientation on the server's printer. This "executes" enough of the -printer driver program on the client for the desired effect to happen, -and feeds back the new Device Mode to our Samba server. You can use the -native Windows NT/2K/XP printer properties page from a Window client -for this: -

    • Browse the Network Neighbourhood

    • Find the Samba server

    • Open the Samba server's Printers and - Faxes folder

    • Highlight the shared printer in question

    • Right-click the printer (you may already be here, if you -followed the last section's description)

    • At the bottom of the context menu select -Properties.... (if the menu still offers the -Connect... entry -further above, you need to click that one first to achieve the driver -installation as shown in the last section)

    • Go to the Advanced tab; click on -Printing Defaults...

    • Change the "Portrait" page setting to "Landscape" (and -back)

    • (Oh, and make sure to apply -changes between swapping the page orientation to cause the change to -actually take effect...).

    • While you're at it, you may optionally also want to -set the desired printing defaults here, which then apply to all future -client driver installations on the remaining from now -on.

    -This procedure has executed the printer driver program on the client -platform and fed back the correct Device Mode to Samba, which now -stored it in its TDB files. Once the driver is installed on the -client, you can follow the analogous steps by accessing the -local Printers folder too if you are -a Samba printer admin user. From now on printing should work as expected. -

    -Samba also includes a service level parameter name default -devmode for generating a default Device Mode for a -printer. Some drivers will function well with Samba's default set of -properties. Others may crash the client's spooler service. So use this -parameter with caution. It is always better to have the client -generate a valid device mode for the printer and store it on the -server for you. -

    Further Client Driver Install Procedures

    -Every further driver may be done by any user, along the lines -described above: Browse network, open printers folder on Samba server, -right-click printer and choose Connect.... Once -this completes (should be not more than a few seconds, but could also take -a minute, depending on network conditions), you should find the new printer in -your client workstation local Printers and -Faxes folder. -

    -You can also open your local Printers and Faxes folder by -using this command on Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional workstations: -

    rundll32 shell32.dll,SHHelpShortcuts_RunDLL PrintersFolder -

    -or this command on Windows NT 4.0 workstations: -

    -rundll32 shell32.dll,Control_RunDLL MAIN.CPL @2 -

    -You can enter the commands either inside a DOS box window -or in the Run command... field from the -Start menu. -

    Always make first Client Connection as root or "printer admin"

    -After you installed the driver on the Samba server (in its -[print$] share, you should always make sure -that your first client installation completes correctly. Make it a habit for -yourself to build that the very first connection from a client as -printer admin. This is to make sure that: -

    • a first valid Device Mode is -really initialized (see above for more explanation details), and -that

    • the default print settings of your printer for all -further client installations are as you want them

    -Do this by changing the orientation to landscape, click -Apply, and then change it back again. Then modify -the other settings (for example, you don't want the default media size -set to Letter, when you are all using -A4, right? You may want to set the printer for -duplex as the default; etc.). -

    -To connect as root to a Samba printer, try this command from a Windows -2K/XP DOS box command prompt: -

    runas /netonly /user:root "rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /p /t3 /n \\SAMBA-SERVER\printername" -

    -You will be prompted for root's Samba-password; type it, wait a few -seconds, click on Printing Defaults... and -proceed to set the job options as should be used as defaults by all -clients. Alternatively, instead of root you can name one other member -of the printer admins from the setting. -

    -Now all the other users downloading and installing the driver -the same way (called Point'n'Print) will -have the same defaults set for them. If you miss this step you'll -get a lot of helpdesk calls from your users. But maybe you like to -talk to people.... ;-) -

    Other Gotchas

    -Your driver is installed. It is ready for -Point'n'Print installation by the clients -now. You may have tried to download and use it -onto your first client machine now. But wait... let's make you -acquainted first with a few tips and tricks you may find useful. For -example, suppose you didn't manage to "set the defaults" on the -printer, as advised in the preceding paragraphs? And your users -complain about various issues (such as “We need to set the paper -size for each job from Letter to A4 and it won't store it!”) -

    Setting Default Print Options for the Client Drivers

    -The last sentence might be viewed with mixed feelings by some users and -admins. They have struggled for hours and hours and couldn't arrive at -a point were their settings seemed to be saved. It is not their -fault. The confusing thing is this: in the multi-tabbed dialog that pops -up when you right-click the printer name and select -Properties..., you can arrive at two identically -looking dialogs, each claiming that they help you to set printer options, -in three different ways. Here is the definite answer to the "Samba -Default Driver Setting FAQ": -

    “I can't set and save default print options -for all users on Win2K/XP! Why not?”  -How are you doing it? I bet the wrong way.... (it is not very -easy to find out, though). There are 3 different ways to bring you to -a dialog that seems to set everything. All three -dialogs look the same. Only one of them -does what you intend. -Important: you need to be Administrator or Print -Administrator to do this for all users. Here is how I reproduce it in -on XP Professional: - -
    1. The first "wrong" way: - -

      1. Open the Printers -folder.

      2. Right-click on the printer -(remoteprinter on cupshost) and -select in context menu Printing -Preferences...

      3. Look at this dialog closely and remember what it looks -like.

      -
    2. The second "wrong" way: - -

      1. Open the Printers -folder.

      2. Right-click on the printer (remoteprinter on -cupshost) and select in the context menu -Properties

      3. Click on the General -tab

      4. Click on the button Printing -Preferences...

      5. A new dialog opens. Keep this dialog open and go back -to the parent dialog.

      -
    3. The third, the "correct" way: (should you do -this from the beginning, just carry out steps 1. and 2. from second -"way" above) - -

      1. Click on the Advanced -tab. (Hmmm... if everything is "Grayed Out", then you are not logged -in as a user with enough privileges).

      2. Click on the Printing -Defaults... button.

      3. On any of the two new tabs, click on the -Advanced... button.

      4. A new dialog opens. Compare this one to the other, -identical looking one from "B.5" or A.3".

      -
    - -Do you see any difference in the two settings dialogs? I don't -either. However, only the last one, which you arrived at with steps -C.1.-6. will permanently save any settings which will then become the -defaults for new users. If you want all clients to have the same -defaults, you need to conduct these steps as administrator -(printer admin in ) -before a client downloads the driver (the clients -can later set their own per-user defaults by -following the procedures A. -or B. above...). (This is new: Windows 2000 and -Windows XP allow per-user default settings and -the ones the administrator gives them, before they set up their own). -The "parents" of the identically looking dialogs have a slight -difference in their window names: one is called -Default Print Values for Printer Foo on Server -Bar" (which is the one you need) and the other is -called "Print Settings for Printer Foo on Server -Bar". The last one is the one you arrive at when you -right-click on the printer and select Print -Settings.... This is the one what you were -taught to use back in the days of Windows NT! So it is only natural to -try the same way with Win2k or WinXP. You wouldn't dream -that there is now a different "clicking path" to arrive at an -identically looking, but functionally different dialog to set defaults -for all users! -

    Tip

    Try (on Win2000 and WinXP) to run this command (as a user -with the right privileges): -

    -rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /p /t3 /n\\SAMBA-SERVER\printersharename -

    -to see the tab with the Printing Defaults... -button (the one you need). Also run this command: -

    -rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /p /t0 /n\\SAMBA-SERVER\printersharename -

    -to see the tab with the Printing Preferences... -button (the one which doesn't set system-wide defaults). You can -start the commands from inside a DOS box" or from the Start --- Run... menu. -

    Supporting large Numbers of Printers

    -One issue that has arisen during the recent development phase of Samba -is the need to support driver downloads for 100's of printers. Using -Windows NT APW here is somewhat awkward (to say the least). If you -don't want to acquire RSS pains from such the printer installation -clicking orgy alone, you need to think about a non-interactive script. -

    -If more than one printer is using the same driver, the -rpcclient setdriver command can be used to set the -driver associated with an installed queue. If the driver is uploaded -to [print$] once and registered with the -printing TDBs, it can be used by multiple print queues. In this case -you just need to repeat the setprinter subcommand -of rpcclient for every queue (without the need to -conduct the adddriver again and again). The -following is an example of how this could be accomplished: -

    -root# rpcclient SAMBA-CUPS -U root%secret -c 'enumdrivers'
- cmd = enumdrivers
- 
- [Windows NT x86]
- Printer Driver Info 1:
-   Driver Name: [infotec  IS 2075 PCL 6]
- 
- Printer Driver Info 1:
-   Driver Name: [DANKA InfoStream]
- 
- Printer Driver Info 1:
-   Driver Name: [Heidelberg Digimaster 9110 (PS)]
- 
- Printer Driver Info 1:
-   Driver Name: [dm9110]
-
- Printer Driver Info 1:
-   Driver Name: [myphantasydrivername]
-
- [....]
-
    - -
    -root# rpcclient SAMBA-CUPS -U root%secret -c 'enumprinters'
- cmd = enumprinters
-   flags:[0x800000]
-   name:[\\SAMBA-CUPS\dm9110]
-   description:[\\SAMBA-CUPS\dm9110,,110ppm HiVolume DANKA Stuttgart]
-   comment:[110 ppm HiVolume DANKA Stuttgart]
- [....]
-
    - -
    -root# rpcclient SAMBA-CUPS -U root%secret -c 'setdriver dm9110 "Heidelberg Digimaster 9110 (PS)"'
- cmd = setdriver dm9110 Heidelberg Digimaster 9110 (PPD)
- Successfully set dm9110 to driver Heidelberg Digimaster 9110 (PS).
-
    - -
    -root# rpcclient SAMBA-CUPS -U root%secret -c 'enumprinters'
- cmd = enumprinters
-   flags:[0x800000]
-   name:[\\SAMBA-CUPS\dm9110]
-   description:[\\SAMBA-CUPS\dm9110,Heidelberg Digimaster 9110 (PS),110ppm HiVolume DANKA Stuttgart]
-   comment:[110ppm HiVolume DANKA Stuttgart]
- [....]
-
    - -
    -root# rpcclient SAMBA-CUPS -U root%secret -c 'setdriver dm9110 myphantasydrivername'
- cmd = setdriver dm9110 myphantasydrivername
- Successfully set dm9110 to myphantasydrivername.
-
    - -
    -root# rpcclient SAMBA-CUPS -U root%secret -c 'enumprinters'
- cmd = enumprinters
-   flags:[0x800000]
-   name:[\\SAMBA-CUPS\dm9110]
-   description:[\\SAMBA-CUPS\dm9110,myphantasydrivername,110ppm HiVolume DANKA Stuttgart]
-   comment:[110ppm HiVolume DANKA Stuttgart]
- [....]
-

    -It may be not easy to recognize: but the first call to -enumprinters showed the "dm9110" printer with an -empty string where the driver should have been listed (between the 2 -commas in the "description" field). After the -setdriver command succeeded, all is well. (The -CUPS Printing chapter has more info about the installation of printer -drivers with the help of rpcclient). -

    Adding new Printers with the Windows NT APW

    -By default, Samba exhibits all printer shares defined in -smb.conf in the -Printers... folder. Also located in this folder -is the Windows NT Add Printer Wizard icon. The APW will be shown only -if: -

    • ...the connected user is able to successfully execute -an OpenPrinterEx(\\server) with administrative -privileges (i.e. root or printer admin). -

      Tip

      Try this from a Windows 2K/XP DOS box command prompt: -

      -runas /netonly /user:root rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /p /t0 /n \\SAMBA-SERVER\printersharename -

      -and click on Printing Preferences... -

    • ... contains the setting -show add printer wizard = yes (the -default).

    -The APW can do various things: -

    • upload a new driver to the Samba -[print$] share;

    • associate an uploaded driver with an existing (but -still "driverless") print queue;

    • exchange the currently used driver for an existing -print queue with one that has been uploaded before;

    • add an entirely new printer to the Samba host (only in -conjunction with a working add printer command; -a corresponding delete printer command for -removing entries from the Printers... folder -may be provided too)

    -The last one (add a new printer) requires more effort than the -previous ones. In order to use the APW to successfully add a printer -to a Samba server, the add printer command must -have a defined value. The program hook must successfully add the -printer to the Unix print system (i.e. to -/etc/printcap, -/etc/cups/printers.conf or other appropriate -files) and to if necessary. -

    -When using the APW from a client, if the named printer share does not -exist, smbd will execute the add printer -command and reparse to the -to attempt to locate the new printer share. If the share is still not -defined, an error of Access Denied is -returned to the client. Note that the add printer -command is executed under the context of the connected -user, not necessarily a root account. A map to guest = bad -user may have connected you unwittingly under the wrong -privilege; you should check it by using the -smbstatus command. -

    Weird Error Message Cannot connect under a -different Name

    -Once you are connected with the wrong credentials, there is no means -to reverse the situation other than to close all Explorer windows, and -perhaps reboot. -

    • The net use \\SAMBA-SERVER\sharename -/user:root gives you an error message: Multiple -connections to a server or a shared resource by the same user -utilizing the several user names are not allowed. Disconnect all -previous connections to the server, resp. the shared resource, and try -again.

    • Every attempt to "connect a network drive" to -\\SAMBASERVER\\print$ to z: is countered by the -pertinacious message. This network folder is currently -connected under different credentials (username and password). -Disconnect first any existing connection to this network share in -order to connect again under a different username and -password.

    -So you close all connections. You try again. You get the same -message. You check from the Samba side, using -smbstatus. Yes, there are some more -connections. You kill them all. The client still gives you the same -error message. You watch the smbd.log file on a very high debug level -and try re-connect. Same error message, but not a single line in the -log. You start to wonder if there was a connection attempt at all. You -run ethereal and tcpdump while you try to connect. Result: not a -single byte goes on the wire. Windows still gives the error -message. You close all Explorer Windows and start it again. You try to -connect - and this times it works! Windows seems to cache connection -info somewhere and doesn't keep it up to date (if you are unlucky you -might need to reboot to get rid of the error message). -

    Be careful when assembling Driver Files

    -You need to be very careful when you take notes about the files and -belonging to a particular driver. Don't confuse the files for driver -version "0" (for Win95/98/ME, going into -[print$]/WIN/0/), driver version "2" (Kernel Mode -driver for WinNT, going into [print$]/W32X86/2/ -may be used on Win2K/XP too), and driver version -"3" (non-Kernel Mode driver going into -[print$]/W32X86/3/ can not -be used on WinNT). Very often these different driver versions contain -files carrying the same name; but still the files are very different! -Also, if you look at them from the Windows Explorer (they reside in -%WINDOWS%\system32\spool\drivers\W32X86\) you -will probably see names in capital letters, while an "enumdrivers" -command from Samba would show mixed or lower case letters. So it is -easy to confuse them. If you install them manually using -rpcclient and subcommands, you may even succeed -without an error message. Only later, when you try install on a -client, you will encounter error messages like This -server has no appropriate driver for the printer. -

    -Here is an example. You are invited to look very closely at the -various files, compare their names and their spelling, and discover -the differences in the composition of the version-2 and -3 sets -Note: the version-0 set contained 40 (!) -Dependentfiles, so I left it out for space -reasons: -

    -root# rpcclient -U 'Administrator%secret' -c 'enumdrivers 3' 10.160.50.8 
-
- Printer Driver Info 3:
-         Version: [3]
-         Driver Name: [Canon iR8500 PS3]
-         Architecture: [Windows NT x86]
-         Driver Path: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cns3g.dll]
-         Datafile: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\iR8500sg.xpd]
-         Configfile: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cns3gui.dll]
-         Helpfile: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cns3g.hlp]
- 
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\aucplmNT.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\ucs32p.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\tnl32.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\aussdrv.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cnspdc.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\aussapi.dat]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cns3407.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\CnS3G.cnt]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\NBAPI.DLL]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\NBIPC.DLL]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cpcview.exe]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cpcdspl.exe]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cpcedit.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cpcqm.exe]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cpcspl.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cfine32.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cpcr407.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\Cpcqm407.hlp]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cpcqm407.cnt]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\3\cns3ggr.dll]
- 
-         Monitorname: []
-         Defaultdatatype: []
-
- Printer Driver Info 3:
-         Version: [2]
-         Driver Name: [Canon iR5000-6000 PS3]
-         Architecture: [Windows NT x86]
-         Driver Path: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\cns3g.dll]
-         Datafile: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\IR5000sg.xpd]
-         Configfile: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\cns3gui.dll]
-         Helpfile: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\cns3g.hlp]
- 
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\AUCPLMNT.DLL]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\aussdrv.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\cnspdc.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\aussapi.dat]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\cns3407.dll]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\CnS3G.cnt]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\NBAPI.DLL]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\NBIPC.DLL]
-         Dependentfiles: [\\10.160.50.8\print$\W32X86\2\cns3gum.dll]
- 
-         Monitorname: [CPCA Language Monitor2]
-         Defaultdatatype: []
-
-

    -If we write the "version 2" files and the "version 3" files -into different text files and compare the result, we see this -picture: -

    -root# sdiff 2-files 3-files
-
-
- cns3g.dll                     cns3g.dll
- iR8500sg.xpd                  iR8500sg.xpd
- cns3gui.dll                   cns3gui.dll
- cns3g.hlp                     cns3g.hlp
- AUCPLMNT.DLL                | aucplmNT.dll
-                             > ucs32p.dll
-                             > tnl32.dll
- aussdrv.dll                   aussdrv.dll
- cnspdc.dll                    cnspdc.dll
- aussapi.dat                   aussapi.dat
- cns3407.dll                   cns3407.dll
- CnS3G.cnt                     CnS3G.cnt
- NBAPI.DLL                     NBAPI.DLL
- NBIPC.DLL                     NBIPC.DLL
- cns3gum.dll                 | cpcview.exe
-                             > cpcdspl.exe 
-                             > cpcqm.exe
-                             > cpcspl.dll
-                             > cfine32.dll
-                             > cpcr407.dll
-                             > Cpcqm407.hlp
-                             > cpcqm407.cnt
-                             > cns3ggr.dll
-
-

    -Don't be fooled though! Driver files for each version with identical -names may be different in their content, as you can see from this size -comparison: -

    -root# for i in cns3g.hlp cns3gui.dll cns3g.dll; do                  \
-           smbclient //10.160.50.8/print\$ -U 'Administrator%xxxx' \
-           -c "cd W32X86/3; dir $i; cd .. ; cd 2; dir $i";      \
-		   done
-
-  CNS3G.HLP               A   122981  Thu May 30 02:31:00 2002
-  CNS3G.HLP               A    99948  Thu May 30 02:31:00 2002
-
-  CNS3GUI.DLL             A  1805824  Thu May 30 02:31:00 2002
-  CNS3GUI.DLL             A  1785344  Thu May 30 02:31:00 2002
-
-  CNS3G.DLL               A  1145088  Thu May 30 02:31:00 2002
-  CNS3G.DLL               A    15872  Thu May 30 02:31:00 2002
-
-

    -In my example were even more differences than shown here. Conclusion: -you must be very careful to select the correct driver files for each -driver version. Don't rely on the names alone. Don't interchange files -belonging to different driver versions. -

    Samba and Printer Ports

    -Windows NT/2000 print servers associate a port with each -printer. These normally take the form of LPT1:, -COM1:, FILE:, etc. Samba -must also support the concept of ports associated with a printer. By -default, only one printer port, named "Samba Printer Port", exists on -a system. Samba does not really need such a "port" in order to print; -it rather is a requirement of Windows clients. They insist on being -told about an available port when they request this info, otherwise -they throw an error message at you. So Samba fakes the port -information to keep the Windows clients happy. -

    -Note that Samba does not support the concept of "Printer Pooling" -internally either. Printer Pooling assigns a logical printer to -multiple ports as a form of load balancing or fail over. -

    -If you require that multiple ports be defined for some reason or -another (“My users and my Boss should not know that they are -working with Samba”), possesses a -enumports command which can be used to define -an external program that generates a listing of ports on a system. -

    Avoiding the most common Misconfigurations of the Client Driver

    -So - printing works, but there are still problems. Most jobs print -well, some don't print at all. Some jobs have problems with fonts, -which don't look good at all. Some jobs print fast, and some are -dead-slow. We can't cover it all; but we want to encourage you to read -the little paragraph about "Avoiding the wrong PostScript Driver -Settings" in the CUPS Printing part of this document. -

    The Imprints Toolset

    -The Imprints tool set provides a UNIX equivalent of the -Windows NT Add Printer Wizard. For complete information, please -refer to the Imprints web site -athttp://imprints.sourceforge.net/ -as well as the documentation included with the imprints source -distribution. This section will only provide a brief introduction -to the features of Imprints. -

    Attention! Maintainer required.  -Unfortunately, the Imprints toolset is no longer maintained. As of -December, 2000, the project is in need of a new maintainer. The most -important skill to have is decent perl coding and an interest in -MS-RPC based printing using Samba. If you wish to volunteer, please -coordinate your efforts on the samba-technical mailing list. The -toolset is still in usable form; but only for a series of older -printer models, where there are prepared packages to use. Packages for -more up to date print devices are needed if Imprints should have a -future.

    What is Imprints?

    -Imprints is a collection of tools for supporting these goals: -

    • Providing a central repository information regarding -Windows NT and 95/98 printer driver packages

    • Providing the tools necessary for creating the -Imprints printer driver packages.

    • Providing an installation client which will obtain -printer drivers from a central internet (or intranet) Imprints Server -repository and install them on remote Samba and Windows NT4 print -servers.

    Creating Printer Driver Packages

    -The process of creating printer driver packages is beyond the scope of -this document (refer to Imprints.txt also included with the Samba -distribution for more information). In short, an Imprints driver -package is a gzipped tarball containing the driver files, related INF -files, and a control file needed by the installation client. -

    The Imprints Server

    -The Imprints server is really a database server that may be queried -via standard HTTP mechanisms. Each printer entry in the database has -an associated URL for the actual downloading of the package. Each -package is digitally signed via GnuPG which can be used to verify that -package downloaded is actually the one referred in the Imprints -database. It is strongly recommended that this security check -not be disabled. -

    The Installation Client

    -More information regarding the Imprints installation client is -available in the Imprints-Client-HOWTO.ps file -included with the imprints source package. -

    -The Imprints installation client comes in two forms. -

    • a set of command line Perl scripts

    • a GTK+ based graphical interface to the command line Perl -scripts

    -The installation client (in both forms) provides a means of querying -the Imprints database server for a matching list of known printer -model names as well as a means to download and install the drivers on -remote Samba and Windows NT print servers. -

    -The basic installation process is in four steps and perl code is -wrapped around smbclient and rpcclient -

    • - foreach (supported architecture for a given driver) -

      1. rpcclient: Get the appropriate upload directory on the remote server

      2. smbclient: Upload the driver files

      3. rpcclient: Issues an AddPrinterDriver() MS-RPC

      -

    • rpcclient: Issue an AddPrinterEx() MS-RPC to actually create the printer

    -One of the problems encountered when implementing the Imprints tool -set was the name space issues between various supported client -architectures. For example, Windows NT includes a driver named "Apple -LaserWriter II NTX v51.8" and Windows 95 calls its version of this -driver "Apple LaserWriter II NTX" -

    -The problem is how to know what client drivers have been uploaded for -a printer. An astute reader will remember that the Windows NT Printer -Properties dialog only includes space for one printer driver name. A -quick look in the Windows NT 4.0 system registry at -

    - HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environment -

    -will reveal that Windows NT always uses the NT driver name. This is -ok as Windows NT always requires that at least the Windows NT version -of the printer driver is present. However, Samba does not have the -requirement internally. Therefore, how can you use the NT driver name -if is has not already been installed? -

    -The way of sidestepping this limitation is to require that all -Imprints printer driver packages include both the Intel Windows NT and -95/98 printer drivers and that NT driver is installed first. -

    Add Network Printers at Logon without User Interaction

    -The following MS Knowledge Base article may be of some help if you -need to handle Windows 2000 clients: How to Add Printers -with No User Interaction in Windows 2000. ( http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;189105 -). It also applies to Windows XP Professional clients. -

    -The ideas sketched out below are inspired by this article. It -describes a commandline method which can be applied to install -network and local printers and their drivers. This is most useful -if integrated in Logon Scripts. You can see what options are -available by typing in a command prompt ("DOS box") this: -

    rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /?

    -A window pops up which shows you all of the commandline switches -available. An extensive list of examples is also provided. This is -only for Win 2k/XP. It doesn't work on WinNT. WinNT has probably some -other tools in the respective Resource Kit. Here is a suggestion about -what a client logon script might contain, with a short explanation of -what the lines actually do (it works if 2k/XP Windows clients access -printers via Samba, but works for Windows-based print servers too): -

    -rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /dn /n "\\sambacupsserver\infotec2105-IPDS" /q
-rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /in /n "\\sambacupsserver\infotec2105-PS"
-rundll32 printui.dll,PrintUIEntry /y /n "\\sambacupsserver\infotec2105-PS"
-

    -Here is a list of the used commandline parameters: -

    /dn

    deletes a network printer

    /q

    quiet modus

    /n

    names a printer

    /in

    adds a network printer connection

    /y

    sets printer as default printer

    -I have tested this with a Samba 2.2.7a and a Samba-3alpha24 -installation and Windows XP Professional clients. Note that this -specific command set works with network print queues (installing -local print queues requires different parameters, but this is of no -interest here). -

    • Line 1 deletes a possibly existing previous network -printer infotec2105-IPDS (which had used native -Windows drivers with LPRng that were removed from the server which was -converted to CUPS). The /q at the end eliminates -"Confirm" or error dialog boxes popping up. They should not be -presented to the user logging on.

    • Line 2 adds the new printer -infotec2105-PS (which actually is same physical -device but is now run by the new CUPS printing system and associated -with the CUPS/Adobe PS drivers). The printer and its driver -must have been added to Samba prior to the user -logging in (e.g. by a procedure as discussed earlier in this chapter, -or by running cupsaddsmb). The driver is now -auto-downloaded to the client PC where the user is about to log -in.

    • Line 3 sets the default printer to this new network -printer (there might be several other printers installed with this -same method and some may be local as well -- so we decide for a -default printer). The default printer selection may of course be -different for different users.

    -Note that the second line only works if the printer -infotec2105-PS has an already working print queue -on "sambacupsserver", and if the printer drivers have successfully been -uploaded (via APW , -smbclient/rpcclient or -cupsaddsmb) into the -[print$] driver repository of Samba. Also, some -Samba versions prior to version 3.0 required a re-start of smbd after -the printer install and the driver upload, otherwise the script (or -any other client driver download) would fail. -

    -Since there no easy way to test for the existence of an installed -network printer from the logon script, the suggestion is: don't bother -checking and just allow the deinstallation/reinstallation to occur -every time a user logs in; it's really quick anyway (1 to 2 seconds). -

    -The additional benefits for this are: -

    • It puts in place any printer default setup changes -automatically at every user logon.

    • It allows for "roaming" users' login into the domain from -different workstations.

    -Since network printers are installed per user this much simplifies the -process of keeping the installation up-to-date. The extra few seconds -at logon time will not really be noticeable. Printers can be centrally -added, changed, and deleted at will on the server with no user -intervention required on the clients (you just need to keep the logon -scripts up to date). -

    The addprinter command

    -The addprinter command can be configured to be a -shell script or program executed by Samba. It is triggered by running -the APW from a client against the Samba print server. The APW asks the -user to fill in several fields (such as printer name, driver to be -used, comment, port monitor, etc.). These parameters are passed on to -Samba by the APW. If the addprinter command is designed in a way that -it can create a new printer (through writing correct printcap entries -on legacy systems, or execute the lpadmin command -on more modern systems) and create the associated share in -, then the APW will in effect really -create a new printer on Samba and the UNIX print subsystem! -

    Migration of "Classical" printing to Samba-3

    -The basic "NT-style" printer driver management has not changed -considerably in 3.0 over the 2.2.x releases (apart from many small -improvements). Here migration should be quite easy, especially if you -followed previous advice to stop using deprecated parameters in your -setup. For migrations from an existing 2.0.x setup, or if you -continued "Win9x-style" printing in your Samba 2.2 installations, it -is more of an effort. Please read the appropriate release notes and -the HOWTO Collection for 2.2. You can follow several paths. Here are -possible scenarios for migration: -

    • You need to study and apply the new Windows NT printer -and driver support. Previously used parameters "printer -driver file", " printer driver" and -"printer driver location" are no longer -supported.

    • If you want to take advantage of WinNT printer driver -support you also need to migrate the Win9x/ME drivers to the new -setup.

    • An existing printers.def file -(the one specified in the now removed parameter printer -driver file = ...) will work no longer with Samba-3.0. In -3.0, smbd attempts to locate a Win9x/ME driver files for the printer -in [print$] and additional settings in the TDB -and only there; if it fails it will not (as 2.2.x -used to do) drop down to using a printers.def -(and all associated parameters). The make_printerdef tool is removed -and there is no backwards compatibility for this.

    • You need to install a Windows 9x driver into the -[print$] share for a printer on your Samba -host. The driver files will be stored in the "WIN40/0" subdirectory of -[print$], and some other settings and info go -into the printing-related TDBs.

    • If you want to migrate an existing -printers.def file into the new setup, the current -only solution is to use the Windows NT APW to install the NT drivers -and the 9x drivers. This can be scripted using smbclient and -rpcclient. See the Imprints installation client at: -

      -http://imprints.sourceforge.net/ -

      -for an example. See also the discussion of rpcclient usage in the -"CUPS Printing" section.

    Publishing Printer Information in Active Directory or LDAP

    -We will publish an update to this section shortly. -

    Common Errors and Problems

    -Here are a few typical errors and problems people have -encountered. You can avoid them. Read on. -

    I give my root password but I don't get access

    -Don't confuse the root password which is valid for the Unix system -(and in most cases stored in the form of a one-way hash in a file -named /etc/shadow) with the password used to -authenticate against Samba!. Samba doesn't know the UNIX password; for -root to access Samba resources via Samba-type access, a Samba account -for root must be created first. This is often done with the -smbpasswd command. -

    My printjobs get spooled into the spooling directory, but then get lost

    -Don't use the existing Unix print system spool directory for the Samba -spool directory. It may seem convenient and a saving of space, but it -only leads to problems. The two must be separate. -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 17. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba Home Chapter 19. CUPS Printing Support in Samba 3.0
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/problems.html b/docs/htmldocs/problems.html deleted file mode 100644 index 62e1a3615a..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/problems.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,130 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 34. Analysing and solving samba problems
    Chapter 34. Analysing and solving samba problems
    Prev Part V. Troubleshooting Next

    Chapter 34. Analysing and solving samba problems

    Gerald (Jerry) Carter

    Samba Team

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    The Samba Team

    David Bannon

    Samba Team

    8 Apr 2003

    Table of Contents

    Diagnostics tools
    Installing 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation or a Windows 9x box
    Useful URLs
    Getting help from the mailing lists
    How to get off the mailing lists

    -There are many sources of information available in the form -of mailing lists, RFC's and documentation. The docs that come -with the samba distribution contain very good explanations of -general SMB topics such as browsing.

    Diagnostics tools

    -One of the best diagnostic tools for debugging problems is Samba itself. -You can use the -d option for both smbd and nmbd to specify what -debug level at which to run. See the man pages on smbd, nmbd and -smb.conf for more information on debugging options. The debug -level can range from 1 (the default) to 10 (100 for debugging passwords). -

    -Another helpful method of debugging is to compile samba using the -gcc -g flag. This will include debug -information in the binaries and allow you to attach gdb to the -running smbd / nmbd process. In order to attach gdb to an smbd -process for an NT workstation, first get the workstation to make the -connection. Pressing ctrl-alt-delete and going down to the domain box -is sufficient (at least, on the first time you join the domain) to -generate a 'LsaEnumTrustedDomains'. Thereafter, the workstation -maintains an open connection, and therefore there will be an smbd -process running (assuming that you haven't set a really short smbd -idle timeout) So, in between pressing ctrl alt delete, and actually -typing in your password, you can attach gdb and continue. -

    -Some useful samba commands worth investigating: -

    -	$ testparm | more
-	$ smbclient -L //{netbios name of server}
-

    -An SMB enabled version of tcpdump is available from -http://www.tcpdup.org/. -Ethereal, another good packet sniffer for Unix and Win32 -hosts, can be downloaded from http://www.ethereal.com. -

    -For tracing things on the Microsoft Windows NT, Network Monitor -(aka. netmon) is available on the Microsoft Developer Network CD's, -the Windows NT Server install CD and the SMS CD's. The version of -netmon that ships with SMS allows for dumping packets between any two -computers (i.e. placing the network interface in promiscuous mode). -The version on the NT Server install CD will only allow monitoring -of network traffic directed to the local NT box and broadcasts on the -local subnet. Be aware that Ethereal can read and write netmon -formatted files. -

    Installing 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation or a Windows 9x box

    -Installing netmon on an NT workstation requires a couple -of steps. The following are for installing Netmon V4.00.349, which comes -with Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0, on Microsoft Windows NT -Workstation 4.0. The process should be similar for other versions of -Windows NT / Netmon. You will need both the Microsoft Windows -NT Server 4.0 Install CD and the Workstation 4.0 Install CD. -

    -Initially you will need to install Network Monitor Tools and Agent -on the NT Server. To do this -

    • Goto Start - Settings - Control Panel - - Network - Services - Add

    • Select the Network Monitor Tools and Agent and - click on OK.

    • Click OK on the Network Control Panel. -

    • Insert the Windows NT Server 4.0 install CD - when prompted.

    -At this point the Netmon files should exist in -%SYSTEMROOT%\System32\netmon\*.*. -Two subdirectories exist as well, parsers\ -which contains the necessary DLL's for parsing the netmon packet -dump, and captures\. -

    -In order to install the Netmon tools on an NT Workstation, you will -first need to install the 'Network Monitor Agent' from the Workstation -install CD. -

    • Goto Start - Settings - Control Panel - - Network - Services - Add

    • Select the Network Monitor Agent and click - on OK.

    • Click OK on the Network Control Panel. -

    • Insert the Windows NT Workstation 4.0 install - CD when prompted.

    -Now copy the files from the NT Server in %SYSTEMROOT%\System32\netmon\*.* -to %SYSTEMROOT%\System32\netmon\*.* on the Workstation and set -permissions as you deem appropriate for your site. You will need -administrative rights on the NT box to run netmon. -

    -To install Netmon on a Windows 9x box install the network monitor agent -from the Windows 9x CD (\admin\nettools\netmon). There is a readme -file located with the netmon driver files on the CD if you need -information on how to do this. Copy the files from a working -Netmon installation. -

    Useful URLs

    Getting help from the mailing lists

    -There are a number of Samba related mailing lists. Go to http://samba.org, click on your nearest mirror -and then click on Support and then click on -Samba related mailing lists. -

    -For questions relating to Samba TNG go to -http://www.samba-tng.org/ -It has been requested that you don't post questions about Samba-TNG to the -main stream Samba lists.

    -If you post a message to one of the lists please observe the following guide lines : -

    • Always remember that the developers are volunteers, they are -not paid and they never guarantee to produce a particular feature at -a particular time. Any time lines are 'best guess' and nothing more. -

    • Always mention what version of samba you are using and what -operating system its running under. You should probably list the -relevant sections of your smb.conf file, at least the options -in [global] that affect PDC support.

    • In addition to the version, if you obtained Samba via -CVS mention the date when you last checked it out.

    • Try and make your question clear and brief, lots of long, -convoluted questions get deleted before they are completely read ! -Don't post html encoded messages (if you can select colour or font -size its html).

    • If you run one of those nifty 'I'm on holidays' things when -you are away, make sure its configured to not answer mailing lists. -

    • Don't cross post. Work out which is the best list to post to -and see what happens, i.e. don't post to both samba-ntdom and samba-technical. -Many people active on the lists subscribe to more -than one list and get annoyed to see the same message two or more times. -Often someone will see a message and thinking it would be better dealt -with on another, will forward it on for you.

    • You might include partial -log files written at a debug level set to as much as 20. -Please don't send the entire log but enough to give the context of the -error messages.

    • (Possibly) If you have a complete netmon trace ( from the opening of -the pipe to the error ) you can send the *.CAP file as well.

    • Please think carefully before attaching a document to an email. -Consider pasting the relevant parts into the body of the message. The samba -mailing lists go to a huge number of people, do they all need a copy of your -smb.conf in their attach directory?

    How to get off the mailing lists

    To have your name removed from a samba mailing list, go to the -same place you went to to get on it. Go to http://lists.samba.org, -click on your nearest mirror and then click on Support and -then click on Samba related mailing lists. Or perhaps see -here -

    -Please don't post messages to the list asking to be removed, you will just -be referred to the above address (unless that process failed in some way...) -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 33. The Samba checklist Home Chapter 35. Reporting Bugs
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html index 47c4d914a5..e9f1afb0ed 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html @@ -1,108 +1,392 @@ -rpcclient

    Name

    rpcclient — tool for executing client side - MS-RPC functions

    Synopsis

    rpcclient [-A authfile] [-c <command string>] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logfile] [-N] [-s <smb config file>] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N] [-I destinationIP] {server}

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.

    rpcclient is a utility initially developed + + + %globalentities; + ]> + + + + rpcclient + 1 + + + + + rpcclient + tool for executing client side + MS-RPC functions + + + + + rpcclient + -A authfile + -c <command string> + -d debuglevel + -h + -l logfile + -N + -s <smb config file> + -U username[%password] + -W workgroup + -N + -I destinationIP + server + + + + + DESCRIPTION + + This tool is part of the Samba + 7 suite. + + rpcclient is a utility initially developed to test MS-RPC functionality in Samba itself. It has undergone several stages of development and stability. Many system administrators have now written scripts around it to manage Windows NT clients from - their UNIX workstation.

    OPTIONS

    server

    NetBIOS name of Server to which to connect. + their UNIX workstation. + + + + + OPTIONS + + + + server + NetBIOS name of Server to which to connect. The server can be any SMB/CIFS server. The name is - resolved using the - name resolve order line from smb.conf(5).

    -c|--command='command string'

    execute semicolon separated commands (listed - below))

    -I IP-address

    IP address is the address of the server to connect to. - It should be specified in standard "a.b.c.d" notation.

    Normally the client would attempt to locate a named + resolved using the name resolve ordername resolve order line from smb.conf + 5. + + + + + -c|--command='command string' + execute semicolon separated commands (listed + below)) + + + + + -I IP-address + IP address is the address of the server to connect to. + It should be specified in standard "a.b.c.d" notation. + + Normally the client would attempt to locate a named SMB/CIFS server by looking it up via the NetBIOS name resolution - mechanism described above in the name resolve order + mechanism described above in the name resolve order parameter above. Using this parameter will force the client to assume that the server is on the machine with the specified IP address and the NetBIOS name component of the resource being - connected to will be ignored.

    There is no default for this parameter. If not supplied, + connected to will be ignored. + + There is no default for this parameter. If not supplied, it will be determined automatically by the client as described - above.

    -V

    Prints the version number for -smbd.

    -s <configuration file>

    The file specified contains the + above. + + + + + +-V +Prints the version number for +smbd. + + + +-s <configuration file> +The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at -compile time.

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer +compile time. + + + +-d|--debug=debuglevel + +debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is -not specified is zero.

    The higher this value, the more detail will be +not specified is zero. + +The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day to day running - it generates a small amount of -information about operations carried out.

    Levels above 1 will generate considerable +information about operations carried out. + +Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log -data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension -".client" will be appended. The log file is +data, most of which is extremely cryptic. + +Note that specifying this parameter here will +override the log levellog level parameter +in the smb.conf file. + + + + +-l|--logfile=logbasename +File name for log/debug files. The extension +".client" will be appended. The log file is never removed by the client. -

    -N

    If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal + + + + + + +-N +If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal password prompt from the client to the user. This is useful when -accessing a service that does not require a password.

    Unless a password is specified on the command line or +accessing a service that does not require a password. + +Unless a password is specified on the command line or this parameter is specified, the client will request a -password.

    -k

    +password. + + + +-k + Try to authenticate with kerberos. Only useful in an Active Directory environment. -

    -A|--authfile=filename

    This option allows + + + + + +-A|--authfile=filename +This option allows you to specify a file from which to read the username and password used in the connection. The format of the file is -

    +
+
+
 username = <value>
 password = <value>
 domain   = <value>
-

    Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict -access from unwanted users.

    -U|--user=username[%password]

    Sets the SMB username or username and password.

    If %password is not specified, the user will be prompted. The -client will first check the USER environment variable, then the -LOGNAME variable and if either exists, the + + +Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict +access from unwanted users. + + + +-U|--user=username[%password] +Sets the SMB username or username and password. + +If %password is not specified, the user will be prompted. The +client will first check the USER environment variable, then the +LOGNAME variable and if either exists, the string is uppercased. If these environmental variables are not -found, the username GUEST is used.

    A third option is to use a credentials file which +found, the username GUEST is used. + +A third option is to use a credentials file which contains the plaintext of the username and password. This option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin does not wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment variables. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users. See the --A for more details.

    Be cautious about including passwords in scripts. Also, on +-A for more details. + +Be cautious about including passwords in scripts. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen -via the ps command. To be safe always allow -rpcclient to prompt for a password and type -it in directly.

    -n <primary NetBIOS name>

    This option allows you to override +via the ps command. To be safe always allow +rpcclient to prompt for a password and type +it in directly. + + + + + + +-n <primary NetBIOS name> +This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical -to setting the NetBIOS -name parameter in the smb.conf(5) file. However, a command +to setting the netbios namenetbios name parameter in the smb.conf file. +However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in -smb.conf(5).

    -i <scope>

    This specifies a NetBIOS scope that -nmblookup will use to communicate with when +smb.conf. + + + +-i <scope> +This specifies a NetBIOS scope that +nmblookup will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes are -very rarely used, only set this parameter +very rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all the -NetBIOS systems you communicate with.

    -W|--workgroup=domain

    Set the SMB domain of the username. This +NetBIOS systems you communicate with. + + + +-W|--workgroup=domain +Set the SMB domain of the username. This overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in smb.conf. If the domain specified is the same as the servers NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the servers local -SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM).

    -O socket options

    TCP socket options to set on the client +SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM). + + + +-O socket options +TCP socket options to set on the client socket. See the socket options parameter in -the smb.conf(5) manual page for the list of valid -options.

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    COMMANDS

    LSARPC

    lsaquery

    Query info policy

    lookupsids

    Resolve a list +the smb.conf manual page for the list of valid +options. + + + + + +-h|--help +Print a summary of command line options. + + + + + + + + COMMANDS + + + LSARPC + + + lsaqueryQuery info policy + + lookupsidsResolve a list of SIDs to usernames. -

    lookupnames

    Resolve a list + + + lookupnamesResolve a list of usernames to SIDs. -

    enumtrusts

    Enumerate trusted domains

    enumprivs

    Enumerate privileges

    getdispname

    Get the privilege name

    lsaenumsid

    Enumerate the LSA SIDS

    lsaenumprivsaccount

    Enumerate the privileges of an SID

    lsaenumacctrights

    Enumerate the rights of an SID

    lsaenumacctwithright

    Enumerate accounts with a right

    lsaaddacctrights

    Add rights to an account

    lsaremoveacctrights

    Remove rights from an account

    lsalookupprivvalue

    Get a privilege value given its name

    lsaquerysecobj

    Query LSA security object

    LSARPC-DS

    dsroledominfo

    Get Primary Domain Information

    DFS

    dfsexist

    Query DFS support

    dfsadd

    Add a DFS share

    dfsremove

    Remove a DFS share

    dfsgetinfo

    Query DFS share info

    dfsenum

    Enumerate dfs shares

    REG

    shutdown

    Remote Shutdown

    abortshutdown

    Abort Shutdown

    SRVSVC

    srvinfo

    Server query info

    netshareenum

    Enumerate shares

    netfileenum

    Enumerate open files

    netremotetod

    Fetch remote time of day

    SAMR

    queryuser

    Query user info

    querygroup

    Query group info

    queryusergroups

    Query user groups

    querygroupmem

    Query group membership

    queryaliasmem

    Query alias membership

    querydispinfo

    Query display info

    querydominfo

    Query domain info

    enumdomusers

    Enumerate domain users

    enumdomgroups

    Enumerate domain groups

    enumalsgroups

    Enumerate alias groups

    createdomuser

    Create domain user

    samlookupnames

    Look up names

    samlookuprids

    Look up names

    deletedomuser

    Delete domain user

    samquerysecobj

    Query SAMR security object

    getdompwinfo

    Retrieve domain password info

    lookupdomain

    Look up domain

    SPOOLSS

    adddriver <arch> <config>

    + + + enumtrustsEnumerate trusted domains + + enumprivsEnumerate privileges + + getdispnameGet the privilege name + + lsaenumsidEnumerate the LSA SIDS + + lsaenumprivsaccountEnumerate the privileges of an SID + + lsaenumacctrightsEnumerate the rights of an SID + + lsaenumacctwithrightEnumerate accounts with a right + + lsaaddacctrightsAdd rights to an account + + lsaremoveacctrightsRemove rights from an account + + lsalookupprivvalueGet a privilege value given its name + + lsaquerysecobjQuery LSA security object + + + + + + LSARPC-DS + + + dsroledominfoGet Primary Domain Information + + + + + DFS + + dfsexistQuery DFS support + dfsaddAdd a DFS share + dfsremoveRemove a DFS share + dfsgetinfoQuery DFS share info + dfsenumEnumerate dfs shares + + + + + + REG + + shutdownRemote Shutdown + abortshutdownAbort Shutdown + + + + + + SRVSVC + + + srvinfoServer query info + + netshareenumEnumerate shares + + netfileenumEnumerate open files + + netremotetodFetch remote time of day + + + + + + + SAMR + + + queryuserQuery user info + querygroupQuery group info + queryusergroupsQuery user groups + querygroupmemQuery group membership + queryaliasmemQuery alias membership + querydispinfoQuery display info + querydominfoQuery domain info + enumdomusersEnumerate domain users + enumdomgroupsEnumerate domain groups + enumalsgroupsEnumerate alias groups + createdomuserCreate domain user + samlookupnamesLook up names + samlookupridsLook up names + deletedomuserDelete domain user + samquerysecobjQuery SAMR security object + getdompwinfoRetrieve domain password info + lookupdomainLook up domain + + + + + + SPOOLSS + + + adddriver <arch> <config> + Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver information on the server. Note that the driver files should already exist in the directory returned by - getdriverdir. Possible values for - arch are the same as those for - the getdriverdir command. - The config parameter is defined as - follows: 

    +		getdriverdir.  Possible values for 
+		arch are the same as those for 
+		the getdriverdir command.
+		The config parameter is defined as 
+		follows: 
+		
+
 Long Printer Name:\
 Driver File Name:\
 Data File Name:\
@@ -111,88 +395,239 @@ Help File Name:\
 Language Monitor Name:\
 Default Data Type:\
 Comma Separated list of Files
-

    Any empty fields should be enter as the string "NULL".

    Samba does not need to support the concept of Print Monitors + + + Any empty fields should be enter as the string "NULL". + + Samba does not need to support the concept of Print Monitors since these only apply to local printers whose driver can make use of a bi-directional link for communication. This field should be "NULL". On a remote NT print server, the Print Monitor for a driver must already be installed prior to adding the driver or - else the RPC will fail.

    addprinter <printername> - <sharename> <drivername> <port>

    + else the RPC will fail. + + addprinter <printername> + <sharename> <drivername> <port> + Add a printer on the remote server. This printer will be automatically shared. Be aware that the printer driver - must already be installed on the server (see adddriver) - and the portmust be a valid port name (see - enumports.

    deldriver

    Delete the + must already be installed on the server (see adddriver) + and the portmust be a valid port name (see + enumports. + + + + deldriverDelete the specified printer driver for all architectures. This does not delete the actual driver files from the server, only the entry from the server's list of drivers. -

    enumdata

    Enumerate all + + + enumdataEnumerate all printer setting data stored on the server. On Windows NT clients, these values are stored in the registry, while Samba servers store them in the printers TDB. This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK GetPrinterData() function (* This - command is currently unimplemented).

    enumdataex

    Enumerate printer data for a key

    enumjobs <printer>

    List the jobs and status of a given printer. + command is currently unimplemented). + + enumdataexEnumerate printer data for a key + + enumjobs <printer> + List the jobs and status of a given printer. This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK EnumJobs() - function

    enumkey

    Enumerate - printer keys

    enumports [level]

    + function + + enumkeyEnumerate + printer keys + + enumports [level] + Executes an EnumPorts() call using the specified info level. Currently only info levels 1 and 2 are supported. -

    enumdrivers [level]

    + + + + + enumdrivers [level] + Execute an EnumPrinterDrivers() call. This lists the various installed printer drivers for all architectures. Refer to the MS Platform SDK documentation for more details of the various flags and calling - options. Currently supported info levels are 1, 2, and 3.

    enumprinters [level]

    Execute an EnumPrinters() call. This lists the various installed + options. Currently supported info levels are 1, 2, and 3. + + + + enumprinters [level] + Execute an EnumPrinters() call. This lists the various installed and share printers. Refer to the MS Platform SDK documentation for more details of the various flags and calling options. Currently - supported info levels are 1, 2 and 5.

    getdata <printername> <valuename;>

    Retrieve the data for a given printer setting. See - the enumdata command for more information. + supported info levels are 1, 2 and 5. + + + + + getdata <printername> <valuename;> + Retrieve the data for a given printer setting. See + the enumdata command for more information. This command corresponds to the GetPrinterData() MS Platform - SDK function.

    getdataex

    Get + SDK function. + + getdataexGet printer driver data with - keyname

    getdriver <printername>

    + keyname + + + getdriver <printername> + Retrieve the printer driver information (such as driver file, config file, dependent files, etc...) for the given printer. This command corresponds to the GetPrinterDriver() MS Platform SDK function. Currently info level 1, 2, and 3 are supported. -

    getdriverdir <arch>

    + + + + getdriverdir <arch> + Execute a GetPrinterDriverDirectory() RPC to retrieve the SMB share name and subdirectory for storing printer driver files for a given architecture. Possible - values for arch are "Windows 4.0" + values for arch are "Windows 4.0" (for Windows 95/98), "Windows NT x86", "Windows NT PowerPC", "Windows - Alpha_AXP", and "Windows NT R4000".

    getprinter <printername>

    Retrieve the current printer information. This command + Alpha_AXP", and "Windows NT R4000". + + + + getprinter <printername> + Retrieve the current printer information. This command corresponds to the GetPrinter() MS Platform SDK function. -

    getprintprocdir

    Get + + + getprintprocdirGet print processor - directory

    openprinter <printername>

    Execute an OpenPrinterEx() and ClosePrinter() RPC - against a given printer.

    setdriver <printername> - <drivername>

    Execute a SetPrinter() command to update the printer driver + directory + + openprinter <printername> + Execute an OpenPrinterEx() and ClosePrinter() RPC + against a given printer. + + setdriver <printername> + <drivername> + Execute a SetPrinter() command to update the printer driver associated with an installed printer. The printer driver must - already be correctly installed on the print server.

    See also the enumprinters and - enumdrivers commands for obtaining a list of - of installed printers and drivers.

    addform

    Add form

    setform

    Set form

    getform

    Get form

    deleteform

    Delete form

    enumforms

    Enumerate form

    setprinter

    Set printer comment

    setprinterdata

    Set REG_SZ printer data

    rffpcnex

    Rffpcnex test

    NETLOGON

    logonctrl2

    Logon Control 2

    logonctrl

    Logon Control

    samsync

    Sam Synchronisation

    samdeltas

    Query Sam Deltas

    samlogon

    Sam Logon

    GENERAL COMMANDS

    debuglevel

    Set the current - debug level used to log information.

    help (?)

    Print a listing of all + already be correctly installed on the print server. + + See also the enumprinters and + enumdrivers commands for obtaining a list of + of installed printers and drivers. + + addformAdd form + setformSet form + getformGet form + deleteformDelete form + enumformsEnumerate form + setprinterSet printer comment + setprinterdataSet REG_SZ printer data + rffpcnexRffpcnex test + + + + + + + + NETLOGON + + + + logonctrl2 + Logon Control 2 + + + logonctrl + Logon Control + + + samsync + Sam Synchronisation + + + samdeltas + Query Sam Deltas + + + samlogon + Sam Logon + + + + + + + GENERAL COMMANDS + + + debuglevelSet the current + debug level used to log information. + + help (?)Print a listing of all known commands or extended help on a particular command. -

    quit (exit)

    Exit rpcclient - .

    BUGS

    rpcclient is designed as a developer testing tool + + + quit (exit)Exit rpcclient + . + + + + + + + BUGS + + rpcclient is designed as a developer testing tool and may not be robust in certain areas (such as command line parsing). It has been known to generate a core dump upon failures when invalid - parameters where passed to the interpreter.

    From Luke Leighton's original rpcclient man page:

    WARNING! The MSRPC over SMB code has + parameters where passed to the interpreter. + + From Luke Leighton's original rpcclient man page: + + WARNING! The MSRPC over SMB code has been developed from examining Network traces. No documentation is available from the original creators (Microsoft) on how MSRPC over SMB works, or how the individual MSRPC services work. Microsoft's implementation of these services has been demonstrated (and reported) - to be... a bit flaky in places.

    The development of Samba's implementation is also a bit rough, + to be... a bit flaky in places. + + The development of Samba's implementation is also a bit rough, and as more of the services are understood, it can even result in - versions of smbd(8) and rpcclient(1) that are incompatible for some commands or services. Additionally, + versions of smbd + 8 and rpcclient + 1 that are incompatible for some commands or services. Additionally, the developers are sending reports to Microsoft, and problems found or reported to Microsoft are fixed in Service Packs, which may - result in incompatibilities.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba - suite.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + result in incompatibilities. + + + + + VERSION + + This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba + suite. + + + + AUTHOR + + The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original rpcclient man page was written by Matthew + to the way the Linux kernel is developed. + + The original rpcclient man page was written by Matthew Geddes, Luke Kenneth Casson Leighton, and rewritten by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was - done by Alexander Bokovoy.

    + done by Alexander Bokovoy. + + + diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/samba-bdc.html b/docs/htmldocs/samba-bdc.html deleted file mode 100644 index b317fe124b..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/samba-bdc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,260 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 6. Backup Domain Control
    Chapter 6. Backup Domain Control
    Prev Part II. Server Configuration Basics Next

    Chapter 6. Backup Domain Control

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Volker Lendecke

    Samba Team

    Table of Contents

    Features And Benefits
    Essential Background Information
    MS Windows NT4 Style Domain Control
    Active Directory Domain Control
    What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?
    How does a Workstation find its domain controller?
    Backup Domain Controller Configuration
    Example Configuration
    Common Errors
    Machine Accounts keep expiring, what can I do?
    Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT4 PDC?
    How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?
    Can I do this all with LDAP?

    -Before you continue reading in this section, please make sure that you are comfortable -with configuring a Samba Domain Controller as described in the -Domain Control chapter. -

    Features And Benefits

    -This is one of the most difficult chapters to summarise. It does not matter what we say here -for someone will still draw conclusions and / or approach the Samba-Team with expectations -that are either not yet capable of being delivered, or that can be achieved far more -effectively using a totally different approach. Since this HOWTO is already so large and -extensive, we have taken the decision to provide sufficient (but not comprehensive) -information regarding Backup Domain Control. In the event that you should have a persistent -concern that is not addressed in this HOWTO document then please email -John H Terpstra clearly setting out your requirements -and / or question and we will do our best to provide a solution. -

    -Samba-3 is capable of acting as a Backup Domain Controller to another Samba Primary Domain -Controller. A Samba-3 PDC can operate with an LDAP Account backend. The Samba-3 BDC can -operate with a slave LDAP server for the Account backend. This effectively gives samba a high -degree of scalability. This is a very sweet (nice) solution for large organisations. -

    -While it is possible to run a Samba-3 BDC with non-LDAP backend, the administrator will -need to figure out precisely what is the best way to replicate (copy / distribute) the -user and machine Accounts backend. -

    -The use of a non-LDAP backend SAM database is particularly problematic because Domain member -servers and workstations periodically change the machine trust account password. The new -password is then stored only locally. This means that in the absence of a centrally stored -accounts database (such as that provided with an LDAP based solution) if Samba-3 is running -as a BDC, the BDC instance of the Domain member trust account password will not reach the -PDC (master) copy of the SAM. If the PDC SAM is then replicated to BDCs this results in -overwriting of the SAM that contains the updated (changed) trust account password with resulting -breakage of the domain trust. -

    -Considering the number of comments and questions raised concerning how to configure a BDC -lets consider each possible option and look at the pro's and con's for each theoretical solution: -

    Backup Domain Backend Account Distribution Options

    • - Solution: Passwd Backend is LDAP based, BDCs use a slave LDAP server -

      - Arguments For: This is a neat and manageable solution. The LDAP based SAM (ldapsam) - is constantly kept up to date. -

      - Arguments Against: Complexity -

    • - Passdb Backend is tdbsam based, BDCs use cron based "net rpc vampire" to - suck down the Accounts database from the PDC -

      - Arguments For: It would be a nice solution -

      - Arguments Against: It does not work because Samba-3 does not support the required - protocols. This may become a later feature but is not available today. -

    • - Make use of rsync to replicate (pull down) copies of the essential account files -

      - Arguments For: It is a simple solution, easy to set up as a scheduled job -

      - Arguments Against: This will over-write the locally changed machine trust account - passwords. This is a broken and flawed solution. Do NOT do this. -

    • - Operate with an entirely local accounts database (not recommended) -

      - Arguments For: Simple, easy to maintain -

      - Arguments Against: All machine trust accounts and user accounts will be locally - maintained. Domain users will NOT be able to roam from office to office. This is - a broken and flawed solution. Do NOT do this. -

    Essential Background Information

    -A Domain Controller is a machine that is able to answer logon requests from network -workstations. Microsoft LanManager and IBM LanServer were two early products that -provided this capability. The technology has become known as the LanMan Netlogon service. -

    -When MS Windows NT3.10 was first released, it supported an new style of Domain Control -and with it a new form of the network logon service that has extended functionality. -This service became known as the NT NetLogon Service. The nature of this service has -changed with the evolution of MS Windows NT and today provides a very complex array of -services that are implemented over a complex spectrum of technologies. -

    MS Windows NT4 Style Domain Control

    -Whenever a user logs into a Windows NT4 / 200x / XP Professional Workstation, -the workstation connects to a Domain Controller (authentication server) to validate -the username and password that the user entered are valid. If the information entered -does not validate against the account information that has been stored in the Domain -Control database (the SAM, or Security Account Manager database) then a set of error -codes is returned to the workstation that has made the authentication request. -

    -When the username / password pair has been validated, the Domain Controller -(authentication server) will respond with full enumeration of the account information -that has been stored regarding that user in the User and Machine Accounts database -for that Domain. This information contains a complete network access profile for -the user but excludes any information that is particular to the user's desktop profile, -or for that matter it excludes all desktop profiles for groups that the user may -belong to. It does include password time limits, password uniqueness controls, -network access time limits, account validity information, machine names from which the -user may access the network, and much more. All this information was stored in the SAM -in all versions of MS Windows NT (3.10, 3.50, 3.51, 4.0). -

    -The account information (user and machine) on Domain Controllers is stored in two files, -one containing the Security information and the other the SAM. These are stored in files -by the same name in the C:\WinNT\System32\config directory. These -are the files that are involved in replication of the SAM database where Backup Domain -Controllers are present on the network. -

    -There are two situations in which it is desirable to install Backup Domain Controllers: -

    • - On the local network that the Primary Domain Controller is on, if there are many - workstations and/or where the PDC is generally very busy. In this case the BDCs - will pick up network logon requests and help to add robustness to network services. -

    • - At each remote site, to reduce wide area network traffic and to add stability to - remote network operations. The design of the network, the strategic placement of - Backup Domain Controllers, together with an implementation that localises as much - of network to client interchange as possible will help to minimise wide area network - bandwidth needs (and thus costs). -

    -The PDC contains the master copy of the SAM. In the event that an administrator makes a -change to the user account database while physically present on the local network that -has the PDC, the change will likely be made directly to the PDC instance of the master -copy of the SAM. In the event that this update may be performed in a branch office the -change will likely be stored in a delta file on the local BDC. The BDC will then send -a trigger to the PDC to commence the process of SAM synchronisation. The PDC will then -request the delta from the BDC and apply it to the master SAM. The PDC will then contact -all the BDCs in the Domain and trigger them to obtain the update and then apply that to -their own copy of the SAM. -

    -Thus the BDC is said to hold a read-only of the SAM from which -it is able to process network logon requests and to authenticate users. The BDC can -continue to provide this service, particularly while, for example, the wide area -network link to the PDC is down. Thus a BDC plays a very important role in both -maintenance of Domain security as well as in network integrity. -

    -In the event that the PDC should need to be taken out of service, or if it dies, then -one of the BDCs can be promoted to a PDC. If this happens while the original PDC is on -line then it is automatically demoted to a BDC. This is an important aspect of Domain -Controller management. The tool that is used to affect a promotion or a demotion is the -Server Manager for Domains. -

    Example PDC Configuration

    -Since version 2.2 Samba officially supports domain logons for all current Windows Clients, -including Windows NT4, 2003 and XP Professional. For samba to be enabled as a PDC some -parameters in the [global]-section of the smb.conf have to be set: -

    -	workgroup = SAMBA
-	domain master = yes
-	domain logons = yes
-

    -Several other things like a [homes] and a [netlogon] share also need to be set along with -settings for the profile path, the users home drive, etc.. This will not be covered in this -chapter, for more information please refer to the chapter on Domain Control. -

    Active Directory Domain Control

    -As of the release of MS Windows 2000 and Active Directory, this information is now stored -in a directory that can be replicated and for which partial or full administrative control -can be delegated. Samba-3 is NOT able to be a Domain Controller within an Active Directory -tree, and it can not be an Active Directory server. This means that Samba-3 also can NOT -act as a Backup Domain Controller to an Active Directory Domain Controller. -

    What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?

    -Every machine that is a Domain Controller for the domain SAMBA has to register the NetBIOS -group name SAMBA<#1c> with the WINS server and/or by broadcast on the local network. -The PDC also registers the unique NetBIOS name SAMBA<#1b> with the WINS server. -The name type <#1b> name is normally reserved for the Domain Master Browser, a role -that has nothing to do with anything related to authentication, but the Microsoft Domain -implementation requires the domain master browser to be on the same machine as the PDC. -

    How does a Workstation find its domain controller?

    -An MS Windows NT4 / 200x / XP Professional workstation in the domain SAMBA that wants a -local user to be authenticated has to find the domain controller for SAMBA. It does this -by doing a NetBIOS name query for the group name SAMBA<#1c>. It assumes that each -of the machines it gets back from the queries is a domain controller and can answer logon -requests. To not open security holes both the workstation and the selected domain controller -authenticate each other. After that the workstation sends the user's credentials (name and -password) to the local Domain Controller, for validation. -

    Backup Domain Controller Configuration

    -Several things have to be done: -

    • - The domain SID has to be the same on the PDC and the BDC. This used to - be stored in the file private/MACHINE.SID. This file is not created - anymore since Samba 2.2.5 or even earlier. Nowadays the domain SID is - stored in the file private/secrets.tdb. Simply copying the secrets.tdb - from the PDC to the BDC does not work, as the BDC would - generate a new SID for itself and override the domain SID with this - new BDC SID.

      - To retrieve the domain SID from the PDC or an existing BDC and store it in the - secrets.tdb, execute: - 

      -	root# net rpc getsid
-

    • - The Unix user database has to be synchronized from the PDC to the - BDC. This means that both the /etc/passwd and /etc/group have to be - replicated from the PDC to the BDC. This can be done manually - whenever changes are made, or the PDC is set up as a NIS master - server and the BDC as a NIS slave server. To set up the BDC as a - mere NIS client would not be enough, as the BDC would not be able to - access its user database in case of a PDC failure. NIS is by no means - the only method to synchronize passwords. An LDAP solution would work - as well. -

    • - The Samba password database has to be replicated from the PDC to the BDC. - As said above, though possible to synchronise the smbpasswd - file with rsync and ssh, this method is broken and flawed, and is - therefore not recommended. A better solution is to set up slave LDAP - servers for each BDC and a master LDAP server for the PDC. -

    • - Any netlogon share has to be replicated from the PDC to the - BDC. This can be done manually whenever login scripts are changed, - or it can be done automatically together with the smbpasswd - synchronization. -

    Example Configuration

    -Finally, the BDC has to be found by the workstations. This can be done by setting: -

    -	workgroup = SAMBA
-	domain master = no
-	domain logons = yes
-

    -in the [global]-section of the smb.conf of the BDC. This makes the BDC -only register the name SAMBA<#1c> with the WINS server. This is no -problem as the name SAMBA<#1c> is a NetBIOS group name that is meant to -be registered by more than one machine. The parameter 'domain master = -no' forces the BDC not to register SAMBA<#1b> which as a unique NetBIOS -name is reserved for the Primary Domain Controller. -

    Common Errors

    -As this is a rather new area for Samba there are not many examples that we may refer to. Keep -watching for updates to this section. -

    Machine Accounts keep expiring, what can I do?

    -This problem will occur when occur when the passdb (SAM) files are copied from a central -server but the local Backup Domain Controllers. Local machine trust account password updates -are not copied back to the central server. The newer machine account password is then over -written when the SAM is copied from the PDC. The result is that the Domain member machine -on start up will find that it's passwords does not match the one now in the database and -since the startup security check will now fail, this machine will not allow logon attempts -to proceed and the account expiry error will be reported. -

    -The solution: use a more robust passdb backend, such as the ldapsam backend, setting up -an slave LDAP server for each BDC, and a master LDAP server for the PDC. -

    Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT4 PDC?

    -With version 2.2, no. The native NT4 SAM replication protocols have not yet been fully -implemented. The Samba Team is working on understanding and implementing the protocols, -but this work has not been finished for version 2.2. -

    -With version 3.0, the work on both the replication protocols and a suitable storage -mechanism has progressed, and some form of NT4 BDC support is expected soon. -

    -Can I get the benefits of a BDC with Samba? Yes. The main reason for implementing a -BDC is availability. If the PDC is a Samba machine, a second Samba machine can be set up to -service logon requests whenever the PDC is down. -

    How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?

    -Replication of the smbpasswd file is sensitive. It has to be done whenever changes -to the SAM are made. Every user's password change is done in the smbpasswd file and -has to be replicated to the BDC. So replicating the smbpasswd file very often is necessary. -

    -As the smbpasswd file contains plain text password equivalents, it must not be -sent unencrypted over the wire. The best way to set up smbpasswd replication from -the PDC to the BDC is to use the utility rsync. rsync can use ssh as a transport. -Ssh itself can be set up to accept only rsync transfer without requiring the user -to type a password. -

    -As said a few times before, use of this method is broken and flawed. Machine trust -accounts will go out of sync, resulting in a very broken domain. This method is -not recommended. Try using LDAP instead. -

    Can I do this all with LDAP?

    -The simple answer is YES. Samba's pdb_ldap code supports binding to a replica -LDAP server, and will also follow referrals and rebind to the master if it ever -needs to make a modification to the database. (Normally BDCs are read only, so -this will not occur often). -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 5. Domain Control Home Chapter 7. Domain Membership
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/samba-doc.html b/docs/htmldocs/samba-doc.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f5dfd49888 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/htmldocs/samba-doc.html @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +SAMBA Project Documentation
    SAMBA Project Documentation
       Next

    SAMBA Project Documentation

    Edited by

    Jelmer R. Vernooij

    John H. Terpstra

    Gerald (Jerry) Carter

    Monday April 21, 2003

    Abstract

    +This book is a collection of HOWTOs added to Samba documentation over the years. +Samba is always under development, and so is its' documentation. This release of the +documentation represents a major revision or layout as well as contents. +The most recent version of this document can be found at +http://www.samba.org/ +on the "Documentation" page. Please send updates to +Jelmer Vernooij, +John H. Terpstra or +Gerald (Jerry) Carter. +

    +The Samba-Team would like to express sincere thanks to the many people who have with +or without their knowledge contributed to this update. The size and scope of this +project would not have been possible without significant community contribution. A not +insignificant number of ideas for inclusion (if not content itself) has been obtained +from a number of Unofficial HOWTOs - to each such author a big "Thank-you" is also offered. +Please keep publishing your Unofficial HOWTOs - they are a source of inspiration and +application knowledge that is most to be desired by many Samba users and administrators. +

    Table of Contents

    Legal Notice
    Attributions
    I. General Installation
    1. Introduction to Samba
    Background
    Terminology
    Related Projects
    SMB Methodology
    Epilogue
    Miscellaneous
    2. How to Install and Test SAMBA
    Obtaining and installing samba
    Configuring samba (smb.conf)
    Example Configuration
    SWAT
    Try listing the shares available on your + server
    Try connecting with the unix client
    Try connecting from another SMB client
    What If Things Don't Work?
    Common Errors
    Large number of smbd processes
    "open_oplock_ipc: Failed to get local UDP socket for address 100007f. Error was Cannot assign requested"
    "The network name cannot be found"
    3. Fast Start for the Impatient
    Note
    II. Server Configuration Basics
    4. Server Types and Security Modes
    Features and Benefits
    Server Types
    Samba Security Modes
    User Level Security
    Share Level Security
    Domain Security Mode (User Level Security)
    ADS Security Mode (User Level Security)
    Server Security (User Level Security)
    Password checking
    Common Errors
    What makes Samba a SERVER?
    What makes Samba a Domain Controller?
    What makes Samba a Domain Member?
    Constantly Losing Connections to Password Server
    5. Domain Control
    Features and Benefits
    Basics of Domain Control
    Domain Controller Types
    Preparing for Domain Control
    Domain Control - Example Configuration
    Samba ADS Domain Control
    Domain and Network Logon Configuration
    Domain Network Logon Service
    Security Mode and Master Browsers
    Common Errors
    '$' cannot be included in machine name
    Joining domain fails because of existing machine account
    The system can not log you on (C000019B)....
    The machine trust account not accessible
    Account disabled
    Domain Controller Unavailable
    Can not log onto domain member workstation after joining domain
    6. Backup Domain Control
    Features And Benefits
    Essential Background Information
    MS Windows NT4 Style Domain Control
    Active Directory Domain Control
    What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?
    How does a Workstation find its domain controller?
    Backup Domain Controller Configuration
    Example Configuration
    Common Errors
    Machine Accounts keep expiring, what can I do?
    Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT4 PDC?
    How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?
    Can I do this all with LDAP?
    7. Domain Membership
    Features and Benefits
    MS Windows Workstation/Server Machine Trust Accounts
    Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts
    Using NT4 Server Manager to Add Machine Accounts to the Domain
    "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts
    Making an MS Windows Workstation or Server a Domain Member
    Domain Member Server
    Joining an NT4 type Domain with Samba-3
    Why is this better than security = server?
    Samba ADS Domain Membership
    Setup your smb.conf
    Setup your /etc/krb5.conf
    Create the computer account
    Test your server setup
    Testing with smbclient
    Notes
    Common Errors
    Can Not Add Machine Back to Domain
    Adding Machine to Domain Fails
    I can't join a Windows 2003 PDC
    8. Stand-Alone Servers
    Features and Benefits
    Background
    Example Configuration
    Reference Documentation Server
    Central Print Serving
    Common Errors
    9. MS Windows Network Configuration Guide
    Note
    III. Advanced Configuration
    10. Samba / MS Windows Network Browsing Guide
    Features and Benefits
    What is Browsing?
    Discussion
    NetBIOS over TCP/IP
    TCP/IP - without NetBIOS
    DNS and Active Directory
    How Browsing Functions
    Setting up WORKGROUP Browsing
    Setting up DOMAIN Browsing
    Forcing Samba to be the master
    Making Samba the domain master
    Note about broadcast addresses
    Multiple interfaces
    Use of the Remote Announce parameter
    Use of the Remote Browse Sync parameter
    WINS - The Windows Internetworking Name Server
    Setting up a WINS server
    WINS Replication
    Static WINS Entries
    Helpful Hints
    Windows Networking Protocols
    Name Resolution Order
    Technical Overview of browsing
    Browsing support in Samba
    Problem resolution
    Browsing across subnets
    Common Errors
    How can one flush the Samba NetBIOS name cache without restarting Samba?
    My client reports "This server is not configured to list shared resources"
    I get an Unable to browse the network error
    11. Account Information Databases
    Features and Benefits
    Backwards Compatibility Backends
    New Backends
    Technical Information
    Important Notes About Security
    Mapping User Identifiers between MS Windows and UNIX
    Mapping Common UIDs/GIDs on Distributed Machines
    Account Management Tools
    The smbpasswd Command
    The pdbedit Command
    Password Backends
    Plain Text
    smbpasswd - Encrypted Password Database
    tdbsam
    ldapsam
    MySQL
    XML
    Common Errors
    Users can not logon
    Users being added to wrong backend database
    auth methods does not work
    12. Mapping MS Windows and UNIX Groups
    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Example Configuration
    Configuration Scripts
    Sample smb.conf add group script
    Script to configure Group Mapping
    Common Errors
    Adding Groups Fails
    Adding MS Windows Groups to MS Windows Groups Fails
    Adding Domain Users to the Power Users group
    13. File, Directory and Share Access Controls
    Features and Benefits
    File System Access Controls
    MS Windows NTFS Comparison with UNIX File Systems
    Managing Directories
    File and Directory Access Control
    Share Definition Access Controls
    User and Group Based Controls
    File and Directory Permissions Based Controls
    Miscellaneous Controls
    Access Controls on Shares
    Share Permissions Management
    MS Windows Access Control Lists and UNIX Interoperability
    Managing UNIX permissions Using NT Security Dialogs
    Viewing File Security on a Samba Share
    Viewing file ownership
    Viewing File or Directory Permissions
    Modifying file or directory permissions
    Interaction with the standard Samba create mask + parameters
    Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute mapping
    Common Errors
    Users can not write to a public share
    I have set force user but Samba still makes root the owner of all the files I touch!
    MS Word with Samba changes owner of file
    14. File and Record Locking
    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Opportunistic Locking Overview
    Samba Opportunistic Locking Control
    Example Configuration
    MS Windows Opportunistic Locking and Caching Controls
    Workstation Service Entries
    Server Service Entries
    Persistent Data Corruption
    Common Errors
    locking.tdb error messages
    Problems saving files in MS Office on Windows XP
    Long delays deleting files over network with XP SP1
    Additional Reading
    15. Securing Samba
    Introduction
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Discussion of Protective Measures and Issues
    Using host based protection
    User based protection
    Using interface protection
    Using a firewall
    Using a IPC$ share deny
    NTLMv2 Security
    Upgrading Samba
    Common Errors
    Smbclient works on localhost, but the network is dead
    Why can users access home directories of other users?
    16. Interdomain Trust Relationships
    Features and Benefits
    Trust Relationship Background
    Native MS Windows NT4 Trusts Configuration
    Creating an NT4 Domain Trust
    Completing an NT4 Domain Trust
    Inter-Domain Trust Facilities
    Configuring Samba NT-style Domain Trusts
    Samba as the Trusted Domain
    Samba as the Trusting Domain
    NT4-style Domain Trusts with Windows 2000
    Common Errors
    17. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba
    Features and Benefits
    Common Errors
    18. Classical Printing Support
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Introduction
    What happens if you send a Job from a Client
    Printing Related Configuration Parameters
    Parameters Recommended for Use
    A simple Configuration to Print
    Verification of "Settings in Use" with testparm
    A little Experiment to warn you
    Extended Sample Configuration to Print
    Detailed Explanation of the Example's Settings
    The [global] Section
    The [printers] Section
    Any [my_printer_name] Section
    Print Commands
    Default Print Commands for various UNIX Print Subsystems
    Setting up your own Print Commands
    Innovations in Samba Printing since 2.2
    Client Drivers on Samba Server for Point'n'Print
    The [printer$] Section is removed from Samba 3
    Creating the [print$] Share
    Parameters in the [print$] Section
    Subdirectory Structure in [print$]
    Installing Drivers into [print$]
    Setting Drivers for existing Printers with a Client GUI
    Setting Drivers for existing Printers with +rpcclient
    Client Driver Install Procedure
    The first Client Driver Installation
    IMPORTANT! Setting Device Modes on new Printers
    Further Client Driver Install Procedures
    Always make first Client Connection as root or "printer admin"
    Other Gotchas
    Setting Default Print Options for the Client Drivers
    Supporting large Numbers of Printers
    Adding new Printers with the Windows NT APW
    Weird Error Message Cannot connect under a +different Name
    Be careful when assembling Driver Files
    Samba and Printer Ports
    Avoiding the most common Misconfigurations of the Client Driver
    The Imprints Toolset
    What is Imprints?
    Creating Printer Driver Packages
    The Imprints Server
    The Installation Client
    Add Network Printers at Logon without User Interaction
    The addprinter command
    Migration of "Classical" printing to Samba
    Publishing Printer Information in Active Directory or LDAP
    Common Errors
    I give my root password but I don't get access
    My printjobs get spooled into the spooling directory, but then get lost
    19. CUPS Printing Support in Samba 3.0
    Introduction
    Features and Benefits
    Overview
    Basic Configuration of CUPS support
    Linking of smbd with libcups.so
    Simple smb.conf Settings for CUPS
    More complex smb.conf Settings for +CUPS
    Advanced Configuration
    Central spooling vs. "Peer-to-Peer" printing
    CUPS/Samba as a "spooling-only" Print Server; "raw" printing +with Vendor Drivers on Windows Clients
    Driver Installation Methods on Windows Clients
    Explicitly enable "raw" printing for +application/octet-stream!
    Three familiar Methods for driver upload plus a new one
    Using CUPS/Samba in an advanced Way -- intelligent printing +with PostScript Driver Download
    GDI on Windows -- PostScript on UNIX
    Windows Drivers, GDI and EMF
    UNIX Printfile Conversion and GUI Basics
    PostScript and Ghostscript
    Ghostscript -- the Software RIP for non-PostScript Printers
    PostScript Printer Description (PPD) Specification
    CUPS can use all Windows-formatted Vendor PPDs
    CUPS also uses PPDs for non-PostScript Printers
    The CUPS Filtering Architecture
    MIME types and CUPS Filters
    MIME type Conversion Rules
    Filter Requirements
    Prefilters
    pstops
    pstoraster
    imagetops and imagetoraster
    rasterto [printers specific]
    CUPS Backends
    cupsomatic/Foomatic -- how do they fit into the Picture?
    The Complete Picture
    mime.convs
    "Raw" printing
    "application/octet-stream" printing
    PostScript Printer Descriptions (PPDs) for non-PS Printers
    Difference between cupsomatic/foomatic-rip and +native CUPS printing
    Examples for filtering Chains
    Sources of CUPS drivers / PPDs
    Printing with Interface Scripts
    Network printing (purely Windows)
    From Windows Clients to an NT Print Server
    Driver Execution on the Client
    Driver Execution on the Server
    Network Printing (Windows clients -- UNIX/Samba Print +Servers)
    From Windows Clients to a CUPS/Samba Print Server
    Samba receiving Jobfiles and passing them to CUPS
    Network PostScript RIP: CUPS Filters on Server -- clients use +PostScript Driver with CUPS-PPDs
    PPDs for non-PS Printers on UNIX
    PPDs for non-PS Printers on Windows
    Windows Terminal Servers (WTS) as CUPS Clients
    Printer Drivers running in "Kernel Mode" cause many +Problems
    Workarounds impose Heavy Limitations
    CUPS: a "Magical Stone"?
    PostScript Drivers with no major problems -- even in Kernel +Mode
    Setting up CUPS for driver Download
    cupsaddsmb: the unknown Utility
    Prepare your smb.conf for cupsaddsmb
    CUPS Package of "PostScript Driver for WinNT/2k/XP"
    Recognize the different Driver Files
    Acquiring the Adobe Driver Files
    ESP Print Pro Package of "PostScript Driver for +WinNT/2k/XP"
    Caveats to be considered
    Benefits of using "CUPS PostScript Driver for +Windows NT/2k/XP" instead of Adobe Driver
    Run "cupsaddsmb" (quiet Mode)
    Run "cupsaddsmb" with verbose Output
    Understanding cupsaddsmb
    How to recognize if cupsaddsmb completed successfully
    cupsaddsmb with a Samba PDC
    cupsaddsmb Flowchart
    Installing the PostScript Driver on a Client
    Avoiding critical PostScript Driver Settings on the +Client
    Installing PostScript Driver Files manually (using +rpcclient)
    A Check of the rpcclient man Page
    Understanding the rpcclient man page
    Producing an Example by querying a Windows Box
    What is required for adddriver and setdriver to succeed
    Manual Driver Installation in 15 Steps
    Troubleshooting revisited
    The printing *.tdb Files
    Trivial DataBase Files
    Binary Format
    Losing *.tdb Files
    Using tdbbackup
    CUPS Print Drivers from Linuxprinting.org
    foomatic-rip and Foomatic explained
    foomatic-rip and Foomatic-PPD Download and Installation
    Page Accounting with CUPS
    Setting up Quotas
    Correct and incorrect Accounting
    Adobe and CUPS PostScript Drivers for Windows Clients
    The page_log File Syntax
    Possible Shortcomings
    Future Developments
    Other Accounting Tools
    Additional Material
    Auto-Deletion or Preservation of CUPS Spool Files
    CUPS Configuration Settings explained
    Pre-conditions
    Manual Configuration
    In Case of Trouble.....
    Printing from CUPS to Windows attached +Printers
    More CUPS filtering Chains
    Common Errors
    Win9x client can't install driver
    "cupsaddsmb" keeps asking for root password in + neverending loop
    "cupsaddsmb" gives "No PPD file for printer..." + message while PPD file is present
    Client can't connect to Samba printer
    Can't reconnect to Samba under new account + from Win2K/XP
    Avoid being connected to the Samba server as the + "wrong" user
    Upgrading to CUPS drivers from Adobe drivers on + NT/2K/XP clients gives problems
    Can't use "cupsaddsmb" on Samba server which is + a PDC
    Deleted Win2K printer driver is still shown
    Win2K/XP "Local Security + Policies"
    WinXP clients: "Administrator can not install + printers for all local users"
    "Print Change Notify" functions on + NT-clients
    WinXP-SP1
    Print options for all users can't be set on Win2K/XP
    Most common blunders in driver + settings on Windows clients
    cupsaddsmb does not work + with newly installed printer
    Permissions on +/var/spool/samba/ get reset after each +reboot
    Printer named "lp" +intermittently swallows jobs and spits out completely different +ones
    Location of Adobe PostScript driver files necessary for "cupsaddsmb"
    An Overview of the CUPS Printing Processes
    20. Stackable VFS modules
    Features and Benefits
    Discussion
    Included modules
    audit
    extd_audit
    fake_perms
    recycle
    netatalk
    VFS modules available elsewhere
    DatabaseFS
    vscan
    21. Winbind: Use of Domain Accounts
    Features and Benefits
    Introduction
    What Winbind Provides
    Target Uses
    How Winbind Works
    Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls
    Microsoft Active Directory Services
    Name Service Switch
    Pluggable Authentication Modules
    User and Group ID Allocation
    Result Caching
    Installation and Configuration
    Introduction
    Requirements
    Testing Things Out
    Conclusion
    Common Errors
    NSCD Problem Warning
    22. Advanced Network Management
    Features and Benefits
    Remote Server Administration
    Remote Desktop Management
    Remote Management from NoMachines.Com
    Network Logon Script Magic
    Adding printers without user intervention
    Common Errors
    23. System and Account Policies
    Features and Benefits
    Creating and Managing System Policies
    Windows 9x/Me Policies
    Windows NT4 Style Policy Files
    MS Windows 200x / XP Professional Policies
    Managing Account/User Policies
    Samba Editreg Toolset
    Windows NT4/200x
    Samba PDC
    System Startup and Logon Processing Overview
    Common Errors
    Policy Does Not Work
    24. Desktop Profile Management
    Features and Benefits
    Roaming Profiles
    Samba Configuration for Profile Handling
    Windows Client Profile Configuration Information
    Sharing Profiles between W9x/Me and NT4/200x/XP workstations
    Profile Migration from Windows NT4/200x Server to Samba
    Mandatory profiles
    Creating/Managing Group Profiles
    Default Profile for Windows Users
    MS Windows 9x/Me
    MS Windows NT4 Workstation
    MS Windows 200x/XP
    Common Errors
    Setting up roaming profiles for just a few user's or group's?
    Can NOT use Roaming Profiles
    Changing the default profile
    25. PAM based Distributed Authentication
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Discussion
    PAM Configuration Syntax
    Example System Configurations
    smb.conf PAM Configuration
    Remote CIFS Authentication using winbindd.so
    Password Synchronization using pam_smbpass.so
    Common Errors
    pam_winbind problem
    Winbind is not resolving users and groups
    26. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba
    Features and Benefits
    Background Information
    Name Resolution in a pure UNIX/Linux world
    /etc/hosts
    /etc/resolv.conf
    /etc/host.conf
    /etc/nsswitch.conf
    Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking
    The NetBIOS Name Cache
    The LMHOSTS file
    HOSTS file
    DNS Lookup
    WINS Lookup
    Common Errors
    Pinging works only in one way
    Very Slow Network Connections
    Samba server name change problem
    27. Unicode/Charsets
    Features and Benefits
    What are charsets and unicode?
    Samba and charsets
    Conversion from old names
    Japanese charsets
    Common errors
    CP850.so can't be found
    28. Samba Backup Techniques
    Note
    Features and Benefits
    29. High Availability Options
    Note
    IV. Migration and Updating
    30. Upgrading from Samba-2.x to Samba-3.0.0
    New Features in Samba-3
    Configuration Parameter Changes
    Removed Parameters
    New Parameters
    Modified Parameters (changes in behavior):
    New Functionality
    Databases
    Changes in Behavior
    Charsets
    Passdb Backends and Authentication
    Charsets
    LDAP
    31. Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC
    Planning and Getting Started
    Objectives
    Steps In Migration Process
    Migration Options
    Planning for Success
    Samba-3 Implementation Choices
    32. SWAT - The Samba Web Administration Tool
    Features and Benefits
    Enabling SWAT for use
    Securing SWAT through SSL
    The SWAT Home Page
    Global Settings
    Share Settings
    Printers Settings
    The SWAT Wizard
    The Status Page
    The View Page
    The Password Change Page
    V. Troubleshooting
    33. The Samba checklist
    Introduction
    Assumptions
    The tests
    34. Analysing and solving samba problems
    Diagnostics tools
    Debugging with Samba itself
    Tcpdump
    Ethereal
    The Windows Network Monitor
    Useful URLs
    Getting help from the mailing lists
    How to get off the mailing lists
    35. Reporting Bugs
    Introduction
    General info
    Debug levels
    Internal errors
    Attaching to a running process
    Patches
    VI. Appendixes
    36. How to compile Samba
    Access Samba source code via CVS
    Introduction
    CVS Access to samba.org
    Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp
    Verifying Samba's PGP signature
    Building the Binaries
    Compiling samba with Active Directory support
    Starting the smbd and nmbd
    Starting from inetd.conf
    Alternative: starting it as a daemon
    37. Portability
    HPUX
    SCO UNIX
    DNIX
    RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II
    AIX
    Sequential Read Ahead
    Solaris
    Locking improvements
    Winbind on Solaris 9
    38. Samba and other CIFS clients
    Macintosh clients?
    OS2 Client
    Configuring OS/2 Warp Connect or + OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba
    Configuring OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect), + OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba
    Printer driver download for for OS/2 clients?
    Windows for Workgroups
    Latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft
    Delete .pwl files after password change
    Configuring WfW password handling
    Case handling of passwords
    Use TCP/IP as default protocol
    Speed improvement
    Windows '95/'98
    Speed improvement
    Windows 2000 Service Pack 2
    Windows NT 3.1
    39. Samba Performance Tuning
    Comparisons
    Socket options
    Read size
    Max xmit
    Log level
    Read raw
    Write raw
    Slow Logins
    Client tuning
    Samba performance problem due changing kernel
    Corrupt tdb Files
    40. DNS and DHCP Configuration Guide
    Note
    41. Further Resources
    Websites
    Related updates from Microsoft
    Index

    List of Figures

    5.1. An Example Domain
    10.1. Cross subnet browsing example
    11.1. IDMAP
    12.1. IDMAP groups
    13.1. Overview of unix permissions field
    16.1. Trusts overview
    19.1. Windows Printing to a local Printer
    19.2. Printing to a Postscript Printer
    19.3. Ghostscript as a RIP for non-postscript printers
    19.4. Prefiltering in CUPS to form Postscript
    19.5. Adding Device-specific Print Options
    19.6. Postscript to intermediate Raster format
    19.7. CUPS-raster production using Ghostscript
    19.8. Image format to CUPS-raster format conversion
    19.9. Raster to Printer Specific formats
    19.10. cupsomatic/foomatic processing versus Native CUPS
    19.11. PDF to socket chain
    19.12. PDF to USB chain
    19.13. Print Driver execution on the Client
    19.14. Print Driver execution on the Server
    19.15. Printing via CUPS/samba server
    19.16. cupsaddsmb flowchart
    19.17. Filtering chain 1
    19.18. Filtering chain with cupsomatic
    19.19. CUPS Printing Overview

    List of Tables

    7.1. Assumptions
    10.1. Browse subnet example 1
    10.2. Browse subnet example 2
    10.3. Browse subnet example 3
    10.4. Browse subnet example 4
    11.1. Attributes in the sambaSamAccount objectclass (LDAP)
    11.2. Basic smb.conf options for MySQL passdb backend
    11.3. MySQL field names for MySQL passdb backend
    13.1. Managing directories with unix and windows
    13.2. User and Group Based Controls
    13.3. File and Directory Permission Based Controls
    13.4. Other Controls
    19.1. PPD's shipped with CUPS
    20.1. Extended Auditing Log Information
    24.1. User Shell Folder registry keys default values
    24.2. Defaults of profile settings registry keys
    24.3. Defaults of default user profile paths registry keys
    25.1. Options recognized by pam_smbpass
    26.1. Unique NetBIOS names
    26.2. Group Names
    30.1. TDB File Descriptions
    31.1. The 3 Major Site Types
    31.2. Nature of the Conversion Choices

    List of Examples

    2.1. Simplest possible smb.conf file
    5.1. smb.conf for being a PDC
    5.2. smb.conf for being a PDC
    6.1. Minimal smb.conf for being a PDC
    6.2. Minimal setup for being a BDC
    8.1. smb.conf for Reference Documentation Server
    8.2. smb.conf for anonymous printing
    10.1. Domain master browser smb.conf
    10.2. Local master browser smb.conf
    10.3. smb.conf for not being a master browser
    10.4. Local master browser smb.conf
    10.5. smb.conf for not being a master browser
    11.1.
    11.2. Configuration with LDAP
    12.1. smbgrpadd.sh
    13.1. Example File
    14.1. Share with some files oplocked
    14.2.
    17.1. smb.conf with DFS configured
    18.1. Simple configuration with BSD printing
    18.2. Extended configuration with BSD printing
    18.3. [print\$] example
    19.1. Simplest printing-related smb.conf
    19.2. Overriding global CUPS settings for one printer
    19.3. smb.conf for cupsaddsmb usage
    20.1. smb.conf with VFS modules
    20.2. smb.conf with multiple VFS modules
    21.1. smb.conf for winbind set-up
    33.1. smb.conf with [tmp] share
    38.1. Minimal profile share
       Next
       Legal Notice
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc.html b/docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc.html deleted file mode 100644 index aee179737d..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,551 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 5. Domain Control
    Chapter 5. Domain Control
    Prev Part II. Server Configuration Basics Next

    Chapter 5. Domain Control

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    Gerald (Jerry) Carter

    Samba Team

    David Bannon

    Samba Team

    Table of Contents

    Features and Benefits
    Basics of Domain Control
    Domain Controller Types
    Preparing for Domain Control
    Domain Control - Example Configuration
    Samba ADS Domain Control
    Domain and Network Logon Configuration
    Domain Network Logon Service
    Security Mode and Master Browsers
    Common Problems and Errors
    I cannot include a '$' in a machine name
    I get told "You already have a connection to the Domain...." -or "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied conflict with an -existing set.." when creating a machine trust account.
    The system can not log you on (C000019B)....
    The machine trust account for this computer either does not -exist or is not accessible.
    When I attempt to login to a Samba Domain from a NT4/W2K workstation, -I get a message about my account being disabled.
    Until a few minutes after Samba has started, clients get the error "Domain Controller Unavailable"

    The Essence of Learning:  -There are many who approach MS Windows networking with incredible misconceptions. -That's OK, because it gives the rest of us plenty of opportunity to be of assistance. -Those who really want help would be well advised to become familiar with information -that is already available. -

    -The reader is advised NOT to tackle this section without having first understood -and mastered some basics. MS Windows networking is not particularly forgiving of -misconfiguration. Users of MS Windows networking are likely to complain bitterly -of persistent niggles that may be caused by broken network or system configuration. -To a great many people however, MS Windows networking starts with a domain controller -that in some magical way is expected to solve all ills. -

    -From the Samba mailing list one can readily identify many common networking issues. -If you are not clear on the following subjects, then it will do much good to read the -sections of this HOWTO that deal with it. These are the most common causes of MS Windows -networking problems: -

    Basic TCP/IP configuration
    NetBIOS name resolution
    Authentication configuration
    User and Group configuration
    Basic File and Directory Permission Control in Unix/Linux
    Understanding of how MS Windows clients interoperate in a network - environment

    -Do not be put off; on the surface of it MS Windows networking seems so simple that any fool -can do it. In fact, it is not a good idea to set up an MS Windows network with -inadequate training and preparation. But let's get our first indelible principle out of the -way: It is perfectly OK to make mistakes! In the right place and at -the right time, mistakes are the essence of learning. It is very much -not ok to make mistakes that cause loss of productivity and impose an avoidable financial -burden on an organisation. -

    -Where is the right place to make mistakes? Only out of harm's way! If you are going to -make mistakes, then please do this on a test network, away from users and in such a way as -to not inflict pain on others. Do your learning on a test network. -

    Features and Benefits

    -What is the key benefit of Microsoft Domain security? -

    -In a word, Single Sign On, or SSO for short. To many, this is the holy -grail of MS Windows NT and beyond networking. SSO allows users in a well designed network -to log onto any workstation that is a member of the domain that their user account is in -(or in a domain that has an appropriate trust relationship with the domain they are visiting) -and they will be able to log onto the network and access resources (shares, files, and printers) -as if they are sitting at their home (personal) workstation. This is a feature of the Domain -security protocols. -

    -The benefits of Domain security are fully available to those sites that deploy a Samba PDC. -

    Note

    -Network clients of an MS Windows Domain security environment must be Domain members to be -able to gain access to the advanced features provided. Domain membership involves more than just -setting the workgroup name to the Domain name. It requires the creation of a Domain trust account -for the workstation (called a machine account). Please refer to the chapter on -Domain Membership for more information. -

    -The following functionalities are new to the Samba-3 release: -

    • - Windows NT4 domain trusts -

    • - Adding users via the User Manager for Domains. This can be done on any MS Windows - client using the Nexus toolkit that is available from Microsoft's web site. - At some later date Samba-3 may get support for the use of the Microsoft Management - Console for user management. -

    • - Introduces replaceable and multiple user account (authentication) - back ends. In the case where the back end is placed in an LDAP database, - Samba-3 confers the benefits of a back end that can be distributed, replicated, - and is highly scalable. -

    • - Implements full Unicode support. This simplifies cross locale internationalisation - support. It also opens up the use of protocols that Samba-2.2.x had but could not use due - to the need to fully support Unicode. -

    -The following functionalities are NOT provided by Samba-3: -

    • - SAM replication with Windows NT4 Domain Controllers - (i.e. a Samba PDC and a Windows NT BDC or vice versa) -

    • - Acting as a Windows 2000 Domain Controller (i.e. Kerberos and - Active Directory) - In point of fact, Samba-3 DOES have some - Active Directory Domain Control ability that is at this time - purely experimental AND that is certain - to change as it becomes a fully supported feature some time - during the Samba-3 (or later) life cycle. -

    -Windows 9x / Me / XP Home clients are not true members of a domain for reasons outlined -in this chapter. The protocol for support of Windows 9x / Me style network (domain) logons -is completely different from NT4 / Win2k type domain logons and has been officially supported -for some time. These clients use the old LanMan Network Logon facilities that are supported -in Samba since approximately the Samba-1.9.15 series. -

    -Samba-3 has an implementation of group mapping between Windows NT groups -and Unix groups (this is really quite complicated to explain in a short space). This is -discussed more fully in the Group Mapping chapter. -

    -Samba-3, like an MS Windows NT4 PDC or a Windows 200x Active Directory, needs to store -user and machine trust account information in a suitable backend data store. With Samba-3 -there can be multiple back-ends for this including: -

    • - smbpasswd - the plain ASCII file stored used by - earlier versions of Samba. This file configuration option requires - a Unix/Linux system account for EVERY entry (ie: both for user and for - machine accounts). This file will be located in the private - directory (default is /usr/local/samba/lib/private or on linux /etc/samba). -

    • - tdbsam - a binary database backend that will be - stored in the private directory in a file called - passdb.tdb. The key benefit of this binary format - file is that it can store binary objects that can not be accommodated - in the traditional plain text smbpasswd file. These permit the extended - account controls that MS Windows NT4 and later also have. -

    • - ldapsam - An LDAP based back-end. Permits the - LDAP server to be specified. eg: ldap://localhost or ldap://frodo.murphy.com. - Like the tdbsam, ldapsam permits the storing of extended account attributes - for control of things like: Permitted access times, password activation and - expiry, permitted points of access (workstation names), per user profile - location, and much more. -

    • - ldapsam_compat - An LDAP back-end that maintains backwards - compatibility with the behaviour of samba-2.2.x. You should use this in the process - of migrating from samba-2.2.x to samba-3 if you do not want to rebuild your LDAP - database. -

    -Read the chapter about Account Information Database for details -regarding the choices available and how to configure them. -

    Note

    -The new tdbsam and ldapsam account backends store substantially more information than -smbpasswd is capable of. The new backend database includes capacity to specify -per user settings for many parameters, over-riding global settings given in the -smb.conf file. eg: logon drive, logon home, logon path, etc. -Thus, with samba-3 it is possible to have a default system configuration for profiles, -and on a per user basis to over-ride this for those users who should not be subject -to the default configuration. -

    Basics of Domain Control

    -Over the years, public perceptions of what Domain Control really is has taken on an -almost mystical nature. Before we branch into a brief overview of Domain Control, -there are three basic types of domain controllers: -

    Domain Controller Types

    • Primary Domain Controller

    • Backup Domain Controller

    • ADS Domain Controller

    -The Primary Domain Controller or PDC plays an important role in the MS -Windows NT4 and Windows 200x Domain Control architecture, but not in the manner that so many -expect. There is folk lore that dictates that because of it's role in the MS Windows -network, the PDC should be the most powerful and most capable machine in the network. -As strange as it may seem to say this here, good over all network performance dictates that -the entire infrastructure needs to be balanced. It is advisable to invest more in the Backup -Domain Controllers and Stand-Alone (or Domain Member) servers than in the PDC. -

    -In the case of MS Windows NT4 style domains, it is the PDC seeds the Domain Control database, -a part of the Windows registry called the SAM (Security Account Manager). It plays a key -part in NT4 type domain user authentication and in synchronisation of the domain authentication -database with Backup Domain Controllers. -

    -With MS Windows 200x Server based Active Directory domains, one domain controller seeds a potential -hierarchy of domain controllers, each with their own area of delegated control. The master domain -controller has the ability to override any down-stream controller, but a down-line controller has -control only over it's down-line. With Samba-3 this functionality can be implemented using an -LDAP based user and machine account back end. -

    -New to Samba-3 is the ability to use a back-end database that holds the same type of data as -the NT4 style SAM (Security Account Manager) database (one of the registry files). -The Samba-3 SAM can be specified via the smb.conf file parameter -passwd backend and valid options include -smbpasswd, tdbsam, ldapsam, nisplussam, xmlsam, mysqlsam, guest. -

    -The Backup Domain Controller or BDC plays a key role in servicing network -authentication requests. The BDC is biased to answer logon requests in preference to the PDC. -On a network segment that has a BDC and a PDC the BDC will be most likely to service network -logon requests. The PDC will answer network logon requests when the BDC is too busy (high load). -A BDC can be promoted to a PDC. If the PDC is on line at the time that a BDC is promoted to -PDC, the previous PDC is automatically demoted to a BDC. With Samba-3 this is NOT an automatic -operation; the PDC and BDC must be manually configured and changes need to be made likewise. -

    -With MS Windows NT4, it is an install time decision what type of machine the server will be. -It is possible to change the promote a BDC to a PDC and vice versa only, but the only way -to convert a domain controller to a domain member server or a stand-alone server is to -reinstall it. The install time choices offered are: -

    • Primary Domain Controller - The one that seeds the domain SAM

    • Backup Domain Controller - One that obtains a copy of the domain SAM

    • Domain Member Server - One that has NO copy of the domain SAM, rather it obtains authentication from a Domain Controller for all access controls.

    • Stand-Alone Server - One that plays NO part is SAM synchronisation, has it's own authentication database and plays no role in Domain security.

    -With MS Windows 2000 the configuration of domain control is done after the server has been -installed. Samba-3 is capable of acting fully as a native member of a Windows 200x server -Active Directory domain. -

    -New to Samba-3 is the ability to function fully as an MS Windows NT4 style Domain Controller, -excluding the SAM replication components. However, please be aware that Samba-3 support the -MS Windows 200x domain control protocols also. -

    -At this time any appearance that Samba-3 is capable of acting as an -ADS Domain Controller is limited and experimental in nature. -This functionality should not be used until the Samba-Team offers formal support for it. -At such a time, the documentation will be revised to duly reflect all configuration and -management requirements. -

    Preparing for Domain Control

    -There are two ways that MS Windows machines may interact with each other, with other servers, -and with Domain Controllers: Either as Stand-Alone systems, more commonly -called Workgroup members, or as full participants in a security system, -more commonly called Domain members. -

    -It should be noted that Workgroup membership involve no special configuration -other than the machine being configured so that the network configuration has a commonly used name -for it's workgroup entry. It is not uncommon for the name WORKGROUP to be used for this. With this -mode of configuration there are NO machine trust accounts and any concept of membership as such -is limited to the fact that all machines appear in the network neighbourhood to be logically -grouped together. Again, just to be clear: workgroup mode does not involve any security machine -accounts. -

    -Domain member machines have a machine account in the Domain accounts database. A special procedure -must be followed on each machine to affect Domain membership. This procedure, which can be done -only by the local machine Administrator account, will create the Domain machine account (if -if does not exist), and then initializes that account. When the client first logs onto the -Domain it triggers a machine password change. -

    Note

    -When running a Domain all MS Windows NT / 200x / XP Professional clients should be configured -as full Domain Members - IF A SECURE NETWORK IS WANTED. If the machine is NOT made a member of the -Domain, then it will operate like a workgroup (stand-alone) machine. Please refer the -Domain Membership chapter for information regarding - HOW to make your MS Windows clients Domain members. -

    -The following are necessary for configuring Samba-3 as an MS Windows NT4 style PDC for MS Windows -NT4 / 200x / XP clients. -

    Configuration of basic TCP/IP and MS Windows Networking
    Correct designation of the Server Role (security = user)
    Consistent configuration of Name Resolution (See chapter on Browsing and on - MS Windows network Integration)
    Domain logons for Windows NT4 / 200x / XP Professional clients
    Configuration of Roaming Profiles or explicit configuration to force local profile usage
    Configuration of Network/System Policies
    Adding and managing domain user accounts
    Configuring MS Windows client machines to become domain members

    -The following provisions are required to serve MS Windows 9x / Me Clients: -

    Configuration of basic TCP/IP and MS Windows Networking
    Correct designation of the Server Role (security = user)
    Network Logon Configuration (Since Windows 9x / XP Home are not technically domain - members, they do not really participate in the security aspects of Domain logons as such)
    Roaming Profile Configuration
    Configuration of System Policy handling
    Installation of the Network driver "Client for MS Windows Networks" and configuration - to log onto the domain
    Placing Windows 9x / Me clients in user level security - if it is desired to allow - all client share access to be controlled according to domain user / group identities.
    Adding and managing domain user accounts

    Note

    -Roaming Profiles and System/Network policies are advanced network administration topics -that are covered in the Profile Management and -Policy Management chapters of this document. However, these are not necessarily specific -to a Samba PDC as much as they are related to Windows NT networking concepts. -

    -A Domain Controller is an SMB/CIFS server that: -

    • - Registers and advertises itself as a Domain Controller (through NetBIOS broadcasts - as well as by way of name registrations either by Mailslot Broadcasts over UDP broadcast, - to a WINS server over UDP unicast, or via DNS and Active Directory) -

    • - Provides the NETLOGON service (actually a collection of services that runs over - a number of protocols. These include the LanMan Logon service, the Netlogon service, - the Local Security Account service, and variations of them) -

    • - Provides a share called NETLOGON -

    -For Samba to provide these is rather easy to configure. Each Samba Domain Controller must provide -the NETLOGON service which Samba calls the domain logons functionality -(after the name of the parameter in the smb.conf file). Additionally, one (1) server in a Samba-3 -Domain must advertise itself as the domain master browser. This causes the Primary Domain Controller -to claim domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a domain master browser for its given -domain/workgroup. Local master browsers in the same domain/workgroup on broadcast-isolated subnets -then ask for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area network. Browser clients -will then contact their local master browser, and will receive the domain-wide browse list, -instead of just the list for their broadcast-isolated subnet. -

    Domain Control - Example Configuration

    -The first step in creating a working Samba PDC is to understand the parameters necessary -in smb.conf. Here we attempt to explain the parameters that are covered in -the smb.conf man page. -

    -Here is an example smb.conf for acting as a PDC: -

    -	[global]
-	    ; Basic server settings
-	    netbios name = POGO
-	    workgroup = NARNIA
-
-	    ; User and Machine Account Backends
-	    ; Choices are: tdbsam, smbpasswd, ldapsam, mysqlsam, xmlsam, guest
-	    passdb backend = ldapsam, guest
-
-	    ; we should act as the domain and local master browser
-	    os level = 64
-	    preferred master = yes
-	    domain master = yes
-	    local master = yes
-	    
-	    ; security settings (must user security = user)
-	    security = user
-	    
-	    ; encrypted passwords are a requirement for a PDC (default = Yes)
-	    encrypt passwords = yes
-	    
-	    ; support domain logons
-	    domain logons = yes
-	    
-	    ; where to store user profiles?
-	    logon path = \\%N\profiles\%u
-	    
-	    ; where is a user's home directory and where should it be mounted at?
-	    logon drive = H:
-	    logon home = \\homeserver\%u\winprofile
-	    
-	    ; specify a generic logon script for all users
-	    ; this is a relative **DOS** path to the [netlogon] share
-	    logon script = logon.cmd
-
-	; necessary share for domain controller
-	[netlogon]
-	    path = /usr/local/samba/lib/netlogon
-	    read only = yes
-	    write list = ntadmin
-	    
-	; share for storing user profiles
-	[profiles]
-	    path = /export/smb/ntprofile
-	    read only = no
-	    create mask = 0600
-	    directory mask = 0700
-

    Note

    -The above parameters make for a full set of parameters that may define the server's mode -of operation. The following parameters are the essentials alone: - -
    -	workgroup = NARNIA
-	domain logons = Yes
-	domain master = Yes
-	security = User
-
    - -The additional parameters shown in the longer listing above just makes for a -more complete environment. -

    -There are a couple of points to emphasize in the above configuration. -

    • - Encrypted passwords must be enabled. For more details on how - to do this, refer to Account Information Database chapter. -

    • - The server must support domain logons and have a - [netlogon] share -

    • - The server must be the domain master browser in order for Windows - client to locate the server as a DC. Please refer to the various - Network Browsing documentation included with this distribution for - details. -

    Samba ADS Domain Control

    -Samba-3 is not and can not act as an Active Directory Server. It can not truly function as -an Active Directory Primary Domain Controller. The protocols for some of the functionality -the Active Directory Domain Controllers is have been partially implemented on an experimental -only basis. Please do NOT expect Samba-3 to support these protocols - nor should you depend -on any such functionality either now or in the future. The Samba-Team may well remove such -experimental features or may change their behaviour. -

    Domain and Network Logon Configuration

    -The subject of Network or Domain Logons is discussed here because it rightly forms -an integral part of the essential functionality that is provided by a Domain Controller. -

    Domain Network Logon Service

    -All Domain Controllers must run the netlogon service (domain logons -in Samba). One Domain Controller must be configured with domain master = Yes -(the Primary Domain Controller); on ALL Backup Domain Controllers domain master = No -must be set. -

    Example Configuration

    -	[global]
-		domain logons = Yes
-		domain master = (Yes on PDC, No on BDCs)
-
-	[netlogon]
-		comment = Network Logon Service
-		path = /var/lib/samba/netlogon
-		guest ok = Yes
-		browseable = No
-

    The Special Case of MS Windows XP Home Edition

    Note

    -MS Windows XP Home Edition does not have the ability to join any type of Domain -security facility. Unlike, MS Windows 9x / Me, MS Windows XP Home Edition also completely -lacks the ability to log onto a network. -

    -To be completely clear: If you want MS Windows XP Home Edition to integrate with your -MS Windows NT4 or Active Directory Domain security understand - IT CAN NOT BE DONE. -Your only choice is to buy the upgrade pack from MS Windows XP Home Edition to -MS Windows XP Professional. -

    -Now that this has been said, please do NOT ask the mailing list, or email any of the -Samba-Team members with your questions asking how to make this work. It can't be done. -

    The Special Case of Windows 9x / Me

    -A domain and a workgroup are exactly the same thing in terms of network -browsing. The difference is that a distributable authentication -database is associated with a domain, for secure login access to a -network. Also, different access rights can be granted to users if they -successfully authenticate against a domain logon server. Samba-3 does this -now in the same way that MS Windows NT/2K. -

    -The SMB client logging on to a domain has an expectation that every other -server in the domain should accept the same authentication information. -Network browsing functionality of domains and workgroups is identical and -is explained in this documentation under the browsing discussions. -It should be noted, that browsing is totally orthogonal to logon support. -

    -Issues related to the single-logon network model are discussed in this -section. Samba supports domain logons, network logon scripts, and user -profiles for MS Windows for workgroups and MS Windows 9X/ME clients -which are the focus of this section. -

    -When an SMB client in a domain wishes to logon, it broadcasts requests for a -logon server. The first one to reply gets the job, and validates its -password using whatever mechanism the Samba administrator has installed. -It is possible (but very stupid) to create a domain where the user -database is not shared between servers, i.e. they are effectively workgroup -servers advertising themselves as participating in a domain. This -demonstrates how authentication is quite different from but closely -involved with domains. -

    -Using these features you can make your clients verify their logon via -the Samba server; make clients run a batch file when they logon to -the network and download their preferences, desktop and start menu. -

    -MS Windows XP Home edition is NOT able to join a domain and does not permit -the use of domain logons. -

    -Before launching into the configuration instructions, it is -worthwhile to look at how a Windows 9x/ME client performs a logon: -

    1. - The client broadcasts (to the IP broadcast address of the subnet it is in) - a NetLogon request. This is sent to the NetBIOS name DOMAIN<#1c> at the - NetBIOS layer. The client chooses the first response it receives, which - contains the NetBIOS name of the logon server to use in the format of - \\SERVER. -

    2. - The client then connects to that server, logs on (does an SMBsessetupX) and - then connects to the IPC$ share (using an SMBtconX). -

    3. - The client then does a NetWkstaUserLogon request, which retrieves the name - of the user's logon script. -

    4. - The client then connects to the NetLogon share and searches for said script - and if it is found and can be read, is retrieved and executed by the client. - After this, the client disconnects from the NetLogon share. -

    5. - The client then sends a NetUserGetInfo request to the server, to retrieve - the user's home share, which is used to search for profiles. Since the - response to the NetUserGetInfo request does not contain much more than - the user's home share, profiles for Win9X clients MUST reside in the user - home directory. -

    6. - The client then connects to the user's home share and searches for the - user's profile. As it turns out, you can specify the user's home share as - a sharename and path. For example, \\server\fred\.winprofile. - If the profiles are found, they are implemented. -

    7. - The client then disconnects from the user's home share, and reconnects to - the NetLogon share and looks for CONFIG.POL, the policies file. If this is - found, it is read and implemented. -

    -The main difference between a PDC and a Windows 9x logon server configuration is that -

    • - Password encryption is not required for a Windows 9x logon server. But note - that beginning with MS Windows 98 the default setting is that plain-text - password support has been disabled. It can be re-enabled with the registry - changes that are documented in the chapter on Policies. -

    • - Windows 9x/ME clients do not require and do not use machine trust accounts. -

    -A Samba PDC will act as a Windows 9x logon server; after all, it does provide the -network logon services that MS Windows 9x / Me expect to find. -

    Security Mode and Master Browsers

    -There are a few comments to make in order to tie up some -loose ends. There has been much debate over the issue of whether -or not it is ok to configure Samba as a Domain Controller in security -modes other than USER. The only security mode -which will not work due to technical reasons is SHARE -mode security. DOMAIN and SERVER -mode security are really just a variation on SMB user level security. -

    -Actually, this issue is also closely tied to the debate on whether -or not Samba must be the domain master browser for its workgroup -when operating as a DC. While it may technically be possible -to configure a server as such (after all, browsing and domain logons -are two distinctly different functions), it is not a good idea to do -so. You should remember that the DC must register the DOMAIN<#1b> NetBIOS -name. This is the name used by Windows clients to locate the DC. -Windows clients do not distinguish between the DC and the DMB. -For this reason, it is very wise to configure the Samba DC as the DMB. -

    -Now back to the issue of configuring a Samba DC to use a mode other -than security = user. If a Samba host is configured to use -another SMB server or DC in order to validate user connection -requests, then it is a fact that some other machine on the network -(the password server) knows more about the user than the Samba host. -99% of the time, this other host is a domain controller. Now -in order to operate in domain mode security, the workgroup parameter -must be set to the name of the Windows NT domain (which already -has a domain controller). If the domain does NOT already have a Domain Controller -then you do not yet have a Domain! -

    -Configuring a Samba box as a DC for a domain that already by definition has a -PDC is asking for trouble. Therefore, you should always configure the Samba DC -to be the DMB for its domain and set security = user. -This is the only officially supported mode of operation. -

    Common Problems and Errors

    I cannot include a '$' in a machine name

    -A 'machine account', (typically) stored in /etc/passwd, -takes the form of the machine name with a '$' appended. FreeBSD (and other BSD -systems?) won't create a user with a '$' in their name. -

    -The problem is only in the program used to make the entry. Once made, it works perfectly. -Create a user without the '$'. Then use vipw to edit the entry, adding -the '$'. Or create the whole entry with vipw if you like; make sure you use a unique User ID! -

    I get told "You already have a connection to the Domain...." -or "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied conflict with an -existing set.." when creating a machine trust account.

    -This happens if you try to create a machine trust account from the -machine itself and already have a connection (e.g. mapped drive) -to a share (or IPC$) on the Samba PDC. The following command -will remove all network drive connections: -

    -	C:\WINNT\> net use * /d
-

    -Further, if the machine is already a 'member of a workgroup' that -is the same name as the domain you are joining (bad idea) you will -get this message. Change the workgroup name to something else, it -does not matter what, reboot, and try again. -

    The system can not log you on (C000019B)....

    I joined the domain successfully but after upgrading -to a newer version of the Samba code I get the message, The system -can not log you on (C000019B), Please try again or consult your -system administrator when attempting to logon. -

    -This occurs when the domain SID stored in the secrets.tdb database -is changed. The most common cause of a change in domain SID is when -the domain name and/or the server name (NetBIOS name) is changed. -The only way to correct the problem is to restore the original domain -SID or remove the domain client from the domain and rejoin. The domain -SID may be reset using either the net or rpcclient utilities. -

    -The reset or change the domain SID you can use the net command as follows: - -
    -root# net getlocalsid 'OLDNAME'
-root# net setlocalsid 'SID'
-
    -

    The machine trust account for this computer either does not -exist or is not accessible.

    -When I try to join the domain I get the message The machine account -for this computer either does not exist or is not accessible. What's -wrong? -

    -This problem is caused by the PDC not having a suitable machine trust account. -If you are using the add machine script method to create -accounts then this would indicate that it has not worked. Ensure the domain -admin user system is working. -

    -Alternatively if you are creating account entries manually then they -have not been created correctly. Make sure that you have the entry -correct for the machine trust account in smbpasswd file on the Samba PDC. -If you added the account using an editor rather than using the smbpasswd -utility, make sure that the account name is the machine NetBIOS name -with a '$' appended to it ( i.e. computer_name$ ). There must be an entry -in both /etc/passwd and the smbpasswd file. -

    -Some people have also reported -that inconsistent subnet masks between the Samba server and the NT -client can cause this problem. Make sure that these are consistent -for both client and server. -

    When I attempt to login to a Samba Domain from a NT4/W2K workstation, -I get a message about my account being disabled.

    -Enable the user accounts with smbpasswd -e username -, this is normally done as an account is created. -

    Until a few minutes after Samba has started, clients get the error "Domain Controller Unavailable"

    - A domain controller has to announce on the network who it is. This usually takes a while. -

    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 4. Server Types and Security Modes Home Chapter 6. Backup Domain Control
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/samba.7.html b/docs/htmldocs/samba.7.html index 222bdee995..e5380131e1 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/samba.7.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/samba.7.html @@ -1,113 +1,371 @@ -samba

    Name

    samba — A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX

    Synopsis

    Samba

    DESCRIPTION

    The Samba software suite is a collection of programs + + + %globalentities; + ]> + + + + samba + 7 + + + + + samba + A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX + + + + Samba + + + + DESCRIPTION + + The Samba software suite is a collection of programs that implements the Server Message Block (commonly abbreviated as SMB) protocol for UNIX systems. This protocol is sometimes also referred to as the Common Internet File System (CIFS). For a - more thorough description, see - http://www.ubiqx.org/cifs/. Samba also implements the NetBIOS - protocol in nmbd.

    smbd(8)

    The smbd daemon provides the file and print services to + more thorough description, see + http://www.ubiqx.org/cifs/. Samba also implements the NetBIOS + protocol in nmbd. + + + + smbd + 8 + The smbd daemon provides the file and print services to SMB clients, such as Windows 95/98, Windows NT, Windows for Workgroups or LanManager. The configuration file - for this daemon is described in smb.conf(5) -

    nmbd(8)

    The nmbd + for this daemon is described in smb.conf + 5 + + + + + nmbd + 8 + The nmbd daemon provides NetBIOS nameservice and browsing support. The configuration file for this daemon - is described in smb.conf(5)

    smbclient(1)

    The smbclient + is described in smb.conf + 5 + + + + + smbclient + 1 + The smbclient program implements a simple ftp-like client. This is useful for accessing SMB shares on other compatible servers (such as Windows NT), and can also be used to allow a UNIX box to print to a printer attached to - any SMB server (such as a PC running Windows NT).

    testparm(1)

    The testparm - utility is a simple syntax checker for Samba's smb.conf(5) configuration file.

    testprns(1)

    The testprns + any SMB server (such as a PC running Windows NT). + + + + + testparm + 1 + The testparm + utility is a simple syntax checker for Samba's smb.conf + 5 configuration file. + + + + + testprns + 1 + The testprns utility supports testing printer names defined - in your printcap file used - by Samba.

    smbstatus(1)

    The smbstatus + in your printcap file used + by Samba. + + + + + smbstatus + 1 + The smbstatus tool provides access to information about the - current connections to smbd.

    nmblookup(1)

    The nmblookup + current connections to smbd. + + + + + nmblookup + 1 + The nmblookup tools allows NetBIOS name queries to be made - from a UNIX host.

    smbgroupedit(8)

    The smbgroupedit + from a UNIX host. + + + + + smbgroupedit + 8 + The smbgroupedit tool allows for mapping unix groups to NT Builtin, Domain, or Local groups. Also it allows setting - priviledges for that group, such as saAddUser, etc.

    smbpasswd(8)

    The smbpasswd + priviledges for that group, such as saAddUser, etc. + + + + + smbpasswd + 8 + The smbpasswd command is a tool for changing LanMan and Windows NT - password hashes on Samba and Windows NT servers.

    smbcacls(1)

    The smbcacls command is - a tool to set ACL's on remote CIFS servers.

    smbsh(1)

    The smbsh command is + password hashes on Samba and Windows NT servers. + + + + + smbcacls + 1 + The smbcacls command is + a tool to set ACL's on remote CIFS servers. + + + + + smbsh + 1 + The smbsh command is a program that allows you to run a unix shell with - with an overloaded VFS.

    smbtree(1)

    The smbtree command - is a text-based network neighborhood tool.

    smbtar(1)

    The smbtar can make - backups of data on CIFS/SMB servers.

    smbspool(8)

    smbspool is a + with an overloaded VFS. + + + + smbtree + 1 + The smbtree command + is a text-based network neighborhood tool. + + + + smbtar + 1 + The smbtar can make + backups of data on CIFS/SMB servers. + + + + smbspool + 8 + smbspool is a helper utility for printing on printers connected - to CIFS servers.

    smbcontrol(1)

    smbcontrol is a utility + to CIFS servers. + + + + smbcontrol + 1 + smbcontrol is a utility that can change the behaviour of running samba daemons. -

    rpcclient(1)

    rpcclient is a utility + + + + + rpcclient + 1 + rpcclient is a utility that can be used to execute RPC commands on remote - CIFS servers.

    pdbedit(8)

    The pdbedit command + CIFS servers. + + + + pdbedit + 8 + The pdbedit command can be used to maintain the local user database on - a samba server.

    findsmb(1)

    The findsmb command + a samba server. + + + findsmb + 1 + The findsmb command can be used to find SMB servers on the local network. -

    net(8)

    The net command + + + + net + 8 + The net command is supposed to work similar to the DOS/Windows - NET.EXE command.

    swat(8)

    swat is a web-based - interface to configuring smb.conf. -

    winbindd(8)

    winbindd is a daemon + NET.EXE command. + + + + swat + 8 + swat is a web-based + interface to configuring smb.conf. + + + + + winbindd + 8 + winbindd is a daemon that is used for integrating authentication and - the user database into unix.

    wbinfo(1)

    wbinfo is a utility + the user database into unix. + + + + wbinfo + 1 + wbinfo is a utility that retrieves and stores information related to winbind. -

    editreg(1)

    editreg is a command-line + + + + + editreg + 1 + editreg is a command-line utility that can edit windows registry files. -

    profiles(1)

    profiles is a command-line + + + + + profiles + 1 + profiles is a command-line utility that can be used to replace all occurences of a certain SID with another SID. -

    vfstest(1)

    vfstest is a utility - that can be used to test vfs modules.

    ntlm_auth(1)

    ntlm_auth is a helper-utility + + + + + vfstest + 1 + vfstest is a utility + that can be used to test vfs modules. + + + + ntlm_auth + 1 + ntlm_auth is a helper-utility for external programs wanting to do NTLM-authentication. -

    smbmount(8), smbumount(8), smbmount(8)

    smbmount,smbmnt and smbmnt are commands that can be used to + + + + smbmount + 8, smbumount8, smbmount8 + smbmount,smbmnt and smbmnt are commands that can be used to mount CIFS/SMB shares on Linux. -

    smbcquotas(1)

    smbcquotas is a tool that - can set remote QUOTA's on server with NTFS 5.

    COMPONENTS

    The Samba suite is made up of several components. Each + + + + + smbcquotas + 1 + smbcquotas is a tool that + can set remote QUOTA's on server with NTFS 5. + + + + + + + COMPONENTS + + The Samba suite is made up of several components. Each component is described in a separate manual page. It is strongly recommended that you read the documentation that comes with Samba and the manual pages of those components that you use. If the manual pages and documents aren't clear enough then please visit - http://devel.samba.org - for information on how to file a bug report or submit a patch.

    If you require help, visit the Samba webpage at - http://www.samba.org/ and + http://devel.samba.org + for information on how to file a bug report or submit a patch. + + If you require help, visit the Samba webpage at + http://www.samba.org/ and explore the many option available to you. -

    AVAILABILITY

    The Samba software suite is licensed under the + + + + + AVAILABILITY + + The Samba software suite is licensed under the GNU Public License(GPL). A copy of that license should have come with the package in the file COPYING. You are encouraged to distribute copies of the Samba suite, but - please obey the terms of this license.

    The latest version of the Samba suite can be + please obey the terms of this license. + + The latest version of the Samba suite can be obtained via anonymous ftp from samba.org in the directory pub/samba/. It is also available on several - mirror sites worldwide.

    You may also find useful information about Samba - on the newsgroup - comp.protocol.smb and the Samba mailing + mirror sites worldwide. + + You may also find useful information about Samba + on the newsgroup + comp.protocol.smb and the Samba mailing list. Details on how to join the mailing list are given in - the README file that comes with Samba.

    If you have access to a WWW viewer (such as Mozilla + the README file that comes with Samba. + + If you have access to a WWW viewer (such as Mozilla or Konqueror) then you will also find lots of useful information, including back issues of the Samba mailing list, at - http://lists.samba.org.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the - Samba suite.

    CONTRIBUTIONS

    If you wish to contribute to the Samba project, + http://lists.samba.org. + + + + VERSION + + This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the + Samba suite. + + + + CONTRIBUTIONS + + If you wish to contribute to the Samba project, then I suggest you join the Samba mailing list at - http://lists.samba.org. -

    If you have patches to submit, visit - http://devel.samba.org/ + http://lists.samba.org. + + + If you have patches to submit, visit + http://devel.samba.org/ for information on how to do it properly. We prefer patches - in diff -u format.

    CONTRIBUTORS

    Contributors to the project are now too numerous + in diff -u format. + + + + CONTRIBUTORS + + Contributors to the project are now too numerous to mention here but all deserve the thanks of all Samba users. To see a full list, look at the - change-log in the source package - for the pre-CVS changes and at - http://cvs.samba.org/ + change-log in the source package + for the pre-CVS changes and at + http://cvs.samba.org/ for the contributors to Samba post-CVS. CVS is the Open Source source code control system used by the Samba Team to develop - Samba. The project would have been unmanageable without it.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + Samba. The project would have been unmanageable without it. + + + + AUTHOR + + The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. + to the way the Linux kernel is developed. + + The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at - ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML - 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.

    + 4.2 for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy. + + + diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/securing-samba.html b/docs/htmldocs/securing-samba.html deleted file mode 100644 index bdbc2ae0b5..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/securing-samba.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,207 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 15. Securing Samba
    Chapter 15. Securing Samba
    Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

    Chapter 15. Securing Samba

    Andrew Tridgell

    Samba Team

    John H. Terpstra

    Samba Team

    May 26, 2003

    Table of Contents

    Introduction
    Features and Benefits
    Technical Discussion of Protective Measures and Issues
    Using host based protection
    User based protection
    Using interface protection
    Using a firewall
    Using a IPC$ share deny
    NTLMv2 Security
    Upgrading Samba
    Common Errors
    Smbclient works on localhost, but the network is dead
    Why can users access home directories of other users?

    Introduction

    -This note was attached to the Samba 2.2.8 release notes as it contained an -important security fix. The information contained here applies to Samba -installations in general. -

    -A new apprentice reported for duty to the Chief Engineer of a boiler house. He said, "Here I am, -if you will show me the boiler I'll start working on it." Then engineer replied, "You're leaning -on it!" -

    -Security concerns are just like that: You need to know a little about the subject to appreciate -how obvious most of it really is. The challenge for most of us is to discover that first morsel -of knowledge with which we may unlock the secrets of the masters. -

    Features and Benefits

    -There are three level at which security principals must be observed in order to render a site -at least moderately secure. These are: the perimeter firewall, the configuration of the host -server that is running Samba, and Samba itself. -

    -Samba permits a most flexible approach to network security. As far as possible Samba implements -the latest protocols to permit more secure MS Windows file and print operations. -

    -Samba may be secured from connections that originate from outside the local network. This may be -done using host based protection (using samba's implementation of a technology -known as "tcpwrappers", or it may be done be using interface based exclusion -so that smbd will bind only to specifically permitted interfaces. It is also -possible to set specific share or resource based exclusions, eg: on the IPC$ -auto-share. The IPC$ share is used for browsing purposes as well as to establish -TCP/IP connections. -

    -Another method by which Samba may be secured is by way of setting Access Control Entries in an Access -Control List on the shares themselves. This is discussed in the chapter on File, Directory and Share Access -Control. -

    Technical Discussion of Protective Measures and Issues

    -The key challenge of security is the fact that protective measures suffice at best -only to close the door on known exploits and breach techniques. Never assume that -because you have followed these few measures that the Samba server is now an impenetrable -fortress! Given the history of information systems so far, it is only a matter of time -before someone will find yet another vulnerability. -

    Using host based protection

    - In many installations of Samba the greatest threat comes for outside - your immediate network. By default Samba will accept connections from - any host, which means that if you run an insecure version of Samba on - a host that is directly connected to the Internet you can be - especially vulnerable. -

    - One of the simplest fixes in this case is to use the hosts allow and - hosts deny options in the Samba smb.conf configuration file to only - allow access to your server from a specific range of hosts. An example - might be: - 

    -		hosts allow = 127.0.0.1 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.3.0/24
-		hosts deny = 0.0.0.0/0
-

    - The above will only allow SMB connections from 'localhost' (your own - computer) and from the two private networks 192.168.2 and - 192.168.3. All other connections will be refused as soon - as the client sends its first packet. The refusal will be marked as a - not listening on called name error. -

    User based protection

    - If you want to restrict access to your server to valid users only then the following - method may be of use. In the smb.conf [globals] section put: - 

    -		valid users = @smbusers, jacko
-

    - What this does is, it restricts all server access to either the user jacko - or to members of the system group smbusers. -

    Using interface protection

    - By default Samba will accept connections on any network interface that - it finds on your system. That means if you have a ISDN line or a PPP - connection to the Internet then Samba will accept connections on those - links. This may not be what you want. -

    - You can change this behaviour using options like the following: - 

    -		interfaces = eth* lo
-		bind interfaces only = yes
-

    - This tells Samba to only listen for connections on interfaces with a - name starting with 'eth' such as eth0, eth1, plus on the loopback - interface called 'lo'. The name you will need to use depends on what - OS you are using, in the above I used the common name for Ethernet - adapters on Linux. -

    - If you use the above and someone tries to make a SMB connection to - your host over a PPP interface called 'ppp0' then they will get a TCP - connection refused reply. In that case no Samba code is run at all as - the operating system has been told not to pass connections from that - interface to any samba process. -

    Using a firewall

    - Many people use a firewall to deny access to services that they don't - want exposed outside their network. This can be a very good idea, - although I would recommend using it in conjunction with the above - methods so that you are protected even if your firewall is not active - for some reason. -

    - If you are setting up a firewall then you need to know what TCP and - UDP ports to allow and block. Samba uses the following: -

    UDP/137 - used by nmbd
    UDP/138 - used by nmbd
    TCP/139 - used by smbd
    TCP/445 - used by smbd

    - The last one is important as many older firewall setups may not be - aware of it, given that this port was only added to the protocol in - recent years. -

    Using a IPC$ share deny

    - If the above methods are not suitable, then you could also place a - more specific deny on the IPC$ share that is used in the recently - discovered security hole. This allows you to offer access to other - shares while denying access to IPC$ from potentially untrustworthy - hosts. -

    - To do that you could use: - 

    -[ipc$]
-	hosts allow = 192.168.115.0/24 127.0.0.1
-	hosts deny = 0.0.0.0/0
-

    - this would tell Samba that IPC$ connections are not allowed from - anywhere but the two listed places (localhost and a local - subnet). Connections to other shares would still be allowed. As the - IPC$ share is the only share that is always accessible anonymously - this provides some level of protection against attackers that do not - know a username/password for your host. -

    - If you use this method then clients will be given a access denied - reply when they try to access the IPC$ share. That means that those - clients will not be able to browse shares, and may also be unable to - access some other resources. -

    - This is not recommended unless you cannot use one of the other - methods listed above for some reason. -

    NTLMv2 Security

    - To configure NTLMv2 authentication the following registry keys are worth knowing about: -

    - 
    -		[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Lsa]
-		"lmcompatibilitylevel"=dword:00000003
-
-		0x3 - Send NTLMv2 response only. Clients will use NTLMv2 authentication,
-		use NTLMv2 session security if the server supports it. Domain
-		controllers accept LM, NTLM and NTLMv2 authentication.
-
-		[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Lsa\MSV1_0]
-		"NtlmMinClientSec"=dword:00080000
-
-		0x80000 - NTLMv2 session security. If either NtlmMinClientSec or
-		NtlmMinServerSec is set to 0x80000, the connection will fail if NTLMv2
-		session security is not negotiated.
-
    -

    Upgrading Samba

    -Please check regularly on http://www.samba.org/ for updates and -important announcements. Occasionally security releases are made and -it is highly recommended to upgrade Samba when a security vulnerability -is discovered. -

    Common Errors

    -If all of samba and host platform configuration were really as intuitive as one might like then this -section would not be necessary. Security issues are often vexing for a support person to resolve, not -because of the complexity of the problem, but for reason that most administrators who post what turns -out to be a security problem request are totally convinced that the problem is with Samba. -

    Smbclient works on localhost, but the network is dead

    - This is a very common problem. Red Hat Linux (as do others) will install a default firewall. - With the default firewall in place only traffic on the loopback adapter (IP address 127.0.0.1) - will be allowed through the firewall. -

    - The solution is either to remove the firewall (stop it) or to modify the firewall script to - allow SMB networking traffic through. See section above in this chapter. -

    Why can users access home directories of other users?

    - “ - We are unable to keep individual users from mapping to any other user's - home directory once they have supplied a valid password! They only need - to enter their own password. I have not found *any* method that I can - use to configure samba to enforce that only a user may map their own - home directory. - ” -

    “ - User xyzzy can map his home directory. Once mapped user xyzzy can also map - *anyone* else's home directory! - ”

    - This is not a security flaw, it is by design. Samba allows - users to have *exactly* the same access to the UNIX filesystem - as they would if they were logged onto the UNIX box, except - that it only allows such views onto the file system as are - allowed by the defined shares. -

    - This means that if your UNIX home directories are set up - such that one user can happily cd into another users - directory and do an ls, the UNIX security solution is to - change the UNIX file permissions on the users home directories - such that the cd and ls would be denied. -

    - Samba tries very hard not to second guess the UNIX administrators - security policies, and trusts the UNIX admin to set - the policies and permissions he or she desires. -

    - Samba does allow the setup you require when you have set the - only user = yes option on the share, is that you have not set the - valid users list for the share. -

    - Note that only user works in conjunction with the users= list, - so to get the behavior you require, add the line : - 
    -	users = %S
-
    - this is equivalent to: - 
    -	valid users = %S
-
    - to the definition of the [homes] share, as recommended in - the smb.conf man page. -
    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 14. File and Record Locking Home Chapter 16. Interdomain Trust Relationships
    diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html index 2b3d51d6f6..4928d41048 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html @@ -244,8 +244,8 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... connection is made as the username given in the "guest account =" for the service, irrespective of the supplied password.

    COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS

    Here is a list of all global parameters. See the section of - each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.

    COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS

    Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section on - each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.

    EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER

    abort shutdown script (G)

    This parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch + each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.

    COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS

    Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section on + each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.

    EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER

    abort shutdown script (G)

    This parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch This a full path name to a script called by smbd(8) that should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the shutdown script.

    This command will be run as user.

    Default: None.

    Example: abort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c

    add group script (G)

    This is the full pathname to a script that will be run @@ -571,7 +571,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... policy, and specifies how clients capable of offline caching will cache the files in the share. The valid values are: manual, documents, programs, disable.

    These values correspond to those used on Windows servers.

    For example, shares containing roaming profiles can have - offline caching disabled using csc policy = disable.

    Default: csc policy = manual

    Example: csc policy = programs

    dead time (G)

    The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) + offline caching disabled using csc policy = disable.

    Default: csc policy = manual

    Example: csc policy = programs

    deadtime (G)

    The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes effect if the number of open files is zero.

    This is useful to stop a server's resources being @@ -600,8 +600,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers in the log file if turned on.

    Note that the parameter debug timestamp must be on for this to have an - effect.

    Default: debug uid = no

    default (G)

    A synonym for - default service.

    default case (S)

    See the section on + effect.

    Default: debug uid = no

    default case (S)

    See the section on NAME MANGLING. Also note the short preserve case parameter.

    Default: default case = lower

    default devmode (S)

    This parameter is only applicable to printable services. When smbd is serving Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba @@ -642,7 +641,8 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... [pub] path = /%S -

    delete group script (G)

    This is the full pathname to a script that will +

    default (G)

    A synonym for + default service.

    delete group script (G)

    This is the full pathname to a script that will be run AS ROOT smbd(8) when a group is requested to be deleted. It will expand any %g to the group name passed. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools. @@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}'

    or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):

     
 #!/bin/sh
 /usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}'
-

    Note that you may have to replace the command names with full path names on some systems.

    directory (S)

    Synonym for path.

    directory mask (S)

    This parameter is the octal modes which are +

    Note that you may have to replace the command names with full path names on some systems.

    directory mask (S)

    This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories.

    When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, @@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' force directory security mode, security mask, force security mode - parameters.

    Default: directory security mask = 0777

    Example: directory security mask = 0700

    disable netbios (G)

    Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support + parameters.

    Default: directory security mask = 0777

    Example: directory security mask = 0700

    directory (S)

    Synonym for path.

    disable netbios (G)

    Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support in Samba. Netbios is the only available form of browsing in all windows versions except for 2000 and XP.

    Note

    Note that clients that only support netbios won't be able to see your samba server when netbios support is disabled. @@ -1054,7 +1054,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially when the wide links parameter is set to no.

    Default: getwd cache = yes

    group (S)

    Synonym for - force group.

    guest account (G,S)

    This is a username which will be used for access + force group.

    guest account (G)

    This is a username which will be used for access to services which are specified as guest ok (see below). Whatever privileges this user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service. @@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' have a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice for this parameter. If a username is specified in a given service, the specified username overrides this one. -

    One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not +

    On some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not be able to print. Use another account in this case. You should test this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the su - command) and trying to print using the @@ -1117,9 +1117,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' automounter) maps.

    Note

    A working NIS client is required on the system for this option to work.

    See also nis homedir , domain logons - .

    Default: homedir map = <empty string>

    Example: homedir map = amd.homedir

    host msdfs (G)

    This boolean parameter is only available - if Samba has been configured and compiled with the - --with-msdfs option. If set to yes, + .

    Default: homedir map = <empty string>

    Example: homedir map = amd.homedir

    host msdfs (G)

    If set to yes, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server.

    See also the msdfs root share level parameter. For @@ -1164,8 +1162,14 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' hosts equiv option be only used if you really know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust your spouse and kids. And only if you really trust - them :-).

    Default: no host equivalences

    Example: hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv

    idmap gid (G)

    The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for - the purpose of mapping UNX groups to NT group SIDs. This range of group ids should have no + them :-).

    Default: no host equivalences

    Example: hosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv

    idmap backend (G)

    + The purpose of the idmap backend parameter is to allow idmap to NOT use the local idmap + tdb file to obtain SID to UID / GID mappings, but instead to obtain them from a common + LDAP backend. This way all domain members and controllers will have the same UID and GID + to SID mappings. This avoids the risk of UID / GID inconsistencies across UNIX / Linux + systems that are sharing information over protocols other than SMB/CIFS (ie: NFS). +

    Default: idmap backend = <empty string>

    Example: idmap backend = ldapsam://ldapslave.example.com

    idmap gid (G)

    The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for + the purpose of mapping UNIX groups to NT group SIDs. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.

    The availability of an idmap gid range is essential for correct operation of all group mapping.

    Default: idmap gid = <empty string>

    Example: idmap gid = 10000-20000

    idmap uid (G)

    The idmap uid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are allocated for use in mapping UNIX users to NT user SIDs. This range of ids should have no existing local @@ -1375,12 +1379,12 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' yes doesn't mean that Samba will become the local master browser on a subnet, just that nmbd will participate in elections for local master browser.

    Setting this value to no will cause nmbd never to become a local - master browser.

    Default: local master = yes

    lock dir (G)

    Synonym for - lock directory. -

    lock directory (G)

    This option specifies the directory where lock + master browser.

    Default: local master = yes

    lock directory (G)

    This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed. The lock files are used to implement the max connections - option.

    Default: lock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks

    Example: lock directory = /var/run/samba/locks

    locking (S)

    This controls whether or not locking will be + option.

    Default: lock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks

    Example: lock directory = /var/run/samba/locks

    lock dir (G)

    Synonym for + lock directory. +

    locking (S)

    This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server in response to lock requests from the client.

    If locking = no, all lock and unlock requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report @@ -1398,7 +1402,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' in case the lock could later be aquired. This behavior is used to support PC database formats such as MS Access and FoxPro. -

    Default: lock spin count = 2

    lock spin time (G)

    The time in microseconds that smbd should +

    Default: lock spin count = 3

    lock spin time (G)

    The time in microseconds that smbd should pause before attempting to gain a failed lock. See lock spin count for more details.

    Default: lock spin time = 10

    log file (G)

    This option allows you to override the name @@ -1613,10 +1617,12 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' characters from the original name used when generating the mangled names. A larger value will give a weaker hash and therefore more name collisions. The minimum - value is 1 and the maximum value is 6.

    Default: mangle prefix = 1

    Example: mangle prefix = 4

    mangling char (S)

    This controls what character is used as + value is 1 and the maximum value is 6.

    + mangle prefix is effective only when mangling method is hash2. +

    Default: mangle prefix = 1

    Example: mangle prefix = 4

    mangling char (S)

    This controls what character is used as the magic character in name mangling. The default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set - it to whatever you prefer.

    Default: mangling char = ~

    Example: mangling char = ^

    mangling method (G)

    controls the algorithm used for the generating + it to whatever you prefer. This is effective only when mangling method is hash.

    Default: mangling char = ~

    Example: mangling char = ^

    mangling method (G)

    controls the algorithm used for the generating the mangled names. Can take two different values, "hash" and "hash2". "hash" is the default and is the algorithm that has been used in Samba for many years. "hash2" is a newer and considered @@ -1702,7 +1708,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter.

    Default: max open files = 10000

    max print jobs (S)

    This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment. If this number is exceeded, smbd(8) will remote "Out of Space" to the client. - See all total + See all total print jobs.

    Default: max print jobs = 1000

    Example: max print jobs = 5000

    max protocol (G)

    The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level that will be supported by the server.

    Possible values are :

    • CORE: Earliest version. No @@ -1719,7 +1725,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' A value of zero means there is no limit on the number of print jobs reported. - See all total + See all total print jobs and max print jobs parameters.

      Default: max reported print jobs = 0

      Example: max reported print jobs = 1000

    max smbd processes (G)

    This parameter limits the maximum number of smbd(8) processes concurrently running on a system and is intended @@ -1793,9 +1799,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' the SMB-Dfs protocol.

    Only Dfs roots can act as proxy shares. Take a look at the msdfs root and host msdfs - options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share.

    Example: msdfs proxy = \\\\otherserver\\someshare

    msdfs root (S)

    This boolean parameter is only available if - Samba is configured and compiled with the - --with-msdfs option. If set to yes, + options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share.

    Example: msdfs proxy = \\\\otherserver\\someshare

    msdfs root (S)

    If set to yes, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic @@ -1966,15 +1970,15 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' to the logs and exit.

    Disabling this option prevents Samba from making this check, which involves deliberatly attempting a - bad logon to the remote server.

    Default: paranoid server security = yes

    passdb backend (G)

    This option allows the administrator to chose which backends + bad logon to the remote server.

    Default: paranoid server security = yes

    passdb backend (G)

    This option allows the administrator to chose which backends to retrieve and store passwords with. This allows (for example) both smbpasswd and tdbsam to be used without a recompile. Multiple backends can be specified, separated by spaces. The backends will be searched in the order they are specified. New users are always added to the first backend specified.

    This parameter is in two parts, the backend's name, and a 'location' string that has meaning only to that particular backed. These are separated - by a : character.

    Available backends can include: -

    • smbpasswd - The default smbpasswd + by a : character.

      Available backends can include: +

      • smbpasswd - The default smbpasswd backend. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument.

      • tdbsam - The TDB based password storage backend. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb @@ -1995,8 +1999,22 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' Very simple backend that only provides one user: the guest user. Only maps the NT guest user to the guest account. Required in pretty much all situations. -

      -

      Default: passdb backend = smbpasswd

      Example: passdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb smbpasswd:/etc/samba/smbpasswd guest

      Example: passdb backend = ldapsam:ldaps://ldap.example.com guest

      Example: passdb backend = mysql:my_plugin_args tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb guest

    passwd chat (G)

    This string controls the "chat" +

    +

    Default: passdb backend = smbpasswd

    Example: passdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb smbpasswd:/etc/samba/smbpasswd guest

    Example: passdb backend = ldapsam:ldaps://ldap.example.com guest

    Example: passdb backend = mysql:my_plugin_args tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb guest

    passwd chat debug (G)

    This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script + parameter is run in debug mode. In this mode the + strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed + in the smbd(8) log with a + debug level + of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords + to be seen in the smbd log. It is available to help + Samba admins debug their passwd chat scripts + when calling the passwd program and should + be turned off after this has been done. This option has no effect if the + pam password change + paramter is set. This parameter is off by default.

    See also passwd chat + , pam password change + , passwd program + .

    Default: passwd chat debug = no

    passwd chat (G)

    This string controls the "chat" conversation that takes places between smbd(8) and the local password changing program to change the user's password. The string describes a sequence of response-receive pairs that smbd(8) uses to determine what to send to the @@ -2030,21 +2048,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' pam password change.

    Default: passwd chat = *new*password* %n\\n *new*password* %n\\n *changed*

    Example: passwd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\\n "*Enter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\\n - "*Password changed*"

    passwd chat debug (G)

    This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script - parameter is run in debug mode. In this mode the - strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed - in the smbd(8) log with a - debug level - of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords - to be seen in the smbd log. It is available to help - Samba admins debug their passwd chat scripts - when calling the passwd program and should - be turned off after this has been done. This option has no effect if the - pam password change - paramter is set. This parameter is off by default.

    See also passwd chat - , pam password change - , passwd program - .

    Default: passwd chat debug = no

    passwd program (G)

    The name of a program that can be used to set + "*Password changed*"

    passwd program (G)

    The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords. Any occurrences of %u will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for existence before calling the password changing program.

    Also note that many passwd programs insist in reasonable @@ -2061,7 +2065,12 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' is set this parameter MUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS for ALL programs called, and must be examined for security implications. Note that by default unix - password sync is set to no.

    See also unix + password sync is set to no.

    Not that this program is only invoked when a password change is + done via the smbd program, not when smbpasswd is used locally as root to + change a password. This means that you cannot run "smbpasswd USERNAME" as + root on the SMB server in order to test this parameter, but should run the + command "smbpasswd -r SMBMACHINE" as a non-root user instead if you want + to test the invocation of this program.

    See also unix password sync.

    Default: passwd program = /bin/passwd

    Example: passwd program = /sbin/npasswd %u

    password level (G)

    Some client/server combinations have difficulty with mixed-case passwords. One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper @@ -2158,13 +2167,13 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some systems.

    An interesting example may be to unmount server - resources:

    postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom

    See also preexec.

    Default: none (no command executed)

    Example: postexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log

    preexec (S)

    This option specifies a command to be run whenever + resources:

    postexec = /etc/umount /cdrom

    See also preexec.

    Default: none (no command executed)

    Example: postexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log

    preexec close (S)

    This boolean option controls whether a non-zero + return code from preexec + should close the service being connected to.

    Default: preexec close = no

    preexec (S)

    This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.

    An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example:

    preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' &

    Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)

    See also preexec close and postexec - .

    Default: none (no command executed)

    Example: preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log

    preexec close (S)

    This boolean option controls whether a non-zero - return code from preexec - should close the service being connected to.

    Default: preexec close = no

    prefered master (G)

    Synonym for + .

    Default: none (no command executed)

    Example: preexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log

    prefered master (G)

    Synonym for preferred master for people who cannot spell :-).

    preferred master (G)

    This boolean parameter controls if nmbd(8) is a preferred master browser for its workgroup.

    If this is set to yes, on startup, nmbd @@ -2177,15 +2186,15 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' preferred master browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically and continuously attempt to become the local master browser. This will result in unnecessary broadcast - traffic and reduced browsing capabilities.

    See also os level.

    Default: preferred master = auto

    preload (G)

    This is a list of services that you want to be + traffic and reduced browsing capabilities.

    See also os level.

    Default: preferred master = auto

    preload modules (G)

    This is a list of paths to modules that should + be loaded into smbd before a client connects. This improves + the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat.

    It is recommended to only use this option on heavy-performance + servers.

    Default: preload modules =

    Example: preload modules = /usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so+++

    preload (G)

    This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be visible.

    Note that if you just want all printers in your printcap file loaded then the - load printers option is easier.

    Default: no preloaded services

    Example: preload = fred lp colorlp

    preload modules (G)

    This is a list of paths to modules that should - be loaded into smbd before a client connects. This improves - the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat.

    It is recommended to only use this option on heavy-performance - servers.

    Default: preload modules =

    Example: preload modules = /usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so+++

    preserve case (S)

    This controls if new filenames are created + load printers option is easier.

    Default: no preloaded services

    Example: preload = fred lp colorlp

    preserve case (S)

    This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the default case .

    Default: preserve case = yes

    See the section on NAME MANGLING for a fuller discussion.

    printable (S)

    If this parameter is yes, then @@ -2194,8 +2203,7 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}' to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling of print data. The read only parameter controls only non-printing access to - the resource.

    Default: printable = no

    printcap (G)

    Synonym for - printcap name.

    printcap name (S)

    This parameter may be used to override the + the resource.

    Default: printable = no

    printcap name (S)

    This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually /etc/printcap). See the discussion of the [printers] section above for reasons why you might want to do this.

    To use the CUPS printing interface set printcap name = cups @@ -2222,7 +2230,8 @@ print5|My Printer 5 that it's a comment.

    Note

    Under AIX the default printcap name is /etc/qconfig. Samba will assume the file is in AIX qconfig format if the string - qconfig appears in the printcap filename.

    Default: printcap name = /etc/printcap

    Example: printcap name = /etc/myprintcap

    print command (S)

    After a print job has finished spooling to + qconfig appears in the printcap filename.

    Default: printcap name = /etc/printcap

    Example: printcap name = /etc/myprintcap

    printcap (G)

    Synonym for + printcap name.

    print command (S)

    After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command will be used via a system() call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there @@ -2263,15 +2272,15 @@ print5|My Printer 5 uses lp -c -d%p -oraw; rm %s. With printing = cups, and if SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any manually - set print command will be ignored.

    Example: print command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s

    printer (S)

    Synonym for - printer name.

    printer admin (S)

    This is a list of users that can do anything to + set print command will be ignored.

    Example: print command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s

    printer admin (S)

    This is a list of users that can do anything to printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC (usually using a NT workstation). Note that the root user always has admin rights.

    Default: printer admin = <empty string>

    Example: printer admin = admin, @staff

    printer name (S)

    This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.

    If specified in the [global] section, the printer name given will be used for any printable service that does not have its own printer name specified.

    Default: none (but may be lp - on many systems)

    Example: printer name = laserwriter

    printing (S)

    This parameters controls how printer status information is + on many systems)

    Example: printer name = laserwriter

    printer (S)

    Synonym for + printer name.

    printing (S)

    This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted on your system. It also affects the default values for the print command, lpq command, lppause command , lpresume command, and lprm command if specified in the [global] section.

    Currently nine printing styles are supported. They are @@ -2418,11 +2427,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 2 is removed by setting guest ok = yes on any share. -

    Default: restrict anonymous = 0

    root (G)

    Synonym for - root directory". -

    root dir (G)

    Synonym for - root directory". -

    root directory (G)

    The server will chroot() (i.e. +

    Default: restrict anonymous = 0

    root directory (G)

    The server will chroot() (i.e. Change its root directory) to this directory on startup. This is not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries. @@ -2442,19 +2447,40 @@ print5|My Printer 5 you will need to mirror /etc/passwd (or a subset of it), and any binaries or configuration files needed for printing (if required). The set of files that must be mirrored is - operating system dependent.

    Default: root directory = /

    Example: root directory = /homes/smb

    root postexec (S)

    This is the same as the postexec + operating system dependent.

    Default: root directory = /

    Example: root directory = /homes/smb

    root dir (G)

    Synonym for + root directory". +

    root postexec (S)

    This is the same as the postexec parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for unmounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed.

    See also - postexec.

    Default: root postexec = <empty string>

    root preexec (S)

    This is the same as the preexec + postexec.

    Default: root postexec = <empty string>

    root preexec close (S)

    This is the same as the preexec close + parameter except that the command is run as root.

    See also + preexec and + preexec close.

    Default: root preexec close = no

    root preexec (S)

    This is the same as the preexec parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a connection is opened.

    See also preexec and - preexec close.

    Default: root preexec = <empty string>

    root preexec close (S)

    This is the same as the preexec close - parameter except that the command is run as root.

    See also - preexec and - preexec close.

    Default: root preexec close = no

    security (G)

    This option affects how clients respond to + preexec close.

    Default: root preexec = <empty string>

    root (G)

    Synonym for + root directory". +

    security mask (S)

    This parameter controls what UNIX permission + bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating + the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security + dialog box.

    This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to + the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in + this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this + mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed + to change.

    If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing + a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file. +

    Note that users who can access the + Samba server through other means can easily bypass this + restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone + "appliance" systems. Administrators of most normal systems will + probably want to leave it set to 0777.

    See also the + force directory security mode, + directory + security mask, + force security mode parameters.

    Default: security mask = 0777

    Example: security mask = 0770

    security (G)

    This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the most important settings in the smb.conf file.

    The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to protocol negotiations with smbd(8) to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide @@ -2462,8 +2488,8 @@ print5|My Printer 5 information to the server.

    The default is security = user, as this is the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and Windows NT.

    The alternatives are security = share, - security = server or security = domain - .

    In versions of Samba prior to 2.0.0, the default was + security = server, security = domain + , or security = ads.

    In versions of Samba prior to 2.0.0, the default was security = share mainly because that was the only option at one stage.

    There is a bug in WfWg that has relevance to this setting. When in user or server level security a WfWg client @@ -2600,24 +2626,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 Controller.

    Read the chapter about Domain Membership in the HOWTO for details.

    See also the ads server parameter, the realm paramter and the - encrypted passwords parameter.

    Default: security = USER

    Example: security = DOMAIN

    security mask (S)

    This parameter controls what UNIX permission - bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating - the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security - dialog box.

    This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to - the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in - this mask from being modified. Essentially, zero bits in this - mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed - to change.

    If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing - a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file. -

    Note that users who can access the - Samba server through other means can easily bypass this - restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone - "appliance" systems. Administrators of most normal systems will - probably want to leave it set to 0777.

    See also the - force directory security mode, - directory - security mask, - force security mode parameters.

    Default: security mask = 0777

    Example: security mask = 0770

    server schannel (G)

    This controls whether the server offers or even + encrypted passwords parameter.

    Default: security = USER

    Example: security = DOMAIN

    server schannel (G)

    This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel. server schannel = no does not offer the schannel, server schannel = @@ -2682,7 +2691,7 @@ print5|My Printer 5 administrative privilege on an individual printer.

    See also addprinter command, deleteprinter command, - printer admin

    Default :show add printer wizard = yes

    shutdown script (G)

    This parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch + printer admin

    Default :show add printer wizard = yes

    shutdown script (G)

    This parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch This a full path name to a script called by smbd(8) that should start a shutdown procedure.

    This command will be run as the user connected to the server.

    %m %t %r %f parameters are expanded:

    • %m will be substituted with the shutdown message sent to the server.

    • %t will be substituted with the number of seconds to wait before effectively starting the @@ -2690,8 +2699,8 @@ print5|My Printer 5 switch -r. It means reboot after shutdown for NT.

    • %f will be substituted with the switch -f. It means force the shutdown - even if applications do not respond for NT.

    Default: None.

    Example: abort shutdown script = /usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f

    Shutdown script example: -
    +			even if applications do not respond for NT.
    Default: None.
    Example: abort shutdown script = /usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f
    Shutdown script example:
+
     #!/bin/bash
 		
 $time=0
@@ -2699,9 +2708,9 @@ let "time/60"
 let "time++"
 
 /sbin/shutdown $3 $4 +$time $1 &
-
    
+

    Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background. -

    See also +

    See also abort shutdown script.

    smb passwd file (G)

    This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By default the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba.

    Default: smb passwd file = ${prefix}/private/smbpasswd

    Example: smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd

    smb ports (G)

    Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic.

    Default: smb ports = 445 139

    socket address (G)

    This option allows you to control what address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to @@ -2779,7 +2788,9 @@ Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background. the strict sync parameter must be set to yes in order for this parameter to have any affect.

    See also the strict - sync parameter.

    Default: sync always = no

    syslog (G)

    This parameter maps how Samba debug messages + sync parameter.

    Default: sync always = no

    syslog only (G)

    If this parameter is set then Samba debug + messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to + the debug log files.

    Default: syslog only = no

    syslog (G)

    This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog LOG_ERR, debug level one maps onto LOG_WARNING, debug level @@ -2787,9 +2798,7 @@ Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background. maps onto LOG_INFO. All higher levels are mapped to LOG_DEBUG.

    This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages to syslog. Only messages with debug level less than this value - will be sent to syslog.

    Default: syslog = 1

    syslog only (G)

    If this parameter is set then Samba debug - messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to - the debug log files.

    Default: syslog only = no

    template homedir (G)

    When filling out the user information for a Windows NT + will be sent to syslog.

    Default: syslog = 1

    template homedir (G)

    When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the winbindd(8) daemon uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user. If the string %D is present it @@ -2805,16 +2814,7 @@ Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background. you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight saving time handling.

    Default: time offset = 0

    Example: time offset = 60

    time server (G)

    This parameter determines if nmbd(8) advertises itself as a time server to Windows clients.

    Default: time server = no

    timestamp logs (G)

    Synonym for - debug timestamp.

    total print jobs (G)

    This parameter accepts an integer value which defines - a limit on the maximum number of print jobs that will be accepted - system wide at any given time. If a print job is submitted - by a client which will exceed this number, then smbd(8) will return an - error indicating that no space is available on the server. The - default value of 0 means that no such limit exists. This parameter - can be used to prevent a server from exceeding its capacity and is - designed as a printing throttle. See also - max print jobs. -

    Default: total print jobs = 0

    Example: total print jobs = 5000

    unicode (G)

    Specifies whether Samba should try + debug timestamp.

    unicode (G)

    Specifies whether Samba should try to use unicode on the wire by default. Note: This does NOT mean that samba will assume that the unix machine uses unicode!

    Default: unicode = yes

    unix charset (G)

    Specifies the charset the unix machine @@ -2883,42 +2883,7 @@ Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background. default on HPUX. On all other systems this parameter should be left alone. This parameter is provided to help the Samba developers track down problems with the tdb internal code. -

    Default: use mmap = yes

    user (S)

    Synonym for username.

    username (S)

    Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited - list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against - each username in turn (left to right).

    The username line is needed only when - the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case - for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg - usernames to UNIX usernames. In both these cases you may also be - better using the \\server\share%user syntax instead.

    The username line is not a great - solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate - the supplied password against each of the usernames in the - username line in turn. This is slow and - a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords. - You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter - unwisely.

    Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security. This - parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints - to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the - supplied password. Users can login as whoever they please and - they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a - telnet session. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, - so they cannot do anything that user cannot do.

    To restrict a service to a particular set of users you - can use the valid users - parameter.

    If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name - will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba - is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in - the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users - in the group of that name.

    If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name - will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will - expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.

    If any of the usernames begin with a '&' then the name - will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba - is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list - of all users in the netgroup group of that name.

    Note that searching though a groups database can take - quite some time, and some clients may time out during the - search.

    See the section NOTE ABOUT - USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION for more information on how - this parameter determines access to the services.

    Default: The guest account if a guest service, - else <empty string>.

    Examples:username = fred, mary, jack, jane, - @users, @pcgroup

    username level (G)

    This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at +

    Default: use mmap = yes

    username level (G)

    This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the @@ -2972,19 +2937,60 @@ guest = * modification.

    Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect this has is with printing. Users who have been mapped may have trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think - they don't own the print job.

    Default: no username map

    Example: username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map

    users (S)

    Synonym for - username.

    use sendfile (S)

    If this parameter is yes, and Samba - was built with the --with-sendfile-support option, and the underlying operating + they don't own the print job.

    Default: no username map

    Example: username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map

    username (S)

    Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited + list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against + each username in turn (left to right).

    The username line is needed only when + the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case + for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg + usernames to UNIX usernames. In both these cases you may also be + better using the \\server\share%user syntax instead.

    The username line is not a great + solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate + the supplied password against each of the usernames in the + username line in turn. This is slow and + a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords. + You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter + unwisely.

    Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security. This + parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints + to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the + supplied password. Users can login as whoever they please and + they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a + telnet session. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, + so they cannot do anything that user cannot do.

    To restrict a service to a particular set of users you + can use the valid users + parameter.

    If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name + will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba + is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in + the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users + in the group of that name.

    If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name + will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will + expand to a list of all users in the group of that name.

    If any of the usernames begin with a '&' then the name + will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba + is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list + of all users in the netgroup group of that name.

    Note that searching though a groups database can take + quite some time, and some clients may time out during the + search.

    See the section NOTE ABOUT + USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION for more information on how + this parameter determines access to the services.

    Default: The guest account if a guest service, + else <empty string>.

    Examples:username = fred, mary, jack, jane, + @users, @pcgroup

    users (S)

    Synonym for + username.

    user (S)

    Synonym for username.

    use sendfile (S)

    If this parameter is yes, and the underlying operating system supports sendfile system call, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that are exclusively oplocked. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU's - and cause Samba to be faster. This is off by default as it's effects are unknown - as yet.

    Default: use sendfile = no

    use spnego (G)

    This variable controls controls whether samba will try + and cause Samba to be faster.

    Default: use sendfile = no

    use spnego (G)

    This variable controls controls whether samba will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism. Unless further issues are discovered with our SPNEGO implementation, there is no reason this should ever be - disabled.

    Default: use spnego = yes

    utmp (G)

    This boolean parameter is only available if + disabled.

    Default: use spnego = yes

    utmp directory (G)

    This parameter is only available if Samba has + been configured and compiled with the option + --with-utmp. It specifies a directory pathname that is + used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that + record user connections to a Samba server. See also the + utmp parameter. By default this is + not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the + native system is set to use (usually + /var/run/utmp on Linux).

    Default: no utmp directory

    Example: utmp directory = /var/run/utmp

    utmp (G)

    This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option --with-utmp. If set to yes then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a @@ -2994,22 +3000,7 @@ guest = * incoming user. Enabling this option creates an n^2 algorithm to find this number. This may impede performance on large installations.

    See also the - utmp directory parameter.

    Default: utmp = no

    utmp directory (G)

    This parameter is only available if Samba has - been configured and compiled with the option - --with-utmp. It specifies a directory pathname that is - used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that - record user connections to a Samba server. See also the - utmp parameter. By default this is - not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the - native system is set to use (usually - /var/run/utmp on Linux).

    Default: no utmp directory

    Example: utmp directory = /var/run/utmp

    -valid (S)

    This parameter indicates whether a share is - valid and thus can be used. When this parameter is set to false, - the share will be in no way visible nor accessible. -

    - This option should not be - used by regular users but might be of help to developers. - Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted. -

    Default: True

    valid users (S)

    This is a list of users that should be allowed + utmp directory parameter.

    Default: utmp = no

    valid users (S)

    This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&' are interpreted using the same rules as described in the invalid users parameter.

    If this is empty (the default) then any user can login. @@ -3017,7 +3008,14 @@ guest = * users list then access is denied for that user.

    The current servicename is substituted for %S . This is useful in the [homes] section.

    See also invalid users

    Default: No valid users list (anyone can login) -

    Example: valid users = greg, @pcusers

    veto files (S)

    This is a list of files and directories that +

    Example: valid users = greg, @pcusers

    -valid (S)

    This parameter indicates whether a share is + valid and thus can be used. When this parameter is set to false, + the share will be in no way visible nor accessible. +

    + This option should not be + used by regular users but might be of help to developers. + Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted. +

    Default: True

    veto files (S)

    This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible. Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files @@ -3035,8 +3033,8 @@ guest = * for a match as they are scanned.

    See also hide files and case sensitive.

    Default: No files or directories are vetoed. -

    Examples: -
    +	
    Examples:
+
     ; Veto any files containing the word Security, 
 ; any ending in .tmp, and any directory containing the
 ; word root.
@@ -3057,14 +3055,17 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/
 	client contention for files ending in .SEM. 
 	To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these files you would use 
 	the line (either in the [global] section or in the section for 
-	the particular NetBench share :
    Example: veto oplock files = /*.SEM/
    vfs object (S)

    Synonym for + the particular NetBench share :

    Example: veto oplock files = /*.SEM/

    vfs objects (S)

    This parameter specifies the backend module names which + are used for Samba VFS I/O operations. By default, normal + disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded + with one or more VFS objects.

    Options for a given VFS module are specified one per line + smb.conf perfaced by the module name and a colon (:). Such as

    foo:bar=biddle

    where 'foo' is the name of VFS module, 'bar' is a parameter supported + by ;foo;, and 'biddle' is the value of the option 'bar'. Refer to the + manpage for a given VFS modules regarding the options supported by that module.

    Default: no value

    Example: vfs objects = extd_audit recycle

    vfs object (S)

    Synonym for vfs objects . -

    vfs objects (S)

    This parameter specifies the backend names which - are used for Samba VFS I/O operations. By default, normal - disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded - with one or more VFS objects.

    Default: no value

    Example: vfs objects = extd_audit recycle

    volume (S)

    This allows you to override the volume label +

    volume (S)

    This allows you to override the volume label returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a particular volume label.

    Default: the name of the share

    wide links (S)

    This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbcacls.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbcacls.1.html index d7c5fed1b5..a5d22a3197 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbcacls.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbcacls.1.html @@ -34,8 +34,7 @@ configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is @@ -49,9 +48,8 @@ amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension +override the log level parameter +in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension ".client" will be appended. The log file is never removed by the client.

    ACL FORMAT

    The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html index ecb85d6e85..1535856433 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html @@ -126,8 +126,7 @@ configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is @@ -141,9 +140,8 @@ amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension +override the <smbconfoption><name>log level</name></smbconfoption> parameter +in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension ".client" will be appended. The log file is never removed by the client.

    -N

    If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal @@ -177,10 +175,10 @@ via the ps command. To be safe always allow rpcclient to prompt for a password and type it in directly.

    -n <primary NetBIOS name>

    This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical -to setting the NetBIOS -name parameter in the smb.conf(5) file. However, a command +to setting the <smbconfoption><name>netbios name</name></smbconfoption> parameter in the smb.conf file. +However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in -smb.conf(5).

    -i <scope>

    This specifies a NetBIOS scope that +smb.conf.

    -i <scope>

    This specifies a NetBIOS scope that nmblookup will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes are @@ -192,7 +190,7 @@ smb.conf. If the domain specified is the same as the servers NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the servers local SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM).

    -O socket options

    TCP socket options to set on the client socket. See the socket options parameter in -the smb.conf(5) manual page for the list of valid +the smb.conf manual page for the list of valid options.

    -T tar options

    smbclient may be used to create tar(1) compatible backups of all the files on an SMB/CIFS share. The secondary tar flags that can be given to this option diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbcontrol.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbcontrol.1.html index 553a9e9163..2fe363a4ac 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbcontrol.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbcontrol.1.html @@ -1,73 +1,315 @@ -smbcontrol

    Name

    smbcontrol — send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes

    Synopsis

    smbcontrol [-i] [-s]

    smbcontrol [destination] [message-type] [parameter]

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.

    smbcontrol is a very small program, which - sends messages to a smbd(8), a nmbd(8), or a winbindd(8) daemon running on the system.

    OPTIONS

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    -s <configuration file>

    The file specified contains the + + + %globalentities; + ]> + + + + smbcontrol + 1 + + + + + smbcontrol + send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes + + + + + smbcontrol + -i + -s + + + + smbcontrol + destination + message-type + parameter + + + + + DESCRIPTION + + This tool is part of the Samba + 7 suite. + + smbcontrol is a very small program, which + sends messages to a smbd + 8, a nmbd + 8, or a winbindd + 8 daemon running on the system. + + + + + OPTIONS + + + + +-h|--help +Print a summary of command line options. + + + + +-s <configuration file> +The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at -compile time.

    -i

    Run interactively. Individual commands +compile time. + + + -i + Run interactively. Individual commands of the form destination message-type parameters can be entered on STDIN. An empty command line or a "q" will quit the - program.

    destination

    One of nmbd, smbd or a process ID.

    The smbd destination causes the - message to "broadcast" to all smbd daemons.

    The nmbd destination causes the + program. + + + + destination + One of nmbd, smbd or a process ID. + + The smbd destination causes the + message to "broadcast" to all smbd daemons. + + The nmbd destination causes the message to be sent to the nmbd daemon specified in the - nmbd.pid file.

    If a single process ID is given, the message is sent - to only that process.

    message-type

    Type of message to send. See - the section MESSAGE-TYPES for details. -

    parameters

    any parameters required for the message-type

    MESSAGE-TYPES

    Available message types are:

    close-share

    Order smbd to close the client + nmbd.pid file. + + If a single process ID is given, the message is sent + to only that process. + + + + + message-type + Type of message to send. See + the section MESSAGE-TYPES for details. + + + + + + parameters + any parameters required for the message-type + + + + + + + + MESSAGE-TYPES + + Available message types are: + + + close-share + Order smbd to close the client connections to the named share. Note that this doesn't affect client connections to any other shares. This message-type takes an argument of the share name for which client connections will be closed, or the "*" character which will close all currently open shares. This may be useful if you made changes to the access controls on the share. - This message can only be sent to smbd.

    debug

    Set debug level to the value specified by the - parameter. This can be sent to any of the destinations.

    force-election

    This message causes the nmbd daemon to - force a new browse master election.

    ping

    + This message can only be sent to smbd. + + + + + debug + Set debug level to the value specified by the + parameter. This can be sent to any of the destinations. + + + + + force-election + This message causes the nmbd daemon to + force a new browse master election. + + + + ping + Send specified number of "ping" messages and wait for the same number of reply "pong" messages. This can be sent to - any of the destinations.

    profile

    Change profile settings of a daemon, based on the + any of the destinations. + + + + + profile + Change profile settings of a daemon, based on the parameter. The parameter can be "on" to turn on profile stats collection, "off" to turn off profile stats collection, "count" to enable only collection of count stats (time stats are disabled), and "flush" to zero the current profile stats. This can - be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations.

    debuglevel

    + be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations. + + + + debuglevel + Request debuglevel of a certain daemon and write it to stdout. This - can be sent to any of the destinations.

    profilelevel

    + can be sent to any of the destinations. + + + + + profilelevel + Request profilelevel of a certain daemon and write it to stdout. - This can be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations.

    printnotify

    + This can be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations. + + + + + printnotify + Order smbd to send a printer notify message to any Windows NT clients connected to a printer. This message-type takes the following arguments: -

    queuepause printername

    Send a queue pause change notify - message to the printer specified.

    queueresume printername

    Send a queue resume change notify - message for the printer specified.

    jobpause printername unixjobid

    Send a job pause change notify + + + + + + queuepause printername + Send a queue pause change notify + message to the printer specified. + + + + queueresume printername + Send a queue resume change notify + message for the printer specified. + + + + jobpause printername unixjobid + Send a job pause change notify message for the printer and unix jobid - specified.

    jobresume printername unixjobid

    Send a job resume change notify + specified. + + + + jobresume printername unixjobid + Send a job resume change notify message for the printer and unix jobid - specified.

    jobdelete printername unixjobid

    Send a job delete change notify + specified. + + + + jobdelete printername unixjobid + Send a job delete change notify message for the printer and unix jobid - specified.

    + specified. + + + + Note that this message only sends notification that an event has occured. It doesn't actually cause the event to happen. -

    This message can only be sent to smbd.

    samsync

    Order smbd to synchronise sam database from PDC (being BDC). Can only be sent to smbd.

    Note

    Not working at the moment

    samrepl

    Send sam replication message, with specified serial. Can only be sent to smbd. Should not be used manually.

    dmalloc-mark

    Set a mark for dmalloc. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support.

    dmalloc-log-changed

    + + + This message can only be sent to smbd. + + + + + samsync + Order smbd to synchronise sam database from PDC (being BDC). Can only be sent to smbd. + Not working at the moment + + + + + samrepl + Send sam replication message, with specified serial. Can only be sent to smbd. Should not be used manually. + + + + dmalloc-mark + Set a mark for dmalloc. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support. + + + + dmalloc-log-changed + Dump the pointers that have changed since the mark set by dmalloc-mark. - Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support.

    shutdown

    Shut down specified daemon. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd.

    pool-usage

    Print a human-readable description of all + Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support. + + + + shutdown + Shut down specified daemon. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. + + + + pool-usage + Print a human-readable description of all talloc(pool) memory usage by the specified daemon/process. Available - for both smbd and nmbd.

    drvupgrade

    Force clients of printers using specified driver + for both smbd and nmbd. + + + + drvupgrade + Force clients of printers using specified driver to update their local version of the driver. Can only be - sent to smbd.

    reload-config

    Force daemon to reload smb.conf configuration file. Can be sent - to smbd, nmbd, or winbindd. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    nmbd(8) and smbd(8).

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + sent to smbd. + + + + reload-config + Force daemon to reload smb.conf configuration file. Can be sent + to smbd, nmbd, or winbindd. + + + + + + + + VERSION + + This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite. + + + + SEE ALSO + nmbd + 8 and smbd + 8. + + + + AUTHOR + + The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. + to the way the Linux kernel is developed. + + The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at - ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for - Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.

    + Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy. + + + diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbcquotas.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbcquotas.1.html index 468edd1d61..df8cffcd26 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbcquotas.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbcquotas.1.html @@ -14,8 +14,7 @@ configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is @@ -29,9 +28,8 @@ amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension +override the log level parameter +in the smb.conf file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension ".client" will be appended. The log file is never removed by the client.

    -N

    If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html index 5b71bd7196..47c41714e8 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html @@ -1,183 +1,431 @@ -smbd

    Name

    smbd — server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients

    Synopsis

    smbd [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-h] [-V] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-l <log directory>] [-p <port number>] [-O <socket option>] [-s <configuration file>]

    DESCRIPTION

    This program is part of the Samba(7) suite.

    smbd is the server daemon that + + + %globalentities; + ]> + + + + smbd + 8 + + + + + smbd + server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients + + + + + smbd + -D + -F + -S + -i + -h + -V + -b + -d <debug level> + -l <log directory> + -p <port number> + -O <socket option> + -s <configuration file> + + + + + DESCRIPTION + This program is part of the Samba + 7 suite. + + smbd is the server daemon that provides filesharing and printing services to Windows clients. The server provides filespace and printer services to clients using the SMB (or CIFS) protocol. This is compatible with the LanManager protocol, and can service LanManager clients. These include MSCLIENT 3.0 for DOS, Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, - OS/2, DAVE for Macintosh, and smbfs for Linux.

    An extensive description of the services that the + OS/2, DAVE for Macintosh, and smbfs for Linux. + + An extensive description of the services that the server can provide is given in the man page for the configuration file controlling the attributes of those - services (see smb.conf(5). This man page will not describe the + services (see smb.conf + 5. This man page will not describe the services, but will concentrate on the administrative aspects - of running the server.

    Please note that there are significant security - implications to running this server, and the smb.conf(5) manual page should be regarded as mandatory reading before - proceeding with installation.

    A session is created whenever a client requests one. + of running the server. + + Please note that there are significant security + implications to running this server, and the smb.conf + 5 manual page should be regarded as mandatory reading before + proceeding with installation. + + A session is created whenever a client requests one. Each client gets a copy of the server for each session. This copy then services all connections made by the client during that session. When all connections from its client are closed, - the copy of the server for that client terminates.

    The configuration file, and any files that it includes, + the copy of the server for that client terminates. + + The configuration file, and any files that it includes, are automatically reloaded every minute, if they change. You can force a reload by sending a SIGHUP to the server. Reloading the configuration file will not affect connections to any service that is already established. Either the user will have to - disconnect from the service, or smbd killed and restarted.

    OPTIONS

    -D

    If specified, this parameter causes + disconnect from the service, or smbd killed and restarted. + + + + OPTIONS + + + + -D + If specified, this parameter causes the server to operate as a daemon. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port. Operating the server as a - daemon is the recommended way of running smbd for + daemon is the recommended way of running smbd for servers that provide more than casual use file and - print services. This switch is assumed if smbd - is executed on the command line of a shell. -

    -F

    If specified, this parameter causes - the main smbd process to not daemonize, + print services. This switch is assumed if smbd + is executed on the command line of a shell. + + + + + -F + If specified, this parameter causes + the main smbd process to not daemonize, i.e. double-fork and disassociate with the terminal. Child processes are still created as normal to service each connection request, but the main process does not exit. This operation mode is suitable for running - smbd under process supervisors such - as supervise and svscan - from Daniel J. Bernstein's daemontools + smbd under process supervisors such + as supervise and svscan + from Daniel J. Bernstein's daemontools package, or the AIX process monitor. -

    -S

    If specified, this parameter causes - smbd to log to standard output rather - than a file.

    -i

    If this parameter is specified it causes the + + + + + -S + If specified, this parameter causes + smbd to log to standard output rather + than a file. + + + + -i + If this parameter is specified it causes the server to run "interactively", not as a daemon, even if the server is executed on the command line of a shell. Setting this parameter negates the implicit deamon mode when run from the - command line. smbd also logs to standard - output, as if the -S parameter had been + command line. smbd also logs to standard + output, as if the -S parameter had been given. -

    -V

    Prints the version number for -smbd.

    -s <configuration file>

    The file specified contains the + + + + + + +-V +Prints the version number for +smbd. + + + +-s <configuration file> +The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at -compile time.

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer +compile time. + + + +-d|--debug=debuglevel + +debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is -not specified is zero.

    The higher this value, the more detail will be +not specified is zero. + +The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day to day running - it generates a small amount of -information about operations carried out.

    Levels above 1 will generate considerable +information about operations carried out. + +Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log -data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    -l|--logfile=logbasename

    File name for log/debug files. The extension -".client" will be appended. The log file is +data, most of which is extremely cryptic. + +Note that specifying this parameter here will +override the log levellog level parameter +in the smb.conf file. + + + + +-l|--logfile=logbasename +File name for log/debug files. The extension +".client" will be appended. The log file is never removed by the client. -

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    -b

    Prints information about how - Samba was built.

    -l <log directory>

    If specified, - log directory + + + + + +-h|--help +Print a summary of command line options. + + + + + -b + Prints information about how + Samba was built. + + + + -l <log directory> + If specified, + log directory specifies a log directory into which the "log.smbd" log file will be created for informational and debug messages from the running server. The log file generated is never removed by the server although - its size may be controlled by the max log size - option in the smb.conf(5) file. Beware: - If the directory specified does not exist, smbd + its size may be controlled by the + max log sizemax log size + option in the smb.conf + 5 file. Beware: + If the directory specified does not exist, smbd will log to the default debug log location defined at compile time. -

    The default log directory is specified at - compile time.

    -p <port number>

    port number is a positive integer + + + The default log directory is specified at + compile time. + + + + -p <port number> + port number is a positive integer value. The default value if this parameter is not - specified is 139.

    This number is the port number that will be + specified is 139. + + This number is the port number that will be used when making connections to the server from client software. The standard (well-known) port number for the SMB over TCP is 139, hence the default. If you wish to run the server as an ordinary user rather than as root, most systems will require you to use a port number greater than 1024 - ask your system administrator - for help if you are in this situation.

    In order for the server to be useful by most + for help if you are in this situation. + + In order for the server to be useful by most clients, should you configure it on a port other than 139, you will require port redirection services on port 139, details of which are outlined in rfc1002.txt - section 4.3.5.

    This parameter is not normally specified except - in the above situation.

    FILES

    /etc/inetd.conf

    If the server is to be run by the - inetd meta-daemon, this file + section 4.3.5. + + This parameter is not normally specified except + in the above situation. + + + + + + FILES + + + + /etc/inetd.conf + If the server is to be run by the + inetd meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the - meta-daemon. See the "How to Install and Test SAMBA" - document for details. -

    /etc/rc

    or whatever initialization script your - system uses).

    If running the server as a daemon at startup, + meta-daemon. + + + + + /etc/rc + or whatever initialization script your + system uses). + + If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup - sequence for the server. See the "How to Install and Test SAMBA" - document for details.

    /etc/services

    If running the server via the - meta-daemon inetd, this file + sequence for the server. + + + + /etc/services + If running the server via the + meta-daemon inetd, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e.g., netbios-ssn) to service port (e.g., 139) and protocol type (e.g., tcp). - See the "How to Install and Test SAMBA" - document for details.

    /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf

    This is the default location of the smb.conf(5) server configuration file. Other common places that systems - install this file are /usr/samba/lib/smb.conf - and /etc/samba/smb.conf.

    This file describes all the services the server - is to make available to clients. See smb.conf(5) for more information.

    LIMITATIONS

    On some systems smbd cannot change uid back + + + + + /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf + This is the default location of the smb.conf + 5 server configuration file. Other common places that systems + install this file are /usr/samba/lib/smb.conf + and /etc/samba/smb.conf. + + This file describes all the services the server + is to make available to clients. See smb.conf + 5 for more information. + + + + + + + LIMITATIONS + On some systems smbd cannot change uid back to root after a setuid() call. Such systems are called trapdoor uid systems. If you have such a system, you will be unable to connect from a client (such as a PC) as two different users at once. Attempts to connect the second user will result in access denied or - similar.

    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

    PRINTER

    If no printer name is specified to + similar. + + + + ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + + + + PRINTER + If no printer name is specified to printable services, most systems will use the value of - this variable (or lp if this variable is + this variable (or lp if this variable is not defined) as the name of the printer to use. This - is not specific to the server, however.

    PAM INTERACTION

    Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext + is not specific to the server, however. + + + + + + + PAM INTERACTION + Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext password), for account checking (is this account disabled?) and for session management. The degree too which samba supports PAM is restricted - by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the obey - pam restricions smb.conf(5) paramater. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: -

    • Account Validation: All accesses to a + by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the obey pam restrictionsobey pam restrictions smb.conf + 5 paramater. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: + + + + Account Validation: All accesses to a samba server are checked against PAM to see if the account is vaild, not disabled and is permitted to login at this time. This also applies to encrypted logins. -

    • Session Management: When not using share + + + Session Management: When not using share level secuirty, users must pass PAM's session checks before access is granted. Note however, that this is bypassed in share level secuirty. Note also that some older pam configuration files may need a line added for session support. -

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    DIAGNOSTICS

    Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged + + + + + + VERSION + + This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite. + + + + DIAGNOSTICS + + Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged in a specified log file. The log file name is specified - at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line.

    The number and nature of diagnostics available depends + at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line. + + The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used by the server. If you have problems, set - the debug level to 3 and peruse the log files.

    Most messages are reasonably self-explanatory. Unfortunately, + the debug level to 3 and peruse the log files. + + Most messages are reasonably self-explanatory. Unfortunately, at the time this man page was created, there are too many diagnostics available in the source code to warrant describing each and every diagnostic. At this stage your best bet is still to grep the source code and inspect the conditions that gave rise to the - diagnostics you are seeing.

    SIGNALS

    Sending the smbd a SIGHUP will cause it to - reload its smb.conf configuration - file within a short period of time.

    To shut down a user's smbd process it is recommended - that SIGKILL (-9) NOT + diagnostics you are seeing. + + + + SIGNALS + + Sending the smbd a SIGHUP will cause it to + reload its smb.conf configuration + file within a short period of time. + + To shut down a user's smbd process it is recommended + that SIGKILL (-9) NOT be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the shared memory area in an inconsistent state. The safe way to terminate - an smbd is to send it a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for - it to die on its own.

    The debug log level of smbd may be raised - or lowered using smbcontrol(1) program (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer + an smbd is to send it a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for + it to die on its own. + + The debug log level of smbd may be raised + or lowered using smbcontrol + 1 program (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2.2). This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, - whilst still running at a normally low log level.

    Note that as the signal handlers send a debug write, - they are not re-entrant in smbd. This you should wait until - smbd is in a state of waiting for an incoming SMB before + whilst still running at a normally low log level. + + Note that as the signal handlers send a debug write, + they are not re-entrant in smbd. This you should wait until + smbd is in a state of waiting for an incoming SMB before issuing them. It is possible to make the signal handlers safe by un-blocking the signals before the select call and re-blocking - them after, however this would affect performance.

    SEE ALSO

    hosts_access(5), inetd(8), nmbd(8), smb.conf(5), smbclient(1), testparm(1), testprns(1), and the - Internet RFC's rfc1001.txt, rfc1002.txt. + them after, however this would affect performance. + + + + SEE ALSO + hosts_access + 5, inetd + 8, nmbd + 8, smb.conf + 5, smbclient + 1, testparm + 1, testprns + 1, and the + Internet RFC's rfc1001.txt, rfc1002.txt. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available - as a link from the Web page - http://samba.org/cifs/.

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + as a link from the Web page + http://samba.org/cifs/. + + + + AUTHOR + + The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. + to the way the Linux kernel is developed. + + The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at - ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for - Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.

    + Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy. + + + diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html index 8caedac3f5..1f5f83f751 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html @@ -1,24 +1,127 @@ -smbmnt

    Name

    smbmnt — helper utility for mounting SMB filesystems

    Synopsis

    smbmnt {mount-point} [-s <share>] [-r] [-u <uid>] [-g <gid>] [-f <mask>] [-d <mask>] [-o <options>] [-h]

    DESCRIPTION

    smbmnt is a helper application used + + + %globalentities; + ]> + + + + smbmnt + 8 + + + + + smbmnt + helper utility for mounting SMB filesystems + + + + + smbmnt + mount-point + -s <share> + -r + -u <uid> + -g <gid> + -f <mask> + -d <mask> + -o <options> + -h + + + + + DESCRIPTION + + smbmnt is a helper application used by the smbmount program to do the actual mounting of SMB shares. - smbmnt can be installed setuid root if you want - normal users to be able to mount their SMB shares.

    A setuid smbmnt will only allow mounts on directories owned - by the user, and that the user has write permission on.

    The smbmnt program is normally invoked - by smbmount(8). It should not be invoked directly by users.

    smbmount searches the normal PATH for smbmnt. You must ensure - that the smbmnt version in your path matches the smbmount used.

    OPTIONS

    -r

    mount the filesystem read-only -

    -u uid

    specify the uid that the files will - be owned by

    -g gid

    specify the gid that the files will be - owned by

    -f mask

    specify the octal file mask applied -

    -d mask

    specify the octal directory mask - applied

    -o options

    + smbmnt can be installed setuid root if you want + normal users to be able to mount their SMB shares. + + A setuid smbmnt will only allow mounts on directories owned + by the user, and that the user has write permission on. + + The smbmnt program is normally invoked + by smbmount + 8. It should not be invoked directly by users. + + smbmount searches the normal PATH for smbmnt. You must ensure + that the smbmnt version in your path matches the smbmount used. + + + + + OPTIONS + + + + -r + mount the filesystem read-only + + + + + -u uid + specify the uid that the files will + be owned by + + + + -g gid + specify the gid that the files will be + owned by + + + + -f mask + specify the octal file mask applied + + + + + -d mask + specify the octal directory mask + applied + + + + -o options + list of options that are passed as-is to smbfs, if this command is run on a 2.4 or higher Linux kernel. -

    -h|--help

    Print a summary of command line options. -

    AUTHOR

    Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield - and others.

    The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace - tools smbmount, smbumount, - and smbmnt is Urban Widmark. - The SAMBA Mailing list + + + + + +-h|--help +Print a summary of command line options. + + + + + + + + + AUTHOR + + Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield + and others. + + The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace + tools smbmount, smbumount, + and smbmnt is Urban Widmark. + The SAMBA Mailing list is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs. -

    The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed + + + The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 - was done by Alexander Bokovoy.

    + was done by Alexander Bokovoy. + + + diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html index eff8fea825..60e0288035 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html @@ -1,71 +1,237 @@ -smbmount

    Name

    smbmount — mount an smbfs filesystem

    Synopsis

    smbmount {service} {mount-point} [-o options]

    DESCRIPTION

    smbmount mounts a Linux SMB filesystem. It - is usually invoked as mount.smbfs by - the mount(8) command when using the + + + %globalentities; + ]> + + + + smbmount + 8 + + + + + smbmount + mount an smbfs filesystem + + + + + smbmount + service + mount-point + -o options + + + + + DESCRIPTION + + smbmount mounts a Linux SMB filesystem. It + is usually invoked as mount.smbfs by + the mount + 8 command when using the "-t smbfs" option. This command only works in Linux, and the kernel must - support the smbfs filesystem.

    Options to smbmount are specified as a comma-separated + support the smbfs filesystem. + + Options to smbmount are specified as a comma-separated list of key=value pairs. It is possible to send options other than those listed here, assuming that smbfs supports them. If you get mount failures, check your kernel log for errors on - unknown options.

    smbmount is a daemon. After mounting it keeps running until + unknown options. + + smbmount is a daemon. After mounting it keeps running until the mounted smbfs is umounted. It will log things that happen when in daemon mode using the "machine name" smbmount, so - typically this output will end up in log.smbmount. The - smbmount process may also be called mount.smbfs.

    Note

    smbmount - calls smbmnt(8) to do the actual mount. You - must make sure that smbmnt is in the path so - that it can be found.

    OPTIONS

    username=<arg>

    specifies the username to connect as. If - this is not given, then the environment variable - USER is used. This option can also take the + typically this output will end up in log.smbmount. The + smbmount process may also be called mount.smbfs. + + smbmount + calls smbmnt + 8 to do the actual mount. You + must make sure that smbmnt is in the path so + that it can be found. + + + + + OPTIONS + + + + username=<arg> + specifies the username to connect as. If + this is not given, then the environment variable + USER is used. This option can also take the form "user%password" or "user/workgroup" or "user/workgroup%password" to allow the password and workgroup - to be specified as part of the username.

    password=<arg>

    specifies the SMB password. If this + to be specified as part of the username. + + + + password=<arg> + specifies the SMB password. If this option is not given then the environment variable - PASSWD is used. If it can find - no password smbmount will prompt + PASSWD is used. If it can find + no password smbmount will prompt for a passeword, unless the guest option is - given.

    + given. + + Note that passwords which contain the argument delimiter character (i.e. a comma ',') will failed to be parsed correctly on the command line. However, the same password defined in the PASSWD environment variable or a credentials file (see below) will be read correctly. -

    credentials=<filename>
    specifies a file that contains a username and/or password. + + + + + + credentials=<filename> + specifies a file that contains a username and/or password. The format of the file is: -
    +
 username = <value>
 password = <value>
-

    This is preferred over having passwords in plaintext in a - shared file, such as /etc/fstab. Be sure to protect any + + + This is preferred over having passwords in plaintext in a + shared file, such as /etc/fstab. Be sure to protect any credentials file properly. -

    krb

    Use kerberos (Active Directory).

    netbiosname=<arg>

    sets the source NetBIOS name. It defaults - to the local hostname.

    uid=<arg>

    sets the uid that will own all files on + + + + + krb + Use kerberos (Active Directory). + + + + netbiosname=<arg> + sets the source NetBIOS name. It defaults + to the local hostname. + + + + uid=<arg> + sets the uid that will own all files on the mounted filesystem. It may be specified as either a username or a numeric uid. -

    gid=<arg>

    sets the gid that will own all files on + + + + + + gid=<arg> + sets the gid that will own all files on the mounted filesystem. It may be specified as either a groupname or a numeric - gid.

    port=<arg>

    sets the remote SMB port number. The default - is 139.

    fmask=<arg>

    sets the file mask. This determines the + gid. + + + + + port=<arg> + sets the remote SMB port number. The default + is 139. + + + + + fmask=<arg> + sets the file mask. This determines the permissions that remote files have in the local filesystem. This is not a umask, but the actual permissions for the files. - The default is based on the current umask.

    dmask=<arg>

    Sets the directory mask. This determines the + The default is based on the current umask. + + + + + dmask=<arg> + Sets the directory mask. This determines the permissions that remote directories have in the local filesystem. This is not a umask, but the actual permissions for the directories. - The default is based on the current umask.

    debug=<arg>

    Sets the debug level. This is useful for + The default is based on the current umask. + + + + + debug=<arg> + Sets the debug level. This is useful for tracking down SMB connection problems. A suggested value to start with is 4. If set too high there will be a lot of - output, possibly hiding the useful output.

    ip=<arg>

    Sets the destination host or IP address. -

    workgroup=<arg>

    Sets the workgroup on the destination

    sockopt=<arg>

    Sets the TCP socket options. See the smb.conf(5) socket options option. -

    scope=<arg>

    Sets the NetBIOS scope

    guest

    Don't prompt for a password

    ro

    mount read-only

    rw

    mount read-write

    iocharset=<arg>

    + output, possibly hiding the useful output. + + + + + ip=<arg> + Sets the destination host or IP address. + + + + + + + workgroup=<arg> + Sets the workgroup on the destination + + + + + + sockopt=<arg> + Sets the TCP socket options. See the smb.conf + 5 socket options option. + + + + + + scope=<arg> + Sets the NetBIOS scope + + + + guest + Don't prompt for a password + + + + ro + mount read-only + + + + rwmount read-write + + + + iocharset=<arg> + sets the charset used by the Linux side for codepage to charset translations (NLS). Argument should be the name of a charset, like iso8859-1. (Note: only kernel 2.4.0 or later) -

    codepage=<arg>

    + + + + + codepage=<arg> + sets the codepage the server uses. See the iocharset option. Example value cp850. (Note: only kernel 2.4.0 or later) -

    ttl=<arg>

    + + + + + ttl=<arg> + sets how long a directory listing is cached in milliseconds (also affects visibility of file size and date changes). A higher value means that changes on the @@ -75,34 +241,96 @@ password = <value> like 10000ms (10 seconds) is probably more reasonable in many cases. (Note: only kernel 2.4.2 or later) -

    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

    The variable USER may contain the username of the + + + + + + + + + + ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES + + The variable USER may contain the username of the person using the client. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords. The variable can be used to set both username and - password by using the format username%password.

    The variable PASSWD may contain the password of the + password by using the format username%password. + + The variable PASSWD may contain the password of the person using the client. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level - passwords.

    The variable PASSWD_FILE may contain the pathname + passwords. + + The variable PASSWD_FILE may contain the pathname of a file to read the password from. A single line of input is - read and used as the password.

    BUGS

    Passwords and other options containing , can not be handled. + read and used as the password. + + + + + BUGS + + Passwords and other options containing , can not be handled. For passwords an alternative way of passing them is in a credentials - file or in the PASSWD environment.

    The credentials file does not handle usernames or passwords with - leading space.

    One smbfs bug is important enough to mention here, even if it - is a bit misplaced:

    • Mounts sometimes stop working. This is usually + file or in the PASSWD environment. + + The credentials file does not handle usernames or passwords with + leading space. + + One smbfs bug is important enough to mention here, even if it + is a bit misplaced: + + + + Mounts sometimes stop working. This is usually caused by smbmount terminating. Since smbfs needs smbmount to reconnect when the server disconnects, the mount will eventually go dead. An umount/mount normally fixes this. At least 2 ways to - trigger this bug are known.

    Note that the typical response to a bug report is suggestion + trigger this bug are known. + + + + Note that the typical response to a bug report is suggestion to try the latest version first. So please try doing that first, and always include which versions you use of relevant software - when reporting bugs (minimum: samba, kernel, distribution)

    SEE ALSO

    Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt in the linux kernel - source tree may contain additional options and information.

    FreeBSD also has a smbfs, but it is not related to smbmount

    For Solaris, HP-UX and others you may want to look at smbsh(1) or at other solutions, such as - Sharity or perhaps replacing the SMB server with a NFS server.

    AUTHOR

    Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield - and others.

    The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace - tools smbmount, smbumount, - and smbmnt is Urban Widmark. - The SAMBA Mailing list + when reporting bugs (minimum: samba, kernel, distribution) + + + + + + SEE ALSO + + Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt in the linux kernel + source tree may contain additional options and information. + + FreeBSD also has a smbfs, but it is not related to smbmount + + For Solaris, HP-UX and others you may want to look at smbsh + 1 or at other solutions, such as + Sharity or perhaps replacing the SMB server with a NFS server. + + + + + + AUTHOR + + Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield + and others. + + The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace + tools smbmount, smbumount, + and smbmnt is Urban Widmark. + The SAMBA Mailing list is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs. -

    The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed + + + The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0 - was done by Alexander Bokovoy.

    + was done by Alexander Bokovoy. + + + diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html index 556b637f4f..7f51bed5d9 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html @@ -1,18 +1,71 @@ -smbpasswd

    Name

    smbpasswd — The Samba encrypted password file

    Synopsis

    smbpasswd

    DESCRIPTION

    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.

    smbpasswd is the Samba encrypted password file. It contains + + + %globalentities; + ]> + + + + smbpasswd + 5 + + + + + smbpasswd + The Samba encrypted password file + + + + smbpasswd + + + + DESCRIPTION + + This tool is part of the Samba + 7 suite. + + smbpasswd is the Samba encrypted password file. It contains the username, Unix user id and the SMB hashed passwords of the user, as well as account flag information and the time the password was last changed. This file format has been evolving with - Samba and has had several different formats in the past.

    FILE FORMAT

    The format of the smbpasswd file used by Samba 2.2 - is very similar to the familiar Unix passwd(5) + Samba and has had several different formats in the past. + + + + FILE FORMAT + + The format of the smbpasswd file used by Samba 2.2 + is very similar to the familiar Unix passwd(5) file. It is an ASCII file containing one line for each user. Each field ithin each line is separated from the next by a colon. Any entry beginning with '#' is ignored. The smbpasswd file contains the - following information for each user:

    name

    This is the user name. It must be a name that - already exists in the standard UNIX passwd file.

    uid

    This is the UNIX uid. It must match the uid + following information for each user: + + + + name + This is the user name. It must be a name that + already exists in the standard UNIX passwd file. + + + + + uid + This is the UNIX uid. It must match the uid field for the same user entry in the standard UNIX passwd file. If this does not match then Samba will refuse to recognize this smbpasswd file entry as being valid for a user. -

    Lanman Password Hash

    This is the LANMAN hash of the user's password, + + + + + + Lanman Password Hash + This is the LANMAN hash of the user's password, encoded as 32 hex digits. The LANMAN hash is created by DES encrypting a well known string with the user's password as the DES key. This is the same password used by Windows 95/98 machines. @@ -23,67 +76,135 @@ null password this field will contain the characters "NO PASSWORD" as the start of the hex string. If the hex string is equal to 32 'X' characters then the user's account is marked as - disabled and the user will not be able to - log onto the Samba server.

    WARNING !! Note that, due to + disabled and the user will not be able to + log onto the Samba server. + + WARNING !! Note that, due to the challenge-response nature of the SMB/CIFS authentication protocol, anyone with a knowledge of this password hash will be able to impersonate the user on the network. For this - reason these hashes are known as plain text - equivalents and must NOT be made + reason these hashes are known as plain text + equivalents and must NOT be made available to anyone but the root user. To protect these passwords the smbpasswd file is placed in a directory with read and traverse access only to the root user and the smbpasswd file itself must be set to be read/write only by root, with no - other access.

    NT Password Hash

    This is the Windows NT hash of the user's + other access. + + + + + NT Password Hash + This is the Windows NT hash of the user's password, encoded as 32 hex digits. The Windows NT hash is created by taking the user's password as represented in 16-bit, little-endian UNICODE and then applying the MD4 - (internet rfc1321) hashing algorithm to it.

    This password hash is considered more secure than + (internet rfc1321) hashing algorithm to it. + + This password hash is considered more secure than the LANMAN Password Hash as it preserves the case of the password and uses a much higher quality hashing algorithm. However, it is still the case that if two users choose the same password this entry will be identical (i.e. the password is - not "salted" as the UNIX password is).

    WARNING !!. Note that, due to + not "salted" as the UNIX password is). + + WARNING !!. Note that, due to the challenge-response nature of the SMB/CIFS authentication protocol, anyone with a knowledge of this password hash will be able to impersonate the user on the network. For this - reason these hashes are known as plain text - equivalents and must NOT be made + reason these hashes are known as plain text + equivalents and must NOT be made available to anyone but the root user. To protect these passwords the smbpasswd file is placed in a directory with read and traverse access only to the root user and the smbpasswd file itself must be set to be read/write only by root, with no - other access.

    Account Flags

    This section contains flags that describe + other access. + + + + + Account Flags + This section contains flags that describe the attributes of the users account. In the Samba 2.2 release this field is bracketed by '[' and ']' characters and is always 13 characters in length (including the '[' and ']' characters). The contents of this field may be any of the following characters: -

    • U - This means + + + + U - This means this is a "User" account, i.e. an ordinary user. Only User and Workstation Trust accounts are currently supported - in the smbpasswd file.

    • N - This means the + in the smbpasswd file. + + N - This means the account has no password (the passwords in the fields LANMAN Password Hash and NT Password Hash are ignored). Note that this - will only allow users to log on with no password if the - null passwords parameter is set in the smb.conf(5) config file.

    • D - This means the account - is disabled and no SMB/CIFS logins will be allowed for this user.

    • W - This means this account + will only allow users to log on with no password if the + null passwords parameter is set in the + smb.conf + 5 config file. + + D - This means the account + is disabled and no SMB/CIFS logins will be allowed for this user. + + W - This means this account is a "Workstation Trust" account. This kind of account is used in the Samba PDC code stream to allow Windows NT Workstations - and Servers to join a Domain hosted by a Samba PDC.

    Other flags may be added as the code is extended in future. - The rest of this field space is filled in with spaces.

    Last Change Time

    This field consists of the time the account was + and Servers to join a Domain hosted by a Samba PDC. + + + + Other flags may be added as the code is extended in future. + The rest of this field space is filled in with spaces. + + + + + + Last Change Time + This field consists of the time the account was last modified. It consists of the characters 'LCT-' (standing for "Last Change Time") followed by a numeric encoding of the UNIX time in seconds since the epoch (1970) that the last change was made. -

    All other colon separated fields are ignored at this time.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of - the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbpasswd(8), Samba(7), and + + + + + All other colon separated fields are ignored at this time. + + + + VERSION + + This man page is correct for version 3.0 of + the Samba suite. + + + + SEE ALSO + smbpasswd + 8, Samba + 7, and the Internet RFC1321 for details on the MD4 algorithm. -

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + + + + + AUTHOR + + The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar - to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. + to the way the Linux kernel is developed. + + The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another - excellent piece of Open Source software, available at - ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 + excellent piece of Open Source software, available at + ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 release by Jeremy Allison. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 - for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.

    + for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy. + + + diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html index 7612fdd775..f74e0b330a 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html @@ -127,8 +127,7 @@ has been configured to use the experimental --with-ldapsam option. The -w switch is used to specify the password to be used with the - ldap admin - dn. Note that the password is stored in + ldap admin dn. Note that the password is stored in the secrets.tdb and is keyed off of the admin's DN. This means that if the value of ldap admin dn ever changes, the password will need to be @@ -149,9 +148,7 @@ hosts or deny hosts entry in the smb.conf(5) file and neglecting to allow "localhost" access to the smbd.

    In addition, the smbpasswd command is only useful if Samba - has been set up to use encrypted passwords. See the document - "LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba" in the docs directory for details - on how to do this.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbpasswd(5), Samba(7).

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities + has been set up to use encrypted passwords.

    VERSION

    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.

    SEE ALSO

    smbpasswd(5), Samba(7).

    AUTHOR

    The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.

    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbsh.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbsh.1.html index 4ef2244bb7..1fce592ae6 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/smbsh.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbsh.1.html @@ -19,8 +19,7 @@ configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is -to provide. See -smb.conf(5) for more information. +to provide. See smb.conf for more information. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.

    -d|--debug=debuglevel

    debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is @@ -34,9 +33,8 @@ amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.

    Note that specifying this parameter here will -override the log -level parameter in the -smb.conf(5) file.

    -R <name resolve order>

    This option is used to determine what naming +override the log level parameter +in the smb.conf file.

    -R <name resolve order>

    This option is used to determine what naming services and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space-separated string of different name resolution options.

    The options are: "lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". @@ -67,18 +65,18 @@ parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet.

    If this parameter is not set then the name resolve order -defined in the smb.conf(5) file parameter -(name resolve order) will be used.

    The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast. Without -this parameter or any entry in the name resolve order - parameter of the smb.conf(5) file, the name resolution methods -will be attempted in this order.

    -L libdir

    This parameter specifies the location of the +defined in the smb.conf file parameter +(name resolve order) will be used. +

    The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast. Without +this parameter or any entry in the name resolve order parameter of the smb.conf file, the name +resolution methods will be attempted in this order.

    -L libdir

    This parameter specifies the location of the shared libraries used by smbsh. The default value is specified at compile time. -

    EXAMPLES

    To use the smbsh command, execute +

    EXAMPLES

    To use the smbsh command, execute smbsh from the prompt and enter the username and password that authenticates you to the machine running the Windows NT operating system. -

    +
     system% smbsh
 Username: user
 Password: XXXXXXX
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html
index c1be6234c3..44fa5d41a1 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html
@@ -1,44 +1,200 @@
-smbstatus
    Name
    smbstatus — report on current Samba connections
    Synopsis
    smbstatus  [-P] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-v] [-L] [-B] [-p] [-S] [-s <configuration file>] [-u <username>]
    DESCRIPTION
    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.
    smbstatus is a very simple program to 
-	list the current Samba connections.
    OPTIONS
    -P|--profile
    If samba has been compiled with the 
+
+
+ %globalentities;
+ ]>
+
+
+
+	smbstatus
+	1
+
+
+
+
+	smbstatus
+	report on current Samba connections
+
+
+
+	
+		smbstatus
+		-P
+		-b
+		-d <debug level>
+		-v
+		-L
+		-B
+		-p
+		-S
+		-s <configuration file>
+		-u <username>
+	
+
+
+
+	DESCRIPTION
+
+	This tool is part of the Samba
+	7 suite.
+
+	smbstatus is a very simple program to 
+	list the current Samba connections.
+
+
+
+	OPTIONS
+
+	
+		
+		-P|--profile
+		If samba has been compiled with the 
 		profiling option, print only the contents of the profiling 
-		shared memory area.
    -b|--brief
    gives brief output.
    -V
    Prints the version number for 
-smbd.
    -s <configuration file>
    The file specified contains the 
+		shared memory area.
+		
+
+		
+		-b|--brief
+		gives brief output.
+		
+
+		
+
+
+-V
+Prints the version number for 
+smbd.
+
+
+
+-s <configuration file>
+The file specified contains the 
 configuration details required by the server.  The 
 information in this file includes server-specific
 information such as what printcap file to use, as well 
 as descriptions of all the services that the server is 
-to provide. See 
-smb.conf(5) for more information.
+to provide. See smb.conf for more information.
 The default configuration file name is determined at 
-compile time.
    -d|--debug=debuglevel
    debuglevel is an integer 
+compile time.
+
+
+
+-d|--debug=debuglevel
+
+debuglevel is an integer 
 from 0 to 10.  The default value if this parameter is 
-not specified is zero.
    The higher this value, the more detail will be 
+not specified is zero.
+
+The higher this value, the more detail will be 
 logged to the log files about the activities of the 
 server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious 
 warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
 day to day running - it generates a small amount of 
-information about operations carried out.
    Levels above 1 will generate considerable 
+information about operations carried out.
+
+Levels above 1 will generate considerable 
 amounts of log data, and should only be used when 
 investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for 
 use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
-data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
    Note that specifying this parameter here will 
-override the log
-level parameter in the 
-smb.conf(5) file.
    -l|--logfile=logbasename
    File name for log/debug files. The extension
-".client" will be appended. The log file is
+data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
+
+Note that specifying this parameter here will 
+override the log levellog level parameter
+in the smb.conf file.
+
+
+
+
+-l|--logfile=logbasename
+File name for log/debug files. The extension
+".client" will be appended. The log file is
 never removed by the client.
-
    -v|--verbose
    gives verbose output.
    -L|--locks
    causes smbstatus to only list locks.
    -B|--byterange
    causes smbstatus to include byte range locks.
-		
    -p|--processes
    print a list of smbd(8) processes and exit. 
-		Useful for scripting.
    -S|--shares
    causes smbstatus to only list shares.
    -h|--help
    Print a summary of command line options.
-
    -u|--user=<username>
    selects information relevant to 
-		username only.
    VERSION
    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of 
-	the Samba suite.
    SEE ALSO
    smbd(8) and smb.conf(5).
    AUTHOR
    The original Samba software and related utilities 
+
+
+
+
+		
+		-v|--verbose
+		gives verbose output.
+		
+
+
+		
+		-L|--locks
+		causes smbstatus to only list locks.
+		
+		
+
+		
+		
+		-B|--byterange
+		causes smbstatus to include byte range locks.
+		
+		
+
+
+		
+		-p|--processes
+		print a list of smbd
+		8 processes and exit. 
+		Useful for scripting.
+		
+		
+		
+		
+		-S|--shares
+		causes smbstatus to only list shares.
+		
+		
+
+		
+
+-h|--help
+Print a summary of command line options.
+
+
+
+		
+		-u|--user=<username>
+		selects information relevant to 
+		username only.
+		
+		
+
+	
+
+
+
+	VERSION
+
+	This man page is correct for version 3.0 of 
+	the Samba suite.
+
+
+
+	SEE ALSO
+	smbd
+	8 and smb.conf
+	5.
+
+
+
+	AUTHOR
+	
+	The original Samba software and related utilities 
 	were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed
 	by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar 
-	to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. 
+	to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
+	
+	The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. 
 	The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another 
-	excellent piece of Open Source software, available at 
-	ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 
+	excellent piece of Open Source software, available at 
+	ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 
 	release by Jeremy Allison.  The conversion to DocBook for 
 	Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2
-	for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
    
+	for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
+
+
+
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html
index 30058d1860..962b2a82e0 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html
@@ -1,39 +1,238 @@
-smbtar
    Name
    smbtar — shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares 
-	directly to UNIX tape drives
    Synopsis
    smbtar  [-r] [-i] [-a] [-v] {-s server} [-p password] [-x services] [-X] [-N filename] [-b blocksize] [-d directory] [-l loglevel] [-u user] [-t tape] {filenames}
    DESCRIPTION
    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.
    smbtar is a very small shell script on top 
-	of smbclient(1) which dumps SMB shares directly to tape.
    OPTIONS
    -s server
    The SMB/CIFS server that the share resides 
-		upon.
    -x service
    The share name on the server to connect to. 
-		The default is "backup".
    -X
    Exclude mode. Exclude filenames... from tar 
-		create or restore. 
    -d directory
    Change to initial directory
-		 before restoring / backing up files. 
    -v
    Verbose mode.
    -p password
    The password to use to access a share. 
-		Default: none 
    -u user
    The user id to connect as. Default: 
-		UNIX login name. 
    -a
    Reset DOS archive bit mode to 
-		indicate file has been archived. 
    -t tape
    Tape device. May be regular file or tape 
-		device. Default: $TAPE environmental 
-		variable; if not set, a file called tar.out
-		. 
    -b blocksize
    Blocking factor. Defaults to 20. See
-		tar(1) for a fuller explanation. 
    -N filename
    Backup only files newer than filename. Could 
+
+
+ %globalentities;
+ ]>
+
+
+
+	smbtar
+	1
+
+
+
+
+	smbtar
+	shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares 
+	directly to UNIX tape drives
+
+
+
+	
+		smbtar
+		-r
+		-i
+		-a
+		-v
+		-s server
+		-p password
+		-x services
+		-X
+		-N filename
+		-b blocksize
+		-d directory
+		-l loglevel
+		-u user
+		-t tape
+		filenames
+	
+
+
+
+	DESCRIPTION
+
+	This tool is part of the Samba
+	7 suite.
+
+	smbtar is a very small shell script on top 
+	of smbclient1
+	 which dumps SMB shares directly to tape.
+
+
+
+	OPTIONS
+
+	
+		
+		-s server
+		The SMB/CIFS server that the share resides 
+		upon.
+		
+
+
+		
+		-x service
+		The share name on the server to connect to. 
+		The default is "backup".
+		
+		
+		
+		
+		-X
+		Exclude mode. Exclude filenames... from tar 
+		create or restore. 
+		
+
+
+
+		
+		-d directory
+		Change to initial directory
+		 before restoring / backing up files. 
+		
+
+
+
+		
+		-v
+		Verbose mode.
+		
+
+
+
+		
+		-p password
+		The password to use to access a share. 
+		Default: none 
+		
+
+
+		
+		-u user
+		The user id to connect as. Default: 
+		UNIX login name. 
+		
+
+
+		
+		-a
+		Reset DOS archive bit mode to 
+		indicate file has been archived. 
+		
+
+		
+		-t tape
+		Tape device. May be regular file or tape 
+		device. Default: $TAPE environmental 
+		variable; if not set, a file called tar.out
+		. 
+		
+
+
+		
+		-b blocksize
+		Blocking factor. Defaults to 20. See
+		tar(1) for a fuller explanation. 
+		
+
+
+		
+		-N filename
+		Backup only files newer than filename. Could 
 		be used (for example) on a log file to implement incremental
-		backups. 
    -i
    Incremental mode; tar files are only backed 
+		backups. 
+		
+
+
+		
+		-i
+		Incremental mode; tar files are only backed 
 		up if they have the archive bit set. The archive bit is reset 
-		after each file is read. 
    -r
    Restore. Files are restored to the share 
-		from the tar file. 
    -l log level
    Log (debug) level. Corresponds to the 
-		-d flag of smbclient(1).
    ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
    The $TAPE variable specifies the 
+		after each file is read. 
+		
+
+
+		
+		-r
+		Restore. Files are restored to the share 
+		from the tar file. 
+		
+
+
+
+		
+		-l log level
+		Log (debug) level. Corresponds to the 
+		-d flag of 
+		smbclient1
+		.
+		
+	
+
+
+
+
+	ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
+
+	The $TAPE variable specifies the 
 	default tape device to write to. May be overridden
-	with the -t option. 
    BUGS
    The smbtar script has different 
-	options from ordinary tar and from smbclient's tar command. 
    CAVEATS
    Sites that are more careful about security may not like 
+	with the -t option. 
+
+
+
+
+	BUGS
+
+	The smbtar script has different 
+	options from ordinary tar and from smbclient's tar command. 
+
+
+
+
+	CAVEATS
+
+	Sites that are more careful about security may not like 
 	the way the script handles PC passwords. Backup and restore work 
 	on entire shares; should work on file lists. smbtar works best
-	with GNU tar and may not work well with other versions. 
    DIAGNOSTICS
    See the DIAGNOSTICS section for the smbclient(1) command.
    VERSION
    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of 
-	the Samba suite.
    SEE ALSO
    smbd(8), smbclient(1), smb.conf(5).
    AUTHOR
    The original Samba software and related utilities 
+	with GNU tar and may not work well with other versions. 
+
+
+
+
+	DIAGNOSTICS
+
+	See the DIAGNOSTICS section for the 
+	smbclient1
+	 command.
+
+
+
+
+	VERSION
+
+	This man page is correct for version 3.0 of 
+	the Samba suite.
+
+
+
+	SEE ALSO
+	smbd
+	8, 
+	smbclient1
+	, smb.conf
+	5.
+
+
+
+	AUTHOR
+	
+	The original Samba software and related utilities 
 	were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed
 	by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar 
-	to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
    Ricky Poulten  
-	wrote the tar extension and this man page. The smbtar 
-	script was heavily rewritten and improved by Martin Kraemer. Many 
+	to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
+	
+Ricky Poulten  
+	wrote the tar extension and this man page. The smbtar 
+	script was heavily rewritten and improved by Martin Kraemer. Many 
 	thanks to everyone who suggested extensions, improvements, bug 
 	fixes, etc. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another 
-	excellent piece of Open Source software, available at 
-	ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 
+	excellent piece of Open Source software, available at 
+	ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 
 	release by Jeremy Allison.  The conversion to DocBook for 
 	Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for
-	Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
    
+	Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
+
+
+
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbtree.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbtree.1.html
index 6cf24ddf91..fdecb1c1c0 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/smbtree.1.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbtree.1.html
@@ -17,8 +17,7 @@ configuration details required by the server.  The
 information in this file includes server-specific
 information such as what printcap file to use, as well 
 as descriptions of all the services that the server is 
-to provide. See 
-smb.conf(5) for more information.
+to provide. See smb.conf for more information.
 The default configuration file name is determined at 
 compile time.
    -d|--debug=debuglevel
    debuglevel is an integer 
 from 0 to 10.  The default value if this parameter is 
@@ -32,9 +31,8 @@ amounts of log data, and should only be used when
 investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for 
 use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
 data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
    Note that specifying this parameter here will 
-override the log
-level parameter in the 
-smb.conf(5) file.
    -l|--logfile=logbasename
    File name for log/debug files. The extension
+override the log level parameter
+in the smb.conf file.
    -l|--logfile=logbasename
    File name for log/debug files. The extension
 ".client" will be appended. The log file is
 never removed by the client.
 
    -N
    If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html
index f0aa0f974d..0221202644 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html
@@ -1,16 +1,79 @@
-smbumount
    Name
    smbumount — smbfs umount for normal users
    Synopsis
    smbumount  {mount-point}
    DESCRIPTION
    With this program, normal users can unmount smb-filesystems, 
-	provided that it is suid root.  smbumount has 
+
+
+ %globalentities;
+ ]>
+
+
+
+	smbumount
+	8
+
+
+
+
+	smbumount
+	smbfs umount for normal users
+
+
+
+	
+		smbumount
+		mount-point
+	
+
+
+
+	DESCRIPTION
+
+	With this program, normal users can unmount smb-filesystems, 
+	provided that it is suid root.  smbumount has 
 	been written to give normal Linux users more control over their 
 	resources. It is safe to install this program suid root, because only 
 	the user who has mounted a filesystem is allowed to unmount it again.  
 	For root it is not necessary to use smbumount. The normal umount 
 	program works perfectly well, but it would certainly be problematic 
-	to make umount setuid root.
    OPTIONS
    mount-point
    The directory to unmount.
    SEE ALSO
    smbmount(8)
    AUTHOR
    Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield 
-	and others.
    The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace
-	tools smbmount, smbumount,
-	and smbmnt is Urban Widmark.
-	The SAMBA Mailing list
+	to make umount setuid root.  
+
+
+
+	OPTIONS
+
+	
+		
+		mount-point
+		The directory to unmount.
+		
+	
+
+
+
+
+	SEE ALSO
+	
+	smbmount
+	8
+
+
+
+
+	AUTHOR
+	
+	Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield 
+	and others.
+	
+	The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace
+	tools smbmount, smbumount,
+	and smbmnt is Urban Widmark.
+	The SAMBA Mailing list
 	is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs.
-	
    The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed 
+	
+	
+	The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed 
 	by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for Samba 3.0
-	was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
    
+	was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
+
+
+
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/speed.html b/docs/htmldocs/speed.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 0033a05211..0000000000
--- a/docs/htmldocs/speed.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,141 +0,0 @@
-
-Chapter 39. Samba Performance Tuning
    Chapter 39. Samba Performance Tuning
    Prev Part VI. Appendixes Next
    Chapter 39. Samba Performance Tuning
    Paul Cochrane
    Dundee Limb Fitting Centre
    Jelmer R. Vernooij
    The Samba Team
    John H. Terpstra
    Samba Team
    Table of Contents
    Comparisons
    Socket options
    Read size
    Max xmit
    Log level
    Read raw
    Write raw
    Slow Logins
    Client tuning
    Samba performance problem due changing kernel
    Corrupt tdb Files
    Comparisons
    
-The Samba server uses TCP to talk to the client. Thus if you are
-trying to see if it performs well you should really compare it to
-programs that use the same protocol. The most readily available
-programs for file transfer that use TCP are ftp or another TCP based
-SMB server.
-
    
-If you want to test against something like a NT or WfWg server then
-you will have to disable all but TCP on either the client or
-server. Otherwise you may well be using a totally different protocol
-(such as NetBEUI) and comparisons may not be valid.
-
    
-Generally you should find that Samba performs similarly to ftp at raw
-transfer speed. It should perform quite a bit faster than NFS,
-although this very much depends on your system.
-
    
-Several people have done comparisons between Samba and Novell, NFS or
-WinNT. In some cases Samba performed the best, in others the worst. I
-suspect the biggest factor is not Samba vs some other system but the
-hardware and drivers used on the various systems. Given similar
-hardware Samba should certainly be competitive in speed with other
-systems.
-
    Socket options
    
-There are a number of socket options that can greatly affect the
-performance of a TCP based server like Samba.
-
    
-The socket options that Samba uses are settable both on the command
-line with the -O option, or in the smb.conf file.
-
    
-The socket options section of the smb.conf manual page describes how
-to set these and gives recommendations.
-
    
-Getting the socket options right can make a big difference to your
-performance, but getting them wrong can degrade it by just as
-much. The correct settings are very dependent on your local network.
-
    
-The socket option TCP_NODELAY is the one that seems to make the
-biggest single difference for most networks. Many people report that
-adding socket options = TCP_NODELAY doubles the read 
-performance of a Samba drive. The best explanation I have seen for this is
-that the Microsoft TCP/IP stack is slow in sending tcp ACKs.
-
    Read size
    
-The option read size affects the overlap of disk
-reads/writes with network reads/writes. If the amount of data being
-transferred in several of the SMB commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and
-SMBreadbraw) is larger than this value then the server begins writing
-the data before it has received the whole packet from the network, or
-in the case of SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before
-all the data has been read from disk.
-
    
-This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and network access
-are similar, having very little effect when the speed of one is much
-greater than the other.
-
    
-The default value is 16384, but very little experimentation has been
-done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely that the best
-value will vary greatly between systems anyway. A value over 65536 is
-pointless and will cause you to allocate memory unnecessarily.
-
    Max xmit
    
-At startup the client and server negotiate a maximum transmit size,
-which limits the size of nearly all SMB commands. You can set the
-maximum size that Samba will negotiate using the max xmit =  option
-in smb.conf. Note that this is the maximum size of SMB requests that 
-Samba will accept, but not the maximum size that the *client* will accept.
-The client maximum receive size is sent to Samba by the client and Samba
-honours this limit.
-
    
-It defaults to 65536 bytes (the maximum), but it is possible that some
-clients may perform better with a smaller transmit unit. Trying values
-of less than 2048 is likely to cause severe problems.
-
    
-In most cases the default is the best option.
-
    Log level
    
-If you set the log level (also known as debug level) higher than 2
-then you may suffer a large drop in performance. This is because the
-server flushes the log file after each operation, which can be very
-expensive. 
-
    Read raw
    
-The read raw operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency
-file read operation. A server may choose to not support it,
-however. and Samba makes support for read raw optional, with it
-being enabled by default.
-
    
-In some cases clients don't handle read raw very well and actually
-get lower performance using it than they get using the conventional
-read operations. 
-
    
-So you might like to try read raw = no and see what happens on your
-network. It might lower, raise or not affect your performance. Only
-testing can really tell.
-
    Write raw
    
-The write raw operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency
-file write operation. A server may choose to not support it,
-however. and Samba makes support for write raw optional, with it
-being enabled by default.
-
    
-Some machines may find write raw slower than normal write, in which
-case you may wish to change this option.
-
    Slow Logins
    
-Slow logins are almost always due to the password checking time. Using
-the lowest practical password level will improve things. 
-
    Client tuning
    
-Often a speed problem can be traced to the client. The client (for
-example Windows for Workgroups) can often be tuned for better TCP
-performance. Check the sections on the various clients in 
-Samba and Other Clients.
-
    Samba performance problem due changing kernel
    
-Hi everyone. I am running Gentoo on my server and samba 2.2.8a. Recently
-I changed kernel version from linux-2.4.19-gentoo-r10 to
-linux-2.4.20-wolk4.0s. And now I have performance issue with samba. Ok
-many of you will probably say that move to vanilla sources...well I tried
-it too and it didn't work. I have 100mb LAN and two computers (linux +
-Windows2000). Linux server shares directory with DivX files, client
-(windows2000) plays them via LAN. Before when I was running 2.4.19 kernel
-everything was fine, but now movies freezes and stops...I tried moving
-files between server and Windows and it's terribly slow.
-
    
-Grab mii-tool and check the duplex settings on the NIC.
-My guess is that it is a link layer issue, not an application
-layer problem.  Also run ifconfig and verify that the framing
-error, collisions, etc... look normal for ethernet.
-
    Corrupt tdb Files
    
-Well today it happened, Our first major problem using samba.
-Our samba PDC server has been hosting 3 TB of data to our 500+ users
-[Windows NT/XP]  for the last 3 years using samba, no problem.
-But today all shares went SLOW; very slow. Also the main smbd kept
-spawning new processes so we had 1600+ running smbd's (normally we avg. 250).
-It crashed the SUN E3500 cluster twice. After a lot of searching I
-decided to rm /var/locks/*.tdb. Happy again.
-
    
-Q1) Is there any method of keeping the *.tdb files in top condition or
-how to early detect corruption?
-
    
-A1) Yes, run tdbbackup each time after stopping nmbd and before starting nmbd.
-
    
-Q2) What I also would like to mention is that the service latency seems
-a lot lower then before the locks cleanup, any ideas on keeping it top notch?
-
    
-A2) Yes! Same answer as for Q1!
-
    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 38. Samba and other CIFS clients Home Chapter 40. DNS and DHCP Configuration Guide
    
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/swat.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/swat.8.html
index e0719dce3d..77027d0cda 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/swat.8.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/swat.8.html
@@ -1,87 +1,287 @@
-swat
    Name
    swat — Samba Web Administration Tool
    Synopsis
    swat  [-s <smb config file>] [-a]
    DESCRIPTION
    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.
    swat allows a Samba administrator to 
-	configure the complex smb.conf(5) file via a Web browser. In addition, 
-	a swat configuration page has help links 
-	to all the configurable options in the smb.conf file allowing an 
-	administrator to easily look up the effects of any change. 
    swat is run from inetd 
    OPTIONS
    -s smb configuration file
    The default configuration file path is 
+
+
+ %globalentities;
+ ]>
+
+
+
+	swat
+	8
+
+
+
+
+	swat
+	Samba Web Administration Tool
+
+
+
+	
+		swat
+		-s <smb config file>
+		-a
+	
+
+
+
+	DESCRIPTION
+
+	This tool is part of the Samba
+	7 suite.
+
+
+	swat allows a Samba administrator to 
+	configure the complex smb.conf
+	5 file via a Web browser. In addition, 
+	a swat configuration page has help links 
+	to all the configurable options in the smb.conf file allowing an 
+	administrator to easily look up the effects of any change. 
+
+	swat is run from inetd 
+
+
+
+
+	OPTIONS
+
+	
+		
+		-s smb configuration file
+		The default configuration file path is 
 		determined at compile time.  The file specified contains 
-		the configuration details required by the smbd(8) server. This is the file 
-		that swat will modify. 
+		the configuration details required by the smbd
+		8 server. This is the file 
+		that swat will modify. 
 		The information in this file includes server-specific 
 		information such as what printcap file to use, as well as 
 		descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide.
-		See smb.conf for more information. 
-		
    -a
    This option disables authentication and puts 
-		swat in demo mode. In that mode anyone will be able to modify 
-		the smb.conf file. 
    WARNING: Do NOT enable this option on a production 
-		server. 
    -V
    Prints the version number for 
-smbd.
    -s <configuration file>
    The file specified contains the 
+		See smb.conf for more information. 
+		
+		
+
+
+		
+		-a
+		This option disables authentication and puts 
+		swat in demo mode. In that mode anyone will be able to modify 
+		the smb.conf file. 
+		
+		WARNING: Do NOT enable this option on a production 
+		server. 
+		
+
+		
+
+
+-V
+Prints the version number for 
+smbd.
+
+
+
+-s <configuration file>
+The file specified contains the 
 configuration details required by the server.  The 
 information in this file includes server-specific
 information such as what printcap file to use, as well 
 as descriptions of all the services that the server is 
-to provide. See 
-smb.conf(5) for more information.
+to provide. See smb.conf for more information.
 The default configuration file name is determined at 
-compile time.
    -d|--debug=debuglevel
    debuglevel is an integer 
+compile time.
+
+
+
+-d|--debug=debuglevel
+
+debuglevel is an integer 
 from 0 to 10.  The default value if this parameter is 
-not specified is zero.
    The higher this value, the more detail will be 
+not specified is zero.
+
+The higher this value, the more detail will be 
 logged to the log files about the activities of the 
 server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious 
 warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
 day to day running - it generates a small amount of 
-information about operations carried out.
    Levels above 1 will generate considerable 
+information about operations carried out.
+
+Levels above 1 will generate considerable 
 amounts of log data, and should only be used when 
 investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for 
 use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
-data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
    Note that specifying this parameter here will 
-override the log
-level parameter in the 
-smb.conf(5) file.
    -l|--logfile=logbasename
    File name for log/debug files. The extension
-".client" will be appended. The log file is
+data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
+
+Note that specifying this parameter here will 
+override the log levellog level parameter
+in the smb.conf file.
+
+
+
+
+-l|--logfile=logbasename
+File name for log/debug files. The extension
+".client" will be appended. The log file is
 never removed by the client.
-
    -h|--help
    Print a summary of command line options.
-
    INSTALLATION
    Swat is included as binary package with most distributions. The 
+
+
+
+		
+
+-h|--help
+Print a summary of command line options.
+
+
+
+	
+
+
+
+
+
+	INSTALLATION
+
+	Swat is included as binary package with most distributions. The 
 	package manager in this case takes care of the installation and 
 	configuration. This section is only for those who have compiled 
 	swat from scratch.
-	
    After you compile SWAT you need to run make install
-	 to install the swat binary
+	
+
+	After you compile SWAT you need to run make install
+	 to install the swat binary
 	and the various help files and images. A default install would put 
-	these in: 
    • /usr/local/samba/bin/swat
    • /usr/local/samba/swat/images/*
    • /usr/local/samba/swat/help/*
    Inetd Installation
    You need to edit your /etc/inetd.conf
-		 and /etc/services
-		to enable SWAT to be launched via inetd.
    In /etc/services you need to 
-		add a line like this: 
    swat            901/tcp
    Note for NIS/YP and LDAP users - you may need to rebuild the 
-		NIS service maps rather than alter your local 
-		/etc/services file. 
    the choice of port number isn't really important 
+	these in: 
+	
+	
+		/usr/local/samba/bin/swat
+		/usr/local/samba/swat/images/*
+		/usr/local/samba/swat/help/*
+	
+
+	 
+		Inetd Installation
+
+		You need to edit your /etc/inetd.conf
+		 and /etc/services
+		to enable SWAT to be launched via inetd.
+
+		In /etc/services you need to 
+		add a line like this: 
+
+		swat            901/tcp
+
+		Note for NIS/YP and LDAP users - you may need to rebuild the 
+		NIS service maps rather than alter your local 
+		/etc/services file. 
+
+		the choice of port number isn't really important 
 		except that it should be less than 1024 and not currently 
 		used (using a number above 1024 presents an obscure security 
 		hole depending on the implementation details of your 
-		inetd daemon). 
    In /etc/inetd.conf you should 
-		add a line like this: 
    swat    stream  tcp     nowait.400  root
-		/usr/local/samba/bin/swat swat
    One you have edited /etc/services 
-		and /etc/inetd.conf you need to send a 
-		HUP signal to inetd. To do this use kill -1 PID
-		 where PID is the process ID of the inetd daemon. 
    LAUNCHING
    To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and 
-	point it at "http://localhost:901/".
    Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected 
+		inetd daemon). 
+
+		In /etc/inetd.conf you should 
+		add a line like this: 
+
+		swat    stream  tcp     nowait.400  root
+		/usr/local/samba/bin/swat swat
+	
+		One you have edited /etc/services 
+		and /etc/inetd.conf you need to send a 
+		HUP signal to inetd. To do this use kill -1 PID
+		 where PID is the process ID of the inetd daemon. 
+
+	
+
+
+
+
+
+
+	LAUNCHING
+
+	To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and 
+	point it at "http://localhost:901/".
+
+	Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected 
 	machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your 
 	connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent 
-	in the clear over the wire. 
    FILES
    /etc/inetd.conf
    This file must contain suitable startup 
-		information for the meta-daemon.
    /etc/services
    This file must contain a mapping of service name 
+	in the clear over the wire. 
+
+
+
+	FILES
+	
+	
+		
+		/etc/inetd.conf
+		This file must contain suitable startup 
+		information for the meta-daemon.
+		
+
+		
+		/etc/services
+		This file must contain a mapping of service name 
 		(e.g., swat) to service port (e.g., 901) and protocol type 
-		(e.g., tcp).  
    /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf
    This is the default location of the smb.conf(5) server configuration file that swat edits. Other 
-		common places that systems install this file are 
-		/usr/samba/lib/smb.conf and /etc/smb.conf
-		.  This file describes all the services the server 
-		is to make available to clients. 
    WARNINGS
    swat will rewrite your smb.conf(5) file. It will rearrange the entries and delete all 
-	comments, include= and copy=
-	 options. If you have a carefully crafted 
-	smb.conf then back it up or don't use swat! 
    VERSION
    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.
    SEE ALSO
    inetd(5), smbd(8), smb.conf(5)
    AUTHOR
    The original Samba software and related utilities 
+		(e.g., tcp).  
+		
+
+		
+		/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf
+		This is the default location of the 
+		smb.conf5
+		 server configuration file that swat edits. Other 
+		common places that systems install this file are 
+		/usr/samba/lib/smb.conf and /etc/smb.conf
+		.  This file describes all the services the server 
+		is to make available to clients. 
+		
+	
+
+
+
+
+	WARNINGS
+
+	swat will rewrite your 
+	smb.conf5
+	 file. It will rearrange the entries and delete all 
+	comments, include= and copy=
+	 options. If you have a carefully crafted 
+	smb.conf then back it up or don't use swat! 
+
+
+
+
+	VERSION
+
+	This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.
+
+
+
+	SEE ALSO
+	inetd(5), 
+	smbd8
+	, smb.conf
+	5
+
+
+
+	AUTHOR
+	
+	The original Samba software and related utilities 
 	were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed
 	by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar 
-	to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. 
+	to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
+	
+	The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. 
 	The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another 
-	excellent piece of Open Source software, available at 
-	ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 
+	excellent piece of Open Source software, available at 
+	ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 
 	release by Jeremy Allison.  The conversion to DocBook for 
 	Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2 for
-	Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
    
+	Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
+
+
+
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html
index 3732b53f4c..03adba0f38 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html
@@ -1,51 +1,203 @@
-testparm
    Name
    testparm — check an smb.conf configuration file for 
-	internal correctness
    Synopsis
    testparm  [-s] [-h] [-v] [-L <servername>] [-t <encoding>] {config filename} [hostname hostIP]
    DESCRIPTION
    This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.
    testparm is a very simple test program 
-	to check an smbd(8) configuration file for 
+
+
+ %globalentities;
+ ]>
+
+
+
+	testparm
+	1
+
+
+
+
+	testparm
+	check an smb.conf configuration file for 
+	internal correctness
+
+
+
+	
+		testparm
+		-s
+		-h
+		-v
+		-L <servername>
+		-t <encoding>
+		config filename
+		hostname hostIP
+	
+
+
+
+	DESCRIPTION
+
+	This tool is part of the Samba
+	7 suite.
+
+	testparm is a very simple test program 
+	to check an smbd
+	8 configuration file for 
 	internal correctness. If this program reports no problems, you 
-	can use the configuration file with confidence that smbd
-	 will successfully load the configuration file.
    Note that this is NOT a guarantee that 
+	can use the configuration file with confidence that smbd
+	 will successfully load the configuration file.
+
+
+	Note that this is NOT a guarantee that 
 	the services specified in the configuration file will be 
-	available or will operate as expected. 
    If the optional host name and host IP address are 
+	available or will operate as expected. 
+
+	If the optional host name and host IP address are 
 	specified on the command line, this test program will run through 
 	the service entries reporting whether the specified host
-	has access to each service. 
    If testparm finds an error in the 
-	smb.conf file it returns an exit code of 1 to the calling 
+	has access to each service. 
+
+	If testparm finds an error in the 
+	smb.conf file it returns an exit code of 1 to the calling 
 	program, else it returns an exit code of 0. This allows shell scripts 
-	to test the output from testparm.
    OPTIONS
    -s
    Without this option, testparm 
+	to test the output from testparm.
+
+
+
+	OPTIONS
+
+	
+		
+		-s
+		Without this option, testparm 
 		will prompt for a carriage return after printing the service 
-		names and before dumping the service definitions.
    -h|--help
    Print a summary of command line options.
-
    -V
    Prints the version number for 
-smbd.
    -L servername
    Sets the value of the %L macro to servername.
+		names and before dumping the service definitions.
+		
+
+		
+
+-h|--help
+Print a summary of command line options.
+
+
+		
+
+-V
+Prints the version number for 
+smbd.
+
+		
+		
+		-L servername
+		Sets the value of the %L macro to servername.
 		This is useful for testing include files specified with the 
-		%L macro. 
    -v
    If this option is specified, testparm 
-		will also output all options that were not used in smb.conf(5) and are thus set to their defaults.
    -t encoding
    
+		%L macro. 
+		
+
+		
+		-v
+		If this option is specified, testparm 
+		will also output all options that were not used in 
+		smb.conf5
+		 and are thus set to their defaults.
+		
+
+		
+		-t encoding
+		
 		Output data in specified encoding.
-		
    configfilename
    This is the name of the configuration file 
+		
+		
+
+		
+		configfilename
+		This is the name of the configuration file 
 		to check. If this parameter is not present then the 
-		default smb.conf(5) file will be checked. 	
-		
    hostname
    If this parameter and the following are 
-		specified, then testparm will examine the hosts
-		allow and hosts deny 
-		parameters in the smb.conf(5) file to 
+		default smb.conf5
+		 file will be checked. 	
+		
+		
+
+
+		
+		hostname
+		If this parameter and the following are 
+		specified, then testparm will examine the hosts
+		allow and hosts deny 
+		parameters in the 
+		smb.conf5
+		 file to 
 		determine if the hostname with this IP address would be
-		allowed access to the smbd server.  If 
+		allowed access to the smbd server.  If 
 		this parameter is supplied, the hostIP parameter must also
-		be supplied.
    hostIP
    This is the IP address of the host specified 
+		be supplied.
+		
+
+
+		
+		hostIP
+		This is the IP address of the host specified 
 		in the previous parameter.  This address must be supplied 
-		if the hostname parameter is supplied. 
    FILES
    smb.conf(5)
    This is usually the name of the configuration 
-		file used by smbd(8). 
-		
    DIAGNOSTICS
    The program will issue a message saying whether the 
+		if the hostname parameter is supplied. 
+		
+	
+
+
+
+	FILES
+
+	
+		
+		smb.conf5
+		
+		This is usually the name of the configuration 
+		file used by smbd8
+		. 
+		
+		
+	
+
+
+
+	DIAGNOSTICS
+
+	The program will issue a message saying whether the 
 	configuration file loaded OK or not. This message may be preceded by 
 	errors and warnings if the file did not load. If the file was 
 	loaded OK, the program then dumps all known service details 
-	to stdout. 
    VERSION
    This man page is correct for version 3.0 of 
-	the Samba suite.
    SEE ALSO
    smb.conf(5), smbd(8)
    AUTHOR
    The original Samba software and related utilities 
+	to stdout. 
+
+
+
+
+	VERSION
+
+	This man page is correct for version 3.0 of 
+	the Samba suite.
+
+
+
+	SEE ALSO
+	
+		smb.conf5
+		, 
+		smbd8
+		
+
+
+
+	AUTHOR
+	
+	The original Samba software and related utilities 
 	were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed
 	by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar 
-	to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
    The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. 
+	to the way the Linux kernel is developed.
+	
+	The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. 
 	The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another 
-	excellent piece of Open Source software, available at 
-	ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 
+	excellent piece of Open Source software, available at 
+	ftp://ftp.icce.rug.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2.0 
 	release by Jeremy Allison.  The conversion to DocBook for 
 	Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter. The conversion to DocBook XML 4.2
-	for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
    
+	for Samba 3.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy.
+
+
+
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/troubleshooting.html b/docs/htmldocs/troubleshooting.html
deleted file mode 100644
index b43083fdd1..0000000000
--- a/docs/htmldocs/troubleshooting.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-
-Part V. Troubleshooting
    Part V. Troubleshooting
    Prev   Next
    Troubleshooting
    Table of Contents
    33. The Samba checklist
    Introduction
    Assumptions
    The tests
    Still having troubles?
    34. Analysing and solving samba problems
    Diagnostics tools
    Installing 'Network Monitor' on an NT Workstation or a Windows 9x box
    Useful URLs
    Getting help from the mailing lists
    How to get off the mailing lists
    35. Reporting Bugs
    Introduction
    General info
    Debug levels
    Internal errors
    Attaching to a running process
    Patches
    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 32. SWAT - The Samba Web Administration Tool Home Chapter 33. The Samba checklist
    
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/type.html b/docs/htmldocs/type.html
deleted file mode 100644
index cc0a2583e5..0000000000
--- a/docs/htmldocs/type.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
-
-Part II. Server Configuration Basics
    Part II. Server Configuration Basics
    Prev   Next
    Server Configuration Basics
    First Steps in Server Configuration
    
-Samba can operate in various modes within SMB networks. This HOWTO section contains information on
-configuring samba to function as the type of server your network requires. Please read this
-section carefully.
-
    Table of Contents
    4. Server Types and Security Modes
    Features and Benefits
    Server Types
    Samba Security Modes
    User Level Security
    Share Level Security
    Domain Security Mode (User Level Security)
    ADS Security Mode (User Level Security)
    Server Security (User Level Security)
    Seamless Windows Network Integration
    Common Errors
    What makes Samba a SERVER?
    What makes Samba a Domain Controller?
    What makes Samba a Domain Member?
    Constantly Losing Connections to Password Server
    5. Domain Control
    Features and Benefits
    Basics of Domain Control
    Domain Controller Types
    Preparing for Domain Control
    Domain Control - Example Configuration
    Samba ADS Domain Control
    Domain and Network Logon Configuration
    Domain Network Logon Service
    Security Mode and Master Browsers
    Common Problems and Errors
    I cannot include a '$' in a machine name
    I get told "You already have a connection to the Domain...." 
-or "Cannot join domain, the credentials supplied conflict with an 
-existing set.." when creating a machine trust account.
    The system can not log you on (C000019B)....
    The machine trust account for this computer either does not 
-exist or is not accessible.
    When I attempt to login to a Samba Domain from a NT4/W2K workstation,
-I get a message about my account being disabled.
    Until a few minutes after Samba has started, clients get the error "Domain Controller Unavailable"
    6. Backup Domain Control
    Features And Benefits
    Essential Background Information
    MS Windows NT4 Style Domain Control
    Active Directory Domain Control
    What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?
    How does a Workstation find its domain controller?
    Backup Domain Controller Configuration
    Example Configuration
    Common Errors
    Machine Accounts keep expiring, what can I do?
    Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT4 PDC?
    How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?
    Can I do this all with LDAP?
    7. Domain Membership
    Features and Benefits
    MS Windows Workstation/Server Machine Trust Accounts
    Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts
    Using NT4 Server Manager to Add Machine Accounts to the Domain
    "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts
    Making an MS Windows Workstation or Server a Domain Member
    Domain Member Server
    Joining an NT4 type Domain with Samba-3
    Why is this better than security = server?
    Samba ADS Domain Membership
    Setup your smb.conf
    Setup your /etc/krb5.conf
    Create the computer account
    Test your server setup
    Testing with smbclient
    Notes
    Common Errors
    Can Not Add Machine Back to Domain
    Adding Machine to Domain Fails
    8. Stand-Alone Servers
    Features and Benefits
    Background
    Example Configuration
    Reference Documentation Server
    Central Print Serving
    Common Errors
    9. MS Windows Network Configuration Guide
    Note
    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 3. Fast Start for the Impatient Home Chapter 4. Server Types and Security Modes
    
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/unicode.html b/docs/htmldocs/unicode.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 58adb5c993..0000000000
--- a/docs/htmldocs/unicode.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
-
-Chapter 27. Unicode/Charsets
    Chapter 27. Unicode/Charsets
    Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next
    Chapter 27. Unicode/Charsets
    Jelmer R. Vernooij
    The Samba Team
    TAKAHASHI Motonobu
    25 March 2003
    Table of Contents
    Features and Benefits
    What are charsets and unicode?
    Samba and charsets
    Conversion from old names
    Japanese charsets
    Features and Benefits
    
-Every industry eventually matures. One of the great areas of maturation is in
-the focus that has been given over the past decade to make it possible for anyone
-anywhere to use a computer. It has not always been that way, in fact, not so long
-ago it was common for software to be written for exclusive use in the country of
-origin.
-
    
-Of all the effort that has been brought to bear on providing native language support
-for all computer users, the efforts of the Openi18n organisation is deserving of
-special mention. For more information about Openi18n please refer to: 
-http://www.openi18n.org/.
-
    
-Samba-2.x supported a single locale through a mechanism called 
-codepages. Samba-3 is destined to become a truly trans-global
-file and printer sharing platform.
-
    What are charsets and unicode?
    
-Computers communicate in numbers. In texts, each number will be 
-translated to a corresponding letter. The meaning that will be assigned 
-to a certain number depends on the character set(charset)
- that is used. 
-A charset can be seen as a table that is used to translate numbers to 
-letters. Not all computers use the same charset (there are charsets 
-with German umlauts, Japanese characters, etc). Usually a charset contains 
-256 characters, which means that storing a character with it takes 
-exactly one byte. 
    
-There are also charsets that support even more characters, 
-but those need twice(or even more) as much storage space. These 
-charsets can contain 256 * 256 = 65536 characters, which
-is more then all possible characters one could think of. They are called 
-multibyte charsets (because they use more then one byte to 
-store one character). 
-
    
-A standardised multibyte charset is unicode, info is available at 
-www.unicode.org. 
-A big advantage of using a multibyte charset is that you only need one; no 
-need to make sure two computers use the same charset when they are 
-communicating.
-
    Old windows clients used to use single-byte charsets, named 
-'codepages' by Microsoft. However, there is no support for 
-negotiating the charset to be used in the smb protocol. Thus, you 
-have to make sure you are using the same charset when talking to an old client.
-Newer clients (Windows NT, 2K, XP) talk unicode over the wire.
-
    Samba and charsets
    
-As of samba 3.0, samba can (and will) talk unicode over the wire. Internally, 
-samba knows of three kinds of character sets: 
-
    unix charset
    
-		This is the charset used internally by your operating system. 
-		The default is ASCII, which is fine for most 
-		systems.
-		
    display charset
    This is the charset samba will use to print messages
-		on your screen. It should generally be the same as the unix charset.
-		
    dos charset
    This is the charset samba uses when communicating with 
-		DOS and Windows 9x clients. It will talk unicode to all newer clients.
-		The default depends on the charsets you have installed on your system.
-		Run testparm -v | grep "dos charset" to see 
-		what the default is on your system. 
-		
    Conversion from old names
    Because previous samba versions did not do any charset conversion, 
-characters in filenames are usually not correct in the unix charset but only 
-for the local charset used by the DOS/Windows clients.
    The following script from Steve Langasek converts all 
-filenames from CP850 to the iso8859-15 charset.
    
-#find /path/to/share -type f -exec bash -c 'CP="{}"; ISO=`echo -n "$CP" | iconv -f cp850 \
-  -t iso8859-15`; if [ "$CP" != "$ISO" ]; then mv "$CP" "$ISO"; fi' \;
-
-
    Japanese charsets
    Samba doesn't work correctly with Japanese charsets yet. Here are
-points of attention when setting it up:
    • You should set mangling method =
-hash
    • There are various iconv() implementations around and not
-all of  them work equally well. glibc2's iconv() has a critical problem
-in CP932.  libiconv-1.8 works with CP932 but still has some problems and
-does not  work with EUC-JP.
    • You should set dos charset = CP932, not
-Shift_JIS, SJIS...
    • Currently only unix charset = CP932
-will work (but still has some problems...) because of iconv() issues.
-unix charset = EUC-JP doesn't work well because of
-iconv() issues.
    • Currently Samba 3.0 does not support unix charset
-= UTF8-MAC/CAP/HEX/JIS*
    More information (in Japanese) is available at: http://www.atmarkit.co.jp/flinux/special/samba3/samba3a.html.
    Prev Up Next
    Chapter 26. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba Home Chapter 28. Samba Backup Techniques
    
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/upgrading-to-3.0.html b/docs/htmldocs/upgrading-to-3.0.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 16272d0cd4..0000000000
--- a/docs/htmldocs/upgrading-to-3.0.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-Chapter 30. Upgrading from Samba-2.x to Samba-3.0.0
    Chapter 30. Upgrading from Samba-2.x to Samba-3.0.0
    Prev Part IV. Migration and Updating Next
    Chapter 30. Upgrading from Samba-2.x to Samba-3.0.0
    Jelmer R. Vernooij
    The Samba Team
    25 October 2002
    Table of Contents
    Charsets
    Obsolete configuration options
    Password Backend
    Charsets
    You might experience problems with special characters 
-when communicating with old DOS clients. Codepage 
-support has changed in samba 3.0. Read the chapter
-Unicode support for details.
-
    Obsolete configuration options
    
-In 3.0, the following configuration options have been removed.
-
    printer driver (replaced by new driver procedures) 
    printer driver file (replaced by new driver procedures)
    printer driver location (replaced by new driver procedures)
    use rhosts
    postscript
    client code page (replaced by dos charset)
    vfs path
    vfs options
    Password Backend
    
-Effective with the release of samba-3 it is now imperative that the password backend
-be correctly defined in smb.conf.
-
    
-Those migrating from samba-2.x with plaintext password support need the following:
-passdb backend = guest.
-
    
-Those migrating from samba-2.x with encrypted password support should add to smb.conf
-passdb backend = smbpasswd, guest.
-
    
-LDAP using Samba-2.x systems can continue to operate with the following entry
-passdb backend = ldapsam_compat, guest.
-
    Prev Up Next
    Part IV. Migration and Updating Home Chapter 31. Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC
    
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/vfstest.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/vfstest.1.html
index 7b124c070f..138ec374bd 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/vfstest.1.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/vfstest.1.html
@@ -14,8 +14,7 @@ configuration details required by the server.  The
 information in this file includes server-specific
 information such as what printcap file to use, as well 
 as descriptions of all the services that the server is 
-to provide. See 
-smb.conf(5) for more information.
+to provide. See smb.conf for more information.
 The default configuration file name is determined at 
 compile time.
    -d|--debug=debuglevel
    debuglevel is an integer 
 from 0 to 10.  The default value if this parameter is 
@@ -29,9 +28,8 @@ amounts of log data, and should only be used when
 investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for 
 use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
 data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
    Note that specifying this parameter here will 
-override the log
-level parameter in the 
-smb.conf(5) file.
    -l|--logfile=logbasename
    File name for log/debug files. The extension
+override the log level parameter
+in the smb.conf file.
    -l|--logfile=logbasename
    File name for log/debug files. The extension
 ".client" will be appended. The log file is
 never removed by the client.

    COMMANDS

    VFS COMMANDS

    • load <module.so> - Load specified VFS module

    • populate <char> <size> - Populate a data buffer with the specified data diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html index 4aa9ddab12..f5f5af0a27 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html @@ -1,22 +1,32 @@ -wbinfo

      Name

      wbinfo — Query information from winbind daemon

      Synopsis

      wbinfo [-u] [-g] [-N netbios-name] [-I ip] [-n name] [-s sid] [-U uid] [-G gid] [-S sid] [-Y sid] [-t] [-m] [--sequence] [-r user] [-a user%password] [--set-auth-user user%password] [--get-auth-user] [-p]

      DESCRIPTION

      This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.

      The wbinfo program queries and returns information +wbinfo

      Name

      wbinfo — Query information from winbind daemon

      Synopsis

      wbinfo [-a user%password] [-c username] [-C groupname] [--domain domain] [-I ip] [-s sid] [-u] [-U uid] [-g] [--get-auth-user] [-G gid] [-m] [-n name] [-N netbios-name] [-o user:group] [-O user:group] [-p] [-r user] [--set-auth-user user%password] [--sequence] [-S sid] [-t] [-x username] [-X groupname] [-Y sid]

      DESCRIPTION

      This tool is part of the Samba(7) suite.

      The wbinfo program queries and returns information created and used by the winbindd(8) daemon.

      The winbindd(8) daemon must be configured and running for the wbinfo program to be able - to return information.

      OPTIONS

      -u

      This option will list all users available - in the Windows NT domain for which the winbindd(8) daemon is operating in. Users in all trusted domains - will also be listed. Note that this operation does not assign - user ids to any users that have not already been seen by winbindd(8) - .

      -g

      This option will list all groups available + to return information.

      OPTIONS

      -a username%password

      Attempt to authenticate a user via winbindd. + This checks both authenticaion methods and reports its results. +

      -c user

      Create a local winbind user. +

      -C group

      Create a local winbindd group. +

      --domain name

      This parameter sets the domain on which any specified + operations will performed. If special domain name '.' is used to represent + the current domain to which winbindd belongs. Currently only the + --sequence, + -u, and -g options honor this parameter. +

      -g

      This option will list all groups available in the Windows NT domain for which the Samba(7) daemon is operating in. Groups in all trusted domains will also be listed. Note that this operation does not assign group ids to any groups that have not already been - seen by winbindd(8).

      -N name

      The -N option - queries winbindd(8) to query the WINS - server for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name - specified by the name parameter. -

      -I ip

      The -I option + seen by winbindd(8).

      --get-auth-user

      Print username and password used by winbindd + during session setup to a domain controller. Username + and password can be set using '-A'. Only available for + root.

      -G gid

      Try to convert a UNIX group id to a Windows + NT SID. If the gid specified does not refer to one within + the idmap gid range then the operation will fail.

      -I ip

      The -I option queries winbindd(8) to send a node status request to get the NetBIOS name associated with the IP address specified by the ip parameter. +

      -m

      Produce a list of domains trusted by the + Windows NT server winbindd(8) contacts + when resolving names. This list does not include the Windows + NT domain the server is a Primary Domain Controller for.

      -n name

      The -n option queries winbindd(8) for the SID associated with the name specified. Domain names can be specified @@ -24,40 +34,43 @@ For example CWDOM1/Administrator refers to the Administrator user in the domain CWDOM1. If no domain is specified then the domain used is the one specified in the smb.conf(5) workgroup - parameter.

      -s sid

      Use -s to resolve + parameter.

      -N name

      The -N option + queries winbindd(8) to query the WINS + server for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name + specified by the name parameter. +

      -o user:group

      Add a winbindd local group as a secondary group + for the specified winbindd local user. +

      -O user:group

      Remove a winbindd local group as a secondary group + for the specified winbindd local user. +

      -p

      Check whether winbindd is still alive. + Prints out either 'succeeded' or 'failed'. +

      -r username

      Try to obtain the list of UNIX group ids + to which the user belongs. This only works for users + defined on a Domain Controller. +

      -s sid

      Use -s to resolve a SID to a name. This is the inverse of the -n option above. SIDs must be specified as ASCII strings in the traditional Microsoft format. For example, - S-1-5-21-1455342024-3071081365-2475485837-500.

      -U uid

      Try to convert a UNIX user id to a Windows NT - SID. If the uid specified does not refer to one within - the winbind uid range then the operation will fail.

      -G gid

      Try to convert a UNIX group id to a Windows - NT SID. If the gid specified does not refer to one within - the winbind gid range then the operation will fail.

      -S sid

      Convert a SID to a UNIX user id. If the SID - does not correspond to a UNIX user mapped by winbindd(8) then the operation will fail.

      -Y sid

      Convert a SID to a UNIX group id. If the SID - does not correspond to a UNIX group mapped by winbindd(8) then - the operation will fail.

      -t

      Verify that the workstation trust account - created when the Samba server is added to the Windows NT - domain is working.

      -m

      Produce a list of domains trusted by the - Windows NT server winbindd(8) contacts - when resolving names. This list does not include the Windows - NT domain the server is a Primary Domain Controller for. -

      --sequence

      Show sequence numbers of - all known domains

      -r username

      Try to obtain the list of UNIX group ids - to which the user belongs. This only works for users - defined on a Domain Controller. -

      -a username%password

      Attempt to authenticate a user via winbindd. - This checks both authenticaion methods and reports its results. -

      --set-auth-user username%password

      Store username and password used by winbindd + S-1-5-21-1455342024-3071081365-2475485837-500.

      --set-auth-user username%password

      Store username and password used by winbindd during session setup to a domain controller. This enables winbindd to operate in a Windows 2000 domain with Restrict Anonymous turned on (a.k.a. Permissions compatiable with Windows 2000 servers only). -

      --get-auth-user

      Print username and password used by winbindd - during session setup to a domain controller. Username - and password can be set using '-A'. Only available for - root.

      -p

      Check whether winbindd is still alive. - Prints out either 'succeeded' or 'failed'. -

      -V

      Prints the version number for +

      --sequence

      Show sequence numbers of + all known domains

      -S sid

      Convert a SID to a UNIX user id. If the SID + does not correspond to a UNIX user mapped by winbindd(8) then the operation will fail.

      -t

      Verify that the workstation trust account + created when the Samba server is added to the Windows NT + domain is working.

      -u

      This option will list all users available + in the Windows NT domain for which the winbindd(8) daemon is operating in. Users in all trusted domains + will also be listed. Note that this operation does not assign + user ids to any users that have not already been seen by winbindd(8) + .

      -U uid

      Try to convert a UNIX user id to a Windows NT + SID. If the uid specified does not refer to one within + the idmap uid range then the operation will fail.

      -x user

      Delete an existing local winbind user. +

      -X group

      Delete an existing local winbindd group. +

      -Y sid

      Convert a SID to a UNIX group id. If the SID + does not correspond to a UNIX group mapped by winbindd(8) then + the operation will fail.

      -V

      Prints the version number for smbd.

      -h|--help

      Print a summary of command line options.

      EXIT STATUS

      The wbinfo program returns 0 if the operation succeeded, or 1 if the operation failed. If the winbindd(8) daemon is not working wbinfo will always return diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html b/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html deleted file mode 100644 index b289f5141e..0000000000 --- a/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,733 +0,0 @@ - -Chapter 21. Integrated Logon Support using Winbind

      Chapter 21. Integrated Logon Support using Winbind
      Prev Part III. Advanced Configuration Next

      Chapter 21. Integrated Logon Support using Winbind

      Tim Potter

      Samba Team

      Andrew Tridgell

      Samba Team

      Naag Mummaneni

      Jelmer R. Vernooij

      The Samba Team

      John H. Terpstra

      Samba Team

      27 June 2002

      Table of Contents

      Features and Benefits
      Introduction
      What Winbind Provides
      Target Uses
      How Winbind Works
      Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls
      Microsoft Active Directory Services
      Name Service Switch
      Pluggable Authentication Modules
      User and Group ID Allocation
      Result Caching
      Installation and Configuration
      Introduction
      Requirements
      Testing Things Out
      Conclusion
      Common Errors

      Features and Benefits

      Integration of UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT through - a unified logon has been considered a "holy grail" in heterogeneous - computing environments for a long time. We present - winbind, a component of the Samba suite - of programs as a solution to the unified logon problem. Winbind - uses a UNIX implementation - of Microsoft RPC calls, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and the Name - Service Switch to allow Windows NT domain users to appear and operate - as UNIX users on a UNIX machine. This paper describes the winbind - system, explaining the functionality it provides, how it is configured, - and how it works internally.

      Introduction

      It is well known that UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT have - different models for representing user and group information and - use different technologies for implementing them. This fact has - made it difficult to integrate the two systems in a satisfactory - manner.

      One common solution in use today has been to create - identically named user accounts on both the UNIX and Windows systems - and use the Samba suite of programs to provide file and print services - between the two. This solution is far from perfect however, as - adding and deleting users on both sets of machines becomes a chore - and two sets of passwords are required both of which - can lead to synchronization problems between the UNIX and Windows - systems and confusion for users.

      We divide the unified logon problem for UNIX machines into - three smaller problems:

      • Obtaining Windows NT user and group information -

      • Authenticating Windows NT users -

      • Password changing for Windows NT users -

      Ideally, a prospective solution to the unified logon problem - would satisfy all the above components without duplication of - information on the UNIX machines and without creating additional - tasks for the system administrator when maintaining users and - groups on either system. The winbind system provides a simple - and elegant solution to all three components of the unified logon - problem.

      What Winbind Provides

      Winbind unifies UNIX and Windows NT account management by - allowing a UNIX box to become a full member of a NT domain. Once - this is done the UNIX box will see NT users and groups as if - they were native UNIX users and groups, allowing the NT domain - to be used in much the same manner that NIS+ is used within - UNIX-only environments.

      The end result is that whenever any - program on the UNIX machine asks the operating system to lookup - a user or group name, the query will be resolved by asking the - NT domain controller for the specified domain to do the lookup. - Because Winbind hooks into the operating system at a low level - (via the NSS name resolution modules in the C library) this - redirection to the NT domain controller is completely - transparent.

      Users on the UNIX machine can then use NT user and group - names as they would use "native" UNIX names. They can chown files - so that they are owned by NT domain users or even login to the - UNIX machine and run a UNIX X-Window session as a domain user.

      The only obvious indication that Winbind is being used is - that user and group names take the form DOMAIN\user and - DOMAIN\group. This is necessary as it allows Winbind to determine - that redirection to a domain controller is wanted for a particular - lookup and which trusted domain is being referenced.

      Additionally, Winbind provides an authentication service - that hooks into the Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM) system - to provide authentication via a NT domain to any PAM enabled - applications. This capability solves the problem of synchronizing - passwords between systems since all passwords are stored in a single - location (on the domain controller).

      Target Uses

      Winbind is targeted at organizations that have an - existing NT based domain infrastructure into which they wish - to put UNIX workstations or servers. Winbind will allow these - organizations to deploy UNIX workstations without having to - maintain a separate account infrastructure. This greatly - simplifies the administrative overhead of deploying UNIX - workstations into a NT based organization.

      Another interesting way in which we expect Winbind to - be used is as a central part of UNIX based appliances. Appliances - that provide file and print services to Microsoft based networks - will be able to use Winbind to provide seamless integration of - the appliance into the domain.

      How Winbind Works

      The winbind system is designed around a client/server - architecture. A long running winbindd daemon - listens on a UNIX domain socket waiting for requests - to arrive. These requests are generated by the NSS and PAM - clients and processed sequentially.

      The technologies used to implement winbind are described - in detail below.

      Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls

      Over the last few years, efforts have been underway - by various Samba Team members to decode various aspects of - the Microsoft Remote Procedure Call (MSRPC) system. This - system is used for most network related operations between - Windows NT machines including remote management, user authentication - and print spooling. Although initially this work was done - to aid the implementation of Primary Domain Controller (PDC) - functionality in Samba, it has also yielded a body of code which - can be used for other purposes.

      Winbind uses various MSRPC calls to enumerate domain users - and groups and to obtain detailed information about individual - users or groups. Other MSRPC calls can be used to authenticate - NT domain users and to change user passwords. By directly querying - a Windows PDC for user and group information, winbind maps the - NT account information onto UNIX user and group names.

      Microsoft Active Directory Services

      - Since late 2001, Samba has gained the ability to - interact with Microsoft Windows 2000 using its 'Native - Mode' protocols, rather than the NT4 RPC services. - Using LDAP and Kerberos, a domain member running - winbind can enumerate users and groups in exactly the - same way as a Win2k client would, and in so doing - provide a much more efficient and - effective winbind implementation. -

      Name Service Switch

      The Name Service Switch, or NSS, is a feature that is - present in many UNIX operating systems. It allows system - information such as hostnames, mail aliases and user information - to be resolved from different sources. For example, a standalone - UNIX workstation may resolve system information from a series of - flat files stored on the local filesystem. A networked workstation - may first attempt to resolve system information from local files, - and then consult a NIS database for user information or a DNS server - for hostname information.

      The NSS application programming interface allows winbind - to present itself as a source of system information when - resolving UNIX usernames and groups. Winbind uses this interface, - and information obtained from a Windows NT server using MSRPC - calls to provide a new source of account enumeration. Using standard - UNIX library calls, one can enumerate the users and groups on - a UNIX machine running winbind and see all users and groups in - a NT domain plus any trusted domain as though they were local - users and groups.

      The primary control file for NSS is - /etc/nsswitch.conf. - When a UNIX application makes a request to do a lookup - the C library looks in /etc/nsswitch.conf - for a line which matches the service type being requested, for - example the "passwd" service type is used when user or group names - are looked up. This config line species which implementations - of that service should be tried and in what order. If the passwd - config line is:

      -passwd: files example
-

      then the C library will first load a module called - /lib/libnss_files.so followed by - the module /lib/libnss_example.so. The - C library will dynamically load each of these modules in turn - and call resolver functions within the modules to try to resolve - the request. Once the request is resolved the C library returns the - result to the application.

      This NSS interface provides a very easy way for Winbind - to hook into the operating system. All that needs to be done - is to put libnss_winbind.so in /lib/ - then add "winbind" into /etc/nsswitch.conf at - the appropriate place. The C library will then call Winbind to - resolve user and group names.

      Pluggable Authentication Modules

      Pluggable Authentication Modules, also known as PAM, - is a system for abstracting authentication and authorization - technologies. With a PAM module it is possible to specify different - authentication methods for different system applications without - having to recompile these applications. PAM is also useful - for implementing a particular policy for authorization. For example, - a system administrator may only allow console logins from users - stored in the local password file but only allow users resolved from - a NIS database to log in over the network.

      Winbind uses the authentication management and password - management PAM interface to integrate Windows NT users into a - UNIX system. This allows Windows NT users to log in to a UNIX - machine and be authenticated against a suitable Primary Domain - Controller. These users can also change their passwords and have - this change take effect directly on the Primary Domain Controller. -

      PAM is configured by providing control files in the directory - /etc/pam.d/ for each of the services that - require authentication. When an authentication request is made - by an application the PAM code in the C library looks up this - control file to determine what modules to load to do the - authentication check and in what order. This interface makes adding - a new authentication service for Winbind very easy, all that needs - to be done is that the pam_winbind.so module - is copied to /lib/security/ and the PAM - control files for relevant services are updated to allow - authentication via winbind. See the PAM documentation - for more details.

      User and Group ID Allocation

      When a user or group is created under Windows NT - is it allocated a numerical relative identifier (RID). This is - slightly different to UNIX which has a range of numbers that are - used to identify users, and the same range in which to identify - groups. It is winbind's job to convert RIDs to UNIX id numbers and - vice versa. When winbind is configured it is given part of the UNIX - user id space and a part of the UNIX group id space in which to - store Windows NT users and groups. If a Windows NT user is - resolved for the first time, it is allocated the next UNIX id from - the range. The same process applies for Windows NT groups. Over - time, winbind will have mapped all Windows NT users and groups - to UNIX user ids and group ids.

      The results of this mapping are stored persistently in - an ID mapping database held in a tdb database). This ensures that - RIDs are mapped to UNIX IDs in a consistent way.

      Result Caching

      An active system can generate a lot of user and group - name lookups. To reduce the network cost of these lookups winbind - uses a caching scheme based on the SAM sequence number supplied - by NT domain controllers. User or group information returned - by a PDC is cached by winbind along with a sequence number also - returned by the PDC. This sequence number is incremented by - Windows NT whenever any user or group information is modified. If - a cached entry has expired, the sequence number is requested from - the PDC and compared against the sequence number of the cached entry. - If the sequence numbers do not match, then the cached information - is discarded and up to date information is requested directly - from the PDC.

      Installation and Configuration

      -Many thanks to John Trostel jtrostel@snapserver.com -for providing the HOWTO for this section. -

      -This HOWTO describes how to get winbind services up and running -to control access and authenticate users on your Linux box using -the winbind services which come with SAMBA 3.0. -

      Introduction

      -This section describes the procedures used to get winbind up and -running on a RedHat 7.1 system. Winbind is capable of providing access -and authentication control for Windows Domain users through an NT -or Win2K PDC for 'regular' services, such as telnet a nd ftp, as -well for SAMBA services. -

      -This HOWTO has been written from a 'RedHat-centric' perspective, so if -you are using another distribution, you may have to modify the instructions -somewhat to fit the way your distribution works. -

      • - Why should I to this? -

        This allows the SAMBA administrator to rely on the - authentication mechanisms on the NT/Win2K PDC for the authentication - of domain members. NT/Win2K users no longer need to have separate - accounts on the SAMBA server. -

      • - Who should be reading this document? -

        - This HOWTO is designed for system administrators. If you are - implementing SAMBA on a file server and wish to (fairly easily) - integrate existing NT/Win2K users from your PDC onto the - SAMBA server, this HOWTO is for you. That said, I am no NT or PAM - expert, so you may find a better or easier way to accomplish - these tasks. -

      Requirements

      -If you have a Samba configuration file that you are currently -using... BACK IT UP! If your system already uses PAM, -back up the /etc/pam.d directory -contents! If you haven't already made a boot disk, -MAKE ONE NOW! -

      -Messing with the PAM configuration files can make it nearly impossible -to log in to your machine. That's why you want to be able to boot back -into your machine in single user mode and restore your -/etc/pam.d back to the original state they were in if -you get frustrated with the way things are going. ;-) -

      -The latest version of SAMBA (version 3.0 as of this writing), now -includes a functioning winbindd daemon. Please refer to the -main SAMBA web page or, -better yet, your closest SAMBA mirror site for instructions on -downloading the source code. -

      -To allow Domain users the ability to access SAMBA shares and -files, as well as potentially other services provided by your -SAMBA machine, PAM (pluggable authentication modules) must -be setup properly on your machine. In order to compile the -winbind modules, you should have at least the pam libraries resident -on your system. For recent RedHat systems (7.1, for instance), that -means pam-0.74-22. For best results, it is helpful to also -install the development packages in pam-devel-0.74-22. -

      Testing Things Out

      -Before starting, it is probably best to kill off all the SAMBA -related daemons running on your server. Kill off all smbd, -nmbd, and winbindd processes that may -be running. To use PAM, you will want to make sure that you have the -standard PAM package (for RedHat) which supplies the /etc/pam.d -directory structure, including the pam modules are used by pam-aware -services, several pam libraries, and the /usr/doc -and /usr/man entries for pam. Winbind built better -in SAMBA if the pam-devel package was also installed. This package includes -the header files needed to compile pam-aware applications. -

      Configure and compile SAMBA

      -The configuration and compilation of SAMBA is pretty straightforward. -The first three steps may not be necessary depending upon -whether or not you have previously built the Samba binaries. -

      -root# autoconf
-root# make clean
-root# rm config.cache
-root# ./configure
-root# make
-root# make install
-

      -This will, by default, install SAMBA in /usr/local/samba. -See the main SAMBA documentation if you want to install SAMBA somewhere else. -It will also build the winbindd executable and libraries. -

      Configure nsswitch.conf and the -winbind libraries on Linux and Solaris

      -The libraries needed to run the winbindd daemon -through nsswitch need to be copied to their proper locations, so -

      -
      -root# cp ../samba/source/nsswitch/libnss_winbind.so /lib
-
      -

      -I also found it necessary to make the following symbolic link: -

      -root# ln -s /lib/libnss_winbind.so /lib/libnss_winbind.so.2 -

      And, in the case of Sun Solaris:

      -root# ln -s /usr/lib/libnss_winbind.so /usr/lib/libnss_winbind.so.1
-root# ln -s /usr/lib/libnss_winbind.so /usr/lib/nss_winbind.so.1
-root# ln -s /usr/lib/libnss_winbind.so /usr/lib/nss_winbind.so.2
-

      -Now, as root you need to edit /etc/nsswitch.conf to -allow user and group entries to be visible from the winbindd -daemon. My /etc/nsswitch.conf file look like -this after editing: -

      -	passwd:     files winbind
-	shadow:     files 
-	group:      files winbind
-

      -The libraries needed by the winbind daemon will be automatically -entered into the ldconfig cache the next time -your system reboots, but it -is faster (and you don't need to reboot) if you do it manually: -

      -root# /sbin/ldconfig -v | grep winbind -

      -This makes libnss_winbind available to winbindd -and echos back a check to you. -

      NSS Winbind on AIX

      (This section is only for those running AIX)

      -The winbind AIX identification module gets built as libnss_winbind.so in the -nsswitch directory of the samba source. This file can be copied to -/usr/lib/security, and the AIX naming convention would indicate that it -should be named WINBIND. A stanza like the following: -

      -WINBIND:
-        program = /usr/lib/security/WINBIND
-        options = authonly
-

      can then be added to -/usr/lib/security/methods.cfg. This module only -supports identification, but there have been success reports using the -standard winbind pam module for authentication. Use caution configuring -loadable authentication modules as it is possible to make it impossible -to logon to the system. More information about the AIX authentication -module API can be found at "Kernel Extensions and Device Support -Programming Concepts for AIX": -Chapter 18. Loadable Authentication Module Programming Interface -and more information on administering the modules at -"System Management Guide: Operating System and Devices". -

      Configure smb.conf

      -Several parameters are needed in the smb.conf file to control -the behavior of winbindd. Configure -smb.conf These are described in more detail in -the winbindd(8) man page. My -smb.conf file was modified to -include the following entries in the [global] section: -

      -[global]
-     <...>
-     # separate domain and username with '+', like DOMAIN+username
-     winbind separator = +
-     # use uids from 10000 to 20000 for domain users
-     idmap uid = 10000-20000
-     # use gids from 10000 to 20000 for domain groups
-     idmap gid = 10000-20000
-     # allow enumeration of winbind users and groups
-     winbind enum users = yes
-     winbind enum groups = yes
-     # give winbind users a real shell (only needed if they have telnet access)
-     template homedir = /home/winnt/%D/%U
-     template shell = /bin/bash
-

      Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain

      -Enter the following command to make the SAMBA server join the -PDC domain, where DOMAIN is the name of -your Windows domain and Administrator is -a domain user who has administrative privileges in the domain. -

      -root# /usr/local/samba/bin/net join -S PDC -U Administrator -

      -The proper response to the command should be: "Joined the domain -DOMAIN" where DOMAIN -is your DOMAIN name. -

      Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!

      -Eventually, you will want to modify your smb startup script to -automatically invoke the winbindd daemon when the other parts of -SAMBA start, but it is possible to test out just the winbind -portion first. To start up winbind services, enter the following -command as root: -

      -root# /usr/local/samba/bin/winbindd -

      -Winbindd can now also run in 'dual daemon mode'. This will make it -run as 2 processes. The first will answer all requests from the cache, -thus making responses to clients faster. The other will -update the cache for the query that the first has just responded. -Advantage of this is that responses stay accurate and are faster. -You can enable dual daemon mode by adding -B to the commandline: -

      -root# /usr/local/samba/bin/winbindd -B -

      -I'm always paranoid and like to make sure the daemon -is really running... -

      -root# ps -ae | grep winbindd -

      -This command should produce output like this, if the daemon is running -

      -3025 ?        00:00:00 winbindd
-

      -Now... for the real test, try to get some information about the -users on your PDC -

      -root# /usr/local/samba/bin/wbinfo -u -

      -This should echo back a list of users on your Windows users on -your PDC. For example, I get the following response: -

      -	CEO+Administrator
-	CEO+burdell
-	CEO+Guest
-	CEO+jt-ad
-	CEO+krbtgt
-	CEO+TsInternetUser
-

      -Obviously, I have named my domain 'CEO' and my winbind -separator is '+'. -

      -You can do the same sort of thing to get group information from -the PDC: -

      -root# /usr/local/samba/bin/wbinfo -g
-	CEO+Domain Admins
-	CEO+Domain Users
-	CEO+Domain Guests
-	CEO+Domain Computers
-	CEO+Domain Controllers
-	CEO+Cert Publishers
-	CEO+Schema Admins
-	CEO+Enterprise Admins
-	CEO+Group Policy Creator Owners
-

      -The function 'getent' can now be used to get unified -lists of both local and PDC users and groups. -Try the following command: -

      -root# getent passwd -

      -You should get a list that looks like your /etc/passwd -list followed by the domain users with their new uids, gids, home -directories and default shells. -

      -The same thing can be done for groups with the command -

      -root# getent group -

      Fix the init.d startup scripts

      Linux

      -The winbindd daemon needs to start up after the -smbd and nmbd daemons are running. -To accomplish this task, you need to modify the startup scripts of your system. -They are located at /etc/init.d/smb in RedHat and -/etc/init.d/samba in Debian. -script to add commands to invoke this daemon in the proper sequence. My -startup script starts up smbd, nmbd, and winbindd from the -/usr/local/samba/bin directory directly. The 'start' -function in the script looks like this: -

      -start() {
-        KIND="SMB"
-        echo -n $"Starting $KIND services: "
-        daemon /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd $SMBDOPTIONS
-        RETVAL=$?
-        echo
-        KIND="NMB"
-        echo -n $"Starting $KIND services: "
-        daemon /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd $NMBDOPTIONS
-        RETVAL2=$?
-        echo
-        KIND="Winbind"
-        echo -n $"Starting $KIND services: "
-        daemon /usr/local/samba/bin/winbindd
-        RETVAL3=$?
-        echo
-        [ $RETVAL -eq 0 -a $RETVAL2 -eq 0 -a $RETVAL3 -eq 0 ] && \
-		touch /var/lock/subsys/smb || RETVAL=1
-        return $RETVAL
-}
-
      If you would like to run winbindd in dual daemon mode, replace -the line -
      -        daemon /usr/local/samba/bin/winbindd
-
      - -in the example above with: - -
      -        daemon /usr/local/samba/bin/winbindd -B
-
      . -

      -The 'stop' function has a corresponding entry to shut down the -services and looks like this: -

      -stop() {
-        KIND="SMB"
-        echo -n $"Shutting down $KIND services: "
-        killproc smbd
-        RETVAL=$?
-        echo
-        KIND="NMB"
-        echo -n $"Shutting down $KIND services: "
-        killproc nmbd
-        RETVAL2=$?
-        echo
-        KIND="Winbind"
-        echo -n $"Shutting down $KIND services: "
-        killproc winbindd
-        RETVAL3=$?
-        [ $RETVAL -eq 0 -a $RETVAL2 -eq 0 -a $RETVAL3 -eq 0 ] && \
-		 rm -f /var/lock/subsys/smb
-        echo ""
-        return $RETVAL
-}
-
      Solaris

      Winbind doesn't work on Solaris 9, see the Portability chapter for details.

      On Solaris, you need to modify the -/etc/init.d/samba.server startup script. It usually -only starts smbd and nmbd but should now start winbindd too. If you -have samba installed in /usr/local/samba/bin, -the file could contains something like this: -

      -	##
-	## samba.server
-	##
-
-	if [ ! -d /usr/bin ]
-	then                    # /usr not mounted
-		exit
-	fi
-
-	killproc() {            # kill the named process(es)
-		pid=`/usr/bin/ps -e |
-		     /usr/bin/grep -w $1 |
-		     /usr/bin/sed -e 's/^  *//' -e 's/ .*//'`
-		[ "$pid" != "" ] && kill $pid
-	}
-	 
-	# Start/stop processes required for samba server
-
-	case "$1" in
-
-	'start')
-	#
-	# Edit these lines to suit your installation (paths, workgroup, host)
-	#
-	echo Starting SMBD
-	   /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd -D -s \
-		/usr/local/samba/smb.conf
-
-	echo Starting NMBD
-	   /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd -D -l \
-		/usr/local/samba/var/log -s /usr/local/samba/smb.conf
-
-	echo Starting Winbind Daemon
-	   /usr/local/samba/bin/winbindd
-	   ;;
-
-	'stop')
-	   killproc nmbd
-	   killproc smbd
-	   killproc winbindd
-	   ;;
-
-	*)
-	   echo "Usage: /etc/init.d/samba.server { start | stop }"
-	   ;;
-	esac
-
      -Again, if you would like to run samba in dual daemon mode, replace -
      -	/usr/local/samba/bin/winbindd
-
      - -in the script above with: - -
      -	/usr/local/samba/bin/winbindd -B
-
      -
      Restarting

      -If you restart the smbd, nmbd, and winbindd daemons at this point, you -should be able to connect to the samba server as a domain member just as -if you were a local user. -

      Configure Winbind and PAM

      -If you have made it this far, you know that winbindd and samba are working -together. If you want to use winbind to provide authentication for other -services, keep reading. The pam configuration files need to be altered in -this step. (Did you remember to make backups of your original -/etc/pam.d files? If not, do it now.) -

      -You will need a pam module to use winbindd with these other services. This -module will be compiled in the ../source/nsswitch directory -by invoking the command -

      -root# make nsswitch/pam_winbind.so -

      -from the ../source directory. The -pam_winbind.so file should be copied to the location of -your other pam security modules. On my RedHat system, this was the -/lib/security directory. On Solaris, the pam security -modules reside in /usr/lib/security. -

      -root# cp ../samba/source/nsswitch/pam_winbind.so /lib/security -

      Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration

      -The /etc/pam.d/samba file does not need to be changed. I -just left this file as it was: -

      -	auth    required        /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-	account required        /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-

      -The other services that I modified to allow the use of winbind -as an authentication service were the normal login on the console (or a terminal -session), telnet logins, and ftp service. In order to enable these -services, you may first need to change the entries in -/etc/xinetd.d (or /etc/inetd.conf). -RedHat 7.1 uses the new xinetd.d structure, in this case you need -to change the lines in /etc/xinetd.d/telnet -and /etc/xinetd.d/wu-ftp from -

      -	enable = no
-

      -to -

      -	enable = yes
-

      -For ftp services to work properly, you will also need to either -have individual directories for the domain users already present on -the server, or change the home directory template to a general -directory for all domain users. These can be easily set using -the smb.conf global entry -template homedir. -

      -The /etc/pam.d/ftp file can be changed -to allow winbind ftp access in a manner similar to the -samba file. My /etc/pam.d/ftp file was -changed to look like this: -

      -	auth       required     /lib/security/pam_listfile.so item=user sense=deny \
-		 file=/etc/ftpusers onerr=succeed
-	auth       sufficient   /lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	auth       required     /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-	auth       required     /lib/security/pam_shells.so
-	account    sufficient   /lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	account    required     /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-	session    required     /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-

      -The /etc/pam.d/login file can be changed nearly the -same way. It now looks like this: -

      -	auth       required     /lib/security/pam_securetty.so
-	auth       sufficient   /lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	auth       sufficient   /lib/security/pam_unix.so use_first_pass
-	auth       required     /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-	auth       required     /lib/security/pam_nologin.so
-	account    sufficient   /lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	account    required     /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-	password   required     /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-	session    required     /lib/security/pam_stack.so service=system-auth
-	session    optional     /lib/security/pam_console.so
-
      -In this case, I added the 
      auth sufficient /lib/security/pam_winbind.so
      -lines as before, but also added the 
      required pam_securetty.so
      -above it, to disallow root logins over the network. I also added a -sufficient /lib/security/pam_unix.so use_first_pass -line after the winbind.so line to get rid of annoying -double prompts for passwords. -
      Solaris-specific configuration

      -The /etc/pam.conf needs to be changed. I changed this file so that my Domain -users can logon both locally as well as telnet.The following are the changes -that I made.You can customize the pam.conf file as per your requirements,but -be sure of those changes because in the worst case it will leave your system -nearly impossible to boot. -

      -	#
-	#ident	"@(#)pam.conf	1.14	99/09/16 SMI"
-	#
-	# Copyright (c) 1996-1999, Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-	# All Rights Reserved.
-	#
-	# PAM configuration
-	#
-	# Authentication management
-	#
-	login   auth required   /usr/lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	login	auth required 	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1 try_first_pass 
-	login	auth required 	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_dial_auth.so.1 try_first_pass 
-	#
-	rlogin  auth sufficient /usr/lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	rlogin  auth sufficient /usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_rhosts_auth.so.1
-	rlogin	auth required 	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1 try_first_pass
-	#
-	dtlogin auth sufficient /usr/lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	dtlogin	auth required 	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1 try_first_pass
-	#
-	rsh	auth required	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_rhosts_auth.so.1
-	other   auth sufficient /usr/lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	other	auth required	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1 try_first_pass
-	#
-	# Account management
-	#
-	login   account sufficient      /usr/lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	login	account requisite	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_roles.so.1 
-	login	account required	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1 
-	#
-	dtlogin account sufficient      /usr/lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	dtlogin	account requisite	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_roles.so.1 
-	dtlogin	account required	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1 
-	#
-	other   account sufficient      /usr/lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	other	account requisite	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_roles.so.1 
-	other	account required	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1 
-	#
-	# Session management
-	#
-	other	session required	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1 
-	#
-	# Password management
-	#
-	#other   password sufficient     /usr/lib/security/pam_winbind.so
-	other	password required	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1 
-	dtsession auth required	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1
-	#
-	# Support for Kerberos V5 authentication (uncomment to use Kerberos)
-	#
-	#rlogin	auth optional	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_krb5.so.1 try_first_pass
-	#login	auth optional	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_krb5.so.1 try_first_pass
-	#dtlogin	auth optional	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_krb5.so.1 try_first_pass
-	#other	auth optional	/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_krb5.so.1 try_first_pass
-	#dtlogin	account optional /usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_krb5.so.1
-	#other	account optional /usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_krb5.so.1
-	#other	session optional /usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_krb5.so.1
-	#other	password optional /usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_krb5.so.1 try_first_pass
-

      -I also added a try_first_pass line after the winbind.so line to get rid of -annoying double prompts for passwords. -

      -Now restart your Samba and try connecting through your application that you -configured in the pam.conf. -

      Conclusion

      The winbind system, through the use of the Name Service - Switch, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and appropriate - Microsoft RPC calls have allowed us to provide seamless - integration of Microsoft Windows NT domain users on a - UNIX system. The result is a great reduction in the administrative - cost of running a mixed UNIX and NT network.

      Common Errors

      Winbind has a number of limitations in its current - released version that we hope to overcome in future - releases:

      • Winbind is currently only available for - the Linux, Solaris and IRIX operating systems, although ports to other operating - systems are certainly possible. For such ports to be feasible, - we require the C library of the target operating system to - support the Name Service Switch and Pluggable Authentication - Modules systems. This is becoming more common as NSS and - PAM gain support among UNIX vendors.

      • The mappings of Windows NT RIDs to UNIX ids - is not made algorithmically and depends on the order in which - unmapped users or groups are seen by winbind. It may be difficult - to recover the mappings of rid to UNIX id mapping if the file - containing this information is corrupted or destroyed.

      • Currently the winbind PAM module does not take - into account possible workstation and logon time restrictions - that may be been set for Windows NT users, this is - instead up to the PDC to enforce.

      Prev Up Next
      Chapter 20. Stackable VFS modules Home Chapter 22. Advanced Network Management
      diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html index 10759df47e..fdcde9fba8 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ winbindd

      Name

      winbindd — Name Service Switch daemon for resolving names - from NT servers

      Synopsis

      winbindd [-F] [-S] [-i] [-Y] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-n]

      DESCRIPTION

      This program is part of the Samba(7) suite.

      winbindd is a daemon that provides + from NT servers

      Synopsis

      winbindd [-F] [-S] [-i] [-Y] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-n]

      DESCRIPTION

      This program is part of the Samba(7) suite.

      winbindd is a daemon that provides a service for the Name Service Switch capability that is present in most modern C libraries. The Name Service Switch allows user and system information to be obtained from different databases @@ -26,12 +26,12 @@ the passwd(5) file and used by getpwent(3) functions.

      group

      Group information traditionally stored in the group(5) file and used by - getgrent(3) functions.

      For example, the following simple configuration in the + getgrent(3) functions.

      For example, the following simple configuration in the /etc/nsswitch.conf file can be used to initially resolve user and group information from /etc/passwd and /etc/group and then from the Windows NT server. -

      +
       passwd:         files winbind
 group:          files winbind
 
      The following simple configuration in the
@@ -55,8 +55,7 @@ configuration details required by the server.  The
 information in this file includes server-specific
 information such as what printcap file to use, as well 
 as descriptions of all the services that the server is 
-to provide. See 
-smb.conf(5) for more information.
+to provide. See smb.conf for more information.
 The default configuration file name is determined at 
 compile time.
      -d|--debug=debuglevel
      debuglevel is an integer 
 from 0 to 10.  The default value if this parameter is 
@@ -70,9 +69,8 @@ amounts of log data, and should only be used when
 investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for 
 use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
 data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
      Note that specifying this parameter here will 
-override the log
-level parameter in the 
-smb.conf(5) file.
      -l|--logfile=logbasename
      File name for log/debug files. The extension
+override the log level parameter
+in the smb.conf file.
      -l|--logfile=logbasename
      File name for log/debug files. The extension
 ".client" will be appended. The log file is
 never removed by the client.
 
      -h|--help
      Print a summary of command line options.
@@ -109,25 +107,25 @@ never removed by the client.
 	determine which user and group ids correspond to Windows NT user 
 	and group rids.

      CONFIGURATION

      Configuration of the winbindd daemon is done through configuration parameters in the smb.conf(5) file. All parameters should be specified in the - [global] section of smb.conf.

      EXAMPLE SETUP

      To setup winbindd for user and group lookups plus + [global] section of smb.conf.

      • + winbind separator

      • + idmap uid

      • + idmap gid

      • + winbind cache time

      • + winbind enum users

      • + winbind enum groups

      • + template homedir

      • + template shell

      • + winbind use default domain

      EXAMPLE SETUP

      To setup winbindd for user and group lookups plus authentication from a domain controller use something like the - following setup. This was tested on a RedHat 6.2 Linux box.

      In /etc/nsswitch.conf put the + following setup. This was tested on a RedHat 6.2 Linux box.

      In /etc/nsswitch.conf put the following: -

      +
       passwd:     files winbind
 group:      files winbind
-
      In /etc/pam.d/* replace the 
+

      In /etc/pam.d/* replace the auth lines with something like this: -

      +
       auth       required	/lib/security/pam_securetty.so
 auth       required	/lib/security/pam_nologin.so
 auth       sufficient	/lib/security/pam_winbind.so
@@ -143,16 +141,16 @@ auth       required     /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok
 	made from /lib/libnss_winbind.so to
 	/lib/libnss_winbind.so.2.  If you are using an
 	older version of glibc then the target of the link should be
-	/lib/libnss_winbind.so.1.
      Finally, setup a smb.conf(5) containing directives like the 
+	/lib/libnss_winbind.so.1.
      Finally, setup a smb.conf(5) containing directives like the 
 	following:
-
      +
       [global]
 	winbind separator = +
         winbind cache time = 10
         template shell = /bin/bash
         template homedir = /home/%D/%U
-        winbind uid = 10000-20000
-        winbind gid = 10000-20000
+        idmap uid = 10000-20000
+        idmap gid = 10000-20000
         workgroup = DOMAIN
         security = domain
         password server = *
diff --git a/docs/manpages/net.8 b/docs/manpages/net.8
index d473503792..3f3f9340be 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/net.8
+++ b/docs/manpages/net.8
@@ -70,12 +70,12 @@ Port on the target server to connect to (usually 139 or 445)\&. Defaults to tryi
 
 .TP
 -n 
-This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fINetBIOS name\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&.
+This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fInetbios name\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&.
 
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .SH "COMMANDS"
diff --git a/docs/manpages/nmbd.8 b/docs/manpages/nmbd.8
index 096876bfde..0b63e77ee2 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/nmbd.8
+++ b/docs/manpages/nmbd.8
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ UDP port number is a positive integer value\&. This option changes the default U
 
 .TP
 \fI/etc/inetd\&.conf\fR
-If the server is to be run by the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon\&. See the install document for details\&.
+If the server is to be run by the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -128,12 +128,12 @@ If the server is to be run by the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, this file must contai
 or whatever initialization script your system uses)\&.
 
 
-If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server\&. See the "How to Install and Test SAMBA" document for details\&.
+If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server\&.
 
 
 .TP
 \fI/etc/services\fR
-If running the server via the meta-daemon \fBinetd\fR, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&. See the "How to Install and Test SAMBA" document for details\&.
+If running the server via the meta-daemon \fBinetd\fR, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -141,10 +141,10 @@ If running the server via the meta-daemon \fBinetd\fR, this file must contain a
 This is the default location of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) server configuration file\&. Other common places that systems install this file are \fI/usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR and \fI/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\fR\&.
 
 
-When run as a WINS server (see the \fBwins support\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) man page), \fBnmbd\fR will store the WINS database in the file \fIwins\&.dat\fR in the \fIvar/locks\fR directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself\&.
+When run as a WINS server (see the \fIwins support\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) man page), \fBnmbd\fR will store the WINS database in the file \fIwins\&.dat\fR in the \fIvar/locks\fR directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself\&.
 
 
-If \fBnmbd\fR is acting as a \fB browse master\fR (see the \fBlocal master\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) man page, \fBnmbd\fR will store the browsing database in the file \fIbrowse\&.dat \fR in the \fIvar/locks\fR directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself\&.
+If \fBnmbd\fR is acting as a \fB browse master\fR (see the \fIlocal master\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) man page, \fBnmbd\fR will store the browsing database in the file \fIbrowse\&.dat \fR in the \fIvar/locks\fR directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself\&.
 
 
 .SH "SIGNALS"
diff --git a/docs/manpages/nmblookup.1 b/docs/manpages/nmblookup.1
index 2f16025593..5cc590ae11 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/nmblookup.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/nmblookup.1
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Interpret \fIname\fR as an IP Address and do a node status query on this address
 
 .TP
 -n 
-This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fINetBIOS name\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&.
+This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fInetbios name\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Set the SMB domain of the username\&. This overrides the default domain which is
 
 .TP
 -O socket options
-TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) manual page for the list of valid options\&.
+TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR manual page for the list of valid options\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1 b/docs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1
index 082d9422c8..e234ad7fb8 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/pdbedit.8 b/docs/manpages/pdbedit.8
index ff0fc1244b..75a655a7e7 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/pdbedit.8
+++ b/docs/manpages/pdbedit.8
@@ -24,9 +24,9 @@ pdbedit \- manage the SAM database
 
 .nf
 \fBpdbedit\fR [-L] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S
-        script] [-p profile] [-a] [-m] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend]
+        script] [-p profile] [-a] [-m] [-r] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend]
         [-b passdb-backend] [-g] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy]
-        [-C value]
+        [-C value] [-c account-control]
 .fi
 
 .SH "DESCRIPTION"
@@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/rpcclient.1 b/docs/manpages/rpcclient.1
index 34cb6a1fa5..0684d74197 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/rpcclient.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/rpcclient.1
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the co
 
 .TP
 -n 
-This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fINetBIOS name\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&.
+This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fInetbios name\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ Set the SMB domain of the username\&. This overrides the default domain which is
 
 .TP
 -O socket options
-TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) manual page for the list of valid options\&.
+TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR manual page for the list of valid options\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5 b/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5
index ec77102365..3bc6f8ad49 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5
+++ b/docs/manpages/smb.conf.5
@@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIdead time\fR
+\fIdeadtime\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -540,11 +540,11 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIdefault\fR
+\fIdefault service\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIdefault service\fR
+\fIdefault\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -642,6 +642,10 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 \(bu
 \fIhosts equiv\fR
 
+.TP
+\(bu
+\fIidmap backend\fR
+
 .TP
 \(bu
 \fIidmap gid\fR
@@ -736,11 +740,11 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIlock dir\fR
+\fIlock directory\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIlock directory\fR
+\fIlock dir\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -928,11 +932,11 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIpasswd chat\fR
+\fIpasswd chat debug\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIpasswd chat debug\fR
+\fIpasswd chat\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -960,11 +964,11 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIpreload\fR
+\fIpreload modules\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIpreload modules\fR
+\fIpreload\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -1008,7 +1012,7 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIroot\fR
+\fIroot directory\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -1016,7 +1020,7 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIroot directory\fR
+\fIroot\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -1072,11 +1076,11 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIsyslog\fR
+\fIsyslog only\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIsyslog only\fR
+\fIsyslog\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -1102,10 +1106,6 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 \(bu
 \fItimestamp logs\fR
 
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fItotal print jobs\fR
-
 .TP
 \(bu
 \fIunicode\fR
@@ -1144,11 +1144,11 @@ Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIutmp\fR
+\fIutmp directory\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIutmp directory\fR
+\fIutmp\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -1301,10 +1301,6 @@ Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter fo
 \(bu
 \fIdeny hosts\fR
 
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdirectory\fR
-
 .TP
 \(bu
 \fIdirectory mask\fR
@@ -1317,6 +1313,10 @@ Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter fo
 \(bu
 \fIdirectory security mask\fR
 
+.TP
+\(bu
+\fIdirectory\fR
+
 .TP
 \(bu
 \fIdont descend\fR
@@ -1381,10 +1381,6 @@ Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter fo
 \(bu
 \fIgroup\fR
 
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIguest account\fR
-
 .TP
 \(bu
 \fIguest ok\fR
@@ -1555,11 +1551,11 @@ Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter fo
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIpreexec\fR
+\fIpreexec close\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIpreexec close\fR
+\fIpreexec\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -1579,15 +1575,15 @@ Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter fo
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIprinter\fR
+\fIprinter admin\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIprinter admin\fR
+\fIprinter name\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIprinter name\fR
+\fIprinter\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -1627,11 +1623,11 @@ Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter fo
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIroot preexec\fR
+\fIroot preexec close\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIroot preexec close\fR
+\fIroot preexec\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -1671,15 +1667,15 @@ Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter fo
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIuser\fR
+\fIusername\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIusername\fR
+\fIusers\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIusers\fR
+\fIuser\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -1687,11 +1683,11 @@ Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter fo
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fI-valid\fR
+\fIvalid users\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIvalid users\fR
+\fI-valid\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -1703,11 +1699,11 @@ Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter fo
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIvfs object\fR
+\fIvfs objects\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIvfs objects\fR
+\fIvfs object\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -2242,7 +2238,7 @@ Example: \fBcsc policy = programs\fR
 
 
 .TP
-dead time (G)
+deadtime (G)
 The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and it is disconnected\&. The deadtime only takes effect if the number of open files is zero\&.
 
 
@@ -2310,11 +2306,6 @@ Note that the parameter \fI debug timestamp\fR must be on for this to have an ef
 Default: \fBdebug uid = no\fR
 
 
-.TP
-default (G)
-A synonym for \fI default service\fR\&.
-
-
 .TP
 default case (S)
 See the section on NAME MANGLING\&. Also note the \fIshort preserve case\fR parameter\&.
@@ -2370,6 +2361,11 @@ Example:
 .fi
 
 
+.TP
+default (G)
+A synonym for \fI default service\fR\&.
+
+
 .TP
 delete group script (G)
 This is the full pathname to a script that will be run \fBAS ROOT\fR \fBsmbd\fR(8) when a group is requested to be deleted\&. It will expand any \fI%g\fR to the group name passed\&. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&.
@@ -2526,11 +2522,6 @@ or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):
 Note that you may have to replace the command names with full path names on some systems\&.
 
 
-.TP
-directory (S)
-Synonym for \fIpath\fR\&.
-
-
 .TP
 directory mask (S)
 This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories\&.
@@ -2591,6 +2582,11 @@ Default: \fBdirectory security mask = 0777\fR
 Example: \fBdirectory security mask = 0700\fR
 
 
+.TP
+directory (S)
+Synonym for \fIpath\fR\&.
+
+
 .TP
 disable netbios (G)
 Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support in Samba\&. Netbios is the only available form of browsing in all windows versions except for 2000 and XP\&.
@@ -2959,11 +2955,11 @@ Synonym for \fIforce group\fR\&.
 
 
 .TP
-guest account (G,S)
+guest account (G)
 This is a username which will be used for access to services which are specified as \fI guest ok\fR (see below)\&. Whatever privileges this user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service\&. Typically this user will exist in the password file, but will not have a valid login\&. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice for this parameter\&. If a username is specified in a given service, the specified username overrides this one\&.
 
 
-One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not be able to print\&. Use another account in this case\&. You should test this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the \fBsu -\fR command) and trying to print using the system print command such as \fBlpr(1)\fR or \fB lp(1)\fR\&.
+On some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not be able to print\&. Use another account in this case\&. You should test this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the \fBsu -\fR command) and trying to print using the system print command such as \fBlpr(1)\fR or \fB lp(1)\fR\&.
 
 
 This parameter does not accept % macros, because many parts of the system require this value to be constant for correct operation\&.
@@ -3093,7 +3089,7 @@ Example: \fBhomedir map = amd.homedir\fR
 
 .TP
 host msdfs (G)
-This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the \fB --with-msdfs\fR option\&. If set to \fByes\fR, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server\&.
+If set to \fByes\fR, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server\&.
 
 
 See also the \fI msdfs root\fR share level parameter\&. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to msdfs_setup\&.html\&.
@@ -3198,9 +3194,20 @@ Default: \fBno host equivalences\fR
 Example: \fBhosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv\fR
 
 
+.TP
+idmap backend (G)
+The purpose of the idmap backend parameter is to allow idmap to NOT use the local idmap tdb file to obtain SID to UID / GID mappings, but instead to obtain them from a common LDAP backend\&. This way all domain members and controllers will have the same UID and GID to SID mappings\&. This avoids the risk of UID / GID inconsistencies across UNIX / Linux systems that are sharing information over protocols other than SMB/CIFS (ie: NFS)\&.
+
+
+Default: \fBidmap backend = \fR
+
+
+Example: \fBidmap backend = ldapsam://ldapslave.example.com\fR
+
+
 .TP
 idmap gid (G)
-The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for the purpose of mapping UNX groups to NT group SIDs\&. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&.
+The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for the purpose of mapping UNIX groups to NT group SIDs\&. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&.
 
 
 The availability of an idmap gid range is essential for correct operation of all group mapping\&.
@@ -3575,11 +3582,6 @@ Setting this value to \fBno\fR will cause \fBnmbd\fR \fBnever\fR to become a loc
 Default: \fBlocal master = yes\fR
 
 
-.TP
-lock dir (G)
-Synonym for \fI lock directory\fR\&.
-
-
 .TP
 lock directory (G)
 This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed\&. The lock files are used to implement the \fImax connections\fR option\&.
@@ -3591,6 +3593,11 @@ Default: \fBlock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks\fR
 Example: \fBlock directory = /var/run/samba/locks\fR
 
 
+.TP
+lock dir (G)
+Synonym for \fI lock directory\fR\&.
+
+
 .TP
 locking (S)
 This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server in response to lock requests from the client\&.
@@ -3616,7 +3623,7 @@ lock spin count (G)
 This parameter controls the number of times that smbd should attempt to gain a byte range lock on the behalf of a client request\&. Experiments have shown that Windows 2k servers do not reply with a failure if the lock could not be immediately granted, but try a few more times in case the lock could later be aquired\&. This behavior is used to support PC database formats such as MS Access and FoxPro\&.
 
 
-Default: \fBlock spin count = 2\fR
+Default: \fBlock spin count = 3\fR
 
 
 .TP
@@ -4033,6 +4040,9 @@ mangle prefix (G)
 controls the number of prefix characters from the original name used when generating the mangled names\&. A larger value will give a weaker hash and therefore more name collisions\&. The minimum value is 1 and the maximum value is 6\&.
 
 
+mangle prefix is effective only when mangling method is hash2\&.
+
+
 Default: \fBmangle prefix = 1\fR
 
 
@@ -4041,7 +4051,7 @@ Example: \fBmangle prefix = 4\fR
 
 .TP
 mangling char (S)
-This controls what character is used as the \fBmagic\fR character in name mangling\&. The default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software\&. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer\&.
+This controls what character is used as the \fBmagic\fR character in name mangling\&. The default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software\&. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer\&. This is effective only when mangling method is hash\&.
 
 
 Default: \fBmangling char = ~\fR
@@ -4409,7 +4419,7 @@ Example: \fBmsdfs proxy = \\\\otherserver\\someshare\fR
 
 .TP
 msdfs root (S)
-This boolean parameter is only available if Samba is configured and compiled with the \fB --with-msdfs\fR option\&. If set to \fByes\fR, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory\&. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic links of the form \fImsdfs:serverA\\\\shareA,serverB\\\\shareB\fR and so on\&. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to "Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba" document\&.
+If set to \fByes\fR, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory\&. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic links of the form \fImsdfs:serverA\\\\shareA,serverB\\\\shareB\fR and so on\&. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to "Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba" document\&.
 
 
 See also \fIhost msdfs\fR
@@ -4712,6 +4722,17 @@ Example: \fBpassdb backend = ldapsam:ldaps://ldap.example.com guest\fR
 Example: \fBpassdb backend = mysql:my_plugin_args tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb guest\fR
 
 
+.TP
+passwd chat debug (G)
+This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in \fBdebug\fR mode\&. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed in the \fBsmbd\fR(8) log with a \fIdebug level\fR of 100\&. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords to be seen in the \fBsmbd\fR log\&. It is available to help Samba admins debug their \fIpasswd chat\fR scripts when calling the \fIpasswd program\fR and should be turned off after this has been done\&. This option has no effect if the \fIpam password change\fR paramter is set\&. This parameter is off by default\&.
+
+
+See also \fIpasswd chat\fR , \fIpam password change\fR , \fIpasswd program\fR \&.
+
+
+Default: \fBpasswd chat debug = no\fR
+
+
 .TP
 passwd chat (G)
 This string controls the \fB"chat"\fR conversation that takes places between \fBsmbd\fR(8) and the local password changing program to change the user's password\&. The string describes a sequence of response-receive pairs that \fBsmbd\fR(8) uses to determine what to send to the \fIpasswd program\fR and what to expect back\&. If the expected output is not received then the password is not changed\&.
@@ -4741,17 +4762,6 @@ Default: \fBpasswd chat = *new*password* %n\\n *new*password* %n\\n *changed*\fR
 Example: \fBpasswd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\\n "*Enter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Password changed*"\fR
 
 
-.TP
-passwd chat debug (G)
-This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in \fBdebug\fR mode\&. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed in the \fBsmbd\fR(8) log with a \fIdebug level\fR of 100\&. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords to be seen in the \fBsmbd\fR log\&. It is available to help Samba admins debug their \fIpasswd chat\fR scripts when calling the \fIpasswd program\fR and should be turned off after this has been done\&. This option has no effect if the \fIpam password change\fR paramter is set\&. This parameter is off by default\&.
-
-
-See also \fIpasswd chat\fR , \fIpam password change\fR , \fIpasswd program\fR \&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpasswd chat debug = no\fR
-
-
 .TP
 passwd program (G)
 The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords\&. Any occurrences of \fI%u\fR will be replaced with the user name\&. The user name is checked for existence before calling the password changing program\&.
@@ -4766,6 +4776,9 @@ Also note that many passwd programs insist in \fBreasonable \fR passwords, such
 If the \fIunix password sync\fR parameter is set this parameter \fBMUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS\fR for \fBALL\fR programs called, and must be examined for security implications\&. Note that by default \fIunix password sync\fR is set to \fBno\fR\&.
 
 
+Not that this program is only invoked when a password change is done via the smbd program, not when smbpasswd is used locally as root to change a password\&. This means that you cannot run "smbpasswd USERNAME" as root on the SMB server in order to test this parameter, but should run the command "smbpasswd -r SMBMACHINE" as a non-root user instead if you want to test the invocation of this program\&.
+
+
 See also \fIunix password sync\fR\&.
 
 
@@ -4922,6 +4935,14 @@ Default: \fBnone (no command executed)\fR
 Example: \fBpostexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log\fR
 
 
+.TP
+preexec close (S)
+This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from \fIpreexec \fR should close the service being connected to\&.
+
+
+Default: \fBpreexec close = no\fR
+
+
 .TP
 preexec (S)
 This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is connected to\&. It takes the usual substitutions\&.
@@ -4945,14 +4966,6 @@ Default: \fBnone (no command executed)\fR
 Example: \fBpreexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log\fR
 
 
-.TP
-preexec close (S)
-This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from \fIpreexec \fR should close the service being connected to\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpreexec close = no\fR
-
-
 .TP
 prefered master (G)
 Synonym for \fI preferred master\fR for people who cannot spell :-)\&.
@@ -4976,31 +4989,31 @@ Default: \fBpreferred master = auto\fR
 
 
 .TP
-preload (G)
-This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to the browse lists\&. This is most useful for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be visible\&.
+preload modules (G)
+This is a list of paths to modules that should be loaded into smbd before a client connects\&. This improves the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat\&.
 
 
-Note that if you just want all printers in your printcap file loaded then the \fIload printers\fR option is easier\&.
+It is recommended to only use this option on heavy-performance servers\&.
 
 
-Default: \fBno preloaded services\fR
+Default: \fBpreload modules = \fR
 
 
-Example: \fBpreload = fred lp colorlp\fR
+Example: \fBpreload modules = /usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so+++ \fR
 
 
 .TP
-preload modules (G)
-This is a list of paths to modules that should be loaded into smbd before a client connects\&. This improves the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat\&.
+preload (G)
+This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to the browse lists\&. This is most useful for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be visible\&.
 
 
-It is recommended to only use this option on heavy-performance servers\&.
+Note that if you just want all printers in your printcap file loaded then the \fIload printers\fR option is easier\&.
 
 
-Default: \fBpreload modules = \fR
+Default: \fBno preloaded services\fR
 
 
-Example: \fBpreload modules = /usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so+++ \fR
+Example: \fBpreload = fred lp colorlp\fR
 
 
 .TP
@@ -5025,11 +5038,6 @@ Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service path (use
 Default: \fBprintable = no\fR
 
 
-.TP
-printcap (G)
-Synonym for \fI printcap name\fR\&.
-
-
 .TP
 printcap name (S)
 This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually \fI /etc/printcap\fR)\&. See the discussion of the [printers] section above for reasons why you might want to do this\&.
@@ -5065,6 +5073,11 @@ Default: \fBprintcap name = /etc/printcap\fR
 Example: \fBprintcap name = /etc/myprintcap\fR
 
 
+.TP
+printcap (G)
+Synonym for \fI printcap name\fR\&.
+
+
 .TP
 print command (S)
 After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command will be used via a \fBsystem()\fR call to process the spool file\&. Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there is no requirement that this be the case\&. The server will not remove the spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the spool file when it has been processed, otherwise you will need to manually remove old spool files\&.
@@ -5133,11 +5146,6 @@ For printing = CUPS : If SAMBA is compiled against libcups, then printcap = cups
 Example: \fBprint command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s\fR
 
 
-.TP
-printer (S)
-Synonym for \fI printer name\fR\&.
-
-
 .TP
 printer admin (S)
 This is a list of users that can do anything to printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC (usually using a NT workstation)\&. Note that the root user always has admin rights\&.
@@ -5163,6 +5171,11 @@ Default: \fBnone (but may be \fBlp\fR on many systems)\fR
 Example: \fBprinter name = laserwriter\fR
 
 
+.TP
+printer (S)
+Synonym for \fI printer name\fR\&.
+
+
 .TP
 printing (S)
 This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted on your system\&. It also affects the default values for the \fIprint command\fR, \fIlpq command\fR, \fIlppause command \fR, \fIlpresume command\fR, and \fIlprm command\fR if specified in the [global] section\&.
@@ -5400,16 +5413,6 @@ The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 2 is removed by setting \fI
 Default: \fBrestrict anonymous = 0\fR
 
 
-.TP
-root (G)
-Synonym for \fIroot directory"\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-root dir (G)
-Synonym for \fIroot directory"\fR\&.
-
-
 .TP
 root directory (G)
 The server will \fBchroot()\fR (i\&.e\&. Change its root directory) to this directory on startup\&. This is not strictly necessary for secure operation\&. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries\&. It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use "\&.\&." in file names to access other directories (depending on the setting of the \fIwide links\fR parameter)\&.
@@ -5424,6 +5427,11 @@ Default: \fBroot directory = /\fR
 Example: \fBroot directory = /homes/smb\fR
 
 
+.TP
+root dir (G)
+Synonym for \fIroot directory"\fR\&.
+
+
 .TP
 root postexec (S)
 This is the same as the \fIpostexec\fR parameter except that the command is run as root\&. This is useful for unmounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed\&.
@@ -5435,6 +5443,17 @@ See also \fI postexec\fR\&.
 Default: \fBroot postexec = \fR
 
 
+.TP
+root preexec close (S)
+This is the same as the \fIpreexec close \fR parameter except that the command is run as root\&.
+
+
+See also \fI preexec\fR and \fIpreexec close\fR\&.
+
+
+Default: \fBroot preexec close = no\fR
+
+
 .TP
 root preexec (S)
 This is the same as the \fIpreexec\fR parameter except that the command is run as root\&. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a connection is opened\&.
@@ -5447,14 +5466,31 @@ Default: \fBroot preexec = \fR
 
 
 .TP
-root preexec close (S)
-This is the same as the \fIpreexec close \fR parameter except that the command is run as root\&.
+root (G)
+Synonym for \fIroot directory"\fR\&.
 
 
-See also \fI preexec\fR and \fIpreexec close\fR\&.
+.TP
+security mask (S)
+This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box\&.
 
 
-Default: \fBroot preexec close = no\fR
+This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in this mask from being modified\&. Essentially, zero bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change\&.
+
+
+If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file\&.
+
+
+\fBNote\fR that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it set to \fB0777\fR\&.
+
+
+See also the \fIforce directory security mode\fR, \fIdirectory security mask\fR, \fIforce security mode\fR parameters\&.
+
+
+Default: \fBsecurity mask = 0777\fR
+
+
+Example: \fBsecurity mask = 0770\fR
 
 
 .TP
@@ -5468,7 +5504,7 @@ The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to protocol negotiations with
 The default is \fBsecurity = user\fR, as this is the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and Windows NT\&.
 
 
-The alternatives are \fBsecurity = share\fR, \fBsecurity = server\fR or \fBsecurity = domain \fR\&.
+The alternatives are \fBsecurity = share\fR, \fBsecurity = server\fR, \fBsecurity = domain \fR, or \fBsecurity = ads\fR\&.
 
 
 In versions of Samba prior to 2\&.0\&.0, the default was \fBsecurity = share\fR mainly because that was the only option at one stage\&.
@@ -5601,29 +5637,6 @@ Default: \fBsecurity = USER\fR
 Example: \fBsecurity = DOMAIN\fR
 
 
-.TP
-security mask (S)
-This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box\&.
-
-
-This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in this mask from being modified\&. Essentially, zero bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change\&.
-
-
-If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it set to \fB0777\fR\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIforce directory security mode\fR, \fIdirectory security mask\fR, \fIforce security mode\fR parameters\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBsecurity mask = 0777\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBsecurity mask = 0770\fR
-
-
 .TP
 server schannel (G)
 This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel\&. \fIserver schannel = no\fR does not offer the schannel, \fIserver schannel = auto\fR offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and \fIserver schannel = yes\fR denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel\&. This is only the case for Windows NT4 before SP4\&.
@@ -5964,22 +5977,22 @@ Default: \fBsync always = no\fR
 
 
 .TP
-syslog (G)
-This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels\&. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog \fBLOG_ERR\fR, debug level one maps onto \fBLOG_WARNING\fR, debug level two maps onto \fBLOG_NOTICE\fR, debug level three maps onto LOG_INFO\&. All higher levels are mapped to \fB LOG_DEBUG\fR\&.
+syslog only (G)
+If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to the debug log files\&.
 
 
-This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages to syslog\&. Only messages with debug level less than this value will be sent to syslog\&.
+Default: \fBsyslog only = no\fR
 
 
-Default: \fBsyslog = 1\fR
+.TP
+syslog (G)
+This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels\&. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog \fBLOG_ERR\fR, debug level one maps onto \fBLOG_WARNING\fR, debug level two maps onto \fBLOG_NOTICE\fR, debug level three maps onto LOG_INFO\&. All higher levels are mapped to \fB LOG_DEBUG\fR\&.
 
 
-.TP
-syslog only (G)
-If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to the debug log files\&.
+This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages to syslog\&. Only messages with debug level less than this value will be sent to syslog\&.
 
 
-Default: \fBsyslog only = no\fR
+Default: \fBsyslog = 1\fR
 
 
 .TP
@@ -6030,17 +6043,6 @@ timestamp logs (G)
 Synonym for \fI debug timestamp\fR\&.
 
 
-.TP
-total print jobs (G)
-This parameter accepts an integer value which defines a limit on the maximum number of print jobs that will be accepted system wide at any given time\&. If a print job is submitted by a client which will exceed this number, then \fBsmbd\fR(8) will return an error indicating that no space is available on the server\&. The default value of 0 means that no such limit exists\&. This parameter can be used to prevent a server from exceeding its capacity and is designed as a printing throttle\&. See also \fImax print jobs\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBtotal print jobs = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBtotal print jobs = 5000\fR
-
-
 .TP
 unicode (G)
 Specifies whether Samba should try to use unicode on the wire by default\&. Note: This does NOT mean that samba will assume that the unix machine uses unicode!
@@ -6118,49 +6120,6 @@ This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can depend on mma
 Default: \fBuse mmap = yes\fR
 
 
-.TP
-user (S)
-Synonym for \fIusername\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-username (S)
-Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against each username in turn (left to right)\&.
-
-
-The \fIusername\fR line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply its own username\&. This is the case for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg usernames to UNIX usernames\&. In both these cases you may also be better using the \\\\server\\share%user syntax instead\&.
-
-
-The \fIusername\fR line is not a great solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate the supplied password against each of the usernames in the \fIusername\fR line in turn\&. This is slow and a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords\&. You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter unwisely\&.
-
-
-Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security\&. This parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the supplied password\&. Users can login as whoever they please and they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a telnet session\&. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, so they cannot do anything that user cannot do\&.
-
-
-To restrict a service to a particular set of users you can use the \fIvalid users \fR parameter\&.
-
-
-If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name\&.
-
-
-If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name\&.
-
-
-If any of the usernames begin with a '&' then the name will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list of all users in the netgroup group of that name\&.
-
-
-Note that searching though a groups database can take quite some time, and some clients may time out during the search\&.
-
-
-See the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION for more information on how this parameter determines access to the services\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBThe guest account if a guest service, else .\fR
-
-
-Examples:\fBusername = fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup\fR
-
-
 .TP
 username level (G)
 This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username\&. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the username is not found on the UNIX machine\&.
@@ -6242,38 +6201,67 @@ Example: \fBusername map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map\fR
 
 
 .TP
-users (S)
-Synonym for \fI username\fR\&.
+username (S)
+Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against each username in turn (left to right)\&.
 
 
-.TP
-use sendfile (S)
-If this parameter is \fByes\fR, and Samba was built with the --with-sendfile-support option, and the underlying operating system supports sendfile system call, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that are exclusively oplocked\&. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU's and cause Samba to be faster\&. This is off by default as it's effects are unknown as yet\&.
+The \fIusername\fR line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply its own username\&. This is the case for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg usernames to UNIX usernames\&. In both these cases you may also be better using the \\\\server\\share%user syntax instead\&.
 
 
-Default: \fBuse sendfile = no\fR
+The \fIusername\fR line is not a great solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate the supplied password against each of the usernames in the \fIusername\fR line in turn\&. This is slow and a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords\&. You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter unwisely\&.
+
+
+Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security\&. This parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the supplied password\&. Users can login as whoever they please and they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a telnet session\&. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, so they cannot do anything that user cannot do\&.
+
+
+To restrict a service to a particular set of users you can use the \fIvalid users \fR parameter\&.
+
+
+If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name\&.
+
+
+If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name\&.
+
+
+If any of the usernames begin with a '&' then the name will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list of all users in the netgroup group of that name\&.
+
+
+Note that searching though a groups database can take quite some time, and some clients may time out during the search\&.
+
+
+See the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION for more information on how this parameter determines access to the services\&.
+
+
+Default: \fBThe guest account if a guest service, else .\fR
+
+
+Examples:\fBusername = fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup\fR
 
 
 .TP
-use spnego (G)
-This variable controls controls whether samba will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism\&. Unless further issues are discovered with our SPNEGO implementation, there is no reason this should ever be disabled\&.
+users (S)
+Synonym for \fI username\fR\&.
 
 
-Default: \fBuse spnego = yes\fR
+.TP
+user (S)
+Synonym for \fIusername\fR\&.
 
 
 .TP
-utmp (G)
-This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option \fB --with-utmp\fR\&. If set to \fByes\fR then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a connection is made to a Samba server\&. Sites may use this to record the user connecting to a Samba share\&.
+use sendfile (S)
+If this parameter is \fByes\fR, and the underlying operating system supports sendfile system call, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that are exclusively oplocked\&. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU's and cause Samba to be faster\&.
 
 
-Due to the requirements of the utmp record, we are required to create a unique identifier for the incoming user\&. Enabling this option creates an n^2 algorithm to find this number\&. This may impede performance on large installations\&.
+Default: \fBuse sendfile = no\fR
 
 
-See also the \fI utmp directory\fR parameter\&.
+.TP
+use spnego (G)
+This variable controls controls whether samba will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism\&. Unless further issues are discovered with our SPNEGO implementation, there is no reason this should ever be disabled\&.
 
 
-Default: \fButmp = no\fR
+Default: \fBuse spnego = yes\fR
 
 
 .TP
@@ -6288,14 +6276,17 @@ Example: \fButmp directory = /var/run/utmp\fR
 
 
 .TP
--valid (S)
-This parameter indicates whether a share is valid and thus can be used\&. When this parameter is set to false, the share will be in no way visible nor accessible\&.
+utmp (G)
+This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option \fB --with-utmp\fR\&. If set to \fByes\fR then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a connection is made to a Samba server\&. Sites may use this to record the user connecting to a Samba share\&.
 
 
-This option should not be used by regular users but might be of help to developers\&. Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted\&.
+Due to the requirements of the utmp record, we are required to create a unique identifier for the incoming user\&. Enabling this option creates an n^2 algorithm to find this number\&. This may impede performance on large installations\&.
 
 
-Default: \fBTrue\fR
+See also the \fI utmp directory\fR parameter\&.
+
+
+Default: \fButmp = no\fR
 
 
 .TP
@@ -6318,6 +6309,17 @@ Default: \fBNo valid users list (anyone can login) \fR
 Example: \fBvalid users = greg, @pcusers\fR
 
 
+.TP
+-valid (S)
+This parameter indicates whether a share is valid and thus can be used\&. When this parameter is set to false, the share will be in no way visible nor accessible\&.
+
+
+This option should not be used by regular users but might be of help to developers\&. Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted\&.
+
+
+Default: \fBTrue\fR
+
+
 .TP
 veto files (S)
 This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible\&. Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry\&. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards\&.
@@ -6370,13 +6372,17 @@ Example: \fBveto oplock files = /*.SEM/\fR
 
 
 .TP
-vfs object (S)
-Synonym for \fIvfs objects\fR \&.
+vfs objects (S)
+This parameter specifies the backend module names which are used for Samba VFS I/O operations\&. By default, normal disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded with one or more VFS objects\&.
 
 
-.TP
-vfs objects (S)
-This parameter specifies the backend names which are used for Samba VFS I/O operations\&. By default, normal disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded with one or more VFS objects\&.
+Options for a given VFS module are specified one per line smb\&.conf perfaced by the module name and a colon (:)\&. Such as
+
+
+foo:bar=biddle
+
+
+where 'foo' is the name of VFS module, 'bar' is a parameter supported by ;foo;, and 'biddle' is the value of the option 'bar'\&. Refer to the manpage for a given VFS modules regarding the options supported by that module\&.
 
 
 Default: \fBno value\fR
@@ -6385,6 +6391,11 @@ Default: \fBno value\fR
 Example: \fBvfs objects = extd_audit recycle\fR
 
 
+.TP
+vfs object (S)
+Synonym for \fIvfs objects\fR \&.
+
+
 .TP
 volume (S)
 This allows you to override the volume label returned for a share\&. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a particular volume label\&.
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbcacls.1 b/docs/manpages/smbcacls.1
index 9df06dff9b..cb9fcfb884 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smbcacls.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/smbcacls.1
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbclient.1 b/docs/manpages/smbclient.1
index 3f5718a2fa..167447b2b9 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smbclient.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/smbclient.1
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the co
 
 .TP
 -n 
-This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fINetBIOS name\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&.
+This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fInetbios name\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Set the SMB domain of the username\&. This overrides the default domain which is
 
 .TP
 -O socket options
-TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) manual page for the list of valid options\&.
+TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR manual page for the list of valid options\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbcontrol.1 b/docs/manpages/smbcontrol.1
index 718e7d7b1c..cec003a672 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smbcontrol.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/smbcontrol.1
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Print a summary of command line options\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbcquotas.1 b/docs/manpages/smbcquotas.1
index e8288977f8..e270fe3b4a 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smbcquotas.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/smbcquotas.1
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbd.8 b/docs/manpages/smbd.8
index c7c0fac777..07b563af5c 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smbd.8
+++ b/docs/manpages/smbd.8
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ This parameter is not normally specified except in the above situation\&.
 
 .TP
 \fI/etc/inetd\&.conf\fR
-If the server is to be run by the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon\&. See the "How to Install and Test SAMBA" document for details\&.
+If the server is to be run by the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -142,12 +142,12 @@ If the server is to be run by the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, this file must contai
 or whatever initialization script your system uses)\&.
 
 
-If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server\&. See the "How to Install and Test SAMBA" document for details\&.
+If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server\&.
 
 
 .TP
 \fI/etc/services\fR
-If running the server via the meta-daemon \fBinetd\fR, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&. See the "How to Install and Test SAMBA" document for details\&.
+If running the server via the meta-daemon \fBinetd\fR, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ If no printer name is specified to printable services, most systems will use the
 .SH "PAM INTERACTION"
 
 .PP
-Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext password), for account checking (is this account disabled?) and for session management\&. The degree too which samba supports PAM is restricted by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the \fIobey pam restricions\fR  \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) paramater\&. When this is set, the following restrictions apply:
+Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext password), for account checking (is this account disabled?) and for session management\&. The degree too which samba supports PAM is restricted by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the \fIobey pam restrictions\fR  \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) paramater\&. When this is set, the following restrictions apply:
 
 .TP 3
 \(bu
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.8 b/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.8
index a7973871c4..e0c8ca5109 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.8
+++ b/docs/manpages/smbpasswd.8
@@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ This specifies the username for all of the \fBroot only\fR options to operate on
 Since \fBsmbpasswd\fR works in client-server mode communicating with a local smbd for a non-root user then the smbd daemon must be running for this to work\&. A common problem is to add a restriction to the hosts that may access the \fB smbd\fR running on the local machine by specifying either \fIallow hosts\fR or \fIdeny hosts\fR entry in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file and neglecting to allow "localhost" access to the smbd\&.
 
 .PP
-In addition, the smbpasswd command is only useful if Samba has been set up to use encrypted passwords\&. See the document "LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba" in the docs directory for details on how to do this\&.
+In addition, the smbpasswd command is only useful if Samba has been set up to use encrypted passwords\&.
 
 .SH "VERSION"
 
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbsh.1 b/docs/manpages/smbsh.1
index 0e2c4a3a85..0788237aca 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smbsh.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/smbsh.1
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ This option allows the user to set the directory prefix for SMB access\&. The de
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -87,10 +87,10 @@ The options are: "lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast"\&. They cause names to be
 
 \fBbcast\fR: Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter\&. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet\&.
 
-If this parameter is not set then the name resolve order defined in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file parameter (\fIname resolve order\fR) will be used\&.
+If this parameter is not set then the name resolve order defined in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file parameter (\fIname resolve order\fR) will be used\&.
 
 
-The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast\&. Without this parameter or any entry in the \fIname resolve order \fR parameter of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file, the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order\&.
+The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast\&. Without this parameter or any entry in the \fIname resolve order\fR parameter of the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file, the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbstatus.1 b/docs/manpages/smbstatus.1
index 7e349dcd19..21b05a2429 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smbstatus.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/smbstatus.1
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/smbtree.1 b/docs/manpages/smbtree.1
index 0cc984c24a..84c2399c77 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/smbtree.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/smbtree.1
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/swat.8 b/docs/manpages/swat.8
index 36d855e725..26e5376bf6 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/swat.8
+++ b/docs/manpages/swat.8
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/vfstest.1 b/docs/manpages/vfstest.1
index a6d01fba57..3400c6b570 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/vfstest.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/vfstest.1
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/wbinfo.1 b/docs/manpages/wbinfo.1
index 9bbecb29a4..6c5ca93e19 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/wbinfo.1
+++ b/docs/manpages/wbinfo.1
@@ -23,9 +23,8 @@ wbinfo \- Query information from winbind daemon
 .SH "SYNOPSIS"
 
 .nf
-\fBwbinfo\fR [-u] [-g] [-N netbios-name] [-I ip] [-n name] [-s sid] [-U uid] [-G gid]
-       [-S sid] [-Y sid] [-t] [-m] [--sequence] [-r user] [-a user%password]
-       [--set-auth-user user%password] [--get-auth-user] [-p]
+\fBwbinfo\fR [-a user%password] [-c username] [-C groupname] [--domain domain] [-I ip] [-s sid] [-u] [-U uid] [-g] [--get-auth-user] [-G gid] [-m] [-n name] [-N netbios-name] [-o user:group] [-O user:group] [-p] [-r user] [--set-auth-user user%password] [--sequence] [-S sid] [-t] [-x username] [-X groupname] [-Y sid]
+      
 .fi
 
 .SH "DESCRIPTION"
@@ -42,8 +41,23 @@ The \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon must be configured and running for the \fBwbinfo\fR
 .SH "OPTIONS"
 
 .TP
--u
-This option will list all users available in the Windows NT domain for which the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon is operating in\&. Users in all trusted domains will also be listed\&. Note that this operation does not assign user ids to any users that have not already been seen by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) \&.
+-a username%password
+Attempt to authenticate a user via winbindd\&. This checks both authenticaion methods and reports its results\&.
+
+
+.TP
+-c user
+Create a local winbind user\&.
+
+
+.TP
+-C group
+Create a local winbindd group\&.
+
+
+.TP
+--domain name
+This parameter sets the domain on which any specified operations will performed\&. If special domain name '\&.' is used to represent the current domain to which winbindd belongs\&. Currently only the \fB--sequence\fR, \fB-u\fR, and \fB-g\fR options honor this parameter\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -52,8 +66,13 @@ This option will list all groups available in the Windows NT domain for which th
 
 
 .TP
--N name
-The \fI-N\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) to query the WINS server for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name specified by the \fIname\fR parameter\&.
+--get-auth-user
+Print username and password used by winbindd during session setup to a domain controller\&. Username and password can be set using '-A'\&. Only available for root\&.
+
+
+.TP
+-G gid
+Try to convert a UNIX group id to a Windows NT SID\&. If the gid specified does not refer to one within the idmap gid range then the operation will fail\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -61,44 +80,49 @@ The \fI-N\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) to query the WINS server for the I
 The \fI-I\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) to send a node status request to get the NetBIOS name associated with the IP address specified by the \fIip\fR parameter\&.
 
 
+.TP
+-m
+Produce a list of domains trusted by the Windows NT server \fBwinbindd\fR(8) contacts when resolving names\&. This list does not include the Windows NT domain the server is a Primary Domain Controller for\&.
+
+
 .TP
 -n name
 The \fI-n\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) for the SID associated with the name specified\&. Domain names can be specified before the user name by using the winbind separator character\&. For example CWDOM1/Administrator refers to the Administrator user in the domain CWDOM1\&. If no domain is specified then the domain used is the one specified in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) \fIworkgroup \fR parameter\&.
 
 
 .TP
--s sid
-Use \fI-s\fR to resolve a SID to a name\&. This is the inverse of the \fI-n \fR option above\&. SIDs must be specified as ASCII strings in the traditional Microsoft format\&. For example, S-1-5-21-1455342024-3071081365-2475485837-500\&.
+-N name
+The \fI-N\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) to query the WINS server for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name specified by the \fIname\fR parameter\&.
 
 
 .TP
--U uid
-Try to convert a UNIX user id to a Windows NT SID\&. If the uid specified does not refer to one within the winbind uid range then the operation will fail\&.
+-o user:group
+Add a winbindd local group as a secondary group for the specified winbindd local user\&.
 
 
 .TP
--G gid
-Try to convert a UNIX group id to a Windows NT SID\&. If the gid specified does not refer to one within the winbind gid range then the operation will fail\&.
+-O user:group
+Remove a winbindd local group as a secondary group for the specified winbindd local user\&.
 
 
 .TP
--S sid
-Convert a SID to a UNIX user id\&. If the SID does not correspond to a UNIX user mapped by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) then the operation will fail\&.
+-p
+Check whether winbindd is still alive\&. Prints out either 'succeeded' or 'failed'\&.
 
 
 .TP
--Y sid
-Convert a SID to a UNIX group id\&. If the SID does not correspond to a UNIX group mapped by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) then the operation will fail\&.
+-r username
+Try to obtain the list of UNIX group ids to which the user belongs\&. This only works for users defined on a Domain Controller\&.
 
 
 .TP
--t
-Verify that the workstation trust account created when the Samba server is added to the Windows NT domain is working\&.
+-s sid
+Use \fI-s\fR to resolve a SID to a name\&. This is the inverse of the \fI-n \fR option above\&. SIDs must be specified as ASCII strings in the traditional Microsoft format\&. For example, S-1-5-21-1455342024-3071081365-2475485837-500\&.
 
 
 .TP
--m
-Produce a list of domains trusted by the Windows NT server \fBwinbindd\fR(8) contacts when resolving names\&. This list does not include the Windows NT domain the server is a Primary Domain Controller for\&.
+--set-auth-user username%password
+Store username and password used by winbindd during session setup to a domain controller\&. This enables winbindd to operate in a Windows 2000 domain with Restrict Anonymous turned on (a\&.k\&.a\&. Permissions compatiable with Windows 2000 servers only)\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -107,28 +131,38 @@ Show sequence numbers of all known domains
 
 
 .TP
--r username
-Try to obtain the list of UNIX group ids to which the user belongs\&. This only works for users defined on a Domain Controller\&.
+-S sid
+Convert a SID to a UNIX user id\&. If the SID does not correspond to a UNIX user mapped by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) then the operation will fail\&.
 
 
 .TP
--a username%password
-Attempt to authenticate a user via winbindd\&. This checks both authenticaion methods and reports its results\&.
+-t
+Verify that the workstation trust account created when the Samba server is added to the Windows NT domain is working\&.
 
 
 .TP
---set-auth-user username%password
-Store username and password used by winbindd during session setup to a domain controller\&. This enables winbindd to operate in a Windows 2000 domain with Restrict Anonymous turned on (a\&.k\&.a\&. Permissions compatiable with Windows 2000 servers only)\&.
+-u
+This option will list all users available in the Windows NT domain for which the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon is operating in\&. Users in all trusted domains will also be listed\&. Note that this operation does not assign user ids to any users that have not already been seen by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) \&.
 
 
 .TP
---get-auth-user
-Print username and password used by winbindd during session setup to a domain controller\&. Username and password can be set using '-A'\&. Only available for root\&.
+-U uid
+Try to convert a UNIX user id to a Windows NT SID\&. If the uid specified does not refer to one within the idmap uid range then the operation will fail\&.
 
 
 .TP
--p
-Check whether winbindd is still alive\&. Prints out either 'succeeded' or 'failed'\&.
+-x user
+Delete an existing local winbind user\&.
+
+
+.TP
+-X group
+Delete an existing local winbindd group\&.
+
+
+.TP
+-Y sid
+Convert a SID to a UNIX group id\&. If the SID does not correspond to a UNIX group mapped by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) then the operation will fail\&.
 
 
 .TP
diff --git a/docs/manpages/winbindd.8 b/docs/manpages/winbindd.8
index 71322decbe..f0368014c7 100644
--- a/docs/manpages/winbindd.8
+++ b/docs/manpages/winbindd.8
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Prints the version number for \fBsmbd\fR\&.
 
 .TP
 -s 
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fI smb\&.conf(5)\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
+The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the
 Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
 
 
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the log level parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf(5)\fR file\&.
+Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
 
 
 .TP
@@ -153,11 +153,11 @@ Configuration of the \fBwinbindd\fR daemon is done through configuration paramet
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIwinbind uid\fR
+\fIidmap uid\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
-\fIwinbind gid\fR
+\fIidmap gid\fR
 
 .TP
 \(bu
@@ -240,8 +240,8 @@ Finally, setup a \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) containing directives like the following:
         winbind cache time = 10
         template shell = /bin/bash
         template homedir = /home/%D/%U
-        winbind uid = 10000-20000
-        winbind gid = 10000-20000
+        idmap uid = 10000-20000
+        idmap gid = 10000-20000
         workgroup = DOMAIN
         security = domain
         password server = *
-- 
cgit